'  •  -e  w  1  ■ 1  .  r.^  -- ’  -  •• 

. 

■V  '  .  .  >  ,  /  S  +1  s 

.  1  >:<■,  •  •(  ^  \  •  . 

. 

< 

./  -  -  v  ■'  *  .  ,  ■  *  ■' 

i .v  ,il  ss  oTy  .  ...  i  *v  .  '  \  •.  \ 

v 

■ 


,?7  :l 


•y  .  -  „  ,.'s;  ■  i\  ,•  \  v 

•  t  ■  ■  . 

•  /  •  y  •  ‘  ,  c'.  ' 

. 

. 

. 

■■  ■  .  ■  t  '  .  ,.v  I 

- 

*  V  .  '  '  .  '  ‘ 

‘ 

' 

.  h  <  . .  1  ■  V  •  ’•  *  *  .x.  *•  .  .  -  - 

. 

' 

7 

!  •  •  ’  )  I  /  ‘  '  V  ■'  i  .»<  '  :  j 


■  i 


'■)  ■ 


.  \  XV  V  Y'  ,  K  '  ..  ,  *  (W  •  •  ... 

■ 

'  '  ~  .  J  1  V  -  , 

. 

r  ."  '  ■■  '  '  ,/•  .  i'x 

- 

•'  .  y  -  .  -■  ?  v  -  ■  %  >r  '  ■  ’  y,-  y 

•  K  •  . 

7  ‘  '*  .  r  \  -  _  ^  i  '  .  \  '  ,  •  '  * 

-v.  *  •  K  ,  J  J  /.  ,  '  i  V  v  ,  .  .  .  . 

■ 

i 

(  •  •  ■ 


y  ry  •  v 
;  .  •*?  ■ 
y 

'...  (  V  . 


' 

v 

' 

■  ■  -  .  -  i  •  •  ■ 

■  ■ 

•  i-  V..  .* 

. 

r  •  »  -  -  1  V  .  •  *  S  \  •* 

, 

'  . 

,  s .  y .  •  y  V  <  ■ 

1  y  .  7  :  . 

\,C:  '  r 

.  7  <  -  .  ■  ’  .  •-*  ■  ■  ;  .■ 


-  ^ 

yy  v 


'•  *1  .  -  .  *»:  ;  ;  -  •  -v  y  'V 

-  -  > 

. 

,  -  V  ;  •  ,  ■ 

1  /  :  .  • 

fiP  ' 

; 

' 

' 

' 

.  * 

:  -  ,«•  ■  ‘  v'  .  .  '  "  v. .  ,.y  .v  '  ■ 

■ 

. 

1  .  .  ■  ■  -t 

■ 


'  •  '  , 

■I 

-  >  rj  *v. 

.  *  •’  V '  .  ,  ■  r  ’i 

r.  '  ■  •  •  <  •> 


■  .)  '*  j*  • 

\v» 


,  .  -  ...  v.  , 

- 

-  •  •>?  l.  /. a . f  , 

r\- '  1  ■  'V-  C  A  ^  '  /  1  • 

•  , 

.  •  ■  >•  •  t.  ;•  . 

-  :  .  .  •  >.  /- 


I  -ii 


;  >■» 


j  /  ■" 


'•c: 


v 


\ 

■ 


s> ' 

'  -  V  V  .  •  *  '  , 

-  . 


A 


PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION 

TO 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION 


BY 

THOMAS  KERCHEVER  ARNOLD,  M.  A. 

RECTOR  OF  LYNDON, 

AND  LATE  FELLOW  OF  TRINITY  COLLEGE,  CAMBRIDGE. 

CAREFULLY  REVISED  AND  CORRECTED 

BY  REV.  J.  A.  SPENCER,  A .  M , 


FOURTEENTH  AMERICAN  EDITION- 


BOSTON  COLLEGE  LIBRARY 
CHESTNUT  HILL,  MASS. 

NEW-YORK : 

D.  APPLETON  &  COMPANY, 


8  46  &  848  BROADWAY. 
M.DCCO.LVI. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1846, 

By  D.  APPLETON  &  COMPANY, 

In  the  Clerk  s  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Southern  District  of  ft  Yorl 


155469 


EXPLANATION  OF  ABBREVIATIONS,  <Scc. 


I).,  G.,  H.,  K.,  R.,  Z.,  stand  respectively  for  Doderlein ,  Grotefend,  Habiehk 
Kruger,  Ramskorn,  and  Zumpt. 

Numerals  above  the  line  refer  to  the  Table  of  Differences ;  if  followed  Dy  a 
curve,  to  the  Cautions. 

An  accent  after  a  word,  thus  (parent')  shows  it  to  be  somewhat  emphatic. 

Words  printed  in  italics  in  the  Exercises  are  meant  to  call  attention  to  some¬ 
thing  that  has  been  said  respecting  them,  or  to  some  point  which  should  be 
carefully  attended  to  in  connection  with  them. 

Two  or  more  words  connected  together  by  hyphens  show  that  they  are  to  b« 
translated  into  Latin  by  one  word ;  as  “  branches-of-learning,”  doctrinae  ;  “  ad¬ 
mirably-skilled.”  perit  issimus,  &c. 


PREFACE. 


The  present  volume  contains  the  First  Part  of  Mr.  Arnold’s 
Practical  Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composition  ;  the  introduc¬ 
tory  portion  of  the  Second  Part  (as  published  by  the  Author)  on 
the  Order  of  Words  in  Latin ;  and  nearly  all  the  Longer  Latin 
Exercises,  Part  L,  a  work  which  was  published  separately,  but 
intended  to  follow  immediately  in  order  the  use  of  the  First  Part 
of  the  Prose  Composition. 

This  arrangement  was  adopted  for  the  purpose  of  embracing 
as  much  valuable  matter  as  possible  within  the  compass  of  a  rea¬ 
sonably  sized  volume.  The  First  Part  is  complete  in  itself,  and, 
so  far  as  it  goes,  admirably  fulfils  the  design  of  the  author ;  yet, 
as  the  Exercises  consist  of  single,  short,  and  unconnected  sen¬ 
tences,  it  was  deemed  advisable  to  introduce  other  and  longer  Ex¬ 
ercises,  in  which  the  student  should  be  taught  practically  how  to 
arrange  his  ideas  in  passages  of  considerable  length,  and  in  which 
are  involved  most  of  the  minutiae  and  intricacies  of  the  Latin 
idiom.  For  this  purpose  Part  II.  of  the  present  volume  is  most 
excellently  adapted.  The  work  on  the  Latin  Particles,  which 
was  published  by  the  author  as  the  Second  Part  of  the  Practical 
Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composition,  is  a  production  of  much 
value  and  importance,  and  is  devoted  to  a  lengthened  and  full  elu¬ 
cidation  of  the  difficulties  which  stand  in  the  way  of  one  who 
would  become  a  thorough  and  accomplished  Latinist.  It  is  in¬ 
tended — should  the  classical  public  demand  it — to  issue  this  work 
at  an  early  date. 

The  principal  advantages  which  the  present  volume  offers  over 
works  of  a  similar  kind  are  these.  It  contains  a  copious  but  con¬ 
cise  illustration  of  Latin  Synonymes  drawn  mainly  from  the 
standard  treatise  of  Doderlein  on  this  subject ;  there  is,  through- 


PREFACE. 


viii 

out,  a  careful  and  precise  notation  of  the  Differences  of  Idiom 
between  the  Latin  and  English  languages ;  a  frequent  calling 
the  attention  of  the  student,  by  way  of  Cautions,  to  nice  points 
which  might  otherwise  escape  his  notice ;  and  a  constant  repeti¬ 
tion,  under  new  forms  and  combined  with  new  matter,  of  what  has 
gone  before — the  iterum  iterumque  of  Virgil — till  both  the  words 
and  expressions,  with  their  peculiarities,  are  fastened  in  the  mem¬ 
ory.  In  addition  to  this,  the  Exercises  are  wholly  in  English, 
that  is,  the  English  is  given  to  be  turned  into  the  corresponding 
Latin  ;  and  full  and  very  carefully  arranged  Vocabularies  pre¬ 
cede  or  accompany  each  Exercise.  This  plan  is  far  superior— 
in  the  Editor’s  judgment — to  the  common  mode  of  giving  all  the 
Latin  words  in  the  Latin  order,  simply  requiring  that  the  sentence 
be  made  grammatically  correct  by  the  use  of  the  right  cases, 
moods,  tenses,  &c.  By  such  a  course  the  pupil  is  not  obliged  to 
study  and  exercise  his  powers  of  reflection  and  observation  to  any 
great  extent ;  but  only  to  be  tolerably  well  acquainted  with  gram¬ 
matical  forms  and  usages  ;  he  learns  to  expect  the  helps  of  the 
Latin  words ;  he  pays  little  regard  to  the  peculiarities  of  the  Latin 
order ;  and  is  very  apt  to  be  sadly  puzzled  when  an  English  sen¬ 
tence  or  passage  is  given  to  him  to  be  turned  into  Latin.  On  the 
contrary,  by  using  Mr.  Arnold’s  method  the  student  is  compelled 
to  examine  well  and  constantly  the  mode  which  the  Romans  had 
of  expressing  their  ideas,  and  in  what  respect  it  differs  from  our 
own,  as  well  in  regard  to  the  choice  as  the  collocation  of  words 
and  sentences;  and  almost  of  necessity  his  memory  has  to  be 
stored  with  a  large  supply  of  words  and  phrases  for  continual 
use. 

Great  care  has  been  bestowed  upon  the  volume,  for  the  purpose 
of  securing  accuracy  and  clearness  of  arrangement ;  and  it  is 
trusted  that  it  will  not  be  found  inferior  to  any  issues  of  the 
American  press. 


New-York,  March  1 6th,  1846. 


J.  A.  S. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PART  I. 


fags. 


Introductory  Remarks  on  the  Arrangement  jf  Words 

in  a  Latin  Sentence .  13 

I.  S  1.  Nominative  Case  and  Verb .  16 

'  II.  2.  Accusative  with  Infinitive .  19 

3.  Accusative  with  Infinitive  continued .  21 

III.  4.  Agreement  of  Adjective  with  Substantive .  22 

IV.  5.  The  Relative .  24 

6.  Infinitive  used  substantively .  27 

7.  Relative  continued.  (Fundamental  Rule  for  the  employment 

of  subjunctive  tenses.) .  29 

8.  Relative  continued .  31 

9.  Relative  continued.  Rel.  with  Superlative:  ‘The  first  who’  ..  32 

V.  10.  Ut  ne,  expressing  a  purpose . .  34 

11.  Ut  expressing  &  consequence.  Quo.  Ne 'prohibitive .  35 


12.  English  infinitive  translated  by  ut  with  subj.  ) 

[Vocabulary  of  Verbs  followed  by  ut .]  > 

13.  Ut,  &c.  continued.  ‘That  nobody,  &c.  > 

[Vocab.  of  Phrases  followed  by  ut.]  ) . 

14.  Quin  after  negative  sentences.  [Vocab.  of  Verbs,  &c.  followed 


by  quin.] .  41 

15.  Quominus.  [Vocab.  of  Verbs  followed  by  quominus.] .  43 

VI.  16.  Interrogative  Sentences . * .  45 

17.  Interrogative  Words .  45 

18.  Dependent  Questions . .  46 

19.  Double  Questions.  An  in  single  questions .  47 

20.  May ,  can,  &c.  as  principal  Verbs .  49 

^11.  21.  Apposition .  52 

22.  Nominative  after  the  Verb.  Attraction  of  the  Predicate.  [Vocab. 

of  Apposition  Verbs.] . 64 

23.  Dative  after  esse . 56 


X 


CONTENTS. 


8JCC  f. 


PAGE 


VIII.  24. 

25. 

26. 

27. 

28. 
29. 

IX.  30. 

31. 

32. 


33. 


34. 
X.  35. 
36. 

XI.  37. 
38. 

XII.  39. 

XIII.  40. 
41. 

XIV.  42. 
XV.  43. 

XVI.  44. 


XVII.  45. 

46. 

47. 

XVIII.  48. 

49. 

50. 

51. 

XIX.  52. 

XX.  53. 
54. 

XXI.  55. 

56. 

57. 

YXII.  58. 
59. 


The  Genitive . 

The  Genitive  continued.  Partitives.  Genitivus  Qualitatis. 

Opus  est.  Summus  mons ,  &c.  (64) . 

The  Genitive  after  Adjectives . 

The  Genitive  continued . 

The  Genitive  continued . 

The  Genitive  continued.  Impersonals  with  gen. . 

The  Dative.  [Vocab.  of  Adjectives  with  dat.,  &c.] . 

The  Dative  continued.  [Vocab.  of  Verbs  governing  the  dat.] 
The  Dative  continued.  [Vocab.  of  Compounds  of  esse.J-»  •  ) 

[Vocab.  of  Verbs  that  take<7a£.  or  acc.  84.] . > 

The  Dative  continued.  Verbs  with  two  constructions  - ••  • 
[Vocab.  of  Verbs  that  take  dat.  of  person  with  acc.  of 
thing ;  or  acc.  of  pers.  with  abl.  of  thing. — Vocab.  of  > 
Verbs  with  different  constructions  in  different  mean¬ 
ings.]  . 

Verba  that  take  a  second  Dative.  Est  mihi  nomen . 

[Vocab.  of  Verbs  followed  by  two  Datives.] . 

The  Accusative.  [Vocab.  of  transitive  Compounds  of  in-  > 

trans.  Verbs.] . ) 

The  Accusative  continued . 

The  Ablative . 

The  Ablative  continued.  [Vocab.  of  Verbs  governing  the  abl.] 

The  Vocative.  Attraction  of  the  Vocative . 

The  Passive  Voice . 

The  Passive  Voice  continued . 

Time . 

Place.  Space . 

Gerunds  and  Partic.  in  dus.  [ Epistola  scribenda.] . . 

[Vocab.  of  words  following  the  constr.  of  the  proper  C 

names  of  places,  122.  J . . 

Participles.  Ablative  Absolute . 

Participles  continued.  Participles  expressing  a  purpose . 

Participles  continued.  The  Supines . 

Pronouns  . 

Pronouns  continued.  Is,  hic,  iste,  i lie . 

Pronouns  continued.  On  the  translation  of  any . 

Pronouns  continued.  On  the  prefixes  and  affixes  of  the  Inter- 

gatives  •  . . 

Comparison . 

Remarks  on  some  of  the  Tenses . 

Remarks  on  the  Tenses  continued . . . 

Forms  of  Conditional  Propositions  (435) . 

Conditional  Propositions  continued . 

Conditional  Propositions  in  dependent  sentences . 

On  Oblique  Narration . 

Oblique  Narration  continued.  Mood  in  subordinate  Clauses. 

Dependence  on  an  infinitive  . 


58 

60 

66 

69 

70 
74 
76 
79 

82 


86 


88 

89 

90 

93 

96 

99 

102 

104 

107 

110 

115 

117 

124 
126 

125 
131 
133 
137 

140 

142 

145 

149 

152 

156 

160 

162 

165 


CONTENTS. 


XI 


SECT.  PAGE. 


XXIII.  60  Qui  with  Subjunctive.  [Vocab.  of  phrases,  &c.,  with  which 

qui  takes  the  subj.] . 169 

61.  Qui  with  the  Subjunctive  continued .  171 

XXIV.  62.  Quum  with  the  Indicative . . . ^ 

[Vocab.  of  Conjunctions  that  govern  the  subj.  494.] _ \  174 

XXV.  63.  Antequam  and  Priusquam .  179 

XXVI.  64.  Dum,  donee ,  quoad ,  &c.  [Vocab.  of  Adverbs  with  gen.] _ 181 

XXVII.  65.  Quod .  183 

XXVIII.  66.  The  Roman  Calendar . 186 

XXIX.  67.  Connection  of  Propositions  by  the  Relative,  <£c .  189 

XXX.  68.  On  the  Roman  way  of  reckoning  money .  192 

69.  On  the  division  of  the  A$}  the  method  of  reckoning  fractions, 

interest ,  &c .  194 

Tables  for  Reference. 

I.  Genders . 196 

II.  Formation  of  the  Perfect  and  Supine .  197 

Table  of  Differences  of  Idiom,  &c .  202 

Questions  on  the  Cautions . 211 

Questions  on  the  Syntax . 214 


’  ,»* 


•  ' 

- 

. 


. 


A 


-  •  ' 


. 

. 

mm 


. 


' 

• 

% 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


On  the  Arrangement  of  Words  in  a  Latin  Sentence. 

1.  The  general  distinction  between  the  English  and  Latin  Grder 
is  this  : 

t  2.  OO”  In  Latin  the  governed  and  dependent  words  generally 
stand  before  the  words  on  which  they  depend ;  so  that  in  simple 
sentences,  the  verb,  when  not  particularly  emphatic ,  stands  at  the 
end  of  the  sentence. 

3.  Thus  in  simple  narrative,  after  the  conjunction  comes  the 
subject  (nom.  case) ;  then  the  governed  cases  with  adverbs  and 
expressions  of  time ,  place ,  manner ,  &c.,  and  last  of  all  the  verb. 

4.  But  if  the  verb  is  emphatic,  it  must  be  placed  earlier  in  the 
sentence. — Quod  non  dedit  fortuna,  id  non  eripit.  Mirabile 
videtur,  quod  non  rideat  haruspex,  &c.  Non  intelligunt  homines, 
quam  magnum,  vectigal  sit  parsimonia. 

For  it  must  always  be  remembered  that — 

•  5.  0^7"  The  degree  of  prominence  and  emphasis  to  be  given  to 
a  wordy  is  that  which  mainly  determines  its  position  in  the  sen¬ 
tence. — And, 

*  6.  a)  The  two  emphatic  positions  in  a  sentence  are  the  beginning  and  the  end ; 
“  by  the  former  our  attention  is  excited^  and  on  the  latter  it  rests.”  (Crom- 
bie.) 

6)  Add  to  this,  that  the  more  unusual  a  position  is  for  any  word,  the  more 
emphatic  it  is  for  that  word.  Thus,  “arbores  seret  diligens  agricola, 
quarum  adspiciet  baccam  ipse  nunquam.”  (Cic.) 

c)  A  word  that  generally  stands  close  by  another  receives  emphasis  by 
separation  from  it ;  especially  if  it  be  thus  brought  near  the  beginning  or 
end  of  a  sentence.  Voluptatem'  percepi  maximam'.  Propterea  quod 
aliud  iter  haberent  nullum'.  hEdui  equites  ad  Csesarem  omned  rever¬ 
tuntur. 

d)  Another  principle  affecting  the  position  of  words  is  the  harmonious 
arrangement  of  syllables;  the  flow  of  the  sentence. 


14 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


i 


•  7.  Genitive.  The  genitive,  whether  dependent  on  a  sub- 

stantive  or  adjective,  stands  first  if  it  be  the  more  emphatic ;  if 
not,  not.  But  it  is  rendered  more  emphatic  by  separation 
see  6,  c). 

a)  It  probably  somewhat  prefers  the  position  before  the  govern 
ing  noun,  when  that  is  not  decidedly  emphatic. 

b)  When  the  governing  substantive  has  an  adjective  with  it, 
the  order  is  generally  adj.,  gen.,  subst.  (Vera  animi  magnitudo.) 

8.  Attributive  and  its  substantive.  Of  these  the  more 
emphatic  stands  first.  But  see  6,  c). 

a.  A  very  short  precedes  a  longer  word :  hence  the  demon¬ 
stratives  usually  stand  before  their  nouns,  and  monosyllable  sub 
stantives  before  their  adjectives. 

9.  Apposition.  Here  too  the  more  emphatic  precedes :  but 
generally  the  word  in  apposition  stands  last. 

a.  This  is  particularly  the  case  with  titles,  &c.,  in  apposition  to 
proper  names . 

Q.  Mucius  Augur  ;  Agis  rex;  Pythagoras  Philosophus.  But, 
urbs  Roma  ;  though  Cyprus  insula ,  Hypanis  fuvius. 

10.  Words  dependent  on  Adjectives.  Here  too  the  more 
emphatic  precedes,  with  something  of  a  preference  for  placing 
the  dependent  words  first. 

11.  Ablative  absolute.  The  more  emphatic  first. 

12.  Infinitive  dependent  on  Verb.  The  more  emphatic  first ; 
generally  the  infinitive. 

a.  Of  two  infinitives,  the  more  emphatic  first. 

13.  Adverbs.  Generally,  immediately  before  the  words  they 
belong  to.  Quoque  immediately  after  its  word. 

14.  Words  that  modify  the  meaning  of  an  adjective  are  usually 
placed  between  it  and  the  substantive.  (Proelio  magis  ad  eventum 
secundo,  quam,  &c.) 

15.  Opposition  and  contrasted  notions. 

a)  A  repeated  word,  or  a  word  akin  to  a  word  already  used  in 
the  sentence,  is  generally  brought  as  near  to  that  word  as  possible. 
Timor  timorem  pellit.  Nulla  virtus  virtuti  contraria  est.  Virtutum 
in  alia  alius  vult  excellere.  Aliis  aliunde  est  periculum. 

b)  Of  two  contrasted  clauses  or  groups  of  words,  of  parallel 
construction,  the  order  of  the  first  is  often  reversed  in  the  second  * 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


15 


so  that  two  of  the  antithetical  words  are  as  far  apart  as  possible. 
Fragile  corpus  animus  sempiternus  movet.  Ratio  nostra  consen¬ 
tit  ;  pugnat  oratio.  Quse  me  moverunt ,  movissent  eadem  te  pro¬ 
fecto. 

#  0 Enim ,  vero,  autem ,  quoque,  quidem  (with  of  course  the 
enclitics),  cannot  be  the  first  words  of  a  clause. 


PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION 


TO 

LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION. 


L.  The  common  concords  are  taken  for  granted ;  that — 

(1.)  A  verb  agrees  with  its  nominative  case  in  number 
and  person. 

(2.)  An  adjective,  pronoun,  or  participle,  agrees  with  its 
substantive  in  gender ,  number  and  case. 

(3.)  A  transitive  verb,  whether  active  or  deponent,  takes 
after  it  an  accusative  of  the  person  or  thing  acted  upon. 

(4.)  Verbs  of  existence  (such  as  be,  become ,  turn  out } 
&c.) ;  passive  verbs  of  being  called ,  considered ,  chosen , 
&c.,  take  a  substantive  or  adjective  after  them  in  the  nomi¬ 
native  case. 

(5.)  The  thing  by  which  stands  in  the  ablative;  the 
person  by  whom,  in  the  ablative  with  the  preposition  a 
or  ab. 

(6.)  One  substantive  depending  upon  another  is  put  in 
the  genitive  case. 


*  Obs.  When  a  pronoun  is  the  nominative  case  to  a  verb,  it  is 
not  expressed  in  Latin  ;  except  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or 
particular  distinction. 

*  (a)  In  the  same  way  the  possessive  pronoun  is  seldom  expressed, 
when  there  can  be  no  doubt  as  to  whose  the  thing  is.  See  3  (a). 

•  (0)  When  there  is  any  distinction  to  be  expressed,  as,  for  instance, 
when  I  am  opposed  to  you,*  the  pronouns  must  be  expressed. 


*  The  pron.  is  expressed,  even  when  the  distinction  is  only  between  two  ac* 
tions  of  the  same  person.  Ejeci  ego  te  armatis  hominibus,  non  dejeci. 


18 


NOMINATIVE  CASE  AND  VERB. 


[§  1.  2-4. 


I. 


§  1.  Nominative  Case  and  Verb. 


2.  (ti)  When  two  or  more  nominative  cases  singular  come  to¬ 
gether,  they  take  a  plural  verb,*  which  agrees  with  the  nominative 
case  of  the  most  worthy b  person. 

( b )  The  verbs  est  and  sunt  are  often  omitted. 

3.  ( a )  Et  egoc  et  Balbus  sustulimus  manus,  Both  I  and  Balbus 

lifted  up  our  hands. 

(b)  Amici  veterrimi  optimi,  The  oldest  friends  are  the  best. 


4.  Vocabulary  1. 


And, 

et ;  que  enclitic ;  atque ; 

If, 

si. 

Both — and, 

et — et. 

Hand, 

mSnus,  us,  f. 

Sister, 

sbror,  oris,  f. 

Well, 

b6nS. 

Hunger 

fames,  is,  f. 

Seasoning,  > 

condimentum,  i.  n. 

Sauce,  ) 

• 

Army, 

exercitus,  us,  m. 

a  The  verb  is  often  however  in  the  singular,  agreeing  with  one  of  the  nomi¬ 
natives,  and  being  understood  with  the  other.  This  is  the  common  construc¬ 
tion  with  et—et;  quum — turn,  &c.,  when  both  the  nominatives  are  singular ,  and 
of  the  same  person. 

b  The  first  person  is  said  to  be  more  worthy  than  the  second,  the  second  than 
the  third. 

c  For  “  Balbus  and  /,”  the  Romans,  putting  first,  said  “  Ego  et  Balbus .” 
When  therefore  Cardinal  Wolsey  said  “ Ego  et  Rex  meus,”  he  was  a  good 
grammarian  but  bad  courtier. 

H  d  Et  joins  words  each  of  which  is  considered  independently ,  and  as  of  equal 
importance :  atque  (  =  adque)  or  ac,  which  is  an  abridged  (and  less  emphatic; 
form  of  the  same  word,  adds  a  notion  that  is,  if  anything,  of  more  importance 
than  the  preceding  one  (=  ‘and  also,’  1  and  moreover’):  que  joins  a  word 
closely  to  another,  as  an  appendage  to  it,  as  belonging  to  it,  and  often  as  forming 
one  complex  notion  with  it. 

When  et  connects  principal  clauses,  subordinate  ones  and  single  words  must 
be  connected  by  que ,  or  (if  similar  notions)  atque. 

Atque  is  used  before  vowels  or  consonants,  but  especially  before  vowels. 

Ac  is  used  before  consonants  (though  not  very  often  before  the  k  sounds) ;  but 
not  before  vowels  or  h.  Mr.  Allen  shows  that  ac  (though  very  rarely  met  with 
before g,  q)  is  not  very  uncommon  in  Cicero  before  c.  So  also  Zumpt. 


ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 


19 


§  2.  5-9.] 

War, 

A  Gaul, 

Many, 

Very  many, 

Caesar, 

To  lift  up, 

To  be  in  good  health,  > 

To  be  well,  5 

To  wage  (properly  to  carry), 
To  conquer, 


bellum,  i.  n. 

Gallus,  i  m. 
multi,  ae,  a. 
permulti,*  ae,  a. 
Caesar,  CaesSris,  m. 
tollSre,  sustul,  sublat. 

vSlere,  valu,  valit. 

gSrSre,  gess,  gest. 
vincgre,  vie,  vict. 


Exercise  1. 


5.  If  you  and  the  armyf  are-in-good-health,  it  is  well  (p.  14, 
13).  Both  you  and  Balbus  lifted  up  (your)  hands.  Both  you 
and  I  (1  Ohs.  (5)  have  waged  many'  wars.  Both  you  and  Balbus 
have  waged  very-many'  wars.  The  best'  sauce  (is  hunger.) 
The  Gauls  were  conquered  by  Csesar.  Hands  were  lifted  up 
both  by  you  and  by  Balbus.  If  you  and  your  sister  are-in-good- 
health,  it  is  well. 


II. 

§  2.  Accusative  with  Infinitive . 

6.  The  infinitive  takes  before  it  not  the  nominative,  but  the 
accusative,  s 

7.  Many  sentences  that  in  English  are  joined  to  a  verb  by  the  conjunc¬ 
tion  ‘  that f  are  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  accusative  and  infinitive. 

8.  In  turning  such  sentences  into  Latin  ‘ that*  *  must  be  omitted;  the 
English  nominative  turned  into  the  accusative;  and  the  English  verb 
into  the  infinitive  mood  of  the  same  tense. 

9.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  follows  verbs  ( sentiendi  et  decla¬ 
randi)  of  feeling,  knoicing,  wishing ,  hearing,  believing ,  thinking,  <&c. ; 
and  such  expressions  as,  it  is  certain,  manifest ,  true,  &c. 


*  *  Per  in  composition  with  an  adjective,  adds  to  it  the  mswaiin.g'  of  ‘  very? 

*  f  Exercitusque.  Que  must  always  be  appended  to  the  io  tv  r  of  the  two  words 
connected  by  it. 

*  This  idiom  is  not  uncommon  in  English,  though  far  less  common  than  in 

I -a  tin. 

“  I  ordered  him  to  be  dismissed  ”  (for  ‘  I  ordered  that  he  should  be  dismissed ’). 

“  I  saw  him  to  be  a  knave  ”  (for  ‘  I  saw  that  he  was  a  knave  ’)• 


20 


ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE.  [§  2.  10-13, 


10.  (a)  Respondeo,  placere  et  milii  locum ,  I  answer  that  the 

place  pleases  me  too. 

( b )  Respondit,  placere  et  sibi  locum,  He  answered  that  th& 

place  pleased  him  too. 

(c)  Sentimus  calere  ignem ,  nivem  esse  albam,  dulce  mei, 

We  know-by-our-senses,  that  fire  is  hot ;  that  snow  is 
white,  honey  sweet. 

11.  Vocabulary  2. 


To  answer, 

To  understand, 

To  deny, 

To  sin, 

I  remember, 

To  know-by-the-senses, 
To  injure,  offend-against, 
Law, 

Cautions. 


respondere,  respond,  respons. 
intelligere,  intellex,  intellect, 
negare,  av,  at. 
peccare,  av,  at. 

mgmini,  Imper.  memento ;  pi.  mementote, 
sentire,  sens,  sens, 
violare,  av,  at. 
lex,  legis,/. 


*  12.  [C.  i.]  0 ^7*  Him,  her,  them  (or  he,  she,  they,  when  they  are 

to  be  translated  by  the  accusative )  must  be  trans¬ 
lated  by  the  proper  case  of  sui,  when  they  and  the 
nominative  of  the  verb  stand  for  the  same  person. 

Also,  in  the  same  case,  his,  hers,  its ,  theirs , 
must  be  translated  by  suus. 

13.  (  He  says  that  it  pleases  him. 

C  He  said  that  it  pleased  him. 

In  English  the  dependent  verb  (by  a  kind  of  attraction)  assumes  the 
past  form,  when  the  verb  it  depends  on  is  in  a  past  tense. 

Hence - 

%  0^7"  [C.  ii.]  In  a  sentence  with  ‘that 5  dependent  on  a  past  tense, 

the  perfect  is  to  be  translated  by  the  present  ( and 
imperfect)  infinitive,  whenever  the  notion  expressed 
by  it  is  not  to  be  described  as  over  before  the  time  of 
the  principal  verb.h 

i  OO5”  [C.  hi.]  ‘  Should’  after  ‘  that’  is  to  be  translated  by  the 
present  infinitive,  when  it  does  not  express  either 
duty  or  a  future  event. 


%  h  Thus  “he  said  that  it  pleased  him” — when  1  at  the  time  of  his  saying  it! 
( placere )  :  before  the  time  of  his  saying  it  ?  ( placuisse ). 


§  3.  14-17.] 


ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE 


21 


Exercise  2. 

14.  He  answered  that  he11* *  had  waged  many'  wars.  He 
denies  that  he  has  sinned  (or  :  says  that  he  has  not  sinned). 2f  He 
says  that  he  does  not 2  understand.  He  says  that  Caesar  will  not 2 
offend-against  the  laws.  Remember  that  hunger  is  the  best  sauce. 
He  answered  that  he  understood.2’  He  answered,  that  both  you 
and  Balbus  were-in-good-health.  Both  you  and  Balbus  have 
sinned. 


§  3.  Accusative  with  Infinitive  continued. 


15.  (a)  After  hope,  promise ,  undertake ,  &c.,  the  future  infinutive * 
us  used  with  the  accusative  of  the  pronoun  ;  and  (b)  after  pretend, 
the  acc.  of  the  pronoun. 

16.  (a)  Sperat  plerumque  adolescens  diu  se  victurum  (esse),k 

A  young  man  generally  expects  to  live  a  long  time. 

(b)  Simulat  se  furere,  He  pretends  to  be  mad. 

•  0^7”  [C.  iv.]  ‘  Would,’  *  should,’  after  a  past  tense  are  future 

forms  : 


(  He  says  that  he  will  come. 

(  He  said  that  he  would  come. 

17.  Vocabulary  3. 


A  business, 

A  journey, 

To  hope, 

To  come, 

To  promise, 

To  undertake,  engage, 


negotium,  i,  n. 

Iter,  YtlnSris,  n. 
sperare,  av,  at. 
vgnlre,  ven,  vent. 

polliceri,  pollicitus ;  promittSre,  promis, 
promiss.t 

recipSre,  io,  recep,  recept. 


*  These  Numerals,  followed  by  a  curve,  refer  to  the  Cautions . 

'  t  These  Numerals  refer  to  the  Table  of  Differences  of  Idiom. 

i  For  ‘  he  promises  to  come)  =  he  promises  that  he  will  come. 

He  hopes  to  live  ~  he  hopes  that  he  shall  live. 

He  pretends  to  be  mad  he  pretends  that  he  is  mad. 

*  With  the  compound  infinitives  esse  is  often  omitted. 

,  I  Promittere  (to  give  it  forth)  is  the  general  word  for  promising ,  whether  good 
or  evil.  Polliceri  is  to  offer  from  one’s  own  free-will  and  inclinations,  used  only 
of  promising  good.  Polliceor  being  used  for  free  and  gracious  promises, 


22 


AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVE  WITH  SUBSTANTIVE.  [§4.  18-21, 


conflcgre,  io,  confec,  confect. 
simulare,1"  av,  at 

furgre,  (neut. :  no  perf.  or  supine .) 


To  finish,  accomplish, 

To  pretend, 

To  be  mad, 

To  (my,  your,  &c.)  satis¬ 
faction,  satisfactorily, 
successfully, 

To  have  a  prosperous  voyage,  ex  sententia  navigare. 


ex  sententia" 


Exercise  3. 


18.  Solon  pretended  to  be  mad.  I  will  pretend  to  bemad.  He 
promised  to  come.  I  engage  to  finish  the  business  to  your  satisfac¬ 
tion.  I  hope  that  you  will  have  a  prosperous  voyage.  The  business 
has  been  finished  by  Balbus.  I  hope  to  finish  the  business.  He 
was  pretending  to  be  mad.  I  promised  to  finish  the  business. 
He  answered,  that  Caius  had  had  a  prosperous  voyage.  He 
answered  that  he  would*'  finish  the  business.  He  says  that  he 
will  not2  come.  He  has  accomplished  his  journey  satisfactorily . 


III. 

§  4.  Agreement  of  Adjective  with  Substantive. 

19.  (a)  When  an  adjective  agrees  with  several  singular  nouns, 
it  will  be  in  the  plural  number,  and  agree  with  the  most  worthy. 

20.  (b)  If  the  substantives  are  things  that  have  not  life ,  the 
adjective  is  usually  in  the  neuter  gender. 

21.  (c)  When  the  noun  is  ‘  man ,’  ‘  woman /  ‘  thing, 9  it  is  seldom 
expressed  in  Latin. 

*  [C.  v.]  ‘  Thing 9  should  be  expressed  by  ‘  res 5  (fern.)  when  the 
adjective  alone  would  leave  it  doubtful  whether  men 
or  things  were  meant. 

^  Thus  ‘of  many  things'  not  multorum ,  but  multarum  rerum. 


promitto  would  naturally  be  often  used  of  promising  what  has  been  requested. 
Hence - 

Ultro  polliceor ;  promitto  (ssepe)  rogatus : 

Nec  mala  polliceor,  mala  sed  promittere  possum. 
m  Quae  non  sunt  simulo ;  quee  sunt  ea  dissimulantur. 

“  The  pronoun  should  be  expressed  (ex  mea  sententid ,  &c.)  whenever  to  le&Vf 
It  out  would  cause  an  ambiguity. 


‘23 


§4.  2*2-25.]  AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVE  WITH  SUBSTANTIVE. 


22.  (a)  Castore  t  Pollux  ex  equis  pugnare  Vi  si  sunt,  Castor  and 
Pollux  were  seen  to  fight  on  horseback, 
ifi)  Inter  se  contraria  sunt  beneficium  et  injuria,  A  benefit 
and  an  injury  are  contrary  to  each  other. 

(c)  Boni  sapientesque  ex  civitate  pelluntur,  The  good  and 

wise  are  banished  (literally,  driven  from  the  state). 

( d )  Praeterita  mutare  non  possumus,  We  cannot  change 

the  past. 

(e)  Omnia  mea  mecum  porto,  I  am  carrying  all  my  property 

with  me. 


23. 


*  Obs.  1.  The  neuter  plural  without  a  substantive  is  generally  used 
in  Latin,  where  we  use  the  singular.  Thus - 


much,  very  much , 

multa,  permulta, 

little  (few  things), 
pauca, 

Obs.  2.  The  neuter  adj. 


every  thing ,  the  past, 

omnia,  praeterita, 

very  little, 
perpauca. 

24.  <?'  Obs.  2.  The  neuter  adj.  is  used  in  Latin  without  a  substantive, 
where  we  might  substitute  ‘  things ,’  but  really  use  some  more  appro¬ 
priate  noun,  as  property,  objects,  possessions,  performances,  &c. 

[C.  vi.]  Obs.  Cum  is  written  after,  and  as  one  word  with ,  the 
ablatives  me,  te,  &c.  :  mecum,  tecum,  secum,  no¬ 
bis  cum,  vobis  cum. 

25.  Vocabulary  4. 

Contrary,  contrarius,  a,  um. 

(to  each  other,  after  contrary)  inter  se  ( between  themselves). 


Good,  better,  best, 
Wise, 

Deaf, 

Parent, 

Virtue, 

Vice, 

Blind, 

All  my  property, 
To  owe, 

To  banish, 

To  be  ignorant-of, 
To  see, 


bttnus,  melior,  optimus. 
sSpiens,  tis. 
surdus,  a,  um, 
parens,  tis,  com.  gcnd. 
virtus,  utis,  /. 
vitium,  i.  n. 
caecus,  a,  um. 
omnia  mea°. 
debere,  debu,  debit. 

pellgre  ex  civitate  (pellgre,  pgpul,  puls,  to 
drive). 

ignorare,  av,  at.  ( acc .) 

cernSre,  crev,  cret  (properly  to  separate ; 
hence,  to  distinguish  ;  to  see  clearly ;  the 
proper  word  to  express  the  possession  of 
distinct  vision).  | 


•  The  other  possessives,  tuus,  suus,  noster,  &c.,  must  be  used  for  thy,  his,  our , 
£c.,  property. 


24 


THE  RELATIVE. 


[§5.  26-30 


To  carry,  portare,  av.  at. 

To  hear,  audire,  Iv.  it. 

To  speak,  lbqui,  locutus,  or  loquutus. 

To  fight  on  horseback,  ex  equo,  or  ex  equisP  pugnare. 

Exercise  4. 

26.  They  are  banishing  the  good  and  wise.  We  are  all 
ignorant-of  many  things.  Virtue  and  vice  are  contrary  to  each 
other.  A  blind  man  does  not  see.  The  good  and  wise  have  been 
banished.  A  deaf  man  does  not  hear.  Hear  much  (23) ;  speak 
little  (p.  14.  15,  b.)  We  shall  carry  all  our  property  with  us. 
He  spoke  very  little.  Both  you  and  Balbus  are  ignorant  of  many 
things.  He  says  that  he  is  no f  well.  They  will  hear  little' : 
they  will  speak  much  (p.  14,  15,  b).  We  owe  very  much  to  our 
parents.  Remember  that  you  owe  very  much'  to  your  parents. 
He  says  that  he  will  not2  fight  on  horseback. 


IV. 


§  5.  The  Relative. 

27.  The  relative  pronouns 

qui,  qualis ,  quantus ,  quott 

answer  respectively  to 

is,  talis,  tantus,  tot. 

28.  In  a  relative  sentence, 

*  0^7"  Each  clause  has  its  own  verb,  and  its  own  independent 

construction. 

29.  A  relative  pronoun  agrees  with  some  case  of  a  substantive  which  is 
expressed  in  the  preceding  sentence.  The  substantive  to  which  it 
thus  refers  is  called  its  antecedent  (or fore-going  substantive). 

The  antecedent,  in  a  sentence  fully  expressed,  would  be  expressed 
twice ;  and  it  sometimes  is  expressed  twice  in  Latin :  this,  however, 
is  but  seldom  the  case,  and  the  antecedent  is  generally  omitted  in  the 
relative  clause. 

30.  (c)  Sometimes  however  the  antecedent  is  expressed  in  the 


*  P  Ex  equo,  if  we  are  speaking  of  one  person ;  ex  equis,  if  of  more. 

•  <* *  The  clause  in  which  the  relative  stands  is  called  the  relative  clause ;  the 
other,  the  principal,  or  antecedent  clause. 


THE  RELATIVE. 


25 


§  5.  31-33.] 

relative ,  and  omitted  in  the  principal  clause  ;  and  ( d )  when  this  is 
the  case,  the  relative  clause  is  often  placed  first  ;  the  antecedent 
being  expressed  in  it ,  and  represented  in  the  principal  clause 
(though  not  always )  by  the  proper  case  of  ‘  is’  or  4  hied 

31.  The  ‘is,’  however,  is  often  omitted,  especially  when  ‘man’  or  '•thing 
is  meant,  or,  when  the  verbs  govern  the  same  case. 

If  the  antecedent  would  be  in  different  cases  in  the  two  clauses, 
‘i* *’  or  ‘/tic’  is  but  seldom  omitted.1- 

32.  (a)  Nullum  animal ,  quod  sanguinem  habet,  sine  corde  esse 

potest,  No  animal  that  has  blood,  can  be  without  a  heart . 

(b)  Arbores  seret  diligens  agricola,  quarum  adspiciet 

baccam*  ipse  nunquam,  The  industrious  husbandman 
will  plant  trees ,  a  berry  of  which  he  will  himself 
never  behold. 

(c)  Accepi  quas  literas  ad  me  dedisti,  I  have  received  the 

letters  which  you  sent  me. 

(d)  Bestiee  in  quo  loco  natas  sunt,  ex  eo  se  non  commovent, 

Animals  do  not  move  themselves  from  the  neighbour¬ 
hood  (place)  in  which  they  were  born. 

*  [C.  vii.]  Many  English  verbs  become  transitive  by  the  addition 
of  a  preposition  ;  for  instance,  to  smile  at,  &c. 

*  It  often  happens  that  the  corresponding  Latin  verb  is  already  tran¬ 
sitive,  so  that  the  preposition  is  not  to  be  expressed.  To  determine 
whether  the  preposition  belongs  (as  it  were)  to  the  verb,  turn  the  sen¬ 
tence  into  the  passive  :  when,  if  the  preposition  still  clings  to  the  verb' 
(adverbially),  it  is  generally  not  to  be  expressed  in  Latin. 

Of  course  a  verb,  compound  or  single,  must  be  sought  for,  that  ip. 
equivalent  to  the  verb  and  preposition  together ;  as  to  deride  =  ta 
laugh  at. 

33.  Vocabulary  5. 

Obs.  Substantives  in  us  from  the  root  of  the  supine  (which  end  there¬ 
fore  in  tus  or  sus)  are  of  the  fourth  declension  ;  except, of  course,  those 
that,  like  legatus ,  denote  persons. 


'  It  is,  however,  sometimes : 

Quc-s  cum  Matio  pueros  miseram,  epistolam  mihi  attulerunt.  (Cic.) 

- Quae  prime  innocentis  mihi  defensio  est  oblata,  suscepi. 

•  A  berry ;  any  little  round  fruit,  not  a  nut;  e  g.  of  the  olive ,  cedar ,  juniper ,  &o 

t  Thus  : - 

‘He  laughs  at  Cassius.’ 

‘  Cassius  is  laughed  at Therefore  to  laugh-at  is  virtually  one  verb. 


v 


26 


THE  RELATIVE. 


[§  5.  34. 


No, 

Animal, 

Blood, 

Without, 

Heart, 

Tree, 

Fruits  (of  the  earth,  a  crop), 

- ^(of  trees,) 

Field, 

In  vain, 

Harvest, 

Praise, 

Easily, 

Not  yet, 

Right, 

To  till,  cultivate, 

To  bear,  produce, 

To  deserve, 

To  deserve  well,  &c.,  of, 

To  praise, 

To  believe, 

To  deceive, 

To  behold, 


nullus,  a,  um.  Gen.  nullius. 

animal,  alis,  n. 

sanguis,  mis,  m. 

si'ne  (governs  ablat.). 

cor,  cordis,  n. 

arbor,  bris,/. 

fruges,  G.  frugum,  /. 

fructus,  us,u  m. 

ager,  agri,  m. 

nequidquam,  frustra.* 

messis,  is,  f. 

laus,  laudis,  f. 

facile. 

nondum. 

rectus,  a,  um. 

colSre,  colu,  cult. 

fgro,  tuli,  latum. 

merSri,  meritus. 

-  de  (with  ablat.). 

laudare,  av,  at. 

credere,  credld,  credit  ( dat .). 


decipere,  io,  decep,  decept. 
adsplcgre,  io,  adspex,  adspect. 

Self,  myself,  himself,  &c.,  in  nom.,  ipse  (which  stands  for  all  these,  the  pro* 

nouns  ego,  tu,  &c.,  not  being  ex* 
pressed.) 

0^7“  1  What  ’  as  a  relative  —  that  which  ;  those  ( things )  which . 


Exercise  5. 


34.  No  animals,  which  have  blood,  can  be  without  a  heart. 
Not  every  field  which  is  sown,  bears  a  crop.  (He)  who  easily 
believes  is  easily  deceived.  What  is  right',  is  praised.  (Those 
things)  which  are  right'  are  praised.  Both  you  and  I1  have  been 
deceived.  Praise  what  deserves  praise.  (He)  who  does  not  till 
nis  field,  in  vain  hopes  for7)  a  harvest.  He  says  that  he  has  not 3 
been  deceived.  I  shall  not  easily  believe  Balbus7.  Balbus  has 


» 

u  Fructus  arboribus,  fruges  nascuntur  in  agris.  But  this  is  only  true  of 
fruges;  and  of  fructus ,  as  opposed  to  fruges.  Fructus  is  the  general  name  for 
produce ,  and  may  be  spoken  of  land  as  well  as  of  trees  ;  and  in  poetry  we  find 
frugibus  (Columella’s  poem  on  Gardening),  and  fruge  (Hor.)  of  the  fruit  of 
trees. 

<1  T  Nequidquam  {to  no  purpose,  in  vain),  so  far  as  nothing  has  resulted  from  a 
thing  done :  frustra  {in  vain),  of  a  person  who  has  not  attained  his  purpose.  D. 


27 


§6.35-38.]  INFINITIVE  USED  SUBSTANTIVELY. 

deserved  well  of  me.  The  business  which  you  promised  to 
finish ,8  has  not  yet  been  finished. w  I  have  planted  a  tree,  the 
fruit  of  which  I  shall  myself  never7  behold.  He  is  pretending  to 
have  finished 3  the  business  to  his  satisfaction .4 


§  6.  Infinitive  used  substantively . 


35.  (a)  Sometimes  an  infinitive  mood,  or  a  sentence,  is  the  nomi- 
tnative  case  to  a  verb  ;  and  sometimes  it  is  used  as  the  substantive 
to  an  adjective  ;  and  sometimes  as  the  antecedent  to  a  relative  :  and 
in  this  case  the  adjective  and  the  relative  must  be  in  the  neuter 
gender. 

v  When  an  infinitive  or  sentence  is  the  nominative  to  a  verb,  it  gen 
erally  follows  it  in  English,  and  the  pronoun  ‘  it  ’  stands  as  its  repre¬ 
sentative  before  the  verb; — as,  “it  is  sweet  to  hear.” 

Of  course  this  {iV  is  not  to  be  translated  into  Latin. 

*  36.  ( b )  When  the  relative  has  a  sentence  for  its  antecedent,  we 
often  find  id*  quod  or  quce  res.  (Here  id  and  res  are  in  apposi¬ 
tion  to  the  former  sentence.) 

37.  ( a )  Turpe  est  mentiri,  It  is  disgraceful  to  lie. 

(b)  Multse  civitates,  a  Cyro  defecerunt ;  quce  res  multo¬ 
rum  bellorum  causa  fuit,  Many  states  revolted  from 
Cyrus,  a  circumstance  which  2vas  the  cause  of  many 


wars. 

(c)  Timoleon,  id*  quod  difficilius  putatur,  sapientius  tulit 
secundam  quam  adversam  fortunam,  Timoleon,  which 
is  thought  more  difficult,  bore  a  prosperous  more  wisely 
than  an  adverse  fortune. 


38.  Vocabulary  6. 

Pleasant, 

Duty, 

Against, 

Promise, 

Disgraceful, 

Easy, 


jucundus,  a,  um. 
officium,  i,  7i. 
contra,  (gov.  accus.) 
promissum,  i,  n. 
turpis,  is,  e. 
facilis,  is,  e. 


w  Invert  these  clauses :  that  is,  put  the  relative  clause  first. 
v  *  The  use  of  id  quod ,  for  quod  only,  adds  emphasis  to  the  relat  clause ;  which 
then  generally  precedes  the  principal  clause,  or  is  inserted  in  it. 


28 


INFINITIVE  USED  SUBSTANTIVELY. 


[§  6.  39 


One  thing — another, 

Man, 

To  keep, 

Revile, 

To  accuse, 

To  break  one’s  word, 

To  keep  one’s  word, 

To  lie, 

To  utter  many  falsehoods, 
It  is  a  breach  of  duty, 


aliud — aliud. 

hbmo,  hominis  ;  vir,  vlri> 
servare,  av,  at. 
maledicere,  dix,  diet  ( dat .). 
accusare,  av,  at. 

fidem  fallSre;  fallPre,  fefelli,  y  falsum, 
deceive,  beguile. 

fidem  praestare ;  praestare,  praestiti1, 
praestitum,  et  praestatum. 
mentiri,  mentitus, 
multa  mentiri. 

contra  officium,  (it  is  against  duty.) 


*  [C.  vili.]  1  For ’  before  a  substantive  or  pronoun  followed  by 
the  injin.,  is  not  to  be  translated.  The  construction 
is  the  acc.  with  injin  .a 

It  is  a  sin  \  ^or  a  not  io  Parents< 

(  that  a  boy  should  not  obey  his  parents. 


Exercise  6. 


39.  It  is  pleasant  to  be  praised.  It  is  a  breach  of  duty  not  to 
keep  promises.  It  is  a  breach  of  duty  to  praise  what  ( plur .)  is 
disgraceful.  I  hear  that  you  keep  your  promises,  a  thing  which 
(37,  c)  all'  good  men  do.  I  hear  that  you  are  going  to  keep  your 
word.  It  is  disgraceful  to  break  one’s  word.  It  is  one  thing  to 
revile,  another  to  accuse.  It  is  certain  that  Balbus  has  deserved 
well  of  me.  It  is  a  breach  of  duty  to  lie.  Both  you  and  Balbus 
have  uttered  many  falsehoods.  It  is  disgraceful  to  lanish  the 
good  and  wise.  It  is  easy  (for  me)  to  carry  all  my  property  with 
me.4)  It  is  a  breach  of  duty  for  a  man  to  revile  men.  I  have 
praised,  not  blamed  you  ( note *,  p.  17). 


*  *  Homo  is  the  general  term  for  man ,  i.  e.  for  a  human  being ,  distinguished 

from  other  living  creatures.  Vir  is  man  as  distinguished  from  icoman.  Homo 
is  often  used  contemptuously :  vir ,  respectfully ;  a  man  with  a  manly  character, 
y  Distinction  between  fallo  and  decipio: 

Nulla  fallentis  culpa  saepisslm  e  fallor ; 

At  quum  decipiar ,  culpam  deceptor  habebit. 
z  Cic.  has  preestaturus. 

v  a  But  we  shall  see  below  that  if  ‘  for ’  follows  immediately  after  ‘  it  is,’  it  must 
De  translated  by  the  genitive.  ‘  It  is  for  a  rich  man  to  do  so  and  so divitis 
est.  &c. 


$  7.  40-44.] 


THE  RELATIVE. 


20 


§7.  Relative  continued.  (Fundamental  Rule  for  the  employ¬ 
ment  of  subjunctive  tenses.) 

*  Wherever  dependent  verbs  are  used  in  the  subjunctive,  the  following 
is  the  fundamental  rule  for  the  use  of  the  tenses. 

*  40.  0^7“  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  subjunctive  are 
the  regular  attendants  of  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative. 

But — the  perfect  definite b  (or  perfect  with  ‘  have’)  is  con¬ 
sidered  a  present  tense. 

Hence  the  present,  future,  and  perfect  with  ‘ have1  are  followed  by  the 
present ,  or  (for  a  completed  action)  the  perfect  of  the  subjunctive.0 

00“  The  future  perfect  is  not  a  subjunctive  tense. 

41.  The  only  future  subjunctive  is  the  part,  in  rus  with  sim,  essem ,  &c. 
But  where  we  use  a  future  in  a  dependent  sentence,  the  Romans  often 
used  the  present  or  imperfect  subjunctive. 

(On  some  English  Relative  forms.) 

*  42.  ‘  That ’  is  often  a  relative  pronoun. 

(Especially  after  superlatives;  the  interrogative  who;  the  same;  and 
when  both  persons  and  things  are  meant.) 

%  43.  (a)  ‘  As’  is  often,  in  effect,  a  relative  pronoun. 

The  relative  ‘as’  must  be  translated  by  qui  after  idem;  by  qualis , 
quantus ,  quot ,  after  talis,  tantus,  tot,  respectively. 

»  44.  (1)  ‘  BuV  is  often,  in  effect,  a  relative  pronoun,  when  it 

follows  universal  negatives ,  as  nemo ,  nullus ,  nihil. 

(2)  The  relative  ‘  but ’  is  to  be  translated  by  quin  with  the 
subjunctive,  (c) 

(3)  When  ‘  but ’  might  be  substituted  for  a  relative  with 
not ,  the  relative  and  not  may  be  translated  by  quin  ;d 
if  the  relative  is  in  the  nom.  (or  even  acc.)  case. 


»  b  The  perfect  definite  is  used  of  actions  done  in  some  space  of  time,  a  part  of 
which  is  still  present. 
c  Thu3  then  the 
Present 
Future 
Perfect  with 


are  followed  by  the 


have ’ 


Present  subj. 

Perfect  subj.  (for  a 
completed  action). 
Imperfect  subj. 
Pluperfect  subj.  (for  an 
action  completed  before 
the  time  spoken  of). 

*  With  other  cases  than  the  nominative  and  accusative,  the  use  of  the  relative 


Imperfect 

Perfect 

Pluperfect 


ttre  followed  by  the 


30 


RELATIVE  CONTINUED. 


[§  7.  45,  45 


*  [C  ix.]  fj*  ‘4s’  and  ‘  but  ’  are  often  (in  effect)  relatives. 

%  [C.  x.]  HjT  ‘  Such ’  in  English  is  often  used  where  size  is  meant  rather 

than  quality.  ‘  Such — as’  should  then  be  translated  into  Latin  by  tantus 
— quantus  ;  not  talis — qualis. 

45.  (a)  Talis  est,  qualis  semper  fuit,  He  is  such  as  he  has  „ 

ever  been. 

{b)  Idem  est  qui  semper  fuit,  He  is  the  same  that  (or  as) 
he  has  ever  been. 

(c)  Nemo  est,  quin0  te  dementem  putet,  There  is  no  one 
but  thinks  you  mad  (or,  who  does  not  think  you 
mad). 

46.  Vocabulary  7. 


The  same, 

Rule, 

Expediency, 

Expedient, 

Honor,  the  honorable, 
honorable  conduct, 
Nobody,  no  one, 

To  think,  deem, 

This, 

That, 

Nearly, 

Another, 

Never, 

Before, 

To  be  able,  can, 

Wave, 

*  (a)  Sunt  qui  putent  (Obs. 


Idem,  eadem,  idem ;  gen.  ejusdem,  &c. 
regula,  a e,f. 
utilitas,  atis,jf. 
utilis,  is,  e. 

honestas,  atis,^/*. 

nemo,  inis  ;  nemo  =  ne  hbmo. 
putare,  av,  at. 

hie,  heec,  hoc  :  g.  hujus,  &c. 
ille,  illa,  illud  ;  g.  illius,  &c. 
f6re, 

alius,  a,  ud ;  g.  alius,  D.  alii,  &c. 

nunquam, 

antea, 

posse,  p'dtui.f 
fluctus,  us,  m.  (See.  33.) 
subj.  after  *  sunt  quV  )  there  are  some  who  think 


Exercise  7. 

*  [C.  xi.]  §£jt  ‘  That’  when  it  stands  for  a  substantive  which  has  been 
expressed  in  the  preceding  clause,  is  not  to  be  translated. 

*  *  HjT  The  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  of  the  Subjunct.  are  the  regular  at¬ 
tendants  of  the  past  tenses  of  the  Indicative. 


with  non  is  commonly  preferred.  Z.  When  qui  non  must  be  used  will  be  ex¬ 
plained  below. 

6  Quin  is  qui  ne{  —  ut  non).  The  demonstr.  pronoun  (which  is  the  real 
nom.)  is  sometimes  expressed  :  as  in  88,  (a). 

f  This  verb  is  compounded  of  an  old  adj.  potis ,  neut.  pote,  with  sum.  1  Pot’ 
is  prefixed  to  the  tenses  of  sum ,  ts  being  changed  into  ss,  and  pot-esse,  pot- 
essem  shortened  into  posse,  possem  (posses,  &c.).  The  perfect  tenses  regular 
from  votui  ( —potis fui).  No  imperat. :  the  part,  potens  is  used  as  an  adjective- 


RELATIVE  CONTINUED. 


31 


§8.  47-51.] 

47.  This  is  the  same  as  that.  The  rule  of  expediency  is  the 
same  as  that1  u  of  honour.  This  is  nearly  the  same  as  another 
thing.  You  are  such  as  I  have  always  thought  you.  There  is 
nobody  hut  knows,  that  the  Gauls  were  conquered  by  Caesar. 
There  is  no  one  who  does  not  (45,  c )  understand,  that  you  are 
pretending.  There  is  no  one  hut  knows  that  the  past  (23,  Obs.  1,) 
cannot  be  changed  There  is  no  one  hut  knows,  that  these  things 
are  contrary  to  each  other.  Both  you  and  I  are  such  as  we  have 
ever  been.  The  waves  were  suchx0)as  I  had  never  seen  before. 

- There  are  some  who  think  you  mad  (46,  a).  There  were 

some  who  blamed  me. 


§  8.  Relative  continued. 

*  48.  (a,  h)  When  the  relative  connects  (by  means  of  to  he  or  a 

verb  of  naming ,  &c.)  two  substantives  of  different  genders,  &c. 
it  generally  agrees  with  the  latter,  rather  than  with  its  ante¬ 
cedent.  * 

*  (This  is  the  rule;  agreement  with  the  antecedent  the  exception. 
Z.  K.,  &c.) 

*  49.  But  when  the  second  substantive  is  a  foreign  word,  the 
relative  generally  agrees  with  its  antecedent.  (Z.)s 

(Jovis  stella ,  quce  qxxs&av  dicitur.) 

50.  (a)  Domicilia  conjuncta,  quas  urhes  dicimus,  Contiguous 

dwellings,  which  we  call  cities. 

(h)  Tliehce,  quod  Bceotise  caput  est,  Thehes ,  which  is  the 
capital  of  Boeotia 

51.  Vocabulary  8. 

Glory,  gloria,  a e,/. 

Honorable,  hbnestus,  a,  um. 

Star,  stella,  ae ;  astrum,  i,  which  is  properly 

a  Greek  word ;  and  sidus,  6ris,  n,  a 


?  Kruger  approves  of  Zumpt’s  rule ;  but  thinks  that  we  cannot  go  beyond 
this  in  determining  when  agreement  with  the  antecedent  should  be  preferred. 

Bremi  says:  “videntur  id  (pronomen)  ad  antecedens  substantivum  referre 
si  ad  vocabulum  respiciunt ;  sin  vero  ad  rem,  ad  consequens.5’  But  Kruger 
shows  that  even  if  this  should  explain  Cicero’s  practice,  it  is  obviously  at 
variance  with  that  of  other  writers. 


32 


RELATIVE  CONTINUED. 


[§  9.  52,  53. 


Perpetual,  lasting 
File, 

Island, 

Sea, 

Ocean, 

As  it  were, 

The  world, 

Head,  capital  city, 

To  reject. 

To  admire,  wonder  at, 
To  be  washed. 


To  inhabit, 

To  call  (in  sense  of  naming), 


constellation,  and  also, one  of  the  great 
heavenly  luminaries,  e.  g.  the  sun. 
the  moon,  Sirius,  &c. 
sempiternus,  a,  um. 
ignis,  is,  m. 
insQla,  a e,f. 
mSre,  is,  n. 
oceanus,  i,  m. 
quasi. 

orbis  terrae,  or  terrarum ;  orbis,  is,  m. 
c£put,  itis,  n. 
repudiare,  av,  at. 
admirari,  admiratus, 
circumfundi,  circumfusus  (literally,  to 
be  poured  around  ;  and  either  the 
island  or  sea  is  said  circumfundi), 
incolere,  incolu,  incult, 
vocare, h  appellare,  nominare,  av,  at. 


Exercise  8. 


52.  He  rejects  glory,  which  is  the  most  honorable  fruit'  of 
true7  virtue  {Gen.  before  fructus).  He  is  admiring  those  perpetual 
fires,  which  we  call  stars.  The  island  is  washed  by  the  sea, 
which  you  (pi.)  call  ocean.  We  inhabit  a  great  island,  as  it 
were,*  which  we  call  the  world.  There  is  nobody  but9)  thinks 
Rome  the  capital'  of  the  world. k  There  is  no  one  but  thinks 

that  Balbus  has  deserved  well  of  us. - There  are  some  who 

laugh.  There  are  some  who  laughed  (46,  a). 


§  9.  Relative  continued. — Relative  ivith  superlative  :  tl  The 

first  who — ” 

53.  (a)  When  the  antecedent  has  a  superlative *  with  it,  the 
adjective  is  generally  put  in  the  relative  clause. 


4  *  h  Vocare,  appellare ,  nominare  are  all  to  call;  but  vocare  has,  beside  this ,  the 
meaning  of  to  call  =  summon  ;  appellare ,  that  of  appealing  to,  of  calling  to  for 
aid  ;  nominare,  that  of  naming,  in  the  sense  of  appointing  or  electing. 

i  Quasi  should  stand  bet  ween  great  and  island.  i 

k  Orbis  terrarum,  rather  than  terrae ,  when  there  is  a  decided  reference  to 
other  lands. 

*  The  same  rule  holds  good  of  other  adjectives  and  of  appositions. 


RELATIVE  CONTINUED. 


33 


§9.  54-57.] 


*  54.  ( 'b )  To  express  “  the  first  person  who  did  a  Cdng”  the 
Romans  did  not  use  a  relative  sentence,  but  made  primus  agree 
with  the  nominative  of  the  principal  verb. 

55.  (a)  Volsci  civitatem,  quam  habebant  optimam,  perdiderunt, 
TheVolsci  lost  the  best  city  they  had. 

(b)  Primus  mala  nostra  sensit ,  He  icas  the  first  person  who 
perceived  our  evils. 


56. 


f  Eng.  He  was  the  first  who  did  this  :  (or,)  He  was  the  first  ta 
j  do  this. 

Eat.  He  the  first  did  this. 

Vocabulary  9. 


fidelis,  is,  e. 


servus,  i,  m. 


Faithful, 

Slave, 

God,  Deus,i  i,  m,  et ,/. 

Fire  (  =  conflagration),  incendium,  i,  n. 

To  help,  a  person  in  perplexity, &c.,  subvenire,  ven,  ventm  (dat.  of  person). 
To  lose,  amittere,  amis,  amiss;  perdere, n  per- 

did,  perdit. 

An  opportunity,  occasio,  onis,/. 

To  lose  an  opportunity,  occasionem  amittere. 

Now  =  already,  jam. 


Such  is  your  temperance  (  quae  tua  est  temperantia, 
With  your  usual  tern-  ^  qua  es  temperantia,0 
perance  (  pro  tua  temperantia. 

As  fiar  as  I  know,  quod  sciam. 


Exercise  9. 


57.  He  was  the  first  who  promised  to  help 3  me.  They  will 
lose  the  best  thing  they  have.  I  will  send  the  most  faithful  slave 
I  have.  He  was  the  first  who  denied  that  there  are'  gods.  The 
fire  is  such10)  as  1  have  never  seen  before.  The  constellations 
are.  the  same,  that  they  have  ever  been.  He  was  the  first  who 
undertook  to  finish3  the  business.  I  hope  that  you,  such  is  your 
temperance ,  are  already  well.  No  one,  as  far  as  I  know ,  has 


l  Deus,  V.  Deus,  Plur.  ( Dei ),  Dii,  Dt.  Dat.  (Deis),  Diis,  Dis. 
m  That  is,  to  come  under  a  thing;  i.  e.  to  support  it. 
i  n  Amittere  is  simply  to  lose.  Perdere  is  to  lose  actively ;  i.  e.  by  some  exer • 
lion  of  one’s  own  will,  &c.  Hence  perdere  is  often  to  destroy.  Activi  perdo, 
passivi  amittere  possum. 

•  Or,  cujus  es  temperantia. 

a* 


34 


UT,  NE. 


[§  10.  58-60 


said  this.  Sestius  was  not  corner  as  far  as  I  know.  I  have 

lost  no  opportunity,  as  far  as  I  know. - There  are  some  who 

have  lost  the  opportunity  (46,  a). 


V. 


*  §  10.  Ut,  Ne  expressing  a  purpose. 


58.  (a)  ‘  That ’  followed  by  may  or  might  expresses  a  purpose , 

and  must  be  translated  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive. 

»  ( b )  ‘  That ’  followed  by  ‘  not ,’  or  any  negative  word  (the 
verb  having  may  or  might  for  its  auxiliary),  must  be 
translated  by  ne  with  the  subjunctive. 

59.  Vocabulary  10. 


% 


It  is  all  over  with, 

News  of  the  town, 

To  send  or  write  news, 

Courtesy, 

Courageously, 

Virtuously,  honorably, 

To  cry  out, 

To  live, 

To  die, 

To  obey, 

To  make  the  same  promise, 


actum  est  de  (with  the  ablat.). 
res  urbanae. 

perscrib&re,  scrips,  script,  =  to  write 
fully. 

humanitas,  atis,/. 
fortiter, 
honeste, 
clamare,  av,  at. 
vivere,  vix,  viet, 
mori,  ior,  mortuus, 
parere,  paru,  parlt  (dat.). 
idem  polliceri. 


60.  (a)  Multi  alios  laudant,  ut  ab  illis  laudentur ,  Many  men 
praise  others ,  that  they  may  be  praised  by  them. 

(h)  Gallinae  avesque  reliquas  pennis  fovent  pullos  ne 
frigore  Icedantur,  Hens  and  other  birds  cherish  their 
young  with  their  feathers ,  that  they  may  not  be  hurt 
hy  the  cold . 

[C.  xiii.]  00“  ‘  To’  is  omitted  after  many  verbs,  which  thus 
seem *  to  govern  two  accusatives. 


p  [C.  xii.]  Intransitive  verbs  of  motion  often  form  their  perfect  active 
with  ‘am,’  not  ‘ have .’  Thus,  am  came,  was  come ,  are  the  perfect  and  pluper¬ 
fect  active  (respectively). 

i  Such  verbs  are :  give}  vouchsafe ,  assign,  grant ,  send. 


* 


UT.  QUO.  NE. 


30 


§  11.  61-66.] 


'  When  a  verb  seems  to  govern  two  accusatives,  try  whether  you  can¬ 
not  put  in  to*  before  one  of  them. 


Exercise  10. 


61.  That  you  may  be  able  to  die  courageously,  obey'  the  laws 
of  virtue.  He  was  pretending  to  be  mad,3  that  he  might  not  be 
banished.  He  cries  out,  that  it  is  all  over  with  the  army.  You 
promised  that  you  would  send  me  all  the  news  of  the  town .  That 
you  may  die  courageously',  live  virtuously  [p.  14,  15,  (&)].  He 
praises'  Caius,  that  he  may  himself  be  praised  by  Caius.  He  will 
praise'  Caius,  that  he  may  be  praised  by  Caius.  No  one,  as  far 
as  I  know,10  had  praised7  Balbus,  that  he  might  himself  be  praised 
by  Balbus.  You,  such  is  your  courtesy ,9  promised  to  finish3  the 
business.  You,  with  your  usual  courtesy ,9  made  me  the  same  pro¬ 
mise 12  as  before. - There  were  some  who  laughed. 


*  §11.  Ut  expressing  a  consequence.  Quo.  Ne  prohibitive. 

<  62.  (a)  ‘  That  ’  after  such,  so,  &c.  must  be  translated  by  1  ut  ’ 
with  the  subjunctive. 

\  After  these  words,  ‘that*  does  not  express  a  purpose ,  but  a  conse¬ 
quence;  and  the  English  verb  will  not  have  ‘  may)  or  ‘might’  with  it. 

«  63.  (£)  *  That,’  when  the  sentence  has  a  comparative  in  it,  is 
translated  by  quo  ;  which  is  equivalent  to  ut  eo  (‘  that  by  this  ’). 
s  64.  ‘  Not  ’  in  prohibitions  is  ne. 

«  65.  (c)  ‘  Not  ’  therefore  with  the  imperative,  or  subjunctive  used 
imperatively,  must  be  translated  by  ne. 

•  Obs.  |5*  The  subjunctive  present  is  more  commonly  used  than  the 
imperative. 

*  66.  ( d )  ‘  As  ’  before  the  infin.,  and  after  so,  such,  must  be 
translated  by  ut .* 

Except  in*this  idiom  (where  ‘as’  expresses  a  consequence  conceived 
as  resulting  on  a  particular  supposition),  ut,  ‘as,’  goes  with  the 
Indicative. 


*  “  He  gave  him  a  penny.”  What  did  he  give  1  to  whom  ? 

\  •  It  will  be  seen  afterwards,  that  qui  ( =  ut  is)  is  generally  used  in  sentences 

of  this  kind ;  also  that  ‘  as  not  to  .  .  .  &c.’  after  a  negative  sentence  is  quin.  85 


36 


UT.  QUO.  NE. 


[§11.  67-70 


* 


67.  0^7”  No  ut  or  ne  goes  with  the  infinitive. 

68.  (a)  Tanta  vis  probitatis  est,  ut  eam  vel  in  hoste  diligamus, 

The  power  of  integrity  is  so  great,  that  we  love  it 
even  in  an  enemy. 

(h)  Medico  puto  aliquid  dandum  esse,  quo  sit  studiosior,  1 
think  that  some  thing  should  he  given  to  the  physician, 
that  he  may  he  the  more  attentive. 

(c)  Ne  multa  discas,  sed  multum,  Do  not  learn  many 

things,  hut  much. 

(d)  Nemo  tam  potens  est,  ut  omnia  quse  velit  efficere  possit, 

Nohody  is  so  powerful  as  to  be  able  to  perform  all  he 


wishes. 

69.  Vocabulary  11. 

Daily, 

Even  mind,  resignation, 

Young, 

Age,  time  of  life, 

About, 

Agricultural  operations  or  affairs, 
Of  such  a  kind, 

Wind, 

Season, 

Multitude, 

To  meditate,  meditation, 

To  leave, 

To  learn, 

To  appear,  seem, 

To  govern  =  moderate,  limit, 

To  number, 


quotidie,  indies,  or  in  dies.* 

gequus  animus. 

juvenis,  junior  =  juvenior. 

aetas,  atis,y. 

de  (governs  ablat.). 

res  rusticae. 

ejusmbdi. 

ventus,  i.  m. 

tempestas,  atis,./". 

multitudo,  inis,,/. 

meditari,  meditatus. 

relinquere,  rellqu,  relict. 

discSre,  didic. 

videri,  visus. 

moderari,  atus  (acens.). 

numerare,  av,  at. 


1 


Exercise  11. 

70.  Meditate  upon7)  this  daily,  that  you  may  leave  life  witn 
an  even  mind.  He  told  many  falsehoods' 2  about  his  age,  that  he 
might  appear  younger  (than  he  is).  Do  not  learn  many  things, 


*  t  From  quot  dies  (as  many  days  as  there  are ) ;  compare  the  Greek  hcriptpat.  Jn 
dies  (daily)  —  day  after  day ,  day  by  day  ;  when,  that  is,  we  speak  of  a  thing 
increasing  or  diminishing  daily.  In  ‘in  dies?  therefore,  or  ‘  in  dies  singulos? 
each  day  is  considered  as  a  term  of  a  progressive  series.  Quotidie  is  ‘  every 
day, daily?  in  both  senses;  eilher,  that  is,  when  the  simple  repetition  of  an 
action  is  to  be  expressed,  or  its  repetition  combined  with  progressive  increase 
®r  decrease. 


UT  WITH  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


6 12.  71-77. J 


31 


but  useful  things.  He  spoke  much  (23,  1,)  that  he  might.  De 
thought  wise.  Agricultural  affairs  are  of  such  a  kind  that  the 
winds  and  seasons  govern  them.u  I  know  that  my  father  does  not 
learn  many  things,  but  much.  I  will  live  virtuously,  that  I  may 
die  the  more  courageously. T  He  lived  virtuously,  that  he  might 
leave  life  with  the  greater  resignation.  The  multitude  of  stars  is 

suchI0)  that  they  cannot  be  numbered. - There  are  some  who 

promise  to  help  me. 


§  12.  English  Infinitive  translated  by  ‘  ut  ’  with  the  subjunctive. 


*■  71.  03=  The  Infin.  never  expresses  a  purpose  in  prose  Latin. 
*  72.  ( a )  The  English  Infinitive  expressing  a  purpose  may  be 
‘vanslated  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive. 


*  73. 


74 


*  75 


Whenever  the  English  infinitive  may  be  turned  into  in  order  that,  or 
that,  with  may  or  might,  it  is  to  be  translated  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive. 

Thus,  “  I  am  come  to  see  you”  “I  am  come  in  order  that  I  may 
see  you.”  Here  my  seeing  you  is  obviously  the  purpose  of  my  coming. 
But  in  many  verbs  this  relation  of  the  purpose  is  more  obscure. 

For  instance - 


I  advise  } 

I  exhort  ) 

I  ask  ) 

I  beg ,  &c.  ) 

I  command  you  to  do  it  = 


you  to  do  it  = 
you  to  do  it  = 


(  I  advise  or  exhort  you,  in  order 
t  that  you  may  do  it. 

<  I  ask,  or  beg  you,  in  order  that  you 
(  may  do  it.  , 

(  1  command  you,  in  order  that  you 
l  .  may  do  it. 

\  strive  to  do  it  =  I  strive  in  order  that  I  may  do  it. 

By  ‘ ut  ’  translate  infinitive 

With  ask,  command,  advise,  and  strive. 

But  never  be  this  rule  forgot, 

Put  ‘ne’  for  ‘uV  when  there’s  a  ‘not.’ 


76  But  of  verbs  signifying  ‘to  command?  jubeo  takes  acc.  and 
infin. — [See  however  noteh  219.] 

n  (a)  Romulus,  ut  civium  numerum  augeret,  asylum  pate¬ 
fecit,  Romulus,  to  increase  the  number  of  his  citizens, 
opened  an  asylum. 


d  iDr'ls’  is  the  proper  pronoun  for  the  third  person,  when  there  is  no 
Histinction  to  be  expressed  between  a  nearer  and  remoter  object,  and  no  refer- 
aace  to  be  strongly  marked. 

*  The  neuter  of  the  comparative  adjective  is  used  for  the  comparative  adverb. 


38 


UT  WITH  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


[§  12.  78. 


9 


(b)  Militibus  imperavit,  ut  clypeos  hastis  percuterent,  He 
commanded  the  soldiers  to  strike  their  shields  with 


their  spears. 

(c)  Enitar,  ut  vincam,  I  will  strive  to  conquer. 

( d )  Magno  opere  te  hortor,  ut  hos  de  philosophia  libros 

studiose  legas,  I  earnestly  advise  you  to  read  alien* 
tively  these  books  about  philosophy . 

(e)  Capram  monet,  ut  in  pratum  descendat ,  He  advises  the 

she-goat  to  come  down  into  the  meadow . 

(f)  Hoc  te  rogo,  ne*  demittas  animum,  I  beg  of  you  not 
to  be  disheartened.  (Literally,  not  to  depress  your 
mind.) 

rc.  xiv.]  When  1  that  ’  introduces  a  consequence ,  ‘  that  not 5  is 
ut  non,  not  ne. 


0  That — not 


a  purpose . ne. 

—  consequence.  .  .ut  non. 


78.  Vocabulary  12.  (Verbs  followed  by  ut.) 


To  ask, 

To  strive, 

To  advise, 

To  warn, 

To  exhort, 

To  command, 

To  charge  or  commission, 

To  direct,  tell,  when  spoken  of 
an  instructor, 


rbgare,  av,  at. 

nlti,  more  commonly  eniti,  nisus,  and 
nixus. 

suadere,  suas,  suas  (dat.  of  person), 
monere,  monu,  monit  ( acc .  of  person), 
hortari,  adhortari,  tatus. 
imperare, w  av,  at  (dat.). 
mandare,  av,  at  (dat.). 

praecipere,  io,  cep,  cept. 


*  *  For  ne,  ut  ne  is  found  with  no  perceptible  difference  of  meaning.  Z.  Orotc - 

fend  thinks  that  Cicero  uses  ut  ne  in  the  following  cases :  (1)  when  the  negative 
does  not  so  much  belong  to  the  whole  clause ,  as  to  a  particular  part  of  it,  e.  g. 
th9  verb,  or  quis,  quid ;  (2)  when  a  demonstrative  pron.  or  pronominal  adverb  is 
expressed  or  implied  in  the  preceding  clause ;  (3)  when  without  ut,  ne  would 
stand  by  a  word  to  which  ne  is  often  appended,  as  non,  an.  He  says  that  ut  ne 
is  found,  though  less  commonly  than  in  Cicero,  in  Plautus ,  Terence ,  Ovid,  &c. : 
but  four  times  (and  that  in  doubtful  passages)  in  Livy,  and  not  at  all  in  Caesar 
and  Tacitus. 

»  w  Jubere,  to  order ,  bid  (with  the  notion  of  the  thing  being  right,  or  of  the 
person  having  a  right  to  order) ;  imperare,  to  command  with  power ;  praecipere , 
to  direct ,  from  being  qualified  to  do  so  by  superior  knowledge  ;  mandare,  to  give 
a  charge  or  commission  to  a  person  ;  edicere ,  to  declare  officially  as  a  magistrate, 
to  publish  a  proclamation. 


UT  WITH  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


89 


§  13.  79,  80.] 


To  order,  by  a  proclamation,  or 
edict,  to  publish  an  edict, 

To  decree, 

Perseverance, 

Fury, 

Senate, 

Dress, 

To  return, 

To  hold  a  levy  of  troops,  to  levy 
troops, 

Consul, 

To  assist, 

To  suffer, 

To  take  by  storm, 

By  letter, 


edlcSre,  edix,  edict. 

decerngre,  crev,  cret. 
perseverantia,  a e,J. 
ftiror,  oris,  m. 
senatus,  us,  m. 
vestitus,  us,  m. 
redire*  (re  and  eo). 

delectum  habere. 

consul,  consulis,  m. 
jQvare,  juvi,  jutum, 
pati,  ior,  passus, 
per  vim  expugnare, 
per  literas. 


Exercise  12. 


79.  I  ask  you  to  do  this.  I  asked  you  to  do  this.  Strive  to 
assist  me.  He  is  striving  to  govern  the  winds  and  seasons.  He 
warned  Caesar  not  to  believe  the  Gauls.  Do  not  believe  the  Gauls. 
Do  not  lie.  Religion  warns  men  not  to  lie .  It  is  certain,  that 
the  boy  is  striving  to  learn.  I  will  exhort  the  boy  to  learn.  We 
know  that  virtue  and  vice  are  contrary  to  each  other.  He  pub- 
lished-an-edict,  that  the  Senate  should  return  to  its  (usual)  dress. 
He  had  charged  Trebonius  by  letter  not  to  suffer  Marseilles?  to 
be  taken  by  storm.  His  perseverance  is  as  great  as9)  his  fury. 
The  Senate  decrees,  that  the  Consuls  should  levy  troops. — There 
are  some  who  lie. 


§  13.  Ut,  &c.  continued. 

%  80.  (a)  In  sentences  where  ‘  ut  ’  should  be  used  (to  express  a 

purpose),  if  a  negative  follows,  ne  takes  its  place,  and  the  affirma¬ 
tive  pronoun  or  adverb  is  used.  Thus — 


'  *  co,  ivi  (it  generally  in  the  compounds),  T turn.  Pres.,  eo,  is,  it;  imus,  itis, 

eunt.  Imp.  ibam.  Fut.  ibo.  Imperat,  i.  Subj.  pres.  earn.  Imp.  irem.  Part 
iens,  euntis.  Ger.  eundi,  &c. 

y  Massilia 


40 


UT. 


[§  13.  81—83. 


that  nobody , 
that  nothing , 
that  no, 
that  never, 


not, 
ut  nemo, 
ut  nihil, 
ut  nullus, 
ut  nunquam 


but, 
ne  quis, 
ne  quid, 
ne  ullus, 
ne  unquam. 


81.  (b)  But  if  the  sentence  is  a  consequence,  then  ut  nemo,  &c.  should  be  used. 


82.  (a)  Alexander  edixit,  ne  quis  ipsum  alius,  quam  Apelles, 
pingeret,  Alexander  published  an  edict,  that  no  other 
person  than  Apelles  should  paint  him  ( Purpose ). 

(b)  Cimon  fuit  tanta  liberalitate,  ut  nunquam  hortis  suis 
custodem  imposuerit,*  Cimon  was  (a  person)  of  such 
liberality,  that  he  never  appointed  a  keeper  for  his 
gardens  ( Consequence ). 


S3.  Vocabulary  13. 


It  remains, 

It  follows ;  the  next  thing  is, 

That  ( after  reliquum  est,  restat, 
and  sequitur,) 

To  desert, 

To  make  this  request  of  you, 

To  leave  =  go  out  of, 

City, 

Town, 

First, 

At  first. 

For  the  sake  of, 

For  my  sake, 

Fear, 

Unwilling, 

Glad,  joyful, 


reliquum  est,  restat, 
sequitur.t 

ut  (icith  subjunctive). 

deserere,  seru,  sert. 

illud  te  rogare. 

excedere,  cess,  cess  ( ablat .). 

urbs,  urbis,  f. 

oppidum,2  i,  n. 

primum. 

primo. a 

causa. 

mea  causa. 

timor,  oris,  m. 

invitus,  a,  um. 

laetus,  a,  um. 


**  ( Lat .)  He  did  it  unwilling  ;  glad;  joyful. 
(Eng.)  He  did  it  unwillingly ;  gladly;  joyfully. 


*  The  use  of  the  perfect  subj.  in  this  example  instead  of  the  imperf.  will  be 
explained  in  another  place  [418.  (a)].  It  is  not  to  be  imitated  in  doing  the 
exercises. 

t  Absit  ut,  1  be  it  far  from  me ’  (as  given  in  the  earlier  editions),  belongs  to  the 
later  poets  and  Appuleius.  Instead  of  it  we  should  use  velim  hoc  absit;  or  quod 
procul  absit,  inserted  parenthetically. 

„  1  “  Oppidum  proprie  infra  urbem  est but  all  cities  and  towns  came  to  De 

(frequently)  denominated  oppida  except  Rome.  (Valla,  quoted  by  Crombie.) 

.  a  Primo  is  sometimes  used  for  ‘ first '  but  not  primum  for  ‘  at  first.*  C. 


$  14.  34-88.] 


QUIN. 


41 


Exercise  13. 

84.  Religion  warns  (us)  never  to  break  our  word.  The  boy 

strives  to  learn  nothing.  I  first  make  this  request  of  you,  to  do 

nothing  against  your  will  for  my  sake.  The  Consuls  publish-a- 

proclamation,  that  no  one  should  leave  the  city.  So  great  was 

the  fear  of  all  men,  that141  no  one  left  the  city.  The  Senate 

decreed  that  the  Consuls  should  hold  a  levy.  It  remains  that  I 

should  assist  Balbus.  There  was  no  one  but  exclaimed,  that  it 

was  all  over  with  the  army.  They  had  joyfully  helped  Balbus. 

- There  were  some  who  assisted  Balbus.  There  were  some 

who  denied  that  virtue  and  vice  were  contrary  to  each  other.  It 

•/ 

follows  that  you  deny  virtue  and  vice  to  be  contrary  to  each  other. 


*  §  14.  Quin  after  verbs  of  doubting,  &c. 

«  85.  (a)  When  ‘  as  not 5  with  the  infinitive  follows  ‘so  ’  or 
‘  such  5  in  a  negative  sentence,  it  is  to  be  translated  by  ‘  quin  ’  with 
the  subjunctive. 

*  §Pr  The  sentence  before  quin  is  always  negative.  (An  interrogative 
sentence  that  expects  the  answer  ‘no,’  is  in  effect  a  negative  sentence.) 

*  86.  (b)  ‘But,'  ‘but  that,''  or  ‘  that,’  after  verbs  of  doubting, 
denying,  restraining,  &c.,  in  negative  sentences,  must  be  trans¬ 
lated  by  quin. 

»  87.  (c)  Afte:  negative  sentences  the  'participial  substantive  governed  by  a  pre¬ 
position  (especially  after  the  verbs  mentioned  in  86)  should  be  trans¬ 
lated  by  quin,  with  subj. 

88.  (a)  Cleanthes  negat  ullum  esse  cibum  tam  gravem,  quin  is 
die  et  nocte  concoquatur,  Cleanthes  says  that  no  food 
is  so  heavy,  as  not  to  be  digested  in  a  day  and  a 
night. 

( b )  Negari  non  potest,  quin  turpius  sit  fallere  quam  falli, 

It  cannot  be  denied,  that  it  is  more  disgraceful  to 
deceive  than  to  be  deceived. 

(c)  Nunquam  adspexit,  quin  fratricidam  compellaret,  She 

never  saw  him  without  calling  him  fratricide. 

Vix  inhiberi  potuit,  quin  saxa  jaceret,  He  could 
scarcely  be  prevented  from  throwing  stones. 


42 


QUIN. 


[§  14.  89-92. 


.  Vocabulary  14.  [Of  words,  &c.,  followed  by  quin.] 


Not  to  doubt, 

There  is  no  doubt, 
t  It  cannot  be  but  that, 

I  cannot  refrain  from, 

It  cannot  be  denied, 

To  leave  nothing  undone  to,  &c. 
I  am  not  ignorant, 

World, 

Design, 

Sometimes, 


noft  dubitare. 

non  est  dubium  (it  is  not  doubtful). 

fieri  non  potest  quin. 

temperare  'mihi  non  possum. 

negari  non  potest. 

nihil  praetermittere  quin. 

non  ignoro. 

mundus,  i,  m. 

consilium,  i,  n. 

interdum. 


Exercise  14. 


90.  Who  douhts  that  virtue  and  vice  are  contrary  to  each  other  ? 
It  cannot  he  denied  that  it  is  disgraceful  to  lie.  Who  doubts  that 
the  world  was  made  by  design  ?  I  don’t  doubt  that  both  you  and 
Balbus  lifted  up  your  hands.  He  never  sees  Caesar  without  crying 
out  that  it  is  all  over  with  the  army.  I  left  nothing  undone  to 
finitfi  the  business.  I  cannot  hut  help  Balbus.  It  cannot  be 
denied  that  Caius  has  had  a  prosperous  voyage.  I  cannot  refrain 
from  leaving  the  city.  No  one  is  so  good  as  not  sometimes  to  sin. 

- There  were  some  who  left  the  city.  I  am  not  ignorant,  that 

Caius  has  lost  the  opportunity. 


91.  Non  possumus,  quin  alii  a  nobis  dissentiant ,  recusare,  We 
cannot  object  to  others  dissenting  jfro??i  us. 

Minimum  abfuit  ( impers .)  Octavianus  quin  periret,  Oc- 
tavianus  was  very  near  perishing.  (Or,  But  a  little 
more,  and  Octavianus  would  have  perished.) 


92.  Vocabulary  15.  (Words  and  phrases  followed  by  quin.) 


Not  to  object, 

To  be  very  near,  to  be  within  a 
very  little, 

Not  to  be  far  from, 

To  kill, 

Of  iron,  iron-hearted, 

Children, 


non  recusare. b 

minimum  abesse  (to  be  used  imper¬ 
sonally). 

haud  multum  ‘abesse,  or  haud  procul 
abesse  (impersonally), 
interficere,  io,  fee,  feet, 
ferreus,  a,  um. 
libgri  (plur.). 


b  From  rt  and  cauna. 


$  15.  93-97.] 

QUOMINUS. 

To  love, 

amare,  av,  at. 

A  letter, 

literte  (plur.). 

Truly, 

vere. 

The  soul, 

animus,  i,  m. 

The  mind, 

mens,  mentis,0  f. 

Immortal, 

immortalis,  is,  e. 

Exercise  15. 

93.  He  was  within  a  little  of  being  killed.  It  cannot  be  denied 
that  it  is  disgraceful  to  break -one’s  word.  It  cannot  be  denied 
that  duty  commands  us  to  keep  (75)  our  promises.  I  am  within  a 
very  little  of  being  most  miserable.  No  one  is  so  iron-hearted  as 
not  to  love  his  own  children.  I  cannot  but13  send  you  a  letter 
daily.  That  you  may  be  able  to  learn  much,  do  not  learn  many 
things.  The  truly  wise  man  will  never  doubt  that  the  soul  is 
immortal.  I  will  not  object  to  your  banishing  me.  I  will  not 
object  to  your  all  leaving  the  city.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  the 
rational-faculty  should  (debeo)  command  the  heart.  It  cannot  be 
that  the  mind  is  not  immortal.20 


§  15.  Quominus. 

»  94.  Verbs  of  hindering  are  generally  followed  by  quominus . 

*  This  quo  minus  (by  which  the  less)  =  ut  eo  minus  (that  the  less  by  it). 

*  95.  With  verbs  of  fearing,  4  that  ’  must  be  translated  by,  4  ne  ;* 
‘  that  not  ’  by  4  ut.’  ' 

*  a)  4  That  not  ’  may  also  be  translated  by  4  ne  non,’  which  is  stronger 
than  (ut.' 

96.  [C.  xv.]  After  verbs  of  fearing ,  the  En g.  future  and  the  participial 
substantive  are  translated  by  the  present  or  imperfect  subjunctive  with 
ut  or  ne. 

97.  ( a )  Quid  obstat  quominus  Caius  sit  beatus  ?  What  pre¬ 

vents  Caius  from  being  happy  ? 

(Or,  qui4  obstat  Caiod  quominus  sit  beatus  ?) 


*  c  Anima,  the  breath  of  life,  the  vital  principle  (common  to  all  living  things). 
Animus,  4  the  soul,'  the  mind  with  its  passions,  emotions,  appetites,  &c.,  4  the 
heart.'  Mens ,  the  intellectual  faculty ;  the  rational  faculty.  Hence  animus  should 
be  used  for  mind,  when  it  means  disposition ,  spirit,  &c. 

»  d  With  quid  obstat  (especially  when  the  person  is  represented  by  a  pron.  of  the 
first  or  second  person),  the  dat.  is  generally  omitted.  Unless  it  be  a  pron.,  it 


44 


QUOMINUS. 


[§  15.  98-100 


( 'b )  (  Vereor  ne  veniat,  Ifear  that  he  will  come. 

(  Vereor  ut  veniat,  Ifear  that  lie  will  not  come . 

/  98.  {Eng)  What  prevents  Caius from  being  happy? 

( Lat .)  What  prevents,  by  which  Caius  should  be  the  less  happy? 

99.  Vocabulary  16. 

(Verbs  that  may  be  followed  by  quominus.) 


To  prevent, 

To  deter, 

To  hinder, 

It  is  owing  to  Caius  that, 
To  endure, 

To  fear, 

Nothing, 

To  obey, 

To  increase, 

Bv  sea  and  land, 


obstare,  obstlt,  obsttt  ( dat .). 
deterrere,  de^erru,  deterrit. 
impedire,  Ivi,  Itum, 
per  Caium  stat  quominus,  &c. 
sustinere,  tinu,  tent, 
vereri,  veritus ;  timere ;  metuSre,  me¬ 
tui.® 

nihil  {indeclinable). 
parere,  ui  itum  {dat.). 
augere,  aux,  auct,  trans. ;  crescSre  crev, 
cret,  {intrans). 
terra  marique. 


Exercise  16. 


[Js  quotidie  or  indies  used  of  daily  increase  or  decrease  ?J 
100.  What  prevents  us  from  doing  this  ?  Nothing  prevents 
)ou  from  doing  this.  Nothing  deters  a  wise  man  from  obeying 
the  laws  of  virtue^  Nothing  deterred  Caius  from  obeying  the 
laws.  I  fear  that  I  shall  not  endure  such10)  labours.  I  fear  that 
he  will  not  be  able  to  endure  such  labours.  I  fear  that  I  shall 
increase  your  labours.  What  prevents  us  from  waging  war  by 
sea  and  land  ?  What  prevents  you  from  carrying  all  your  pro¬ 
perty  with  you  ?  Do  not  pretend  to  be  mad.3  It  cannot  be  de¬ 
nied  that  vice  increases  daily.  It  was  owing  to  Caius  that  we  did 
not  wage  war  by  sea  and  land. 


will  then  stand  a3  nom.  to  the  next  verb.  After  deter,  &c.,  the  acc.  should  be 
expressed,  unless  it  be  a  pronoun  of  the  first  or  second  person. 
t  ®  Timere,  metuere,  vereri,  are  all  used  for  fear;  but  (1)  if  a  reverential  or 
humble  fear  is  to  be  expressed,  vereor  should  be  used ;  (2)  if  an  anxious  fear  of 
a  threatening  evil,  metuere.  Metus  is  the  fear  of  the  mind  arising  from  a  con¬ 
sideration  of  circumstances  and  appearances :  timor,  the  fear  that  arises  from 
the  body ;  from  timidity.  (See  D.  vereri.)  Vereor,  which  expresses  the  least 
degree  of  actuaiyear,  should  be  used  to  express  doubt  or  fear  about  the  happen¬ 
ing  of  such  an  event,  or  the  truth  of  such  an  opinion.  Formidare,  ‘  to  dread,’ 
of  great  and  lasting  fear. 


§  16,  17.  101-106.]  INTERROGATIVE  WORDS. 


45 


VI. 

§  16.  Interrogative  Sentences. 

«  101.  Questions  (when  interrogative  pronouns  or  adverbs  are  not  used)  are 

generally  asked  in  Latin  by  interrogative  particles. 

*  102.  (a)  Ne  asks  simply  for  information.  ( b )  Nun  expects 

the  answer  *  no  :*  (c)  nonne ,  the  answer  ‘  yes.’ 

*  103.  N6  is  enclitic;  that  is,  always  appended  to  a  word,  and  written  as  its 

last  syllable. 

104.  (a)  Scribitne  Cams  ?  Is  Cains  writing  ? 

(b)  Num  putas  .  .  .  ?  Do  you  think  ?  (  =  you  don’t 

think,  do  you  ?) 

(c)  Nonne  putas  ,  .  ?  Don’t  you  think  ?  (  =  you  do 

think ,  don’t  you  ?) 

Quid  ?  nonne  canis  similis  est  lupo  ?  What  ?  is  not 
a  dog  like  a  wolf  ? 


§17.  Interrogative  Words. 


105.  Who  ?  (quis.)  How  ?  (qui,  abl. :  with  an  adjective , 
quam.)  How  does  it  happen  that  ?  (qui  fit  ut  .  .  ?  with  subj.) 

(  cur  (  =  cui  rei). 

Why?  \  f  ,  /  v 

*  l  quaref  (  =  qua  re).  , 

When?  (quando?)  ( Quum  is  never  interrogative.) 


Where , 

Whence, 

Whither, 


ubi,  )  f  ibi, 

unde,  >  relatives  to  <  inde,  hinc, 

quo,  )  (  eo  (huc,  illuc). 


Exercise  17. 


106.  Have  not  the  good  and  wise  been  banished  ?  Are  noi 
virtue  and  vice  contrary  to  each  other  ?  Do  men  govern  the 


*  f  Quare  (■ wherefore )  is  only  used  when  the  cause  is  decidedly  asked :  when, 
that  is,  an  answer  is  required.  Cur  is  used  whether  an  answer  is  required  or 
not:  hence  it  is  the  proper  word  in  expostulatory  and  objurgatory  sentences. 


46 


DEPENDENT  QUESTIONS. 


[§18.  107-115. 

winds  and  seasons?  [No.]  Shall  we  not  all  die?  Was  not  the 
world  made  by  design  ?  Do  we  not  owe  very  much  to  our  parents  ? 
Was  it  not  owing  to  you  that  we  did  not  leave  the  city  ?  Was 
not  Caius  within  a  very  little  of  being  killed  ?24  Were  not  the 
waves  such101  as  you  had  never  seen  before  ?  Whence  do  you 
come  ?  (or,  Where  do  you  come,  from  ?)  Did  all  promise  to  help8 
you  ?  [No.]  Did  he  not  promise  unwillingly  to  finish  the  busi¬ 
ness  ?  Do  we  not  all  hope  to  live3  a  long  while  ?  Has  he  not 
finished  the  business  satisfactorily  ?*  There  are  some  who109 
deny  that  Caius  has  finished  the  business.  There  were  some 
who  reviled  me. 


§  18.  Dependent  Questions . 

107.  A  dependent  question  is  one  that  is  connected  with  a  preceding  word 

or  sentence. 

■*  108.  Dependent  questions  follow  and  depend  on  such  words  as  to  ask, 
doubt ,  know,  or  not  know,  examine,  try ,  &c. 

»  109.  ( a )  ( h )  (c)  The  verb  in  a  dependent  question  must  be  in 
the  subjunctive  mood. 

110.  In  English,  dependent  questions  are  asked  by  whether ;  or  by  inter¬ 
rogative  pronouns  and  adverbs. 

"  111.  Since  what  and  who  are  also  relatives,  but  the  relative  is  in  Latin  a 

different  pronoun,  care  must  be  taken  to  use  quis,  quid,  (not  qui,  quod) 
in  dependent  questions. 

*  112.  [C.  xvi.]  Who ,  ivliat,  which,  are  often  dependent 
interrogatives,  especially  after  verbs  of  asking, 
knowing,  doubting,  &c. 

113.  After  most  of  these  verbs  the  dependent  sentence  stands  as  the 
accusative  to  the  transitive  verb. 

114.  The  verb  in  an  accusative  sentence  must  be  in  the  sub¬ 
junctive  mood. 

115.  ( a )  Dubito,  mm*  id  tibi  suadere  debeam,  1  imbt  whether 

I  ought  to  give  you  that  advice. 


a  Obs.  In  a  dependent  sentence,  num  is  ‘  whether ,’  and  does  no*  necessarily 
imply  that  vhe  answer  ‘no’  is  expected.  If,  however,  the  answer  ‘n*’  in  ex 
pected,  num  should  be  used,  not  ne. 


DOUBLE  QUESTIONS. 


47 


$  19.  116-119.] 


(b)  Quaesieras  ex  me,  nonne  putarem ,  &c.,  You  ha  in - 

quired  of  me  whether  I  did  not  think,  &c. 

(c)  Quis  es  ? — Nescio,  quis  sis . 

116.  Vocabulary  17. 


To  inquire, 

Of  (after  inquire), 

To  say, 

Well  =r  rightly, 

Dog, 

Like, 

Wolf, 

To  be  better,  i.  e.  a  thing  to  be 
preferred, 

I  don’t  know  whether,  I  almost 
think,  I  am  not  sure  that— not, 
Dishonourably. 


quaerSre,  quaesiv,  quaesit, 
ex  (with  ablat.). 
dicere,  dix,  diet, 
recte. 

canis,  is,  com.  gend. 
similis,  is,  e  ( dot .). 
lupus,  i,  to. 

satius  esse. 

haud  scio  an,  or  nescio  an  {with 
junct.). 
turpiter. 


} 


Exercise  18. 


117.  Where  do  you  come  from  ?  I  will  ask  him  where  he 
comes  from.  Ought  I  to  do  this  ?  I  doubt  whether  I  ought  to  do 
this.  He  asked  whether  a  dog  was  not  very  like  a  wolf.  1 
don’t  know  whether  he  has  not  said  well.  He  said  that  he  did 
not 2  know.2)  Balbus  has  not  come,  as  far  as  I  know .10  Is  it  not 
better  to  die  than  to  live  dishonourably  ?  I  will  leave  nothing  un¬ 
done  to  finish18  the  business  to  your  satisfaction .5  I  will  ask  (him) 
how  great  the  waves  were.  Who  does  not  know  how  delightful 
it  is  to  be  praised  by  the  good  ?  I  will  inquire  of  Balbus  how 
many  there  were.  There  are  some  who109  have  inquired  of 
Balbus. 


§  19.  Double  Questions.  Use  of i  an  ’  in  single  questions. 

*>  118.  ( a )  ( b )  In  double  questions  ‘  whether  ’  is  to  be  translated 

by  utrum ,  num,  or  the  appended  ne;  1  or’  by  an. 

•  Num  in  direct  questions  is  only  to  be  used  when  the  answer  ‘  no  ’  is 
expected. 

*  119.  (c)  ( d )  (e)  But  in  dependent  questions  ‘  whether  ’  is 
often  untranslated,  and  ‘  or  ’  translated  by  an,  anne ,  or  the  ap- 
pended  ne. 


48  DOUBLE  QUESTIONS.  [§  19.  120-122. 

*  120.  (f)  An  is  often  found  before  single  questions,  but  this  was  at  least 
nst  a  common  practice  with  Cicero,  &c.  When  an  is  so  used,  there  is 
always  an  ellipse  of  the  other  possibility,  which  may  generally  be  sup¬ 
plied  without  difficulty. 

(a)  The  supposition  involved  in  the  question  is  often  obviously  absurd ; 
so  that  assent  is  really  demanded  to  the  suppressed  alternative.  The 
force  of  such  a  question  may  often  be  given  in  English  by  ‘  then' 

(/?)  This  use  of  ‘an’  is  often  found  in  replies ;  between  which  and  the 
preceding  statement  an  expression  of  assent  or  dissent  must  be  supplied, 
(y)  There  is  the  same  suppression  of  the  first  supposition,  in  haud  scio, 
or  nescio  an  ;  dubito  an  ;  incertum  est  an  ;  queer o  an  ;  consulo  an ;  forsi¬ 
tan  (fors  sit  an),  &c.  ( Hartung ,  Partikellehre,  ii.  190.) 

*  HIT  ‘Or’  in  questions  is  to  be  translated  by  an  or  ne ;  never  by  aut  in  a 
proper  double  question ;  when,  that  is,  one  question  is  to  be  answered  in 
the  affirmative,  the  other  in  the  negative. 

121.  (a)  Utrum  ea  vestra  an  nostra  culpa  est  ?  Is  that  your 

fault  or  ours  ? 

**  ( b )  Permultum  interest,  utrum  perturbatione  aliqua  animi 

an  consulto  et  cogitato  fiat  injuria,  It  makes  a  very 
great  difference,  whether  an  injury  is  done  from 
some  'perturbation  of  mind,  or  deliberately  and  pur¬ 
posely. 

(c)  Stellarum  numerus  par  an  impar  sit,  incertum, 

Whether  the  number  of  the  stars  is  even  or  odd,  u 
uncertain . 

( d )  Quaeritur  unus?ie  sit  mundus  an  plures,  It  is  a  ques¬ 

tion  whether  there  is  one  world  or  more. 

(e)  Servi  liberine  sint  quid  refert  ?  What  does  it  signify 

whether  they  are  slaves  or  free  ? 

( f .)  An*  tum  quoque  est  utilis  (iracundia)  ?  Is  ( passion¬ 
ateness)  useful  even  then  ?  [Is  it  not  then  preju¬ 
dicial  ?] 

122.  Vocabulary  18. 

It  makes  a  very  great  difference,  permultum  interest. 

What  difference  is  there  1  what ) 
difference  does  it  make?  ]  quid  interest? 


a  In  the  following  passage  tne  suppressed  alternative  is  so  obvious,  that  we 
might  introduce  the  question  by  ‘or.’  Cur  misereare  potius  quam  feras  opem, 
ei  id  facere  possis  ?  an  sine  misericordia  liberales  esse  nr.n  possumus  ?  Why 
should  you  pity ,  rather  than  assist  them  if  you  can  ?  Or,  is  it  impossible  for  us  to 
be  liberal  without  pitying  ? 


MAY,  MIGHT  ;  CAN,  COULD. 


49 


§20.  123,  124.] 

There  is  no  difference. 

Beasts  (in  their  wild  state), 

To  drink, 

Wine, 

Water, 

Death, 

Sleep, 

Beginning, 

Another  =  a  second,  one  more, 
Or  not  (often  without  a  verb,  as 
the  second  member  of  a  dou¬ 
ble  question), 


nihil  interest. 

ferae. 

bibere,  bib,  bibit. 
vinum,  i,  n. 
aqua,  ae,  /. 
mors,  mortis,  f. 
somnus,  i,  m. 
initium,  i,  n. 

alter,  altera,  alterum,  Gen.  alterius,  &c. 

an  non,  or  annon,  usually  in  direct , 
necne b  in  indirect  questions. 


Exercise  19. 


123.  What  difference  does  it  make  whether  you  drink  wine  or 
water  ?  Whether  the  Romans  have  conquered  or  are  conquered, 
is  uncertain.  Was  the  world  made  for  the  sake  of  men  or 
Deasts  ?  Is  death  an  eternal0  sleep  or  the  beginning  of  another 
life  ?  It  makes  a  great  difference,  whether  death  be  a  perpetual 
sleep  or  the  beginning  of  another  life.  Whether  the  Romans 
have  conquered  or  not,  is  uncertain. 


§  20.  How  to  translate  may,  might  ;  can,  could,  &c.,  ivhen  they 

are  principal  verbs. 

124.  May;  perf.  Might  {permission).  Licet, d  it  is  permitted. 


*  4  t>  By  necne  the  questions  are  joined  copulatively,  by  an  non  adversatively.  In 
necne  therefore  the  question  is  made,  as  it  were,  one;  and  no  opinion  of  the 
speaker’s  is  implied  as  to  the  thing’s  being  so  or  not.  In  an  non  the  notions 
are  opposed  to  each  other,  either  simply ,  or  so  that  it  is  implied  that  the  one  is 
more  probable  than  the  other  {Hand).  —  The  verb  is  more  frequently  repeated 
with  necne  than  with  annon:  the  only  instance  of  necne  in  a  direct  question  is 
Cic.  Tusc.  3,  18.  Sunt  hcec  tua  verba,  n  e  c  n  e  ?  (K.)  Necne  generally  occurs  in 
dependent  questions. 

*  c  AZlcrnus,  without  beginning  or  end,  ‘eternal.'  Sempiternus  is  1  ever- 
lastirvg '  ‘ perpetual ‘ eternal ’  in  a  looser  sense,  without  reference  to  an 
eternity  without  either  beginning  or  end.  Sempiternus  is  therefore  the  right 

word  here. 

f  t  d  Licet,  it  is  permitted,  or  lawful,  by  human  law  (positive,  customary,  or 

traditional) :  fas  est,  it  is  permitted  by  divine  law  (including  the  law  of 

3 


50 


MAY,  MIGHT ;  CAN,  COULD.  [§  20.  125, 120. 


Pres.  ( 'mihi )  ire  licet,  I  may  go. 

(tibi)  ire  licet,  thou  mayest  go. 

&c. 

Perf.  ( mihi )  ire  licuit,  I  might  have  gone. 

(tibi)  ire  licuit,  thou  mighlest  have  gone. 

&c. 

125.  Can  ;  perf.  Could  ( poiver ,  possibility).  Possum,* *  can, 
am  able . 

Pres,  (ego)  facere  possum,  I  can  do  it. 

(tu)  facere  potes,  thou  canst  do  it. 

&c. 

Perf.  (ego)  facere  potui,  I  could  have  done  it. 

(tu)  facere  potuisti,  thou  couldst  have  done  it. 
&c. 

,  7  ,  .  .  \  ^  oportet,  it  behooves. 

126.  Ought;  should  (duty,  propriety)-  |  ^beo  j  0Uaht 

Pres,  (me)  facere  oportetf  j  ^  ought  to  do s  ?  (ego)  facere  debeo. 

(te)  facere  oportet  \  ^l0u  oughtest )  (tu)  facere  debes. 
v  '  r  l  to  do  (it)  S  v  7 


conscience) :  concessum  est,  it  is  'permitted ,  comprehends  both  as  a  general 
expression. 

/  e  Or,  queo  :  cannot ,  nequeo  (Inf.  quire ,  nequire ,  like  eo ).  Possum  relates  to 
the  ability  of  the  doer ;  queo  to  the  feasibility  (to  him )  of  the  thing  to  be  done. 
Possum,  I  can  do  it,  if  no  external  hinderances  occur :  queo ,  I  can  do  it,  because 
there  are  no  external  hinderances,  sufficient  to  prevent  me ;  /  am  in  a  condition 
to  do  it.  This  is  expressed  by  saying  that  possum  denotes  subjective,  queo  objec¬ 
tive  possibility  :  or  (in  Doderlein's  words)  possum  quantitative ,  queo  qualitative 
possibility.  Doderlein  observes:  “The  best  prose  writers,  as  Cicero  and  Sal¬ 
lust,  and  even  Pliny  and  other  later  authors,  frequently  use  queo,  but  (likeguis- 
quam  and  ullus )  only  in  negative  propositions :  that  is,  only  in  such  as  actually 
contain  a  negation,  or  at  least  are  of  a  negative  character.” 

*  f  Necesse  est,  expresses  necessity ;  oportet,  duty  or  propriety ;  opus  est,  advisa- 
bleness.  Debeo  is  the  corresponding  personal  form  to  oportet,  as  indigeo  to  opus 
est.  Oportet  expresses  the  moral  claim ;  debeo,  the  moral  obligation  of  a  par¬ 
ticular  person  to  satisfy  that  claim.  Debere  is  generally  supposed  to  be  de-habere, 
‘to  ha \efromi  a  person,  and  therefore  to  owe  it  to  him.  Doderlein  is  inclined 
to  refer  it  with  debilis,  to  Mu,  6evu,  to  want. 

*■  Or,  I  should  do  (it). 

Thou  shouldst  io  (if). 


MAY,  MIGHT  ;  CAN,  COULD. 


5? 


§20.  127-132.] 


127.  Perf.  (me)  facere  (  I  ought  to  have  )  ,  \  «  ,  .  . 

oportuit  \  done  (it)  $  (<¥?«)  ^oere  debm. 

(te)  facere  oportuit  j  'tohavcdml^it)  |  ((M)  facere  debuisti. 

(a)  Or,  with  the  subjunctive  governed  by  ‘  ut  ’  omitted  ; 
(ego)  faciam  oportet, h  I  ought  to  do  (it). 

(tu)  facias  oportet,  thou  oughtest  to  do  (it). 

*  128.  (fir  May,  might ;  can,  could  ;  should,  &c.,  when  they 
stand  in  principal  clauses,  are  not  auxiliary  but  principal  verbs ; 
and  must  be  translated  by  the  proper  tenses  of  licet,  possum , 
oportet,  or  deleo,  &c. 

*  129.  May,  might,  are  often  used  of  events  the  possibility  of 
which  is  granted  by  the  speaker.  May  or  might  is  then  equivalent 
to  may  (or  might)  possibly  ;  may  for  any  thing  I  know. 

C  may  happen,  )  it  is  to  be  trans- 

(a)  When  ‘  may  ’  =  may  possibly,  >  lated  by  fieri 

^  may  for  anything  1  know,  )  potest  ut . 

(Fieri  potest  ut  fallar,  I  may  be  deceived.) 

4  130.  The  perf.  infn.  after  a  past  tense  of  a  verb  expressing 
duty,  possibility,  permission,  &c.,  is  generally  to  be  translated  by 
the  pres,  infinitive. 

That  is,  the  time  is  marked  by  the  tense  of  the  verb  expressing  duty , 
&c.,  and  the  pres,  infin.  marks  the  time  relatively  to  that  verb.  If  it  is 
meant,  that  the  action  should  have  been  completed  before  the  time  spoken 
of,  the  perf.  infin.  must  be  used. 

*  131.  [C.  xvii.]  (fir  c May,’  ‘might,’  sometimes  mean  ‘  can,* 

*  could,’  and  must  be  translated  by  possum. 

*  [C.  xviii.]  HCr  The  perf.  infin.  must  be  translated  by  the 

present  infin.  after  might,  could,  ought,  unless  the 
action  is  to  be  represented  as  over  before  the  time 
to  which  might,  could,  &c.,  refer. 

*  When  the  infin.  perfect  follows  ‘ought,’  ‘ought’  is  the  perfect. 
132.  Vocabulary  19. 

To  be  the  slave  of,  servire,  servivi,  servitum  {dat.). 

To  spend,  or  lead,  a  life,  agCre,  eg,  act. 


h  Legem  brevem  esse  oportet ,  A  law  ought  to  be  short. 

Me  ipsum  ames  oportet ,  non  mea,  You  ought  to  love  me,  not  merely  things 
belonging  to  me. 


52 


APPOSITION. 


[§21.  133-136. 


* 


Virtuous,  honorable, 

Chaste, 

Moral, 

To  shed  one’s  blood, 

For  =  in  behalf  of, 

Country  =  country  of  one’s  birth, 
or  citizenship, 

To  snatch  away,  take  away, 

To  take  away  a  man’s  life, 


honestus,  a,  um. 
castus,  a,  um. 
sanctus,  a,  um. 
profundere,  fud,  fus. 
pro  (governs  ablat.).  * 

patria  ae,  f. 

eripere,  erlpu,  erept. 
vitam  alicui  i  eripere. 


Exercise  20. 


*  [N.  B.  A  parenthetical  Hhen ’  in  an  interrogative  sentence  is  used  to 

indicate  that  lan  ’  is  to  be  used.] 

133.  May  a  man  be-the-slave-of  glory  1  [No.]  Ought  we 

not  to  have  obeyed  the  laws  of  our  country  ?  What  ought  I  to 
have  done  ?  I  asked  what  I  oughtk  to  have  done  ?  No  man 
may  take  away  another’s  life.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  he  has 
led  a  very  moral'  life.  Ought  he  not  to  have  shed  his  blood  for 
his  country  ?  There  is  no  doubt,  that  he  lived  a  very  disgrace¬ 
ful'  life.  Ought'  we  {then)  to  be  the  slaves  of  glory  ?  Ought7 
he  not  to  have  obeyed  the  laws  of  virtue  ?  It  was  owing  to  you 
that28  my  life  was  not  taken  away  by  Caius. 


VII. 

■ 

§21.  Apposition. 

*  134.  When  to  a  substantive  or  personal  pronoun  there  is  added  a  sub¬ 

stantive  (without  a  preposition)  explaining  or  describing  it,  the  latter  is 
said  to  be  placed  in  apposition  to  the  former.  ‘  Alexander  the  conqueror 
of  Persia.’ 

*  135.  A  noun  in  apposition  may  be  turned  into  the  predicate  (nom.  after  the 

verb)  of  a  relative  sentence. 

136.  (a)  A  substantive  in  apposition  must  agree  in  case  with 
the  substantive  of  which  it  is  spoken. 


*  i  Obs.  The  personyrom  whom  is  put  in  the  dat.  This  dat.  may  be  explained 
thus :  it  is  the  person  towards  or  against  whom  the  action  of  snatching  away 
life  is  directed. 

k  The  pluperf.  must  here  be  used,  for  the  imperfect  would  fix  the  duty  to  the 
time  of  asking. 


APPOSITION. 


53 


$  21.  137-142.] 


1  137.  (6)  If  the  substantive  of  which  it  is  spoken  be  feminine ,  the  fern, 

form  should  be  chosen  for  the  substantive  in  apposition ,  whenever 
there  is  one. 


138.  (c)  If  the  principal  word  be  the  name  of  a  town, i  with 
urbs  or  oppidum  in  apposition  to  it,  the  verb  or  participle  gene¬ 
rally  agrees  with  the  apposition  instead  of  the  principal  noun. 

(With  this  exception,  agreement  with  the  principal  noun  is  tke  rule, 
though  a  rule  that  is  not  always  observed.) 

*  139.  ( d )  The  English  ‘ as,’  ‘  when'  for,'  standing  with  a  noun,  are  often 

omitted,  and  the  Latin  substantive  placed  in  apposition. 

140.  {Eng.)  The  city  of  Rome.  The  island  of  Cyprus. 

{Lai.)  The  city  Rome.  The  island  Cyprus. 

141.  (a)  Alexander  victor  tot  regum  atque  populorum,  Alex¬ 

ander  the  conqueror  of  so  many  kings  and  nations. 
Usus  magister  egregius,  Experience  an  admirable 
,  teacher. 

'  '  I  Philosophia  magistra  morum,  Philosophy  the  teacher 
of  morals. 

(c)  Volsinii,  oppidum  Tuscorum  opulentissimum,  totum 
concrematum  est  fulmine,  Volsinii ,  the  most  wealthy 
town  of  the  Tuscans,  was  entirely  destroyed  (burnt) 
by  lightning. 

(i d )  ^Edem  Salutis,  quam  consul  voverat,  dictator  dedi¬ 
cavit,  He  dedicated  as  dictator  the  temple  of  Salus , 
which  he  had  vowed  when  consul. 


142.  Vocabulary  20. 

To  take, 

King, 

Philosophy, 

Inventor, 

Teacher, 

Manners,  morals,  character, 
Discipline, 

Frugality, 

Parent, 

Athens, 

Branch-of-learning, 

Maker,  causer, 


cSpgre,  io,  cep,  capt. 
rex,  regis,  m. 
philosophia,  a e,  f. 
inventor,  oris ;  inventrix,  Icis, 
magister,  tri ;  magistra,  ae. 
mores,  um,  m. 
disciplina,  ae,  f. 
frugalitas,  atis,  f. 
genitor,  oris;  genitrix,  Icis. 
Athenae,  arum,  f. 
doctrina,  ae,  f. 
effector,  oris;  effectrix,  Icis. 


i  The  name  of  a  people  often  stands  with  the  substantive  civitas ,  in  apposi¬ 
tion  to  it  in  the  singular;  ‘  Car  monens  es,  quas  est  longe  firmissima  totius  pro* 
vinciae  civitas.'  Caes.  Bell.  Civ.  ii.  19. 


54 


NOMINATIVE  AFTER  THE  VERB.  [§  22.  143-140. 

Wisdom,  sapientia,  se,/. 

Happy,  beatus,  a,  um. 

An  old  man,  senex,  senis,  G.  plur.  senum. 

To  wish,  desire,  be  willing,  velle,  vblu, - 

To  blot  out,  efface,  destroy  utterly,  delere,  delev,  delet. 

Treaty,  foedus,  Sris,  n. 

To  renew,  rgnovare,  av,  at. 

Exercise  21. 

143.  Apiolse,  a  town  of  the  Latins  (Latini),  was  taken  by  king 
Tarquinius.  Philosophy  was  the  inventor'  of  laws,  the  teacher' 
4  of  morals  and  discipline.  Frugality  is  the  parenF  of  virtues.  It 
cannot  be  denied,  that  philosophy  was  the  inventor'  of  laws. 
Caius  used  to  call™  Athens  the  inventor"  of  all  branches-of- 
learning.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  wisdom  is  rightly  called  the 
maker  of  a  happy  life.  I  do  not  desire  the  same  things  as  an  old 
man,  that  I  desired  when  a  boy  (p.  14.  15,  b).  I  have  left  nothing 
undone  to  finish18  the  business  to  your  satisfaction.  It  was 
owing  to  you82  that  the  city  of  Rome  was  not  destroyed  by  fire. 
The  treaty  between  the  cities  of  Rome  and  Lavinium0  has  been 
renewed.  Has  not  the  treaty  been  renewed  between  the  cities 
of  Rome  and  Lavinium  ?  Ought  not  the  treaty  between  the 
cities  of  Rome  and  Lavinium  to  have  been  renewed  ? 


§  22.  Nominative  after  the  verb. — Attraction  of  the  predicate. 

*  144.  (a)  If  the  verb  esse,  &c.  standing  after  a  verb  that  is 
immediately  followed  by  the  infinitive,  has  a  participle  or  adjec¬ 
tive  with  it,  it  will  stand  in  the  nominative  case. 

*  145.  (b)  After  a  verb  of  wishing,  &c.p  the  accusative  of  the 
pronoun  is  sometimes  expressed,  and  sometimes  omitted,  if  it  means 
the  same  person  as  the  nom.  of  the  principal  verb. 

*  146.  (b)  If  the  acc.  is  omitted  before  the  infn the  noun  or  parti, 
ciple  with  the  infinitive  is  attracted  into  the  nom.  case . 


m  Hj3  ‘  Would  ’  or  ‘  used  to  ’  may  be  considered  as  signs  of  the  Imperfect. 
(Dicebat,  would  say ;  used  to  say.)  n  Plural. 

0  Inter  Romam  Laviniumque  urbes. 

P  Studii  et  desiderii. 


55 


§  22.  147-150.]  NOMINATIVE  AFTER  THE  VERB. 


*  147.  (c)  After  verbs  of  declaring ,  foe.'* *  the  accusative  under 
the  same  circumstances,  is  sometimes ,  but  less  commonly  omitted. 

•  148.  (c)  When  the  acc.  pronoun  is  omitted  before  the  injin. 
after  a  verb  of  declaring ,  &c.,  the  adjective  or  participle  is  gene¬ 
rally  attracted  into  the  nominative  ;  but  sometimes  not,  especially 
when  it  is  the  part,  of  the  fut.  in  rus,  esse  being  omitted. 

149.  (a)  Soleo  (possum)  esse  otiosus,  I  am  accustomed  to  be  ( 1 

can  be)  at  leisure. 

(8)  Vult  \  se'  esse  Vrind^m,  )  Hg  ^  t0  u  tU  fir$L 

(  esse  princeps,  ) 

,  \  K .,  (  se  esse  paratum,  )  ^  7  .  , 

(c)  Ait  <  r  >  tie  says  that  he  is  ready . 

(  esse8  paratus j  ) 

Facturos u  pollicentur,  They  promise  to  do  it. 

150.  Vocabulary  21.  (Of  Apposition-Verbs' )  * 


To  become,  to  be  made, 

To  turn  out, 

To  be  named  =  appointed, 

Tc  be  elected  or  chosen, 

7  o  be  made  (of  an  appointment 
to  an  office), 

To  be  born, 

To  be  considered,  or  held, 

To  seem,  appear, 

To  be  rendered, 

An  orator, 


fieri,  factus, 
evadgre,  evas,  evas. 
nominari,  nominatus, 
eligi,  electus. 

creari,  creatus. 

nasci,  natus, 
haberi,  habitus, 
videri,  visus.w 
reddi,  redditus, 
orator,  oris,  m. 


i  Sentiendi  et  declarandi. 

*  r  Cicero  is  fond  of  inserting  se  after  velle. 

*  8  In  Cicero  the  pronoun  is  seldom  omitted  except  after  fateri,  dicere ,  opinari , 
and  similar  verbs.  (Ochsner.) 

t  Bentley  says:  c  ait  esse  paratum  *  “ne  Latinum  quidem  est;”  which,  how¬ 
ever,  Kruger  thinks  is  too  much  to  say. 

♦  u  But  the  participle  of  th efut.  acc.  standing  (with  the  omission  of  esse )  for  the 

fut.  injin.  is  sometimes  attracted ,  especially  in  poetry.  ‘  Visura  et  quamvis 
nunquam  speraret  Ulixen.’  Propert.  ii.  7.  45.  ‘  Venturacpie  rauco  |  Ore  mina¬ 

tur  hiems.  Stat.  Theb.  i.  347.  So  with  other  predicates.  ‘Retulit  Ajax  |  Esse 
Jovis  pronepos .’  ‘  Acceptum  refero  versibus,  esse  nocens. ’  ‘  Sensit  medios  de¬ 
lapsus  in  hostes,’  &c.  (JC.) 

'  T  By  apposition-verbs  are  meant  the  verbs  that  make  no  complete  predicate: 
but  require  a  noun  after  them,  which  is  rather  in  apposition  to  the  subject  (the 
nom.  to  verb)  than  governed  by  the  verb. 

•  w  Tb  appear  must  be  translated  by  videri ,  when  it  means  to  seem ;  by  appa> 
rere,  when  it  means  to  come  into  sight ;  to  be  seen ;  to  be  evident. 


56 


DATIVE  AFTER  ESSE. 


[§25.  151,  152. 


A  poet, 

To  be  wont,  or  accustomed, 
To  desire. 

To  have  rather, 

Rich, 

To  begin, 

Troublesome, 

To  cease,  leave  off, 

Timid, 

To  go  on,  continue, 

By  accident, 


poeta,  se,  m. 
solere,  solitus  sum. 
cupere,  cupiv,  cuplt. 

malle,  malu, - 

dives,  divitis. 

coepisse  ;  incipere,  cep,  cept.* 
molestus,  a,  um  (with  dat.). 
desinere,  desii,  desit, 
timidus,  a,  um. 
pergeres  perrex,  perrect. 
casu. 


Exercise  22. 


151.  I  had  rather  be-in-good-health'  than  be  rich.  I  begin  to 
be  troublesome  to  you.  Cease  to  be  timid.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  the  boy  will  turn  out  an  orator.  Do  not  continue  to  be 
troublesome  to  Caius.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  Balbus  seems 
wise  to  many  persons.  No  one  is  born  rich.  No  one  becomes 
good  by  accident''.  Numa  Pompilius  was  made  king.  It  was 
owing  to  you  that12,2 1  was  not  made  king.  He  promises  to  perform3 
the  business  ( omit  esse).  No  one  can  be  happy  without  virtue. 
There  is  no  doubt,  that  no  man  can  be  happy  without  virtue.  I 
had  rather  be  a  good  man,  than  seem  (one).  Many  persons  can¬ 
not  turn  out  orators.  A  poet  is  born,  not  made.  Was  the  world 
made  by  accident  or  by  design  ? 


§  23.  Dative  after  esse. 

%  152.  (a.  b .  c.  d .)  When  esse ,  &c.,  having  the  same  subject  as 
the  principal  verb,  follows  a  verb  that  governs  the  dative ,  if  the 


*  *  Coepi  has  only  the  tenses  derived  from  the  perf.  Coeptus  est  is  used  for 
its  perf.  before  pass,  infinitives.  So  desitus  est  (ceased),  though  more  rarely. 
( Zumpt .)  When  he  adds  that  the  perf.,  pluperf,  and  fut.  perf.  have  respectively 
the  meanings  of  the  pres.,  imperf ,  and  simple  future,  I  believe  him  to  be  mis¬ 
taken,  for :  (1)  In  many  passages  coepi  has  certainly  the  meaning  of  the  perf. 
(2)  In  many  more,  I  think  in  all,  the  Latin  idiom  requires  one  of  the  perfect, 
where  we  should  use  one  of  the  imperfect  tenses.  Coepi  is  regularly  joined  only 
with  the  infin.  :  incipio  with  (infin.  or)  a  noun  (as  its  subject  or  object):  and 
coepi  dwells  more  on  the  action  begun ;  incepi  gives  more  prominence  to  the 
keginning  that  is  made,  and  is  altogether  more  emphatic.  (D.) 


DATIVE  AFTER  ESSE. 


57 


§23.  153-155.] 


accus.  pron.  is  omitted,  the  noun  after  esse  either  remains  in  the 
accus.  or  is  ( more  commonly )  attracted  into  the  dative  J 

153.  (a)  Expedit  bonas  esse  vobis,  It  is  expedient  for  you  to  be 
good  women. 

(b)  Licet  esse  beatis ,  They  may  be  happy  (if  they  please). 

(c)  Medios  esse  non  licet,  We  may  not  be  neutral. 

( d )  Mihi  negligenti  esse  non  licet,* *  I  may  not  be  negligent. 


154.  Vocabulary  22. 


*  (Verbs  in  the  third  person  governing  the  dat.,  and  often  used  with  a 


sentence  as  their  subject.) 
It  is  permitted, 

I  have  leisure, 

It  is  given, 

It  is  expedient, 

It  is  profitable, 

It  is  injurious,  hurtful, 
Negligent, 

Neutral, 

Luxurious, 


licet. 

vacat  mihi  (but  dat.  of  pronoun  gener¬ 
ally  omitted  when  the  person  is 
known). 

datur,  datum  est. 
expedit. 

prodest,  profuit,  &c. 
nbcet. 

negligens,  tis. 
medius,  a,  um. 
luxuriosus, a  a,  um. 


Exercise  23. 


155.  Let  us  be  permitted15  to  be  miserable.  Let  us  be  per¬ 
mitted  to  be  neutral.  There  is  no  doubt  that  no  man  may  be  neu¬ 
tral.  It  is  injurious  to  be  negligent.  There  is  no  doubt  that  it 
is  expedient  for  all  to  be  good.  Many  persons  doubt  what  is  ex¬ 
pedient  for  them.  It  is  not  given  to  all  to  be  wise.  It  is  expe¬ 
dient  for  no  man  to  be  luxurious.  I  have  no  leisure  to  be  luxu¬ 
rious.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  few  have  leisure  to  be  luxurious. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  it  is  profitable  to  all  to  spend  a  virtuous' 
life.  There  is  no  doubt  that  a  wise  man  would  rather  be-in-good- 
health''  than  be  rich.  There  is  no  doubt  that  no  one  becomes 
good  by  chance.  Had  you  rather  be  rich,  or  be-in-good-health  1 


•  y  The  gen.  and  ablat.  are  never  attracted  in  this  way.  We  may  not  say : 
'Interest  Ciceronis  esse  eloquentis ‘ damnor  a  nolente  esse  bono’  (K.) 

*  ‘  Per  quam  non  licet  esse  negligentem ’  (sc.  mihi).  (Catull.) 

*  a  Adjectives  in  dsus,  (u )lentus,  idus,  denote  being  full  of  what  the  root  ex* 

piesses. 

o  Let-it-be-permitted  to  us. 


* 


3* 


THE  GENITIVE. 


58 


[§24.  156-161 


I  asked  him  whether  he  had  rather  be-in-good-health  or  be  wise. 
You  oupdit  not  to  have  beenlQ)  neutral. 

o 


VIII. 


§  24.  The  Genitive. 


156.  (a)  The  Romans  often  used  a  dependent  genitive  where 
we  use  prepositions  ;  in,  for,  with,  &c. 


i  157.  Almost  every  substantive  that  depends  so  closely  on  another  as  to 
form  almost  one  notion  with  it,  may  in  Latin  be  expressed  by  the  geni¬ 
tive ,  no  matter  what  preposition  we  should  use  in  English. 

'  158.  The  genitive  is  joined  attributively  to  its  substantive,  and  as  no  two 
languages  exactly  agree,  it  often  happens  that  what  one  language  ex¬ 
presses  by  an  adjective ,  another  for  want  of  an  adjective  would  express 
by  the  genitive  case.  Hence — 

*  159.  (6)  Where  we  use  the  genitive  or  the  preposition  (of’  with  a  substantive, 
an  adjective  may  often  be  used  in  Latin. 


■’* 160.  (c)  Where  we  use  a  substantive  with  an  adjective  agree¬ 
ing  with  it,  an  adjective  in  the  neuter  is  often  used  in  Latin,  with 
I  a  genitive  governed  by  it. 

(a)  These  adjectives  are  indefinite  numerals  and  demonstrative  pronouns. 
They  are  only  used  as  quasi-substantives  (governing  the  gen.)  in  the 
nom.  and  acc.  singular. 

•  (/?)  The  following  are  peculiar  phrases :  id  temporis,  at  that  time :  id 
aetatis,  of  that  age:  quid  aetatis  7  of  what  age? 

161.  (a)  Gratia  beneficii, c  Gratitude  for  a  kindness.  Mu¬ 
lierum  Sabinarum  inj urice,  The  wrongs  done  to 
the  Sabine  women.  Luctus  filii,  Grief  for  his 
son.  Suarum  rerum  fiducia,  Confidence  in  his 
own  affairs.  Pyrrhi  regis  bellum,  The  war  with 
king  Pyrrhus. 

(b)  Res  alienee,  The  affairs  of  others  (or,  Other  people’s 
affairs).  Causa  regia,  The  royal  cause  ;  or,  The 


**  c  1  The  genitive  is  subjective ,  when  it  denotes  that  which  does  something, 
or  to  which  something  belongs :  it  is  objective ,  when  it  denotes  that  which  is 
the  object  of  the  feeling  or  action  spoken  of.  The  objective  genitive  usually  fol¬ 
lows  the  noun  on  which  it  depends.’  (Z.) 


§  24.  162.] 


THE  GENITIVE. 


59 


king’s  cause.  Timor  externus ,  Fear  from  without ; 
fear  of  foreign  enemies. 

(c)  Quantum  voluptatis,  Hoiv  much  pleasure.  Aliquid 
temporis,  Some  time.  Nimium  temporis,  Too 
much  time.  Multum  boni,  Much  good.  Plus  boni, 
More  good.  Quid  novi  ?  (what  of  new  ?  =) 
What  new  thing  ?  what  news  ? 

*  (Obs.  Boni,  mali,  novi,  falsi,  are  used  as  substantives  after 


Jiese  neuters .) 

162.  Vocabulary  23. 

Gratitude, 

Benefit,  favour, 

Weight,  burden, 

Heavy, 

Light, 

Flight,  escape  from, 

Labour, 

Remedy, 

Anger, 

To  overpower,  (by  a  violent  emo¬ 
tion,) 

Care, 

Not  one’s  own ;  of  others, 

Affair, 

Difficult, 

Silver, 

Gold, 

Nature, 

Of  Abdera, 

Advantage  =  profit,  gain, 

To  receive  or  gain  advantage, 

Replies;  says  he, 

Compassion,  pity, 

Poor, 

What, 

Too  much, 

More, 


gratia,  a e,/. 
beneficium,  i,  n. 
bnus,  6ris,  n. 
gravis,  is,  e. 
lSvis,  is,  e. 
fuga,  33,/. 
labor,  oris,  m. 
remedium,  i,  n. 
ira,  ae,  /. 

^  frangSre,  freg,  fract  (literally  to  break). 

cura,  ae,/. 
alienus,  a,  um. 
res,  rei,/. 
difficilis,  is,  e. 
argentum,  i,  n. 
aurum,  i,  n. 
rerum  natura. 

Abderites.0 
emolumentum,  i,  n. 
emolumentum  capere;  cep,  capt. 

;  inquit  (always  following  a  word  or  two 
of  the  reply), 
misericordia,  ae,/. 
pauper,  paupSris. 
quid, 
nimium, 
plus.f 


e  Names  from  one’s  native  town  end  in  Ensis  ;  Anus  (from  towns  in  o,  <b)  ; 
Inus  with  I  (from  towns  in  ia ,  turn) ;  as,  G.  atis  (from  towns  in  um).  From 
Greek  nouns  the  adjectives  generally  end  in  ius  (often  with  some  change  of 
root) ;  also  in  ites ,  ites ,  idtes ;  and  in  ceus  from  a.  Those  from  towns  of  Greek 
origin ,  but  not  in  Greece ,  usually  end  in  inus.  (Z.) 
t  Plus,  pluris,  only  in  the  sing.  Plur.  plures,  plura ,  G.  plurvum,  Ac. 


60 


THE  GENITIVE. 


[§25.  163-16». 


How  much, 
Much, 
Nothing, 
No  time, 


quantum. 

multum. 

nihil  (indecl.  neut.  subst.). 
nihil  tempbris. 


Exercise  24. 

163.  Is  gratitude  for  a  benefit  a  heavy  weight  ?  [No.]  Is  not 
death  an  escape  from  labours  %  There  is  no  escape  from  death. 
Are  there  not  many  remedies  against  anger  ?  Good  men  are 
often  overpowered  by  compassion  for  the  poor.  The  care  of 
other  people’s  affairs  is  difficult/.  We  all  lose  too  much  time. 
Is  there  more  silver  or  gold  in  nature  ?  It  was  cwing  to  you22 
that  I  did  not  keep  my  promises.  We  are  now  of  such  an  age, 
that  we  ought  to  hear  all  things7  courageously.  It  cannot  be  de¬ 
nied  that  Pythagoras  of  Abdera  was  a  very  great  philosopher. 
Antisthenes  was  asked  what  advantage  he  had  received  from  {ex') 
philosophy.  Antisthenes,  being  asked  what  advantage  he  had 
received  from  philosophy,  ‘  To  be  able,’&  says  he,  1  to  converse 
with  myself. ’6)  How  much  time  do  we  all  lose  !  It  cannot  be 
denied  that  we  all  lose  much  time.  There  were  some109  who 
lost  much  time. 


§  25.  The  Genitive  continued.  (Partitives.  Genitivus  Qualitatis. 

164.  A  partitive  adjective  is  one  that  expresses  some  individuals  consid¬ 
ered  as  parts  of  a  larger  number  or  body. 

Partitive  adjectives  are,  therefore,  such  as  which ,  every,  each ,  both, 
some ,  &c.,  with  ordinal  numerals,  comparatives ,  and  superlatives. 

*  165.  (a)  A  partitive  adjective  governs  a  noun  in  the  genitive. h 

#  166.  The  gender  of  the  partitive  adjective  is  generally  the  gender  of  the 
governed  genitive,  because  that  expresses  the  thing  meant. 

167.  (6)  But  sometimes  the  genitive  is  the  name  of  a  country  of  which  the 
person  is  one  inhabitant:  of  course  then  the  adjective  agrees  with  man 
understood. 

v  168.  (c)  Also  when  a  superlative ,  or  solus,  &c.,  governs  a  gen., 


z  Ut  possim. 

*  b  Partitives  are  often  followed  by  the  prepositions  meaning  from,  out  of, 
amongst  (e,  inter,  de),  instead  of  by  the  genitive.  « 


THE  GENITIVE. 


61 


§25.  169-175.] 

and  is  also  (with  the  gen.)  spoken  of  another  substantive,  the 
partitive  agrees  in  gender ,  not  with  the  gen.,  but  with  the  other 
substantive. 

*  169.  ( d )  A  substantive  having  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  and 
describing  a  former  substantive,  stands  in  the  genitive  or  ablative. 

%  (It  maybe  used  attributivdy  o r predicatively ;  as  an  adjective,  that  is, 
to  the  substantive,  or  after  the  verb  to  be.) 

*  If  the  description  be  merely  numerical ,  the  genitive  only  can  be  used. 

170.  (e)  Opus  est>  ( there  is  need)  is  followed  by  an  ablative  oj 
what  is  needed.*  The  person  who  needs  must  be  put  in  the  dative. 

*  171.  ( f )  After  opus  est ,  an  English  substantive  is  often  translated  by  a  pas¬ 

sive  participle. 

f  172.  (g)  But  the  thing  needed  is  often  the  nom.  to  the  verb  sum  ; 
or  the  ace.  before  esse. 

*  §£jf*  In  this  construction  the  verb  sum  will  agree,  of  course,  with 
its  nom. 

*  In  the  former,  it  is  always  in  the  third  person  sing. ;  opus  being  its 
real  nom. 

173.  {Eng.)  r  I  have  need  of  food. 

{Lot.)  J  (1)  There  is  a  business  to  me  with  food  {abl.  without  prep.). 
[  or  (2)  $  Food  is  a  business  to  me. 

(  These  things  are  a  business  to  me. 

The  second  construction  is  preferred  with  neuter  pronouns  and  ad¬ 
jectives.  (Z.) 

174.  How  many  are  there  of  you  ?  —  how  many  are  you  ? 

There  are  very  many  of  you,  =  you  are  very  many. 

Few  of  whom  there  are,  —  who  are  few. 

%  When  ‘of*  with  a  demonstrative  or  relative  pronoun  follows  a  plu¬ 
ral  numeral  or  superlative,  the  numeral  often  expresses  all  who  are 
meant  by  the  pronoun  ;  and  then  the  pronoun  and  the  numeral  must 
be  in  the  same  case  in  spite  of  ‘  of  \k 

%  175  [C.  xix.]  fjT  ‘  Of  you,' 1  of  us,'  are  not  to  be  translated  after  how  many , 
or  other  numerals,  when  the  whole  party  are  spoken  of. 


i  Opus  est  {it  is  a  task  or  business).  Grotefend,  comparing  the  Greek  Zpyot 
c(ttl  rtvos,  thinks  that  the  ablative  originally  expressed  the  means  by  which  the 
business  is  to  be  accomplished.  Probably  opus  esse  had,  in  various  construc¬ 
tions,  come  to  have  nearly  the  meaning  of  to  be  necessary  or  required:  and  then 
other  constructions  were  commonly,  or  occasionally,  used  before  the  ablative 
prevailed.  Plautus  uses  even  the  accusative ,  as  if  it  were  the  object  required: 
the  gen.  is  still  sometimes  found  :  probably  the  preference  was  at  last  given  to 
the  abl.,  from  that  being  the  usual  case  after  verbs  of  needing,  or  requiring. 

k  Consider,  therefore,  after  such  words,  whether  the  pronoun  expresses  more , 
or  no  more,  than  the  numeral. 


62 


THE  GENITIVE. 


[§25.  1.76,  177. 


(d) 


When  of  us,  of  you,  are  omitted,  the  verb  will  be  of  th e  first  and  sec 
ond  pers.  respectively. 

176.  (a)  Uter  vestrum  ?  Which  of  you  ?  Alter  consulum, 

One  of  the  consuls.  Graecorum  oratorum  prcestan- 
tissimus,  The  best  of  the  Grecian  orators. 

(b)  Plato  totius  Grcecice  doctissimus ,  Plato  the  most  learned 

man  of  all  Greece. 

(c)  Hordeum  est  frugum  mollissimum ,  Barley  is  the  softest 

species  of  corn. 

Vir  summo  ingenio ,i  A  man  of  the  greatest  ability. 
Vir  excellentis  ingenii ,  A  man  of  distinguished  ability. 
Ingentis  magnitudinis  serpens,  A  serpent  of  immense 
size. 

Classis  septuaginta  navium ,  A  fleet  of  seventy  ships, 
(e)  Acuto  homine  nobis  opus  est,  We  have  need  of  an  acute 
man.  Quid  opus  est  verbis  ?  What  need  is  there 
of  words  ? 

(/)  Properatom  opus  est,  It  is  necessary  to  make  haste. 

(, g )  Quarundam  rerum  nobis  exempla  permulta  opus  sunt, 
Of  some  things  we  have  need  of  a  great  many 
examples. 

177.  Vocabulary  24. 

Which  (of  two),  uter,  utra,  utrum;  g.  utrlus. 

Each  (do.),  uterque  ;  g.  utrlusque. 

Another ;  one  (of  two  things),  a  )  a|  a|t  alterum  aIt6.iu9. 
second ;  one  more,  > 


*  *  i  According  to  the  German  grammarians,  the  gen.  denotes  a  permanent ,  the 
abl.  a  temporary  state.  Grotefend  says,  the  gen.  is  used  of  a  thoroughly  inhe¬ 
rent  and  permanent  quality,  penetrating  the  whole  being,  and  making  the  thing 
what  it  is :  whereas  the  abl.  is  used  of  any  part  or  appendage  of  the  thing  spo¬ 
ken  of,  and  only  so  far  as  it  manifests  itself;  which  part  or  appendage,  more¬ 
over,  may  be  accidental  and  temporary.  To  establish  this  he  quotes :  “  Murena 
mediocH  ingenio,  sed  magno  studio  rerum  veterum,  multae  industriae  et  magni 
laboris  fuit.”  ‘Murena  showed  but  moderate  talents,  though  a  great  zeal  for 
antiquarian  pursuits ;  industry  and  laborious  perseverance  constituted  his  char¬ 
acteri  Why  not  as  well  or  better,  ‘  He  showed  great  industry  and  persever¬ 
ance  ;  but  his  mind  was  ( essentially ,  and,  permanently )  one  of  little  power, 
though  with  a  great  fondness  for  antiquity  V  Was  his  ingenium  (the  in-bom 
power  of  his  mind)  a  less  permanent  quality  than  his  industria  ?  Zumpt  says  : 
‘  With  esse,  Cicero  seems  to  prefer  the  abll 

*  f  m  Properare  is  used  of  a  praiseworthy  haste  for  the  attainment  of  a  purpose ; 


THE  GENITIVE. 


6.1 


'  §  25.  178.] 


Of  Miletus, 

Greek, 

Roman, 

To  predict,  foretell, 
Eclipse, 

Sun, 

Body, 

Food,  meat, 
Drinking,  drink. 
Serpent, 

Immense, 

Size, 

Lemnos, 

To  find,  discover, 


Milesius  (162,  e). 

Graecus,  i,  m. 

Romanus,  i,  m. 
praedicere,  dix,  diet, 
defectio,  onis ,/. 
sol,  solis,  m. 
corpus,  corpdris,  n. 
clbus,  i,  m. 
potio,  onis,/. 
serpens,  entis,  com.gend. 
ingens,  ingentis, 
magnitudo,  inis,/. 

Lemnos,11  i ,/. 

invenire,  ven,  vent ;  reperire,  repgr, 
repert.0 

consuetudo,  inis,/, 
natura,  ae,/ 

(often  argentum,  i,  n.  silver), 
avbcare,  av,  at. 
conjunctio,  onis,/. 


Custom, 

Nature  (i.  e.  a  man’s  nature), 

Money, 

To  draw  away, 

Connection, 

Honour  (i.e.  probity,  trustworthi-  )  f  j^gg  ej  y* * 

ness),  )  ’  ’ 

(  making  haste,  }  properato. 

There  is  need  of)  deliberation,  >  consulto. 

(  prompt  execution,  )  mature  facto. 

Exercise  25. 


178.  One  of  them  was  a  Greek,  the  other  a  Roman.  ThalesP 
of  Miletus  was  the  first  of  the  Greeks  who8  predicted  an  eclipse 
of  the  sun.  I  did  the  same  when  (139)  consul.  He  «ays  (ait*) 


festinare  =  to  be  in  a  hurry.  An  adj.  properus  was  formed  from  pro  ^  forth 
forwards ),  as  inferus,  exterus,  from  their  prepositions.  (D.) 

*  n  Greek  nouns  in  os  of  the  second  decl.  are  declined  like  Latin  nouns  of  the 
2d,  but  have  acc.  on  or  um. 

»  »  0  ‘  Invenio ,  properly  to  come  upon  any  thing,  expresses  the  general  notion  of 
to  find :  reperio ,  like  to  find  out  and  to  discover ,  implies  that  the  thing  found  was 
before  hid ,  and  was  sought  for  with  pains.’  (D.).  Crombie  observes  that  inve¬ 
nire  is  the  proper  word  for  the  faculty  itself;  when  we  talk,  that  is,  of  the  power 
of  discovering  generally,  without  adding  what;  i.  e.  without  an  accusative  after 
it.  He  quotes  from  Cicero ,  ‘vigere,  sapere,  invenire ,  meminisse,’  a  passage 
which  plainly  proves  that  invenire  does  not  exclude  the  notion  of  searching , 
though  it  does  not  (like  reperire)  necessarily  imply  it. 
p  Thales,  ctis. 

►  ^  q  Fari  is  to  tcuk  r  use  articulate  speech:  loqui,  to  speak  or  talk  (opposed  to 
taclre ,  to  be  silent) ;  dicere  is  to  say ,  the  transitive  form  of  loqui.  As  distin- 


64 


THE  GENITIVE. 


[§25.  17b. 

that  there  is  no  occasion  for  making-haste.  The  body  has  need 
of  much  food.  Are  not  serpents  of  immense  size  found  in  the 
island  of 27  Lemnos  ?  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  he  is  a  man  of 
no  honour.  What  need  have  we  of  your  authority  ?  It  cannot 
be  denied  that  the  body  has  need  of  meat  and  drink.  (We) 
have  need  of  deliberation.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  we  have 
need  of  deliberation.  Is  not  custom  a  second  nature?  Yerres 
used  to  say52  that  he  had  need  of  many  things.  How  much  money 
have  you  need  of?  I  left  nothing  undone  to18  draw-away  Pom- 
pey  from  his  connection  with  Csesar  (156).  How  many  are  there 
of  you  ?l  I  will  ask  how  many  there  ar e  of  them. 


179.  The  top  of  the 
mountain. 

N.  summus  mons, 
G.  summi  montis, 
&c. 


The  middle  of  the 
way. 
media  via, 
mediae  vise, 

&c. 


The  rest  of  the 
work. 

reliquum  opus, 
reliqui  operis, 
&c. 


So,  ima  quercus,  the  bottom  (or  foot)  of  the  oak ;  universa 
Graecia,  the  whole  of  Greece  :  sapientia  prima,  the  beginning  of 
wisdom  :  extremus  liber/  the  end  of  the  book ,  &c. 

'  Some  English  substantives  relative  to  position ,  are  often  translated 
into  Latin,  by  adjectives  agreeing  with  their  substantives.  Such  are, 
end ,  middle,  whole,  top,  &c. 

These  adjectives  generally  stand  before  their  substantives.® 


guished  from  loqui,  dicere  expresses  a  more  artificial  or  studied  speech,  loqui 
being  to  speak  in  the  style  of  ordinary  conversation.  As  distinguished  from 
ajo,  dicere  is  to  speak  for  the  information  of  the  hearers,  ajo  expressing  the  as¬ 
sertion  of  the  speaker,  as  the  opposite  of  nego.  Hence  ajo  is  Isay  —  I  assert , 
affirm,  maintain  (but  somewhat  weaker  than  these  words).  Inquit  (which  Do- 
derlein  derives  from  injicit,  throws-in)  is  used  to  introduce  the  words  of  an¬ 
other,  and  also  the  objections  which  we  suppose  another  to  make.  (Bentley  )  It 
is  also  used  in  a  vehement  re-assertion  (‘  one,  one  I  say'). 

r  The  adjective  so  used  does  not  distinguish  its  substantive  from  other  things 
of  the  same  kind,  but  a  part  of  itself  from  another  part.  Thus  summu. *  mons 
is  the  mountain  where  it  is  highest :  not,  the  highest  of  a  number  of  mountains. 

■  Not,  however,  always,  e.  g.  ‘sapientia  prima'  ( Hor .),  and,  ‘In  hac  insula 
txtremd  est  fons  aquae  dulcis,’  &c.  (Cic.  Verr.  4.  118.) 


$25.  180,  181.] 


THE  GENITIVE. 


6** 


180.  Vocabulary  25. 


The  Alps, 

Cold, 

Snow, 

To  melt, 

To  count,  reckon, 

Out  of, 

A  thousand, 

To  survive, 

Three  hundred, 

To  swear, 

Moon, 

Lowest, 

Planet, 

Master  =  ‘master  of  a  house,’ 
‘  owner  of  any  property,’  slaves 
as  well  as  any  other. 

Wool, 

Black, 

White, 

Some — others, 

Only, 

Chameleon, 

To  nourish,  support, 

River, 

Neither — nor, 


Alpes,  ium,  f. 
frigus,  dris,  n. 
nix,  nivis,  f. 
liquescere,  lieu,  — — 
numerare,  av,  at. 
ex  ( ablat .). 

mille  (indecl.  in  sing.  In  plur.  millia, 
ium,  ibus,t  &c.) 
superesse,  superfui  {dat.). 
trecenti,  ae,  a. 
jurare,  av,  at. 
luna,  ae,  f. 
infimus,  a,  um. 
planeta,  or  es,  ae,  m. 
dominus,  i,  m. ;  herus,  i,  m.  is  a  master 
only  in  relation  to  his  servants  oi 
slaves. 
lana,  ae,  f. 
niger,  gra,  grum. 
albus,  a,  um. 
alii — alii. 

solus,  a,  um,  G.  solius, 
chameleon,  ontis,  or  onis,  m. 
alSre,  alu,  alit  or  alt. 
flumen,  inis,  n. 

nec  or  neque,  followed  by  nec  or 
neque.u 


Exercise  26. 


181.  On  the  top  of  the  Alps  the  cold  is  so  great,  that  the  snow 
never  melts  there.  Count  how  many  there  are  of  you.31  Out 
of  ( ex )  so  many  thousands  of  Greeks  (but)  few  of  us  survive. 
Three  hundred  of  us  have  sworn.  The  top  of  the  mountain  was 
held  by  T.  (Titus)  Labienus.  The  moon  was  considered  the 
lowest  of  the  planets.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  custom  is  a 
second  nature.  Slaves  are  of  the  same  morals  as9)  their  master. 


t  Millc  the  adj.  is  indeclinable. 

%  u  ‘  Nec  and  neque  stand  before  either  vowels  or  consonants.’  (Z.)  Mr.  Rid¬ 
dle  says:  ‘in  good  writers  nec  is  found  usually  only  before  consonants;  neque 
before  vowels.’  But  merely  taking  the  examples  as  they  are  given  in  Broder’s 
Grammar,  we  have  from  Cicero ,  ‘nec  sibi  nec  alteri;’  ‘  neque  naufragio  neque 
Incendio ‘  nec  hominum  ‘  neque  perfringi.’ 


66 


THE  GENITIVE. 


[§26.  182-184. 

Who  is  there  but9)  understands  that  custom  is  a  second  nature  ! 
Caius  promises  that  he  will  finish  the  rest  of  the  work.  Three 
hundred  of  us  have  finished  the  rest  of  the  journey.  Of  wools 
some  are  black,  others  white.  The  chameleon  is  the  only  animal 
that8  is  nourished  neither  by  meat  nor  drink.T  The  Indus  is  the 
largest  of  all  rivers. 


§  26.  The  Genitive  continued.  (Gen.  after  adjectives.) 

*  182.  Adjectives  which  signify  desire ,  knowledge ,  recollection, 

fear ,  participation,  and  their  opposites  ;  together  with  verbals  in 
ax,  and  many  of  those  that  express  fulness  or  emptiness,  govern 
the  genitive. 

*  (a)  These  adjectives  have  an  incomplete  meaning ,  and  maybe  compared 

with  transitive  verbs.  The  governed  substantive  expresses  generally 
the  object  of  some  feeling  of  the  mind. 

'  183.  ( b )  To  this  class  belong  many  participles  used  adjec- 
tively. 

(c)  In  Poetry^  the  gen.  may  almost  always  stand  after  an  adjective , 
where  its  relation  to  the  adjective  might  be  expressed  by  ‘  with 
respect  to? 

184.  (a)  Avidus  novitatis,  Greedy  of  novelty.  Insidiarum 
plenus,  Full  of  plots.  Beneficii  immemor,  Apt-to- 
forget  a  favour.  Rei  maritimae  peritissimi,  Very 
skiful  in  naval  affairs.  Magnae  urbis  capax,  Able 
to  contain  a  large  city. 

(b)  Veritatis  amans,  Attached  to  truth  ;  a  lover  of  truth. 

Amans  patriae,  A  lover  of  his  country.  Officii 
negligens,  Negligent  of  duty. 

(c)  Audax  ingenii,  Bold  of  temper ;  of  a  bold  temper. 

Insolitus  servitii,  Unaccustomed  to  slavery.  Insue¬ 
tus  laboris  ( Cces .).  Fidissima  tui  (Vir g.).  Seri 
studiorum  (Hor.).  Utilis  medendi  (Ov.). 


+  9  Potus,  us.  “  Potio  is  the  act  of  drinking ,  and  that  on  which  this  action  is 

performed  ;  a  draught ;  a  liquid  swallowed :  potus  is  drinking ,  and  drink  in  itself, 
without  reference  to  the  action .”  (R.) 

v  And  in  Tacitus ,  who  has :  vetus  regnandi ,  summus  severitatis,  &c. 


THE  GENITIVE. 


67 


§* *6.  185.] 


.’85.  Vocabulary  26. 


To  hate, 

Courage, 

Contention, 

Truth, 

Philosopher, 

Glorious, 

Jest, 

To  hesitate, 

To  undertake, 
In-such-a-manner, 

Not  even, 


Nothing  but, 

To  take  in  good  part,  to  receive 
favourably. 


Odisse*  (with  tenses  derived  from  the 
perfect), 
virtus,  utis,  f. 
contentio,  onis,  f 
veritas,  atis,  f. 
philosophus,  i,  m. 
gloriosus,  a,  um. 
jbcus,  i,  m. 
dubitare, y  av,  at. 
suscipbre,  cep,  cept. 

Ita. 

ne — quidem,  (with  the  word  the  even  be¬ 
longs  to  between  them ;  ne  jSco  qui¬ 
dem, ,  not  even  in  jest.) 
nihil  aliud  nisi ,  (the  following  adj.  is 
not  to  agree  with  nihil  but  with  the 
substantive  after  nisi.) 
boni  consfilere,*  sulu,  suit;  in  bonam 
partem  acclpbre. 


*  (Adjectives  governing  the  Genitive.) 


Mindful, 

Unmindful,  apt-to-forget, 
Negligent,  careless  of,  inatten 
tive  to, 

Greedy, 

Eagerly-desirous, 

Fond,  desirous, 

Skilled  in, 

Unacquainted  with,  ignorant  of, 


memor,  bris. 
immemor,  bris. 

negligens,  tis. 

avidus,  a,  um. 
studiosus,  a,  um. 
cupidus,  a,  um. 
peritus,  a,  um. 
rudis,  is,  e. 


*  *  Of  this  verb  the  per/.,  pluperf ,  and  fut.  per/,  are  respectively  used  for  (that 
is  where  we  should  use)  the  pres .,  imperf. ,  and  simple  fut.  This  is  the  case 
with  most  verbs  that  express  simple  emotions  and  operations  of  the  mind,  which 
are  completed  the  moment  they  exist.  The  moment  I  do  hate,  I  have  hated ;  the 
moment  I  do  know,  I  have  known. 

*  y  Dubitare,  to  hesitate,  is  generally  followed  by  inf. 

%  *  So,  aequi  boni  {or  aequi  bonique)  facere,  to  take  in  good  part;  to  he  satisfied. 

Lucri  facere,  to  tum  to  account ;  to  get  the  credit  of.  In  boni  consulere,  boni  is 
probably  a  gen.  of  the  price  or  value,  consulere  being  used  in  its  first  sense 
(according  to  Riddle)  of  ‘  to  think  upon,  whether  by  oneself  or  with  others.’  He 
derives  it  from  an  obsolete  conso,  from  which  censeo  is  derived.  Doderlein 
thinks  con-sulere  meant  originally  ‘  to  sit  down  ’  (from  the  same  root  as  soZ-ium, 
seZ-la,  and  perhaps  soZ-um),  and  that  boni  is  an  old  adv.  (of  the  same  form  as 
fieri) ;  so  that  boni  consulas  =z  bene  considas  or  acquiescas.  It  occurs  in  Q,uint., 
Sen.,  Ac.  •  not,  I  believe,  in  Cicero. 


68 


j 


THE  GENITIVE.  [§  26.  186 


A  partner, 

A  lover  of,  attached  to, 

Productive  of, 

Such  a  lover  of, 

Exercise  27. 


consors,1  tis  (; properly  adj.,  one  who  has 
the  same  lot), 
amans,  tis;  diligens,1  tis. 
efficiens,  tis. 
adeo  amans,  or  diligens. 


186.  All  men  hate  (him  who  is)  apt-to- forget  a  kindness 
Courage  is  greedy7  of  danger.  Many  are  fonder  of  contention 
than  of  truth.  Pythagoras  calls  (those  who  are)  eagerly-desirous 
of  wisdom  philosophers.  All  men  ought  to  be  mindful  of  benefits 
(received).  Cicero  has  lost  Hortensius,  the  partner*  of  his  glori¬ 
ous  labour.  That  ( Iste )  basest  of  all  men  is  the  same  that  he 
always  was.  Epaminondas  was  such  a  lover®  of  truth  that  he 
did  not  utter-a-falsehood  evend  in  jest.  We  ought  all  to  be  such 
lovers  of  our  country  as  not  toe  hesitate  to  shed  our  blood  for  it. 
I  will  warn  the  boy  not  to  become  inattentive  to  duty.  He  said 
that  he  was  not2  negligent  of  duty.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  we 
ought  all  to  be  lovers  of  our  country.  He  begs  me  to  take  these 
things  in  good  part.  They  say  that  virtue  is  not  productive  of 
pleasure.  Let  war  be  undertaken  in-such-a-manner  that  nothing 
but  peace  may  seem  (to  be)  sought  for. 


1  Soctus,  ‘  a  companion ;’  ‘  associate ;’  ‘  member  of  the  same  society  ‘  sharer 
of  the  same  fortune ;’  in  which  last  meaning  it  is  synonymous  with  consors. 
Comes ,  ‘companion,’  ‘fellow-traveller.’  Sodalis^  ‘  companion  in  amusement  or 
pleasure.’  (C.) 

Consortes  fortuna  eadem,  socios  labor  idem  ; 

Sed  caros  faciunt  schola,  ludus,  mensa  sodales 

Vir  comis  multos  comites  sibi  jungit  eundo. 

Com-it-es,  con  and  ‘i£,’  as  in  supine  of  eo. 

a  Amare  expresses  the  affection  of  love;  diligere  (properly,  to  choose  apart)  the 
preference  of  one  object  to  another.  If  therefore  any  thing  of  deliberate  choice 
or  preference  is  to  be  expressed,  diligere  should  be  used. 

b  Consors.  Socius  would  imply  that  they  shared  the  same  toil,  not  that 
Hortensius  had  a  separate  share  of  the  same  occupation. 

c  Diligens  with  gen .,  his  attachment  to  truth  being  a  principle  with  him. 
In  the  next  sentence,  amans,  because,  though  patriotism  should  be  a  principle, 
affection  for  one’s  country  is  the  thing  required. 
d  Say :  ‘  that  he  uttered  a  falsehood  not  even  in  jest.’ 

•  A  consequence  ;  not  a  purpose. 


§27.  187,  188.] 


THE  GENITIVE. 


69 


§  27.  The  Genitive  continued. 


>  187. 


188. 


(a)  (Eng.)  To  prefer  a  capital  charge  against  a  man. 

JTo  make  a  man  an  accused-person  of  a  capi. 
tal  matter. 

Aliquem  rei  capitalis  reum  facere. 


(b)  ( Eng .)  To  bring  an  action  against  a  man  for  bribery. 
( Lat .)  Aliquem  de  ambitu  reum  facere. 

(c)  (Eng.)  To  prefer  a  charge  of  immorality  against  a 

man. 

(Lat.)  Aliquem  de  moribus  reum  facere. 

(d)  (Eng.)  He  has  informed  me  of  his  plan. 

(Lat.)  Certiorem  me  sui  consilii  fecit.* 


Vocabulary  27. 


*  (Adjectives  governing  the  gen.) 


Tenacious, 

Capable  of  containing, 
Without, 

Accused  of, 

In  his  absence, 


Bribery 


Extortion, 

Assault, 

Impiety, 


tenax,  acis, 
capax,  acis, 
expers,  tis  (ex,  pars). 
reus  f  (from  res). 

absens,  tis  (adj.  agreeing  with  the  subs.). 
'ambitus,  us,  m.  from  ambire,  to  go 
round,  to  canvass.  Properly,  there¬ 
fore,  to  accuse  a  man  de  ambitu  is, 
‘  to  bring  an  accusation  about  his  can¬ 
it  *  ^  vassing:’  and  then,  as  ‘reum  facere 

de  moribus  ’  is  ‘  to  accuse  of  immoral¬ 
ity,'1  so  to  accuse  him  de  ambitu  is  ‘  to 
accuse  him  of  improper ,  illegal  can¬ 
vassing,’  i.  e.,  of  bribery, 
r  res  or  pecuniae  repetundas ;  or  repetun- 
<  dae  alone ;  properly  things  or  moneys 
'  to  be  claimed  back, 
vis  s  (violence). 
impietas,  atis,  f. 


*■  *  Certiorem  facere  may  also  be  followed  by  abl.  with  de : 

‘  Eum  de  rebus  gestis  certiorem  faciunt.’ 

*  t  “  Reos  appello  non  eos  modo  qui  arguuntur,  sed  omnes  quorum  de  re  dis¬ 
ceptatur;  sic  enim  olim  loquebantur.”  (Cic.  De  Orat.  2,  43.)  From  the  olim 
it  is  plain  that  reus  had  come  to  be  used  of  the  defendant  almost  exclusively. 

8  Vis,  vis,  — ,  vim,  vi  j  vires,  virium,  &c.  Gen.  vis  in  Tac.,  but  very 

rare. 


70 


THE  GENITIVE. 


[§  28.  189,  19f> 


To  prefer  a  charge  against, 
To  inform, 

To  learn, 

Design,  plan, 

Full, 

Danger, 


reum  facSre. 

certiorem  facSre ;  fee,  fact, 
discere,  didic, 
consilium,  i,  n. 
plenus,  a,  um. 
periculum,  i,  n. 


Exercise  28. 


189.  We  are  very  tenacious  of  those  things  which  we  learned 
as22)  boys.  The  island  of  Pharos  is  noth  capable-of-containing  a 
great  city.  They  are  going  to  prefer  a  charge  of  immorality 
against  Caius.  They  have  brought  an  action  against  Caius  for 
an  assault.  They  have  preferred  a  charge  of  impiety  against 
Caius  in  his  absence.  I  left  nothing  undone  to18  inform  Csesar  ol 
my  design.  I  fear  that  he  will  not*3  inform  me  of  his  design.  It 
is  disgraceful  to  be  without  any  learning.  I  fear  that  he  will 
not  keep  his  word.  He  promised  that  he  would4 }  leave  nothing 
undone  to  draw  away  Pompey  from  his  connection  with54 
Csesar.  There  is  no  one  but9)  believes  that  you  will  be  without 
anyi  dangers.  He  warnsk  us  that  all  things  are  full  of  danger. 
There  are  some  who109  deny  that  virtue  is  productive  ot 
pleasure. 


§  28.  The  Genitive  continued. 

190.  ( o )  Such  a  substantive  as  property,  duty,  part,  mark,  &c., 
is  often  omitted  in  Latin  after  £  to  he  so  that  to  be  is  followed  by 
a  genitive  governed  by  this  substantive,  or  an  adjective  in  the 
neuter  gender  agreeing  with  it. 

(Such  a  noun  as  officium,  munus,  indicium,  &c.,  must  be  under¬ 
stood. 

*  This  genitive  is  construed  in  various  ways  in  English :  and  therefore 


*  *  h  Non  is  ‘ not hand  is  ‘  certainly  not ,’  1  surely  not ,’  used  especially  with 
adjectives ,  adverbs ,  and  impersonal  verbs. 

%  i  ‘  Any ,’  after  expers ,  must  be  translated  by  omnis,  ‘all.’ 
t  k  When  moneo  does  not  mean  to  warn  or  advise  us  to  do  (or  not  to  do)  some¬ 
thing,  it  takes  acc.  with  injin.  (not  ut  nc). 


THE  GENITIVE. 


71 


§28.  191-200.] 

there  are  various  English  phrases  that  may  be  reduced  to  this  con¬ 
struction. 

*  191.  (a)  Such  phrases  are  ;  it  is  characteristic  of;  it  is  incumbent  on ;  it  is  for 
(the  rich,  &c.,) ;  it  is  not  every  one  who ;  any  man  may ;  it  demands  or 
requires ;  it  betrays ,  shows,  &c. ;  it  belongs  to. 

«  When  the  adjective  is  of  one  termination  (and  therefore  would  leave 
it  doubtful  whether  man  or  thing  is  meant),  it  is  better  to  use  this  con¬ 
struction. 

(‘It  is  wise;'  not  1  sapiens  est ,'  but  ‘ sapientis  est.') 

*192.  So  when  the  predicate  is  an  abstract  noun  in  the  nom.,  it  is  more 
commonly  in  theg-en.  in  Lat. — ‘It  is  madness ,'  ‘ dementiae  est.5 

*  193.  ( b )  These  genitives  are  used  in  the  same  way  with  facere,  feri ,  haberi , 

duci. 

*  194.  (c)  Verbs  of  accusing ,  condemning ,  acquitting ,  &c.,  take  a 

genitive  of  the  charge. 

,  195.  {f)  But  if  the  charge  be  expressed  by  a  neuter  pronoun,  it  stands  in  ihe 
accusative. 

«  196.  This  construction  may  be  explained  by  the  omission  of  crimine,  or 
nomine,  which  are  sometimes  expressed. 

-  197.  (c)  Instead  of  the  gen,,  the  ablat.  with  de  is  very  common. 

.  198.  (d)  The  punishment  to  which  a  person  is  condemned,  stands  generally 
in  the  ablat. ;  sometimes  in  the  gen.,  and  often  in  the  acc.  with  ad. 

t  199.  (e)  Satago, k  misereor,  and  miseresco,  govern  the  gen.  : 

verbs  of  reminding,  remembering,*  1  and  forgetting,  the  gen.  or 

accusative. 

%  But  verbs  of  reminding  rarely  take  an  accus.  unless  it  be  a  neut. 
pronoun.  Sallust  has  the  three  forms :  admonere  aliquem,  rei;  de  re; 
and  rem. 

200.  (a)  Imbecilli  animi  est  superstitio,  Superstition  is  a 
mark  of  (or  betrays)  a  weak  mind.  Judicis  est, 
It  is  the  part  (or  duty)  of  a  judge.  Est  boni 
oratoris,  It  is  the  business  of  a  good  orator.  In¬ 
genii  magni  est,  It  requires  great  abilities.  Cujus- 
vis  hominis  est  errare,  Any  man  may  err.  Meum 
est,  It  is  my  business.  Extremae  est  dementiae,  It 
is  the  height  of  madness.  Suae  ditionis  facere, 
To  reduce  to  subjection  ;  to  bring  under  his  domin¬ 
ion. 


k  Satagere  (to  be  doing  enough) :  ‘  to  have  one’s  hands  full.5 

1  When  memini  and  recordor  signify  ‘  to  make  mention  of'  memini  takes 
the  gen.,  or  ablat.  with  de ;  recordor ,  the  acc. — Memini  seldom  takes  the  acc. 
of  a  person ,  except  in  the  sense  of  remembering  him  as  a  contemporary.  (Z.) 


72 


THE  GENITIVE. 


N 


[§  28.  201. 


(5)  Tempori  cedere  semper  sapientis  est  habitum ,  It  has 
always  been  held  a  wise  thing  to  yield  to  the  times. 
(c)  Proditionis  accusare,  To  accuse  of  treachery.  De 
pecuniis  repetundis  damnari,  To  be  condemned  for 
extortion. 

(fit)  Capitis  (or  capite)  damnari,  To  be  capitally  condemned 
(or,  condemned  to  death).  Ad  bestias  condemnare, 
To  condemn  to  the  wild  beasts. 

(e)  Misereri  omnium ,  To  pity  all.  Meminisse  praeterito¬ 

rum,  To  remember  past  events  :  meminisse  beneficia , 
To  remember  kindnesses.  Ofiicii  sui  commonere, 
To  remind  a  man  of  his  duty.  Dissensionum  obli¬ 
visci,  To  forget  disagreements. 

(f)  Si  id  me  accusas,  If  you  accuse  me  of  that.  (So,  id 

me  admonuit.) 

201.  Vocabulary  28. 


To  accuse, 

To  charge  falsely,  to  get  up  a 
charge  against, 

To  prosecute, 

To  acquit, 

To  remember, 

To  forget, 

To  remind,  put  in  mind  of, 

To  pity, 

To  condemn, 


accusare, m  av,  at. 
insimulare,”  av,  at. 

postulare,0  av,  at. 
absolvere,  solv,  solut. 
meminisse, p  recordari, q  also  to  matce 
mention  of. 
oblivisci,  oblitus, 
admtinere,  commonere,  ui,  Itum, 
misereri, r miseritus,  misertus;  miseres 
cere. 

damnare,8  condemnare,  av,  at. 


m  Incusare  is  ‘  to  accuse ,’  but  not  in  a  court  of  justice, 

i  *  Properly,  ‘  to  pretend  a  thing  against  a  man.’ 

°  Literally,  ‘  to  demand ,’  i.  e.  for  punishment. 

.  p  With  tenses  derived  from  the  perf.  (See  odi,  185,  x.)  Imperat,  memento; 
pi  mementote). 

%  *  q  Meminisse  is,  ‘to  retain  in  my  recollection,'* 1  ‘to  remember :  ’  reminisci  is,  ‘to 
recall  a  thing  to  mind,’  ‘to  recollect:1  * recordari  is,  ‘to  recall  a  thing  to  mind, 
and  dwell  upon  the  recollection  of  it.’  (D.) 

\  *  r  Miserari  governs  the  acc.  Miserari  is  ‘  to  show  compassion,’  misereri ,  ‘  to 
feel  compassion,’  as  an  act  of  free  will,  implying  a  generous  mind,  and  thereby 
distinguished  from  miseret  me  tui  (I  am  miserable  on  your  account),  which  car¬ 
ries  with  it  the  portion  of  an  irresistible  feeling.  (D.) 

*  8  Damnare  aliquem  voti  (or  votorum),  is,  to  condemn  a  man  to  pay  his  vow  (oi 

vows)  by  granting  his  prayers.  Also,  damnare  votis. 


THE  GENITIVE. 


T8 


§28.  202.] 


An  Athenian, 

Atheniensis  (162,  e). 

Socrates, 

Socrates,  is,  m. 

Barbarian, 

barbarus,  i,  m. 

To  live  for  the  day,  forgetful,  that  >  .  d- 

is,  of  the  morrow, 

) 

it  is  agreed  upon,  it  is  an  allowed 

|  constat. t 

fact, 

Superstition, 

superstitio,  dnis,f. 

Feeble, 

imbecillus,  a,  uni. 

To  disturb,  agitate, 

perturbare,  av,  at. 

Constancy,  firmness  of  mind, 

constantia,  ae,  f 

To  persist, 

perseverare,  av,  at. 

Error, 

error,  oris,  m. 

Treachery, 

proditio,  onis,./*« 

Sedition, 

seditio,  onis,./. 

A  Christian, 

Christianus,  i,  m. 

Injury, 

injuria,  ae,  j. 

Adversity, 

res  adversae. 

To  condemn  to  death, 

capitis  damnare. 

To  acquit  of  a  capital  charge, 

capitis  absolvSre. 

Religion, 

religio,  onis,  f. 

Exercise  29. 

202.  The  Athenians  (falsely)  charged  Socrates  with  impiety, 
and  condemned  him  to  death .  It  is  for  barbarians  to  live  for  the 
day  (only).  It  is  an  allowed  fact,  that  superstition  is  the  mark  of 
a  feeble  mind.  It  requires  great  constancy  not  to  be  disturbed 
in  adversity.  It  is  characteristic  of  a  fool  to  persist  in  error. 
It  is  your  business  to  obey  the  laws  of  your  country.  It  is  not 
every  man  who  can  leave  life  with  an  even  mind.  It  was  owing  to 
you  that  he  did  not  accuse  Balbus  of  treachery.  He  promises* 
to  prosecute  Dolabella  for  extortion.  He  was  condemned  to  death 
by  Augustus.  Caius  was  acquitted  of  sedition  by  Augustus. 
Do  not  forget  benefits.  It  is  the  duty  of  a  Christian  to  pity  the 
poor.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  (86)  it  is  the  duty  of  a  Christian 
to  pity  the  poor.  I  fear  that  he  will  not53  easily  forget  the  inju¬ 
ry.  I  fear  that  he  will  remember  the  injury.  Did  you  not 
admonish  me  of  that  (200,/)  ?  Adversity  puts  us  in  mind  of  reli¬ 
gion.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  has  been  acquitted  of  the  capital 
charge. 


* 


t  Literally,  it  stands  together  as  a  consistent  truth. 

4 


74 


THE  GENITIVE. 


[§  29.  *203-206 


•  §  29.  The  Genitive  continued.  (Impersonal  verbs.) 

*  203.  (a)  With  interest  and  refert  (it  concerns  or  is  important)  ; 

*  1)  Ths  thing  that  is  of  importance  may  be  either  (a)  an  infin¬ 
itive  ( with  or  without  acc.)  or  (/?)  a  neuter  pronoun  (hoc,  id,  illud, 
quod :  so  that  they  are  not  quite  impersonal),  or  a  clause  intro¬ 
duced  either  (y)  by  an  interrogative,  or  (5)  by  ut  or  ne. 

%  2)  The  person  to  whom  it  is  of  importance  is  put  in  the  gen. 
with  interest  or  refert  ;  but,  instead  of  the  personal  pronouns,  a 
possessive  pronoun  is  used  in  the  ablative  feminine  :  med,  tud,  sud, 
nostra,  vestrd  :  so  cujd  sometimes  for  cujus.* 

*  3)  The  degree  of  importance  is  expressed  either  by  the  gen. 
(magni,  parvi,  quanti,  &c.)  ;  or  by  an  adverb  (multum,  plurimum , 
magnopere,  nihil,  &c.). 

*  4)  The  thing  with  reference  to  which  it  is  of  importance  is 
governed  by  ad ;  as  magni  interest  ad  laudem  civitatis,  it  is  of 
great  importance  to  the  credit  of  the  state. 

%  204.  (b)  These  impersonals ,  pudet,  piget,  pcenitet,tcedet,  miseret, 
take  an  accusative  of  the  person  feeling,  a  genitive  of  what  causes 
the  feeling. 

205.  What  causes  the  feeling  may  also  be  a  verb  (in  the  infinitive ,  or  in  an 
indicative  clause  with  quod ,  or  a  subjunctive  one  with  an  interrogative 
word). 

206.  (a)  Intelligo  quanti  reipublicce  intersit  omnes  copias  con¬ 

venire,  1  am  aware  of  what  importance  it  is  to  the 
republic,  that  all  our  forces  should  assemble. 
Interest  omnium  recte  facere,  It  is  the  interest  of  all 
to  do  right. 

Quid  nostra  refert  ?  Of  what  importance  is  it  to  us  ? 

(or,  What  does  it  signify  to  us  ?) 

Magni  interest  ad  laudem  civitatis,  It  is  of  great  im¬ 
portance  to  the  credit  of  the  state. 

Magni  interest,  quos  quisque  audiat  quotidie,  It  is  ofi 
great  consequence  whom  a  man  hears  every  day. 


u  To  be  explained  perhaps  by  reference  to  causa ,  gratia.  It  seems  to  bo 
proved  that  these  are  (as  Prisdan  teaches)  ablatives,  since  the  a  is  long :  e.  g. 
Ter.  Phorm.  iv.  5,  11 : — Datum  esse  dotis.  De.  Quid  tua,  malum!  id  referti 
Ch.  Magni,  Demipho.  Refert  •zz.reifert,  for  ‘ adrem  fert’  or  confert, 


THE  GENITIVE. 


75 


$29.  207,  208.] 


Illud  mea  magni  interest,  te  ut  videam,  Itis  of  great 
consequence  to  me  that  I  should  see  you. 

Vestra  interest ,  commilitones,  ne  imperatorem,  pes¬ 
simi  faciant,  It  is  of  importance  to  you ,  my  com¬ 
rades,  that  the  worst  sort  should  not  elect  an  em¬ 
peror. 

(b)  Ignavum  pcenitebit  aliquando  ignavice,  The  slothful 
man  will  one  day  repent  of  his  sloth. 

Me  non  solum  piget  stultice  meae,  sed  etiam  pudet. 
I  am  not  only  sorry  for  my  folly,  but  also  ashamed  of 
it.  Taedet  me  vitae,  I  am  weary  of  my  life.  Taedei 
eadem  audire  milites,  The  soldiers  are  tired  of 
hearing  the  same  thing.  Tui  me  miseret,  mei  piget, 
I  pity  you  ;  I  am  vexed  at  myself. 


207.  Vocabulary  28.* 


It  concerns,  it  is  of  importance  or  J 
consequence,  it  is  the  interest  of/ 

. 


interest,  refert;  the  latter  very  rarely 
when  a  person  is  expressed,  unless  by 
a  pronoun ;  principally  in  quid  refert  ? 
what  does  it  signify  'l  what  difference 
does  it  make?  and  nihil  refert ,  it  is 
of  no  consequence,  or  makes  no  dif¬ 
ference. 


I  am  sorry  for,  vexed  at, 

I  repent,  am  discontented  or  dis¬ 
satisfied  with, 

I  am  ashamed  of, 

I  pity, 

I  am  disgusted  at ;  am  weary  or 
tired  of, 


plget  me. 
poenitet  me. 
pudet  me. 

miseret  me  (see  201 r). 

taedet  me ;  for  perf  pertaesum  est. 


Like ;  equal  to ;  as  good  as, 


On  account  of, 


'  instar ;  an  old  subst.  signifying  a  model 
or  image:  and  as  such  followed  by 
<(  the  genitive.  It  should  only  be  used 
I  of  equality  in  magnitude ,  real  or  figu¬ 
la  rative. 

(  ergo,  governing  and  following  the  geni. 
c  tive.  It  is  the  Greek  epyoj. 


To  present, 

Crown, 

Golden, 


donare,  av,  at. 
corona,  a e,f. 
aureus,  a,  um. 


Exercise  30. 


[What  are  the  various  ways  of  translating  whether — or  ?] 

208  What  difference  does  it  make  to  Caius,  whether  he 


76 


THE  DATIVE. 


[§  30.  209-212. 

drinks  wine  or  water  ?  It  makes  a  great  difference  to  me  why  he 
did  this.  It  makes  a  great  difference  to  us,  whether  death  is  a 
perpetual  sleep  or  the  beginning  of  another  life.  I  will  strive 
that  no  one14  may  be  dissatisfied  with  the  peace.  It  is  of  great 
importance  to  me,  that  Caius  should3)  be  informed  of  my  design. 
I  will  strive  that  it  may  be  your  interest  to  finish  the  business. 
It  is  your  business  to  strive  that  no  one  may  be  dissatisfied  with 
the  peace.  We  pity  those  men  who  have  been  accused  of  treason 
in  their  absence.  I  will  strive  that  no  one  may  recollect  my 
error.  I  am  ashamed  of,  and  vexed  at  my  levity7  (p.  14.  15,  a). 
I  will  strive  that  no  one  may  be  ashamed  of  me.  It  is  your 
interest  that  they  should  not  condemn  me  to  death.  It  is  the 
interest  of  all,  that  the  good  and  wise  should  not  be  banished. 
Plato  is  to  me  equal  to  {them)  all.  That  {ille)  one'  day  was  to 
Cicero  equal  to  an  immortality.  He  was  presented  ( perf .)  with 
a  golden  crown  on  account  of  his  virtue7. 

(For  the  Genitive  of  price  see  under  the  Ablative.) 


IX. 

§  30.  The  Dative.  {Dative  with  Adjectives.) 


*  209.  Adjectives  which  signify  advantage ,  likeness ,  agreeable - 
ness,  usefulness,  Jitness,  facility,  &c.  (with  their  opposites),  govern 
the  dative. 


«  210.  But  of  such  adjectives,  several  take  a  genitive  without  any  essential 

difference  of  meaning. 

211.  Natus,  commodus,  incommodus,  utilis,  inutilis,  vehemens, 
aptus,  accommodatus,  idoneus,  may  also  be  followed  by  ad  with  the 
acc.  of  the  object,  or  purpose,  for  ivhich. 

*  *  Propior  (nearer),  proximus  (nearest),  take  dat.,  but  sometimes  the  accus 

212.  Vocabulary  29.  (Adjectives  governing  the  dative.)  * 


Grateful  (both  actively  and  pas¬ 
sively)  acceptable ;  agreeable, 


gratus, v  a,  um, 


*  T  Suavis  and  dulcis  are  'sweet the  former  especially  sweet  to  /he  sense  oi 
smelling,  the  latter  to  that  of  taste ;  both  being  used  generally  and  figuratively 


THE  DATIVE. 


77 


§  30.  212.] 


Liable,  subject,  exposed  to, 
Common, 


obnoxius,  a,  um. 
communis,  is,  e. 


V  4  (Adjectives  that  take  Gen.  or  Dat.). 

Like,  similis, w  is,  e ;  superi.  simillimus. 

Unlike,  dissimilis,  is,  e. 

Equal,  par,*  paris. 

Peculiar  to,  proprius,  a,  um. 

Foreign  to  ;  averse  to  ;  inconsis-  >  ^  ,  um 

tent  with,  ) 

Friendly,  a  friend,  amicus,  a,  um ;  amicus,  i,  m. 

Unfriendly,  an  enemy,  inimicus.* 

Allied  to  (of  a  fault),  chargeable  )  affinig  a  [ s  e> 

with,  ^  ’ * I * * *  5 & 

g  ..  .  (  superstes,  b  Itis  ;  used  substantively,  a 

°’  (■  survivor. 

*  (The  following  are  often  followed  by  ‘  ad  ’  to  express  a purpose  or 

object,  for  which,  &c.) 

Born,  natus,  partic.  of  nascor. 

Convenient ;  of  character,  obliging,  commodus,0  a,  um. 


like  our  ‘  sweet.'  Jucundus ,  that  which  directly  causes  joy  and  delight.  Gratus. 
that  which  is  grateful  or  acceptable  from  any  cause.  Amoenus,  agreeable  or  de¬ 
lightful  to  the  sight,  though  extended  to  other  things  by  later  writers. 

Dulcia  delectant  gustantem ;  suavia  odore  ; 

Jucunda  exhilarant  animum,  sed  grata  probantur 
A  gratis :  quae  visa  placent  loca,  amoena  vocamus. 

Dbderlein  thinks  that  amoenum  is  not  ‘  quod  amorem  prsestat,5  but  is  a  syncope 
for  animoenum,  as  Camoence  for  Canimoence ,  and  is  equivalent  to  ‘  animo  laxando 
idoneus.’ 

$  w  Similis  takes  gen.  of  internal,  dat.  of  external  resemblance.  This  does  not 
hold  without  exception ;  but  to  express,  like  me,  him,  &c.  (i.  e.  equal  to),  the^en. 
should  be  used : 

I  lie  tui  similis,  mores  qui  servat  eosdem  ; 

Ille  tibi  similis,  faciem  qui  servat  eandem. 

*■  *  Similis  expresses  mere  resemblance :  ecqualis  denotes  mutual  and  absolute 
equality  ;  par,  mutual  congruity,  proportionate  equality.  (C.) 

«  y  Alienus  also  governs  the  abi.,  and  especially  with  ab.  ‘In  the  sense  of  dis¬ 
inclined,  hostile,  the  prep,  is  rarely  wanting.’  (Z.) 

«  *  Hostis,  properly  a  stranger ;  hence  a  public  enemy  (an  enemy  to  my  country, 
not  necessarily  tome  personally).  Inimicus,  one  who  is  an  enemy  to  me  per¬ 
sonally.  Amicus,  inimicus ,  as  adjectives,  may  be  compared ;  and  as  such  generally 
take  the  dat. 

*  a  Also  to  be  implicated  6r  concerned  in  (a  conspiracy,  &c.) ;  an  object  (of  sus¬ 
picion). 

b  Aqualis  and  superstes  have  usually  a  dat. ;  but  the  former  more  commonly 

&  gen.,  when  it  signifies  a  ‘  contemporary .’  (Z.) 

V  c  Commodus  (from  con,  modus),  commensurate  with. 


79 


THE  DATIVE. 


[§  30.  213 


Inconvenient,  unsuitable, 
Fit, 

Suitable,  serviceable, 
Fitted,  adapted, 

Useful,  expedient,  good, 
Useless, 

Prone, 

Innocent, 

Word, 

Fault, 

Lust, 

Age  =  time  of  life, 


incommodus,  a,  um. 
aptus,  a,  um. 
idoneus,*  af  um. 
accommodatus,  a,  um. 
utilis,  is,  e. 
inutilis,  is,  e. 
proclivis,  is,  e. 
innocens,  tis 
verbum,  i,  n. 


culpa,  as,/ 
libido,  inis,/, 
aetas,  tatis,/ 

{Eng.)  Common  to  kings  and  peasants  (or,  to  king s  with  peasants). 
(Lat.)  Common  to  kings  with  peasants 


Exercise  31. 


[Should  invenire  or  reperire  be  used  for  finding  what  has  been  sought  7  (177,  o.)J 

213.  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  (we)  men  are  born  for  virtue. 
It  cannot  be  denied  that  it  is  very  inconsistent7  with  your  charac¬ 
ter  to  lie.  It  is  easy  to  an  innocent  man  to  find  words.  I  fear 
that  you  will  not  find  words.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  death  is 
common  to  every  age.  His  father  warned  him  not  to  think  him¬ 
self  born  for  glory.  I  fear  that  these  things  are  not53  useful  for 
that  purpose  (res).  Don’t  you  understand  to  how  many  dangers 
we  are  exposed  ?  I  fear  that  these  things  will  not  be  agreeable 
to  the  rich.  We  all  love  (those  who  are)  like  ourselves/  Our 
own  dangers  are  nearer  to  us  (p.  14.  15,  a)  than  those1 1)  of- 
others.  He  says  that  he  is  not2  chargeable  with  this  fault.  It 
cannot  be  denied  that  he  was  of  a  character  very  averse  from 


*  *  Idoneus  expresses  a  natural  fitness  actually  existing,  but  that  requires  to  be 

observed,  made  available ,  or  (if  spoken  of  a  person)  called  forth.  Aptus  (  =  con¬ 
venienter  junctus)  expresses  actual  fitness,  now  existing.  In  use,  the  two  words 
may  be  thus  distinguished : 

(1)  Idoneus  necessarily  requires  a  purpose  to  be  mentioned  or  implied.  Aptus 
does  not  necessarily  require  the  mention  of  a  purpose,  but  may  express  what  is fit 
generally.  (2)  Idoneus  may  express  a  person’s  fitness  to  suffer,  to  be  acted  upon. 
Aptus  expresses  a  fitness  or  readiness  to  act.  (3)  Idoneus,  spoken  of  a  person, 
describes  a  fitness  that  may  never  be  observed  or  called  forth :  aptus,  a  fitness 
actually  existing ;  that  has  been  called  forth,  and  is  ready  to  act.  [Idoneus  from 
ideo,  as  ultroneus  from  ultro.  (D.)] 

*  Nostri,  gen.  pi. 


THE  DATIVE 


79 


$31.  214,  215.] 

impiety  (p.  14.  14).  There  is  no  one  but9>  thinks  it  inconsistent 
with  your  character  to  keep  your  word.  I  wished  to  be  like 
Balbus  (149,  b).  You,  such  is  your  temperance,9  are  the  enemy 
of  (all)  lusts7  {gen.).  I  will  strive  to  discover  what  is16)  expe¬ 
dient  for  the  whole  of  Greece.  I  fear  that  these  arguments  are 
not  fit  for  the  times.  Are  you  exposed  to  these  or  greater 
dangers  ? 

Exercise  32. 

[What  is  the  Lat.  for  delightful  to  the  eyes.] 

214.  Are  not  your  own  dangers  nearer  to  you  than  those  of 
others  ?  It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  is  (a  person)  of  a  very  oblig¬ 
ing  character.  Many  persons  say  that  their  own  dangers  are 
nearer  to  them  than  those11*  of-others.  They  say  that  they  are 
not  prone  to  superstition.  Might  he17)  not  have  spent18 ’  a  more 
honourable  life  ?  It  was  owing  to  you  that  our  life  was  not  taken 
away.  Is  philosophy'  the  best  teacher  of  morals  and  discipline  ? 
[No.]  He  used  to  say  that  Athens  was  the  inventor  of  all 
branches-of-learning.  It  was  owing  to  you  that  I  did  not  turn  out 
an  orator.  I  had  rather  be  like  Cato0  than  Pompey.  Even  Bal¬ 
bus  is  notf  averse  to  ambition.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  (we) 
have  need  of  a  mind  averse  from  superstition.  Have  we  done 
more  good  or  evil  ?  This  is  common  to  me  and  you.  There  is  no 
one  but  understands  that  these  things  are  common  to  the  rich  man 
and  the  poor  man.  I  cannot  but 18  take  these  things  in  good  part.zs 
I  will  strive  that  nobody14  may  pity  me.e  Is  wisdom  peculiar7  to 
you  ?  [No.]  I  fear  the  boy  will  not  be  the  survivor  of  his 
father.  There  is  no  doubt  that  we  are  come181  into  a  very  de¬ 
lightful  place. 


$  31.  The  Dative  continued. 

215.  All  verbs  may  be  followed  by  a  dative  of  the  thing  or 
person  to,  for,  or  against  which  any  thing  is  done.  Hence — 


•  Begin  with  ‘  CcUonid  and  go  on  with  ‘  than  Pompey.* 
f  ‘Not  even  Balbus  ia.’  s  Miseret ,  not  misereri.  See  201,  r. 


80 


THE  DATIVE. 


[§31.  216—222. 

*  216.  The  dative  follows  verbs  that  signify  advantage  or  dis¬ 
advantage  ;  verbs  of  comparing  ;  of  giving  and  restoring ;  of 
promising  and  paying  ;  of  commanding  and  telling  ;  of  trusting 
and  entrusting ;  of  complying  with  and  opposing  ;  of  threatening 
and  being  angry ,  &c. 

*•  217.  Of  these  verbs  many  are  transitive ,  and  govern 
x  the  acc. 

*  *  (a)  With  these  verbs  the  acc .  expresses  the  immediate ,  the 

dat.  the  remoter  object  of  the  verb. 

•  218.  (a)  Verbs  of  comparing  are  also  followed  by  the  prepositions,  cum,  inter, 
and  sometimes  ad. 

( b )  Of  verbs  that  signify  advantage  and  disadvantage,  juvo,  Icedo,  delecto , 
and  offendo  govern  the  acc. 

%  219.  (c)  Of  verbs  that  signify  command, h  rego  and  gubemo  govern  the  acc., 
tempero  and  moderor  the  acc.  or  dat.  * 

*  220.  Tempero  and  moderor  with  the  dat.  are  ‘to  moderate,’  ‘ re¬ 
strain  within  proper  limits:’  in  the  acc.  ‘to  direct’  or  ‘govern.’ 
Temperare  ab  aliqua  re  =  ‘  to  abstain  from.’ 

221.  (a)  Confer  nostram  longissimam  aetatem  cum  aeternitate, 

Compare  our  longest  life  with  eternity. 

Hominem  cum  homine  comparat,  He  compares  man 
with  man. 

Vitam  utriusque  inter  se  conferte,  Compare  the  livf's 
of  both  of  them  together. 

(b)  Libris  me  delecto,  I  amuse  myself  with  books.  Offendit 

neminem,  He  offends  nobody.  Haec  laedunt  oculum, 
These  things  hurt  the  eye.  Fortuna  fortes  ad-juvat, 
Fortune  helps  the  bold. 

(c)  Moderari  animo,  To  restrain  your  feeling.  Tempe¬ 

rare  sibi,  To  restrain  oneself.  Temperate  ab 
injuria,  To  abstain  from  (committing)  injury. 

222.  Vocabulary  30. 

(Verbs  governing  the  dat.  but  followed  by  no  preposition  in  English.) 
Advise,  suadere.i  suas,  suas. 


!»  Jubeo  takes  acc.  with  infin.  It  may  be  followed  by  ‘ut’  with  subj.  if  used 
absolutely,  without  the  mention  of  a  person.  (Z.) 

«.  4  i  Monere  (properly,  to  make  a  man  think  of  something.  D.)  calls  his  attentior 


81 


$  31.  222.]  the 

Believe, 

Command, 

Please, 

Displease, 

Envy,  grudge, 

Help,  aid,  assist, 

Heal,  cure, 

Hurt, 

Indulge, 

Favour, 

Marry  (of  a  female), 

Obey,  * 

« 

Oppose, 

Pardon, 

Persuade, 

Resist, 

Spare, 

Threaten, 

To  compare, 


DATIVE. 

credSre,  credid,  credit;  (also  to  entrust, 
with  accus.  of  ichat  is  entrusted). 
imperare,  av,  at. 
placere,  placu,  placit. 
displicere. 

invidere,  vld,  vis  (it  may  also  have  accus. 

of  the  thing  grudged). 
auxiliari ;  subvenire,  ven,  vent ;  succur¬ 
rere,  curr,  curs;  opitulari,  sublevare 
and  juvare  take  the  accus. k 
mederi. i 

nbcere,  nocu,  nocit. 
indulgere,  induis,  indult. 
favere,  fav,  faut. 

nubere, m  nups,  nupt  ( properly  to  veil), 
parere  (of  the  habit)  obedire  (of  particu¬ 
lar  acts). 

repugnare,  av,  at. 
ignoscere,  ignSv,  ignot. 
persuadere,  suas,  suas, 
resistere,  restrt,  restit. 
parcere,  peperc  et  pars,  pars  et  parcit, 
minari  (with  accus.  of  the  thing  threat¬ 
ened). 

comparare ;  conferre,1»  tfil,  collat. 


to  something  from  which  he  is  to  draw  an  inference  for  himself  by  his  own 
reason  and  good  sense.  Hortari  appeals  to  his  will ;  suadere ,  to  his  understand¬ 
ing.  Suadere  is  to  attempt  to  persuade ;  persuadere  is  to  advise  effectually ;  tc 
persuade. 

»  k  Auxiliari  (to  make  oneself  a  man’s  auxilium ),  to  increase  a  person’s  strength ; 
to  help.  Juvare  (allied  to  juvenis ;  properly  to  make  youthful ,  powerful,  active; 
hence)  to  help  (one  who  is  striving.  D.) ;  to  facilitate  the  accomplishment  of  a 
purpose;  support.  Opitulari  (from  opes),  to  aid  with  one’s  means,  credit,  re¬ 
sources,  a  person  who  is  in  great  need  or  peril,  from  which  he  has  no  power  to 
deliver  himself.  Subvenire  (to  come-under,  i.  e.,  to  support) ;  to  come  to  the  as¬ 
sistance  of  a  person  in  difficulty  or  danger.  Succurrere,  to  run  to  the  assist¬ 
ance  of;  which  implies  a  more  pressing  danger;  to  succour.  Sublevare,  to 
raise  a  man  up  ;  to  hold  him  up  ;  to  support : — figuratively,  to  alleviate,  mitigate , 
lighten.  (R.)  Adjuvo  and  auxilior  do  not  necessarily  imply,  that  the  person  as¬ 
sisted  needed  assistance;  the  other  verbs  do.  Adjuvare  (to  help  forward)  often 
means  to  increase ;  enhance.  (C.) 

*  l  Mederi  (to  administer  a  remedy  with  good  effect)  relates  rather  to  the  sick 
person ,  or  to  the  operation  of  the  physician ;  sanare,  to  the  disease ,  or  to  the 
operation  of  the  medicine.  (D.) 

*  m  To  be  married  is  nuptam  esse,  and  we  find,  nuptam  esse  cum  aliquo. 

*  *>  Conferre  (t<j  bring  together),  contendere  (to  stretch  together),  componere  (to 


82 


THE  DATIVE. 


[§  32.  223,  224. 


To  be  angry  with, 


( irasci,  iratus ;  succensere  (of  deep  last 
(  ing  resentment),  both  govern  dative. 
To  injure,  hurt,  laedere,  lses,  lees  ( accus .).  *  ‘ 

To  delight,  amuse,  delectare,  av,  at  (accus.).  % 

To  offend,  offendere,  fend,  fens  (accus.).  » 

‘  He  threatens  me  with  death 5  should  be 
In  Latin,  ‘  threatens  death  to  me .’ 


Exercise  33. 

[Which  interrog.  particle  is  to  be  used  when  the  answer  would  be  ‘  no  ’  ?] 

223.  Do  not  hurt  another.  It  is  not  every  man  who  can39  com- 
nand  his  mind.  Is  it  easy  to  restrain  (one’s)  mind  ?  It  is 
die  duty  of  a  Christian  to  leave  nothing  undone,  that18  he  may 
«arn  to  govern  his  mind'.  Ought  (you)  not  to  obey  the  laws  ? 
Ve  ought  to  be  angry0  with  vices',  not  with  men.  He  promised 
-o  abstain  from3  injury.  Venus  married  Vulcan  (Vulcanus). 
H  is  the  duty  of  a  Christian  to  succour  the  miserable.  They 
promised  to  abstain  from  (committing  any)  injury.  I  will  ask 
him  whether  he  can  cure  my  head.  I  have  left  nothing  undone18 
that  I  might  cure  my  head.  It  is  strange  that  you  should  favour 
me.  Do  you  envy  (pi.)  me  or  Balbus?  I  almost  think25  that  I 
have  opposed  nature  in  vain.  It  shows39  a  great  mind  to  spare 
the  conquered.  I  warned  my  son  to  envy  nobody.14  Compare 
this  peace  with  that  war.  I  have  unwillingly  offended  Caius. 
He  threatens  me  with  death  every  day.  Do  not  grudge  me  my 
glory.  There  are  some  who109  grudge  me  my  glory. 


§  32.  The  Dative  continued. 

*  224.  Sum  with  its  compounds,  except  possum ,  governs  the 
dative. 


place  together),  all  express  the  bringing  of  things  into  juxtaposition  for  the  sake 
of  instituting  a  comparison  between  them.  From  their  meaning,  one  should 
say  that  conferre  is  to  compare  things,  the  difference  of  which  will  be  obvious, 
as  soon  as  they  are  brought  together :  contendere ,  to  institute  a  close  comparison. 
Ramshorn  says,  comparare  is  to  compare  things  that  are  exactly  similar,  and 
form,  as  it  were,  a  pair  (par).  But  Cicero  has :  ‘  conferre  pugnantia,  comparare 
contraria .’ 

*  Succensere,  because  the  anger  is  lasting. 


THE  DATIVE. 


83 


yS2.  225-227.] 


*  225.  Verbs  compounded  with  prepositions,  or  with  the  adverbs 
bene,  satis,  male,  generally  govern  the  dative,  but  with  many  ex¬ 
ceptions. 

*  (a)  Most  of  the  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  in,  inter,  ob , 
pra,  sub,  con,  govern  the  dat. 

%  (/?)  Many  of  those  compounded  with  ab,  ante,  de,  e,  post,  pro , 
re,  super,  govern  the  dat. 

*  226.  Some  are  transitive,  and  govern  the  accusative  only ; 
some  govern  the  dative  or  the  accusative  with  no  difference  of 
meaning  ;  and  very  many  of  them  may  be  followed  by  the  pre- 
positions p  they  are  compounded  with. 

227.  Vocabulary  31. 


To  be  absent, 

To  be  present, 

To  be  engaged  in, 

To  be  in  the  way,  to  be  prejudi¬ 
cial  to, 

To  be  wanting,  fail, 

To  be  before,  or  at  the  head  of,  to 
command, 

To  profit,  to  do  good  to,  to  be  ad¬ 
vantageous  to, 

To  survive, 

To  oppose, 

To  satisfy, 

To  confer  benefits  on, 

To  prefer, 

To  reckon  one  thing  after ,  i.  e., 
as  inferior  to  another, 


abesse,  abfui. 

adesse, ^  adfui  (hence,  to  stand  by). 
interesse. 

obesse. 

deesse.r 

prseesse. 

prodesse.8 

superesse. 
obstare,  stit,  stit. 
satisfacere,  fee,  fact, 
benefacere,  fee,  fact, 
anteponere,  pbsu,  pbsit. 

posthabere,  habu,  habit. 


p  This  is  especially  the  case  when  the  object  is  no  personal  circumstance,  or 
cannot  well  be  conceived  as  such,  for  then  the  preposition  merely  expresses  a 
local  relation.  (G.) 

•  4  3  Praesens  is  used  as  the  'participle  of  adesse.  Praesentem  esse  expresses  an 

immediate  audible  or  visible  presence  ;  adesse,  presence  generally,  within  some 
sphere  belonging  to  us.  An  expected  guest  adest,  when  he  is  within  our  walls; 
but  to  be  praesens,  he  must  be  in  the  same  room  with  ourselves.  Adesse  relates 
to  a  person  or  thing  to  which  one  is  near ;  interesse ,  to  an  action  that  one  is  as¬ 
sisting  at.  (D.) 

*  *  *  Abesse  is  simply  to  be  absent  or  away;  not  to  be  there.  Deesse  Is  spoken  of  a 
thing  that  is  wanting,  the  presence  of  it  missed,  because  necessary  to  the  complete¬ 
ness  of  a  thing.  Dejicere  is  the  inchoative  of  deesse,  as  proficere  to  prodesses.  (D.) 

»  Prodesse  drops  the  d  before  those  parts  of  sum  that  begin  with  a  consonant. 


84 


THE  DATIVE. 


[§  32.  228,229 


Eng.  To  prefer  death  to  slavery. 

%  <  t  t  $  To  reckon  slavery  after  death  ( 'posthabere  servitutem  morti). 
°  ’  C  (Or,  as  the  English.) 


Exercise  34. 

*  [Obs.  ‘  Better ’  when  it  means  ‘ preferable^  lmore  satisfactory ,’  should  be 
translated  by  saims.] 

228.  It  is  wise39  to  prefer  virtue  to  all  things  (transi,  both 
ways).  He  says  that  he  has  clone  good  to  very  many'.  He 
says  that  he  was  not  engaged  in  the  battle.  It  is  your  business 
to  stand  by  your  friends.  Tt  is  not  every  one  who  can  satisfy  the 
wise.  It  is  the  duty  of  a  judge  to  assist  ( subvenio )  an  innocent 
man.  He  says  that  he  will  not*  be  wanting  to  his  friends. 
Who  commands  the  army  ?  I  will  ask  who  commands  the  army. 
I  warned  the  boy  to  prefer  nothing14 *  to  honourable  conduct. 
How  does  it  happen  that  all  of  you19)  prefer  death  to  slavery  ? 
It  is  better  to  do  good  even  to  the  bad,  than  to  be  wanting  to  the 
good.  All  of  us19)  have  been  engaged  in  many'  battles.  To 
some  courage  is  wanting,  to  others  opportunity."  He  promised 
that  he  would  not  be  wanting  either7  to  the  time  or  to  the  oppor¬ 
tunity.  Sometimes  (402)  fortune  opposes  our  designs.  There 
were  some  who109  preferred  death  to  slavery. 


229.  Vocabulary  32. 

(Verbs  that  take  the  dat.  or  acc.  without  difference  of  meaning.) 


To  flatter,  fawn  upon, 
Lie  near,  border  on, 

Attend  to,  consider, 


adulari,  adulatus, 
adjacere,  jacu,  jacit. 

attendere,  tend,  tent  {acc.  in  Cicero,  or 
with  ad.). 


SantecellSre,  cellu  {very  rare) ;  praestare,'* 
praestit,  praestit  {dat.  best  with  ante¬ 
cellere). 

pail  ^  deficSre,*  fee,  feet  (to  revolt  from,  a, 

c  ab ;  to,  ad.  Also  with  accus.to  desert). 


1  See  note  on  the  second  of  the  Differences  of  Idiom. 

"  Let  the  verb  be  the  last  word  in  the  sentence. 

7  Translate  as  if  it  were,  ‘would  be  wanting  neither  to  the  time  nor /  &c. 

%  w  So  also  the  other  verbs  of  going  before ,  or  surpassing :  ante-  or  prcE-  ceder«« 
currere,  -venire,  -vertere,  &c.  {prcecedere  has  only  the  acc.  in  prose.  Z.) 

*  See  227,  r. 


§32.  230.] 


THE  DATIVE. 


65 


To  despair  of, 

To  make  sport  of,  make  merry 
with,  mock, 

Fall  upon,  seize  upon  (of  cares, 
&c.,  assailing  the  mind), 

Wait  for, 

Rival,  emulate, 

Accompany, 


To  show  oneself  brave,  &c. 


Grief, 

Tuscan, 

Territory, 


desperare  (also  with  de  which  governs 
the  ablat.y  hence  desperatus,  given 
over). 

illudere,  lus,  lus  (also  followed  by  in 
with  accus.  or  ablat). 

incessere,  y  cesslv,  et  cess,  cessit. 

praestblari,  atus.* 
aemulari,  atus.a 
comitari,  atus. 

praebere  or  praestare  se  fortem  (the  latter 
implying  action ;  the  former  not  neces¬ 
sarily  so  ;  praebere  se,  to  show  one¬ 
self;  praestare  se,  to  prove  oneself), 
dblor,  oris,  m. 

Tuscus,  a,  um. 
ager,  agri,  m. 


Exercise  35. 


230.  I  will  advise  the  boy  to  emulate  the  virtues  of  his  father. 
Attend  to  whatb  (pi.)  will  be  said.  Let  us  not  flatter  the  power¬ 
ful.  The  Tuscan  territory  borders  on  the  Roman  (territory). 
Did  not  words  fail  you  ?  Are  the  Veientes  going  to  revolt  from 
the  Romans  ?  [No.]  I  almost  think  that  the  Lydians  (Lydii) 

are  going  to  revolt  from  king  Cyrus.  Does  it  show*9  a  brave  mind 
to  despair  of  one’s  ( suus )  fortunes  ?  Grief  seized  upon  the  whole 
(omnis)  army.  It  was  owing  to  you22  that  the  treaty  between  the 
cities  of  Rome  and  Lavinium  was  not  renewed.  I  cannot  but19 
mock  you.  She  never  beheld  Caius  without16  making  merry 
with  his  folly.  I  will  ask  Balbus  whom  he  is  waiting  for.  There 
were  some  who  mocked  the  boy. 


y  So  also  invadere. 

*  Expectare  expresses  merely  a  looking  for  the  future  in  general ;  opperiri ,  to 
be  keeping  oneself  in  readiness  for  an  occurrence ;  praestolari ,  to  be  in  readiness 
to  perform  a  service.  (Rid.  after  Doderlein.) 

a  uEmulor  is  sometimes  said  to  govern  the  dot.  in  the  sense  of  to  envy ;  it  does 
not  however  express  simple  envy ,  but  the  endeavour  to  equal  or  surpass  a  person, 
which  may,  or  may  not ,  be  caused  by  envy. 
fe  ‘  WhaV  is  here  rel.  (  =  those  things ,  which). 


86  the  dative.  [§  33.  231-233 

§33.  The  Dative  continued.  (Verbs  with  two  constructions.) 


231.  ( a )  Donof  circumdo,  and  several  other  verbs,  take  either 
a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  accusative  of  the  thing ;  or  an  accu¬ 
sative  of  the  person  and  an  ablative  of  the  thing. 

Verbs  of  fearing  take  a  dat.  of  the  person  for  whom  one  fears. 

232.  (a)  Cirdumdat  urbem  muro  ;  or,  circumdat  murum  urbi, 

He  surrounds  the  city  with  a  wall. 

Ciceroni  immortalitatem  donavit ;  or,  Ciceronem  im¬ 
mortalitate  donavit,  (The  Roman  people)  conferred 
immortality  on  Cicero. 


233.  Vocabulary  33. 


*  (Verbs  that  take  dat.  of  person  with  acc.  of  thing ;  or.  acc.  of  person 

with  abl.  of  thing.) 


Besprinkle,  bespatter, 
Surround, 

Clothe  oneself  with,  put  on, 
Strip  off,  * 

To  cut  off,  prevent,  obstruct, 


adspergSre,d  spers,  spers. 
circumdare,  ded,  dat. 
induere,  indu,  indut. 
exuere,  exu,  exut  ( accus .  of  person,  ab- 
lat.  of  thing.  With  accus.  only  ‘to 
throw  off,’  ‘put  off,5  ‘divest  oneself  of/ 
intercludere,  intercius,  intercius. 


(Verbs  with  a  different  construction  in  different  meanings.) 


To  beware, 


To  consult, 


To  wish  well  to, 

To  provide  for  the  interests 
one’s  country, 

To  lay  upon, 

To  lean  upon, 


< 


< 


of  < 


cavere,  cav,  caut  (cavere  aliquem;*  to 
guard  against ;  be  on  one's  guard 
against ;  cavere  alicui,  to  guard ; 
watch  over ;  cavere  or  sibi  cavere,  to 
be  on  one's  guard). 

consulere,  sulu,  suit  (consulgre  aliquevu 
to  consult ;  consulere  alicui ,  to  consult 
for  a  person  ;  to  consult  his  interest : 
consulere  in  aliquem,  to  proceed  or 
take  measures  against  a  man). 
cup6ree  alicui ;  cupere,  cuplv,  cuplt. 
prospicgre  patrise. 
providere  patrise. 

imponere  (aliquid  alicui) ;  with  dat.  only 
‘  to  impose  upon.5  * 
incumbere  rei ;  incumbere  in  rem,  to  ap¬ 
ply  oneself  vigorously ;  to  devote  one¬ 
self  to.  * 


<•  So,  impertire  or  impertiri. 

%  Xiao  cavere  ab  aliquo,  or  ab  aliqua  re. 


J  So,  inspergSre. 
e  So,  bene,  male,  &c.  velle  alicui 


THE  DATIVE. 


87 


&33.  234,235.] 


Cruelly, 

Almost,  nearly, 

Altar, 

Baggage, 

A  camp, 

A  mound, 

A  ditch, 

To  prepare, 

The  state, 

To  take  a  camp,  &c. 

Humanity,  human  feeling, 
Flight, 


A  wall, 


A  stone  wall, 

t  234.  [C.  xx.]  In  English, 
other  substantives,  are 
Latin  by  adjectives. 


crudeliter. 

prope ;  pene  or  paene, 
ara,  ae,/. 

impedimenta  (pZur.)properly  hindrances. 
castra  ( plur .). 
agger,  eris,  m. 
fossa,  ae,y. 
parare,  av,  at. 

respublica,  reipublicae,  reipublicae,  rem- 
publicam,  &c. 

exugre ;  i.  e.  ‘  to  strip  the  enemy  ( acc .) 

of  their  camp  ’  ( ablat .).  • 
humanitas,  atis,./. 
fuga,  a e,/. 

'  murus,  i,  m.  (the  general  term ;  moenia, 
from  munire,  is  the  wall  of  a  city  for 
protection  against  enemies ;  paries, 
t  ^  6tis,  the  wall  of  a  building,  allied  to 
pars,  portio,  &c.  ;  maceria,  allied  to 
margo,  the  wall  of  an  enclosure,  e.  g. 
of  a  garden  or  vineyard.  D.) 
murus  lapideus. 

substantives  standing  before  and  spoken  of 
used  adjectively ,  and  must  be  translated  into 


Exercise  36. 

235.  I  warned  Caius  whom  to  guard  ( subj .)  against.  Tar¬ 
quinius  Priscus  was  preparing  to  surround  the  city  with  a  stone 
wall.  There  is  no  one  who  is  not  aware  that  Cicero  is  watching 
over  the  state.  He  'promised  to  consult3  my  interests.  He  im¬ 
posed  on  his  own  (men)  that65  he  might  the  more  easily,  impose 
on  the  Gauls.  They  have  proceeded  cruelly  against  Caius.  It 
remains  that  ( ul )  we  should  consult  our  own  interests.  That 
basest  (person)  has  bespattered  me  with  his  praises.  I  have  per¬ 
suaded  Caius  to  devote  himself  to  the  state.  The  Romans  have 
taken  the  camp  of  the  Gauls.  He  hopes  to  take  the  baggage  of 
the  Gauls.  Do  not  divest  yourself  of  your  human-feeling7. 
Csesar  surrounded  his  camp  with  a  mound  and  ditch.  I  pity  the 
old  man  (who  is)  now  almost  given-over.  I  will  warn  Balbus  not 
to  throw  off  his  human-feeling.  Consult  for  yourselves  :  provide 
for  the  interests  of  your  country. 


88 


THE  DATIVE. 


[§  34.  236-24) 


§  34.  Verbs  that  take  a  second  Dative. 


*  236.  Sum,  with  several  other  verbs,  may  govern  two  datives. 

■>*  (a.  b.)  The  second  dative  expresses  the  purpose  or  some  similar  notion. 

It  is  the  common  construction  to  express  the  purpose  for  which  a  man 
comes ,  or  sends  another. 

*  237.  (c)  A  second  dative  often  stands  after  sum,  where  we 
should  use  the  nominative.  Such  verbs  as  proves,  serves,  &c. 
may  often  be  translated  by  sum  with  the  dative  ;  and  an  adjective 
after  £  i to  be’  may  often  be  translated  into  Latin  by  the  dat.  of  a 
substantive. 

*  238.  ( d )  The  English  verb  4  have  ’  may  often  be  translated  by 
sum  with  a  dative/ 


{Eng.)  I  have  a  hat.  I  have  two  hats. 

{Lat)  There  is  a  hat  to  me.  There  are  two  hats  to  me. 

It  is  obvious  that  the  acc.  after  ‘ have '  will  be  the  nom.  before  (to  be;' 
the  nom.  before  1  have  ,'  the  dat.  after  ‘  to  be.' 

*  239.  (e)  In  ‘  est  mihi  nomen,'  the  name  is  either  in  the  nom.,  the  dat.,  or 
(less  commonly)  the  gen. 

The  construction  with  the  dat.  is  even  more  common  (in  the  case  of 
Roman  names)  than  the  regular  construction  with  the  nom.  It  is  an 
instance  of  attraction,  the  name  being  attracted  into  the  case  of 
mihi.  (K.) 

t  240.  {/)  The  dative  of  a  personal  pronoun  is  often  used  to  point  out,  in  an 
animated  way,  the  interest  of  the  speaker,  or  the  person  addressed,  in 
what  is  said. 


241.  (a)  Pausanias,  rex  Lacedaemoniorum,  venit  Atticis  aux¬ 
ilio,  Pausanias,  king  of  the  Lacedcemonians ,  came 
to  the  assistance  of  the  Athenians. 

(b)  Pericles  agros  suos  dono,  reipublicas  dedit,  Pericles 

gave  his  estates  as  a  present  to  the  state. 

(c)  Magno  malo  est  hominibus  avaritia,  Avarice  is  a  great 

evil  (or,  very  hurtful)  to  men. 

Ipse  sibi  odio  erit,  He  will  be  odious  (or,  an  object  of 
dislike)  to  himself. 

(d)  Fuere  Lydiis  multi  ante  Croesum  reges,  The  Lydians 

had  many  kings  before  Crcesus. 

(e)  C.  Marcius,  cui  cognomen  postea  Coriolano  fuit,  Caius 


(  So  ‘  can  have '  may  be  translated  by  fpoiest  esse.' 


$  34.  242.] 


THE  DATIVE. 


89 


Marcius,  whose  surname  was  afterwards  Coriola¬ 
nus. — Fonti  nomen  Arethusa  est,  The  name  of  the 
fountain  is  Arethusa.  (Nomen  Mercurii  est  mihi, 
My  name  is  Mercury.) 

(/)  At  tibi  repente  paucis  post  diebus  venit  ad  me 
Caninius,  But,  behold,  a  few  days  afterwards 
Caninius  comes  to  me. 


242.  Vocabulary  34. 

v  (Verbs  that  are  often  followed  by  two  datives.) 
*  (1)  With  auxilio  (assistance). 

Come,  venire,  ven,  vent. 

Send,  mittere,  mis,  miss. 

Set  out,  proficisci,  profectus. 

*  (2)  With  culpce,  vitio,  crimini. 


(3) 


To  impute  as  a  fault, 
To  reckon  as  a  fault, 
fault, 

To  give  as  a  present, 
To  be  a  hindrance, 


culpas  dare,  ded,  dat  (with  acc.  of  thing). 
turn  into  a  >  vitio  s  vertere,  vert,  vers  (with  acc.  of 
)  thing). 

dono  or  muneri,  dare  (with  acc.  of  thing). 
impedimento  esse. 


To  be  a  reproach,  to  be  disgraceful,  opprobrio  i  esse. 

To  be  hateful,  odio  esse. 

To  be  detrimental,  detrimento  esse. 

To  be  an  honour,  to  be  honourable,  honori  esse. 

To  be  very  advantageous,  magnae  utilitati  esse. 


To  mean,k 

To  throw  himself  at  any  body’s 
feet, 


sibi  velle ;  mihi  tibi ,  &c.,  to  be  used  ac¬ 
cording  to  the  person  meant. 
se  i  ad  alicujus  pedes,  or  alicui  ad  pedes 
projicgre,  jec,  ject. 


*  s  Vitium  is  any  flaw,  blemish,  or  fault;  whatever  makes  a  thing  imperfect. 
It  may  therefore  be  found  in  things  as  well  as  in  actions  and  persons,  g  Culpa 
is  fault ;  whatever  is  blamable ;  hence  vitium  may  be  used  for  culpa,  but  culpa 
not  always  for  vitium*  *  Scelus  always  implies  a  wicked  intention;  culpa  not  al¬ 
ways,  but  often  only  a  want  of  prudence,  caution,  &c. 

%  h  A  praemium  is  given  to  reward,  with  reference  to  the  merit  of  the  recerver : 
i  a  donum ,  to  produce  joy,  with  reference  to  the  gratuitousness  of  the  gift :  a 
t  munus,  to  express  affection  or  favour,  with  reference  to  the  sentiment  of  the 
giver.  (D.) 

%  «  PrSbrum  is  ‘  wThat  a  person  may  be  reproached  with  opprobrium  is  ‘  what 
he  is  (or  has  been)  reproached  with  ‘  a  reproach'  actually  made.  (D.) 

k  That  is,  not  what  one's  meaning  is,  but  what  one  means  by  such  conduct. 

*  l  Projicere  se  alicui  ad  pedes,  which  Krebs  formerly  objected  to,  is  quite 
correct:  (See  Cic.  Sest.  11 ;  Caes.  B.  G.  1,  31.) 


THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


90 


[§  35.  243-245. 


t  fC.  xxi.]fjr‘  What’  is  sometimes  used  for  ‘how’  (quam) :  sometimes  for 
‘how  great’  (quantus). 


Exercise  37. 


243.  He  promises  to  come3  to  the  assistance  of  the  Helvetii. 
Timotheus  set  out  to  the  assistance  of  Ariobarzanes.™  It  was 
owing  to  you ,  that  I  did  not  throw  myself  at  Caesar’s  feet.  It  is 
the  part  of  a  wise  man  always  to  fear  for  himself.  There  is  no 
doubt  that  (86)  he  is  going  to  consult  the  interests n  of  Caius.  I 
fear  that  these  things  will  not5  3  prove  an  honour  to  you.  I  don’t 
understand  what  he  means  (by  it).  It  is  very  honourable0  to 
you,  to  have  been  engaged  in  suchl0)  a  battle.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  superstition  ought  to  be  a  reproach  to  a  man.  They  turn  my 
greatest  ( see  Index  I.)  praise  into  a  fault.  I  hope  that  men  will 
understand  howp  odious  cruelty  is  to  all  men.  I  will  warn  Caius 
howp  advantageous  it  is  to  keep  one’s  word.  He  says  that  he  has 
not  many  slaves.  I  will  ask  them  what  they  mean.  I  will  not 
object  (87.  91.)  to  their  imputing  this  to  me  as  a  fault.  He  pro¬ 
mised3  to  give  them  the  island  of  Lemnos  as  a  present.  Might 
you  not  have  brought18)  a  charge  of  immorality  against  Caius  ?* *7 


X. 

§  35.  The  Accusative. 

*  244.  (a)  Many  intransitive  verbs  become  transitive  when  com 
pounded  with  a  preposition  that  governs  the  accusative  ;  and  a 
few  when  compounded  with  a  preposition  that  governs  the  abla¬ 
ti  ve.i 

»  Of  these,  those  that  are  not  deponent  have  generally  a  passive  voice. 

%  245.  (b)  Neuter  verbs  may  take  a  substantive  of  kindred 
meaning  or  origin  in  the  accusative  ;  and  verbs  of  tasting  or 
smelling  of  take  the  thing  in  the  accusative. 


m  G.  is. 

n  Part,  in  rus  with  the  proper  tense  of  sum. 

0  Say :  ‘  It  is  for  a  great  honour.* 
p  ‘  How  ’  must  be  translated  by  quantus. 

*  ♦  q  With  many  of  them  the  preposition  is  often  repeated ;  and  with  others  the 


THE  ACCUSATIVE- 


91 


§35.  246-249.] 

•  246.  (c)  Other  neuters  are  used  transitively  to  express  a  tran¬ 
sitive  notion  combined  with  their  own  proper  notion. 

*  Thus,  sitire  (to  thirst)  =  ‘  to  desire  as  a  thirsty  man  desires horrere 
—  ‘  to  fear,  and  express  my  fear  by  shuddering;'  properare  mortem, 
‘to  cause  death,  and  to  cause  it  in  haste.’ — This  figurative  use  of  neuter 
verbs  is  common  to  all  languages. 

247. »  It  has  been  already  mentioned  that  the  accusative  of  neuter  pro¬ 

nouns  is  found  with  verbs,  with  which  the  accusative  of  a  substantive 
would  be  wholly  inadmissible. 

248.  (a)  Pythagoras  Persarum  Magos  adiit,  Pythagoras  vis¬ 

ited  the  Persian  magi. 

Pythagoras  multas  regiones  barbarorum  pedibus 
obiit, r  Pythagoras  travelled  over  many  countries  of 
the  barbarians  on  foot. 

Postumia  tua  me  convenit,  Your  Postumia  has  been 
with  me. 

(b)  Somniare  somnium,  To  dream  a  dream.  Servire 

servitutem,  To  suffer  a  slavery ;  to  be  a  slave. 
Ceram  olere,  To  smell  of  wax. 

(c)  Sitire  honores,  To  thirst  for  honours. 

Idem  gloriatur,  He  makes  the  same  boast.  Idem  pec- 
cat,  He  commits  the  same  sin.  Multa  peccat,  He 
commits  many  sins. 

249.  Vocabulary  35. 

»  ( Transitive  compounds  of  Intransitive  Verbs.) 

Attack,  aggredi,  ior,  aggressus. 

Visit,  adire,8  adii,  aditum. 

To  enter  into  a  partnership,  coire  societatem;  coeod 

m  ^  (  urbem  (but  better)  urbe  excedere,  cess. 

To  stir  out  of  the  city,  1 

(  cess. 


abl.  is  more  common  than  the  acc. ;  excedere  and  egredi,  in  their  proper  mean¬ 
ing  of  going  out ,  should  be  followed  by  e  or  the  abl.  But  Livy  has  urbem 
excedere. 

1  r  Ob  in  oberro ,  &c.,  seems  to  be  an  abbreviation  of  amb,  a^i.  (D.) 

*  8  Visere  is,  to  pay  a  visit  as  a  friend  or  companion;  adire ,  to  visit  on  busi¬ 
ness,  or  in  consequence  of  some  tcant;  convenire ,  to  visit,  on  business  or  not, 
salutare ,  to  pay  a  complimentary  visit.  (D.) 

t  The  compounds  of  eo  have  generally  perf.  ii,  not  ivi. 


92 


THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


[§  35.  250, 


To  exceed  the  bounds  of  mode¬ 
ration, 

To  die, 

To  call  upon ;  have  an  interview 
with ;  hence,  to  speak  to, 

To  come  to  a  determination ;  to 
adopt  a  resolution, 

To  encounter  death, 

To  smell  of, 

To  have  a  strong  smell  of;  to 
smack  of, 

To  taste  of  (i.  e.  have  taste  or 
flavor  of), 

To  thirst  for, 

To  boast  of, 

To  grieve  for, 

To  sail  past  or  along, 

Hardly  any  body, 

Coast, 

Speech, 

Antiquity, 

Citizens, 

Wonderful, 

To  dream, 

Herb, 

Honey, 


modum  excedSre. 

mortem  obire,  obii,  obitum;  obeo. 

convenire,  ven,  vent. 

consilium  inire. 

mortem  oppetere,  petivi,  petii,  petlt.u 
Plere,  olu  et  olev,  olit  et  olet. 

redblere.v 

sapere,  io  ( per/ .  rare ,  saplv  et  sapu 
saplt). 
si  tire,  Iv,  It. 
gloriari,  atus. 
dblere,  dolu,  dolit. 
praetervehi,  vectus, 
nemo  fere  (‘  almost  nobody’), 
ora,  a e,/. 
oratio,  onis,,/'. 
antiquitas,  atis,y. 
clvis,  m.  et  f. 
mlrus,  a,  um. 

somniare,  av,  at ;  somnium,  ‘  dream, 
herba,  a e,f. 
mei,  mellis,  n. 


Exercise  38. 


[How  must  the  infin.  be  translated  after  to  persuade  ?] 

250.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  you  have  dreamt  a  wonderful 
dream.  He  published-a-proclamation  that  nobody1 4  should  stir 
from  the  city.  I  won’t  object  to  your  entering  into  a  partner¬ 
ship  (87.  91)  with  me.6)  Have  you  entered  into  a  partnership 
with  Balbus  or  with  Caius  ?  He  has  commissioned  me  to  have 
an  interview  with  Csesar.  The  honey  (pi.)  smells  of  that  herb. 
His  whole  speech  smacks  of  antiquity.  Does  not  Caius’s  speech 


* *  *  u  Obire  mortem,  or  diem  supremum  (for  which  obire  is  used  with  the  acc . 
omitted),  is  only  spoken  of  a  natural  death,  which  the  mortem  obiens  simply 
suffers  ;  oppetere  mortem  is,  if  not  to  seek  it,  yet  at  least  to  meet  it  xcith  frmncsa 
and  a  disregard  of  life.  (D.) 

*  v  Re  has  in  many  compounds  the  meaning  of  forth;  thus  redolere  ‘to 
smell  forth ‘  to  emit  a  smell.’  It  thus  becomes  a  strengthening  prefix :  Dodcr 
lein  thinks  that,  as  such ,  it  is  possibly  the  Greek  ipi. 


THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


93 


§  36.  251-254.] 

smack  of  Athens  ?  It  is  the  duty  of  a  good  citizen  to  encounter 
death  itself  for  the  state.  Ought  he  not  to  have  encounteredl8) 
death  for  the  state  ?  Marcellus  sailed  past  the  coast  of  Sicily 
(Sicilia).  Three  hundred  of  us19)  have  come  to  this  determi¬ 
nation.  There  is  hardly  any  body  who  has  not  (44,  (3)  )  come 
to  this  determination.  I  fear  he  will  not53  choose  to  enter  into 
a  partnership  with  me'.  I  fear  he  will  enter  into  a  partnership 
with  Caius.  May  a  Christian  thirst'  for  honours  ?  He  makes 
the  same  boast  as9)  Cicero.  I  cannot  but18  grieve  for  the  death 
of  Hortensius.  It  is  a  difficult  (matter)  to  put  off  all  (one’s) 
human-feelingC  Both  you  and  Balbus  have  exceeded  the  bounds 
of  moderation.  There  are  some  who  exceed  the  bounds  of 
moderation. 


§  36.  The  Accusative  continued. 

x  251.  (a)  Verbs  of  asking ,  teaching ,  and  concealing ,  may  have 
two  accusatives ,  one  of  the  person  and  another  of  the  thing. 

•  252.  But  very  frequently  (and  with  some  verbs  always)  either 
the  person  or  the  thing  is  governed  by  a  preposition. 

Obs.  Thus  doceo,  to  give  information,  prefers  the  ablative  with  de. 
After  peto,  and  sometimes  after  the  other  verbs  of  begging,  the  person 
is  put  in  the  abl.  with  a :  and  after  rogo,  interrogo ,  &c.,  the  thing  often 
stands  in  the  abl.  with  de. 

*  253.  (c)  Transitive  verbs  that  take  two  nominatives  in  the  pas¬ 
sive,  take  two  accusatives  in  the  active,  one  being  in  a  sort  of 
apposition  to  the  other. 

.  *■  The  apposition  accusative  completes  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  which 
cannot  form  a  complete  predicate  by  itself. 

Such  verbs  are  verbs  of  calling ,  appointing  to  an  office,  considering , 
&c.,  together  with  facio,  efficio,  reddo ,  &c. 

J  The  second  accusative  is  often  an  adjective. 

»  254.  (d)  facio  and  efficio  a  sentence  with  ut  is  often  found 
instead  of  the  second  accusative  ;  and  when  the  accusative  of  the 
first  verb  represents  the  same  person  or  thing  as  the  nom.  of  the 
second,  it  is  generally  omitted. 

{Eng.)  The  sun  makes  all  things  (to)  flourish. 

{Lot.)  The  sun  makes  that  all  things  should  flourish. 


94 


THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


[§  36.  255-257, 


(Eng.)  He  had  Lysis  for  (or,  as)  his  master. 

( Lat .)  He  had  Lysis  his  master  (  =  as  his  master). 

%  255.  [C.  xxii.]  Off" ‘  For  ’  and  ‘  as  ’  are  to  be  untranslated, 

when  the  noun  that  follows  can  be  placed  in  apposition  to  anothei 
noun  in  the  sentence. 

256.  (a)  Racilius  me  primum  sententiam  rogavit ,  Racilius  aske~ 

me  my  opinion  first. 

(Verres)  parentes  pretium  pro  sepultura  llberftm  pos . 
cebat,  Verres  used  to  demand  of  parents  a  payment 
for  the  burial  of  their  children. 

Quis  musicam  docuit  Epaminonda m  ?  Who  taught 
Epaminondas  music  ? 

Nihil  nos  celat ,  He  conceals  nothing  from  us. 

(»)  Socrates  totius  mundi  se  incolam  et  civem  arbitrabatur, 
Socrates  used  to  consider  himself  an  inhabitant  and 
citizen  of  the  whole  world. 

(c)  Mesopotamiam  fertilem  efficit  Euphrates,  The  Eu¬ 

phrates  makes  Mesopotamia  fertile. 

Homines  ccecos  reddit  cupiditas  et  avaritia,  Desire  and 
avarice  render  men  blind. 

( d )  Fac  ut  sciam, w  or  (with  ut  omitted)  fac  sciam ,  Let  me 

know. 

Temperantia  sedat  appetitiones,  et  ejicit,  ut  hce  rectse 
rationi  pareant,  Temperance  quiets  the  appetites,  and 
causes  them  to  obey  right  reason. 

257,  Vocabulary  36. 

Ask,  rbgare,* *  av,  at. 

„  (  petere,  petlv,  petii,  petit  ( person  to  be 

’  (  governed  by  ab.). 


w  In  comic  writers  the  acc.  is  often  expressed :  ‘  Eum  ita  faciemus ,  ut  quod 
viderit,  non  viderit.’  ‘Ego  te  faciam,  ut  miser  sis.’  ‘Neque  potui  Venerem 
facere ,  ut  propitia  esset  mihi.’ 

*  *  Petgre  and  rogare  are  the  nost  general  expressions  of  a  wish  to  obtain , 

whether  in  the  way  of  a  request  or  a  demand ;  thus  standing  between  poscere  and 
orare ,  but  somewhat  nearer  to  orare.  Of  the  two,  rogare  relates  immediately 
to  the  person  applied  to,  petere  to  the  favour  asked.  Postulare  and  exlggre 
denote  a  simple  demand  (without  any  accessory  notion  to  strengthen  it)  as  a 
quiet  declaration  of  the  will :  but  in  postulare  the  stress  lies  on  the  wish  and  wilt 
of  the  person  making  the  demand ;  in  exigere  on  the  legal  ob'igation  of  the  per- 


§30.  258.] 


THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


95 


Claim,  require,  demand, 

Beseech, 

Pray, 

Adjure, 

Teach, 

Unteach, 

Conceal, 

To  teach  Socrates  to  play  on  the 
lyre, 

To  think  =  to  imagine, 

To  think,  or  to  be  of  opinion  = 
to  deliver  it  as  my  opinion, 

To  think  =  to  reckon,  judge, con¬ 
sider, 

To  think,  as  opposed  to  know, 
Not  only,  but  also, 


postulare,  av,  at ;  poscSre,  poposc,  pos 
clt;  flagitare,  av,  at. 
obsecrare,  av,  at. 
orare,  av,  at. 
obtestari,  tatus. 
dbcere,  docu,  doct. 
dedbcere. 
celare,  av,  at. 

Socratem  fidibus  docere  (i.  e.  ‘to 
teach  him  with  the  strings’), 
putare,  av,  at. 

censere* *  (the  word  for  delivering  an 
opinion  in  the  senate-house). 
existimare  =  exsestimare/to  pronounce 
judgment  after  a  valuation;’  arbitrari. 
‘  to  decide  as  an  arbiter.’ 
opinari,  atus. 

non  solum — sed  etiam ;  or  non  solum 
— verum  etiam. 


To  give  much  information  about,  multa  docere  de  (the person  in  accus.).  • 
Again  and  again  =  most  earnestly,  etiam  atque  etiam. 

Experience,  usus,  us,  m. 

Just  =:  fair,  right,  equitable,  sequus,  a,  um. 

Discourse,  sermo,  onis,  m. 

Exercise  39. 


258.  Experience,  the  best  master,  has  taught  me  many7  things. 
Who  taught  you  to  play  upon  the  lyre  ?  I  ask  you'  (thee)  again 
and  again  not  to  desert  me.  I  will  not  conceal  from  yt>u  the  dis¬ 
course  of  Titus  Ampius.  I  fear  that  he  is  preparing53  to  conceal 
those  things  from  his  parents.  He  had  warned  Caius  not  to  con¬ 
ceal  any  thing 14  from  his  parents'.  These  things  I  not  only  ask 
of  you,  but  also  demand.  Who  taught  you  those?  (bad)  manners 
(of  yours)  ?  I  will  unteach  you  those  manners  (of  yours).  The 
Gauls  have  given  me  much  information  about  their  own  affairs. 


son  against  whom  it  is  made.  Poscere  and  Jlagitare  denote  an  emphatic  de¬ 
mand  :  but  the  poscens  only  demands  in  a  decided  manner,  from  a  feeling  of 
right  or  power,  the  Jlagitans  with  passion  and  impetuosity  under  the  influence 
of  a  vehement  desire.  (D.)  Henc Q  Jlagitare  may  be  ‘  to  demand  importunately  ;’ 
‘  to.importune .’ 

*  x  Censere  is  followed  by  the  acc.  with  injin. ;  or,  if  the  opinion  is  given  to  be 
followed,  by  ut  with  the  mbj. ;  but  the  ut  is  often  omitted. 

»  7  late  is  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  person  ‘  that  qf  your».'1 


96 


THE  ABLATIVE. 


[§  37.  259-261. 

I  fear  that  you  will  not  consider  yourselves  citizens  of  the  whole 
world.  Religion  will  make  us  obey  the  laws  of  virtue.  He 
thought* *  it  just,  that  citizens  ( acc .)  should3'  spare  citizens  (p.  14, 
15,  a).  There  is  hardly  any  body  but  thinks  it  iust  that  you 
should  spare  me. 

259.  Vocabulary  37. 

*  (Impersonate  with  acc.) 

It  escapes  me,  me  fugit,  fallit ;  praeterit.* 

Unless  I  am  mistaken,  nisi  me  fallit. 

It  is  becoming,  decet. 

It  is  unbecoming,  dedecet. 

(Eng.)  It  is  becoming  (or  unbecoming)  to  (or  in)  an  orator  to  be  angry. 

\  ( Eat .)  It  becomes  (or  misbeseems)  an  orator  to  be  angry. 

Exercise  40. 

[Of  sanare  and  mederi ,  which  relates  principally  to  the  skill  of  the 
'physician  ?  (222,  1.)  ] 

260.  Three  hundred  of  us,31  unless  I  am  mistaken,  survive. 
I  do  not  forget  (it  does  not  escape  me)  to  how  many  dangers  we 
are  exposed.  You,  such  is  your  temperance ,9  have  learned  to  rule 
your  mind.  It  is  not  every  one  who  can 39  cure  the  mind.  I  will 
ask  Caius,  whether  he  can  cure  the  mind.  All  of  us  not  only 
ask  you  for  peace',  but  even  demand  it  (of  you).,  It  is  your  duty 
to  succour  the  citizens  now  almost  despaired  of.  It  becomes  a 
wise  man  not  to  be  disturbed  in  adversity.  It  is  becoming  to  a 
boy  to  hear  much ,  to  speak  little.  It  is  not  unbecoming  in  an 
orator  to  pretend7  to  be  angry.3  It  does  not  escape  me,  how  odi 
ous50  impiety  is  to  the  good. 


XI. 

§  37.  The  Ablative. 

*  261.  (a)  The  ablative  expresses  the  means  or  instrument ,  and 

often  the  cause  or  manner. 


N  1  Censebat.  Censere  should  be  used  when  the  opinion  is  the  expression  of 
settled  conviction. 

*  Ltitet  me  and  Ititet  mihi ,  though  they  occur  in  Justin,  Pliny,  «fee.,  should  be 
avoided.  (C.) 


THE  ABLATIVE. 


97 


$  37.  262-266.] 


*  262.  (b)  The  price  for  which  a  thing  is  bought ,  sold,  valued ,  or 
done,  is  put  in  the  ablative. 

263.  (c)  The  adjectives  magno,  parvo,  &c.,  are  generally  put 
by  themselves,  the  substantive  pretio  being  understood. 

%  264.  But  some  of  these  adjectives  often  stand  alone  in  th e  geni¬ 
tive,  especially  after  verbs  of  valuing  at  such  a  price,  with  which 
this  is  the  regular  construction. 

„  (< d)  Tanti  and  quanti  (with  their  compounds),  pluri s,  minoris ,  always  stand 
in  the  genitive.  With  verbs  of  valuing ,  magni ,  parvi ,  maximi,  minimi , 
plurimi ,  also  stand  in  the  gen.  ,* *but  magno ,  permagno ,  and  parvo ,  are 
found  in  the  abl.  also  with  aestimare.  %  With  verbs  of  price ,  magno ,  per¬ 
magno,  parvo,  minimo,  plurimo,  nimio,  vili,  stand  in  the  ablative. 

.  (e)  The  substantives,  Jlocci,  nauci,  nihili,  pili,  &c.,  also  stand  in  the  gen. 
after  verbs  of  valuing. 

'  Multi  _  ?  are  no,  usedj  bu,  (  magni, 

Majoris^  j  C  pluris. 

265.  (a)  Terra  vestita  est  floribus,  herbis,  arboribus,  frugibus , 

The  earth  is  clothed  with  flowers,  herbs,  trees, 
fruits. 

Cornibus  tauri  se  tutantur,  Bulls  defend  themselves 
with  their  horns. 

( b )  Viginti  talentis  unam  orationem  Isocrates  vendidit, 

Isocrates  sold  one  oration  for  twenty  talents. 

(c)  Venditori  expedit  rem  venire  quam  plurimo,  It  is  for 

the  interest  of  the  seller  that  the  thing  should  be  sold 
for  as  high  a  price  as  possible. 

(d)  Te  quotidie  pluris  facio,  I  value  you  more  every  day. 

(e)  Totam  rempublicam  flocci  non  facere ,  Not  tu  care  a 

lock  of  wool  (or,  as  we  should  say,  a  straw,  or 
rush )  for  the  whole  state. 

266.  Vocabulary  38. 


To  value, 

To  hold  cheap, 

V  To  cost,  %' 

To  sell  (intrans.) ;  to  be  sold, 


aestimare,  av,  at. 
parvi  pendSre ;  pepend,  pens, 
stare,  stSt ;  or  constare  (with  dat.  ol 
person). 

venire,0  eo,  venlv,  and  venu, 


C. 


•  b  The  passage  in  Phaedrus,  ‘Multo  majoris  alapae  mecum  veneunt,’  is  per¬ 
haps  the  only  instance.  (B.) 

*  c  Venire  venum  ire,  to  go  to  sale,  from  an  old  substantive  Venus.  So;  vo 


98 


THE  ABLATIVE. 


[§  37.  267, 


To  sell, 

To  buy, 

More  highly,  for  more,  dearer, 
For  less, 

For  as  much — as, 

For  just  as  much  as ;  for  no  more 
than, 

For  how  much, 

Too  dear, 

To  reckon  or  think  nothing  of, 
Not  to  care  a  straw  for, 


vendSre,  vendid,  vendit. 

emere,  em,  empt. 

pluris. 

minoris. 

tanti— quanti. 

C  tantidem — quanti. 

quanti  1 
nimio, 
nihili  facere. 

flocci  facere  ( literally ,  to  make , 
\  reckon  it  ‘  at  a  lock  of  wool ’.) 
non  hujus  facere, 
mbdius,  i,  m. 
triticum,  i,  n. 
sestertius,  i,  m. 
mercator,  oris,  m. 


L  0 


»  Not  to  care  that  for  it, 

Peck, 

Wheat, 

Sesterce, d 
Merchant, 

/  (Eng.)  To  cost  a  person  much  (or  dear). 

.  ( Eat .)  To  stand  to  a  person  at  much. 

[C.  xxm.]  fjf  When  one,  two ,  &c.,  mean  one,  two ,  &c.,  apiece  or  for  each ,  they 
must  be  translated  by  the  distributive  numerals,  singuli ,  bini ,  &c. 


Exercise  41. 

267.  That  victory  cost  the  Carthaginians  ( Pceni )  much  blood. 
It  cannot  be  denied  that  that  victory  cost  us  much  blood.  Mer¬ 
chants  do  not  sell  for  no  more  than  they  bought  (at).  He  says 
that  he  does  not  care  a  straw  for  my  glory.  I  will  ask  him  for 
how  much  he  bought  these  things.  I  sell  my  (goods)  for  as  much 
as  Caius.  The  peck  of  wheat  was  at  two  sesterces.  For  how 
much  does  wheat  sell  ?  Epicurus  thinks  nothing  of  pain.  There 
is  hardly  any  body* *9  who  does  not  (44,  (3)  )  hold  his  own  things 
cheap.  I  do  not  care  that  for  you.  My  life  is  valued  at  ten' 
asses  a  day. e  It  is  foolish  to  hold  one’s  own  (blessings)  cheap. 
He  says  that  I  have  bought  these  things  too  dear.  Merchants 
never  sell  for  less  than  they  bought  (at).  I  will  ask  what2lJ  corn 
is  selling  for. 


nun-dSre,  ven-dere  =r  venum  dare.  Tacitus  has  posita  veno,  exposed  for  sale. 
Veneo  is  conjugated  like  eo,  having  venii  rather  than  venivi  for  perf. ,  and  imperf.% 
veniebam  as  well  as  venibam.  No  imperat. ;  no  supines,  gerunds  or  participles. 

d  A  Roman  coin,  worth  about  three  and  a  half  cents  Federal  money.  A  thou* 
sand  sestertii  made  one  sestertium ,  which  was  a  sum,  not  a  coin, 

•  Denis  In  diem  assibus. 


§  38.  268-273.] 


THE  ABLATIVE. 


99 


§  38.  The  Ablative  continued. 


*  268.  (a)  Verbs  of  abounding ,  filing,  loading ,  &c.,  and  their 
opposites,  such  as  verbs  of  wanting ,  depriving  of,  emptying  of, 
govern  the  ablative. 

*  269.  ( b )  But  of  these  Zgco  and  indigeo  (especially  the  latter)  govern  the  geni¬ 

tive  also. 

*  270.  (c)  Some  verbs  of  freeing  from,  removing  from,  differing 
from,  being  at  a  distance  from,  &c.,  are  sometimes  followed  by  the 
ablative,  but  generally  (in  prose)  by  a  preposition.* 

*  271.  ( d )  Fungor ,  fruor ,  utor  (with  their  compounds),  potior, 
vescor,  dignor,  glorior,  take  the  ablative  :  as  does  also  supersedeo. 

*  But  potior  takes  the  genitive ,  when  it  means  Ho  obtain  sovereign 
power  over.’ 

272.  (a)  Pericles  forebat  omni  genere  virtutis,  Pericles  was 

eminent  in  every  kind  of  virtue  (i.  e.  admirable 
quality). 

(b)  Res  maxime  necessarise  non  tam  artis  indigent,  quam 

laboris,  The  most  necessary  things  do  not  require 
skill  so  much  as  labour. 

(c)  Athenienses  bello  liberantur,  The  Athenians  were  res¬ 

cued  from  the  (threatened)  war. 

Leva  me  hoc  onere,  Relieve  me  from  this  burden. 

(d)  Divitiis,  nobilitate,  viribus,  multi  male  utuntur,  Many 

men  make  a  bad  use  of  riches,  noble  birth,  (and) 
strength. 

Augustus  Alexandria  brevi  potitus  est,  Augustus  soon 
gained  possession  of  Alexandria. 

273.  Vocabulary  39. 


(Verbs  governing  the  ablative.) 
To  deprive  of,  privare,  av,  at. 

*  To  bereave  of,  deprive  of,  orbare,  av,  at. 

.  To  rob  of  (by  open  violence  as  an  >  U|  g  5  u 
enemy),  ) 


*  To  be  without, 


carere, i»  carui  et  cassus  sum,  carite/ 
cass. 


t  With  defendere ,  exsolvZre ,  exonerare ,  lev  are,  the  ablative  alone  is  to  be  pre¬ 
ferred.  (Z.) 

'  e  Expilare,  compildre  are  Ho  plunder ,’  as  robbers. 

i  h  Carere  is  simply  ‘  to  be  without egere  is  ‘  to  need,  to  want indigire  it  1  to 


IOC 


THE  ABLATIVE. 


[§  38.  27«. 


To  stand  in  need  of,  need,  re-  (  egere  ( ablat .  or  gen.)  or  indigere  {which 


quire, 

To  free  from,  set  free  from,  re¬ 
lieve  from, 


is  stronger )  egere,  egui, 
liberare,i  av,  at. 


To  use, 

uti,  usus. 

To  discharge,  perform, 

fungi,  functus  ;  perfungi  {stronger^.  «. 

To  enjoy, 

To  feed  on,  live  on,  eat, 

To  boast  of, 

frui,  fruitus,  and  fructus, 
veseik  (no  perf). 

(  gloriari ;  also  followed  by  de 

’  and  by 

(  ‘in’  when  it  signifies  ‘  to  glory  in* 

To  make  the  same  boast, 

Idem  gloriari. 

f  niti,  nlsus  and  nixus ;  in  aliquo  niti,  u 

To  rest  or  lean  upon, 

\  ‘to  lean  on  a  person  for 

1  that  is,  ‘  to  rest  with’  in  the 

support, 
sense  of 

(  depending  upon  his  exertions,  &c 

To  rejoice, 

gaudere,  gavisus. 

Medicine, 

medicina,!  se,  f. 

Milk, 

lac,  lactis,  n. 

Flesh, 

caro,  carnis,./. 

Cheese, 

caseus,  i,  m. 

Fever, 

febris,  is,/-,  {abi.  i.). 

Quite, 

plane. 

Debt, 

(  aes  alienum,  another  man’s 

money  ; 

(  aes  aeris,  n.  copper. 

A  heavy  debt, 

magnum  aes  alienum. 

Severity  (of  a  disease), 

gravitas,  atis,/. 

Disease, 

morbus,  i,  m. 

Perversely, 

perverse. 

{Eng.)  Make  a  bad  (perverse,  &c.)  use  of  it. 
{Lat.)  Use  ill  ( perversely ,  &c.). 


feel  that  I  want ;’  the  in  expressing  intra  animum.  With  reference  to  an  advan 
tage  desired,  carere  is  simply,  ‘  to  be  without  a  desirable  good,’  egere ,  ‘  to  be 
without  an  indispensable  good.’  (D.)  This  seems  to  be  the  proper  limitation  of 
Cicero’s  definition;  that  carere  is  ‘egere  eo  quod  habere  velis.’ 

i  Also  with  a,  ab. 

k  Vesci  is  the  most  general  expression  for  supporting  life  by  food ,  including 
edere  and  bibere  as  the  actions  of  men,  pasci  and  potdre  as  the  actions  of  beasts. 
When  vesci  relates,  as  it  generally  does,  to  eating,  it  denotes  any  manner  of  eat¬ 
ing,  chewing,  swallowing,  &c. :  whereas  cd£re,  comedZre  supposes  the  manner  in 
which  a  man  eats,  by  biting  and  chewing.  In  vesci  the  principal  notion  is  the 
purpose  of  eating,  the  support  of  life ;  in  edere,  the  means  by  which  life  is  sup¬ 
ported,  the  action  of  eating.  (D.) 

l  Medicamentum  or  medicamen  is  a  medicine  with  reference  to  its  material 
substance,  as  it  is  prepared  by  an  apothecary :  medicina,  with  reference  to  its  heal¬ 
ing  power,  as  it  is  prescribed  by  a  physician,-  remedium  is  a  preventive,  a  remedy 
against  an  impending  evil.  (D.) 


§38.  274-276.] 


THE  ABLATIVE. 


I 


101 


Exercise  42. 

[Should  *  every  day  ’  be  translated  by  indies ,  or  by  quotidie ,  when  there 
is  no  progressive  increase  from  one  day  to  another  ?] 

274.  Do  not  deprive  another  of  his  praise7.  I  rejoice  that 
you  are  quite  without  fever.  The  body,  to  be  (ut)  in  good  health, 
requires  many  things. 5)  Nature  herself  admonishes  us  every 
day  how  few  things  we  require.  He  'promised  to  set  me  free  from 
my  debt.  Have  I  not  set  you  free  from  a  heavy  debt  ?  Many 
men  make  a  perverse  use  of  reason.  They  live  on  milk,  cheese, 
flesh.  It  ivas  owing  to  you 22  that  I  was  not  bereaved  of  my 
children.  But  a  little  more 24  and  Caius  would  have  been  bereaved 
of  his  children.  It  is  not  every  man  who  can  think  nothing  of 
pain.  It  is  a  disgraceful  thing  (for  a  man)  to  boast  of  his  vices. 
May  I  not  make  the  same  boast  as  Cyrus  ?  I  will  exhort  Caius 
to  discharge  (75)  all  the  duties  of  life.  The  safety  of  the  state 
depends  upon  you  alone  (in  te  uno).  Do  men  alone  feed  on  flesh  ? 
[No.]  The  severity  of  disease  makes  us  require66  medicine 
(gen.). 


*  275.  The  manner  or  cause ,  and  any  word  that  restricts  the 
meaning  of  another  to  a  particular  part  of  a  thing  spoken  of,  is 
put  in  the  ablative. 


276.  Vocabulary  40. 

Lame  of  one  foot,  claudus  altgro  pede. 

*  (Adjectives*  followed  by  the  abl.) 

Worthy,  deserving  of,  dignus,  a,  um. 

Unworthy,  indignus, m  a,  um. 

Banished,  extorris,  is,  com.  gend.  (from  ex  terra). 1 

Relying  on,  fretus,  a,  um. 

Contented,  contentus,  a,  um. 

Endued  with,  praeditus,  a,  um. 

To  deserve,  dignus,  um,  &c.,  esse. 

Censure,  reprehensio,  onis,/. 


»  *  Adjectives  signifying  want  or  freedom  from  (vacuus,  liber,  &c.),  take  the  abl., 

or  the  abl.  with  a,  ab. 

r  m  Dignus  and  indignus  are  (less  commonly)  followed  by  the  genitive, 
t  n  Profugus  is  one  who  has  fled  from  his  country ;  exsul  and  extorris  imply 
that  the  person  is  under  sentence  of  banishment.  Extorris  relates  rather  to  the 
misery  of  the  exile  exsul,  to  his  punishment  and  disgrace.  (D.) 


102 


THE  VOCATIVE. 


[§  39.  277,  278. 


Punishment,  poena,  a e,f. 

Severe  (of  punishment,  &c.),  gravis,  is,  e. 

Motion,  motus,  us,  m.  (what  declens.  1  why  ?) 

Reality,  res,  rei,  f. 

Name,  nomen,  inis,  n. 

{Eng.)  He  deserves  to  be  loved.0 

*  ( Lat .)  He  is  a  deserving  (person)  who  should  be  loved  (dignus  est 
qui  ametur). 

[Eng.)  To  inflict  punishment  on  a  person. 

%  {Lat.)  To  affect  {=  visit)  a  man  with  punishment  (aliquem 
poena  afficere). 

Exercise  43. 

277.  Are  they  deserving  of  praise',  who  have  done  these 
things  ?  [No.]  I  think  this  man  deserving  not  of  censure  only, 

but  also  of  punishment.  These  things  are  unworthy  of  us.  1 
cannot  but  think 18  these  things  unworthy  of  us.  He  has  threat¬ 
ened  me  with4i  severe  punishment.  I  have  said  this  (pZ. ),  relying  on 
your  compassion.  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  will  inflict  a  severe 
punishment  upon  you.  Nature  is  contented  with  a  little.  Age¬ 
silaus  was  lame  of  one  foot.  Had  you  rather  be  blind,  or  lame 
of  one  foot  ?  The  mind  is  endued  with  perpetual  motion.  It 
cannot  be  doubted  that  the  mind  is  endued  with  perpetual  motion. 
It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  sold  his  country  for  gold.  He  is  ar 
orator  not  in  reality  but  in  name.  He  is  a  boy  in  age.  He 
deserves  to  be  praised  by  all.  It  is  not  every  one  who  can  heal 
the  diseases  of  the  mind.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  is  banished 
from  his  country.  There  are  some  who109  deny  that  these  things 
are  unworthy  of  us. 


XII. 

§  39.  The  Vocative.  ( Attraction  of  the  Vocative.) 

278.  Sometimes,  in  poetry,  a  vocative  is  used  instead  of  a  nomi¬ 
native  after  the  verb.p 

0  So,  he  does  not  deserve  to  be,  tic.,  ‘  indignus  est,  qui,’  &c. 
p  Examples  in  poetry  are  Matutine  pater,  seu  Jane  libentius  audis.  (Hor.' 
’Tune  ille  Odrysiae  Phineus  rex  inclytus  orae  ?  Tu  Phoebi  comes ,  et  nostro  dilecte 
parenti?  (Val.  Flac.)  So  in  Greek  o\/3u  yivoio !  (Theocr.)  (K.) 


THE  VOCATIVE 


103 


§39.  279-281.] 

Another  vocative  has  generally  preceded,  and  this  second  vocative  is 
attracted  into  agreement  with  it ;  but  sometimes  it  merely  refers  to  a 
nominative  of  the  second  person. 

v  (a)  The  phrase  ‘  macte  virtute  esto  !’  (a  blessing  on  your  valour !  or, 
good  luck  to  your  valour !)  is  probably  an  example  of  this  construction, 
made  being  the  vocative  of  mactus  from  mag-ere q  (to  increase,  enrich, 
&c.).  The  only  objection  to  this  explanation  is  Livy’s  adverbial  use 
of  made  with  the  infinitive.  (See  example:  juberem  made  virtute 
esse.)  (K.) 

279.  ( b )  On  the  other  hand,  a  nominative  sometimes  stands  in 
apposition  to  a  vocative,  or  where  a  vocative  would  be  the  regular 
construction. 

This  is  especially  the  case  with  solus,  unus ,  primus. 

280.  ( a )  Macie  virtute  esto  !  A  blessing  on  your  valour  !  or, 

‘  Go  on  in  your  valour  /’ 

Macti  virtute,  milites  Romani,  este  !  Good  luck ,  O 
Roman  soldiers ,  to  your  valour  ! 

Juberem  macte  virtute  esse ,  &c.  1  would  say ,  a  bless¬ 
ing  on  your  valour  !  &c. 

( b )  Audi  tu,  populus  Albanus !  Listen,  ye  people  of 
Alba!  ' 

Salve  primus  omnium  parens  patrirn  appellate  !  Hail 
thou,  the  very  first  who  was  ever  called  the  father 
of  his  country  ! 

pietas,  atis,  f. 
in  (with  accus.). 

r  ave,  salve3  {imperatives  of  the  2d  conju- 
*  <  gation — vale,  valeto  is  only  fare- 
(  well !). 

( toga,  se,  f.  (as  opposed  to  the  mili • 
C  tary  cloak,  it  means  the  civil  gown). 


*  q  The  root  mag  (the  Greek  pey)  of  this  obsolete  verb  is  still  found  in  magnus 
and  mcxtare  (to  present  with ;  to  honour).  (D.) 

0  r  Pietas  is  dutif  ul  affection  (towards  the  gods ,  one’s  parents,  relations,  country , 
and  even  ben  factors),  arising  from  a  natural  feeling :  caritas  (properly  their  dear¬ 
ness  to  us)  is  founded  on  reason  and  a  just  appreciation  of  their  value. 

*  •  That  ave  was  a  morning,  salve  an  evening  salutation,  does  not  appear  to  be 

established.  Suetonius  makes  salve  the  morning ,  and  vale  the  evening  saluta¬ 
tion.  (See  Habicht.) 

*  i  A  woollen  upper  garment,  covering  the  whole  body,  and  forming  the  ordi¬ 
nary  dress  of  a  Roman  citizen.  It  was  a  flowing  robe,  covering  the  left  arm, 
but  leaving  the  right  at  liberty. 


281.  Vocabulary  41. 
Dutiful  affection,  piety,1 
Towards, 

Hail,  farewell ! 

The  toga,‘ 


104 


THE  PASSIVE. 


[§40  282-286. 

r  triumphus,  i,  m.  (a  public  procession 

A  triumph,  <  granted  by  a  decree  of  the  senate  to  a 

f  victorious  general). 

To  gain  a  triumph  for  a  victory  >  de  or  ex  Ga„is  triumph5re. 
over  the  Gauls,  ) 

To  lead  the  captives  in  triumph,  captivos  per  triumphum  ducgre. 

People,11  p'dpulus,  i,  m.  (the  vocat,  not  in  use). 

Exercise  44. 

282.  A  blessing  on  thy  valour,  Titus  Manlius,  andT  on  thy 
piety  towards  thy  father  and  thy  country  !  Hail  thou,  the  first 
who  has  deserved  a  triumph  in  a  civil  gown  !  Hear,  O  people 
of  Rome !  A  blessing,  O  citizens,  on  your  dutiful-affection 
towards  your  country  !  A  blessing,  O  boy,  on  your  diligence  ! 
You,  such  is  your  diligence ,9)  will  soon  finish  the  business.  His 
diligence  is  as  great  as9)  his  abilities.  It  cannot  be  denied  that 
(86)  his  diligence  is  as  great  as  his  ability.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  he  told  many  falsehoods  about  his  age,  that  (63)  he  might 
appear  younger  (than  he  is).  It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  told 
many  falsehoods,  that  he  might  not  be  banished.  I  ask  you  again 
and  again  to  succour  (75)  me.  There  were  some  who109  denied 
that  I  had  deserved  a  triumph. 


XIII. 

§  40.  The  Passive  Voice. 

%  283.  (a)  The  agent  after  a  passive  verb  (which  is  regularly  under  the  gov¬ 
ernment  of  a  or  ah)  is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative ,  especially  in  poetry, 
\  and  after  the  participle  in  dus. 

*  S84.  The  accusative  after  the  active  verb  (the  object)  becomes  the  nomi¬ 
native  before  the  passive  verb. 

*.  285.  ( h )  But  verbs  that  govern  the  dative  in  the  active  are 
used  impersonally  in  the  passive  ;  so  that  the  nominative  before  the 
English  verb  becomes  the  dative  after  the  Latin  verb. 

286.  (c)  Vapulo ,  veneo ,  Jio,  having  a  passive  meaning,  have  also  a  passivt 
construction. 


u  Not  in  the  sense  of  folk  or  follcs,  as  in  English,  but  oi&  people. 
T  Ac.  (See  4,  d.) 


THE  PASSIVE. 


105 


§  40.  287-290.] 

*  287.  [C.  xxiv.]  OCT"  ( d )  To  express  the  future  subjunctive 
passive  we  must  not  use  the  participle  in  dus  with  sim,  essem ,  &c., 
but  futurum  sit,  esset,  &c.,  followed  by  ut. 

*  288.  (e)  The  future  infinitive  passive  is  made  up  of  the  supine 
in  um  with  iri  ;  but  when  verbs  have  no  supine,  we  must  use 
fore  or  futurum  esse,  &c. 

*  This  substitute  for  a  future  infinitive  passive  must  be  used  even 
when  the  verb  has  a  supine,  unless  the  event  is  to  be  described  as  being 
about  to  happen. 

In  other  words  the  supine  with  iri  is  a  paulo-post  futurum. 

*  289.  (f)  So  also  fore  ut  with  the  subjunctive  should  be  used 
for  the  future  infinitive  active,  when  the  event  is  not  to  be  described 
as  being  now  about  to  happen. 

290.  (a)  Mihi  consilium  captum  jam  diu  est,  My  resolution 
has  long  been  taken. 

(b)  Gloriat  tuce  invidetur,  Your  glory  is  envied. 
Philosophise  vituperatoribus  satis  responsum  est,  The 

revilers  of  philosophy  have  been  sufficiently  answered. 

(c)  Rogatus  est,  an  ab  reo  vapulasset,  He  was  asked 

whether  he  had  been  beaten  by  the  prisoner.  Ab 
hoste  venire,  To  be  sold  by  an  enemy.  A  me  fieri, 
To  be  doing  by  me. 

( d )  Nescio,  quando  futurum  sit,  ut  epistola  scribatur, w  1 

don't  know  when  the  letter  will  be  written. 

(e)  Dixit  fore  ut  oppidum  expugnaretur,1  He  said  that  the 

town  would  be  taken. 

Dixit  oppidum  expugnatum  iri,  He  said  that  the  city 
was  about  to  be  taken.  (G.) 

(f)  Nunquam  putavi  fore  ut  supplex  ad  te  venirem,  1 

never  thought  that  I  should  come  to  you  as  a  sup - 
pliant. 

{Eng.)  You  are  envied,  favoured,  spared,  answered,  &c. 

*  ( Lat .)  It  is  envied  (favoured,  spared,  answered,  &c.)  to  you. 

{Eng.)  I  don’t  know  when  it  will  be  written. 

*  {Lat.)  1  don’t  know  when  it  will  be  {subj.)  that  it  be  written. 


*  Of  course  esset  and  scriberetur  after  a  past  tense. 

*  The  tense  of  the  subjunctive  verb  depends  not  on  fore ,  bu<t  on  the  pieced* * 
mg  verb.  Spero  fore  ut  convalescat :  sperabam  fore  ut  convalesceret. 


106 


THE  PASSIVE. 


[§  40.  291,292 


291.  Vocabulary  42. 

To  be  beaten, 

To  recover  (from  a  sickness), 

To  heal,  to  be  healed  of  a  wound, 

To  burst  out,  or  bleed  afresh, 
Wound, 

Priest,  priestess, 

A  husband, 

I  am  persuaded, 

A  liar, 

Faith,  fidelity, 

Most  men, 

To  do  any  thing  with  a  person, 


vapUlare,  av,  at. 

convalescere,  y  valu  (see  Tables  for  Re 
ference,  II.  vii.). 
consanescgre,  sanu. 

recrudescere,  crudu  (properly  to  grow 
raw  again), 
vulnus,  eris,  n. 
sacerdos,  dotis,  m.  et f. 
vir,  viri,  m.  (a  man). 
persuasum  est  mihi,  or  persuasum  ha¬ 
beo.2 

mendax,  acis  ( prop .  an  adject.). 
fides,  ei ,f. 

s  plerique  ( pleri  declined  and  que  append- 
C  ed ;  but  not  found  in  the  gen#.). 

'  facgre  (with  ablat. ;  abl.  with  de;  or  with 
dat.  De  should  be  expressed  before 
<|  the  personal  pronouns ,  the  ablatives 
of  which  are  of  the  same  form  as  the 
[  accusatives). 


Exercise  45. 

292.  I  will  ask  whether  he  has  been  beaten  by  his  slave. 
What  will  become  of  my  Tulliola7  ?  I  hope  he  will  recover.  I 
hoped  he  would  recover.  I  doubt  not  but  that  (86)  you  will  be 
praised  by  all.  The  wounds,  which  had  been  healed,  bleed 
afresh.  I  fear  his  wounds  will53  bleed  afresh.  These  priest¬ 
esses  of  Vesta  are  not  permitted  to  marry  a  husband.  Your  virtue 
is  envied.  Liars  are  not  believed.  The  unwilling  are  not  easily 
persuaded  of  any  thing.3  There  is  no  doubt  that  your  glory  will 
be  envied.  All  my  properly  has  been  sold  by  an  enemy.  I  will 
ask  which15  of  them  is  favoured  by  Caesar.  That  ( ille )  age  is 
not  only  not  envied,  but  even  favoured.  I  fear  that  these  wounds 
will  not 53  heal.  What  will  become  of  me  ?  There  are  some 


»  y  The  disease  from  which  a  person  recovers,  must  be  governed  by  ex  with 
the  abl. 

1  Persuasissimum  habeo  should  never  be  used  ;  persuasissimum  est  mihi  does 
not  occur  in  Cicero,  but  in  a  letter  of  Brutus’s  to  Cicero.  (Klotz.)  I  am  per '• 
tuaded  of  (persuasum  est  mihi  de,  &c.  with  abl.). 
a  Say :  ‘  to  the  unwilling  nothing  is  easily  persuaded.’ 


b  Of  two  persons 


THE  PASSIVE. 


§41.  293-297. J 


107 


who109  believe  that  he  has  been  beaten  by  his  slave.  There  are 
some  who  envy  your  glory. 


§  41.  The  Passive  continued. 

*  293.  (a)  The  verbs  that  govern  two  accusatives  in  the  active, 
sometimes  govern  one  accusative  (that  of  the  object )  in  the  passive. 

*  Since  even  in  the  active  it  is  only  some  verbs  of  asking ,  &c.  that  gov¬ 
ern  the  two  accusatives,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  extend  the  rule  just 
given  beyond  the  actual  practice  of  good  writers. — Rogari  may  take 
this  acc.  It  is  found  with  indutus  and  edoctus;  with  doctus  or  dedoctus 
it  is  not  common  in  prose :  with  celdri  and  moneri  very  rare,  except 
with  the  neuter  of  pronouns,  or  such  adjectives  as  multa ,  pjt uca.  (Z.) 

*  294.  (5)  Passive  verbs  and  participles  are  sometimes  followed 
by  an  accusative  of  the  part  particularly  referred  to  (accusativus 
partis  affectae). 

Thus  we  may  say,  not  only  caput feritur  alicui ,  or  caput  alicujus  fe¬ 
ritur,  but  also  aliquis  feritur  caput. 

•  (c)  In  some  particular  constructions  the  part  referred  to  is  put  in  the  ^en¬ 
or  ablative. 

*■  295.  '  An  accusative  also  follows  many  other  passive  participles,  especially 
in  the  poets. 

The  peculiarity  is  this :  the  dative  of  the  act.  is  allowed  to  stand  as 
the  nominative  ( subject )  before  the  passive,  or,  which  comes  to  the  same 
thing,  with  a  passive  participle  in  agreement  with  it ;  and  then  the  ac¬ 
cusative  of  the  object  is  allowed  to  remain.  This  construction  (which 
is  called  the  Greek  accusative),  and  that  in  294,  must  not  be  imitated 
by  those  who  wish  to  write  in  Cicero’s  style.  (G.) 

s  296.  In  many  general  expressions  the  passive  voice  is  used 
impersonally  where  the  active  might  be  used  in  Latin,  and  is  used 
in  English. 

(Thus  ambulatum  est,  It  has  been  walked  (by  us)  =  we  have 
walked). 

*  297.  ( d )  With  verbs  of  seeming,  and  passive  verbs  of  declaring, 
thinking,  &c.,  the  personal  construction  is  far  more  common  than 
the  impersonal .* 


«  In  the  past  tenses,  traditum  est ,  proditum  est  are  very  commonly  used.  The 
passives  of  audire  and  nuntiare  are  frequently,  though  not  so  exclusively,  used 
personally.  (Z.) 


108 


THE  PASSIVE. 


[§  41.  298,  299 


(Eng.)  It  seems ,  is  said ,  &c.,  that  Caius  has  retired  (or,  as  Lat.). 
*(. Lat .)  Caius  seems ,  is  said ,  &c.,  to  have  retired. 

298.  (a)  Rogatus  sententiam,  Being  asked  his  opinion.  Longam 
indutus  vestem,  Clothed  in  a  long  garment. 

(Jb)  Obl!tusd  faciem  (smeared  as  to  his  face  =),  having 
his  face  smeared  or  covered.  Incensus  animum 
(kindled  as  to  his  mind  =),  Having  his  mind  agi¬ 
tated.  Adversum  femur  ictus  (struck  as  to  his 
opposite  thigh  =),  Wounded  in  the  front  part  of 
his  thigh. 

(c)  Pendere  animi  or  animo, e  To  he  in  anxious  suspense . 

Discrucior  animi,  My  mind  is  on  the  rack  ;  I  am 
tortured  in  mind. 

(d)  Lycurgi  temporibus  Homerus  fuisse  dicitur ,  Homer 

is  said  to  have  lived  (or,  it  is  said  that  Homer  lived) 
in  the  time  of  Lycurgus. 

Miltiades  videbatur  non  posse  esse  privatus,  It  seemed 
that  Miltiades  could  not  he  a  private  man. 


299.  Vocabulary  43. 


Blood  f  (when  shed), 

Silent,  t 

,  To  be  silent,  hold  one’s  tongue, 
To  be  silent,  hold  one’s  tongue, 
cease  speaking, 

.  Silence, 

Habit  of  silence, 

About  (after  to  be  silent), 

To  set  on  fire, 

To  light,  kindle, 


cruor,  oris,  m. 

tacitus,  a,  um  (if  actual ,  taciturnus,  a, 
um  if  habitual  silence  is  meant.) 
silere,  silu,  - 

tacere, s  tacu,  tacit. 

silentium,  i,  n. 
taciturnitas,  atis,  f. 

de  (with  ablat.  But  neuter  pronouns 
may  stand  in  accus.  without  prepos.). 
incendere,  cend,  cens. 
accendere,  succendere,  cend,  cens.h 


d  From  oblinire. 

e  Often  animis ,  if  more  than  one  person  is  spoken  of.  Cicero  uses  pendere 
animi  and  pendere  animis :  not,  1  believe,  pendere  animo. 

f  Sanguis  inest  venis,  cruor  est  de  corpore  fusus.  At  the  moment  of  shedding 
sanguis  should  be  used. 

s  Silere  is,  to  emit  no  sound,  to  make  no  noise,  to  be  still ; — tacere  is,  to  utter 
no  word,  to  be  silent ;  especially,  to  pass  over  in  silence.  The  opposites  ol 
silere  are  strepgre,fremlre;  of  tacere ,  dicere  and  liqui.  (D.) 

h  Incendere  is  to  set  the  whole  of  a  thing  on  fire ;  accendere  and  succendere,  to 
set  a  part  of  it  on  fire,  that  it  may  be  consumed  gradually.  Accendere  is  tc 


THE  PASSIVE. 


109 


6  4x.  300.] 


Torch, 

Lamp, 

Funeral  pile,  pyre, 

To  strike,  hit,  wound, 
Rod, 

Spear, 

Arrow, 

Lightning, 

To  be  flogged,  whipped 
Thigh, 

To  walk, 

Right  (opposite  of  left) , 


taeda,  ae,  f. 
lucerna,  ae,  f. 
rbgus,  i,  m. 

ferire ;  icere,»  ic,  ict ;  caedere,  cbcid,  caes 
virga,  ae,  /. 
hasta,  ae,  f. 
sagitta,  ae,  f. 
fulmen,  inis,  n. 
with  rods,  virgis  caedi. 

femur,  bris,  n. 
ambulare,  av,  at. 
dexter,  tra,  trum. 


Exercize.  46. 


300.  Cato  was  first  asked  his  opinion.  You  with  your  usual 
nabit  of  silence9  said  nothing.  Marcus,  having  his  face  covered 
with  his  own  blood,  left  the  city.  The  laws  ought  not  to  be  silent. 
I  am  afraid  that53  the  laws  are  silent  about  these  matters.  Han¬ 
nibal,  having  his  mind  agitated  by  silent  care,  was  silent.  I 
warned  the  boy  not  to  light  the  torch.  By  whom  has  the  funeral 
pile  been  lighted  ?  I  will  inquire  by  whom  the  funeral  pile  was 
lighted.  Caius,  being  struck  by  lightning,  died.k  I  foretell  that 
you  will  he  jiogged  (288).  Caius  was  wounded  by  an  arrow'  on 
his  right  thigh.  A  league  was  made  between  the  cities  of27 
Rome  and  Lavinium.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  the  lamp  was 
lighted  by  the  boy.  We  have  walked  (pass.)  enough.  We  have 
come  (pass.)  to  (ad)  the  town.  It  cannot  he  that 20  he  is  not  tor¬ 
tured  in  mind.  It  is  said  that  Caius  has  been  struck  by  a  stone. 
Was  the  funeral  pile  lighted  by  you  or  by  Balbus  ? 


light  it  from  above ,  succendere  from  below.  Hence  a  torch,  lamp,  &c.,  accenditur . 
a  funeral  pile  succenditur.  (D.)*  Animus  accensus  is  merely  an  excited  mind, 
animus  incensus  an  agitated  mind.  (D.) 

t  i  Ferire,  to  strike  generally ;  caedere  is  to  strike  with  what  cuts  (including 
rods,  &c.) :  icgre,  to  strike  with  what  pierces  (including  lightning,  stones,  &c.). 
Ferire  and  icSre  supply  each  other’s  deficiencies:  thus  ferire  is  used  for  pres., 
imperf. ,  fut.,  which  icere  wants  ;  and  icere  supplies  ferire  with  a  perf  and  past 
participle  for  ferii,feritus ,  which  are  not  in  use.  (D.)  Icere  foedus  is  to  ratify 
or  make  a  treaty,  league,  &c. 
t  Decessit. 


110 


EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME. 


[§  42.  301-307 


XIV. 

§  42.  Expressions  of  Time. 

*  301.  ( a )  In  answer  to  the  question  when  ?  the  noun  whicV 
expresses  time  is  put  in  the  ablative :  in  answer  to  the  question 
how  long  ?  in  the  accusative. 

»  302.  ( b )  In  answer  to  the  question  in  what  time  ?  within  what 
time  ?  either  a  preposition  {inters  intra )  is  used  :  or  the  noun  is 
put  in  the  ablative  with  a  cardinal  or  ordinal  numeral. 

•  If  a  cardinal  number  is  used,  the  noun  will  be  in  the  plural ;  if  an 
ordinal ,  in  the  singular. 

(In  ten  years  :  in  the  tenth  year.) 

v  303.  (c)  In  answer  to  the  questions  how  long  before  ?  how 
long  after  ?  the  noun  that  expresses  time  is  put  in  the  ablative. — 
Ante  and  post  are  here  used  as  adverbs,  unless  there  be  another 
noun  or  pronoun  to  be  governed  by  them. 

*  304.  (ft)  A  point  or  space  of  future  time  for  which  any 
arrangement  or  provision  is  now  made,  is  put  in  the  accusative 
with  in  :  the  exact  time  at  which  a  thing  is  to  be  done,  in  the  acc. 
with  ad. 

%  305.  (e)  Abhinc  (ago)  of  past  time  is  joined  to  the  accusative 
or  the  ablative  :m  it  must  precede  the  numeral  and  its  substantive, 
one  of  which  must  be  the  next  word  to  it. 

*  306.  (f)  Natus  (born)  with  the  accusative  of  time  =  at  such 

an  age  ;  so  many  years  old. *  *  Major  and  minor  with  the  genitive 

or  ablative  of  time  =  (respectively)  above  or  under  such  an  ag^. 

-  At  such  an  age  may  also  be  expressed  by  the  genitive  only  (without 
natus). 

307.  (a)  Vere,  In  the  spring.  Auctumno,  In  the  autumn. 

Hibernis  mensibus,  In  the  winter  months.  Solis 
occasu  (at  the  setting  of  the  sun=),  At  sunset. 

-  - 

*  i  Inter ,  if  the  whole  duration  is  spoken  of:  intra ,  if  same  point  within  that 
space. 

ra  Zumpt  says  the  accusative  for  duration ,  the  ablative  for  a  point  of  time. 
This  seems  to  be  incorrect ;  thus  in  ‘  litem  decidit  abhinc  annos  quatuor  ’  duration 
is  not  meant.  The  ablative  is  more  definite  than  the  accusative,  and  should  (I 
think)  be  used  when  a  definite  point  of  past  time  is  to  be  expressed  ;  the  accu¬ 
sative  when  exact  accuracy  is  not  intended.  Hence  the  accusative  is  the  more 
common. 


5  42.  307.]  EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME.  Ill 

Inediam  biduum  aut  triduum  ferre  (to  endure  absti. 
nence  from  food  =),  To  go  without  food  for  two, 
or  even  three  days. 

Ager  multos  annos  quievit,  The  field  has  lain  fallow 
for  many  years. 

(b)  Germani  inter  annos  quatuordecim  tectum  non  subie 

rant,  The  Germans  had  not  entered  a  house  for 
fourteen  years  together. 

Multi  intra  vicesimum  diem  dictatura  se  abdicaverunt, 
Many  persons  have  laid  down  their  dictatorship 
within  twenty  days. 

Agamemnon  cum  universa  Graeca  vix  decem  annis 
unam  cepit  urbem,  Agamemnon  ivith  the  whole  of 
Greece  had  great  difficulty  in  taking  a  single  city  in 
ten  years. 

Pompejus  undequinquagesimo  die  ad  imperium  populi 
Romani  Ciliciam  adjunxit,  Pompeius  in  forty-nine 
days  added  Cilicia  to  the  empire  of  the  Roman 
people. 

(c)  Paucis  post  mensibus,  A  few  months  afterwards 

Paucis  ante  diebus,  A  few  days  before. 

Homerus  annis  multis  fuit  ante  Romulum ,  Homer  lived 
many  years  before  Romulus. 

( d )  Ad  coenam  Canium  invitavit  in  posterum  diem ,  He 

invited  Canius  to  supper  for  the  next  day. 

Solvere  ad  Grcecas  Kalendas ,m  To  pay  on  the  Greek 
Kalends. 

(e)  Abhinc  annos  (or  annis)  quatuor,  Four  years  ago. 

(f)  Cato  annos  quinque  et  octoginta  natus  excessit  e  vita, 

Cato  departed  this  life  when  he  was  eighty-five  years 
old  (or,  at  the  age  of  eighty-five). 

'  Minores  annis  triginta  ( Persons )  wider  thirty  years 
old  (or,  of  age). 

Minores  duorum  et  viginti  annorum,  Under  the  age 
of  two-and-twenty . 


That  is,  never  ;  there  being  no  Kalends  in  the  Greek  Calendar. 


112 


EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME.  [§  42.  308. 

Civis  major  annis  viginti,  A  citizen  above  twenty 
years  old. 

Cato  primum  stipendium  meruit  annorum  decem  sep. 
temque,  Cato  served  his  first  campaign  at  the  age 
of  seventeen  (or,  when  he  was  seventeen  years  old). 


308.  Vocabulary  44. 


% 


9 


To-receive, 

To  succeed  to  —  follow, 
Swallow, 

Winter  (as  adj.), 

Month, 

Go  away, 

To  kill, 


accipere,  reclpgre,  excipere,11  cep,  cept. 

excipere,  cep,  cept  ( accus .). 

hirundo,  inis,./. 

hibernus,  a,  um. 

mensis,  is,  m. 

abire,  abeo,  Iv,  it  (78,  x.). 

C  interficere,  fee,  feet  (the  most  general 
*  <  term  for  killing,  whether  by  starva- 
(.  tion,  poison ,  hanging ,  or  the  sword). 


To  kill  (as  a  violent ,  unjust ,  cruel 
act ;  by  poison,  starvation  stran¬ 
gling,  &c.), 

To  kill,  slay  (especially  in  hon¬ 
ourable,  open  fight), 

To  slaughter,  butcher, 

To  reign  (neut.), 

To  lay  down  a  magistracy, 

Exactly  (of  a  number), 

Ephesian, 

Temple, 

To  be  burnt, 

To  serve  a  campaign,  * 

To  hold  a  magistracy, 


necare ;  or  enecare  (if  by  a  process  that 
takes  up  some  time). 

occidere,  cld,  cis  (it  is  used  however  of 
all  kinds  of  killing). 
trucidare  (according  to  Dbderlein  = 
tauricido ,  I  cut  down  an  ox), 
regnare,  av,  at. 

abdicare  magistratum,  or  abdicare  se 
magistratu. 

ipse  (in  agreement  with  the  noun). 
Ephesius,  i,  m. 
templum,  i,  n. 
deflagrare,  av,  at  (intrans.). 
stipendium  merere  or  mereri  (i.  e.  to 
earn  pay). 

magistratum  gerPre,  gess,  gest. 


*  n  Accipimus  oblata ;  excipimus  vagantia ;  recipimus  fugientia.  (D.)  To  receive 
is  accipere,  when  the  thing  is  offered  or  given :  to  receive  a  person  flying  or  wan¬ 
dering  is  excipere  or  recipere  ;  excipere  being  the  act  of  a  servicable  friend,  an 
equal ;  recipere  that  of  a  benefactor,  a  superior.  Excipere  is  to  stop  a  living 
being  in  motion,  and  either  receive  him  in  a  friendly,  or  intercept  him  in  a  hostile 
manner.  (D.)  Accipere  vulnera  is  to  receive  wounds  intended  for  me;  excipere 
vulnera  is  to  expose  myself  to  wounds  ‘  that  may  every  moment  come  in  my 
way.’  (Hill.)  Recipere  is  also  distinguished  from  accipere  by  denoting  to  receive 
not  merely  for  detention,  but  for  actual  possession.  Accepta  pecunia  may  be  a 
mere  deposit:  recepta  pecunia  is  a  formal  taking  into  possession.  (D.) 


EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME. 


113 


5  42.  309,  310.] 

*  [C.  xxv.]  fjT  After  an  expression  of  time,  ‘ that ’  is  often  used  for  on  which. 

{Eng.)  To  have  reigned  more  than  (or  above )  two  years. 

{Lat.)  To  be  reigning  his  third  year. 

{Eng.)  Before  the  consulship,  censorship,  &c.,  of  Caius. 

{Lat.)  Before  Caius  (being  consul,  censor,  &c.  (ante  Caium  consulem), 

Exercise  47. 

309.  I  come  to  your  epistles,  six  hundred  of  which31 1  received 
kt  one  time.  The  swallows  go  away  in  the  winter  months.  Do 
not  the  swallows  go  away  in  the  winter  months  ?  Mithridates 
slaughtered  many  Roman7  citizens  in  one'  day.  Mithridates,  who 
in  one  day  butchered  so  many  Roman  citizens,  has  already  reigned 
above  two-and-twenty  years  from  that  ( ab  illo )  time.  We  dream 
whole  nights.  Caius  laid  down  his  dictatorship  within  ten  days. 
Scipio0  died  a  year7  before  my  consulship.  Cato  died  exactly 
eighty p-three  years  before  the  consulship  of  Cicero.  The 
eclipses  of  the  sun  are  foretold  for  many  years.  He  published 
an  edict,  that  no  one14  under  (306,  f)  nine-and-twenty  years  old 
should  command  an  army.  On  the  same  night  that  <J  Alexander 
was  born,  the  temple  of  the  Ephesian  Diana  was  burnt-down.  It 
is  certain  that  Caius  served  his  first  campaign  at  the  age  of 
eighteen.  He  died  at  the  age  of  thirty-three.  King  Archelaus 
had  been  in  possession  of  Cappadocia  for  about  forty-nine  years. 
At  the  age  of  thirty  he  had  already  waged  many  wars.  May 
(then)  a  man  under  twenty-two  years  old  hold  a  magistracy  ? 
He  died  three  years  ago.  It  is  the  part  of  a  good  citizen  to 
receive  wounds  for  his  country. 


310.  (a)  (He  did  it)  three  years  after  he  ( had )  returned. 

(1)  post  tres  annos  (or  tertium  annum)  )  quam  redie- 

(2)  tertio  annor . )  rat. 


0  Scipio  the  last  word.  p  Annis  octoginta  et  tribus  ipsis. 

q  Begin  with  the  relative  clause.  30  (c).  32  {d). 

r  It  might  be  supposed  that  1  tertio  anno  quam  {or  quo)  redierat,’  would  mean. 


114 


EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME.  [§  42.  311 

(3)  tribus  annis  (or  tertio  anno)  'postquam  redierat. 

(4)  tertio  anno  quo  redierat.3 

( b )  Pridie  quam  excessit  e  vitii,  The  day  before  he  died. 
Postridie  quam  a  vobis  discessi,  The  day  after  1 
left  you. 

Postero  anno  quam,  &c.,  The  year  after ,  &c. 


Priore  anno  quam, 

311.  Vocabulary  45. 

By  day, 

By  night, 

*  By  day  and  by  night, 

In  the  evening, 

In  good  time, 

At  the  time  of  the  Latin  games, 
In  war, 

In  the  battle  of  Cannae, 

*  A  few  days  ago, 

t  A  few  days  before  (a  past  time 
spoken  of), 

To  found, 

*  To  invest,  blockade, 

To  assault,  storm, 

Spain, 

Supper  (or  rather,  dinner ), 
Poison, 

Starvation, 

Hanging  (‘  the  rope  ’), 


&c.,  The  year  before ,  &c.  (Z.) 

interdiu,  or  die. 
noctu,  or  nocte. 

die  ac  nocte;  die  noctuque;  nocte  et 
interdiu. 

vesperi,  or  vespereA 
in  tempbre,  or  tempbre  only. 
ludis  Latinis. 

bello,  as  well  as  in  bello  (especially  if  join¬ 
ed  with  an  adj.  or  genit.). 
pugna  Cannensi  (or  with  in). 
paucis  his  diebus. 

paucis  illis  diebus. 

condere,  did,  dlt. 
obsidere,  sed,  sess. 
oppugnare,  av,  at. 

Hispania,  se,/, 
coena,*  se,/, 
venenum,  i,  n. 
fames,  is,/, 
suspendium,  i,  n. 


‘  after  two  completed  years  from  his  return,  and  before  the  completion  of  the 
third this  however  does  not  appear  to  be  so.  ‘  Octavo  mense,  quam  cceptum 
oppugnari,  captum  Saguntum,  &c.  ( Liv .)  h  6  kt  o>  pn<*t  ( Polyb .) ;  ‘  Tyrus  septimo 
mense  capta  est’  (Curt.):  no\iopK&v  iirra  privas  (Pint.)  ‘after  a  siege  of  seven 
months’  (Clinton). 

8  Nearly  so  with  ante:  ‘  Ante  triennium  quam  Carthago  deleretur,  M.  Cato 
mortem  obiit.’  The  use  of  the  subjunctive  here  will  be  spoken  of  below.  Obs. 
In  this  construction  postquam  is  oftener  followed  by  the  pluperfect  than  by  the 
perfect.  (See  514.)  The  following  is  an  example  of  the  perfect:  ‘Nero  natus 
est  post  novem  menses  quam  Tiberius  excessit.'’  (Suet.) 

t  From  vesper,  vesperis. 

*  *  From  KoirSi,  common  :  the  principal  meal  of  the  day. 


§43.  312-316.] 


PLACE.  SPACE. 


115 


Exercise  48. 

312.  The  cily  was  taken  by  storm  three  years  after  the  siege 
began."  Hamilcar  was  slain  nine  years  after  he  came  ( had 
come )  into  Spain.  Carthage  was  destroyed  seven  hundred  years 
after  it  was  founded.  He  died  the  year  after  he  was  banished. 
Why  did  he  go  out  in  the  evening  ?  I  will  ask  why  he  set  out 
in  the  evening.  Canius  came  to  supper  in  good  time.  Is  this 
said  to  have  been  done  by  night,  or  by  day  ?  He  died  a  few 
years  ago.  He  died  the  day  after  he  had  called  upon  me.  He 
was  killed  the  year  after  Saguntum  was  taken.  Was  not  he 
killed  in  the  battle  of  Cannse  ?  He  set  out  at  the  time  of  the 
Latin  Games.  The  town  was  taken  five  months  after  it  began 
to  be  blockaded.  It  is  said 67  that  Caius  killed  his  slave  by  poi¬ 
son.  Did  he  kill  his  slave  by  poison  or  by  starvation  ?  Has  he 
not  killed  his  enemy  by  the  rope  ?  I  am  afraid  that  Balbus  has 
killed  his  slave  by  poison. 


XV. 

§  43.  Place.  Space. 

*  313.  (a)  If  the  town  at  which  a  thing  is  done,  is  a  singular  noun 
of  the  first  or  second  declension,  it  is  put  in  the  genitive  :  if  not, 
in  the  ablative .T 

«  314.  (b)  In  answer  to  whither  ?  the  place  is  put  in  the  accusa¬ 
tive  :  in  answer  to  whence  ?  in  the  ablative. 

*  These  rules  apply  only  to  the  names  of  toicns  and  small  islands.  Be¬ 
fore  other  words  prepositions  must  be  used ;  and  before  these ,  when  the 
name  has  an  adjective .w 

315.  Urbs,  oppidum,  locus ,  in  apposition  to  the  name  of  a  town  in  the 
genitive ,  stand  in  the  ablative. 

316.  Such  combinations  as  ‘ school  at  Capua,’  1  Carthage  in  Africa &c._ 
are  not  admissible  in  Latin.  But  the  name  of  the  town  must  be  gov- 


Say  :  ‘  after  it  began  to  be  assaulted.’ 

T  If  oppidum  or  urbs  come  before  the  proper  name,  it  must  take  a  preposition, 

(Z.) 

t  w  In  almost  all  the  constructions  of  time  and  space  the  prepositions  are  occa¬ 
sionally  expressed.  Thus  ‘  ab  Epidauro  ‘  per  totam  noctem  &c. 


116 


PLACE.  SPACE.  [§43.817-319. 


erned  by  the  preceding  rules,  and  the  other  nouns  governed  by  a  'pre¬ 
position.  (C.) 

{Eng.)  Running  to  his  mother  at  Naples. 


{Lai.) 


Running  to  Naples  to  {prep.)  his  mother. 
Currens  ad  matrem  Neapolim.  (C.) 


*  317.  (c)  Local  space  is  expressed  by  the  accusative  :  sometimes 
by  the  ablative.  * 

*  *  With  distare,  exstare ,  eminere ,  acc.  or  abl.  is  used  (but  not  quite  in¬ 

differently)  :  with  abesse,  ex-  dis-  cidgre,  acc.  should  be  used ;  with  con- 
sidgre ,  castra  facere,  the  acc.  or  abl.  sometimes  with  prep,  a,  ab. 

318.  (a)  Yixi  Horace,  Tarenti,  Athenis,  Gabiis,  Tibitre ,  I  have 

lived  at  Rome,  Tarentum,  Athens,  Gabii,  Tibur. 

(b)  Legati  Athenas  missi  sunt :  Ambassadors  were  sent  to 

Athens. 

Fugit  Tarquinios  Corintho,  He  fed  to  Tarquinii  from 
Corinth. 

(c)  Tridui  viam  processit,  He  advanced  a  three  days ’ 

march. 

Campus  Marathon  abest  ab  oppido  Atheniensium  cir¬ 
citer  millia  passuum  decem,  Thefeld  of  Marathon 
is  about  ten  thousand  paces  from  the  city  of  Athens. 
Bidui  abest,  It  is  a  two  days'* 1  journey  from  us  (iter 
understood ). 

Milites  aggerem  latum  pedes  trecentos  exstruxerunt, 
The  soldiers  threw  up  a  mound  three  hundred  feel 
broad  (or,  in  breadth). 


319.  Vocabulary  46. 


A  pace,  passus,  us  =  4  Eng.  feet,  10.02  inches. 

A  Roman  mile  of  a  thousand  paces,  mille  passus. 

Miles,  millia  passuum  (thousands  of  paces). 

*  Two  days,  biduum,  l,  n. 

*  Three  days,  triduum,  i,  n. 

To  be  distant  from  i  to  be  at  a  )  ab  dlst5r e  ,  distit 

distance  of,  ) 

To  be  nearer ;  not  so  far  off,  propius  abesse. 

To  post  himself;  encamp,  considSre,  sed,  sess. 


•  *  Zumpt  says,  ‘If  not  the  distance  is  to  be  expressed,  but  only  a  place  to  be 
designated  by  the  circumstance  of  its  distance,  the  abl.  is  used  in  the  eighth 
edit,  of  the  original,  he  says,  ‘in  the  acc.,  but  the  abl.  is  also  correct.’  (C'*-Q 

i.  48.) 

}  y  Distare  generally  takes  a. 


117 


$44  320-322.]  GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICiPLE  IN  DUS. 

*  To  depart  a  finger’s  breadth,  transversum  digitum  discedere. 

%  As  they  say,  as  the  saying  is,  ut  aiunt. 

Carthage,  Carthago,  inis,./* *. 

Thebes,  Thebae,  arum. 

Exercise  49. 

(How  must  1  lam  answered ’  be  translated?  285.) 

320.  He  lived  many  years  at  Veii.  The  boy  died  at  Carthage. 
My  father  and  mother  died  at  Thebes.  Why  did  he  set  out  for 
Rome  in  the  evening  ?  I  have  lived  several  years  at  Carthage. 
Might  he  not  have  lived  at  Rome  ?  I  almost  think  it  would  have 
been  better  for  ( dat .)  the  Roman  people  to  have  been  contented 
with  Sicily  and  Africa.  They  are  building  a  wall  two  hundred 
feet  high.  The  town  is  five  (Roman)  miles  from  Carthage.  He 
has  posted  himself  (at  a  distance  of)  four  miles  from  Caesar. 
Caius  is  nearer  to  Caesar  than  Labienus.  Are  (then)  you  nearer 
to  me  than  Labienus  (is)  ?  I  have  been  informed  that  Caesar  is  at 
a  distance  of  two  days’  march  from  us.  There  is  no  doubt  that 
the  revilers  of  philosophy  have  been  sufficiently  answered.  Does 
he  not  deserve 61  to  be  relieved  from  his  debt  ?  From  this  rule  I 
may  not  depart  a  finger’s  breadth,  as  the  saying  is.* 


XVI. 

$  44  On  the  Gerunds  and  the  Participle  in  dus  (Gerundive). 

321.  *  The  Gerund  is  a  verbal  substantive ,  but  with  the  power  of  governing 
what  bexongs  to  the  other  parts  of  the  verb.*  Another  peculiarity  is, 
that  it  cannot  take  an  adjective  in  agreement  with  it. 

*  The  Gerund  corresponds,  as  far  as  it  goes,  with  the  English  1  verbal 
substantive ,*  or  ‘ participial  substantive  in  ing ,’  but  its  use  is  far  less 
extensive.* 

322.  %  The  Gerundive  or  participle  in  dus  is  nearly  allied  to  the  Gerund : 


*  Transversum,  ut  ajunt,  digitum. 

*  The  pupil  cannot  be  taught  too  early  or  too  carefully  to  distinguish  the 
‘ participial  substantive ’  from  a  participle.  It  may  be  compound  as  well  as  sim¬ 
ple  :  every  participle,  except  the  simple  past  participle,  having  a  substantive 
use.  ‘  An  affectation  of  being  distinguished  :’  ‘  the  pretext  of  their  having  seized 
some  traders  ‘  after  his  having  been  tumbling  about  in  his  mind  'ne  poor  sen¬ 
tence  ‘  an  atonement  for  his  having  been  betrayed  into,’  Ac. 


118 


GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  DUS.  [§44.  323-327. 


t  its  meaning  is  passive  denoting  necessity ,  fitness ,  or  something  intended ; 
what  must ,  should ,  or  is  to  be  done. 

*  323.  (a)  When  the  participle  in  dus  is  in  the  neuter  gender  with  the  third  per¬ 
son  sing,  of  esse,  a  whole  conjugation  may  be  formed  to  express  what 
one  must,  or  should  do. *  *  The  person  is  put  in  the  dative. 

*  324.  In  the  oblique  cases  the  part,  in  dus  in  agreement 
with  a  substantive,  is  nearly  equivalent  to  a  gerund  governing 
that  substantive  in  the  case  of  its  verb. 


ns  ...  ,  (  scribendi  epistolam. 

*  Of  writing  a  letter,  j  ,  1  . 

(  scribendae  epistolae. 

325.  A  whole  conjugation  may  be  formed  with  the  part,  in  dus 
and  sum. 


Present 


Imperf. 


$  Amandus  sum,  lam  to  be  loved. 

I  Amandus  es,  thou  art  to  be  loved,  &c. 

(  Amandus  eram,  I  teas  to  be  loved. 

£  Amandus  eras,  thou  least  to  be  loved,  &c. 

Obs.  Amandus  eram  ox  fui  is  generally  to  be  rendered  should  (or,  ought 
to)  have  been  loved.  *  The  reason  is  this :  a  thing  which  was  (then)  a 
thing  to  be  loved,  is  (now)  a  thing  which  ought  to  have  been  loved. 

326.  (a)  Pres.  Scribendum  est,  j  °g  m“s<wrfle- 

(.  I,  you,  we,  &c.,  must  write. 

Sing,  mihi  scribendum  est,a  I  must  write. 
tibi  scribendum  est,  thou  must  write. 
illi  scribendum  est,  he  must  write. 

Plur.  nobis  scribendum  est,  we  must  write. 
vobis  scribendum  est,  you  must  write. 
illis  scribendum  est,  they  must  write. 

Imperf.  Scribendum  erat  j  one  ‘hnM  h™‘  wri‘‘m' 

(  1,  thou ,  we  should  have  written. 

mihi  scribendum  erat,  I  ought  to  have  written. 

tibi  scribendum  erat,  thou  oughtest  to  have  written,  &c. 

And  so  on  for  the  other  tenses. 

327.  {Part,  in  dus  in  agreement  with  a  substantive.) 

N.  Epistola  scribenda,  a  letter  to  be  written. 

G.  epistolae  scribendae,  of  writing  a  letter. 

D.  epistolae  scribendae,  to  or  for  writing  a  letter. 

Acc.  (ad)  epistolam  scribendam,  to  write  a  letter  (or,  to  or  for 
writirig  a  letter). 

Abi.  epistola  scribenda,  b  by  writing  a  letter. 


*  That  is,  1  it  is  to  be  written  by  me,’  according  to  the  idiom  by  which  the  pas¬ 
sive  used  impersonally  is  equivalent  to  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  active. 

*  b  It  is  not  always  that  the  gerund  governing  a  case  can  be  turned  into  the 
gerundive  (partic.  in  dus) ;  but  only  when  the  substantive  in  the  case  corres¬ 
ponding  to  the  gerund  would  itself  give  a  correct,  though  imperfect,  meaning. 


119 


$44.  d28-331.]  GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  DUS. 

N.  Auctores  legendi,  authors  to-be  read. 

G.  auctorum  legendorum,  of  reading  authors. 

D.  auctoribus  legendis,  to  or  for  reading  authors. 

Acc.  (ad)  auctores  legendos,  to  read  authors  (or,  to  or  for  read 
ing  authors). 

Abi.  auctoribus  legendis,  by  reading  authors. 

323.  The  part,  in  dus  often  appears  to  change  its  meaning,  but  it  only 
appears  to  do  so. 

Scribendum  est  mihi  (it  is  to-be-written  by  me  =  )  1  must  write. 

Consilium  scribendae  epistolae  (an  intention  with  respect  to  a  letter  to- 
be-written  =  )  an  intention  of  writing  a  letter. 

329.  (Eng.)  We  should  all  praise  virtue. 

(Lat.)  Virtue  is  to-be-praised  by  all  (dat.). 

(Eng.)  A  time  to  play.  Fit  to  carry  burdens. 

(Lat.)  A  time  of  playing.  Fit  for  (dat.)  burdens  to-be-carried. 

(Eng.)  He  is  born  or  inclined  to  act. 

(Lat.)  He  is  born  or  inclined  for  (ad)  acting. 

♦  330.  [C.  xxvi.]  §£j=  What  is  in  form  the  present  participle  active  is  often  ‘  the 
participial  substantive  ’  or  gerund.  It  is  always  so,  when  it  governs  or 
is  governed ,  instead  of  merely  agreeing. 

%  Hj"  What  is  in  form  the  infin.  pass,  is  often  used  as  the  partic.  of 
the  fut.  pass,  implying  possibility,  duty,  or  necessity. 

m 

Exercise  50. 

331.  Man  is  born  to  understand  and  act.  Caius  is  skilled  in 
waging  war.  We  learn  by  teaching.  We  should  praise  virtue 
even  in  an  enemy.  He  has  snatched  away  from  me  the  hope  of 
finishing  the  business.  We  are  all  of  us  desirous  of  seeing  and 
hearing  many  things.  Water  is  good®  for  drinking.  Demos¬ 
thenes  was  eagerly-desirous  of  hearing  Plato.  Pericles  was 
admirably-skilled  [peritis simus)  in  ruling  the  state.  They  adopt 
the  resolution  of  setting  the  town  on  fire.  Ought  not  glory  to  be 


Thus  in,  ‘  I  bring  the  dead  to  my  recollection  by  reading  the  tombstones,’  here  I 
may  use  ‘  sepulcris  legendis ,’  because  I  bring  them  to  my  recollection  by  means 
of  the  tombstones,  though  reading  is  the  particular  way  by  which  I  effect  this 
But  in,  ‘Themistocles  rendered  the  sea  safe  by  chasing  the  pirates,'1  I  must  say. 
‘praedones  consectando ,’  not  lprccdonibus  consectandis ,’  because  he  did  not  make 
it  safe  by  means  of  the  pirates ,  but  only  by  chasing  them  away.  (G.)  In  the 
construction  with  the  gerund,  the  gerund  is  more  emphatic  than  the  gerundive 
in  the  other  construction.  Whenever  therefore  the  participial  substantive  in 
ing  is  emphatic,  the  gerund  should  be  used. 

*  e  Utilis.  Utilis ,  inutilis,  are  followed  by  the  dative  of  the  gerund,  or  by  the 
qec.  with  ad.  Cicero  generally  uses  ad. 


120  GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  DUS.  [§  44.  332-335. 

preferred  to  riches  ?  We  must  do  this.  Those  persons  are  not 
to  be  heard,  who  teach  ( praecipiunt )  that  we  should  be  angry  with 
our  enemies.  We  must  all  die.  An  orator  must  see  what  is  be- 
coming.  We  must  take  care  to  hurt  ( subj .)  nobody. 14  We  must 
not  take  cruel  measures  even  against  Caius.d 


*  332.  If  a  verb  does  not  govern  the  acc.,  the  pari,  in  dus  cannot 
be  used  in  agreement  with  its  substantive.  • 

In  other  words,  such  verbs  have  only  an  impersonal  construction  in 
the  passive:  as  we  must  say,  ‘  mendaci  non  creditur?  so  we  must  say, 

‘  mendaci  non  credendum  est.’ 

'  (a)  Hence  to  express  ‘we  must’  do,  &c.,  with  a  verb  that  governs 

the  dat.  we  must  use  the  part,  in  dus  in  the  neuter  gender,  retaining 
the  object  in  the  dative. 

333. *  (b)  But  f  ruendus,  fungendus,  potiundus,utenduse  are  sometimes  found 

in  agreement  with  their  substantives,  because  these  words  formerly 
governed  the  acc.  When  so  used,  they  are  generally  in  immediate 
agreement  with  their  substantives. 

As,  res  fruenda;  ad  officium  fungendum,  &c.,  but  also  f ruenda 
etiam  sapientia  est.’ 

334.  «  The  gen.  sing,  masculine  of  the  par  tic.  in  dus  is  used  with  sui,  f  even 
when  it  is  plural  or  feminine  singular : 

(  purgandi  sui  causa ,  for  the  sake  of  clearing  themselves.  ) 

l  placandi  tui,  of  appeasing  you  (of  a  xcoman).  ) 

335.  (a)  Parcendum^  est  inimicis,  We  must  spare  our  enemies  . 

(our  enemies  are  to  be  spared ). 

( b )  Ea  quse  utenda  accepisti,  Those  things  which  you  re¬ 

ceived  to  be  used. 

Utendum  est  cuique  suo  judicio  (abi.),  Every  man 
must  use  his  own  judgment. 

(c)  (Peculiar  constructions.) 

Inter  bibendum,  Whilst  they  are  drinking.  Solven¬ 
do  esse  (par,  equal  to,  understood),  To  be  able  to 


<i  Ne  in  Oaium  quidem ,  &c. 

*  e  So  also  vescendus,  gloriandus,  medendus ,  poenitendus,  pudendus. 

f  Other  genitives  plur.  are  found  in  the  same  way,  ‘diripiendi  pomorum,’  &c 
In  some  other  instances  the  gerund  in  di  appears  to  have  a  passive  meaning; 
‘  spes  restituendi ,’  the  hope  of  being  restored.  (Z.) 

f  In  a  few  passages  the  acc.  of  the  object  stands  after  this  impersonal  con¬ 
struction  :  ‘  Canes  potius  paucos  et  acres  habendum,  quam  multos.’  (Varr.) 


121 


$  44.  336-338.]  GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  DUS. 


pay.  Oneri  ferendoh  esse,  To  be  equal  to  bearing 
the  burden.  Conservandae  libertatis  esse,  To  tend 
to  the  preservation  of  liberty. 


%  3136.  [C.  xxvxi. ]  ipr  ‘  I  have  to  do  it  ’  must  be  translated  by  the  part,  in  dus 
{Eng.)  With  whom  we  have  to  live. 

( Lat .)  With  whom  it  is  to-be-lived  (quibuscum  vivendum  est). 

«  [C.  xxviii.]  Ipr  ‘  It  i»,’  followed  by  the  infin.  pass.,  generally  expresses 

necessity ,  fitness,  or  something  intended;  but  sometimes  mere  possibility  t 
to  be  translated  by  possum. 

*  [  ‘  The  passage  is  to  be  found  in  the  fifth  book  ’  —  the  passage  may 

or  can  be  found  in  the  fifth  book.] 

337.  Vocabulary  47. 


To  overthrow, 

To  occupy  myself  in  ;  to  be  en¬ 
gaged  in, 

To  preserve, 

To  study,  devote  oneself  to, 

*  Literature, 

»  To  spend  his  time  in, 

•  To  make  it  my  first  object  or 

business, 

To  plead  a  cause, 

-  To  feel  thankful ;  to  retain  a  grate¬ 
ful  sense, 

To  thank,  return  thanks, 

>  To  repay  a  kindness,  to  prove 
one’s  gratitude, 


evertgre,  vert,  vers, 
operam  dare.i 

conservare,  av,  at. 

stttdere,  studu, - ( dat .). 

literae  (pi. ;  also,  a  letter  =  an  epistle), 
tempus  impendere,  pend,  pens  (dat.). 
id  agere  (‘  to  be  doing  that  ’  and  nothing 
else  ;k  agere,  eg,  act), 
agere  causam. 

gratiam  or  gratias  habere, 
gratias  agere. 

gratiam  referre :  fero,  till,  lat  (the  per¬ 
son  to  whom  must  be  in  the  dat.). 
purgare,  av,  at. 


‘  To  clear  =  excuse, 

•  Obs.  ‘  Should ,’  which  the  pupil  has  been  taught  to  translate  by  debeo  or  oportet , 
must  now  be  translated  by  the  part,  in  dus,  whenever  it  is  not  emphatic;  when¬ 
ever  it  might  be  turned  into  1  it  is  to  be,’  &c. 


Exercise  51. 


338.  He  is  of  opinion  that  these  things  tend  (c)  to  the  over. 


*  b  The  dat.  of  the  purpose  is  sometimes  found  instead  of  the  acc.  with  ad:  dis¬ 
trahendo  hosti,  or  ad  distrahendum  hostem.  When  the  verb  governs  an  object 
in  the  dat.,  the  agent  is  sometimes  expressed  with  ab,  to  avoid  ambiguity : — 
Cives  1  quibus  a  vobis  consulendum  est.’ — 

♦  Obs.  Caius  consulendus  est  (must  be  consulted) :  Caio  consulendum  est  (the 
‘ nterests  of  Caius  must  be  consulted). 

b  i  Vacare  (to  have  leisure  for)  is  never  used  in  this  sense  by  the  best  writers. 
(Hotting.  Cic.  Div.  i.  6.) 
k  Followed  by  ut  with  subj. 

0 


122 


GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLES  IN  DUS.  [§  44.  339 

throw  of  the  state.  Do  these  things  tend  to  the  preservation  01 
the  overthrow  of  the  state  ?  There  is  no  doubt  that  (86)  the 
state  is  not  able  to  pay  (c).  It  is  the  part  of  a  Christian  to  spend 
his  time  in  assistingi  the  wretched.  Let  us  consult  the  interests 
of  those  with  whom  we  have  to  live.  I  will  inquire  of  Caius 
whether  Balbus  should  be  consulted.  We  must  consult  the  inte¬ 
rests  of  Balbus.  It  was  owing  to  you22  that  the  interests  of  Caius 
were  not  consulted.  I  made  it  my  first  object  to  (ut)  preserve  the 
Roman  territory.  I  cannot  repay  your  kindness.  There  is  no 
doubt  that  he  is  going  to  thank  you.  I  will  inquire  of  Caius 
whose  cause  he  is  going  to  plead.  Every  animal  makes  it  its  first 
object  to  preserve  itself.  We  must  strive  to  conquer.  Must  we 
not  repay  the  kindness  of  those  from  ( prep .  a)  whom  we  have 
received  benefits  ?  I  persuaded  Caius  to  devote  himself  to  litera¬ 
ture.  They  had  come  into  the  camp  for  the  purpose  of  clearing 
themselves  (334).  They  had  called  upon  Caius  for  the  purpose 
of  clearing  themselves.  There  were  some  who  consulted  the 
interests  of  Caius. 


339.  Vocabulary  48. 


* 


% 


(Words  following  the  construction  of  proper  names  of  places.) 


At  home, 

From  home, 

Home, 

At  my,  your,  another  man’s  &c. 
house, 


dbmi.m 
dbmo. 
dbmum.n 

•  domi  meae,  tuae,  alienae,  &c. 


On  the  ground, 

In  the  field, 

Out  of  doors ;  out, 

To  dine  out, 


5  humi  (which  may  follow  a  verb  of  either 
(  rest  or  motion). 
militiae.0 

,  >  fbras  (after  a  verb  of  motion )  foris  (after 
>  other  verbs), 
foras  coenare. 


l  Sublevandis :  as  subvenire ,  succurrere  govern  a  dat.,  they  cannot  be  put  in 
agreement  with  their  object. 

m  Domus  is  partly  of  the  second,  partly  of  the  fourth,  and  has  both  forms  in 
some  cases.  The  following  line  gives  the  forms  not  in  use  : 

Tolle  me,  mu,  mi,  mis,  si  declinare  domus  vis : 
but  it  has  domi  for  at  home ,  &c. ;  though  not  for  ‘  of  the  house.' 

n  Also  ‘  to  Pomponius' s  house,'  Pomponii  domum,  without  a  preposition:  ‘  to 
my  house,'  domum  meam. 

°  Belli  and  militice  are  used  only  in  connection  with  dOmi:  btllo  however  \* 
used  for  in  war.  (Z.) 


123 


$  44.  340.]  GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  DUS. 


Into  the  country, 

From  the  country, 

In  the  country, 

To  return, 

To  return,  turn  back, 

To  be  reconciled  to, 

*  To  confer  an  obligation  on  (i.  e. 

on  a  superior), 

Youth, 

To  cast  forth, 

To  resolve, 

*  Approved  (of  valor),  tried, 


rus. 
rure. 

ruri  ( less  commonly ,  rure). 
redire,  eo,  Iv,  it. 
revertere, vert,  vers ;  or  reverti. p 
in  gratiam  redire  cum  aliquo, 
gratiam  inire  ab  aliquo  ( Cic .),  apud  ali 
quem  ( Liv .)  ineo. 

juventus  utis,  /. ;  juventa,  ae,  f.  Juven¬ 
tus,  also  ‘  the  youth. 
projicere,  jec,  ject. 
constituere,  stltu,  stitut. 

*  spectatus  {lit.  seen). 


Exercise  52. 


340.  Titus  Manlius  spent  his  youth  in  the  country.  When 
Tullius  returns  ( shall  have  returned )  from  the  country,  I  will 
send  him  to  you.  Quintus  resolved  to  spend  his  life  in  the 
country.  On  the  day  after  he  returned  from  the  country,  he  was 
accused  of  treason.  He  is  the  same  in  the  field  that  (45  ( b )  )  he 
has  always  been  at  home.  He  answered  that  Pomponia  was  sup¬ 
ping  out.  Might  he  not  have  spent  his  life  in  the  country  ? 
They  {illi)  kept  their  word  both  at  home  and  in  the  field.  He 
set  out  into  the  country.  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  set  out  for 
the  country  in  the  evening.  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  will  cast 
these  things  out  of  doors.  Diodorus  lived  many'  years  at  my 
house.  Balbus  came  to  my  house.  Had  you  not  rather  be  in 
your  own  house  without7  danger',  than  in  another-man’s  with' 
danger7  ?  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  was  a  person  of  most-ap¬ 
proved7  merit  ( virtus )  both  at  home  and  in  the  field  (p.  14,  14). 
It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  has  resolved  to  turn  back  home.  There 
is  no  doubt  that  you  will  confer  an  obligation  upon  Csesar.  Bal- 


p  Redire  properly  expresses  the  continued  action  which  intervenes  between  the 
momentaneous  actions  of  the  turning  back  (reverti),  and  the  return  or  arrival 
home  (revenire).  (D.)  Redire  is  said  of  one  who  returns  after  having  arrived 
at  his  journey’s  end  and  finished  his  business ;  reverti  of  one  who  turns  back 
before  he  has  completed  his  journey  or  business.  ( Ernesti .) 

♦  %  ^  Juventa ,  youth  =  the  time  of  youth  ;  juventus  (utis),  youth  =  the  time  of 
youth;  or,  ‘the  youth ’  =  the  young  men:  Juventas ,  the  goddess  of  youth. 
Cicero  does  not  use  juventa ;  but  Livy  and  later  writers  use  juventa  for  the  time 
of  youth,  juventus  for  the  youth.  (D.) 


1^4  THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES.  [§  45.  341-345. 

bus  is  already  reconciled  to  Caius  (per/-)-  We  must  succour 
the  miserable.  There  is  no  doubt  that  a  Christian  should  succour 
the  miserable.* *  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  threw  these  things 
(forth)  on  the  ground  against  his  will.  The  Roman  youth  were 
of  approved  valour  in  war. 


XVII. 

§  45.  On  the  construction  of  Participles.  ( Ablative  absolute.) 

*  341.  Every  attributive  word  involves  an  assertion. 

Thus  f  a  Jine  house’  =  a  house  which  is  a  pint  one.  ‘  Charles's  hat 
=  the  hat  which  belongs  to  Charles ,  &c. 

*  342.  Thus  then  every  participle  makes  an  assertion  in  an  indirect  man¬ 

ner  ;  it  assumes  it  attributively,  instead  of  stating  it  predicatively ;  that 
is,  as  a formal  proposition. 

*  343.  Whenever  therefore  it  is  convenient  to  express  by  a  complete  sentence 

the  assertion  assumed  by  a  participle,  we  may  do  so,  connecting  it  with 
the  principal  sentence  by  a  relative  pronoun,  or  a  conjunction  (or  con¬ 
junctional  adverb)  of  time ,  cause ,  limitation ,  &c. 

*  344.  On  the  other  hand,  subordinate  sentences  connected  with  a  principal 

one  by  relative  pronouns  or  conjunctions  (such  as  when,  after ,  if,  since, 
because ,  although,  &c.),  may  often  be  expressed  by  participles. 

345.  Since  the  use  of  the  participle  is  far  more  extensive  in  Latin  than  in 
English,  such  sentences  must  very  frequently  be  translated  into  Latin 
by  participles.  By  this  construction  the  Latin  gains  more  compact¬ 
ness  and  power  of  compression  than  the  English  possesses,  but  with 
an  occasional  vagueness  from  which  our  language  is  free.r. 


*  *  See  page  121,  note  h. 

•  r  Since  in  the  attributive  combination  no  particle  of  connection  is  expressed, 
its  relation  to  the  principal  parts  of  the  sentence  must  be  gathered  from  the 
general  meaning  of  the  author.  An  instructive  example  of  the  possibility  of 
misconnecting  occurs  in  a  late  review  of  Tate' s  Horace  (Quart.  Rev.  No.  cxxiv.) 
Speaking  of  the  passage, 

Causa  fuit  pater  his,  qui  macro  pauper  agello 
Noluit  in  Flavi  ludum  me  mittere,  &c.  (Sat.  I.  6,  71.) 
the  reviewer,  understanding  the  meaning  to  be,  because  the  father' s  means  were 
slender,  he  would  not  send  his  son  to  a  provincial  school,  but  carried  him  to  Home — 
proceeds  to  consider,  how  education  could  be  cheaper  in  the  capital  than  in  the 
country.  If  the  critic  had  but  construed  the  passage  correctly,  he  would  have 
found  ro  grounds  in  it  for  speculating  about  foundation  schools,  &c.  at  Rome, 
but  have  remained  satisfied  with  the  obvious  meaning,  that,  1  though  the  father’s 


125 


$  45.  346-348,]  the  construction  of  participles. 


• *  *  346.  When  a  participle  does  not  refer  to  a  noun  or  pronoun 
already  governed  or  governing  in  the  sentence,  it  is  put  in  the 
ablative  in  agreement  with  its  own  noun. 


»  l  (a)  An  ablative  thus  unconnected  with  the  general  structure  of  the 
clause  in  which  it  stands,  is  called  an  ablative  absolute. 

*  (/?)  In  turning  a  subordinate  sentence  into  the  participial  construc¬ 
tion,  if  the  nominative  of  the  subordinate  sentence  be  not  a  noun  occur¬ 
ring  in  the  principal  sentence,  or  a  pronoun  representing  such  a  noun , 


347. 

(1) 

(2) 

(abl.  abs.) 

(1) 

(2) 

(abl.  abs.) 

(1) 

(2) 

(abl.  abs.) 

(1) 

(2) 

(abl.  abs.) 


I. 


the  construction  must  be  the  ablative  absolute. 

Examples. 

(  Nobody  who  considers  this,  will  hesitate. 

(  Nobody  considering  this,  will  hesitate. 

(  Nobody,  if  Caius  considers  this,  will  escape 
c  Nobody,  Caius  considering  this,  will  escape 
$  Alexander,  after  he  had  taken  Tyre,  marched  on,  &c. 

(  Alexander,  having  taken  Tyre,  marched  on,  &c. 

{  The  King,  when  Alexander  had  taken  Tyre,  retired,  &c. 

(  The  King,  Tyre  being  taken  by  Alexander,  retired,  &c. 

{  I  desire  joys  which  will  last  for  ever. 

(  I  desire  joys  about-to-last  for  ever. 

(  I  desire  heaven,  because  its  joys  will  last  for  ever. 

(  I  desire  heaven,  its  joys  being  about-to-last  for  ever.  J 
(  We  miss  many  things,  though  they  stare  us  in  the  face. 
(We  miss  many  things  staring  us  in  the  face. 

(  We  miss  many  things, though  some  truths  stare  us  in  the  face. 
(  We  miss  many  things,  some  truths  staring  us  in  the  face. 


II. 


III. 


IV. 


348.  Vocabulary  49.  (Preposition  a ,  ah,  abs.) 

*  A  before  consonants:  ab  before  vowels  and  sometimes  before  the 
consonants  in  hilaris  and  j ;  abs  is  much  less  commonly  used,  except 
before  te,s  and  never  except  before  t  and  qu. 

*  The  meanings  of  a  are  (1)  from;  (2)  by,  governing  the  agent  after 
pass,  verbs;  (3)  after ;  (4)  on  or  at,  of  relative  position  ;  (5)  on  the  side 
ox  part  of;  (6)  in  point  of;  (7)  the  office  held. 

From  a  boy,  a  puero. 

Immediately  after  the  battle,  confestim  a  proeliod 
'  In  front,  *  a  fronte  (frons,  tis,y.  et  m.  ‘forehead’). 


means  were  slender f  he  nevertheless  would  not  send  his  son  to  a  school  that  wa» 
thought  good  enough  for  the  children  of  great  centurions,  but  resolved  to  give 
him  the  best  education  the  capital  could  afford. 

•  Butler  says  that  it  is  found  before  all  the  consonants  except  b. 

%  *  *  Pugna  is  any  battle,  from  a  single  combat  to  the  general  engagement  of  large 
armies  :  proelium  is  an  engagement  of  troops.  Ddderlein  seems  to  confine  the 
meaning  of  praelium  too  much,  when  he  makes  it  only  the  ( occasional  engage¬ 
ment  of  particular  divisions  of  an  army for  Nepos  says,  ‘  illustrissimum  est 
vradium  apud  Plataeas.’  Acies  when  used  of  a  battle  is  a  general  engagement. 


126 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES.  [§  4 6.  349,  350 

In  flank, 

In  the  rear, 

At  two  miles  distance ;  two  miles 
off, 

«  So  near  home.  * 

To  make  for  us, 

To  be  on  our  side  ;  to  stand  on 
our  side, 

v  To  be  of  a  man’s  party,  \ 

An  amanuensis, 

*  Again  from  the  beginning ;  all 
over  again, 

Exercise  53. 

*  [Obs.  A  (p)  prefixed  to  a  clause,  indicates  that  it  is  to  be  translated 
participially.] 

349.  Let  us  oppose  the  evils  p  that  are  coming'.  Must  we 
spare  even  p  those  who  resist  (us)  ?  [No.]  We  must  spare  them 
even  p  though  they  should  resist  (us).  I  must  not  despair  p  if 
(but  a)  few7  stand  on  my  side.  Timotheus  increased  by  (his) 
many  virtues  the  glory  p  which  he  had  received  from  his  father'. 
Caius,  p  after  he  was  banished,  lived  many  years  at  Athens.  The 
father,  p  after  his  son  was  banished,  lived  many  years  at  Carthage. 
We  do  not  believe w  a  liar,  even  *  when  he  speaks  the  truth.  The 
father  turned  back,  p  because  he  feared  for  his  son  (231).  Caius, 
p  who  was  accused  of  treason,  has  been  acquitted  of  the  capital 
charge.41  Why  did  you  turn  back  so  near  home  ?  The  Gauls 
attack  the  Romans  in  the  rear.  Ariovistus  posted  himself  at 
about  two  miles  off.  He  took  Massilia  p  after  it  had  been  block¬ 
aded  two  years.  A  treaty  was  ratified  p  after  the  city  had  been 
besieged  for  two  years.  Do  not  these  (arguments)  make  for  us  ? 
Scipio  immediately  after  the  battle  returned  to  the  sea.  Almost 
from  a  boy  he  has  devoted  himself  to  literature. 


a  latere  u  (latus,  eris,  n.  *  side  ’)• 
a  tergo. 

a  millibus  passuum  duobus 

tam  prope  a  dbmo. 
a  nobis  facere. 

a  nobis  stare. 

ab  aliquo  sentire ;  sens,  sens, 
a  manu  servus.* * v 

ab  integro  (integer,  gra,  grum,  whole). 


§  46.  The  Participle  continued . 

•  350.  (a)  The  participle  of  the  future  in  rus  often  expresses 

the  purpose  with  which  a  person  acts. 

u  On  the  Jlanks  (a  lateribus). 

r  So,  ab  epistolis ,  a  secretary :  arationibus ,  a  steward  or  accountant. 

v  We  believe  a  liar,  not  even,  &c.  (ne  —  quidem). 


127 


§46.  351-356.]  the  construction  of  participles. 


%  351.  ( b )  The  participle  in  dus  often  expresses  the  end  or  pur. 
pose  for  which  a  thing  is  done. 

'  (a)  This  is  especially  the  case  after  curare  (to  cause  a  thing  to  oe 
done)  and  verbs  of  giving,  receiving,  sending,  undertaking.  In  English 
the  infin.  active  is  often  used  where  the  injin.  passive  would  be  allowable , 
but  less  common. 

(0)  He  gave  them  the  country  to  dwell  in. 

(Or)  He  gave  them  the  country  to  be  dicelt  in  (by  them). 

*  352.  Of  two  connected  sentences,  one  may  often  be  got  rid  of 
by  turning  its  verb  into  a  participle. 

'  Of  course  the  more  emphatic  should  be  retained ;  for  instance  that 
which  is  the  effect  rather  than  that  which  is  the  cause ;  that  which  is 
the  consequence  rather  than  that  which  is  the  condition;  that  which  is 
posterior  in  point  of  lim  e  rather  than  that  which  precedes  it. 

353. f  It  is  a  peculiarity  of  the  English  language,  that  we  use  a  present  par¬ 
ticiple  when,  though  two  events  are  closely  connected ,  yet  that  repre¬ 
sented  by  the  participle  must  be  over  before  the  other  begins. 


*  [C.  xxx.]  00^  A  present  participle  must  be  translated  by  a 
perfect  participle  (or  its  substitute,  qiium  with  perf.  or  pluperf 
subj.)  when  the  action  expressed  by  it  must  be  over,  before  that 
expressed  by  the  verb  begins. 


Examples. 

354.  (a)  I  write  to  aid  the  student.  )  j 

(part.)  I  write  going-to-aid  the  student  (adjuturus).  ) 

(b)  He  gave  them  the  country  to  dwell  in. 

(part.)  He  gave  them  the  country  to-be-dwelt-in  ( habitandum )• 

355.  He  apprehended  them  and  took  them  to  Rome.  >  jjj 

(part.)  He  took  them  apprehended  to  Rome.  > 

He  took  up  the  bundle  and  ran  off.  )  j y 

(abl.  abs.)  The  bundle  being  takenup,  he  ran  off.  ) 

_  (Eng.)  Leaping  from  his  horse,  he  embraced  him. 

(Lat.)  Having  leapt  from  his  horse,  he  embraced  him. 


II. 


356.  Vocabulary  50. 


To  cause  to  be  done ;  to  have  a 
thing  done, 

To  contract  to  build, 

To  let  a  thing  out  to  be  built  by 
contract, 

A  sentence, 

To  corrupt, 

To  learn  by  heart, 

To  repair, 

To  pull  down, 

Bridge, 


aliquid  faciendum  curare. 

aliquid  faciendum  conducSre 
aliquid  faciendum  locare.  *» 

sententia,  se,  f. 
corrumpere,  rup,  rupt. 
ediscere,  edidici  (no  oup.). 
reficgre,  io,  fee,  feet, 
diruere,  ru,  rift, 
pons,  pontis,  m. 


128 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES.  [§47.  357-300 
Exercise  54. 

357.  Conon  causes  the  walls  p  which  had  been  pulled  down  b> 
Lysander,*  Pto  be  repaired.  He  undertook  p  to  corrupt  Epami. 
nondas  with  money.  For  how  much  will  you  undertake  p  to  cor¬ 
rupt  Balbus  ?  He  had  contracted  p  to  build  a  bridge.  He  gave 
Cyrus  to  Harpagus  p  to  be  killed.  Carvilius,  when27  consul,  had 
let  out  the  temple  (cedes?)  of  Fortune  (Fortuna)  p  to  he  built  by 
contract.  We  give  boys  sentences  Pto  learn  by  heart  (354,  b). 
He  has  set  out  for  Rome  r  to  free  his  son  from  debt.  I  cannot  but 
think18  you  corrupted  by  gold.  Forgetting3"  the  benefits  which 
he  received  from  Caius,  he  took  cruel  measures  against  him.  (Be¬ 
gin  with  relat.  clause  ;  30,  31.)  He  says  that  it  is  not2  necessary 
to  make  haste.  There  are  some  who109  have  turned-back  home. 


§  47.  The  Participle  continued.  The  Supines. 

358.  (a)  No  Latin  verb  (except  the  deponents  and  neuter- 
passives)  has  a  participle  of  the  perfect  active.  Hence  this 
participle  must  be  translated  by  the  (passive)  past  participle 
put  absolutely,  or  by  quum  with  the  perfect  or  pluperfect  sub¬ 
junctive. 

'  359.  (b)  An  English  substantive  may  often  be  translated  by  a 

participle. 

It  is  very  frequently  necessary  to  translate  abstract  nouns  expressing 
a  mode  of  action  in  this  way ;  as  such  nouns  are  comparatively  seldom 
used  in  Latin. 

f  360.  (c)  So  also  the  ‘ participial  substantive ’  may  often  be  translated  not  only 


*  G.  L/ysandri. 

y  JEdes  and  templum  are  both  a  temple  :  but  in  the  former  it  is  considered  as 
the  one  principal  building  which  is  the  dwelling-place  of  the  God  ;  in  the  latter 
as  the  whole  temple ,  with  all  its  buildings,  courts,  &c.  JEdes  in  the  sing,  has 
generally  the  adj.  sacra  with  it,  or  the  name  of  the  Deity:  Jovis,  Minervae ,  &c. 
Fanum  is  a  spot  consecrated  for  the  erection  of  a  temple  by  the  augurs;  and 
hence  the  temple  itself,  considered  as  a  consecrated  place,  ‘a  sanctuary. ’  Delu¬ 
brum  was  either  the  temple  itself,  as  a  place  of  expiation  and  purification ;  or, 
according  to  others,  the  part  of  the  temple  where  the  image  of  the  Deity  stood ; 
the  shrine.  Templum  is  from  reyvw,  rcy tru  {cut),  a  portion  ‘  cut  ojf"1  by  the 
augurs;  delubrum  probably  from  de-luo ,  to  wash  away :  Doderlein  thinks  that 
fanum  is  the  German  Bann ,  Engl.  ban. 


THE  PARTICIPLE. 


12‘J 


[§47.  361-364. 


Dy  the  participle  in  dus,  but  by  other  participles.  This  is  a  common 
way  of  translating  it  when  it  is  under  the  government  of  1  without.'' 
361.* *  After  ‘ tohcar  '  and  1  to  see ’  the  present  injin.  active  must  be  translated 
into  Latin  by  the  present  participle  active. 

'  362.  When  the  participle  of  an  abl.  absol.  is  ‘  being,’  it  is 
omitted  in  Latin,  and  two  substantives ,  or  a  substantive  and  ad¬ 
jective,  are  put  together  in  the  ablative. 

*  362.*  The  supine  in  urn  (act.)  follows  verbs  of  motion :  the  supine  in  u  (vir¬ 
tually,  though  not  really  pass.)  follows  a  few  adjectives  (such  as  best, 
difficult ,  &c.),  and  the  substantives_/as,  nefas ,  &c. 
a )  The  supine  in  um  with  ire  means  ‘  to  go  about  to'  &c.,  implying  effort 
and  exertion. 

363.  (a)  (Eng.)  Caesar,  having  crossed  the  Rubicon ,  marched  to  Rome. 

(Lat )  $  Caesar,  the  Rubicon  being  crossed,  marched  to  Rome. 

I  or,  Caesar,  when  he  had  crossed  the  Rubicon,  marched  to  Rome. 
(6)  1.  Tarquinius,  after  his  banishment  from  Rome,  &c. 

Tarquinius,  being  banished  from  Rome. 

2.  After  the  banishment  of  Tarquinius,  consuls  were  elected. 

(ail.  abs.)  Tarquinius  being  banished,  >  con8u]s  were  e|ected 
(or)  After  Tarquinius  banished,  ) 

(Tarquinio  expulso  ;  or,  post  Tarquinium  expulsum.) 

(Eng.)  From  the  foundation  of  Rome,  >  a  RomS  condM 
(Lat. )  From  Rome  founded,  ) 

(So,  ante  Romam  conditam,  &c.) 

(Eng.)  By  the  practice  of  virtue,  >  virtute  cuM. 

(Lat.)  By  virtue  practised,  ) 

(Virtute  colenda,  by  practising  virtue.) 

(Eng.)  A  reward  for  having  despised  the  deity ;  or,  for  contempt  of  the 
deity. 

(Lat.  A  reward  of  (  —  for)  the  deity  despised  (spreti  numinis  merces). 

(c)  (Eng.)  He  assists  others  without  robbing  himself. 

(Lat.)  He  assists  others,  not  robbing  himself  (se  ipsum  non  spolians). 
(Eng.)  He  goes  away  without  your  perceiving  it. 

(Lat.)  He  goes  away,  you  not  perceiving  it  (te  non  sentiente). 

(Eng.)  He  goes  away  without  saluting  any  body. 

(Lat.)  He  goes  away,  nobody  being  saluted  (nemine  f  salutato). 

(Eng.)  He  condemns  him  without  hearing  him. 

(Lat.)  He  condemns  him  unheard  (inauditum). 

364.  Vocabulary  51. 

At  the  suggestion  of  the  Magi,  Magis  auctoribus  ( auctor ,  an  adviser) 

Under  your  guidance,  S te  duce  <7°°  beln6  °"r  leader ;  dux'  du 

c  cis,  m.  et f.) 

In  the  reign  of  Herod,  Herode  rege.1 


>1. 


t  On  neminis,  nemine,  see  the  index  under  ‘  Nobody.' 

*  *  Or,  Herode  regnante.  If  the  reign  were  that  of  a  Roman  Emperor,  imptr 
vrde  must  be  used 


G* 


130 


THE  PARTICIPLE. 


[§47.  365,360 


Against  the  will  of  Cams,  Caio  invito. 

In  the  life-time  of  Augustus,  Augusto  vivo. 

I  have  completed  the  work,  opus  absolutum  habeo. a 

I  plainly  see  through  his  design,  consilium  ejus  perspectum  habeo 

It  cannot  be  said  without  impiety,  nefas  est  dictu. 

It  may  be  said  without  impiety,  fas  est  dictu. 

Hard  to  find,  difficilis  inventu. 

*  365.  [C.  xxxi.]  0 The  English  present  part.  act.  is  gene, 
rally  translated  by  the  Latin  past  partic.  when  the  verb  is 
deponent. 

*  This  arises  from  the  principle  given  in  353,  and  from  this :  that  th* 
Romans  spoke  of  a  feeling  as  over ,  the  moment  it  had  been  felt ;  and  of 
a  mental  operation  as  over ,  the  moment  it  was  performed ;  whereas  w*- 
should  describe  both  as  present;  as  now  going  on. 

Exercise  55. 

[Which  word  for  to  light  should  be  used  of  a  funeral  pile?  299,  h.] 

366.  p  If  nature  opposes,  you  will  strive  to  no  purpose.  Pytha 
goras  came  into  Italy  p  in  the  reign  of  Tarquinius  Superbus, 
p  After  Dion  (G.  Dionis)  was  killed  at  Syracuse,  Dionysius 
gained  possession  of  the  city.  iEneas,  p  after  the  taking  of  Troy 
Dy  the  Greeks,  came  into  Italy.  The  slave,  having  lighted  the 
funeral  pile,  cast  himself  at  his  master’s  feet.51  They  returned 
to  Veii  p  without  waiting  for  the  army  of  the  Romans.  They 
could  scarcely  be  restrained  from17  condemning  you  to  death 
without  hearing  you.  At  the  suggestion  of  Caius,  Balbus  pre¬ 
tended  to  be  mad.3  I  am  afraid  that  1  do  not53  see  through  Balbus’s 
design.  The  son  died  p  after  the  banishment  of  his  father.  He 
pretends  that  he  has  finished  the  work.  I  have  now  finished  the' 
work  which  I  promised  to  perform3  (Invert),  r  After  the  taking 
of  Massilia  by  storm,  a  league  was  made  ( Express  post).  Was 
(then)  man  born  p  to  drink  wine  ?  You  have  recovered  from  a 
severe  disease  p  by  drinking  water.  I  heard  Caius  cry  out,  that  it 
was  all  over  ivith  the  army.  Is  virtue  hard  to  find  ?  [No.]  You 
will  do  what  shall  seem  best  to  be  done.  Why  do  you  go  about  to 
destroy  yourself?  They  sent  to  Delphi,  to  consult  (sup.)  what 
should  be  done. 


a  From  this  idiom,  which  dwelis  more  on  the  possession  of  the  completed  ac* 
tion  than  on  its  mere  completion ,  arose  the  perfect  with  have  in  our  own  and  othe» 
modern  languages. 


§  48.  367-373.] 


PRONOUNS. 


131 


XVIII. 

§48.  Pronouns . 

*  367.  (a)  ‘  Own,’  when  it  is  to  be  more  strongly  expressed  than 
by  meus,  tuus,  suus,  &c.,  must  be  translated  by  ipsius  or  ipsorum 
(as  one  or  more  are  meant)  after  those  pronouns. 

%  368.  (b)  Self,  — selves,  &c.,  in  an  oblique  case  are  often  trans¬ 
lated  by  ipse  and  a  personal  pronoun  together ;  the  ipse  being  in 
the  nom.  if  the  meaning  is  that  that  agent  did  it ;  in  the  case  of 

the  personal  pronoun,  if  his  doing  it  to  himself  is  the  stronger 
notion. 

369. *  *  Properly  sui  relates  to  the  nominative  case  of  its  own  verb ;  but  it 
may  be  used,  in  a  dependent  clause,  for  the  nominative  of  the  principal 
verb,  when  either  the  grammar  or  the  sense  would  prevent  its  being  re¬ 
ferred  to  the  verb  of  its  own  clause. 

*  370.  (c)  Hence  in  a  dependent  sentence,  that  expresses  some 
thought  or  purpose  of  the  subject  of  the  principal  sentence — 

*  His,  him,  her,  their,  denoting  the  nominative  of  the  principal 
sentence,  should  be  translated  by  sui  or  suus,  whenever  (from  the 
grammar  or  the  obvious  sense )  there  would  be  no  danger  of  under¬ 
standing  it  to  mean  the  nominative  of  its  own  verb. 

>  His,  him,  her,  their,  denoting  the  nominative  of  the  principal 
sentence,  must  be  translated  by  ipse,  when  there  would  be  danger 
of  understanding  sui  or  suus  to  mean  the  nominative  of  its  own 
verb. 

,  371.  (d)  Suus  often  refers  to  an  oblique  case,  especially  when 
quisque  or  unusquisque  is  used. 

*  372.  *  Obs.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  to  be  used  (not  nostri ,  vestri)  when 

‘  of  us ,’  ‘  of  you  ’  =  ‘  out  of  us'  ‘  out  of  you that  is  to  say,  after  parti¬ 
tives  (including  numerals ,  comparatives ,  and  superlatives)  .b 

373.  ( a )  Mea  ipsius  culpa,  My  own  fault. 

Nostra  ipsorum  culpa,  Our  own  fault. 

(b)  Mec  ipse  consolor,  I  console  myself. 

Se  ipsos  omnes  natura  dilligunt,  All  men  naturally 
love  themselves. 

'  b  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  also  used  when  they  have  omnium  in  agreement, 
omnium  nostrum ,  &c. 

*  e  The  cases  of  the  personal  pronouns  (except  tu  and  the  genitives  plural)  are 


132 


PRONOlTNS. 


[§48.  374 

(c)  Cicero  effecerat,  ut  Q.  Curius  consilia  Catilinte  sib\ 

proderet,  Cicero  had  induced  Q.  Curius  to  betray 
to  him  (Cicero)  the  designs  of  Catiline. 

(It  being  obviously  absurd  to  suppose  that  Curius  was  to  betray  them 
to  Curius.) 

Persee,  mortuo  Alexandro,  non  alium,  qui  imperaret 
ipsis,  digniorem  fuisse  confitebantur,  The  Persians , 
after  the  death  of  Alexander,  confessed  that  nobody 
had  ever  better  deserved  to  rule  over  them. 

( Qui  imperat  sibi,  might  have  meant  1  a  fitter  person  to  govern  himself.’) 

( d )  Hannibalem  sui  cives  e  civitate  ejecerunt,  Hannibal 

ivas  banished  by  his  fellow -citizens. 

374.  Vocabulary  52. 

To  befall,  happen,  accidere, d  cid,  ( dat ). 

To  happen,  turn  out,  evenire,  ven,  vent. 

To  happen  (of  fortunate  events),  contingere,  tig,  tact,  (dat.). 

It  was  this  man’s  good  fortune,  huic  contigit  ut,  &c. 

To  restore  liberty  to  his  country,  patriam  in  libertatem  vindicare. 

To  defend  (a  thing  or  person  if )  defen(Brei  fend>  fens. 

actually  attacked),  ' 

To  defend  (a  thing  or  person ,  if 
and  whenever  it  is  attacked  ;)  >  tueri, e  tuitus  et  tutus, 
to  take  under  one’s  protection,  ) 

His  own  friends,  or  adherents,  sui  ( plur .). 

For  its  own  sake,  propter  sese. 


sometimes  strengthened  by  ‘  met  ’  to  signify  self  with  or  without  ipse :  mihimei 
ipsi ,  sibimet  ipsis,  nobismet  ipsis,  de  memet  ipso,  &c.  Se  is  also  doubled  into  sese : 
for  tumet ,  tute  is  said.  Matthise  says,  that  Cic.  never  puts  ipse  in  the  nom.  aftei 
this  appended  met. 

t  d  Accidere  and  evenire  are  said  of  any  occurrences  whatever ;  contingere,  ob¬ 
venire,  and  obtingere,  only  of  fortunate  ones.  But  accidentia  are  occurrences 
that  take  us  by  surprise  ;  evenientia  those  that  are  expected.  Accidentia  are  repre¬ 
sented  as  the  effects  of  chance;  evenientia  as  the  results  of  preceding  actions  oi 
events;  contingentia  as  favours  conferred  upon  us  by  good  fortune;  obtingentia 
and  obvenientia  as  advantages</a//mgp  to  our  lot.  (D.)  From  the  use  of  contingere 
to  describe  the  happening  of  fortunate  occurrences,  accidere  would  come  to  be 
generally  used  of  unfortunate  ones. 

*  ‘Neither  is  in  itself  stronger  than  the  other;  foras  the  defendens  shows 
more  spirit  and  strength  in  resisting  an  actual  danger,  so  the  tuens  shows  more 
ca re  and  affection  in  endeavouring  to  prevent  an  anticipated  one.  (D.) 


$  49.  375-377.] 


PRONOUNS. 


133 


Exercise  56. 

[How  is  through  to  be  translated,  when  it  expresses  the  cause  ?  (261  )] 
375.  The  mind  is  a  part  of  me.  The  better  part  of  you  is 
immortal.  Let  none  of  us  doubt  that  it  is  expedient  to  obey  the 
laws  of  virtue.  Which  of  you  is  believed  ?  Many  evils  have 
befallen  me  through  ( all .)  my  own  fault.  Do  not  many  evils 
happen  to  us  by  our  own  fault  ?  All  men  favour  themselves. 
These  evils  may  have  happened  to  us  (129  (a)  )  through  our  own 
fault.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  the  mind  is  a  part  of  ourselves 
( of  us).  I  will  pray  Caius  to  take  my  cause  under  his  protection. 
Ought  he  not  to  have  commanded  himself  ?  It  is  not  every  man  who 
can  command  himself.  He  is  an  enemy  to  himself.  We  should 
practise  justice  for  its  own  sake.  They  prayed  Artabazus  to  take 
theirf  cause  under  his  protection.  He  was  called  king  by  his 
own  adherents.  It  was  this  man’s  good  fortune  to  restore  liberty 
to  his  country.  I  fear  that  he  will  not  be  able  to  restore  liberty 
to  his  country.  They  ask  to  be  allowed  to  take  all  their  property 
with  them.  There  are  some109  who  favour  themselves. 


§  49.  Pronouns  continued.  (Is,  hic,  iste,  ille.) 

»  376.  ( a )  He ,  she,  it ;  they,  are  translated  by  is,  ea,  id,  when 
they  merely  stand  for  a  person  or  thing  either  before  mentioned  or 
about  to  be  described  by  a  relative  clause. 

*  ‘  Is'  is  wholly  without  emphasis,  or  the  power  of  distinguishing  one 
object  from  another.  One  of  its  main  duties  is  to  act  as  a  mere  ante¬ 
cedent  to  the  relative.? 

*  377.  When  used  to  distinguish  objects,  hie  denotes  the  nearest, 
ille  the  most  remote,  iste  that  which  is  the  nearest  to  the  party 
addressed. 

*  (c)  Iste  may  be  considered  as  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  person  = 

‘  that  of  yours,'  ‘  that  which  is  knoun  to  (or  concerns)  you' 


f  Ipsorum :  for  suam  might  mean,  they  prayed  him  to  support  his  own 
cause. 

?  ‘is  qui  pugnat’  means  1  the  combatant '  or  ‘a  combatant '  (accordingly  as 
ne  has  been  mentioned,  or  not  mentioned  before) :  while  ‘  hic  qui  pugnat,’ 
ille  qui  pugnat,’  signify  respectively  ‘tfiis  combatant,’  1  yonder  combatant.’ 


184 


PRONOUNS. 


[§  49.  378-384. 

378.  From  this  power  of  denoting  comparative  nearness  and  remoteness 
(whether  in  space  or  time),  hie  and  ille  are  used  to  discriminate 
between  the  different  words  that  form  the  subject  of  discourse.  Thus 
then, 

s  Of  two  things  already  mentioned,  hie  relates  to  the  nearer ,  the 
latter  ;  ille  to  the  more  remote ,  the  former. ll 

*  Hie,  referring  to  what  immediately  precedes,  must  occupy  a  very 
early,  if  not  the  first  place  in  its  sentence. 

379.  "  While  hie  refers  to  what  has  just  come  from  the  pen  (or  mouth), 
ille  may  be  opposed  to  it  in  another  direction,  and  introduce  some  new 
matter. 

380. *  *  So  also  hie  may  refer  to  what  follows,  but  it  must  then  descend  from 
its  prominent  place  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  to  occupy  one 
equally  emphatic  either  at,  or  very  near,  the  end. 

381.  ♦  1  Ille,'  from  relating  to  the  past,  may  denote  that  which  has  long  been 
known,  whether  favourably  or  unfavourably. 

(b)  Here  ille  i  =  the  well  known;  the  famous. 

382.  *.  In  letters,  iste  relates  to  the  place  where  the  person  addressed  is 
residing,  and  to  the  things  that  concern  him  :  in  trials,  iste  denotes  the 
opposite  party,  as  long  as  he  is  directly  addressed;  but  when  the 
speaker  turns  to  the  judges,  he  may  use  hie  to  denote  the  opposite 
party.  (G.) 

*  As  ille  may  mean  ‘whom  all  know'  so  iste  may  mean  ‘whom  you 
know,'  whether  for  good  or  notA  So  also  hie  may  mean  ‘  whom  you  or 
/  see  before  us.’ 

383.  ( d )  ‘  Ille  5  is  used  before  1  quidem where  we  use  ‘it  is 
true,’  ‘  indeed ,’  to  make  some  partial  concession,  to  be  followed  by 
a  ‘  hut,.’ 

384.  ( a )  Dionysius  servus  meus  aufugit :  is  est  in  provincial 

tua,  Dionysius,  a  slave  of  mine ,  has  run  away  :  he 
is  in  your  province. 

(b)  Medea  ilia,  The  famous  Medea.  Magnus  ille  Alex¬ 
ander,  The  celebrated  Alexander  the  Great. 


Of  the  passages  where  hie  relates  to  the  more  remote  word  of  a  sentence,  ali 
probably  may  be  explained  by  one  or  other  of  these  considerations : — (1)  The 
well-known  order  of  the  actual  occurrence  or  existence  of  the  things  may  be  re¬ 
versed  in  the  sentence.  (G.)  (2)  Hie  may  denote  what  is  before  our  eyes.  (3) 

Or  hie  may  denote  1  id  de  quo  potissimum,  agimus.'  ( Raschig  ad  Liv.  xxiv.  29.) 

•  Ille  can  never  perform  the  part  of  &  mere  antecedent  to  the  relative  (  =  is) ; 
and  the  employment  of  hie  for  this  purpose  must  be  confined  to  those  cases 
where  the  relative  clause  precedes  (see  30,  (c)  ),  so  that  here  too  it  supports  its 
ordinary  character  of  referring  to  what  has  just  been  mentioned, 
k  In  this  way  iste  is  often  used  to  express  contempt,  but  by  no  means  always 


PRONOUNS. 


135 


§49.  385,  386.] 


(c)  Ista,  civitas,  That  state  of  yours. 

( d )  Non  sine  ratione  ille  quidem ,  sed  tamen,  &c.,  Not 

without  reason  it  is  true,  but  yet,  &c. 

385.  Vocabulary  53. 


v  And  that  too,  t 

Nor  that ;  and  that  too  not, 

That  only, 

*  To  know, 

To  know  =  to  be  acquainted 
with, 

*  To  know  thoroughly  by  expe¬ 

rience  ;  to  be  conversant  with, 

k-  To  take  away, *  *  ■ 

*■  To  make  a  beginning  with, 

Of  a  common  kind, 


et  is  ;i  isque  ;  et  idem,  idemque. 
nec  is. 

■  ism  demum  {that  at  length ,  as  if  the  oth- 
1  ers  had  been  travelled  through  before 
this  was  arrived  at), 
scire, n  sclv,  scit. 

novisse,  nosse  ( per f.  of  noscere,  to  learn 
to  know,  to  make  acquaintance  with). 

I  callere,  ui  (properly,  to  be  hard ,  as  a 
hand  becomes  by  much  manual  la- 
1  bour;  acc.). 

adimere0  (of  good  things)  eximere  (of 
bad  things)  em,  empt.  They  govern 
the  dat.  of  that  from  which, 
facere  initium  a. 
vulgaris,  is,  e. 


Exercise  57. 


386.  He  has  killed  both  his  father  and  his  mother  ;  the  former 
by  poison,  the  latter  by  starvation.  What  prevents  him  from 
making  a  beginning  with  himself?  This™  only  is  true  wisdom, 
to  command  oneself.  Whatra  true  wisdom  is,  the  wise  only  know. 
Do  you  know  Caius  ?  I  will  ask  what  true  wisdom  is.  At  how 
much  is  that  state  of  yours  to  be  valued,  from  which  the  good  and 
wise  have  been  banished  ?  I  doubt  whether  this  is  true  happiness 
or  not.  I  have  had  an  interview  with  Caius.:  he  says  that  he  has 


l  Some  scholars  doubt  the  existence  of  the  forms  ii  and  iis.  Grotefend  gives 
dat.  eis  (also  iis) :  Zumpt  (in  his  eighth  edit.)  ii  {ei),  iis  {eis) ;  adding  that  the 
former  are  the  more  common,  and  generally  written  in  MSS.  with  a  single  i. 

•  ra  When  is,  hie,  or  qui,  &c.  stands  as  the  subject  of  an  apposition-verb  (150),  it 
generally  agrees  with  the  following  noun,  where  we  might  suppose  it  to  agree 
with  ‘  thing.’  [“  Ea  demum  est  xerafelicita*.”] 

*  n  Scire  relates  to  a  proposition ;  if  followed  by  an  accusative  only,  it  is  a  neut. 
pronoun,  or  nihil.  It  expresses  actually  acquired  knowledge.  *  Nosse  is  to  have 
become  acquainted  with  the  signs  and  marks  by  which  a  thing  may  be  known  : 
it  ‘describes  therefore  knowledge  as  the  result  of  external  or  internal  percept  ion! 

*  R.)  Hence  nosse  is  often  followed  by  the  accusative  of  a  noun. 

•  Demitur  quidlibet ;  adimuntur  bona  ;  eximuntur  mala.  (D.) 


136 


PRONOUNS. 


§49.  387,388. 


not  seen  the  man.  Do  not  take  away  from  me  my  liberty.  That 
(famous)  Plato  has  takt  n  away  from  me  all  fear  of  death.  Apollo 
admonishes  us  to  become  acquainted  with  ourselves.  It  is  not 
every  one  who  can39  know  himself.  Those  good  things  which 
can  be  taken  away,  are  not  really  good  things,  p  Having  set  my 
son7  at  liberty,  he  has  taken  away  all  my^  care.  I  have  been 
praised  by  a  good  man  it  is  true  (cl),  but  (one  who  is)  unskilled 
in  these  matters.  Christians  after  death  will  enjoy  a  happy  life, 
and  that  too  an  eternal  one.  He  has  always  devoted  himself  to 
literature,  and  that  too  of  no82  common  kind. 


387.  Vocabulary  54. 

Also,  (may  often  be  translated  by)  idem.r 

*  This  or  that,  as  well  as  some  other,  et  ipse.  # 

Where  you  are  ;  in  your  neigh-  \  .  .. 

*  i  IS  LlC»  ^ 


bourhood, 

*■  Even  or  very  ( with  that), 


ipse;  illud  ipsums  (‘even  that’). 


To  join  battle  with,  to  give  bat- )  ...„ 

J  t  preshum  committere 

tie  to,  ) 

1  o  your  neighbourhood  ;  to  where  >  j  or  istuc  , 

you  are,  ) 

From  your  neighbourhood ;  from  )  jgtjnc 

where  you  are,  ) 

Proud,  superbus,  a,  um. 


cum. 


Exercise  58. 

[How  must  ‘I  am  believed’  be  translated?  285. J 
388.  Those  whom  we  love,  we  also  wish  to  be  happy.  Let 
him  who  commands  others,  learn  also  to  command  himself.  Are 
(then)  liars  believed  in  your  neighbourhood  ?  Those  who  come 
from  your  neighbourhood,  say  that  you  are  proud.  It  is  not 
becoming  for57  a  Christian  to  be  proud.  I  had  already  set  out  to 


p  Say  :  ‘are  not  true  good  (things).’ 

Say :  ‘  all  care  from  me .’ 

*  T  Nihil  est  liberale,  quod  non  idem  justum  (which  is  not  also  just). 

*  s  To  justify  the  use  of  ille  (to  denote  any  thing,  provided  it  did  not  immediately 
precede)  there  must  always  be  an  intermediate  object  to  which  hie  is  applicable : 
yet,  not  if  the  remote  event  be  one  of  general  notoriety.  “  Q,uid  T.  Albutius  7 
nonne  aequissimo  animo  Athenis  exsul  philosophabatur  7  cui  tamen  illud  ipsum 
numquam  accidisset  si,  &c.”  (De  Fin.  v.  108.) 

Adverbs  of  motion  to  a  olace  end  in  o  or  uc ;  of  motionyrora,  in  inc ,  nde. 


PRONOUNS. 


§50.  389-391.] 


137 


your  neighbourhood.  Even  that  would  never  have  befallen  me, 
in  your  lifetime.  A  Christian  may  not  be  proud.  Do  not  join 
battle.  I  fear  the  Romans  will  not  be  willing  to  join  battle  with 
the  Gauls.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  justice  should  be  practised 
for  its  own  sake.  It  remains,  that  I  should  give  battle  to  the 
Gauls.  It  follows,  that  it  is  a  difficult  thing  to  know  oneself.  I 
know  that  in  your  neighbourhood  you  both  are  wise  and  seem 
(so.)  Such10)  a  war  was  undertaken,  as  Rome  had  never  before 
seen. 


§50.  Pronouns  continued.  ( On  the  translation  of  ‘any.5) 

%  389.  ‘  Any  5  when  all  are  excluded  is  quisquam  or  ullus. 

390.  ‘  Any  5  when  all  are  included  is  quivis u  or  quilibet. 

*  (a)  All  are  excluded  in  sentences  that  are  really  or  virtually^  negative  ; 

and  after  vix  (scarcely),  sine  (without). 

»  (/?)  All  are  included  when  ‘  any ’  means  ‘  any  you  please ,’  ‘  every.' 

»  (y)  ‘  Q-uisquam  ’  is  used  without,  ‘  ullus 5  generally  with  a  substantive. 
Quisquam  may  however  be  used  with  designations  of  men  (homo, 
civis),  &c. 

391.  ( b )  ‘  Any  5  after  si,  nisi,  num,  ne,  quo,  quanto,  is  the  in¬ 
definite  quis  ;w  of  which  the  feminine  singular  and  neut.  plur.  are 
quce  or  qua,  after  si,  num,  ne  (and  ec).* * 


t  "  In  quivis  (and  utervis)  a  deliberate  and  thoughtful  choice  is  supposed,  in  qui¬ 
libet  (and  uterlibet)  a  blind  and  inconsiderate  one. — Quilibet  generally  carries 
with  it  some  expression  of  contempt.  (D.  after  Lachmann.) 

*  v  Sentences  that  are  virtually  negative  (that  is,  as  good  as  negative)  are  (1) 
such  questions  as  expect  the  answer  ‘  no ,’  and  are  asked  not  for  information  but 
assent ;  thus,  ‘  can  any  man  believe  this  1  ’  =  ‘  no  man  surely  can  believe  this  ;’ 
(2)  comparative  sentences;  ‘he  was  taller  than  any  of  his  friends’  =  ‘none  of  his 
friends  was  so  tall  as  he.’ — With  respect  to  sine,  aliquis  should  follow  it  in  a 
negative  sentence  (in  which  it  is  to  be  considered  positive ),  and  ullus  in  a  positive 
sentence  (in  which  it  is  to  be  considered  negative).  (G.) 

*  w  Quisquam  sometimes  follows  si,  but  it  then  generally  implies  that  the  exist¬ 
ence  of  the  exception  is  very  doubtful.  And  even  without  si  it  is  used  to  ex¬ 
press  any  single  person  or  thing.  “  Quamdiu  quisquam  erit,  qui  te  audeat 
defendere,  vives.”  Such  expressions  as  ‘  sine  omni  cura’  for  ‘ sine  ulla  cura ‘ 
are  only  found  in  Plautus  and  Terence.  In  Cicero  ‘sine  omni  cura’  would 
mean  ‘  without  all  (imaginable)  care.’ 

v  *  Whether  quw  or  qua  should  be  preferred,  is  a  disputed  point.  The  poets 
use  qua  with  few  exceptions.  (Z.)  The  form  qui  is  also  used  in  the  sing.  nom. 
mate. :  si  qui ,  ecqui.  Even  aliqui  (  =  aliquis)  is  found  in  a  few  passages  of 

Cicero. 


138 


PRONOUNS. 


[§50.  392-396. 


(But  aliquis  follows  these  particles  when  the  any  or  some  is  emphatic.) 


*  392.  £  Any ’  is  translated  by  aliquis x  or  quispiam ,  when  it  means 

1  some  one  or  other,’  ‘some.’ 

%  393.  ( d )  The  indefinite  article  ‘ a’  may  sometimes  he  trans, 

lated  by  quidam,  aliquis,  or  quispiam ff  when  ‘  a  certain  ’  or  ‘  some  1 
might  be  substituted  for  ‘  a .’ 

*  394.  (e)  Nescio  quis  (the  quis  agreeing  with  the  subst.)  is  sometimes  used  for 

quidam,  but  it  generally  carries  with  it  some  notion  of  contempt  or  of 
indifference  at  least. 

{Eng.)  Henry,  Charles  and  John. 

{Lat.)  Henry,  Charles,  John.  Or,  Henry  and  Charles  and  John. 

395.  (a)  Solis  candor  illustrior  est  quam  ullius  ignis,  The 

brightness  of  the  sun  is  more  intense  than  that  of  any 
fire. 

An  quisquam  potest  sine  perturbatione  mentis  irasci  ? 
Can  (then)  any  man  he  angry  without  some  mental 
agitation  ? 

(b)  Num  quis  irascitur  infantibus  ?  Is  any  body  angry 

with  infants  ? 

(c)  Quodlibet  pro  patria,  parentibus,  amicis,  adire  peri¬ 

culum  ....  oportet,  We  ought  to  encounter  any 
danger  for  our  country,  our  parents,  and  our 
friends. 

Mihi  quidvis  sat  est,  Any  thing  is  enough  for  me. 

(d)  Agricola  quispiam,  Some  husbandman  (any,  or  a,  hus¬ 

bandman).  Pictor  aliquis,  Any,  or  a,  painter. 

(el)  Prope  me  hic  nescio  quis  loquitur,  Some  body  or 
other  is  talking  here  near  me. 

396.  Vocabulary  55. 


quisque,*  quaeque,  quodque ;  G.  cu- 
j  usque. 


*  Every  body, 


*  If  ‘  some  5  is  emphatic  —  some  at  least,  though  but  little,  or  of  a  bad  quality, 
aliquis  should  be  used. 

I  *y  When  quidam  expresses  ‘a’  it  implies  1  a  certain'  one,  though  it  is  unne¬ 
cessary,  perhaps  impossible,  to  name  it  :  quispiam  and  aliquis  do  not  imply  an 
allusion  to  a  particular  individual. 

»  *  Quisque  is  a  sort  of  enclitic,  and  therefore  never  stands  at  the  beginning  of 

a  sentence  in  prose,  and  seldom  even  in  poetry.  The  corresponding  emphatie 
form  is  ‘  unusquisque 1  each  particular  one' 


§50.  397.] 


PRONOUNS. 


139 


Every  body  who  ;  whoever, 

Whatever;  every — that, 

Why  7 
How? 

Somebody  —  a  person  of  conse¬ 
quence, 

At  once — and, 

Any  one  man, 

Take  care  ;  see  that, 

%  Rashly ;  inconsiderately  ;  without 
sufficient  reason, 

What? 

%  Some  how  or  other,  • 


quisquis, - quidquid  (quidquid, 

every  thing  that;  whatever). 
quicunque,a  qnsecunque,  quodcunque; 

G.  cujuscunque,  &c. 
quid  ? 
qui? 

aliquis,  aliqua,  aliquod;  G.  alicujus. 

idem — idem.b 
quivis  unus, 
vide  ne. 

temSre.  • 
quid? 

nescio  quombdo. 


Exercise  59. 

397.  Can  (then)0  any  man  govern  the  seasons  ?  Take  care 
not  to  he  angry  with  any  body  without  sufficient  reason.  Take 
care  to  do  nothing  inconsiderately.  Can  (then)  any  of  you  govern 
the  seasons?  Hardly  anyone  can  govern  himself!  Everyman 
ought  to  defend  his  own1 * * * * * 7  friends. d  Will  any  man  hesitate  to  shed 
his  blood  for  his  country  ?  This  might  have  happened  to  any 
body.  Shall  (then)  any  thing  deter  me  from  encountering21  any 
danger  (whatever)  for  my  country'  and  my  parents7  ?  Is  not  any 
thing  enough  for  Balbus  ?  He  is  braver  than  any  (390,  v)  of  the 
Gauls.  If  any  one  breaks  his  word  for  the  sake  of  his  friend,  he 
sins7.  Do  you  (then)  believe  that  any  Roman  (you  please)  is 
braver  than  any  Greek  ?  You  may  say  any  thing  (you  please) 
here.  Whatever  things  are  in  the  whole  {omnis)  world,  belong 
to  men.  Some  are  the  slaves  of  glory,  others  of  money.  How 
does  it  happen  that  you  (pl>)  do  not  know  this  ?  What  !  do  not 
all  understand  this  ?  There  are  some  who  believe  any  body. 


1  Quicunque  is  the  adjective  form  of  quisquis. 

b  Fuere  quidam  qui  iidem  ornate,  i idem  versute  dicerent.  (Z.) 

0  Though  num  expects  the  answer  no,  it  does  not  imply  that  the  answer  ‘yes’ 

sannot  possibly  be  given,  as  ‘  an  ’  does.  ‘  An  quisquam  ’  is  therefore  more  com¬ 

mon  than  ‘num  quisquam,’  and  stronger  than  ‘num  quis' 

d  Quisque  should  immediately  follow  cases  of  sui  or  suus,  and  numeral* 

'decimus  quisque ,  every  tenth  man). 


140  pronouns.  [§  51.  398—402 

%  §51.  Pronouns  continued.  (On  the  prefixes  and  affixes  of 

the  interrogates.) 

398.  (a)  The  syllable  ec  often  appears  as  a  prefix,  and  the  syl¬ 
lable  nam  as  an  affix,  to  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs. 

*  *The  ‘ec’  is  from  en!  eml  hem!  a  particle  calling  for  attention  to 
what  is  going  to  be  said.  Nam  ’  is  properly  namely ,  by  name  ;  so  that 
quisnam  is,  who  by  name ;  name  or  tell  me,  who.  ( Hartung .) 

*  The  en  stands  alone  in,  lEn  unquam  cuiquam  contumeliosius  audistis 

factam  injuriam,  &c.7  ’  ( Ter.  Phorm.  ii.  3.)  Nam  is  appended  to  quis, 

quid,  ubi,  num,  &c. 

*  399.  (b)  ‘  Always  ’  after  one  superlative  and  before  another, 
may  be  translated  by  quisque,  agreeing  with  the  same  substantive 
that  the  superlatives  agree  with. 

«  The  singular  is  generally  to  be  used,  when  a  substantive  is  not  to  be 
expressed  in  Latin. 

400.  (a)  Ecquide  sentitis  in  quanto  contemtu  vivatis  ?  Do  you 

perceive  at  all  (or,  perchance)  in  what  contempt  you 
are  living  ? 

Num  quidnam  novi  accidit?  Has  any  thing  fresh 
occurred  ? 

*  ( b )  Optimum  quidque  rarissimum  est,  The  best  things  are 
always  the  rarest. 

s  Altissima  quaque  flumina  minimo  sono  labuntur,  The 
deepest  rivers  always  fiow  with  the  least  sound. 

(c)  Doctissimus  quisque,  All  the  most  learned  men . 

(d)  Aliud  alii  natura  iter  ostendit,  Nature  points  out  one 

path  to  one  man,  another  to  another. 

Aliud  alio  fertur,  One  thing  is  borne  in  one  direction , 
another  in  another. 

401.  (Eng.)  One  Balbus.  ( Lat .)  A  certain  Balbus.  (Quidam.) 

*  (Eng.)  One  does  one  thing,  another  another. f 

(Lat.)  Another  does  another  thing. 

402.  Vocabulary  56. 

*  Little  =  but  or  too  little,  parum  (with  genit.). 


•  Ec  (  r=  en)  prefixed  to  quis,  quid,  quando,  &c.,  puts  a  question  doublingly \ 
out  intimates  that  the  answer  (no’  is  rather  expected.  It  often  gives  a  tone  of 
impatience  to  the  inquiry. 

f  In  a  sentence  of  this  kind,  one — one  must  be  translated  by  a lius— alius 
and  another  —another  be  untranslated. 


PRONOUNS. 


141 


§51.  402.] 


€ 


t 


A  little  =r  some,  but  not  much, 

A  considerable  quantity ;  some 
considerable. 

In  the  mean  time, 

Meanwhile ;  all  that  time, 
Sometimes  =  now  and  then  (ap¬ 
proaching,  as  compared  with 
nonnunquam ,  to  the  notion  of 
but  seldom). 


paulum,  or  paulfilum. 

|  aliquantum  (with  genit.). 

interim. 

interea.^ 

>interdum. *  * 


*  Sometimes  (approaching  to  the1 
notion  of  pretty  often). 


,  Ever,  < 

I 

.1 

In  a  different  direction ;  to  some  j 

other  place,  ! 

*  From  a  different  direction, 

Any  where  =  any  whither,  | 

Nowhere  or  whither, 

Strength, 

*  HjT  Rarius  interdum  quam 


nonnunquam ;  aliquando^  (the  last  be¬ 
ing  properly  some  time  or  other ,  and 
often  therefore  equivalent  to  at  last). i 
unquam  (with  negatives) ;  aliquando 
(when  it  means,  at  some  one  time,  be 
it  when  it  may) ;  quando  (after  si,  nisi, 
ne,  &c.,  when  the  ever  is  not  em¬ 
phatic)^ 

•  alio  (387,  t). 

aliunde. 

usquam, i  aliquo,  quo  (to  be  used  accord¬ 
ing  to  the  Rules  for  ‘  any .’  See  Any, 
Index  I). 
nusquam. 

vires,  virium,  &c.  (in  sing.  ‘  force  ’  j 
‘violence’;  vis,  vim,  vi). 
nonnunquam  esse  memento.  ^ 


*  •  £  Interea  refers  to  an  event  continuing  during  the  whole  interval :  interim  to 
one  that  occurs  at  some  time  or  times  within  that  interval.  Hence,  as  Doderlein 
observes,  in  negative  sentences  interea  is  the  regular  word,  as  the  possibility 
and  expectation  of  a  thing’s  happening  is  always  of  some  duration. 

.  «  h  The  syllable  ali ,  whether  as  prefix  or  termination,  always  denotes  quality. 
Thus  ‘  si  aliquis  adest,’  is,  ‘  if  there  be  any  one  present,  be  he  who  or  what  he  may :’ 
whereas  ‘  si  quisquam  adest  ’  would  mean  ‘  if  there  be  but  one  present,  no  matter 
whether  more  or  not.’  (G.)  Aliquando  is  properly  '■at  one  time,  whether  near 
or  far  off,'  but  as  a  thing’s  once  happening  may  prove  the  possibility  of  its  often 
happening,  aliquando  is  often  equivalent  to  aliquoties.  But  in  the  golden  age  it 
is  used  by  preference  of  things  that  had  better  happen  never.  (D.) 

*  i  It  gets  this  meaning  from  its  being  implied  by  the  nature  of  the  sentence 
that  no  early  time  remains.  In  this  meaning  it  is  often  joined  with  tandem 
(  e=  tam  demum.  D.). 

*  k  Hence  ‘ever’  =  at  any  time,  is  translated  by  unquam ,  anquando,  or 
quando,  according  as  ‘any’  would  be  translated  under  the  same  circumstances, 
by  xdlus,  aliquis,  or  quis.  Si  quis,  si  quando  are  pearly  equivalent  to  whoever , 

whenever. 

'  i  Usquam  is  more  regularly  the  ‘  any  where  ’  of  rest  hut  is  used  after  verbs' 
of  motion,  as  we  use  where. 


COMPAKISONS. 


§  52.  403,  404. 


142 


Exercise  00. 

*  [‘Ever  ’  after  whether,  when  marked  as  emphatic,  is  to  be  translated 
by  ecqvando. 

*  ‘  Perchance,'1  after  whether,  is  to  be  translated  by  the  addition  of  quid 
to  en  or  num :  ecquid,  numquid. 

►  When  ‘  ever  ’  and  ‘  any  '  are  marked  as  emphatic  (in  other  cases)  they 
are  not  to  be  translated  by  quando,  quis. 

*  ‘  ’  emphatic  is  to  be  translated  by  a  'pronoun.'] 

403.  What  prevents  us  from  banishing  every  tenth  man  ?  We 
have  lost  some  considerable  time  by  playing.  They  say  that  they 
shall  never 2  die.  We  shall  all  die  some  time  or  other.  The  best 
men  always  ( b )  die  with  the  most  resignation.  In  the  mean  time 
one  Octavius  called  upon  me  at  my  own  house.  None  of  you 
called  upon  me  all  that  time'.  There  is  no  one  but  (44,  (2)  )  is 
sometimes  mistaken.  Most'  of  us  are  pretty  often,  all  of  us  are 
sometimes  deceived  (p.  14,  15,  b).  Which  is  the  wiser,  Caius  or 
Balbus  ?  Does  any  man  believe  liars  ?  In  the  mean  time  a7 
(393)  greater  fear  seized  upon  the  soldiers.  I  hear  that  there  is 
a'  greater  fear  in  the  city.  If  you  ever  return  ( shall  have 
returned)  home,  you  will  understand  these  things.  Have  you 
ever'  heard  this  from  any  body  ?  [No.]  If  you  are  setting  out 
any  where,  return  in  the  evening.  Are  you  going  to  set  out  to 
some  other  place  ?  Nowhere.  Some  considerable  time  has  been 
lost  (in)  asking  my  friends.  Some  persons  devote  themselves  to 
one  thing,  others  to  another.  Virtue  is  not  of  such10'  strength  as 
to  defend  herself.15  Have  you  perchance  two  countries  ?  Let 
me  know  whether  I  shall  ever'  see  you.  There  were  some  who 
had  two  countries. 


XIX. 

§  52.  Comparison. 

*  404.  (a)  The  regular  particle  of  comparison  is  quam  (than).  The  things  com- 
pared  will  of  course  be  in  the  same  case. 

,  (a)  When  the  same  noun  belongs  to  each  member  of  the  comparison,  it 
is  omitted  in  one.  In  English  we  express  it  in  th e  first  clause,  and  use 
the  pronoun  ‘ that ’  for  it  in  the  second.  This  'that'  is  not  to  be  trans 
lated  into  Latin. 


COMPARISONS. 


143 


$52.  405-409.] 

*  405.  ( b )  Sometimes  quam  is  omitted,  and  the  following  noun 
put  m  the  ablative .m 

«  (a)  As  a  rule,  the  ablative  should  not  be  used  in  this  way,  except  where 
the  same  noun  would  follow  quam  in  the  nominative.  Sometimes  how¬ 
ever  the  ablative ,  especially  of  pronouns ,  is  used  for  the  accusative  after 
quam.  In  the  construction  of  the  acc.  with  injin.  this  would  be  regular, 
w  (/?)  Moreover,  the  construction  with  the  ablative  should  not  be  used,  un¬ 
less  the  object  with  which  another  is  compared,  actually  possesses  the 
property m  in  question. 

v-  406.  (c)  Comparatives  and  superlatives  are  often  accompanied 
by  ablatives,  expressing  by  how  much  one  thing  exceeds  or  falls 
short  of  another. 

»407.  (d)  The  English  the — the  (  —  by  how  much — by  so  much)  are  expressed  in 
Latin  by  quanto— tanto ;  quo — c.o  or  hoc. 

A  sentence  of  this  kind  may  also  be  expressed  by  ut  quisque  with  a 
superlative,  followed  by  ita  with  another. 

»408.  ‘  Somewhat  ’  and  l/oo’  with  the  positive  are  expressed  by  the  compa¬ 

rative ,  when  those  adverbs  are  not  emphatic.  And  sometimes  an  em¬ 
phatic  positive  is  expressed  by  the  comparative. 

409.  (a)  Europa  minor  est,  quam  Asia,  Europe  is  less  than 
Asia. 

(£>)  Non  ego  hac  nocte  longiorem  vidi,  I  have  not  seen  a 
longer  night  than  this. 

(c)  Multo  difficilius,  Much  more  difficult. 

( d )  Eo  minor  est  arcus,  quo  altior  est  sol,  The  higher  the 

sun  is,  the  less  is  the  arc. 

Tanto  brevius  omne  tempus,  quanto  felicius  est,  The 
happier  any  time  is,  the  shorter  it  is  (i.  e.  appears). 

Ut  quisque  est  vir  optimus,  ita  difficillime  esse  alios 
improbos  suspicatur,  The  better  a  man  is,  the  more 
difficulty  he  has  in  suspecting  that  others  are 
wicked. 

(e)  Romani  bella  quaedam  fortius  quam  felicius  gesse¬ 

runt,  The  Romans  carried  on  some  wars  with  more 

courage  than  success. 

Pestilentia  minacior  quam  perniciosior,  A  pestilence 


m  If  I  say  a  person  is  ‘  sapientior  Caio ,’  I  ascribe  wisdom  to  Caius,  though 
less  of  it  than  to  any  other  person.  If  I  say  he  is  ‘  sapientior  quam  Caius, ’  I 
do  not  necessarily  ascribe  to  Caius  any  wisdom  at  all. 


144 


COMPARISONS.  [§  52.  410. 


more  alarming  than  (really)  fatal  (or,  alarming 
rather  than  destructive). 

(y*)Prcelium  majus  quam  pro  numero  hostium  editur,  A 
severer  tattle  is  fought  than  could  have  been  ex¬ 
pected  from  the  (small)  number  of  the  enemy.  (Or, 
a  tattle  unusually  severe  for  the  number  of  the 
enemy.) 

Alexander  consedit  regia  sella  multo  excelsiore  quam 
pro  habitu  corporis,  Alexander  sat  down  on  the 
royal  chair ,  which  was  far  too  high  for  his  stature. 
( g )  Res  graviores  (important).  Morbi  graviores  (sc 
vere). 

410.  Vocabulary  57. 


Passionate, 

Angry, 

Considerably  more, 

Many  times  as  great, 

Are  hard  to  be  avoided,  or  diffi-  ..  . 

,  . ,  ’  £  difficile  vitantur, 

cult  to  avoid, 


iracundus,  a,  um. 
iratus,  a,  um. 
aliquanto  plus  (see  402). 
multis  partibus  major. 


Hidden, 
Snares, 
Frequent, 
Loquacious, 
Old  age, 
Difference, 
Worse, 


occultus,  a,  um  ( partic .  of  occtilSre). 
insidiae,  arum,  f. 

creber,  bra,  brum  ;  frequens,11  tis. 
loquax,  acis, 
senectus,  utis,  f. 
distantia,  a n,f. 

pejor,  or,  us  {less good  than,  deterior). 


(in  re- 


( Words  by  which  superlatives  are  strengthened). 
As  shortly  as  possible, 

Extremely  flourishing 
sources), 

Far ;  by  far, 

The  very  least, 

The  most  unjust  possible,  or  in 
the  world, 

(Eng.)  He  is  too  proud  to  be  a  slave 


quam0  brevissime. 

•  longe  opulentissimus. 

multo. 

vel  minimus. 

;  vel  iniquissimus. 


(Lat.)  He  is  prouder  than  that  he  should  be  a  slave. 


%,  n  Creber  denotes  close  and  crowded  succession,  and  often  implies  censure :  fre¬ 
quens  denotes  a  plentiful  supply,  and  rather  as  an  epithet  of  praise.  Frequens 
is  also  used  of  a  place  ‘ much  resorted  to ,’  and  a  ‘ full ’  senate-house:  in  which 
sense  creber  is  not  used,  but  celeber ,  which  is  related  to  it  as  KuXOnru)  to  kovtttu). 
(D.) 

0  Potest ,  possunt,  &c.,  may  be  inserted  after  quam.  i  Aves  nidos  quam  pos¬ 
sunt  mollissime  substernunt  ’  =  tam  molliter,  quam  possunt  mollissime.  (G.) 


145 


§53.  411,412.]  REMARKS  ON  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES. 

*  (Quam  ut  mancipium  sit,  or  possit  esse.) 

(Eng.)  I  took  the  greatest  pains  I  could . 

( Lat .)  I  took  pains  (as  great)  as  p  the  greatest  I  could  ( quam ). 

(Eng.)  As  great  a  difference  as  there  can  possibly  be. 

(Lat.)  A  difference  as  great-as  the  greatest  can  be. 

*  ( Quanta  maxima  potest  esse  distantia.) 

Exercise  61. 

411.  That  report  was  frequent  rather  tharf  certain  (e).  The 
better  a  man  is,  with  the  more  resignation  will  he  die.  The 
most  hidden  dangers  are  always  the  most  difficult  to  avoid.  The 
more  hidden  a  danger  is,  the  more  difficulty  is  there  in  avoiding 
it.93  The  more  passionate  a  man  is,  the  more  difficulty  has  he93 
in  commanding  himself.  He  is  too  angry  to  be  able  to  command 
himself.  I  prefer  the  most  unjust  peace  in  the  world  to  the  justest 
war.  Saguntum  was  an  extremely  flourishing  state.  I  will  say 
as  shortly  as  possible,  what  it  seems  to  me  should  be  done.67  They 
perceive  the  very  least  things.  They  worship  Libera,  whom  they 
also86  call  Proserpina.  I  have  accomplished  the  longest  journey 
1  possibly  could.  I  have  finished  the  business  with  the  greatest 
care  I  possibly  could.  In  important  matters,  there  is  need  of  delib¬ 
eration.30  Old  age  is  by  nature  somewhat  (408)  loquacious.  We 
have  lost  considerably  more  gold  than  you.  It  is  an  allowed  fact , 
that  the  sun  is  many  times  as  great  as  the  earth.  There  is  the 
greatest  possible  difference  of  character  between  them. 


XX. 

§  53.  Remarks  on  some  of  the  Tenses. 

*  412.  Theperfect  definite  (perf.  with  have)  is  virtually  a  present  tense,  being 
used  of  an  action  begun  at  some  past  time,  and  carried  on  up  to ,  or 
nearly  up  to  the  present  moment.  Hence,  as  we  have  seen  (40,  d),  it 
may  be  followed  by  the  present  ox  perfect  subjunctive. 


p  Q uam  maximas  potui  copias  —  tantas ,  quam  maximas.  (G.) 

»  Nevertheless  the  Roman  ear  was  so  accustomed  to  the  imperf.  subj.  after 
the  perf.,  that  they  used  it  (even  where  the  perf.  is  plainly  equivalent  to  our 
perfect  with  ‘have’),  provided  ‘the action  could  be  conceived  as  one  advancing 
gradually  to  its  completion.’  (Z.)  ‘  Diu  dubitavi  ( have  long  doubted)  num  melius 

sit,’  &c.,  would  sound  strange  to  Roman  ears:  they  preferred  ‘num  melius  essetf 
even  when  they  did  not  narrate,  but  were  only  stating  the  result.  (K.) 

7 


146 


REMARKS  ON  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES.  [§  53.  413-416 

413.  (a)  To  express,  ‘  I  have  been  doing  a  thing  for  a  long  time,’  the  Romani 
said *  1 * * * 1  am  doing  it  for  a  long  time  already.’ 

(Jam  pridem  cupio,  I  have  long  been  desiring.) 

*  414.  In  animated  narrative,  the  past  is  often  described  by  the 
present. 

#  ( b )  The  present  when  thus  used  ( prcesens  historicum)  may  be  followed 
either  by  the  present  subj.  (according  to  the  general  rule  for  the  sequence 
of  tenses),  or  by  the  imperfect  subj.  (as  being  itself  virtually  a  past 
tense).  The  imperfect  is,  on  the  whole,  the  more  common.  (Z.) 

*  415.  (c)  A  present  tense  after  relatives ,  or,  ‘  when?  1  if?  1  as 
long  as?  ‘  before?  & c.,  is  generally  to  be  translated  by  a  future , 
when  the  action  expressed  by  it  is  still  future. 

*  The  action  is  generally  still  future,  when  the  verb  in  the  prin¬ 
cipal  clause  is  in  a  future  tense  or  the  imperative  mood.r 

*  If  one  action  must  be  completed  before  the  other  begins,  the 
future  perfect  should  be  used.  In  this  case  the  perfect  definite  is 
sometimes  (by  no  means  always )  used  in  English.5 * 

416.  (1)  (Eng.)  Whensoever  I  take t  my  journey  into  Spain  I  will  come  to  you. 
(Lat.)  Whensoever  I  shall  take  my  journey,  &c. 

(2)  (Eng.)  When  I  have  performed  this,  I  will  come,  &c.  (Rom.  xv.  28.) 
(Lat.)  When  I  shall  have  performed  this,  I  will  come ,  &c. 

(3)  (Eng.)  When  he  is  come  (perf.  def.),  he  will  tell  us,  &c.  (John  iv.  5.) 
(Lat.)  When  he  shall  have  come ,  he  will  tell  us,  &c. 

\4'  (Eng.)  (Saying)  they  would  neither  eat  nor  drink ,  till  they  had  killed 
.  Paul  (Acts  xxiii.  12). 

(Lat.)  (Saying)  they  would  neither  eat  nor  drink ,  till  they  should 
have  killed  Paul. 


r  The  subjunctive  present  used  imperatively,  is  virtually  an  imperative. 

*  8  The  Roman,  viewing  the  future  action  or  event  from  his  present,  marked  its 

futurity,  and,  if  necessary,  its  completion  :  the  Englishman  removes  himself  to 
the  ‘  when ’  spoken  of,  and  contemplates  it  as  a  state  then  existing.  The  Roman 
considered  it  relatively:  the  Englishman  considers  it  absolutely.  There  are 
some  constructions,  in  which  the  completion  of  the  action  is  not  marked,  even 
in  Latin ;  for  instance,  in  the  use  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  in  marking  the 
relative  time  of  a  wish,  request,  or  question :  e.  g.  ‘  He  answered  when  he  was 
asked;'  ‘  quum  interrogaretur ,’  not  interrogatus  esset,  though  the  question  must 
be  completed  before  the  answer  is  given. 

1  Even  in  Latin,  the  present  (after  si)  is  sometimes  used,  as  in  English,  in 

connection  with  a  future;  but  only  when  it  is  to  intimate  that  the  future  event 

depends  upon  some  present  circumstance  or  resolution.  Examples  are:  Per¬ 

ficietur  bellum,  si  non  urgemus  obsessos,’  &c.  Liv.  v.  4.  ‘  Si  vincimus,  omnia 

nobis  tuta,  &c.  .  .  .  patebunt .’  Sail.  58,  9.  (G.)  (On  the  siibj.  pres,  after  9 i, 

see  435  (6) ). 


147 


§  53.  417-419.]  REMARKS  Of*  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES. 

(5)  {Eng.)  As  soon  as  they  hear  of  me,  they  shall  obey  me  (2  Sam, 
xxii.  45). 

{Lat  )  As  soon  as  they  shall  hear  of  me,  they  shall  obey  me  : 

(or)  As  soon  as  they  shall  have  heard ,  &c. 

*  417.  ( d )  ‘  Should ,’  ‘  would,’  1  could,’  & c.,  when  used  to  soften 
an  assertion  by  throwing  into  it  an  expression  of  doubtfulness,  are 
generally  to  be  translated  by  putting  the  verb  in  the  'present  or 
perf.  of  the  subjunctive . 

*  a.  In  this  idiom  the  perfect  does  not  appear  to  bear  any  reference  to  the 
completion  of  the  action.  (See  428,  note  *.) 

«  b.  (c)  Vzlim,  nolim ,  malim,  are  often  used  in  this  manner,  and  often  in 
connection  with  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive  governed  b y  ‘ut’  omitted. 

*  418.  ( f )  After  ut  a  consequence  (but  not  a  purpose)  is  often 
put  in  the  perf ’.  subj.,  instead  of  the  imperf.,  after  a  past  tense. 

*  a.  This  occurs  very  frequently  in  Cornelius  Nepos.  The  use  of  the 

perf  gives  more  prominence  and  independence  to  the  consequence.  (K.) 

#  b.  The  imp.  subj.  marks  (1)  something  past,  (2)  something  contem¬ 

porary  with  another  in  past  time,  (3)  something  contemporary  and 
continuing. 

+  c.  The  perf.  subj.  is  either  the  subj.  of  the  aorist  (‘wrote’)  or  of  the 
praeteritum  in  praesenti  (or  perf.  definite,  ‘have  written’).  (K.)  ” 

419.  (  a)  Jam  pridem  cupio,  I  have  long  desired. 

Vocat  me  alio  jam  dudum  tacita  vestra  exspectatio, 
Your  silent  expectation  has  for  some  time  been 
calling  me  to  another  point. 

Copice,  quas  diu  comparabant ,  Forces  which  they  had 
long  been  collecting. 

(Z>)  Subito  edicunt  Consules,  ut  ad  suum  vestitum  Sena¬ 
tores  redirent,  The  Consuls  suddenly  published  an 
edict,  that  the  Senators  should  return  to  their  usual 
dress. 

(c)  Quum  Tullius  rure  redierit,  mittam  eum  ad  te,  When 
Tullius  returns  from  the  country,  I  will  send  him 
to  you.  Facito  hoc  ubi  voles,  Do  this  when  you 
please. 

Si  te  rogavero  aliquid,  nonne  respondebis  ?  If  I  put 
any  question  to  you,  will  you  not  answer  ? 

{d)  Hoc  sine  ulla  dubitatione,  confirmaverim ,u  I  would 
assert  this  without  any  hesitation. 

»  The  perf.  subjunctive  used  in  this  manner  to  withhold  a  positive  assertion, 
occurs  in  negative  sentences  oftener  than  in  positive  ones.  (G.) 


148 


REMARKS  ON  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES.  §  53.  420. 


(e)  De  me  sic  velim  judices ,  1  would  wish  you  to  judge 
thus  of  me. 

Nolim  factum,  I  could  wish  it  not  to  be  done.  (Nol¬ 
lem''  factum,  I  could  wish  it  had  not  been  done.) 
(/)  Quo  factum  est,  ut  plus,  quam  collegse,  Miltiades 
valuerit ,  The  consequence  of  which  was ,  that  Mil 
tiades  had  more  influence  than  his  colleagues. 


420.  Vocabulary  58. 


For  some  time, 


*  Long ;  for  a  long  time, 


t  Long  ago, 


To  desire, 


To  long, 


dudum,  or  jamdudum  (applied  to  short 
preceding  periods;  an  hour  or  few 
hours ;  less,  generally,  than  a  day), 
diu,  or  jamdiuw  (of  an  action  continued 
suspended,  or  not  occurring,  through 
the  whole  period). 

pridem  or  jamprldem  (referring  to  a  past 
point  of  time ;  not,  like  diu,  to  a  past 
period  of  time). 

cupere, x  io  (150),  iv,  It  (this  is  of  thein- 
ward feeling:  optare  is  to  desire  zz.  to 
express  a  wish  for). 
avere  ( defect .  verb )  this  denotes  a  rest - 
less  impatient  longing ;  gestire,  a  de¬ 
lighted ,  joyous  longing. 
bis  terve. 


Not  above  two  or  three  times, 

Two  or  three  times ;  several  times,  bis  terque. 

*  (The  Preposition  Ad.) 

*  (1)  To ;  (2)  at ;  (3)  up  to,  until ;  to  the  amount  of;  (4)  for,  &c. 

To  a  man,  ad  unum. 


* *  *  When  a  conceived  case  is  to  be  expressed  with  the  intimation  that  the  fact 

corresponds  to  it,  or  may  so  correspond,  the  pres,  and  perf  of  the  subj.  are  used : 
but  when  it  is  to  be  intimated  that  the  fact  docs  not,  or  cannot  correspond  to  it, 
the  imperf.  or  pluperf  subj.  must  be  used.  (Z.) 

*  w  But  pridem  and  diu  are  often  interchanged,  though  only  in  constructions 
where  the  notions  of  duration  or  of  a  distant  point  of  beginning  (respectively) 
may  easily  be  implied,  though  the  exact  word  would  require  duration  rather 
than  a  point ,  or  a  point  rather  than  duration.  In  1  jampridem  cupio,’  &c.,  the 
notion  of  continuance  is  plainly  implied :  in  the  corresponding  English  construc¬ 
tion  we  have  it  expressed.  Dudum.  —  diu-dum  (where  dum  restricts  the  mean¬ 
ing  as  in  vixdum,  nondum) :  pridem  =  irplv  If]  ( Hartung )  or  rp'iv  ?>fiv.  (D.) 
t  x  Velle,  cupere,  denote  the  inward  feeling;  optare,  expetPre,  expression  oi 
that  feeling.  Velle  and  optare  denote,  respectively,  the  calm  feeling  and  its 
expression,  cupere  and  expetere  the  eager,  excited  feeling  and  its  expression. 
Avere  expresses  a  restless,  impatient  longing;  gestire  a  delighted  anticipa 
tion.  (D.) 


§  54.  421,  422.]  remarks  on  some  of  the  tenses. 


149 


To  extreme  old  age, 

He  is  nothing  to,  =:  compared  to. 


’  }  ad  eum  nihil  est. 


ad  summam  senectutem. 


him, 

For  a  time, 

As  many  as  two  hundred, 
-  Word  for  word, 

'  At  most, 

*  At  least, 

*  At  last, 


ad  tempus  (also,  ‘at  the  proper  time’), 
ad  ducentos, 
ad  verbum. 

ad  summum,  or  summum  only. 
ad  minimum ;  minimum, 
ad  extremum. 


(a)  (Eng.)  They  do  nothing  but  laugh. 

(Lat.)  They  nothing  else  than  laugh  (nihil  aliud  quam  ridenti 
faciunt  omitted). 


Exercise  62. 


[By  what  verb  should  to  take  away  a  bad  thing  be  translated  ?] 

421.  I  have  for  some  time  been  desiring  to  take  away  from  you 
that  care  of  yours.  I  have  long  desired  to  call  upon  Caius. 
p  After  his  soldiers  had  been  slain  to  a  man,  he  himself  returned 
to  Rome,  p  Having  taken  Marseilles  by  storm,77  he  returned 
home.  I  am  longing  p  to  take  Marseilles,  and  obtain  a  triumph 
for  a  victory  over  the  Gauls.  He  was  whipped  with  rods  several 
times.  He  was  whipped  with  rods  two'  or  three'  times'  at  most. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  Caius  is  nothing  (compared)  to  Balbus. 
Time  is  wanting  p  for  finishing  that  business  (of  yours).  I  would 
wish  you  to  pardon  me.  Caius  to  extreme  old  age  learned  some¬ 
thing  additional  *  every  day.  At  last  all  held  their  tongues.  I 
am  longing  to  return  thanks  to  Caius.  It  cannot  be  denied  that 
death  is  a  rest  from  labours.54  Do  we  not  give  boys  sentences  to 
learn  by  heart  ? 75  He  gives  boys  the  longest  sentences  he  can95 
to  be  learned  by  heart,  word  for  word.  They  do  nothing  but  cry 
out,  that  it  is  all  over  with  Caesar’s  army.  His  industry  was 
such,l0)  that  (418)  he  learned  something  additional  every  day. 


§  54.  Remarks  on  some  of  the  Tenses  continued. 

422.  (a)  The  perfect  subjunctive  (as  well  as  the  present)  i 
used  as  an  imperative. 


y  Addiscebat  aliquid. 


150 


REMARKS  ON  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES.  [§  54.  423-427. 

*  423.  (b)  The  future  is  sometimes  used,  as  in  English .  for  the 
imperative  ;  in  other  words,  we  sometimes  express  a  wish  that  a 
person  should  act  in  a  particular  way,  in  the  form  of  an  assertion 
that  he  will  so  act. 

*  424.  (c)  Questions  that  do  not  ask  for  information,  but  for 
assent ,  are  to  be  translated  into  Latin  by  the  present  or  imperfect 
of  the  subjunctive ,  according  as  a  present  or  past  time  is  refer¬ 
red  to. 

t  The  object  of  such  questions  is,  to  excite  the  same  emotion  or  prod  ce 
the  same  conviction  in  the  minds  of  the  persons  addressed,  that  he 
speaker  himself  feels  or  pretends  to  feel.  If  they  are  negative  in  form, 
the  answer  or  expression  of  assent  will  be  affirmative ;  and  conversely, 
if  not. 

425.  4,  These  ‘questions  of  appeal’  (which  usually  express  perplexity  or 
some  emotion )  may  be  asked  by  auxiliary  verbs  in  English  in  various 
ways :  the  thing  to  be  considered  is,  ‘  does  the  question  require  an  an¬ 
swer  for  information ,  or  mere  assent  (or  sympathy)  V 

,  a  [Forms  of  ‘questions  of  appeal’  in  English.]  (1)  With  Pres.  Subj. 
What  shall  I  do?  (when  asked  in  perplexity,  implying  that  nothing 
satisfactory  can  well  be  done.)  What  am  I  to  do?  What  can  I  do? 
Why  should  I  relate  this?  (Ans.  You  need  not.)  (2)  With  Imperf. 
Subj.  What  was  I  to  do?  What  should  I  have  done?  What  ought  1 
to  have  done  ? 

426.  (1)  (Eng.)  He  taught  the  children  of  the  principal  men. 

( Lat .)  Principum  liberos  erudiebat.  (Imperf.  expresses  a  state  con¬ 
tinued  or  an  action  often  repeated  in  a  past  space  of  time.) 

(2)  (Eng.)  You  would  have  thought.  You  would  have  believed. 

(Lat.)  Putares.  Crederes. 

(3)  (Eng.)  I  remember  reading  that  (or,  to  have  read  that). 

'  (Lat.)  I  remember  to  read  that  (t legere z  memini). 

(4)  (Eng.)  It  would  be  tedious,  endless,  &c. 

(Lat.)  It  is  tedious,  endless,  &c.  (longum,  infinitum  est). 

(5)  (Eng.)  It  would  have  been  better. 

(Lat.)  It  x cas  better  (utilius_/m7a).  So  satius,  par,  idoneum,  &c.fuit. 

427.  ( a )  Quod  dubitas,  ne  feceris ,  What  you  have  doubts 

about,  don’t  do. 

(b)  Si  quid  acciderit  novi,  facies  ut  sciam,  If  any  thing 
netv  happens,  you  will  let  me  know  (=  let  me 
know). 


*  *  But  the  inf.  perf.  follows  memini ,  Ac.,  when  the  speaker  does  not  carry  him 
self  back,  as  it  were,  having  himself  seen ,  heard ,  &c.  what  he  describes. 

•  a  Erat  or  fuerat  must  be  used,  if  the  time  requires  those  tenses  :  and  the  ii\fin . 
pres,  follows  these  expressions.  (See  130.) 


151 


§54.  428,  429.]  remarks  on  some  of  the  tenses. 


(c)  Quid  faciam  ?  What  am  I  to  do  ?  What  can  I  (or 
shall  I)  do  ? 

Quis  neget,  &c.  ?  Who  can  deny  .  .  .  ? 

Quid  facerem  ?  What  icas  I  to  do  ?  What  ought  1 
to  have  done  ?  What  should  I  have  done  ? 


428.  Vocabulary  59. 

A  banquet;  an  entertainment, 

If  I  may  say  so  without  offence, 
Under  favour, 

A  favour ;  pardon, 


convivium,  b  i,  n. 
pace  tua  dixerim, 
bona  taa  venia, 
venia,  m,  f. 


To  pardon  (spoken  of  a  super ior),  ]  veniam  dSreC  <als0  ‘t0  S™‘ a  Permls- 

c  sion’). 

To  ask  pardon  for  a  fault,  delictid  veniam  petere ;  petiv,  petit. 

Look  to  that  yourself,  id  ipse  videris ;  or  tu  videris. 

Let  Fortune  look  to,  or  see  to,  it,  fortuna  viderit. 

I  can  scarcely  believe,  vix  crediderim.* * 

*  (The  Preposition  Adversum  or  Adversus.) 

Adversus,  or  adversum,  corresponds  almost  exactly  with  our  against 
in  all  its  uses ;  but  has  besides  the  meanings  over-against  ( =  opposite) 
and  towards. 


Exercise  63. 

[Translate,  ‘i  am  pardoned.’] 

429.  Who  can  deny  that  a  banquet  is  preparing  ?c  There  is 
no  one  but  wishes  that  a  banquet  should3)  be  prepared.  You 
would  have  thought  that  a  banquet  was  prepared.  What  was  I 


*  b  Epulce ,  drum  is  the  most  general  notion,  a  meal ,  whether  frugal  or  sump¬ 
tuous,  with  only  the  members  of  the  family  or  with  guests,  public  or  private  : 
convivium  is  a  meal  with  guests,  a  dinner-parcy :  dapes  a  religious  banquet,  a 
banquet  after  a  sacrifice ;  epulum  a  banquet  in  honour  of  some  person,  or  on 
some  festive  occasion ;  comissatio  a  riotous  party,  a  drinking  bout.  (D.) 

c  The  ignoscens  pardons  from  his  heart,  forgives  and  forgets ;  the  veniam  dans 
passes  over  as  a  favour  what  he  might  justly  resent  or  punish.  The  friend  or 
equal  ignoscit ;  the  superior  or  more  powerful  person  veniam  dat.  (D.) 

*  d  Doderltin  thinks  that  delictum  is  not  a  sin  of  omission  as  is  generally  thought, 
but  that  it  has  the  same  extent  of  meaning  as  peccatum :  both  expressing  sins 
against  prudence  as  well  as  those  against  morality ;  errors  as  well  as  sins. 

V  +  Vix  crediderim  —  vix  credam  —  vix  credo.  But  this  perf.  subj.  does  not 
always  stand  for  the  present  indie,  but  sometimes  for  the  perf.  ‘  Tum  vero  ego 
necquidquam  Capitolium  servaverim  ’  ~  servavi.  (K.) 

*  *  In  English  we  have  no  present  or  imperf.  passive,  except  in  a  few  verbs  that 
form  these  tenses  with  what  is  inform  the  present  participle  of  the  active  voice, 
but  is  probably  the  participial  substantive ,  which  used  to  be  governed  by  the 


152 


CONDITIONAL  PROPOSITIONS.  [§  55.  430,  431 

to  do  ? — the  banquet  had  been  long  preparing.  The  latter  says 
that  a  banquet  is  preparing  :  the  former  denies  (it).  He  taught  the 
boys  to  play  on  the  lyre.  Do  not  prepare  a  banquet.  It  would  he  tedi¬ 
ous  (426)  to  relate  all  the  evils  that  have  happened  to  us  by  our 
own  fault.  Under  favour  I  would  say,  my  brother,  that  opinion 
of  yours  isf  very  often'  (p.  13,  6.)  prejudicial.  Are  they  too  to 
be  pardoned  ?  It  cannot  be  denied  that  they  have  several  times 
asked  pardon  for  their  fault.  Let  fortune  see  to  this,  since  we 
may  not  use  reason  and  counsel.  I  remem oer  their  charging 
Cams  with  immorality.  They  published  an  edict  that  no  one 14 
should  be  capitally  condemned  without  being  heard.  Justice  is 
piety  towards  the  gods.  Would  it  not  have  been  better,  not  to 
have  concealed  those  things  from  your  father  1  They  do  nothing 
but  mock  the  poor  (420,  a).  There  are  some  who  perceive  the 
very  least  things. 


XXI. 

§  55.  On  the  principal  kinds  of  Conditional  Propositions. 

*  430.  In  conditional  (or  hypothetical )  propositions,  the  clause  with  ‘  if’  is  the 

condition  or  conditional  clause ;  the  other,  the  consequence  or  consequent 
clause. 

•  431.  Sometimes  the  consequence  is  expressed  in  the  indicative  mood,  no 

doubt  being  intimated  as  to  the  existence  or  non-existence  of  the  condi¬ 
tion. 

*  (If  this  is  A,  that  is  B.) 

*  Here  we  have  ‘ possibility ,  or  simple  supposition,  without  any  expres¬ 
sion  of  uncertainty .’ 


preposition *  l 2 3 *on 5  or  lan’  shortened  into  ‘a.’  Thus  ‘the  ark  was  a  preparing ' 
(1  Pet.  iii.  20).  1  Forty  and  six  years  was  this  temple  in  building  ’  (John  ii.  20). 

There  is  no  trusting  the  mere  look  of  a  form,  as  the  following  table  will  show 

(1)  He  .  .  .  is  coming  .  .  .  (pres,  act.) 

(2)  The  house  .  is  building  .  .  .  (pres,  pass.) 

(3)  This  .  .  .is  asking  (too  much)  (‘  is,’  uitli  the  participial  substantive  ) 

(1)  He  .  .  is  come  ....  (perf.  act.) 

(2)  The  house  .  is  built  ....  (perf.  pass ) 

(3)  He  .  .  .  is  loved  (by  all)  .  (pres,  pass.) 

<  Indie. :  pace  tua  dixerim,  &c.,  being  only  parenthetical  insertions. 


153 


§  55.  432-435. J  conditional  propositions. 

*  432.  Sometimes,  however,  though  the  consequence  is  expressed  in  the  in¬ 

dicative,  uncertainty  is  expressed  as  to  the  existence  or  not  of  the 
condition :  it  being  implied  however  that  this  uncertainty  will  probably 
be  removed. 

I»  *  - V»  -  * 

(lIf  I  have  any  thing,  I  will  give  it  you and  I  will  see  whether  1 
have  or  not.) 

Here  we  have  uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decision. 

*  433.  Sometimes  the  consequence  is  itself  expressed  in  a  conditional  form : 

and  then  the  condition  is  merely  contemplated  as  a  conceivable  case ,  but 
no  hint  is  given  as  to  its  being  likely  actually  to  occur  or  not. 

(If  you  were  to  do  this,  you  would  greatly  oblige  me.) 

Here  we  have  (according  to  Hermann  and  Butlman)  ‘  uncertainty 
without  any  such  accessary  notion  as  the  prospect  of  decision.’ 
r  434.  Lastly,  the  consequence  may  express  what  wouldbe  doing ,  cr  would 
have  been  done,  if  a  condition  that  is  actually  unrealized ,  had  been  real¬ 
ized  just  now ,  or  at  some  past  time. 

If  1  had  it,  I  would  now  give  it  to  you  (but  I  have  not) 

If  1  had  had  it,  I  would  have  given  it  you. 


( Forms  of  Conditional  Propositions .) 


435.  (a) 
(») 

(«) 

(d) 


Si  quid  habet ,  datf  If  he  has  any  thing ,  he  gives  it. 
Si  quid  habeam ,  dabo,  If  I  have  any  thing,  I  will 
give  it. 

Si  quid  haberet,  daret, h  If  he  should  have  any  thing , 
he  would  give  it. 


(1)  Si  quid  haberet,  daret, 


(2)  Si  quid  habuisset,  dedisset, 


1 


Tflie  had  any  thing , 
he  would  give  it. 

If  he  had  had  any 
thing,  he  would 
have  given  it. 


s  The  consequence  may  also  be  in  the  imperative  or  in  the  future.  (See 

437,  i.) 

h  On  this,  see  445.  It  is,  to  say  the  least,  very  uncommon  to  find  a  proposi¬ 
tion  of  this  form,  from  which  the  notion  of  the  possible  realization  of  the  con¬ 
dition  is  not  excluded.  (See  Zumpt’s  opinion,  419,  v.)  Kuhner  says,  ‘si  hoc 
dicas ' lav  rovro  Xtyjjj  and  ei  rovro  Xcyots  :  sometimes,  however,  the  last  rela¬ 
tion  is  expressed  as  in  Greek,  ‘si  hoc  diceretur,  vere  diceretur.''  (Vol.  ii.  p.  546.) 
The  same  form  of  proposition  is  used  in  a  different  way,  when  the  imp.  subj. 
(  2=  the  Greek  optat.)  is  used  to  express  something  frequently  occurring  in  past 
time. 

‘  Caesar — Si  peteret  per  amicitiam  patris  atque  suam,  non 

Q,uidquam  proficeret' — Hor.  Sat.  i.  3.  4.  (See  Heindorf  ad  loc.) 

7* 


154 


CONDITIONAL  PROPOSITIONS.  [§55.436-441. 

436.  Here  we  see  that  the  forms  (c)  and  (d)  (1)  coincide.  The  form  (c) 
means,  ‘  if  at  any  time  he  xvere  to  have  any  thing,  he  would  give  it 
but  such  a  sentence,  though  not  necessarily  intimating  the  impossibility 
of  this  case  occurring,  of  course,  does  imply  that  it  has  not  occurred. 
It  thus  runs  very  near  to  the  meaning  of  (d)  (1),  which,  besides  imply 
ing  that  it  has  not,  implies  that  it  will  not  occur. 

These  two  cases  are  not  distinguished  in  Latin  :  the  context ,  or  our 
previous  knotvledge,  must  determine  whether  the  case  is  contemplated 
as  possible,  or  not. 

*  437.  ( a )  Possibility,  or  simple  supposition ,  without  any  expres¬ 

sion  of  uncertainty  :  the  indicative  in  both  clauses. 

♦  (b)  Uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decision  :  ‘si’  with 

the  subjunctive  present  (or  perfect)  ;  the  indicative , 
commonly  the  future,'  in  the  consequence. 

♦  (c)  Uncertainty  without  any  such  accessary  notion  a£  the 

prospect  of  decision :  the  imperfect  subjunctive 
clauses. 

%  ( d )  Impossibility,  or  belief  that  the  thing  is  not  so  :  the 
subjunctive  in  both  clauses,  the  imperfect  for  present 
time,  and  a  continuing  consequence  ;  the  pluperfect 
for  past  time. 

%  438.  But  the  consequence  may  refer  to  present ,  the  condition  to 
past  time  ;  or  vice  versa. 

‘  If  I  had  received  a  letter  ( accepissem ),  I  would  now  read  it  (recitarem). 
‘  If  I  at  this  time  wanted  any  thing  (opus  esset),  I  would  have  come 
(venissem)  myself.’ 

*  439.  Since,  ‘  I  would  give  it  you  (now),  if  I  had  it  (now)’  comes  to  the 
same  thing  as  ‘  l  would  have  given  it  to  you,  if  I  had  had  any,’  the  im¬ 
perfect  subjunctive  in  Latin  may  often  be  translated  by  the  forms  ‘  would 
have  ’  (could  or  should  have),  when  it  is  implied  that  the  condition  will 
not  be  realized. 

*  440.  ( d )  When  the  form  ‘  would  have  ’  is  in  the  consequence, 
the  pluperfect  in  the  condition  must  be  in  the  subjunctive  in 
Latin. 

*  441.  With  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect ,  ‘si’  always  governs 
the  subjunctive. 


»  The  imperative  may  stand  in  the  consequence.  Of  course  the  perf.  or  fu¬ 
ture,  both  the  simple  and  the  periphrastic  future,  may  stand  in  either  clause,  or 
both  :  si  illud  mihi  beneficium  tribuetur  (or  tributum  erit  ox  fuerit),  magnopere 
gaudebo.  In  the  second  class,  tributum  sit ,  ox  fuerit,  ixom  fuerim. 


155 


$55.  442—444.]  conditional  propositions. 

*  442.  Since  we  use  the  indicative  conditionally ,  care  must  be  taken  to 
translate  this  by  the  subjunctive  (435,  b.)  when  ‘  should  ’  might  be  used ; 
when,  that  is,  there  is  ‘ uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decisioni 

443.  Vocabulary  60. 


Happy, 

*  Much  less, 

Not  to  say, 


I  do  not  say, 

I  will  not  say, 

*  All, 

Cautious, 

«  All  taken  one  by  one ;  each  of 
them  singly, 

►  For  instance,  • 

To  rise, 

The  Dog-star, 

{Eng.)  No  painter. 


beatus,  a,  um.k 

S  nedumi  (generally  after  a  negative;  if  a 
(  verb  follows  it  must  be  in  the  subjunc). 
(  ne  dicam  (of  what  might  probably  be 
l  said  with  truth), 
non  dico. 
non  dicam. 

*  omnes  {all  together ,  cuncti,  universi). m 
cautus,  a,  um. 

singuli,  ae,  a.  * 


verbi  causa, 
orior,  oriri,  ortus. 
Canicula,  ae,  f. 

{. Lat .)  Nemo  pictor. 


{Eng.)  This  does  not  at  all  terrify  me.  {Lat.)  This  terrifies  me  nothing. 


Exercise  64. 


[Ota.  ‘  If  he  were  to  ’  &c.  =  ‘  if  he  should  ’  &c.J 
444.  If  a  happy  life  can  be  lost7,  it  cannot  be  happy'.  He  who 
does  not  defend  a  friend,  if  he  can,  sins7.  If  all  things  are  brought 
about"  by  fate,  nothing  can  admonish  us  to  he  more  cautious. 
Peleus,  if  he  were  to  hear  it,  would  lift  up  his  hands.  Pe- 


t  »  k  Faustum  and  prosper  are  said  of  things  only,  not  of  persons.  ‘  That  which 
is  prosperum  merely  satisfies  the  hopes  and  wishes  of  men,  like  ‘  wished  for ,* 
‘desired  the  faustum  refers  more  to  the  graciousness  of  the  gods  :  the  fortuna - 
tus  is  a  lucky  person  :  the  beatus  feels  himself  happy  (as  he  is)  and  is  contented.’ 
(D.)  Felix  expresses  both  that  which  is,  and  that  which  makes  happy  ( beatus , 
only  what  is  ‘ happy') :  and  relates  principally  ‘  to  the  obtaining,  possessing,  or 
enjoying  external  goods,  and  supposes  a  man’s  own  co- operationi  Th's  latter 
circumstance  distinguishes  it  from  fortunatus ,  which  also  relates  more  to  par¬ 
ticular  events. 

i  Nedum  is  sometimes  followed  by  ut :  ‘  nedum  ut  ulla  vis  fieret.’ 
{Liv.  iii.  14.) 

I  •  m  Cuncti  (opposed  to  dispersi)  ‘  all  actually  united universi  {opposed  to  sin¬ 
guli  or  unusquisque)  ‘all  taken  together.’  As  meaning  ‘ all ,’  1  the  whole, ’  in  the 
sing.,  totus  represents  the  thing  as  originally  ‘a  whole!  omnis,  cunctus,  uni¬ 
versus,  all  represent  it  as  originally  made  up  of  certain  parts,  of  which  the  aggre¬ 
gate  is  taken.  (D.) 

D  Fiunt. 


156  CONDITIONAL  PROPOSITIONS.  [§  56.  445 

leus,  if  he  heard  it  (but  he  has  not),  would  lift  up  his  hands. 
If  any  one  were  to  do  this  he  would  lay  the  king  under  a  great 
obligation.  Even  Caesar  could  not  have  done  this  ;  much  less 
can  you  (443,  note  1).  The  boy  should  be  admonished,  that  he 
may  show  himself  the  more  cautious  (63,  b).  All  the  wisest 
men92  are  aware  that  the  interest  of  each  and  of  all  is  the  same'. 
I  can  scarcely  think  him  equal  to  all  of  them  taken  one  by  one , 
much  less  to  all  of  them  together.  If  you  are  equal  to  them  all- 
together,  you  will  easily  conquer  them  all-taken-one-by-one.  If 
Fabius,  for  instance,  was  born  p  at  the  rising  of  the  dog-star,  he 
will  not  die  in  the  sea.  He  is  not  equal0  to  them  all  taken  one  by 
one,  not  to  say  to  them  all  together.  He  is  equal  to  them  all 
taken  one  by  one,  I  do  not  say  to  them  all  together.  No  painter 
would  say  this  ( perf .  subj.).  Know  that  I  do  not  fear  these 
things  at  all.  There  were  some109  who  did  not  fear  these  things 
at  all. 


§  56.  Conditional  Propositions  continued. 

*  445.  (a)  Such  conditional  sentences  as  would  in  English  have 
were  to — ,  should,  or  would,  in  both  clauses,  often  take  the  verbs 
of  both  clauses  in  the  subjunctive  present. 

*  a.  The  conditional  clause  is  here  a  contemplated  possibility  (resem¬ 
bling,  in  this,  the  third  class;  si  haberet ,  daret) ;  but  the  thing  contem¬ 
plated  is  contemplated  as  occurring  now,  and  therefore  often  agrees 
with  the  second  class  (si  habeam  dabo),  in  implying  a  prospect  of 
decision. 

«  Hence  if  a  contemplated  case  is  contemplated  as  occurring  now,  the 
present  subjunctive  should  be  preferred  to  the  imperfect:  and  when  the 
possibility  of  its  occurring  now  is  to  be  strongly  intimated,  the  present 
is  the  only  proper  form. 

(1)  Tu  si  hic  sis,  aliter  sentias. 

If  you  were  here,  you  would  think  differently. 

(2)  Tu  si  hie  esses,  aliter  sentires. 

If  you  icere  here  (which  you  neither  are  nor  will  be),  you  icould  think 
differently : 

(or)  If  you  had  been  here,  you  would  have  thought  differently. 

!*•  /?.  From  the  ambiguity  of  the  form  ‘  si  quid  haberet,  daret,'  the  subj. 

pres,  should  probably  be  preferred,  when  it  is  not  intended  to  intimate 
that  the  condition  is  improbable  or  impossible.  The  pres.  subj.  may  be 


0  Impar  est. 


157 


§  56.  446-450.]  conditional  propositions. 

used  of  suppositions  really  impossible,  if  it  is  not  the  speaker’s  objeci 

to  intimate  this :  ‘  Si  exsistat  hodie  ab  inferis  Lycurgus  gaudeat ,'  &c. 

{Liv.  39,  37.) 

446.  The  three  conditional  tenses  of  the  subjunctive ,  are  scri¬ 
berem,  scripsissem,  and  scripturus  essem. 

447.  ‘  Scripsissem  5  and  ‘  scripturus  essem  ’  are  both  used  to 
express  our  1  would  have  written.’  But  ‘  scripsissem  ’  intimates 
that  the  thing  would  certainly  have  happened  :  scripturus  essem, 
that  it  would  probably  have  happened,  because  it  was  so  intended 
or  arranged. 

(5)  Thus,  ‘  he  would  have  slept  (  =  he  intended  to  have  slept , 
and  therefore  we  may  suppose  would  have  slept )  there,  if  he  had 
gone  on,’  should  be  translated  by  the  part,  in  rus  with  esset. p 

But  the  indicative  {cr at,  f nil j  is  more  common,  when  the  inten¬ 
tion  is  to  be  positively  expressed. 

448.  (c)  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  indicative  are  often 
used  instead  of  the  same  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  in  the  conse¬ 
quent  clause.  (It  is  then  better  to  let  the  consequent  precede  the 
conditional  clause.) 

449.  (d)  The  particle  si  is  occasionally  omitted  ;  the  verb  of  the  conditional 

clause  should  then  begin  the  sentence. 

450.  (a)  In  quo  si  tantum  eum  prudentem  dicam,  minus  quam 

debeam  prcedicem,  In  which  if  I  were  only  to  call 
him  prudent,  I  should  commend  him  less  highly  than 
I  ought. 

( b )  Conclave,  ubi  erat  mansurus,  si  ire  perrexisset,  The 

chamber  in  which  he  would  have  lodged,  if  he  had 
continued  his  journey. 

(c)  Perieram,  nisi  tu  accurrisses I  had  perished  (  = 

should  have  perished)  if  you  had  not  run  to  my 
assistance. 

(d)  Dedisses  huic  animo  par  corpus,  fecisset  quod  opta- 


P  So  also  in  the  third  class  ‘  si  quid  haberet  daturus  esset  '  is  correct,  where 
daturus  esset  =  ‘he  would  be  prepared  to  give.'  ( Kruger :  who  quotes  Tac.  H. 
U.  77,  ‘cujus  filium  adoptaturus  essem ,  si  ipse  imperarem.') 

*»  A  conditional  clause  often  refers  to  a  consequence  implied:  ‘Pons  Sublicius 
iter  pcene  hostibus  dedit,  ni  unus  vir  fuisset '  =  {et  dedisset)  ni  unus  vi  r fuisset. 


158 


CONDITIONAL  PROPOSITIONS.  [§  56.  451 


bat,  Had  you  given  this  mind  a  body  like  itself,  hfi 
would  have  done  what  he  desired. 


451.  Vocabulary  61. 
But  if ;  if  however, 

But  if  not, 

*  Unless;  if  not, 


♦  Although ;  though, 


'  Although  indeed, 
*  Unless  indeed, 


Power, 

The  thing  is  so, 

To  put  himself  in  their  power, 
To  be  in  our  own  power, 


< 


< 


sin,  sin  autem, 
sin  minus.1 
nisi.8 

'  etsi :  etiamsh — followed  by  tamen,  yet , 
(sometimes  tamen  'precedes  etsi,  when 
the  unexpected  nature  of  the  event  to 
be  described  is  to  be  made  more  prom¬ 
inent  ;  for  tamen  etsi,  tametsi  is  found, 
and  the  tamen  is  sometimes  repeated 
in  the  principal  clause. — Although 
may  also  be  translated  by  quamquam ,u 
quamvis  and  licet.) 

-  quamquam  (suggested  by  a  former 
J  statement :  it  nas  no  influence  on  the 
mood). 

nisi  forte ;  nisi  vero. 
f  potestas,  atis,  f.  (of  might  with  right , 
and  therefore  the  proper  word  for 
i  conceded  power);  potentia,  &,f.  (of 
[  actual  inherent  power), 
res  ita  se  habet, 
potestatem  sui  facere, 
in  nostra  esse  potestate. 


t 


r  Or,  sin  secus,  sin  aliter. 

*  8  ‘  Your  memory  will  be  weakened  nisi  eam  exerceas’  implies  that  if  you  ex¬ 
ercise  it,  it  will  not  be  lessened.  But  from  si  non  you  might  not  infer  this,  but 
only  draw  the  strict  conclusion  that  if  you  do  not  exercise  it,  it  will  be  lessened. 
The  si,  in  si  non,  is  the  conjunctioh,  the  non  belongs  to  the  verb  or  other  word 
in  the  proposition. 

*  t  The  compounds  of  ‘  si 5  follow  the  same  rule  as  si :  With  the  pres.,  per/.,  and 
fut.  they  take  the  indicative  unless  the  thing  is  to  be  asserted  contingently  and 
doubtfully  s  with  the  imperf.  and  pluperf  they  generally  take  the  subj. ,  though 
Here  too  the  indicative  comes  in,  when  they  introduce,  not  a  supposition ,  but  a 
fact.  ‘  Tametsi  a  duce  deserebantur ,’  (Cses.)  (Si,'  like  our  1  if,'  is  sometimes 
used  for  1  whether ;'  ‘Tentata  res  est,  si  primo  impetu  capi  Ardea  posset.’ 

«  u  Quamquam  (quam  (how'  strengthened  by  doubling)  is  1  however  much,'  but 
expresses  ‘  however  much  a  thing  really  exists,'  or  can,  or  must  exist.  It  there¬ 
fore  takes  the  indie,  when  the  thing  is  not  to  be  represented  as  doubtful.  Quam¬ 
vis  (or  quantumvis)  is  ‘however  much  a  thing  maybe  conceived  possible,'  and 
therefore  takes  the  subj.  Licet  is  no  particle,  but  an  impersonal  verb,  and  may 
occur  in  any  tense.  ‘  Licet  recte  agas,  tamen,  &c.'  ‘ Act  as  right  as  you  please. 

yet,  &c.’  ‘  Detrahat ....  fortuna  licebit' — Quamvis  —  ‘  although  '  (as  in  Nep 
quamvis  carebat  nomine ;  with  indic.)  belongs,  generally  speaking,  to  a  latei 
age. 


CONDITIONAL  PROPOSITIONS. 


159 


§  56.  452.] 

(Eng.)  Even  this  is  not  just  unless  it  is  voluntary. 

*  ( Lat .)  Even  this  is  so  (only)  just,  if  it  is  voluntary. 

(Ita  justum  est  ....  si  est  voluntarium  :v  ita  here  zzz  or 
that  condition  or  supposition.) 

♦  [C.  xxxii.]  '■But'  (  =  except,  unless)  after  a  negative  is  nisi,  or  (if  it  stands 
before  a  substantive)  the  prepos.  prceter . 

Exercise  65. 

[How  is  ‘  that  ’  translated  after  ‘  it  follows  ’1  (83)] 

452.  If  you  were  to  ask  me  what  is  the  nature  of  the  gods,  I 
should  perhaps  answer  nothing  (445).  If  the  thing  were  so,  I 
should  rejoice  (445).  If  there  be  nothing  in  our  own  power,  let 
us  go  away.  If  they  had  remained,  he  would  have  put  himself 
in  their  power.  We  must  cultivate  eloquence,  though  some  make 
a  perverse  use  of  it.  Nothing  would  be  in  our  own  power,  if  the 
thing  were  so.  The  Stoics  say  that  no  man  is  divine,  but  the  wise 
man.  Who  can  deny  (424)  that  the  most  hidden  snares  are 
always  the  most  difficult  to  avoid  ?  I  love  my  enemy,  more  than 
you  envy  your  friend.  Caius  is  more  brave  than  prudent. w  I 
don’t  know  whether25  any  thing  better  than  friendship'  has  been 
given  to  man  by  the  immortal  gods.  Though  these  things  are 
contrary  to  each  other,  we  must  nevertheless  use  them.  Who 
will  deny  (424)  that  these  things  are  of  importance  to  us  ?  Though 
the  thing  were  so,  yet  this  could  not  be  said  without  impiety.  1 
almost  think  that  these  things  are  not  in  our  own  power.  If  this 
be  true,  I  shall  rejoice  :  but  if  not,  I  must  bear  it  with  resignation. 
This  itself  is  not  just  unless  it  is  voluntary. 


r  So,  ‘Patres  decreverunt  ut, .quum  populus  regem  jussisset,  id  sic  ratum  esset 
m  Patres  auctores  fierent.  (Liv.  i.  17.) 

•  w  Grotefend  distinguishes  between  three  forms  of  comparison,  thus : — 

Caius  fortior  est,  quam  prudentior  —  Caius  is,  indeed,  both  brave  and  pru¬ 
dent  ;  but  yet  more  brave  than  prudent. 

Caius  magis  fortis  est,  quam  prudens  =  Caius  is  just  as  brave,  as  he  is  not 
prudent. 

Caius  fortis  est,  quam  prudens  =  Caius  is  brave,  but  not  at  all  prudent  (where 
potius  may  be  supplied).  The  last  two  forms  belong  to  late  writers, 
especially  Tacitus. 


CONDITIONAL  PROPOSITIONS. 


160 


[§  57.  455 


§  57.  Conditional  Propositions  in  dependent  sentences. 

*  453.  ( a )  Possibility  without,  any  expression  of  uncertainty. 

(Caius,  si  quid  habet,  dat.) 

Dicebant  Caium,  si  quid  haberet  (or,  si  quid  habeat) 
dare. 

*  ( [b )  Uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decision. 

(Si  quid  habeam ,  dabo.) 

Dicebat,  si  quid  habeat  (or  haberet ),  se  daturum.* 

*  (c)  Uncertainty  without  any  such  accessary  notion. 

(Si  quid  haberet ,  daret.) 

Dicebat,  si  quid  haberet,  se  daturum  esse. 

f  (Or  daturum  fore,  if  the  independent  proposition  would  be  dcJurur 
essem.  See  447.) 

( d )  Impossibility ,  or  belief  that  the  thing  is  not  so. 

(1)  (Si  quid  haberet ,  daret.) 

This  form  in  a  dependent  sentence  coincides  with  form  (c). 

(2)  (Si  quid  habuisset,  dedisset.) 

Dicebat,  si  quid  habuisset,  se  daturum  fuisse. 

%  (3)  When  the  verb  of  the  conditional  clause  is  in  the 
pluperf.,  that  of  the  consequent  clause  is  in  the  im- 

(Si  quid  accepisset,  daret.) 

Dicebat,  si  quid  accepisset ,  se  daturum  esse.? 

*  (4)  The  verb  of  the  conditional  clause  in  the  imperf.,  thnt 
of  the  consequent  clause  in  the  pluperfect.' 

(Si  quid  opus  esset,  venisset.) 

Dicebat  se,  si  quid  haberet,  daturum  fuisse. 

Dicebat  se,  si  quid  haberet,  daturum. 

(or)  Dicebat  se,  si  quid  habeat,  daturum. 


*  Obs.  The  conditional  forms  of  the  infinitive  are  scripturum  esse  (pres.), 
scripturum  fuisse  (perf.) ;  scripturum  fore  (f ut.).  Of  these  scripturum  esse  is 
also  a  mere  future  infinitive ;  the  two  others  are  only  conditional  forms. 

y  Obs.  The  form  daturum  esse  cannot  be  used  to  express  1  impossibility  or 
belief  that  the  thing  is  not  so'  unless  the  verb  of  the  conditional  clause  is  of  the 
pluperf.  subj.  ‘  Dicebat  si  patris  literas  accepisset ,  se  eas  cum  fratre  communi¬ 
caturum  esse.’  The  form  ‘  si  literas  acciperet  se  communicaturum  esse,’  would 
not  imply  this ,  but  only  express  the  receiving  of  a  letter  as  a  contemplated  case 
'belonging  to  class  (c)  ). 


16 


6  57.  454-457.]  conditional  propositions. 


454.  Hence,  when  we  have  to  make  these  sentences  dependent, 
we  must  put 

for  d at,  dahit,  daret,  dedisset: 

dare ,  daturum  esse ,  daturum  esse,  daturum  fuisse  : 
for  daturus  esset, 
daturum  fore. 

455.  We  also  see  that  the  first  two  classes  (when  the  verb  is 
in  the  future)  are  no  longer  distinguished. 

Si  quid  habet,  dabit.  ) 

Si  quid  habeat,  dabit.  ) 

1 Dicebat  se,  si  quid  haberet,  daturum;’  or,  ‘si  quid 
habeat  for  where  the  perfect  subjunctive  would  regu¬ 
larly  be  expected  after  a  past  tense  like  dicebat,  the 
present  is  often  found  with  apparently  no  difference 
of  meaning  ;  but  not  the  imperfect  for  the  present, 
Kruger.) 

456.  Vocabulary  62. 


remanere,  mans,  mans. 


conferre,  conttil,  collat  (in,  with  acc.) 
familiariter  uti ;  usus, 
instruere  aciem ;  instrux, 


To  remain, 

To  confer  benefits  upon, 

To  be  intimate  with, 

.  To  draw  up  an  army,  instruere  aciem  ;  instrux,  instruct. 

To  draw  up  his  army  in  three  lines,  triplicem  aciem  instrugre. 

To  engage,  confligere,  flix,  flict. 

Either — or,  auta — aut ;  vel — vel ;  sive — sive. 

Or,  aut ;  vel ;  or  the  enclitic  ve. 

*  457.  f£jT  1  At'  when  the  thing  was  done  not  in  but  near ,  should  be  translated 
by  apud,  or  ad  with  acc. 

(The  battle  apud  Salamina.  ‘  Apud'  is  found  in  later  writers  even  for  ‘in.’) 


*  Grotefend  observes,  that  Caesar  generally  retains  the  subj.  pres,  or  perf. 
(after  a  past  tense)  when  those  tenses  would  stand  in  direct  narration :  but  that 
Cic.  and  Liv.  generally  turn  them  into  the  imperf.  or  pluperf.  (See  418.) 

♦  a  ‘  Aut ’  expresses  a  difference  in  the  things ;  ‘  vel '  a  difference  in  the  expres¬ 
sion.  (Z.)  Vel  is  the  imperative  from  velle ,  as  fer  from  ferre:  its  proper 
meaning  therefore  is,  ‘  if  you  please :’  so  that  ‘  A  vel  B  ’  was  originally  ‘  A  or, 
if  you  like,  B that  is,  ‘A  or  B:  one  or  the  other,  no  matter  which.’  Hence, 
its  meaning  ‘ even:'  vel  maximus,  ‘  the  very  greatest,  if  you  please.’  ‘  Aut'  is 
used  in  the  case  of  opposite  notions,  when  if  one  is,  the  other  is  not.%f  VeV 
should  be  used  when  the  notions  are  not  opposite  in  themselves ;  especially  when 
only  some  of  the  possible  suppositions  are  mentioned.  It  very  often  evidently 
retains  its  original  meaning,  of  expressing  indifference  as  to  which  notion  is 
taken ;  and  should  always  be  used  when  such  indifference  is  to  be  expressed. 
Thus  ‘  The  nobles  can  either  corrupt  or  correct  the  morals  of  a  state,’  vel  cor-' 


162 


ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION. 

Exercise  66. 


[§  58.  458,  459. 


[How  is  can  deny  to  be  translated  in  a  question  of  appeal?  (445.)  ] 

458.  He  said,  that  if  a  happy  life  could  be  lost,  it  could  not  be 
happy.  He  has  long  appeared  to  me  somewhat  disturbed.87 
Who  can  deny,  that  some  are  borne  one  way,  some  another  ?  He 
answered  that  Peleus,  if  he  had  heard  it,  would  have  lifted  up  his 
hands.  He  answered  that  he  could  have47  no  friendship  with 
these,  if  they  remained  in  Gaul.  It  is  certain,  that  if  any  one 
had  done  this,  he  would  have  laid  the  king  under  a  great  obligation. 
It  is  certain  that,  if  any  one  does  this,  he  will  lay  the  king  under 
a  great  obligation.  If  any  one  does  this,98  he  will  have  deserved 
well  of  the  state.  I  fear  that  nobody  will  be  permitted  to  be  neu¬ 
tral.  I  fear  that  he  has  not  concealed  from  you  the  discourse  of 
T.  Ampius.  (As  to)  what  is  best  to  be  done  ( sup .)  do  you/  see 
to  that  (428).  I  will  strive  to  prove  myself  grateful  (memor)  for 
the  benefits,  of  which  you  have  conferred  very  many31  upon  me. 
They  say,  that  the  rule  of  expediency  is  not  the  same  as  that  of 
honour.10  Having  drawn  up  his  army  in  three  lines,  he  engaged 
with  Mardonius,  p  He  drew  up  his  army,  and  engaged  with  the 
Gauls  at  Geneva.  There  were  some109  who  lifted  up  their  hands. 


XXII. 

§  58.  On  oblique  narration. 

s  459.  *  When  one  person  has  to  report  the  speech  of  another,  he  may  do  this 
in  two  ways.  He  may  either  introduce  him  as  speaking,  and  put  in 
his  mouth  the  exact  words  used ;  or  he  may  only  state  the  substance  of 
what  he  said  under  a  change  of  form. 

(a)  In  the  first  way  of  narrating,  the  speaker  uses  the  first  person.  “  Cae¬ 
sar  said  :  ‘  /  am  of  opinion,’  ” — and  so  on. 


rumpere,  vel  corrigere,  for  they  can  do  which  they  please.  It  sometimes  =  both 
— and.  ‘  He  was  his  equal,  r el  moribus  vel  fortuna.’  *  Ve  (abridged  from  vel) 
commonly  unites  single  words,  not  propositions:  it  is  often  appended  to  si,  ne 
{site  —  seu :  neve  ~  neu).  Sive — sive  ;  seu — seu  —  1  eithei — or,’  ‘  whether — or,’ 
when  it  is  to  be  left  doubtful  which  of  two  statements  is  correct,  or  which  of 
two  terms  is  applicable  (the  second  being  an  alias  of  the  first).  Crombia 
observes  that  sive— sive  should  generally  be  used  when  ‘  either  (ox  whether) — or  * 
may  be  turned  into  ‘  be  it — or  be  it .’ 


ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION. 


163 


§58.  460-462 


•  (6)  In  the  second  way,  the  substance  of  what  he  said  is  given  in  the 
third  person.  “  Caesar  said,  that  he  was  of  opinion,” — and  so  on.  This 
second  wray,  in  which  the  speech  of  another  is  reported  in  the  third  per¬ 
son,  is  called  oblique  or  indirect  narration. 

*  460.  ( a )  In  oblique  narration,  the  principal  verb  or  verbs  will 

be  of  the  infinitive  mood. 

*  (b)  All  the  subordinate  clauses  that  express  the  original 
speaker’s  words  or  opinions  will  have  their  verbs  in 
the  subjunctive  mood. 

*  fCr  Hence  conjunctions  and  adverbs  that  go  with  the  indicative  in  direct 

narration,  go  with  the  subjunctive  in  indirect  or  oblique  narration. b 
(Thus  in  the  example  (453,  a),  ‘  Si  quid  habet  dat,'  becomes,  when  re¬ 
ported,  ‘  Dicebant  Caium,  si  quid  haberet ,  dare.’) 

•y(c)  When  a  speech  is  reported  in  oblique  narration ,  (1)  the 
verb  or  participle  on  which  the  infinitive  depends 
is  often  omitted  :  (2)  questions  for  an  answer  are 
asked  in  the  subjunctive  :  questions  of  appeal  gene¬ 
rally* *  in  the  infinitive  (with  interrogative  pronouns 
and  adverbs)  :  (3)  the  imperative  in  direct  becomes 
the  subjunctive  in  indirect  narration. 

*  461.  (d)  The  subjunctive  being  thus  employed  to  express  the  speech  or  sen¬ 

timent,  not  of  the  speaker  or  writer,  but  of  the  person  about  whom  he  is 
speaking  or  writing,  naturally  came  to  be  used  in  constructions  where 
the  sentiments  of  another  were  less  formally  reported.  Thus  in  the 
fable :  ‘The  vulture  invited  the  little  birds  to  a  party,’  ‘ quod  illis  datu- 
rus  erat’  would  mean  that  he  really  was  going  to  give  them  the  party ; 
but  ‘  quod  illis  daturus  esset  ’  would  only  mean  that  he  said  he  was 
going  to  give  them  a  party.  So  with  the  verbs  of  accusing,  the  charge 
stands  with  quod  in  the  subjunctive ,  because,  the  accusers  asserted  that 
the  crime  had  been  committed :  the  indicative  would  make  the  histo¬ 
rian  or  speaker  assert  the  truth  of  the  charge. 

462.  [ Direct .] 

(a)  ( b )  Quantum  possum,  te  ac  tua  vestigia  sequar,  As 
far  as  I  can,  I  will  follow  you  and  your  footsteps. 


\  b  Obs.  fj*  As  the  subjunctive  has  no  future,  the  future  and  future  perfect  be¬ 
come  the  pres,  and  perfect  of  the  subjunct.  respectively.  Senties — quum  ages: 
sensurum  esse,  quum  agas. — Faciemus,  quum  imperaveris :  facturos  esse,  quaa 
imperaverit  (from  imperaverim).  If  the  speech  is  narrated  in  past  time  (is  intro¬ 
duced,  that  is,  by  a  past  tense)  the  fut.  and  fut.  perf.  will  become  the  impe'f. 
and  pluperf.  in  the  oblique  narration. 

*  Not  quite  always:  thus  Caes.  B.  G.  5,  29.  postremo  quis  hoc  sibi  persua¬ 
der  et?  &c. 


164 


ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION. 


[§  58.  463,  464 


[Oblique.] 

Clamavit  se,  quantum  posset,  eum  atque  ejus  vestigia 
secuturum ,  He  cried  out  that  he,  as  far  as  he  could, 
would  follow  him  and  his  footsteps. 

( c )  (1)  Legatos  ad  Csesarem  mittunt :  “  sese  paratos  esse 
*  portas  aperire,  &c.”  They  send  ambassadors 

to  Ccesar  :  (saying)  that  they  are  ready  to  open 
the  gates,  &c. 

(2)  Interrogabat :  1  cur  paucis  centurionibus  pau¬ 
cioribus  tribunis  .  .  .  obedirent  ?c  Quando 
ausuros  (esse)  exposcere  remedia,  nisi,  &c.  ?  5 
He  asked,  1  why  they  obeyed  a  few  centurions 
and  still  fewer  tribunes  ?  When  ( said  he) 
will  you  dare  to  demand  redress,  if,  &c.  ?  ’ 

13)  (Hirri  necessarii  fidem  Pompeii  implorarunt:) 
prcestaret  quod  proficiscenti  recepisset,  Make 
good  ( said  they )  ivhat  you  promised  him  when 
he  was  setting  out. 

(i d )  Socrates  accusatus  est,  quod  corrumperet  juventutem, 
Socrates  was  accused  of  corrupting  the  young  men. 

463.  Vocabulary  63. 

'  (The  Preposition  Apud  governing  acc.) 

*  (1)  With  =  in  the  house  of,  in  the  mind  or  estimation  of;  amongst: 

«  (2)  In  the  presence  of.4  (3)  lN  =  in  an  author’s  writings:7  (4)  At,  of 
place  (see  457). 

apud  me. 

multum  valere  apud. 
apud  Xenophontem. 

loqui  apud  populum. 


He  was  with  me, 

To  have  great  influence  with, 
Cyrus  in  Xenophon , 

To  speak  in  the  presence  of  the 
people, 

Yesterday, 

To-morrow, 


heri. 

eras. 


Exercise  67. 

464.  Must  we  not  all  die  ?  He  cried  out,  ‘  that  he  was  ready 
to  shed  his  blood  for  his  country;  must  we* *  not  all  die  (he 


c  As  ‘  questions  for  answer  ’  may  be  of  a  very  objurgatory  character,  it  is  often 
indifferent  whether  the  question  be  put  in  the  infin.  or  the  subjund.  Thus  In 
Liv.  vii.  15.  ‘  Ubi  illi  clamores  sint  arma  poscentium?  &c.’  iubi  illos  clamorei 
esse  .  .  .  .’  might  have  stood  equally  well. 

*  ‘  Wej  ‘  you must  be  turned  into  ‘  they.' 


ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION. 


165 


§59.  465-467.] 


asked)  ?  should  not  an  honourable  death  be  preferred  to  a  dis¬ 
graceful  life  ?  ’ — Almost  all  (of  them)  visited  Balbus  ;  ‘  Keep  (said 
they)  your  word  :d  finish  the  business  which  you  undertook  to 
finish.’ — ‘  What  is  this,5 e  said  he,  ‘  O  Tribunes  ?  are  you  going 
to  overthrow  the  state  under  the  guidance  of  Appius7  Herdo¬ 
nius7  ?  ’ — P.  Valerius  came  to  the  Tribunes,  crying  out,  ‘What 
is  this  ?  Are  you  going  to  overthrow  the  state  under  the  guidance 
of  App.  Herdonius'  ?  ’ — He  cried  out,  ‘  that  he  called  the  Quirites 
to  arms  :  that  he  would  dare  against  the  tribunes  what  the  founder 
of  his  family  had  dared  against  the  kings.’ — What  was  I  to  do? 
all  were  crying  out,  that  it  was  all  over  with  the  army.  The 
Roman  people  had  not47  the  same  fortune  at  home  that  (they  had) 
fn  the  field.  My  (friend)  Balbus  has  more  influence  with  me 
than  any  other  person.  Socrates  in  Plato  says  that  the  soul  is 
not  mortal. 


§  59.  Oblique  narration  continued.  (Mood  in  subordinate  clauses. 

Dependence  on  an  infinitive.) 

*  465.  (a,  kn  the  oratio  obliqua ,  even  when  dependent  on  a  past 
tense,  the  present  (and  perfect)  subj.  are  used  when  the  clause 
expresses  a  general  truth ,  independent  of  the  judgment  of  the 
speaker,  and  when  the  reporter  of  the  speech  wishes  to  make  the 
sentiment  his  own.{ 

*•  466.  (b)  Remarks  that  are  really  the  reporter’s  (i.  e.  were  not 
made  by  the  speaker)  are,  of  course,  in  the  indicative.  The 
Indicative  is  also  used  by  the  Historians ,  when  the  writer  wishes 
to  intimate  that  what  is  said  is  really  so,  and  not  merely  so  stated 
by  the  speaker. 

v  467.  (c)  The  subordinate  clauses  inserted  in  propositions  whose 
verbs  are  in  the  infm.  or  subjunctive,  must  have  their  verbs  in  the 


<J  Compare  [462,  c,  (3)] 

*  Quid  hoc  rei  est  2 — This  sentence  is  to  be  in  direct  narration, 
f  “  Potest  quis  aliorum  sententiam  vel  ita  referre,  ut  tota  ex  eorum  etiamnum 
pendeat  mente,  vel  etiam  tanquam  tritam  proponere  atque  usu  confirmatam , 
quamque  ipse  jam  fecerit  suam.  Prior  si  locum  habet  ratio,  imperfectum  con 
junctivi  poni  solet:  si  posterior,  praesens. ”  ( Wagner ,  ap.  Kriiger.) 


ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION. 


1 66 


[§  59.  468,  469. 


subjunctive,  when  they  form  a  'pari  of  the  whole  meaning  of  the 
•proposition,  s 

*’  If  such  a  clause  only  limits  or  describes  a  particular  term  of  the 
proposition,  without  fairly  making  apart  of  it ,  the  verb  will  be  in  the 
indicative. 

*  468.  ( d )  In  sentences  dependent  on  an  infinitive,  the  pres,  or 
perf.  subj.  are  found,  where  the  general  rule  requires  the  imperf. 
or  pluperf. ;  but  not  vice  versa. 

*  In  other  words,  the  pres,  and  perf  subj.  may  stand  (instead  of  the 
imperf.  or  pluperf.)  after  the  perf.  infinitive  ;  and  also  after  the  pres,  or 
fut.  infinitive  when  they  depend  on  a  past  tense. 

469.  (a)  Cicero  dicebat :  tria  esse  omnino  genera  quae  in  dis¬ 
ceptationem  cadere  possint :  quid  fiat,  factum, 
futurum  ve  sit,  Cicero  used  to  say  that  there  were 
only  three  kinds  of  questions  that  could  fall  into 
t  controversy  :  what  was  doing,  what  had  been  done , 
and  what  would  happen. 

( b )  Themistocles  certiorem  eum  fecit,  id  agi  ut  pons, 

quem  ille  in  Hellesponto  fecerat,  dissolveretur, 
Themistocles  sent  him  ivord,  that  it  was  intended  to 
break  down  the  bridge  which  he  had  made  over  the 
Hellespont. 

(c)  Indignum  videbatur  populum  Romanum  ab  iisdem 

Etruscis  obsideri,  quorum  saepe  exercitus  fuderit, 
It  seemed  an  indignity  that  the  Roman  people  should 
be  besieged  by  those  very  Etruscans,  whose  armies 
they  had  often  routed. 

Certum  est  hominum  causa  factum  esse  mundum  quae¬ 
que  in  eo  sint h  omnia,  It  is  certain,  that  the  ivorld 
and  every  thing  in  it  was  made  for  man. 

(d)  With  injin.  pres,  or  fut. 

(1)  Dixit  (he  said);  dicebat;  dixerat;  dicturus  erat, 


f  if,  that  is,  they  form  an  essential  part  of  the  leading  proposition,  being 
included  in  the  object,  the  purpose,  or  the  circumstance  supposed.  (Z.) 

h  ‘  Tantam  rerum  ubertatem  natura  largita  est,  ut  ea,  quae  gignuntur,  donata 
consulto  nobis  videantur.*  Here  ea  quae  gignuntur  are  the  actual  productions  o i 
nature.  (Z.> 


ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION. 


167 


§  59.  470-472.] 


Be  (  intelligere 

(.  intellecturum  esse 


Squid  ageret  (or  agat )  hostis. i 
quid  egisset  (or  egerit)  hostis, 
quid  acturus  esset  (or  acturus  sit)  hostis. 

(2)  And  (after  any  tense  of  dico,  &c.) 

C  quid  ageret  (or  agat)  hostis, 
se  intellexisse  <  quid  egisset  (or  egerit)  hostis. 

quid  acturus  esset  (or  acturus  sit)  hostis. 

470.  Vocabulary  64. 

*  (Prepositions  Erga,  Inter,  Ob,  Per.) 

♦  Erga,  acc. :  Towards  (oi  favorable  dispositions). k 
»  Inter, I  acc. :  Between;  among;  in  the  midst  of,  during. 

On  the  journey,  inter  viam. 

They  love  me  and  each  other,  et  nos  et  inter  se  amant. 

♦  Ob,  accus. ;  on  account  of. 

Before  my  eyes,  ob  oculos. 

»  Per,  acc.  Through  (of  -place,  time ,  and  means).  By  (oi  the  sec¬ 
ondary  agentm  by  whom  we  do  any  thing ;  and  in  adjurations,  in  which 
it  is  separated  from  its  noun  by  pronouns — ‘per  ego  te,’  &c.).  By  the 
leave  of  (digladientur  per  me  licet :  for  any  thing  I  care). 

•  Per  se  =  by  him,  &c.,  alone  (ipse  per  s e),for  its  own  sake  ;  naturally  ; 
of  itself  ,  &c. 

Per  in  permagnus,  pergratus,  &c.,  is  often  separated  from  the  adjec- 
tive  ;  ‘  per  mihi  ....  gratum  feceris.’ 

471.  (a)  (Eng.)  To  make  a  bridge  over  a  river  (See  Ex.  469  (b) ). 

♦  ( Lat .)  To  make  a  bridge  in  a  river. 

(b)  (Eng.)  The  town  in  question. 

*  (Lat.)  The  town  de  quo  agitur. 


Exercise  68. 


[Translate  the  clauses  marked  thus  (t)  both  as  the  speaker's ,  and  as  the 

narrator’ s.] 

472.  Catilina  informs  (them)  that  he  had  sent  forward  Man¬ 
lius  to  the  great  body  of  men"  f  whom  he  had  prepared  to  take 
arms.72  They  warn  them  to  depart  from  all  the  islands]-  which 


*  i  Kruger :  who  observes,  that  the  use  of  the  present,  &c.  may  often  be  explained 
by  the  purpose  of  the  writer,  to  intimate  that  what  is  said,  still  and  generally 
holds  good:  and  that  sometimes  there  may  be  what  Hermann  calls  a  1  mutatio 
incertarum  sententiarum  in  certas ;’  but  that  in  many  other  passages  no  reason 
can  be  discovered  for  the  employment  of  the  pres,  and  perf  rather  than  the  im- 
perf.  and  pluperf. 

k  Rarely  of  hostile  dispositions.  (Z.) 

•  Inter  sometimes  stands  between  two  substantives:  ‘Fsesulas  inter  A rre- 
tiumque.’ 

m  For  instance,  to  send  a  letter  ‘  by  a  slave’  (per  servum). 

•  Ad  eam  multitudinem. 


168 


ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION. 


[§  59.  473,  474. 


are  between  Italy  ( Italia )  and  Africa.  He  had  contracted  to 
build75  a  bridge  over  the  river0  Danube  ( Ister ,  tri,  p.  14,  9,  a). 
He  answered,  that  custom,  f  which  is  a  second  nature,  was  on 
our  side.  Let  them  go  away  for  any  thing  I  care.  He  answered 
that  he  feared  the  waves,  f  which  were  such  as  he  had  never  seen 
before.  He  answered  that  you,  j*  such  is  your  temperance, p  were 
already  well.  He  said  that  he  was  the  first  who8  accomplished 
that  journey.  They  cry  out,  1  Why  are  these  (questions)  asked  ? 
(460,  c.)  who  is  so  powerful  as  to  be  able  to  perform  all  he 
wishes  ?  ’  (68,  d.) 


*  473.  (a)  The  acc.  and  injin.  with  ne  in  the  oblique  narration 
resembles,  but  must  be  distinguished  from,  its  use 
to  express  emotion  in  direct  narration. q 
(a)  Adeone  hominem  infelicem  esse  quemquam,  ut  ego 
sum  !  That  any  man  living  should  be  so  unfortu¬ 
nate  as  I  am  ! 

Exercise  69. 

[In  what  mood  are  questions  qf  appeal  asked  in  oblique  narration  7  460,  c.J 
474.  That  you  should  be  able  {inf.  pres.)  to  bear  this  !  That 
you  should  say  this !  He  said  that  we  ought  not  to  learn  many 
things,  but  much.  They  cried  out,  £  Could  any  man  bear  this  ? 
Would  she  never  see  them  without  calling  them  betrayers  of 
their  country  (88,  c)  ?  Let  her  learn  (they  said)  to  govern  her 
tongue.’ — I  fear  that  nobody  will  prefer  a  capital  charge  against 
him .  They  say  that  Caius  has  been  accused  of  bribery  ;  which 
(36,  b)  I  shall  not  easily  be  induced  to  believe. r  He  says  that 


0  ‘Rivus’  brook;  ‘fluvius’  river;  ‘amnis’  abroad,  deep  river.  ‘Flumen* 
(properly  the  ‘ stream ,’  flu-imen)  is  also  used  as  a  general  term  for  ‘ river'  (being 
used  here  of  the  Danube ) ;  especially  when  there  is  reference  to  its  stream. 

p  In  a  sentence  of  this  kind,  consider  whether  the  reporter  of  the  answer 
should  be  represented  as  making  it  his  own;  if  so,  the  subj.  present  shoul. 
used  by  465  (a). 

q  For  which  ul  with  the  subj.  is  also  found  :  Tene  ut  ulla  res  Jrdngat 7 — 
Tibi  ego  ut  adverser  ?  '  1 

*  Obs.  Credo ,  which  takes  a  dat.  of  the  person  believed,  takes  an  acc.  of  the 


QU1  WITH  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


169 


§  60.  475-477.] 

he  has  not  received  the  letters  which  I  sent  him  (32,  c).  Who 
will  deny  that  it  is  the  duty  of  a  Christian  to  keep  his  word  1 
Who  will  deny  that  it  is  wise39  to  have  death  always  before  one’s 
eyes  ?  They  replied,  that  they  sent  the  letter  by  a  slave.  They 
answer,  that  the  town  in  question  is  two  hundred  (Roman)  miles 
from  Rome.  I  had  perished,  if  y ou  had  not  succoured  me. 


XXIII. 

§  60.  ‘  Qui  ’  with  Subjunctive. 

%  475.  ‘  Qui  '  takes  the  indicative,  only  when  it  refers  to  a  'particular  object  in 

the  most  clear  and  direct  way ;  when  there  is  no  vagueness  or  indefinite¬ 
ness  whatever  in  the  reference. 

But  when  its  reference  is  at  all  vague  or  indefinite,  it  governs  the 
subjunctive. 

476.  %  Qui  therefore  governs  the  subjunctive  whenever  the  object  described 
by  the  relative  could  not,  as  it  were,  be  seen  and  touched.  Whenever  it 
does  not  describe  an  individual  object ,  but  only  refers  it  (or  them)  to  a 
particular  class  by  a  mark  common  to  all  the  class,  it  governs  the  subjunc¬ 
tive.  When  therefore  for  (who,'  1  which,'  we  might  substitute  'of  such 
a  kind  as  to,’  ‘  such  that,'  &c.,  qui  governs  the  subjunctive. 

*  (a)  Qui  with  the  indicative  may  refer  an  object  to  a  class,  but 
it  then  describes  it  (or  them)  in  the  most  definite  way.  ‘  Qui  non 
defendit  amicum,  quum  potest.’  1  A  man  who  actually  does  not 
defend  his  friend  when  he  can.’ 

*477.  Vocabulary  65. 

\  (Phrases  after  which  qui  is  generally  indefinite ,  and  therefore  takes 
the  subjunctive.) 

Some  men  ;  or  there  are  some  who,  sunt  qui. 

There  are  not  wanting  men  who,  non  desunt  qui. 

*  (Negatives  and  virtually  negatives.) 

Who  is  there  7  quis  est  7 

How  few  there  are  7  quotusquisque  est  7 

Quotusquisque  est  is  used  interrogatively  and  in  the  singular ;  i.  e., 
how  many  does  each  man  who  belongs  to  the  class  make  7  Quotus 
est 7  being  ‘how  many  does  he  make 7’  So,  too,  nemo;  nihil  est;  an 
Hf>.  ullus,  fro¬ 


thing  u dieted:  and  though  am  believed'  is  ‘ mihi  creditur,'  it  must  be  ‘ ego 
credor '  (tu  crederis,  &c.)  when  an  infin.  immediately  follows  (/  am  believed  to 

•  Vote  done  this). 


8 


170 


QUI  WITH  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


[§  60.  478,  470 


(Reperio,  invenio,  habeo.) 

There  are  found  persons  who,  reperiuntur,  inveniuntur,  qui.» 
You  may  find,  reperias,  invenias  qui,  Ac. 


(Nihil  est  quod,  Ac. 


We  have  reason  to  rejoice, 


Nihil  habeo  quod,  Ac.) 

'  est  quod  gaudeamus  =  ‘  there  is  some¬ 
thing  of  such  a  kind  that  we  should 
rejoice  on  account  of  it.’  !  Quod ’  as 
an  acc.  neut.  pron.  (195,  f.)  going 
with  gaudeo. 


What  is  there  that  you  can  com-  j  w  eB,  d  5ri  possis  , 
plain  of  7  > 

We  have  no  reason  to  desire,  non  est  quod  desideremus. 

You  have  no  reason  to  hurry,  nihil  est  quod  festines. 

478.  (a)  {Eng.)  I  have  nothing  to  accuse  old  age  of. 

{Lat.)  I  have  nothing  which  I  may  accuse  old  age  (quod  incusem 
senectutem). 

(6)  {Eng.)  A  pen  to  write  with. 

{Lat.)  A  pen  with  which  one  may  write. 

(c)  {Eng.)  Men  who  abound  in  silver,  in  gold  (and),  in  estates. 

{Lat.)  Men  who  abound  in  silver,  who  in  gold,  who  in  estates. 

(c?)  {Eng.)  Men  who  abound  neither  in  silver,  nor  gold,  nor  estates. 
{Lat.)  Men  who  do  not  abound  in  silver,  not  in  gold,  not  in  estates. 


479.  Vocabulary  66. 

To  drive  away, 
t  Stick, 

«  Bird, 

*  Put;  lay  down,  or  aside, 
To  cross  over, 

To  allow  it  to  happen, 


abigere,  eg,  act. 

#  bacillum, t  i,  n. 

*  avis,u  is,  f. 

,  ponere, v  pbsu,  pbslt. 
trajicere,  jec,  ject. 
commiitere  (ut,  with  subj.). 


•  Obs.  With  sum,  reperio,  habeo ,  Ac.,  qui  with  the  indicative  is  found,  when 
it  expresses  particular  objects  in  the  most  definite  way.  This  is  naturally 
oftener  the  case  when  qui  relates  to  the  subject ,  which  is  mostly  a  particular 
object  (or  objects),  than  when  it  relates  to  the  predicate ,  which  is  generally  some 
class  in  which  the  subject  is  contained.  Tum  primum  reperta  sunt,  quae  per 
tot  annos  rempublicam  exedere :  not  ‘  there  were  found  evils  which  preyed  on^ 
Ac.’  but  ‘  the  evils  which  have  actually  preyed  on  the  state  for  so  many  years, 
were  then  found  for  the  first  timed 
u  t  A  diminutive  of  baculum. 

n  Volucres  are  all  ‘  xcinged  creatures ,’  insects  included.  Avis  is  the  general 
name  for  ‘  bird  :5  ‘  ales  ’  is  the  word  in  poetry  and  the  language  of  the  augurs  for 
the  larger  birds,  especially  the  eagle.  In  augury,  alites  were  the  birds  whoso 
flight,  oscines  the  birds  whose  song  or  cry,  was  prophetic.  (D.) 

*  * Ponere  aliquid,  ‘  to  lay  down ’  a  thing;  ‘  to  get  it  out  of  our  hands ‘to  get 

rid  of  it.’  Locare  and  collocare  are  ‘  to  put  a  thing  in  its  right  place ‘  to  place* 
advisedly  for  some  purpose. 


QUI  WITH  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


171 


§61.  480,  481. J 

To  be  on  the  point  of, 
Jewel, 

Unburied, 


ineo  esbe  (ut,  with  subj.). 
gemma,  ae,  f. 
inhumatus,  a,  urn. 

Exercise  70. 


480.  Diogenes  ordered  himself  to  be  cast  forth  unburied. 
Thenw  his  friend  said :  ‘  To  the  birds  and  beasts  ? 5  ‘  By  no 

means,’  said  he,  ‘  but  putx  a  stick  by  me,  to  drive  them  away 
with  (478).’ — There  are  some  icho  think  that  Caius  is  pretending. 
There  were  some  who  thought  that  Caius  was  pretending.  There 
are  not  wanting  persons,  who  deny  that  the  rule  of  expediency  is 
the  same  as  that  of  honour.  There  are  found  some,  who  say 
that  we  should  not  cultivate  virtue.  It  is  incredible  how  weary 
I  am  of  life.  We  must  cross  over  that  sea  which  (48)  you  call 
ocean.  There  are  some  who  think,  that  the  best  thing  we  have 
(53)  will  be  lost.  They  cry  out,  that  we  shall  lose  the  best  thing 
we  have.  We  have  no  reason  to  hurry.  I  have  nothing  to 
accuse  you  of  (478).  You  have  reason  to  rejoice,  that  you  have 
concealed  these  things  from  your  father.  You  will  scarcely  find 
any  one  to  believe  this.  He  was  on  the  point  of  being  killed. 
Had  you  rather  be  like  one?  (212,  x)  of  these  persons  who  abound 
in  gold,  in  silver,  in  jewels,  or  (like)  C.  Fabricius,  who  had  none 
{nihil)  of  those  things  ?  How  few  there  are,  who  have  death 
always  before  their  eyes ! 


§  61.  ‘Qui’  with  the  subjunctive  continued. 

%  481.  Qui  takes  the  subjunctive,  when  it  introduces  the  ground 

of  the  assertion  in  the  antecedent  clause. 

(a)  Here  there  is  some  difficulty  in  determining  whether  qui  is  used 


i  —at  that  time ,  turn. 

* *  *  Then  =  after  that,  inde,  deinde. 

(  —therefore,  igitur,  itaque. 

*  Ponitote.  The  forms  of  the  imperative  in  to,  tote,  nto,  are  used  in  solemn 
commands  and  prohibitions,  such  as  laws,  wills,  &c. 

y  [C.  xxxiv.]  ‘  One’  often  means  lsome  one>  (aliquis),  or  ‘ a  certain  one 

(quidam). 


173  QUI  WITH  SUBJUNCTIVE.  [§  61.  492-485. 

definitely  or  not. *  lHe  was  laughed  at  by  all  the  rest,  who  did  not  ac¬ 
knowledge  these  faults  to  belong  to  Socrates;’  this  seems  definita 
enough,  but  it  is  in  the  Latin,  ‘  qui  non  agnoscerent.’ 

*  (/?)  When  therefore  for  ‘  who ’  may  be  substituted  ‘for  he  (she,  it,  &c.z) 
the  verb  should  be  the  subjunctive. 

*  482.  For  qui  alone,  utpote  qui,  quippe  quip  m  qui  are  also  used, 
generally  with  the  subjunctive. 

9  483.  Qui  takes  the  subjunctive,  when  it  has  the  force  of  ut  with 
a  personal  or  possessive  pronoun. b 

*  It  has  this  force  after  (1)  dignus,  indignus,  idoneus,  &c. 

(2)  tam,  talis,  ejusmodi,  is  (such),  &c. 

(3)  comparatives  with  quam. 

(4)  is  sumc  ( =  talis  sum),  ‘7  am  a  man  too.' 

(5)  quis  sum  ? 

(6)  when  it  expresses  a  ‘purpose. 

(a)  When  qui  =  ut  is,  and  introduces  a  consequence,  the  perf.  subj.  may 
be  used  for  the  imperfect  by  418.  Zeno  nullo  modo  is  erat,  qui,  ut 
Theophrastus,  nervos  virtutis  inciderit.  Cic.  Acad.  i.  10,  35.  [al. 
incideret .] 

*  484.  Qui  governs  the  subjunctive,  when  we  may  substitute  for 
it,  ‘  although,’  i  since,’  ‘  because,’  ‘  seeing  that,’  &c.  with  a  personal 
pronoun. 

-*  (a)  Qui  takes  the  subjunctive  after  unus  and  solus,  signifying 
‘  alone,’  lonly.’ 

*  485.  Qui,  in  narrative,  is  followed  by  the  subj.  of  the  imperfect 
and  pluperfect,  to  express  a  repeated  action  taking  place  in  past 
time.A 

The  relative  adverbs  (ubi,  qua,  &c.)  govern  the  subjunctive  of  these 
tenses  in  the  same  way ;  and  as  far  as  they  can  be  substituted  for  the 
relative,  they  follow  the  rules  above  given. 


1  This  of  course  will  not  apply  to  the  use  of  qui  to  introduce  a  new  sentence 
where  we  use  lfor  he,'  &c. 

»  a  Utpote  qui,  quippe  qui  =  ‘ in asmuch  as  they;’  ‘ for  they.’  Grotefend  re¬ 
marks  that  utpote ,  quippe  may  generally  be  translated  by  ‘  namely,'  ‘ that  is.' 
Our  ‘ as  being'  will  often  give  the  force  of  them  still  better:  they  often  stand 
before  attributives  only.  ‘  (Democrito)  quippe  homini  erudito,  &c.’ 

%  b  Thus  qui  —  ut  ego ,  ut  tu,  ut  ille;  ut  nos,  ut  vos,  ut  illi;  through  all  their 
cases.  So,  cujus  —  ut  meus,  tuus,  &c.  :  quorum  —  ut  noster,  vester,  &c. 

I  °  But  ‘ut'  is  sometimes  used  after  ‘is  es,'  &c.  ‘Neque  enim  is  es,  Catilina, 
ut  te  . .  .  .  ratio  a  furore  revocarit.’  (Cic.  Cat.  i.  9,  22.)  Te  is  here  emphatic. 

*  d  Examples  of  qui  and  relative  adverbs  used  of  repeated  actions  are :  ‘  Nec 
quisquam  Pyrrhum,  qua  tulisset  impetum,  sustinere  valuit.’  ‘  Semper  habiti 
«unt  fortissimi,  qui  surpmam  imperii  potirentur.'  (Z.) 


QUI  WITH  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


173 


§61.  486.] 


( Lat .)  He  is  not  a  proper  person 


486.  The  kind  of  sentences  in  which  the  relative  may  be  thus 
introduced  in  Latin,  will  be  best  learned  by  examples. 

(a)  (Eng.)  He  was  despised  by  them,  for  they  saw  through  him. 

r  He  was  despised  by  them,  who  saw  through  him  (subj.). 
(Lat.)  <  He  was  despised  by  them,  as-being  who  saw  through  him 
t  (subj.). 

(b)  (Eng.)  He  deserves  (or,  does  not  deserve)  to  be  loved. 

(Lat.)  He  is  worthy,  (or,  unworthy)  j  who  should  be  lmed" 

C  whom  you  should  love. 

(c)  (Eng.)  He  is  not  a  proper  person  to  be  received. 

who  should  be  received, 
whom  you,  should  receive. 

(d)  (Eng.)  None  are  so  good  as  never  to  sin. 

(Lat.)  None  are  so  good,  who  never  sin  (subj.). 

(e)  (Eng.)  None  are  so  great,  as  to  be  independent. 

(Lat.)  None  are  so  great,  who  are  independent  (subj.). 

(f)  (Eng.)  Of  such  a  kind  (or,  such)  that  we  can  neglect  duties  for  their 
sake. 

(Lat.)  Of  such  a  kind,  for  the  sake  of  which  we  can  neglect  duties, 

(g)  (Eng.)  Too  short  to  be  the  whole  life  of  man. 

(Lat.)  Shorter  than  which  can  be  f  the  whole  life  of  man. 

(h)  (En°- )  $  Benefits  greater  than  I  can  requite. 

°  (  Benefits  too  great  to  be  requited. 

(Lat.)  Benefits  greater  than  which ?  I  can  requite, 
r  I  am  not  a  man  to  believe  this. 

(i)  (Eng.)  <  I  am  not  so  foolish ,  simple,  &c.,  as  to  believe  this. 

(  I  am  not  one  who  believe  h  this. 

(Lat.)  I  am  not  he  (is)  who  would  believe  (qui  putem). 

(j)  (Eng.)  Who  am  I,  that  my  writings  should  be  honoured  thus  1 
(Lat.)  Who  am  I,  whose  writings  should  be  honoured  thus  7 

(k)  (Eng.)  They  sent  ambassadors,  to  sue  for  peace. 

(Lat.)  They  sent  ambassadors,  who  should  sue  for  peace. 

(l)  (Eng.)  He  deserves  praise  (or  blame)  for  having  done  this. 

(Lat.)  He  deserves  praise  (or  blame)  who  did  this  (subj.). 

(m)  (Eng.)  Wretched  man  that  I  i  am,  who  thought,  &c. 

(Lat.)  0  me  miserable,  who  thought,  &c.  (qui  with  «* *£;'.). 


e  Dignus  (or  indignus)  qui  ametur. 

f  Quam  quae  sit,  or  possit  esse.  (See  Difference  of  Idiom  94.1 
s  Q,uam  quibus  gratiam  referre  possim. 

*  h  Obs.  The  verb  after  qui  takes  the  person  of  ego ,  tu ,  &c.,  not  of  ‘  is'  or  man, 
verson. 

*  ‘  I  am  not  one  who  much  or  oft  delight 

To  season  my  fireside  with  personal  talk,’  &c. 

( Wordsworth.) 

•  i  ‘O  me  miserum  !’  or  ‘me  miserum  !’  The  interjections  O,  heu,  prohl  take 
the  acc. ;  hei  and  vee  the  dative ;  en  and  ecce  the  nom.  or  the  acc.  (the  latter 


174 


QUIJBI  WITH  INDICATIVE. 


[§  62.  487,48^ 


Exercise  71. 

[Translate  ‘  I  am  not  one  who  think.'* 1  486.  t\] 

487.  We  must  take  care  to  use  such  (is)  a  liberality  as  (qui) 
may  be  of  service  to  our  friends,  (and)  hurt  nobody.  There  is 
no  doubt,  that  the  Gauls  are  too  brave  to  be  conquered  (486,  g) 
in  one  battle.  Those  eternal  fires,  which  (48)  we  call  stars,  are 
too  many  to  be  numbered.  He  is  a  proper  person  to  be  received 
(486,  c)  into  your  friendship.  Nothing  is  so  valuable, k  that  we 
should  barter  for  it  our  faith  and  our  liberty.  No  one  can  be 
so  great,  as  (483,  (2)  )  never  to  require  the  services  of  his  friends. 
The  benefits,  of  which31  you  have  conferred  upon  me  very  many, 
are  greater  than  I  can  repay  (486,  h).  I  am  not  pne  who  think 
that  this  world  and  every  thing  that  is  in  it,  was  made  by  chance. 
There  are  some  who  believe,  that  this  most  beautiful  world  and 
all  that  is  in  it,  was  made  by  some  chance  or  other.  Who  am  I, 
that  all  men  should  consult  my  interest  (486,  j)  ?  Who  will  deny, 
that  this  life  is  too  short  to  he  the  whole  life  of  man  ?  You  are 
the  only  person  (484,  a)  on  whom  the  safety  of  the  state  depends. 
p  If  Cato  had  died,  Cicero  would  have  been  the  only  person  on 
whom  the  safety  of  the  state  depended.  I  am  not  so  simple  (486,  z) 
as  to  deny  this. 


XXIY. 

§  62.  Quum  with  the  Indicative. 

»  488.  Since  quum  with  the  indicative i  is  far  less  common  than 
with  the  subjunctive,  it  is  important  to  get  a  clear  notion  when  it 
should  take  the  indicative. 


chiefly  in  Comedy.  Z.)  The  acc.  of  personal  pronouns  may  stand  in  the  qcc. 
without  the  interjection ,  and  even  other  words  are  so  used. 

k  Tanti,  .  .  .  quo  vendamus  =  ut  eo  vendamus. 

i  When  9mm,  antequam ,  priusquam ,  &c.,  take  the  indicative ,  either  (1)  the  oc¬ 
currence  is  connected  with  a  state  that  presents  itself  vividly  to  the  speaker's 
recollection ,  or  with  a  fixed  and  definitely  marked  point  of  time:  or  (2)  it  falls 
without  preparation  or  notice  into  the  middle  of  another  action  (which  is  sus¬ 
pended  or  broken  off  by  it),  and  thus  is  naturally  described  in  an  unconnected 
and  abrupt  manner.  (Hartung  Partikellehre,  ii.  335.) 


175 


§  62.  489,  490.]  quum  with  indicative. 

*  ( a )  Quum  takes  the  indicative  when  it  simply  marks  the  time , 
without  carrying  with  it  any  notion  of  a  cause  or  occasion . 

>  ‘  When  ’  marks  the  time  in  this  definite  way,  and  is  to  be  translated 
by  quum  with  the  indicative ,  when  ‘  i/icn  ’  might  be  substituted  for  it. 

‘  It  was  night  when  he  left  the  room,’  =s  ‘it  was  night :  then  he  left 
the  room. 

%  (b)  Quum  takes  the  indicative  when,  though  it  does  introduce  a 
cause  or  occasion  of  what  is  stated  in  the  principal  sentence,  it 
nevertheless  describes  the  time  in  a  very  marked  manner,  refer¬ 
ring  to  turn ,  nunc,  &c.,  or  some  noun  of  time  expressed  or  under¬ 
stood  in  the  principal  clause. 

*  (c)  Quum  takes  the  indicative,  when  what  is  said  in  the  prin¬ 
cipal  clause  is  not  only  contemporaneous  with  the  action  expressed 
in  the  quum  clause,  but  is  actually  included  in  it. 

•  When  a  ‘  when  ’  clause  stands  in  this  kind  of  close  relation  to  its 
principal  clause,  the  participial  substantive  under  the  government  of  ‘in’ 
may  generally  be  substituted  for  it. 

‘  When  you  censure  them,  you  censure  me.’ 

‘  In  censuring  them,  you  censure  me.’ 

*  ( d )  There  are  two  less  common  meanings  in  which  quum  goes 
with  the  indicative : 

*  (i)  When  it  means  ‘  since  ’  of  time."1 

*  (2)  When  it  is  equivalent  to  quod,  after  gaudeo,  gratulor ,  &c. 

%  489,  The  meanings  in  which  ^  quum'  always  takes  the  subjunctive,  are 
since,  inasmuch ,  as,  although ,  whereas. *  *  In  the  sense  of  ‘  when  ’  it  takes 
the  subjunctive,  when  the  statement  introduced  by  ‘  when ’  is  also  the 
cause  or  occasion  of  what  is  asserted  in  the  principal  clause. 

•  With  the  imperf.  and  pluperf.  quum  generally  takes  the  subjunctive, 
though  the, notion  of  a  cause,  or  even  of  an  occasion ,  is  hardly,  if  at  all, 
perceptible.  ‘Quum  Agesilaus  reverteretur ...  decessit.’*  (Com. 
Nep.  I.  8,  6.) 

490.  (  a)  Jam  ver  appetebat,  quum  Hannibal  ex  hibernis  movit, 
The  spring  was  already  drawing  on  when  Hannibal 
moved  from  his  winter  quarters, 
h)  Ager  quum  multos  annos  quievit,  uberiores  efferre 
fructus  solet,  Afield,  when  it  has  lain  fallow  many 
years,  generally  produces  more  abundant  crops. 


M  Ex  eo  tempore  quo.  Obs.  That  the  pres,  is  used.  (See  490,  d.) 

*  Or  quum  with  the  indie,  of  imperf.  and  pluperf. 


176 


QUUM  WITH  INDICATIVE. 


[§  62.  491,  492, 


(c)  Quum  in  portum  dico ,  in  urbem  dico,  When  I  say 

into  the  port,  I  say  into  the  city.  (In  saying  into 
the  port,  I  say,  &c.) 

( d )  Nondum  centum  et  decem  anni  sunt,  quum  de  pecu¬ 

niis  repetundis  a  L.  Pisone  lata  lex  est,  It  is  not 
yet  a  hundred  and  ten  years  since  the  law  about  ex¬ 
tortion  was  carried  by  L.  Piso. 

Gratulor,  quum  tantum  vales  apud  Dolabellum,  I  con¬ 
gratulate  you  on  your  influence  with  Dolabella. 

491.  (a)  ( Eng .)  In  attacking  one ,  you  attack  all. 

*  ( Lat .)  When  you  attack  one,  you  attack  all  ( qnum  with  indie.). 

(b)  (Eng.)  It  is  many  years  since  he  was  first  in  my  debt.1» 

♦  (Lat.)  There  are  many  years,  when  he  is  in  my  debt. 

(c)  (Eng.)  I  congratulate  you  on  your  influence  with  Caius. 

(Lat.)  I  congratulate  you,  when  you  avail  so  much  with  (apud)  Caius 

(d)  (Eng.)  I  do  not  like  to  be  abused. 

*  (Lat.)  I  am  not  abused  willingly  (libenter). 

492.  Vocabulary  67. 

*  This  being  so  ;  this  being  the  case,  quae  quum  ita  sint. 

Jquum  (to  denote  the  ground  on  which  a 
judgment  is  formed);  quoniam  = 
quum,  jam  (used  when  the  ground  i? 
an  acknowledged  fact0). 

C  Non  quod — sed  :  non  quodP  (with  sub- 
(  junct.). 

»  male  audire  (‘  to  hear  ill  ’). 

( quia;  quod  (with  indie.,  except  where 
I  the  subjunc.  is  required  for  some  other 
*  «!  reason. — Quia  introduces  a  strict  cause 

of  the  effect :  quod  the  conceived  cause 
or  ground  of  an  action). 
nullus  dubito. ^ 
quam  nullus, 
gratulari,  gratulatus. 


*  Since, 

Not  that — but, 

To  be  spoken  ill  of, 

*  Because, 

I  don’t  at  all  doubt, 
How  insignificant, 
To  congratulate, 


n  Multi  sunt  anni  quum  ille  in  cere  meo  est. 

0  Quando  is  sometimes  used  in  this  sense ;  and  also  quum.  ‘  Itaque,  quando 
vestrae  cautiones  infirmae  sunt  Graeculam  tibi  misi  cautionem.’  (C.  Fam.  vii. 
18.)  ‘Tu  quum  instituisti ,  ....  scribe  ad  me.’  (C.  Fam.  vii.  32.)— Ut  has 
sometimes  the  meaning  of  though:  lut  desint  vires,  tamen  est  laudanda 
voluntas.’ 

p  For  non  quod,  we  often  find  non  co  or  ideo  quod:  but  also  non  quo:  all  with 
subj.  ‘  Not  as  if  not  ’  is  1  non  quin.' 

q  This  expression  belongs  to  the  language  of  common  conversation,  ii3t 
books. 


QUUM  WITH  INDICATIVE. 


177 


§62.  493,  494. J 

t  To  take  \  sumere,  sumps,  sumpt.;  capere,  io,'  cep 

(  capt. 

*  To  take  hold  of,  prehendere,  prehend,  prehens. 

To  do  well,  praeclare  facere. 

*  fGr  The  subject  of  congratulation  stands  in  the  acc.  or  in  the  abl.  witl 
de  or  in;  or  in  the  indie,  with  quod ,  for  which  quum  is  sometimes  used 
(See  491,  c.) 

Exercise  72. 

[With  what  mood  may  interrogatives  be  used  in  oblique  appeals?  (460,  c)] 

493.  This  being  the  case,  I  am  unwilling  to  leave  the  city. 
Caesar,  when  he  had  conquered  the  Gauls  (=  having  conquered 
the  Gauls),  returned  to  Rome.  We  know  how  insignificant  the 
strength  of  men  is.  Who,  when  he  sees  this  (=  seeing ,  or  on 
seeing  this),  would  not  make  merry  (perf.  subj.)  with  you  ? 
Phocion  was  constantly  poor,  though  he  might  have  been  very 
rich.  Is  it  not  several  years  since  Caius  was  (first)  in  your  debt  ? 
Is  there  any  man  who  can  be  compared  with  Balbus  ?  You  do 
well  in  loving  the  boy  (491,  a).  When  I  assert  the  one,  I  deny 
the  other.  He  says  that,  if  I  had  conquered  the  Gauls,  he  should 
have  congratulated  me  on  my  victory.  I  congratulate  you  on 
your  having  recovered  ( that  you  have  recovered).  Does  any  man 
like  to  be  ill  spoken  of?  I  will  hold  my  tongue,  not  that  I  believe 
the  man,  but  because  it  makes  no  difference  to  me.  They  cried 
out,  ‘  Why  did  he  advise  this  ?  might  they  depart  a  fnger’s 
breadth  from  the  rule  of  honour  ?  ’  They  asked,  1  Was  not  Caius 
nearer  Rome  than  Labienus  ?  5  (question  for  information).  They 
answer  that  we  ought  to  consult  the  interests  of  those  with  whom 
we  have  to  live. 27 ) 

494.  Vocabulary  68. 

(Conjunctions  that  go  with  subjund.  only.) 

S  quasi  =  quam  si  (relating  to  manner ), 
tanquams  =  tarn  quam  (relating  to  de- 
gree  ;  ‘just  as  if’). 


•  r  Sumimus  quo  utamur:  capimus  quod  habeamus;  prehendimus  quod  tenea 
mus.  (D.)  Sumere  (to  take  of  my  own  free  xcill  and  choice)  is  generally  spoken 
of  something  that  we  may  appropriate :  capere  ( seize  upon )  often  denotes  the 
taking  what  does  not  belong  to  us.  (H.) 

•  Also  velut  si,  velut,  ac  si  ( and  sometimes  sicut ;  poetically  ceu).  After  tan*  * 
quam,  si  is  often  expressed,  and  may  always  be  understood. 

8* 


178 


QUUM  WITH  INDICATIVE. 


[§  62.  495—497 . 


*  Would  that,  utinam. 

,  O  that !  O  si ! 

r  dummtfdo  (for  which  dum,  modo  are 
.  Provided  only,  *  <  used  separately — ‘  not,'  after  these 

(  words  is  ‘ne  ). 

It  is  nearly  the  same  thing  as  if,  perinde  fere  est  ac  si. 

As  if  forsooth,  quasi  vero. 

%  Perhaps,  *  forsitan  (often  with  perf.  subj.). 

495.  0 With  these  words  the  general  rule  for  the  sequence 
of  tenses  (40)  is  to  be  observed.  The  English  would  mislead  us. 

Pugnat,  quasi  contendat ,  He  fights  as  if  he  contended, 
or  were  contending,  &c. 

Pugnavit,  quasi  contenderet ,  He  fought  as  if  he  had 
been  contending,  &c. 

*  496.**  With  utinam  the  pres,  and  perf.  are  used,  if  the  thing 
wished  is  not  io  be  represented  (whatever  it  may  be)  as  impossible 
to  be  realized.  »  The  imperf.  and  pluperf.  express  wishes  that  are 
(in  the  speaker’s  opinion)  impossible ,  or  unlikely ,  to  be  realized. 
Not  ’  after  utinam  is  regularly  ne,  but  very  often  non. 

Exercise  73. 

(Obs.  In  the  principal  clause  the  ita  or  sic ,<■  to  which  quasi  or  tan - 
quam  refers,  is  often  expressed.) 

497.  They  saluted  Caius7  (just)  as  if  he  had  been  consul'. 
Many,  not  to  say  all,  saluted  Caius,  as  if  he  had  been  consul. 
Would  that  you  were  consul  !  Would  that  I  had  been  engaged 
in  that  battle  !  Would  that  I  had  been  able  to  avoid  suspicion  ! 
Provided  your  word  be  kept,  I  don’t  care  a  straw  for  all  the  rest. 
Provided  you  do  not  break  your  word,  I  don’t  care  this  for  all  the 
rest.  Would  that  the  letter  had  not  been  written  !  Live  with 
men  as  if  the  immortal  gods  saw  you.  (Insert  ‘  sic  ’  in  the  princ. 
clause.)  Speak  with  your  friends,  as  if  all  men  heard  you.  All 
men  are  calling  upon  me,  as  if  forsooth  it  were  my  business  to 
assist  all  men.  Would  that  Varro  himself  would  apply  vigorously 
to  my  cause !  Perhaps  some  one  may  say,  that  these  things  are 
too  small  to  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye  (pi.).  How  few  are 
there,  who  apply- vigorously  to  another  man’s  cause  ! 


^  •  <•  Sic  relates  more  to  something  preceding  and  actually  given :  ita  to  something 
following  and  supposed.  (R.  and  H.) 


$  03.  498-503.]  antequam  and  priusquam. 


179 


XXV. 

§  63.  Antequam  and  Priusquam. 

*  498.  (a)  When  the  principal  verb  is  in  the  present  tense,  the 
verb  in  the  clause  with  antequam  or  priusquam  may  be  in  the 
pres,  indicative  or  subjunctive. 

%  499.  ( b )  When  the  principal  verb  is  in  the  future ,  the  de¬ 
pendent  verb  may  be  in  the  future  perfect ,  or  the  present  sub¬ 
junctive  ;  sometimes  also  it  is  found  in  the  present  indicative. 

%  500.  (c)  When  the  principal  verb  is  in  a  past  tense ,  the  de¬ 
pendent  verb  is  either  in  the  perfect  indicative  or  in  the  imperfect 
subjunctive  in  the  perfect  indicative,  if  there  is  no  closer  con¬ 
nection  between  the  two  occurrences  than  precedence  in  point  of 
time,  what  is  stated  in  the  subordinate  clause  being  stated  as  an 
actual  occurrence  in  the  imperfect  (or,  if  necessary,  the  pluper¬ 
fect)  subjunctive,  when  there  is  a  closer  connection  between  the 
two  occurrences  than  that  of  mere  precedence  in  point  of  time. 

•.  501.  And,  generally,  whenever  there  is  a  closer  connection  be¬ 
tween  the  two  clauses  than  that  of  mere  priority  (whenever,  for 
instance,  it  is  stated  or  implied  to  be  necessary,  proper,  or  designed 
with  a  view  to  some  purpose ,l  that  the  one  action  or  event  should 
precede  the  other)  ;  and  whenever  the  two  are  contemplated  as 
forming  a  connected  sequence,  the  subjunctive  should  be  used. 

v  502.  Obs.  When  the  stress  is  on  the  before ,  ante  or  prius  stands  in  the  prin¬ 
cipal  clause ;  either  early  in  it  (which  is  their  most  emphatic  position), 
or  just  before  the  quam ,  but  not  forming  one  word  with  it.  When  they 
are  thus  emphatic ,  the  verb  being  in  past  time,  the  perf  indicative  is 
commonly  used  (rather  than  the  imp.  subj.) :  especially  when  a  nega¬ 
tive  accompanies  them  :  non  ante,  nec  ante,  non  prius. 

*  503.  ( a )  Ante  rorat  quam  pluit,  It  drops  before  it  rains. 


t  In  the  following  passage  Livy  uses  the  pres,  where  we  should  rather  have 
expected  the  subj.  ‘  Sed  ante  quam  opprimit  lux  majoraque  hostium  agmina 
obsepiunt  iter  .  .  .  erumpamus’  (xxii.  50).  So  too  in  Virgil:  ‘Sed  mihi  vel 
tellus,  optem,  prius  ima  dehiscat,  |  Ante,  pudor,  quam  te  violo,’  &c.  (jEn.  iv. 
25.)  In  Nep.  iii.  2,  the  imp.  subj.  is  used  where  there  seems  to  be  only  the 
simple  relation  of  precedence  in  point  of  time.  ‘  Aristides  interfuit  pugnae  navali 
apud  Salamina,  quae  facta  est  prius  quam  ille  poena  (exsilii)  liberaretur.' 


180 


ANTEQUAM  AND  PRIUSQUAM.  [§  63.  504-505. 

,  Tempestas  minatur  antequam  surgat,  A  temqwsl 
threatens  before  it  gets  up. 

( b )  Antequam  aliquo  loco  consedero ,  longas  a  me  literas 
non  exspectabis,  Till  I  settle  somewhere ,  you  will 
not  expect  long  letters  from  me. 

'  Antequam  de  republica  dicam ,  exponam  vobis  bre¬ 
viter,  &c. 

•s  Priusquam  respondeo  .  .  .  dicam,  &c.,  (Phil.  ii.  3.) 

Priusquam  conor . proponam,  &c.,  (iii.  de 

„  Orat.  25.) 

(c)  Hasc  omnia  ante  facta  sunt,  quam  Verres  Italiam 
attigit,  All  these  things  were  done  before  Verres 
reached  Italy. 

Ducentis  annis  ante  quam  Romam  caperent,  in  Italiam 
Galli  transcenderunt,  The  Gauls  crossed  over  :nto 
Italy  two  hundred  years  before  they  took  Rome. 

504.  (1)  {Eng  .)  A  mortal  body  must  necessarily  die. 

{Lat.)  It  is  necessary ,  that  a  mortal  body  should  die  (Corpus  mor¬ 
tale  interire  necesse  est ;  or  intereat  necesse  est;  the  subj 
being  governed  by  ut  omitted). 

(2)  {Eng.)  There  is  no  living  pleasantly. 

{Lat.)  It  cannot  be  lived  pleasantly  (jucunde  vivi  non  potest). 

505.  Vocabulary  69. 

(The  Prepositions  Prjeter,  Secundum  ) 

*  Pr jeter,  beside;  beyond,  above  (of  degree);  contrary  to;  besides ;  to 
say  nothing  of,  except,  but. 

Contrary  to  expectation,  praeter  expectationem. 

Contrary  to  your  custom,  praeter  consuetudinem  tuam. 

*  Secundum  {from  sequi),  ‘following.’  Along;  after  (of  time), 
after,  next  to;  according  to;  in  favour  of  (with  verbs  of  judging,  &c.). 

t  He  made  a  decree  in  your  favour,  secundum  te  decrevit. 

Exercise  74. 

[How  are  questions  of  appeal  to  be  translated  in  oblique  narration'!] 

506.  I  will  not  leave  the  city  before  I  have  had  an  interview 
with  Caius  ( b ).  Before  I  set  out,  I  had  an  interview  with  Balbus 
(c).  He  answered  that,  before  he  set  out,  he  had  an  interview 
with  Csesar.  There  is  no  living  pleasantly,  unless  you  live 
(impers.  pass.)  according  to  nature.  Under  the  guidance  of  na¬ 
ture-  there  is  no  going  wrong.  Contrary  to  expectation,  the 


DUM,  DONEC,  QUOAD,  &C. 


181 


§64.  507-511.] 


Praetor  has  made  a  decree  in  favour  of  Caius.  They  exclaim, 
‘Arc  not  hidden  dangers  always  the  most  difficult  to  avoid?’ 
Who  can  deny,  that  the  Praetor  has  made  a  decree  in  your  favour? 
This  being  the  case,  I  have  no  doubt  that  the  Praetor  will  make  a 
decree  in  your  favour.  This  being  the  case,  the  world  must 
necessarily  be  governed  by  some  wise  mind.  Virtue  must  neces¬ 
sarily'  hate  vice.  I  am  not  so  foolish  as  to  deny  (486,  i)  that 
virtue  and  vice  are  contrary  to  each  other.  If  I  had  not  believed 
Caius,  I  should  never  have  put  myself  in  their  power.  Who  is 
there  who  denies  this  ? 


XXVI. 

§  64.  Dum,  Donee,  Quoad,  &c. 

*  507.  (a)  Dum,  donee,  quoad  (=  until,  till)  take  the  indicative 
when  they  merely  mark  the  time  up  to  which  the  action  or  state 
is  to  be  continued. 

>  508.  ( b )  Dum,  donee,  quoad  (=  until,  till)  take  the  subjunctive ; 
when  that  up  to  which  the  action  or  state  is  to  be  continued,  is  to 
be  represented,  not  as  a  fact ,  but  only  as  what  mo.y  possibly  occur  ; 
especially  when  it  is  itself  the  object  pursued. 

%  509.  (c)  Dum,  whilst,  takes  a  present  indicative  even  when  the 
principal  verb  is  in  a  past  tense. 

*  This  arose  from  an  endeavour  to  represent  duration  in  a  vivid  man¬ 
ner.  A  past  tense  is  occasionally  found,  e.  g.  ‘  qui  dum  veritus  est ,  non 
vidit.’  {Cie.  ad.  Att.  i.  16.)  ‘  Q,uae  divina  res  dum  conjiciebatur ,  quae¬ 
sivit,’  &c.  ( Nep .  Hann.  ii.) 

«  510.  Dum,  donee ,  quamdiu,  quoad u  (=  as  long  as)  take  the  indi¬ 
cative. 

511.  (a)  Epaminondas  ferrum  in  corpore  retinuit,  quoad  renun¬ 
tiatum  est  vicisse  Bceotios,  Epaminondas  retained 


•  u  In  the  sense  of  ‘  whilst ,’  1  as  long  as,’  donec  always  denotes  a  space  of  time 
carried  on  to  such  a  termination :  dum  denotes  this,  but  more  with  reference  to 
the  space  itself,  than  to  its  termination.  Quoad  marks  the  continuance  of  the 
time  quite  up  to  the  point  mentioned  :  it  relate#  to  a  demonstrative  expressed  or 
understood  in  the  principal  clause.  When  the  statement  introduced  by  whilst 
to  the  cause  or  occasion  of  what  follows,  dum  should  be  used. 


182 


T,uri.  DONEC,  QUOAD,  &C.  [§  64.  512-514. 


ihe  spear  in  his  body,  till  it  was  reported  to  him  tha\ 
the  Boeotians  had  conquered . 

'.>>  jJ;j [ferant,,  d^jiec  defervescat  ira,  Let  them  put  off  (the 
purpose  of  taking  revenge)  till  their  anger  cools . 
-c)  Rum  Romani  ea  parant  .  .  .  jam  Saguntum  oppugna - 
hatur,  Whilst  the  Romans  were  making  these  prepa¬ 
rations,  Saguntum  was  already  besieged. 

r>i’2.  Tocabulary  70. 


Afte- 

Before, 

As  soon  as, 

When  as  soon  as, 


postquam ;  sometimes  posteaquam. 
antequam 

ut  primum  ;  quum  primum  ;  simul  ac, 
or  atque  :  (with  indie.) 
ubi ;  ut ;  (with  indic.) 


(Adverbs  of  place  with  genit.) 
Where  in  the  world  are  you  1  ubi  terrarum  es  ? 

Where  in  the  world  are  we  1 
To  such  a  height  of  insolence, 

To  what  a  degree  of  madness, 


As  far  as  I  can, 


.  4s  far  as  can  be  done ;  as  far  as 
possible. 

*  To  meet,  < 

To  march  against  the  enemy, 

6  Nearer,  * 


ubi  gentium  surnus  ? 
eo  insolentiae, 
quo  amentiae. 

quoad  ejus  facere  possum  (where  the 
genit,  ‘ejus’  relates  to  tne  preceding 
proposition). 

quoad  ejus  fieri  potest. 


Enough, 


Abundantly, 


obviam  (with  the  dat :  obviam,  from  ob, 
via). 

obviam  ire  hostibus. 

(  prdpius  (with  dat.  o'r  acc.  (see  211)  So 
(■  proxime). 

(Adverbs  of  quantity  with  genit.) 

'  sat,  or  satis, v  of  what  is  really  enough ; 
affatim  of  what  a  given  person  thinks 
or  feels  enough.  Affatim  =  ad  fatim, 
‘  to  satiety fatis  an  old  substantive 
from  the  same  root  as  fatisco,  fatigo, 
and  fastidium.  (D.) 
abunde. 

Abundance  of  timber,  abunde  materiae. 

513.  (Eng.)  In  addition  to  this ,  he  was  blind. 

*  (Lat.)  There  was  added  to  this,  that  he  was  blind  (Huc  accedebat ,  ut 
caecus  esset.  With  a  pres,  tense,  accedit). 

514.  With  the  adverbs  meaning  ‘as  soon  as,’  the  English  pluperfect  should 
be  translated  by  the  perfect.  In  this  sense,  postquam  ‘after*  is  usually 


i 


i 


*  *  Sat  before  polysyllables,  satis  before  dissyllables.  (Baumgarlen  Crusius  ad 

Sueton.) 


QUOD. 


183 


§65.  515,  516.] 

followed  by  the  perfect  indicative.  (See  note8,  page  114.;  When  the 
pluperf  is  used,  the  succeeding  action  is  generally  not  represented  as 
following  the  other  immediately  :  e.  g.  P.  Africanus ,  p  o  s  t  c  aquam  bis 
consul  et  censor  fuerat,  L.  Cottam  in  judicium  vocavit  (Cic.  Div.  in 
Case.  21) :  this  however  is  not  always  the  case :  e.  g.  Nep.  Lysand.  4 
(end) :  p  o  s  t  quamde  suis  rebus — d  ix  era  t) — librum— tradidit.  When 
continued  states  or  repeated  actions  are  described,  the  principal  verb 
being  in  the  imperfect ,  the  imp.  or  pluperf.  is  used.  c  Simulae  se  re¬ 
miserat  ....  reperiebatur .’  (Nep.  Alcib.  1.)  (Z.) 

Exercise  75. 

[How  are  questions  of  appeal  to  be  translated  in  direct  narration!  427,  c.] 
515.  As  long  as  he  was  in  the  city,  I  opposed  his  designs. 
Men,  whilst  they  teach,  learn.  Who  can  deny  that  men  learn 
whilst  they  teach  ?  As  soon  as  the  business  is  finished,90  I  shall 
wait  upon  Caius.  As  soon  as  the  business  was  finished  satisfac 
torily,  he  waited  upon  Caius.  Wait  till  Caius  returns.98  Let  me 
know  where  in  the  world  you  are.  Men  have  now  arrived 
( impers .  pass.)  at  such  a  height  of  madness,  that  p  whilst  all  men 
consult  their  own  interests ,  no  man  provides  for  the  interests  of  his 
country.  It  is  the  part  of  a  wise  man,  as  long  as  he  lives,  to 
prefer  virtue  to  all  things.  In  addition  to  this,  he  was  lame  of  one 
leg.  How  few  are  there  who  provide-for-the-interests  of  their 
country !  He  persuaded  the  Athenians  to  march  against  the 
enemy.  Wait  at  Rome  till  you  recover.  The  business  is  too 
difficult  to  be  finished  by  anyw  body.  It  is  not  every  body  who  can 
finish  suchl0)  a  business  in  a  few  days.  We  learn  many  things 
whilst  we  are  playing.  Have  we  {then)  need  of  some  Greek  master 
to  teach  us1 08  to  play  upon  the  lyre  ?  Let  us  neither  ask  what  is 
disgraceful,  nor  do  it  p  when  we  are  asked. 


XXVII. 

§  65.  Quod. 

%  516.  ‘  That ’  is  expressed  by  ‘quod,’  when  it  introduces  the 
ground  of  a  former  statement,  or  the  explanation  of  a  term  in  a 
former  proposition  ;  especially  when  it  refers  to  a  demonstrative 
pronoun  or  adverb  expressed  or  implied. 

w  Show  the  ambiguity  of  this  sentence  by  translating  it  in  two  ways. 


184 


QUOD.  [§  65.  517-521 


•  Such  pronouns  and  adverbs  are  id,  hoc ,  illud:  to ,  ideo,  idcirco,  prop 
terea,  interea,  ita,  tam,  sic,  (pc. 

»  517.  Verbs  of  the  affections  (rejoice,  grieve ,  wonder ,  &c.,)  are 
followed  by  quod,  or  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive. x 
%  518.  Quod  takes  the  indicative,  except  when  it  introduces  the 
ground  of  another  person’s  judgment  or  conduct ;  when  it  takes 
the  subjunctive  (by  461). 

*  Of  course  it  must  be  followed  by  the  subjunctive  in  oblique  narration : 
and  it  must  be  remembered  that  when  an  acc.  with  infin.  follows  a  verb 
of  saying,  &c.,  the  narration  is  oblique. 

*  519.  The  ground  of  an  accusation  is,  of  course,  in  the  sub¬ 
junctive  (by  461);  so  also  the  reason  for  which  another  person 
praises  or  blames  any  body. 


520.  *  ‘  Quod  ’  with  a  verb  is  often  the  proper  way  of  translating  the  parti¬ 
cipial  substantive  under  the  government  of  a  preposition. 

(1)  (Eng.)  He  accused  him  of  having  betrayed  the  king. 

r  ( Lat . )  He  accused  him,  that  he  had  betrayed  the  king  (quod  with 
subj ). 

(2)  (Eng.)  His  having  spared  the  conquered,  is  a  great  thing. 
t  ( Lat. )  That  he  spared  the  conquered,  is  a  great  thing. 

(or)  That  (or,  this)  that  he  spared  the  conquered,  is  a  great 
thing,  y 

(3)  (Eng.)  He  praised  (or  blamed)  him,  for  having  done  this. 

( Lat. )  He  praised  (or  blamed)  him,  that  he  had  done  this. 

(Quod  with  subj.:  the  indicative  would  intimate  that  the  narrator 
believed  him  to  have  actually  done  it.) 

(4)  (Eng.)  Many  persons  admire  poems  without  understanding  them. 
(Lat. )  Many  persons  admire  poems,  nor  understand  them. 

(neque  intelligunt.) 

(5)  (Eng.)  You  cannot  be  ruined  without  ruining  others. 

( Lat. )  You  cannot  be  ruined  so  as  not  to  ruin  others. 

(ut  non 1  with  subj.) 


521.  Vocabulary  71. 
«.  To  be  praised ;  grieve  for, 


dblerea  dolu,  dolit,  (with  acc.  or  abl. 
with  de). 


*  *  *  Quod,  introducing  the  statement  as  a  fact,  is  naturally  better  suited  to  the 

past  than  to  the  present.  ‘  Gaudeo  quod  scripsisti  ’  is  better  than  ‘  te  scripsisse .* 
(Z.)  |  With  verbs  that  express  an  emotion  ox  feeling  (gaudeo,  doleo,  miror),  the 
acc.  with  inf.  is  the  more  common :  with  those  that  express  the  manifestation 
of  an  emotion  or  feeling  (laudo,  reprehendo,  accuso,  misereor,  gratias  ago,  grat¬ 
ulor,  consolor ),  quod  is  preferred.  (Z.,  8th  ed.) 

,  y  Magnum  est  hoc,  quod  victor  victis  pepercit. 

•  *  Or  ‘  quin  ’  if  the  sentence  is  of  a  negative  character. 

«%  *  Dolere  is  to  feel  vain  or  sorrow;  maerere  is  to  show  it  by  outward  signs  that 


QUOD. 


§65.  522.] 


1H5 


*  Grieve ;  grieve  for, 

*  To  mourn  ;  bewail, 
i  To  be  glad, 

,  To  rejoice, 
Exceedingly, 

To  recruit  oneself, 


mcerere,  moestus  (with  acc.  or  abl.). 
lugere,  lux,  luct 
laetari,  laetatus, 
gaudere, b  gavisus  sum. 
vehementer, 
se  reficere. 

•  (The  Preposition  de.) 

«  De,  concerning ,  about ;  down  from ;  from  (Cicero  has,  audire  de  ali¬ 
quo  :  so  emere,  conducere  de  aliquo) :  of  with  partitives :  by  or  accord¬ 
ing  to,  of  advice  (de  consilio  meo) ;  with  words  of  time  ;  &c. 

In  the  middle  of  the  night,  media  de  nocte. 

By  night,  de  nocte. 

.  Late  at  night,  multa  de  nocte. 

On  purpose,  de  industria. 

«  To  know  a  man  by  face,  de  facie  nosse. 

Unexpectedly,  de  improviso. 


Exercise  76. 

> 

[In  sentences  dependent  on  an  infin.,  what  tenses  are  sometimes  found  instead 
of  the  imp  erf.  and  pluperf.  subj.?  469,  d.~\ 

522.  Know  that  I  do  not  know  the  man  even  by  face.  I  am 
exceedingly  glad  that  you  have  finished  the  business  to  your 
satisfaction.  I  rejoice  that  you  have  obtained  a  triumph  for  a 
victory  over  the  Gauls.  1  shall  wait  at  Rome  till  I  recruit  myself. 
He  answered  that  he  was  going  to  remain  at  Rome  till  he  had 
recruited  himself.  I  will  not  leave  Rome  before  I  have  recruited 
myself.  Caius  praises  the  greatest  poets  without  understanding 
them.  I  had  rather  be  a  good  man  without  seeming  (one),  than 
seem  one  without  being  (so)  [Translate  with  ut].  Would  you 
prefer  being  wise  without  seeming  (so),  or  seeming  wise  without 
being  so  ?  I  did  not  fear  that  any  one  would  grieve  for  the  death 
of  abandoned  citizens.  No  one  ever  grieved  more  for  the  death 


are  involuntary ,  arising  from  an  irresistible  feeling  (and  thus  mcerere  and 
moeror  rise  above  doler e  and  dolor) lugere  is  to  show  it  by  conventional  signs; 
to  mourn.  (D.) 

%  4  b  Gaudere  is  to  Jecl  joy  ;  hctari  is  to  show  it  by  joyful  looks,  &c.  (D.)  Doder- 

lein  thinks  Cicero  mistaken  when  he  makes  Icutari  express  an  exulting ,  triumph- 
ant  joy,  gaudere  a  more  temperate  delight.  But  could  Cicero  be  mistaken  on 
such  a  point,  involving  no  principle  of  etymology,  but  only  a  correct  perception  of 
the  relative  force  of  two  words  in  common  use  ?  At  all  events,  according  to 
Doderlein’s  own  explanation,  Icetari,  expressing  the  manifestation  of  joy  in  con¬ 
sequence  of  an  irresistible feeling ,  might  be  expected  to  riee  above  gaudere ,  just 
»s  mcerere  above  doler e. 


186 


THE  HOMAN  CALENDAR. 


[§  66.  523-528 

of  his  only  son,  than  he  grieved  for  that,  of  his  father.  Why 
should  V  now  bewail  the  life  of  men  ?  This  being  the  case,  what 
reason  have  we109  for  bewailing  the  death  of  abandoned  citizens? 
How  few  are  there ,  who  would  bewail  the  death  of  Caius  ? 
They  p  set  upon  the  enemy  unexpectedly,  and  put  them  to  flight. 
He  did  it  in  sueli  a  manner  (ita)  that  it  seemed  to  be  done  on 
purpose. 


XXVIII. 

§  66.  The  Roman  Calendar. 

523.  The  Roman  months  were  of  the  same  number  of  days  as 
the  English  months,  but  were  differently  divided. 

524.  The  first  day  of  the  month  was  called  the  Kalends  (Ka- 
lend®)  :  the  Nones  (Nome)  fell  on  the  fifth  or  seventh  :  the  Ides 
(Idus,  uum,  f.)  were  always  eight  days  after  the  Nones ,  that  is, 
on  the  thirteenth  or  fifteenth. 

525.  In  March,  July,  October,  May, 

The  Nones  were  on  the  seventh  day. 

(And  therefore  the  Ides  on  the  fifteenth.) 

526.  Days  between  the  Kalends  and  the  Nones  were  reckoned 
by  their  distance  from  the  Nones  :  those  between  the  Nones 
and  the  Ides  by  their  distance  from  the  Ides :  those  after  the 
Ides  by  their  distance  from  the  Kalends  of  the  following  month. 

Hence  a  day  after  the  fifteenth  of  May ,  would  be  such  a  day  before 
the  Kalends  of  June. 

527.  Suppose  we  take  the  third  of  March;  this  is  a  day  before  the  Nones  of 
March,  which  happens  on  the  seventh.  Now  7 — 3  =  4:  but  the  Ro¬ 
mans  reckoned  both  days  in ,  so  that  they  would  call  the  third  of  March 
not  the  fourth ,  but  th  e  fifth  day  before  the  Nones. 

528.  To  suit  this  Roman  way  of  reckoning,  we  must  subtract 
the  given  day  from  the  number  of  the  day  on  which  the  Nones  or 
Ides  fall  increased  by  one.  If  the  day  be  one  before  the  Kalends, 
we  must  subtract  from  the  last  day  of  the  month  increased  by  two . 
If  the  remainder  be  two,  the  day  will  be  pridie  ;  because  the  day 
the  Romans  would  call  the  second  day  before ,  was  ‘  the  day  be • 
fore ,  as  we  speak. 


THE  ROMAN  CALENDAR. 


187 


§66.  529-531.] 

529.  Thus  take  the  3rd,  9th,  23rd  of  June  : 

(1)  In  June  the  Nones  are  on  the  fifth :  therefore  three  must  be  sub« 
tracted  from  (5  +-  1  = )  six ;  and  the  remainder  being  3,  the  day  is 
‘  the  third  day  before  the  Nones  of  June.’ 

(2)  In  June  the  Nones  being  on  the  fifth,  the  Ides  are  on  the  thirteenth , 
and  the  subtraction  must  be  from  fourteen.  Hence  subtract  9  from 
14 :  the  remainder  being  5,  the  day  is  the  fifth  day  before  the  Ides  of 
June. 

(3)  Since  June  has  thirty  days,  we  must  subtract  from  thirty-two. 

Hence  substract  23  from  32 ;  the  remainder  being  9,  the  day  is  the 

ninth  day  before  the  Kalends  of  July. 

OCT  (The  adjective  forms  are  used  with  the  months,®  and  Idus 
is  fern.) 

530.  To  express  when  ? 

1  On  the  third  before  the  Kalends  of  March  ’  is  by  rule  ‘  die  tertio  ante 
Kalendas  Martias,’  which  was  shortened  by  the  omission  of  die  and 
ante  into  ‘  tertio  Kalendas  Martias  ’  or  ‘  iii.  Kal.  Mart.'1 

But  another  form  is  used  (almost  exclusively)  by  Cicero  and 
Uxy ;  this  form  is  ‘  ante-diem  tertium  Kalendas  Martias  ’  shortened 
into  ‘a.  d.  iii.  Kal.  Mart.?  a  form  which  cannot  be  explained  gram¬ 
matically. 

This  ante-diem  came  to  be  treated  as  an  indeclinable  substantive,  and 
the  prepositions  ad ,  in,  ex,  were  prefixed  to  it,  as  to  other  suhstantives 
of  time. 

531.  [When  1  on  what  day  ?] 

Natus  est  Augustus  ix.  Kalendas  Octobres,  Augustus 
was  born  on  the  twenty-third  of  September  (32 — 
9=23.) 

Claudius  natus  est  Kalendis  Augustis,  Claudius  was 
born  on  the  first  of  August. 

Claudius  obiit  (or  excessit)  iii.  Idus  Octobres,  Claudius 
died  on  the  thirteenth  of  October  (16 — 3=13.) 

Meministine  me  ante  diem  (a.  d.)  xii.  Kalendas  Novem¬ 
bres  dicere  in  Senatu  ?  Do  you  remember  that  I  spoke 
in  the  Senate  on  the  21  st  of  October?  (33 — 12=21.) 
[Against  or  by  such  a  day  :  for  such  a  day.] 

Consul  comitia  in  ante  diem  tertium  Notias  Sextiles 


c  These  forms  are,  Januarius,  Februarius,  Martius,  Aprils,  Maius,  Junius, 
Q,uintilis  (or  Julius),  Sextilis  (or  Augustus),  Septem-,  Octo-,  Novem-,  Decem' 

>ris. 


188 


THE  ROMAN  CALENDAR. 


[§  66.  532-535. 


( =  Augustus'1)  edixit,  The  Consul  fixed  the  elections 
by  an  edict  for  the  third  of  August  (6 — 3=3.) 

In  ante  dies  octavum  et  septimum  Kalendas  Octobres 
comitiis  dicta  dies,  The  time  of  the  elections  is  fixed 
for  the  twenty  fourth  and  twenty  fifth  of  September 
(32—8=24). 

Capuam  venire  jussi  sumus  ad  Nonas  Februarias , 
We  are  ordered  to  come  to  Capua  by  the  fifth  ol 
February. 


532.  Vocabulary  72. 

Elections, 

To  my  election, 

To  suffer, 

To  lose  flesh, 

To  stay  (in  a  place), 

To  compel, 

*  The  day  before  the  Ides, 

To  fix  by  edict, 

It  is  worth  while,  »  operae  pretium  est. 

533.  (a)  (Eng.)  Instead  of  reading ,  he  is  at  play. 

*  (Lat.)  He  is  at  play,  whereas  he  ought  to  read  (quum  debeat). 

(b)  (Eng.)  Instead  of  growing  rich,  he  is  growing  poor. 

(Lat.)  He  is  growing  poor,  whereas  he  might  grow  rich  (quum  pos3et). 

534.  (c)  (Eng.)  Far  from  thinking  this,  I  hold,  &c. 

(Lat.)  It  is  so  far  off  that  I  should  think  this,  that  I  hold,  &c.  (tan¬ 
tum  abest  ut — ut,e  &c.) 


comitia,  orum  (properly/  the  assembling 
of  the  people  ’  for  the  purpose  of  elect¬ 
ing  the  consuls,  &c.  &c.). 

(  ad  mea  comitia  (i.  e.  to  the  meeting  at 
(  which  I  am  to  be  elected  or  rejected), 
sinere,*  siv,  sit;  pati,  ior,  passus. 

*  corpus  amittere, 
commorari, 
cogere,  coeg,  coact. 

*  pridie  Idus :  or  pridie  Iduum, 
edicere  (with  acc.). 


Exercise  77. 

535.  Tiberius  died  on  the  sixteenth  of  March.  Nero  was  born 


d  The  months  of  July  and  August  were  called  Quintilis ,  Sextilis  respectively, 
( =  the  fifth  and  sixth  month,  reckoning  from  March,  the  old  beginning  of  the 
year,)  till  those  names  were  exchanged  for  Julius  and  Augustus  in  honour  of  the 
first  two  Csesars. 

'■  *  Smere  is  properly  ‘  to  let  go,'  ‘  not  to  stop,'  pati  is,  ‘  not  to  prohibit :'  sinere  has 
for  its  immediate  object  the  person  acting,  pati  the  action  itself:  sinere  is  com¬ 
monly,  though  not  exclusively,  followed  by  ut  with  the  subj. :  pati  by  the  acc. 
with  in  fin.  (D.) 

e  Tantum  abest  ut  nostra  miremur,  ut ...  .  nobis  ipse  non  satisfaciat  Demos¬ 
thenes.  Sometimes  the  second  ut  is  omitted,  the  clause  having  vix  or  etiam : 
‘tantum  abfuit  ut  inflammares  nostros  animos:  somnum  vix  tenebamus.' 
ICic.  Brut.  80.) 


§  67.  536-539.]  connection  of  propositions,  &c.  189 

on  the  fifteenth  of  December.  Caius  was  born  on  the  fifteenth 

0 

of  October.  Balbus  died  on  the  twelfth  of  August.  Vitellius 
was  born  on  the  24th  of  September ;  or,  as  some  (say),  on  the 
seventh  of  September.  The  Consul  has  fixed  (by  edict)  the  elec¬ 
tions  for  the  21st  of  July.  I  believe  that  the  elections  will  be 
fixed  for  the  ninth  of  April.  Say  that  I  shall  not  be  angry  with 
him,  if  he  does  not  come98  to  my  election.  I  am  compelled  to 
stay  here  till  I  recruit  myself :  for  I  have  lost  both  flesh  and 
strength.  There  are  some  who  think  that  the  elections  will  be 
fixed  for  the  ninth  and  tenth  of  July.  Instead  of  being  with  me, 
he  is  at  his  own  house.  Instead  of  being  very  rich  (as  he  might 
have  been),  he  is  very  poor.  Instead  of  applying  vigorously  to 
the  affair,  he  is  gone  into  the  country.  I  am  so  far  from  praising, 
that  I  can  scarcely  restrain  myself  from  calling  you  a  betrayer 
of  your  country.  I  am  so  far  from  believing  any  body  (no  mat¬ 
ter  who  he  may  he ),  that  I  scarcely  believe  you.  I  was  so  far 
from  being  ill  spoken  of,  that  all  men  praised  me.  There  were 
some  who  laughed. 


XXIX. 

§  67.  Connection  of  Propositions  hy  the  Relative. 
Imperative  forms. 

%  o36.  Any  relative  pronoun  or  adverb  may  be  used  for  the  cor¬ 
responding  demonstrative  with  the  conjunction  and  (and  some¬ 
times,  hut,  for ,  therefore,  &c.) 

k  537.  When  in  English  such  a  clause  as  ‘  they  say,’  1  as — says,’ 
&c.,  is  inserted  parenthetically  in  a  relative  sentence,  the  verb  of 
this  clause  should  generally  be  made  the  principal  verb  of  the 
relative  clause  in  Latin,  the  other  verb  being  put  in  the  infini¬ 
tive. 

4  538.  When  in  English  the  relative  pronoun  is  separated  from 

its  verb  by  another  clause,  which  contains  a  demonstrative  pro. 
noun,  the  relative  should  be  expressed  in  that  clause  in  Latin,  and 
the  demonstrative  be  expressed  or  understood  in  the  other. 

539.  The  imperative  may  be  expressed  by  several  circumlo¬ 
cutions  : 


190 


CONNECTION  OF  PROPOSITIONS  [§  67.  540-542. 


*  (1)  The  imperat,  of  command  by  cnra  ut  (take  care  to). 

fac  ut  (or  fac  only)  with  subj. 

*  (2)  The  imperat,  of  prohibition  by  cave  with  sub ?. 

(governed  by  ut  omitted),  or  noli  with  injin. f 

540.  (a)  (Eng.)  Two  and  two  make  four  :  and  if  this  is  granted,  &c. 

(Lat.)  Two  and  two  make  four  :  if  which  is  granted,  &c. 

(b)  (Eng.)  Caius,  who ,  they  say ,  was  killed  at  Lugdunum. 

(Lat.)  Caius,  whom  they  report  to  have  been  killed,  &c. 

(c)  (Eng.)  Crassus,  who,  as  Lucilius  tells  us,  never  laughed  but  once. 
{Lat.)  Crassus,  whom  Lucilius  reports  to  have  never  laughed,  but 

once. 

(d)  (Eng.)  Narratives,  by  which ,  when  we  lead  them,  we  are  affected. 
(Lat )  Narratives,  which  when  we  read,  we  are  affected. 

(e)  (Eng.)  Success  with  which,  if  it  should  fall  to  out  Jot,  we  should  be 

dissatisfied. 

(Lai.)  Success,  if  which s  should  fall  to  our  lot,  we  should  be  dis¬ 
satisfied. 

(f)  (Eng.)  I  did  this ;  and  if  you  had  not  thwarted  me,  &c. 

(Lat.)  I  did  this ;  whom  if  you  had  not  thwarted,  &c. 

*  541.  [C.  xxxv.]  ‘  Will  5  and  ‘  would,1  ‘  will  not ‘  and  ‘  would  not 1  are  often 
principal  verbs,  to  be  translated  by  velle  and  nolle  respectively. 

They  are  to  be  translated  when  for 

will,  would ,  we  may  substitute 

is  (are,  &c.)  willing,  was  (were,  &c.)  willing. 

542.  Vocabulary  73. 


4  (Phrases  with  e,  ex  ;  pr.e,  pro,  in.) 


*  To  have  a  pain  in  my  feet, 

To  cook  with  water, 

From  a  wall, 

Opposite,  over-against, 

>  To  be  tired  with  a  journey, 

%  To  live  according  to  nature, 
From  the  heart, 

'  It  is  for  my  interest, 

(To  place)  on  a  table, 

.  For  =  owing  to,  especially  of  ob¬ 
stacles, 

.  In  comparison  with  him, 

Safe, 


*  ex  pedibus  laborare,  or  dolere. 
ex  aqua  cdquere ;  cox,  coct. 
ex  muro. 

e,  not  ex,  regione.* * 
c  e  via  languere. 

*  e  natura  viv6re. 

ex  animo  (in  sincerity). 

^  e  re  mea  est.h 
in  mensa. 

prae  (with  abl.).  ' 

„  pros  illo. 

V  salvus,  a,  um ;  incolumis,  is.  e.l 


f  Cura  ut  quam  primum  venias.  Fac  animo  forti,  magnoque  sis.  Cave 
putes,  or  noli  putare.— Such  forms  in  English  are,  Hake  care  to,5  (be  sure  you,1 
tmind  you,1  &c. 

8  In  Latin,  the  relative  must  stand  before  si. 

*  Another  noun  will,  of  course,  follow  regione  in  the  gen. 
b  So,  e  republica  est. 

t  A  person  is  tutus  when  he  is  in  safety ;  securus  when  he  believes  hlmsett  tc 


BY  THE  RELATIVE. 


191 


§  67.  543. 

%  Pro  virili  parte,  according  to  one’s  duty  or  power  as  an  individual  ( n/.l 
‘with  all  one’s  might’) ;  as  far  as  an  individual  can. 

*  Pro  re  nata  (according  to  the  thing  that  has  arisen)  =.  according  to 

circumstances. 

*  Pro  eo  ac  mereor ,  according  to  my  deserts. 

Exercise  78. 

543.  I  for  my  'part  wished  this:  and  if  Pompejus  had  not 
envied  me,  the  republic  would  now  be  safe.  Philosophy  teaches 
that  the  world  moves  ;  and  if  this  be  true,  we  also  must  neces¬ 
sarily  move.  Who  can  deny  that  this  is  for  my  interest?  The 
gods  will  requite  me  according  to  my  deserts.  Is  it  not  certain, 
that  the  gods  will  requite  you  according  to  your  deserts  ?  I  am 
sorry  that  you  have  a  pain  in  your  head.  If  you  had  done  this, 
I  should  have  praised  you  from  my  heart.  You  will  not  be  able 
to  see  the  sun  for  the  multitude  of  our  javelins.  Caius,  being 
tired  of  his  journey,  was  killed  by  his  slave.  They  answered 
that  they  would  receive  us.  Did  he  not  answer  that  he  would 
not  receive  us?  Do  not  think  that  the  soul  is  mortal.  Take  care 
to  finish  the  business  to  my  satisfaction.  Do  not  think  that  every 
man  can  command  himself.  Be  sure  to  come  to  my  assistance 
as  soon  as  possible.  Who  will  deny  that  these  things  are  for  the 
interests  of  the  republic  ?  I  cannot  speak  for  sorrow.  Be  sure 
not  to  impute  this  to  me  as  a  fault.  Be  sure  not  to  hurry.  Be 
sure  not  to  believe  that  it  is  necessary  to  make  haste  ;  for,  if  you 
believe  this,  it  is  all  over  with  us.  The  moon  is  eclipsed,  when 
it  is  opposite  to  the  sun.  May  I  not  determine  what  should  be 
done  according  to  circumstances  ?  It  is  the  part  of  a  good  citizen 
to  defend  the  republic  as  far  as  an  individual  can.  Benefits,  for 
which,  if  you  confer  them  upon  me,  J  will  prove  myself  grateful 
(memor).  You  may  eat  the  food  p  which  is  placed  on  the  table. 
He  says  that  he  will  not  eat  the  cheese  p  which  is  placed  on  the 


e  bo,  and  is  udthout  care  (se-curus)  or  anxiety  on  the  subject.  Hence  ‘Ne  si; 
a  curus,  qui  non  est  tutus  ab  hoste.’  Of  salvus,  sospes,  incolumis, — salvus  says 
the  least  (as  it  properly  relates  only  to  ( existence );  sospes  more,  as  it  points  to 
tee  protection  of  a  higher  power;  incolumis  the  most  of  all,  as  it  excludes  not 
ly  annihilation ,  but  even  the  supposition  of  any  injury  or  attack. 


192 


ROMAN  WAY  OF  RECKONING  MONEY.  [§  68.  544-54 

table.  I  shall  do  what  appears98  best  to  be  done  according  to 
circumstances.  There  were  some  who  could  not  speak  foi 
sorrow. 


XXX. 

§  68.  On  the  Roman  way  of  reckoning  money . 

544.  The  Romans  reckoned  their  money  by  sesterces  :  and  by 
nummus ,  when  it  means  a  coin,  sestertius  is  always  meant. 

d.  q. 

545.  A  sestertius  (  =  1  3|  or  3£  cents)  was  not  quite  equal  to  ticopenci 
English  money. 

A  sestertium  =  a  thousand  sestertii :  it  was  the  name  of  a  sum ,  not 
of  a  coin. 

*  546.  Sestertii  and  sestertia  are  used  quite  regularly  with  nu¬ 
meral  adjectives  :  but  sestertium  in  the  singular  is  used  in  a  very 
peculiar  way  with  numeral  adverbs. 

%  547.  OCT  With  numeral  adverbs  sestertium  means  so  many 
‘  hundred  thousand  sesterces .’ 

Hence  Sestertium  semel *  *  =  ‘  a  hundred  thousand  sesterces.’ 

Sestertium  decies  =  ten  ‘  hundred  thousand  sesterces  ’  ==  a 
million  sesterces. 

Sestertium  vicies  —  20  ‘  hundred  thousand  sesterces  ’  =  two 
million  sesterces.  tic.  tie. 

Obs.  With  numeral  adverbs  below  Hen  times'  so  many  hundred  thou¬ 
sand  sesterces  are  meant. 

With  numeral  adverbs  above  and  multiples  of  ‘  ten  times,’  throw  away 
the  cipher  from  the  units’  place,  and  you  have  the  number  of  ‘  millions 
of  sesterces' 

Thus,  if  ‘  sestertium  sexcenties '  were  the  sum  ;  throwing  away  0 
from  the  units’  place  of  600,  we  have  ‘  60  millions  of  sesterces '  for  the 
sum. 


£.  s.  d. 

*  A  sestertium  =  8  1  5£  =  838  68. 

Sestertium  semel  =  807  5  10  =  $3873  60. 

Sestertium  decies ,  centies ,  millies,  &c.  (that  is,  the  multiples  of  semel  by  10)  are 
got  approximately  by  this  rule  : — For  every  cipher  in  the  proposed  multiple  add 
to  the  right  hand  of  807  one  figure  taken  (successively)  from  the  left  hand  of  the 
series  291666  continued  ad  infinitum.  Thus  to  get  sestertium  millies,  since  1000 
has  3  ciphers,  I  must  add  3  figures  (291)  taken  from  the  left  hand  of  the  given 
series  to  the  right  hand  of  807.  Hence  millies  sestertium  — r  807291  =  nearly 
84,000,000  in  whole  numbers. 


193 


$68.  548-552.]  roman  way  of  reckoning  money. 


With  intermediate  numerals,  the  sum  is  easily  obtained  by  these 
rules:  Sestertium  ter  vicies  =  ‘2  millioji,  3  hundred  thousand  ses¬ 
terces 


548.  In  this  construction  sestertium  is  declined  : 

Sestertium  vicies,  two  million  sesterces. 

Sestertii  vicies,  of  two  million  sesterces,  &c. 

549.  In  turning  the  number  of  sesterces  into  Latin,  remember  that  to  the 
numeral  before  ‘  millions  ’  I  must  add  a  cipher  in  the  units'  place  (in 
other  words,  multiply  it  by  10)  to  get  the  numeral  adverb ,  that  is  to  go 
with  sestertium.  Thus  in  ‘  2  million  sesterces,’  by  adding  a  cipher  in 
the  units’  place  to  2,  I  get  20,  and  vicies  is  the  adverb  required. 

550.  ( a )  Sex  millibus  aedes  conduxit,  He  hired  a  house  for  six 

thousand  (sesterces). 

( b)  Sex  sestertia  persolvit,  He  paid  six  thousand  sesterces. 

(c)  In  sestertio  vicies  (splendide  se  gerens),  On  a  fortune 

of  two  million  sesterces. 

551.  Vocabulary  74. 


Inheritance, 

To  keep  up  a  certain  state, 


A  freedman, 


Descended  from, 


,  Meanly, 


hereditas,  atis,  f. 
splendide  se  gerCre  ;  gess,  gest. 

'  libertinus,  i,  m.  (but  if  spoken  in  refer¬ 
ence  to  his  master ,  libertus.  Thus 
Brutus’s  libertus  is  one  of  the  class 
libertini). 


'  oriundus  : — ‘  nati  Carthagine,  sed  ori. 

undi  ab  Syracusis ;  ‘  born  at  Carthage, 
<(  but  of  Syracusan  extraction ;’  or  ‘  de¬ 
scended  from  a  family  that  had  for¬ 
merly  lived  at  Syracuse.’ 

,  sordide. 


Exercise  79. 


552.  He  kept  up  a  certain  state  with  a  fortune  of  three  million 
sesterces.  With  a  fortune  of  two  millions  of  sesterces  he  kept 
up  more  state  than  Caius,  who  had  received  10  millions  from  his 
father.  Caius,  the  freedman  of  Brutus,  left  more  thank  15  thou¬ 
sand  sesterces.  That  you,  with  a  fortune  of  10  millions,  should 
live  so  meanly  !  Caius,  who  was  of  Syracusan  extraction,  sent 
Brutus  two  hundred  thousand  sesterces  as  a  present.  On  the 


*  k  With  arrplius ,  plus,  minus,  &c.  quam  is  often  omitted  ;  the  noun  standing 
in  the  case  it  would  have  stood  in,  if  quam  had  been  expressed.  Sometimes 
however  the  ablat.  follows  these  adverbs. 

9 


194 


ROMAN  WAY  OF  RECKONING  MONEY.  [§  69.  553-555 

23rd  of  November,  Balbus  sent  me  as  a  present  twenty  thousand 
sesterces.  He  gave  them  three  thousand  sesterces  a-piece.  From 
this  inheritance  Atticus  received  about  ten  million  sesterces. 


§  69. 
553. 


On  the  division  of  the  As :  the  method  of  reckoning  frao 
tions,  interest,  &c. 


As 

Deunx 

J-L> 

1  2 

Dextans 

(+§=)  i 

Dodrans  i 

(-1%=)  ~4 

Bes  (bessis) 

(tV=)  t 

Septunx 

JL 

1  <> 

Semis  (semissis)  (~.6-  = )  1  v 

Quincunx 

5 

1  2 

Triens 

( ft2  =  ) 

duadrans 

(A=)  i 

Sextans 

(l22=)  i 

Uncia 

AJ 

554.  These  words  were  used  to  express  the  fractions  set  down 
opposite  to  their  names. 

555.  The  same  division  was  used  in  reckoning  the  interest  of 
money,  which  was  due  monthly.  Asses  usurce  —  one  As  per 
month  for  the  use  of  a  hundred.  This  was  also  called  centesima. 
usurae,  because  in  100  months  a  sum  equal  to  the  whole  principal 
would  have  been  paid. 


Asses  orcentesimse  usurce  =  12  per  cent. 
Deunces  q  r  11 

Dextantes  10 

Dodrantes  9 

Besses  8 

Septunces  7 

Semisses  >  usurae  <  6 

Q-uincunces  5 

Trientes  4 

duadrantes  3 

Sextantes  2 

Unciae  J  L  1 

Bina  centesimae  =  24  per  cent,  and  so  on. 


i  Dodrans  =  de-quadransf 


195 


§  69.  556,  557.]  roman  way  of  reckoning  money. 

556.  ( a )  Statura  ejus  quinque  pedum  et  dodrantis  fuit,  His 

height  was  jive  feet  and  three-fourths  ( five  feet 
nine). 

(Eum)  hseredem  fecit  ex  dodrante ,  He  left  him  heir 
to  three- fourths  of  his  estate. 

( h )  Assibus  usuris  grandem  pecuniam  collocavit,  He 
invested  a  large  sum  of  money  at  12  per  cent. 

Exercise  80. 

557.  Caius,  the  freedman  of  Balbus,  has  been  made  heir  to 
one  half  of  his  estate.  He  has  left  one  Caius,  of  Carthaginian 
extraction,  the  heir  to  seven-twelfths  of  his  estate  ;  from  which 
inheritance  he  will  receive,  I  think,  about  six  hundred  thousand 
sesterces.  The  freedman  of  Brutus,  who  died  at  Rome  on  the 
third  of  August,  has  left  nearly  fifteen  million  sesterces ;  and  it 
is  thought  that  Caius  has  been  left  heir  to  half  his  estate.  He 
is  said  to  have  lodged  a  large  sum  of  money  in  the  hands  of" 
Balbus  at  9  per  cent. 


*  Apvd  aliquem  collocare. 


I 


TABLES  FOR  REFERENCE. 


TABLE  I.— GENDERS. 

Ods. — Mas.  exceptions  are  in  capitals  ;fem.  in  the  common  type ;  neut.  in  italic « 

(Third  Declension.) 


Mas.  terminations. 

£R^  ORj  OS, 

es  increasing , 
o,  when  not  do,  go,  io. 


Principal  Exceptions. 
er)  cadaver  uber 

iter  ver 

papaver  verber 

tuber 
or) arbor 
aequor 
marmor 


cor 

es)  compes 
merces 
merges 
quies 
os)  cos 
dos 

os  (ossis) 
os  (oris) 

■ \chao8 
t  epos 
imelos 
o)  caro 
techo 


requies 

seges 

teges 

ces 


First  Decl.  Fem. 
except  names  of  men. 


Sec.  Decl.  (us,  er)  § 
Mas. — except 
alvus 
domus 
humus 
vannus 
pelagus 
virus 

vulgus  (also  m.) 


Fem.  terminations. 

do,  go,  io,* * 
as,  is,  aus, 
x> 

es  not  increasing 

s  impure 

tis  in  hypermon. 

Principal  Exceptions. 


do 


ORDO 

CARDO 


LIGO 

10  1 


i  MARGO  (f)  t 
is)  AMNIS  LAPIS 
ANGUIs(f)  MENSIS 
AXIS  ORBIS 

CASSISES)  PANIS 


COLLIS 

qiNis 

CRINIS 

ENSIS 

FASCIS 


PISCIS 

POSTIS 

PULVIS 

SANGUIS 

TORRIS 


FINIS  (f)  UNGUIS 
FOLLIS  VECTIS 
FUNIS  VERMIS 
IGNIS 
X)  CALIX 
CODEX 
CORTEX 
GREX 
POLLEX 
SILEX  (f) 
+THORAX 
VERTEX 

es,  pari- 
syll. 

BIDENS  ( hoe ). 

s  im-  $  mons 
pure  (  pons 

FONS 

DENS  RUDENS 

+HYDROPS 

OS)  AS  ELEPHAS 

vas  (vasis) 
fas 
nefas 


ACINACES. 


Neut.  terminations. 

e,  ct,  t ,  e,  Z,  71, 
ar,  u  r,  Us. 
iis  monosjU. 


Principal  Exception*. 
Z)  SAL 
SOL 

n)  LIEN 
REN 
SPLEN 
PECTEN 

ur)  FUR 
FURFUR 
TURTUR 
VULTUR 

us)  pecus  (udis) 

LEPUS 

syu^ujz3™ 


Fourth  Decl.  (us) 
Mas.  except 
acus 

idus  (pl.) 
manus 
porticus 
tribus 


Fifth  Decl. 
Fem.  except 
dies  (also  Fem. 
in  sing.) 

MERIDIES. 


'  *  Words  in  io  that  are  not  abstract  nouns  are  mas.  e.  g.  papilio,  pugio, 
scipio,  septentrio,  stellio,  unio  (pearl),  with  the  numeral  nouns  ternio, 
0.U aternio,  &c.  +  Properly  Greek  words. 

X  Those  with  (f),  (m),  are  sometimes  fem.  and  mas.  respectively. 

*  §  Greek  nouns  in  odus  (exodus,  methodus,  tf*c.)  with  dialectus,  dipthongua 
<fc.  are  fem. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  PERFECT  AND  SUPINE. 


197 


These  rules  depend  on  the  terminations;  but  some  words  have  a 
particular  gender  from  their  meaning. 

*  A.  The  names  of  male  persons  and  xcinds,  are  masculine. 

,  B.  The  names  of  female  persons,  countries,  islands ,  towns,  plants,  and 
trees,  are  fern. 

*  (a)  But  of  towns,  these  are  mas. 

(1)  Some  in  o  (croto,  hippo,  narbo,  sclmo,  prusino)  :  and 

(2)  All  plurals  in  i;  veii,  Delphi. 
v  These  are  neuter  : 

(1)  All  in  um,  or  plur.  a ;  (2)  Those  in  e  or  ur  of  the  third ;  Prae¬ 
neste,  Tibur. 

,  (b)  Of  trees  and  plants; 

(1)  Those  in  er  (and  many  in  us)  of  the  second  are  mas. : 

(2)  Those  in  er,  ur  of  the  third  are  neut. :  acer,  siler,  robur ,  fyc. 

*  C.  Several  are  common :  comes,  conjux,  custos,  dux,  hospes,  juvenis,  parens, 

princeps,  sacerdos ,  tf'C. 


TABLE  II. — Formation  of  the  Perfect  and  Supine. 

*  1.  ffjpThe  first  syllable  of  dissyllable  perfects  and  supines  is  long,  if  the  next 
eyllable  begins  with  a  consonant. 

*  (a)  But  seven  perfects  have  short  penult:  bibi,  dedi,  f  idi,  scidi,  steti,  stiti,  tuli. 

*  ( b )  Nine  dissyllable  supines  have  short  penult:  datum,  citum,*  itum,  litum, 

quitum,  ratum,  rtitum,  satum,  situm.  i 

*  (c)  Statum  from  sto  is  long,  but  from  sisto  short ;  and  the  compounds  of  sto 
that  make  stilum  have  i :  as  praestitum,  from  praestare.  Though  nosco  has  notum , 
its  compounds  that  have  itum  have  I  (cognosco,  cognitum). 

N.  B.  Verbs  in'italics  have  no  supine. 

»  II.  First  Conjugation  [properly  a  contracted  conjugation;  ama-o,  amo], 

•  (1)  Most  verbs  of  this  conjugation  form  roots  of  perfect  and  supine,  by 

adding  v,  t,  respectively  to  the  proper  root. 

[amo  (ama-o) ;  ainar-i ;  ama/-um.] 

»  (2)  Others  change  a  into  u;  and  form  the  sup.  in  Itum,  after  rejecting  a. 
CrSpo,  crepui,  crepitum.  So  cubo,  dbmo,  frico  ( also  fricatum),  mico, 
sbno,  tbno,  veto,  seco  (sectum)— jfivo,  juvi,  jutum  ?  jUvatum? 

*  (3)  Others  form  perf.  in  both  of  these  ways. 

DiscrPpo,  discrepavi  and  discrepui,  discrepatum  (?).  So  incri-po  (ui,  itum 
preferred) ;  the  compounds  of  neco,  and  the  obsolete  plico  (fold). 

(But  supplico,  duplico,  multiplico,  only  avi,  atum  :  explico,  explain , 
r  eg. ;  unfold,  ui,  itum.) 

^  (4)  Irregular  (with  reduplication). 

Do,  d?di,  datum  (with  a  in  dare,  dabo,  dabam,  &c.) ;  sto,  steti,  statum  :  but 

stare,  &o. 


'  *  Fromcteo,  to  excite.  Of  the  compounds  several  have  cire,  citum ,  from  the 

obsol.  do. 


198 


FORMATION  OF  THE 


*  III.  Second  Conjugation. 

>»  Properly  a  contracted  conjugation,  but  with  the  vowels  open  in  the  first 
pers.  singular  of  the  present  tense.  (Mone-o ;  mone-is  =  monSs,  &c.) 

.  (1)  Most  reject  e,  and  form  perfect  and  supine  in  ui,  itum. 

(Mon-eo,  mon-tu,  mon -Hum.) 

v  (2)  But  some  retain  e,  and  add  v,  in  the  perf. — eo,  evi,  etum. 

Deleo,  delevi,  deletum.  Fleo,  neo,  and  verbs  formed  from  oleoa  {make 
to  grow))  pleo  {fill),  and  sueo  {am  accustomed). 

*  (3)  Others  form  perf.  from  root  of  present,  lengthening  the  vowel  (il 
short),  when  pres,  ends  in  a  single  consonant. 

Caveo,  cavi,  cautum :  faveo. 

Fbveo,  fovi,  fotum  :  mbveo,  voveo  :  paveo,  ferveo  (and  fertmi) ;  Can • 
niveo ,  nivi  and  nixi. 

Prandeo  (pransum),  video  (visum),  sedeo  (sessum),  strideo.* 
t  (4)  Others  form  perf.  in  si. 

(a)  p  sounds.  {Any  pc  sound  with  s~ps;  but  bs  sometimes  =  ss.) 

Jubeo,  jussi,  jussum ;  sorbeo,  sorpsi,  sorptum. 

(/?)  k  sounds.  (The  k  sound,  if  impure,  is  thrown  away  before  s.  Any 
k  sound  with  s  —x :  qu  is  to  be  treated  as  a  A:  sound.) 

Mulceo,  mulsi,  mulsum.  Algeo,  indulgeo  (indultum),  fulgeo,  mulgeo t 
tergeo,  turgeo,  urgeo,  torqueo  (tortum). 

Augeo,  auxi,  auctum:  luceo, frigeo,  lugeo. 

(y)  t  sounds,  {t  sound  thrown  away  before  s.) 

Ardeo,  arsi,  arsum ;  rideo,  suadeo. 

(<5)  Liquid  verbs,  {r  thrown  away  before  s.) 

Maneo,  mansi,  mansum  :  haereo. 

(s)  With  reduplication,  {t  sound  thrown  away  before  s.) 

Mordeo,  momordi,  morsum :  pendeo,  spondeo,  tondeo. 

(£)  Neuter  passives :  audeo,  ausus  sum;  gaudeo,  gavisus  sum;  soleo, 
solitus  sum. 

( r ))  The  following  have  perf.  in  ui,  but  do  not  form  their  supines  in  itum. 
Doceo,  doctum ;  teneo,  tentum ;  misceo,  mixtum  and  mistum ;  torreo, 
tostum  ;  censeo,  censum ;  recenseo,  recensum  and  recensitum. 

*  IV  Third  Conjugation. 

*  (1)  Perfect  in  i,  added  to  root  of  present. 

(a)  Acuo,  acui,  acutum :  arguo,  congruo,  imbuo,  induo,  luo  (luiturus), 
metuo,  minuo,  pluo ,  ruo  (rutum,  ruitum),  spuo,  statuo,  sternuo,  suo, 
tribuo.  Volvo,  volvi,  volutum.  So  solvo. 

.  (/?)  t  sound  thrown  away  before  s  in  sup. 

Mando,  mandi,  mansum;  pando  (passum,  pansum  rare),  prehendo, 


*  Some  of  which  have  olesco  in  pres.  Aboleo,  sup.  abolitum :  adolesco, 
adultum. 

b  langueo,  langui;  liqueo ,  liqui  and  licui 

smooth,  mid.  asp. 
c  Mutes  with  a  p  sound,  p  b  (ph). 

- k  -  c  g  (ch) 

- t  -  t  d  (th). 


PERFECT  AND  SUPINE.  199 

scando ;  and  compounds  of  cando  (kindle),  fando  (thrust),  in  cendo, 
fendo. 

(y)  Bibo  (bibi,  bibitum) ;  cudo  (cusum),  dego,  lambo,  psallo,  sctibo  (scabi), 
sido,  vello  (vulsum:  also  vulsi),  verro  (versu  md),  verto  (versum),  viso 
(visum). 

v  (<?)  (Short  vowel  of  root  lengthened — a  changed  into  e  in  perf.) 

Cap-io,  cepi,  captum  :  fdcio,  jacio,  ago,  edo  (esum),  emo  (emptum),  l5go 
(lectum),  fodio  (fossum),  fugio  (fugitum). 

(«)  (n  or  m,  by  which  the  present  has  been  lengthened  from  a  simpler 
root ,  rejected.) 

,  (retaining  short  vowel)  findo  (fid),  f tdi,  fissum :  scindo  (scld). 

(lengthening  the  vowel :  a  changed  into  e.) 

Frango,  frag,  fregi  (fractum);  fundo,  fud  (fusum);  linquo,  liqu,  lie 
(liqui,  lictum) ;  rumpo,  rup  (ruptum) ;  vinco,  vic  (victum). 

Percello,  perculi,  perculsum  ;  sisto,  stiti,  stltum. 

*  (£)  With  reduplication. 

Cado,  cecidi,  casum ;  caedo,  cecidi,  caesum  ;  cano,  cecini,  cantum  ;  credo, 
credidi,  creditum  ;  pango  (pag),  pepigi,  pactum  :  parco,  pgperci,  par- 
citum  or  parsum  ;  pario,  peperi,  partum  ;  pello,  pepuli,  pulsum ;  pendo 
pgpendi,  pensum;  pungo,  pupugi,  punctum;  posco,  pbposci;  tango 
(tag),  tetigi,  tactum ;  tendo,  tetendi,  tensum  and  tentum ;  tundo 
tutudi,  tusum.  So  the  compounds  of  do ;  condo ,  abdo,  reddo ,  &c. 
condidi,  conditum ,  &c. 

•'  (2)  Perfect  in  si. 

*  (n)  p  sounds.  (HjT  Any  p  sound  with  s  is  ps  ;  with  t,  pt.) *  * 

Glubo,  glupsi,  gluptum :  nubo,  scribo,  carpo,  repo,  scalpo,  sculpo. 

*  (0)  k  sounds,  including  those  in  h,  qu,  and  ct.  (Any  k  sound  with  s  is  x ; 

with  t,  d.) 

Cingo,  cinxi,  cinctum  ;  sugo,  tego,  fingo  (fictum),  tingo,  ungo :  ango 
figo  (fixum),  jungo,  lingo,  mingo,  mungo,  ningo,  pingo  (pictum), 
plango,  stringo  (strictum),  rego,  dico,  duco,  coquo,  traho, e  vSho.  Add 
compounds  of  stinguo  ;  exstinguo,  restinguo. 

Flecto,  flexi,  flexum,  nexo  (also  nexui),  pecto. 

►  (i)  Liquid  Verbs  (assuming  a  p  before  s) 

Como,  compsi,  comptum  ;  demo,  promo,  sumo,  contemno. 

«  (k)  t  sounds,  (t  sound  thrown  away  before  s :  vowel,  if  short,  lengthened.) 

Claudo,  clausi,  clausum ;  divido,  divisi,  divisum :  laedo,  ludo,  plaudo, 
rado,  rodo,  trudo:  mitto  (misi,  missum). —  Compounds  of  vado. 

•  (X)  k  sounds,  (the  k  sound  thrown  away.) 

Spargo,  sparsi,  sparsum ;  mergo,  tergo. 

.  (ji)  t  sounds,  (ds  changed  into  ss ;)  cedo,  cessi,  cessum. 

%  (k)  Liquid  verbs,  (r,  m  changed  into  s  before  s.) 

GSro,  gessi,  gestum  :  uro,  prgmo  (pressum) 

*  (f)  Compounds  of  specio  (behold)  ending  in  spicio  make  spexi,  spectum. 


d  ve7~ri,versum  poetical.  Z. 

•  h  seems  to  have  had  originally  a  hard  sound.  Thus  hiems  for  and 

ks  —  x  (vch-si  =:  vexi). 


200 


FORMATION  OF  THE 


Those  in  licio  from  lacio  ( entice )  except  elicio,  make  lexi,  lectum. 

Diligo,  dilexi,  dilectum  :  intelligo,  negllgo. 

Col-,  e-,  di-,  se-,  ligo,  with  perlego,  praelego,  have  perf.  legi. 

,  (3)  Verbs  with  perf.  in  ui.  ’ 

A  (o)  Without  change  of  root. 

alo,  alui,  alitum  ( and  altum) :  colo  (cultum),  consulo  (consultum), 
molo  ;  occulo  (occultum),  vdlo,  nolo,  malo;  compounds  of  cello  (rush: 
shoot  forth) ;  fremo,  gemo,  tremo ,  vomo,  gigno,  (gen,  genui,  geni¬ 
tum)  ;  rapio,  rapui,  raptum ;  stipio,  elicio,  compesco ,  dispesco,  depso 
(also  depstum),  pinso  ( also  pinsi,  pistum) ;  sterto  ( also  sterti). — Com - 
pounds  of  sero  (to  connect ),  serui,  sertum. 

«  (ir)  With  change  of  root. 

Meto,  messui,  messum ;  pono,  p'dsui,  pbsltum ;  cerno, (  crevi,  cre¬ 
tum  ;  lino,  levi  (livi  rare),  litum;  sino,  sivi,  situm;  sperno,  sprevi, 
spretum ;  sterno,  stravi,  stratum ;  sero,  sevi,  satum ;  tero,  trivi 
tritum. 

Cresco  (ere),  crevi,  cretum ;  nosco. 

Pasco  (pastum) ;  quiesco,  suesco. 

*  (p)  Verbs  forming  perf.  in  xi,  as  if  they  had  roots  ending  in  k  sound  or  h. 

Fluo,  fluxi,  fluxum ;  struo,  structum ;  vivo  (victum). 

*  (4)  Perfect  in  ivi. 

(er)  Peto,  petivi,  petitum  •  cupio,  arcesso,  capesso,  lacesso,  incesso 

'  (5)  Neuter  Verb. 

(t)  Fido,  fisus  sum  (confido,  diffido). 


Fero,  tuli,  latum. 

Tollo,  sustuli,  sublatum. 

*  V.  Fourth  Conjugation. 

*  (1)  Perfect  in  i. 

(a)  Venio,  veni,  ventum;  comperio,  comped,  compertum.  jSbreperio. 

*>  (2)  Perfect  in  ui. 

(/S)  Salio,  salui,  saltum;  aperio,  bperio,  amicio  (amicui?). 

A  (3)  Perfect  in  si. 

Farcio,  farsi,  fartum  ;  fulcio,  haurio  (hausi,  haustum),  raucio  (rausum) ; 
sarcio,  sepio ;  sancio,  sanxi,  sanctum ;  vincio ;  sentio,  sensi,  sensum. 

*  VI.  Deponents. 

*  Second  Conjugation.  Fateor,  fassus;  liceor,  licitus;  mereor,  me¬ 
ritus:  misereor,  miseritus,  misertus;  reor,  ratus;  tueor,  tuitus; 
vbreor,  veritus. 

*  Third  Conjugation.  Adipiscor,  adeptus :  amplector,  amplexus ;  com¬ 
plector,  complexus;  divertor,  diversus;  (so  praevertor,  revertor;) 
expergiscor,  experrectus ;  fruor,  fruitus  and  fructus  ;  fungor,  functus ; 
gradior,  gressus :  invehor,  invectus ;  irascor,  iratus ;  labor,  lapsus  j 
Ibquor,  Ibcutus ;  mbrior,  mortuus;  nanciscor,  nactus;  nascor,  natus: 


*  Proper’.^,  to  separate.  In  the  sense  of  to  see,  it  has  neither  perf.  nor  sup. 


PERFECT  AND  SUPINE. 


2'  , 

nitor,  nisus,  nixus :  obliviscor,  oblitus ;  paciscor,  pactus ;  pascui 
pastus;  pStior,  passus;  proficiscor,  profectus;  queror,  questus 
sSquor,  secutus :  ulciscor,  ultus ;  utor,  usus. 

*  Fourth  Conjugation.  Adsentior,  adsensus:  experior,  expertus, 
metior,  mensus ;  oppgrior,  oppertus ;  ordior,  orsus ;  Orior,  ortus.? 

*  VII  (fjp  sc  in  verbs  denotes  the  beginning  of  an  action  or  state.) 

Inchoatives  in  sco  have  no  -perfect ,  but  that  (in  ui)  of  the  root.  This 
would  hardly  be  considered  their  perfect,  did  not  some  of  those  formed 
from  nouns  take  a  perfect  in  ui,  though  no  verb  in  eo  occurs. 

.  VIII.  In  compound  verbs  (1)  a ,  ce,  of  the  root  often  become  i ,  sometimes 
e:  (2)  e  of  the  root  often  becomes  i:  (3)  the  reduplication  of  the  root  is 
drcpt,  except  in  praecurro  and  the  compounds  of  posco  and  disco. 


e  The  present  follows  the  third;  but  2  sing,  oriris  or  oriris. 

9* 


* 


TABL  E 

OF 


DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 

4*c 


English. 

1.  You  and  I,  ) 

Balbus  and  I, 

2.  Says  that  he  has  not a  sinned. 
Says  that  he  has  never ,  &c. 

3.  He  promises  to  come. 

He  hopes  to  live. 

He  undertakes  to  do  it. 

He  pretends  to  be  mad  (16). 

4.  To  have  a  prosperous  voyage. 


5.  To  my,  his,  &c.  satisfaction :  satis¬ 

factorily  ;  successfully. 

6.  To  fight  on  horseback. 

6*.  It  is  a  breach  of  duty. 

7.  He  sends  the  most  faithful  slave  he 

has. 

8.  He  was  the  first  to  do  this,  ) 

(Or)  He  was  the  first  who  did  this.  $ 
So ,  He  was  the  only  one  who  did  it. 

9.  Such  is  your  temperance, 

Or,  With  your  usual  temperance. 


Latin. 

I  and  you, 

I  and  Balbus. 

Denies  (negat)  that  he  has  sinned. 

Denies  that  he  has  ever ,  &c. 

He  promises  that  he  will  come  (acc.  with 
inf.) 

He  hopes  that  he  shall  live  (acc.  with 
inf.) 

He  undertakes  that  he  will  do  it  (acc. 
with  inf.) 

He  pretends  that  he  is  mad  (acc.  with 
inf.:  pron.  expressed). 

To  sail  from  (  —  according  to)  one’s 
thought  or  intention  (ex  sententid 
navigare.) 

Ex  sententid. 

To  fight  from  (ex)  a  horse,  b 

It  is  against  (contra)  duty. 

He  sends  the  slave,  whom  he  has  the 
most  faithful. 

He  the  first  (person)  did  this  (55). 

He  alone  did  it  (solus  fecit). 

'  Which  is  your  temperance. 

Of  which  temperance  you  are. 

For  (  =  in  proportion  to)  your  tem 
(  perance  (56). 


"  a  Obs.  Says  not  should  not  be  translated  by  nego  unless  it  is  in  answer  to  an 
actual  or  virtual  question.  When  the  not  is  closely  connected  with  the  following 
rerb,  it  should  be  translated  by  non. 

%  *»  Ex  equis,  if  more  persons  than  one  are  spoken  of. 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


203 


English. 


Latin. 


10.  JLs  far  as  I  know. 

11.  It’s  all  over  with  .  .  . 

f  To  make  the  same  boast. 

.o  J  To  make  the  same  promise. 

*  j  To  make  many  promises. 

[  To  v.tter  many  falsehoods. 

13.  To  take  by  storm. 

14.  That  nothing  .  .  . 

That  nobody  .  .  . 

That  never  .  .  . 

[This  is  only  when  ‘  that  ’  intro¬ 
duces  a  purpose .] 

15.  No  food  is  so  heavy  as  not  to  be  di¬ 

gested,  &c. 

He  is  so  foolish  as  to  think,  &c. 

16.  She  never  saw  him  without  calling 

him,  &c. 

17.  He  could  scarcely  be  restrained 

from  throwing ,  &c. 

18.  I  left  nothing  undone  to  appease 

him. 

I  cannot  but,  &c. 

19.  I  will  not  object  to  your  doing  it. 

20.  It  cannot  be  that  the  soul  is  not 

immortal  (89). 

f  Nothing  prevents  him  from  do- 

21  J  ins il- 

■  j  So,  nothing  deters  him  from  do- 
l  ing  it. 

22.  It  was  owing  to  you  that  I  did  not 

succeed. 

23.  By  sea  and  land. 

5  To  be  within  a  very  little  of .  .  . 
(  Or,  But  a  little  more  and  .  .  . 
Not  to  be  far  from. 


Which  I  may  know  (quod  secum). 

It  is  done  concerning  ( actum  est  de ). . 
To  boast  the  same  thing  (59). 

To  promise  the  same  thing  (59). 

Tone0™186  (  ™ny  things. 

'To  fight  a  place  out  by  force  (per  vim 
expugnare). 

Lest  any  thing  ( ne  quid). 

Lest  any  body  (ne  quis). 

Lest  ever  (ne  unquam). 


No  food  is  so  heavy  but  (quin)  it  may 
be  digested,  &c. 

So  foolish  that  he  thinks  (ut),  66,  d. 

She  never  saw  him,  but  (quin)  she 
called  him,  &c. 

He  could  scarcely  be  restrained  but  that 
(quin)  he  should  throw  (88). 

I  left  undone  ( prcetermisi )  nothing 
that  I  should  not  (quin)  appease  him. 

I  cannot  do  (any  thing)  but  that  (fa- 
cere  non  possum  quin),  &c. 

I  will  not  object  but  that  (recusabo 
quin)  you  should  do  it. 

It  cannot  be  (fieri)  but  that  (quin)  the 
soul  is  immortal. 

Nothing  prevents  (obstat)  by  which  he 
should  the  less  do  it  (quominus  faciat). 

Nothing  deters  him  by  which  he  should 
the  less  do  it  (99). 

It  stood  through  you  by  which  I  should 
the  less  succeed  (per  te  stetit  quomi¬ 
nus,  &c.,  99). 

By  land  and  sea. 

*  To  be  a  very  little  distant  but  that .  . 

;e  (impers.)  quin.J 

abesse. 


[minimum  abes 
Haud  multum  ) 
Haud  procul  $ 


25. 

26. 

27. 

28. 


1  almost  think, c 
I  don’t  know  whether, 

To  take  away  any  one’s  life. 


&c. 


The  city  of  Rome,  the  island  of 
Cyprus. 

He  did  this  as  (or  when)  Consul. 

$  I  may  go. 

I  I  am  permitted  to  go. 

I  ought  to  do  it.  , 

I  ought  to  have  done  it. 


Haud  scio  an ;  nescio  an,  &c. 

To  snatch  away  life  to  (  =:  from)  any 
one  (vitam  alicui  eripere.  132). 

The  city  Rome ;  the  island  Cyprus. 

He  Consul  (  =  being  Consul)  did  this. 
$  To  me  it-is-permitted  (licet)  to  go 
)  (124). 

It  behoveth  me  (oportet  me)  to  do  it. 

It  behoveth  me  (oportuit)  to  do  it  (126). 


c  Haud  scio  an,  nescio  an,  dubito  an  may  be  followed  by  the  negatives,  nemo , 
nihil,  nullus ,  nunquam,  or  by  the  for  is  that  follow  negatives,  quisquam ,  quic - 
quam,  ullus,  unquam.  Haud  scio  an  iemo  approaches  nearer  to  a  denial  than 
haud  scio  an  quisquam.  (G.)— But  Cicero  and  his  contemporaries  never  omit 
the  negative.  (Matthid,  Hand,  &c.) 


£04 


TABLE  OF 


English. 


Latin. 


29.  I  am  at  leisure  to  read. 


30.  I  have  need  of  food. 


4P 


31. 


32. 

33. 

34. 

35. 

36. 


37. 


38. 

39. 


40. 

41. 

42. 

43. 

44. 

45. 


There  is  need  of 


1 


C  making-haste, 
deliberation, 
prompt  execu¬ 
tion. 


How  many  are  there  of  you? 
How  many  are  there  of  us? 
Three  hundred  of  us  are  come. 


Of  whom  there  are 


few. 

very  many. 


Very  many  of  which  .  . 
Some  mock,  others  approve. 


One  was  a  Greek  ;  the  other  a  Ro-  * 
man. 

Such  a  lover  of  truth. 

To  take  in  good  part.  , 

He  was  condemned  in  his  ab¬ 
sence. 

To  prefer  a  capital  charge  against 
Caius. 

To  bring  an  action  against  a 
man  for  bribery. 

To  prefer  a  charge  of  immorali¬ 
ty  against  Caius. 

To  inform  a  man  of  a  plan. 


Without  any  danger  .  .  . 

It  is  characteristic  of .  .  . 

It  is  incumbent  on  .  .  . 

It  \sfor  .  .  . 

It  demands ,  or  requires,  firmness. 

It  shows,  or  betrays ,  weakness. 

Any  man  may  do  it. 

It  is  not  every  man  who  can,  Ac.  y 


It  is  wise. 


To  reduce  to  subjection.  ) 

To  bring  under  his  dominion.  $ 
To  be  capitally  condemned. 

To  be  acquitted  of  a  capital  charge. 
Common  to  me  and  you. 

To  compare  things  together.  * 

To  threaten  a  man  with  death. 

To  prefer  death  to  slavery. 


There  is 
need  of 
(Opus  est) 


< 


There-is-leisure  {vacat)  to  me  to  read 

(154). 

C  (1)  There  is  to  me  a  business  with 
<  food  {prep,  omitted). 

(  (2)  Food  is  a  business  to  me. 

'  (the  matter)  being  hasten- 
ed. 

(the  matter)  being  con¬ 
sulted. 

(the  matter)  promptly 
done  (177) . 

How  many  are  ye  ?  {quot  estis?) 

How  many  are  we  7  {quot  sumus?) 

We  (being)  three  hundred  are  come. 
(Trecenti  venimus.) 

Who  are  5  few‘ 

l  very  many. 

Which  very  many  (quae  plurima)  .  .  . 
Others  mock ;  others  approve  (alii — ■ 
alii). 

The  other  was  a  Greek ;  the  other  a 
Roman  (alter— alter). 

So  ( adeo )  loving  of,  Ac. 

Boni  consulere. t  (See  185.*) 

He  being  absent  was  condemned. 


To  make  Caius  an  accused-person 
{reus)  of  a  capital  matter  (187). 

To  make  a  man  an  accused-person  ol 
bribery  {gen.) ;  or,  about  bribery  (de). 

To  make  Caius  an  accused-person 
{reus)  about  morals  (de  moribus: 
187). 

To  make  a  man  surer  of  a  plan  {certio¬ 
rem  facere). 

Without  ( expers ,  adj.)  all  danger  . 

It  is  (a  mark)  of  .  .  . 

It  is  {the  duty)  of .  .  . 

It  is  {the  character ,  privilege ,  Ac.)  of.  . 

It  is  (a  thing)  of  (  =  for)  firmness. 

It  is  (a  mark)  of  weakness. 

It  is  any  man’s  {task)  to  do  it. 

It  is  not  every  man’s  {task)  to  do  it 
(non  cujusvis  est),  Ac. 

A  is  {the  conduct)  of  a  wise  man. 

Words  in  brackets  to  be  omitted 

To  make  of  his  own  dominion  {suet 
ditionis  facer  e) . 

To  be  condemned  of  the  head. 

To  be  acquitted  of  the  head 

Common  to  me  with  you. 

Tr  compare  things  amongst  (or  be - 
■ween)  themselves  (inter  se)  221  (<?.). 
j  threaten  death  to  a  man  (222). 

.o  reckon  slavery  after  death  (servitu¬ 
tem  morti  posthabere ,  227). 

(or,  as  in  Eng.,  with  anteponere). 


*  ASqui  boni  facere  :  in  bonam  partem  accipere. 


DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


205 


English. 

46.  To  surround  the  city  with  a  wall. 
To  besprinkle  a  man  with  praises. 
»  To  put  on  a  garment. 


To  take  the  enemy’s  camp,  bag¬ 
gage,  Ac. 

To  obstruct  (or  cut  on )  the  ene¬ 
my’s  flight. 

To  cut  off  the  supplies  of  the 
Gauls. 


47.  I  have  a  book. 

I  have  two  books. 

48.  To  come  )  t0  the  assistance 

£°send  ,  (  Ctesar. 

To  set  out  3 

49.  To  give  as  a  present. 

To  impute  as  a  fault. 


of 


60.  To  be  a  reproach ,  or  disgraceful. 
To  be  very  advantageous. 

To  be  odious  ;  hateful. 


Latin. 

To  give-round  ( circumddrc )  a  wall  to 
the  city  [or  as  in  Eng.]. 

To  besprinkle  (aspergere)  praises  .o 
man  [or  as  in  Eng.]. 

To  clothe  ( induere )  myself  with  a  gar¬ 
ment  ;  or  to  put-on  ( induere )  a  gar¬ 
ment  to  myself. 

■  To  strip  ( exuere )  the  enemy  of  their 
camp,  baggage,  Ac.  (abl.)  233. 

To  shut-up  ( intercludere )  flight  to  the 
enemy  (233). 

To  shut-up  ( intercludere )  the  Gauls 
from  their  supplies  (abl.  commeatu ). 
233. 

There  is  a  book  to  me. 

There  are  two  books  to  me  (236). 

To  send'  l 10  Cme*?Jg  an  assist‘ 
To  set  out.  $  ance(dat.). 

(Auxilio  venire,  mittere,  proficisci.) 

„  To  give  for  a  present  (do  no  dare). 

To  furn  ft  tyor  a  fault  (**•> • 

(Culpae,  or  vitio  dare,  or  vertere.) 
To  be  for  a  reproach  (opprobrio  es»e). 
To  be  for  a  great  advantage  (magnae 
utilitati  esse). 

To  be  for  a  hatred  ( odio  esse). 

(So  impedimento ,  honori ,  Ac.,  esse.) 
*  Quanto  odio  est !  {how  odious  it  is !) 


*  Obs.  ‘How’  before  the  adj.  must 
be  ‘  quantus  ’  in  agreement  with 
subst. 

[51.  To  throw  himself  at  Caesar’s  feet.]  [Se  Caesari  ad  pedes  projicere;  or  lite 

rally.]  See  p.  89,  note  1. 


52.  Caius  would  say  .  .  . 

Caius  used  to  say  .  .  . 

53.  I  fear  that  he  will  come. 

«.  I  fear  that  he  will  not  come. 

64.  The  war  against  Pyrrhus. 
Connection  with  Pompey. 

Rest  from  labours. 

Wrongs  done  to  Caius. 

55.  He  did  it  that  he  might  the  more 

easily  escape. 

56.  To  make  Caesar  retire. 


Dicebat. 

I  fear  lest  he  come  {ne  veniat). 

I  fear  that  he  come  (ut  veniat*). 

The  war  of  Pyrrhus  ] 

Connection  of  Pompey  (  G  ... 

Rest  of  labours  genitive. 

Wrongs  of  Caius  J 

He  did  this,  by  which  {quo)  he  might 
more  easily  escape. 

To  make  that  Caesar  should  retire  {fa- 


cere ,  or  efficere  ut,  Ac.). 

67.  It  is  becoming  to  (or  in)  an  orator  « It  becomes  an  orator  to  be  angry,  Ac. 
to  be  angry,  Ac.  {oratorem  decet). 

So,  it  is  unbecoming  to  (or  in)  an  {Oratorem  dedecet  .  .  .)  259. 
orator  .  .  . 

58.  This  victory  cost  them  many  4  This  victory  stood  d  to  them  at  many 

wounds.  wounds  {abl.).  266. 

[Compare  the  Eng.  ‘  this  stood  me  in 
a  large  sum.’] 

59.  Hardly  any  body.  *  Almost  nobody  {nemo  fere)  249. 


*  *  Or,  ne  non  veniat. 

\  d  This  notion  is  probably  that  of  a  debt  standing  against  t  man  in  his  credi¬ 
to/*»  bookt 


206 


TABLE  OF 


/ 


English. 

1)0.  Make  a  bad,  &c.  use  of,  &c. 

61.  He  deserves  to  be  loved. 


62.  To  inflict  punishment  on  a  man. 

% 

63.  To  gain  a  triumph  for  a  victory 

over  the  Gauls. 

64.  A  blessing  on  )  your 

Good  luck,  or  success  to  )  valour. 

s  Go  on  in  your  valour ! 

65.  You  are  envied,  spared,  favoured, 

answered,  &c.  • 

66.  I  don’t  know  when  the  letter  will 

be  written. 

67.  It  seems ,  is  said,  &c.  that  Caius  has 

retired. 

68.  We  have  walked ,  come,  &c. 


59.  To  have  reigned  above  six  years. 

70.  Before  the  Consulship  of  Caius. 

71.  He  went  to  a  school  at  Naples. 

72.  We  should  all  praise  virtue. 

A  time  to  play. 

*.  Fit  to  carry  burdens. 

He  is  born  (or  inclined)  to  act. 

Prepared  to  take  up  arms. 

73.  Whilst  they  are  drinking,  playing, 

&c. 

To  be  able  to  pay. 

To  be  equal  to  bearing  the  burden. 

'  To  tend  to  the  preservation  of  lib¬ 
erty. 

74.  I  have  to  do  another  page, 
v  I  will  have  it  done. 

75.  He  gave  them  the  country  to  dwell 

in. 

76.  I  go  to  consult  Apollo. 


77.  Balbus  having  left  Lavinium,  &c. 


78.  From  the  foundation  of  Rome. 
,From  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem. 
The  honour  of  having  saved  the 

king  (of  the  king’s  preservation). 

79.  He  does  it  without  robbing  others. 
He  goes  away  without  your  per¬ 
ceiving  it. 


Latin 

Use  badly  (273). 

s  He  is  a  deserving  person,  who  should 
be  loved  (dignus  est  qui  ametur). 
276. 

To  affect  a  man  with  punishment  (276) 
(aliquem  poena  afficere). 

To  triumph  concerning  (de)  the  Gauls. 

Be  thou  increased  in  valour  (macte 
virtute  esto :  voc.  for  nom.  280). 

•i*  ( Plur .  macti  este !) 

It  is  envied  (spared,  favoured, answered, 
&c.)  to  you  (290). 

I  don’t  know  when  it  will  be  ( quando 
futurum  sit)  that  ( ut )  the  letter  be 
written  (290). 

Caius  seems,  is  said,  &c.  to  have  retired 
(nearly  always). 

It  has  been  walked ,  come,  &c.  (that  is, 
by  us :  ambulatum,  ventum  est). 

[This  is  only  an  occasional  and  possible 
construction.] 

To  be  reigning  his  seventh  year. 

Before  Caius  Consul  (ante  Caium  con¬ 
sulem). 

He  went  to  Naples  to  {prep.)  a  school. 

Virtue  is  to-be-praised  by  all  {laudan¬ 
da). 

A  time  of  playing. 

Fit  for  burdens  to  be  carried  {oneribiu 
gestandis  idoneus). 

He  is  born  {or  inclined)  for  acting  {ad 
agendum). 

Prepared  for  {ad)  arms-to-be-taken-up. 

i  During  drinking,  playing,  &c.  {inter 
bibendum,  ludendum,  &c.) 

*  To  be  for  paying  (solvendo  esse). 

To  be  for  bearing  the  burden  (oneri 
ferendo  esse). 

,To  be  of  liberty  to-be-preserved  {con¬ 
servandae  Ubertatis  esse). 

Another  page  is  to-be-done. 

,1  will  cause  it-to-be-done  (curabo  faci¬ 
endum). 

He  gave  them  the  country  to  be  dwelt 
in  (habitandam).  354. 

I  go  intending-to-consult  (consulturus) 
Apollo  (354). 

Balbus,  Lavinium  being  left,  <fcc. 
Balbus,  when  he  had  left  Lavinium, 
&c. 

(Relicto  Lavinio ;  or  quum  reliquis¬ 
set  Lavinium :  363,  a.) 

From  Rome  founded  (a  Roma  condita). 

From  Jerusalem  destroyed.  (363). 

•’The  honour  of  the  saved  king  {servati 
regis  decus). 

He  does  it,  not  robbing  others. 

He  goes  away,  you  not  perceiving  it  {to 
non  sentiente). 


DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


207 


English. 

They  condemn  him  without  hearing 
him. 

60.  I  have  completed  the  work.  * 
v  I  see  plainly  through  his  design.  < 

81.  I  heard  him  sing. 

I  saw  him  walk. 

82.  That  only. 

And  that  too. 

*  By  a  good  man  it  is  true ,  but  an  * 

unlearned  one. 

*  Literature,  and  that  too  of  no  com-  ► 

mon  kind. 

83.  A  slave  of  mine. 

84.  He  took  away  all  my  care. 

85.  That  famous  Medea. 

86.  Those  whom  we  love  we  also  wish 

happy. 

87.  Something  or  other  obscure. 

Some  chance  or  other. 

Somewhat  disturbed. 

88.  Henry,  Charles,  and  John. 

*89.  Every  opinion  that ,  &c. 

Every  man  who. 


90-  One  Balbus. 

91.  One  runs  one  way,  another  anoth-  ) 
er.  > 

Different  men  run  different  ways.  ) 
Some  run  one  way,  others  another. 


92.  The  best  men  always ,  &c. 

Hidden  snares  are  always,  &c. 


All  the  wisest  men. 

93.  These  are  hard  to  avoid.  'J 

There  is  difficulty  in  avoiding  ( 
these.  J 

He  has  the  greatest  difficulty  in  sus¬ 
pecting. 

94.  He  is  too  proud  to  steal. 

96.  I  armed  the  greatest  forces  I  could. 


Latin.  ' 

They  condemn  him  unheard  (inaudi¬ 
tum). 

I  have  the  work  completed  ( opus  abso¬ 
lutum  habeo).  364. 

I  have  his  design  seen  through  (per¬ 
spectum  habeo).  364. 

I  heard  him  singing. 

I  saw  him  walking  (361). 

That  at  length  (is  demum). 

Et  is,  tsque,  idemque. 

By  a  good  man  that  indeed ,  but  an  un¬ 
learned  one  (a  bono  illo  quidem  viro, 
sed — ,  or  sed  tamen,  383). 

Literature,  nor  that  of-a-common-kind 
( nee  ecc  vulgares). 

‘  My  slave or  1  a  certain  one  out  of 
(quidam  ex)  my  slaves.’ 

He  took  away  from  me  ( mihi )  ad  care 

That  Medea  (Medea  ilia). 

Those  whom  we  love,  the  same  (eos¬ 
dem)  we  wish  happy. 

1  know  not  what  of  obscure  ( nescia 
quid  obscuri). 

I  know  not  what  chance  (nescio  quis  ca¬ 
sus). 

Disturbed  I  know  not  what  (nescio  quid 
conturbatus). 

(  Henry,  Charles,  John. 

\  Henry,  and  Charles,  and  John. 

Whatever  opinion  (quacunque  opinio). 

Whoever  (quisquis) . 

(More  commonly  than  in  English,  as 
we  seldom  use  whoever ,  when  the 
notion  of  every  is  emphatic). 

A  certain  (quidam)  Balbus. 

Another  man  runs  another  way. 

Other  men  run  another  way  (or  other 
ways). 

[alius — alius  (or  some  adv.  derived 
from  a/ius).J 

Each  best  man,  &c.  (optimus  quisque). 

Each  hidden  snare,  &c.  (but  quisque 
may  be  used  in  the  plur.  when  a  subs. 
is  expressed  in  this  construction  :  oc¬ 
cultissimae  queeque  insidiae). 

Each  wisest  man  (doctissimus  juisque.) 

These  are  avoided  with  difficulty  (diffi¬ 
cile). 

(Difficilius,  difficillime,  when  requlr- 

He  suspects  with  the  greatest  difficulty 
(difficillime) 

He  is  prouder  than  that  he  (quam  ut  or 
quam  qui  with  subj.)  should  steal. 

I  armed  forces  (as  great)  as  the  greatest 
I  could  (quam  maximas  potui  co¬ 
pias). 


208 


TABLE  OF 


English. 

.i-  96.  As  great  a  difference  as  there  can  ) 
'possibly  be.  > 

The  greatest  possible  difference,  j 
*  97.  I  have  been  long  desiring.  * 

They  had  long  been  preparing. 

98.  When  I  take  my  journey,  I  will 
come. 

When  I  have  performed  this,  I  will 
come. 

When  he  is  come ,  he  will  tell  us. 

When  you  wish  to  play,  remem¬ 
ber  to  play  fair. 

*  As  you  sow ,  so  will  you  reap. 


I  will  do  it,  if  I  can. 

*  99.  They  do  nothing  but  laugh.  * 

*  100.  What  shall  I  do  7  ) 

What  am  I  to  do  7  >  ^ 

What  can  I  do  7  } 

4  Why  should  I  relat&?'~  •» 

What  was  I  to  do  7  ) 

What  should,  1  have  done  7  >  & 


What  ought  I  to  have  done  7  } 
101.  You  would  have  thought. 

You  would  have  believed. 

You  would  have  said. 

*  102.  1  remember  to  have  read. 

*  103.  It  would  have  been  better. 

104.  No  painter. 

,  This  does  not  at  all  terrify  me. 

105.  Even  this  is  not  just,  unless  it  be 

voluntary. 

►  106.  He  was  more  prudent  than  brave. 

y  107.  To  make  a  bridge  over  a  river. 
The  thing  in  question. 

108.  I  have  nothing  to  accuse  old  age 

of. 

I  have  found  scarcely  any  thing  to 
censure. 

Men  who  abound  in  silver,  in 
gold,  in  estates. 

Men  who  abound  neither  in  sil 
ver,  nor  in  gold,  nor  in  estates. 
A  pen  to  write  with. 

109.  [Constructions  with  the  relative.] 
(1)  Some  persons  think:  or  there 

are  some  who  think,  &c. 
g  (2)  You  have  no  reason  (cause,  occa¬ 
sion,  need,  &c.)  to  hurry. 


Latin. 

.A  difference  as-great-as  the  greatest  can 
be  (quanta  maxima  potest  esse). 

I  am  a  long  time  already  desiring  (Jam- 
pridem  cupio). 

They  were  a  long  time  already  prepar¬ 
ing  (413). 

When  I  shall  take  my  journey,  I  will 
come. 

When  I  shall  have  performed  this,  I 
will  come. 

When  he  shall  have  come,  he  will  tell  us. 

When  you  shall  wish  to  play,  remem¬ 
ber  to  play  fair. 

As  you  shad  sow,  so  will  you  reap. 

I  will  do  it,  if  I  shall  be  able. 

They  nothing  else  than  laugh  (nihil 
aliud  quam  rident). 

Quid  faciam  7 

Cur  heec  narrem  ? 

Quid  facerem  ?  (425.) 

Putares. 

Crederes. 

Diceres, 

Memini  me  legere. 

It  was  better  (utilius  or  satius  fuite).  * 

(Often)  nemo  pictor. 

This  terrifies  me  nothing  (nihil  me  ter¬ 
ret). 

Even  this  is  so  just,  if  it  is  voluntary 
(ita  justum  .  ...  si  est,  &c.). 

He  was  more  prudent  than  braver  (pru- 
dentior  quamTbr^tor).  452,  w. 

To  make  a  bridge  in  a  river. 

The  thing  de  quo  agitur. 

I  have  nothing  which  I  may  accuse  old 
age  (nihil  habeo  quod  incusem  sen¬ 
ectutem).  478. 

I  have  found  scarcely  any  thing,  which 
I  may  censure. 

Men  who  abound  in  silver,  who  in 
gold,  who  in  estates. 

Men  who  do  not  abound  in  silver,  not 
in  gold,  not  in  estates  (478). 

A  pen,  with  which  one  may  write  (478). 

There  are  some  who  think  (subj. : 
Sunt  qui  putent,  &c.). 

There  is  nothing  (on  account  of) 
which  you  should  hurry  (nihil  esi 
qiiod  festines). 

(or)  There  is  not  (any  thing,  for)  which 
you  should  hurry  (non  est  quod,  &c.). 


'  *  So,  satis,  par,  rectum,  justum,  idoneum,  optimum ,  consentaneum ,  melius , 

csquius,  rectius ,  satius  erat — fuit— fuerat. 


DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


20U 


English. 

(3)  He  was  despised  by  them,  for 
they  saw  through  him. 

»  (4)  He  deserves  to  be  loved. *  * 


(5)  He  is  not  a  proper  person  to  be 
received. 

(6)  None  are  so  good  as  never  to 
sin. 

(7)  Of  such  a  kind  that  we  can  neg¬ 
lect  duties  for  their  sake. 

(8)  Too  short  to  be  the  whole  life 
of  man. 

(9)  I  am  not  a  man  (or,  am  not  so 
foolish ,  simple,  credulous,  &c.)  as 
to  believe  this. 

(10)  Who  am  I  that  my  writings 
should  be  honoured  thus? 

(11)  They  sent  ambassadors  to  sue 
for  peace. 

(12)  He  deserves  praise  (blame,  &c.) 
for  having  done  this. 

(13)  Wr retched  man  that  I  am,  who 
thought,  &c. 

«  (14)  How  few  there  are  who,  &c. 

1 10.  In  censuring  them  you  censure 

me. 

111.  It  is  many  years  since  he  was  first 
in  my  debt. 

«  1  congratulate  you  on  your  influ¬ 
ence  with  Caius. 

,  1  don’t  like  to  be  abused. 

112.  A  mortal  body  must  necessarily 

perish. 


There  is  no  living  pleasantly. 

113.  In  addition  to  this,  he  is  blind. 

114.  He  accused  him  of  having  betrayed 

the  king. 

His  having  spared  the  conquered, 
is  a  great  thing. 

He  praised  (or  blamed  him) ^/br 
having  done  this. 

115.  Many  persons  admire  poems  with¬ 

out  understanding  them. 

You  cannot  be  ruined  without 
ruining  others. 

116.  Instead  of  reading,  he  is  at  play. 


Latin. 

He  was  despised  by  them,  who  saw 
through  him  ( qui  with  subj.). 

He  is  a  worthy  person  who  should  be 
loved.  (Dignus  est,  qui  ametur;  or 
quem  ames.  So,  indignus  est,  qui 
ametur:  or,  quem  ames.) 

He  is  not  a  proper  person  who  should ‘ 
be  received  {or,  whom  you  should  re¬ 
ceive). 

No  one  is  so  good  icho  never  sins 
(subj.). 

Of  such  a  kind. /or  the  sake  of  which  we 
can  neglect  duties. 

Shorter  than  which  can  be  (quam  quae 
sit  or  possit  esse)  the  whole  life  of 
man. 

I  am  not  that  (person)  who  can  believe 
(is  qui  credam). 

W7ho  am  I  whose  writings  should  be 
honoured  thus? 

They  sent  ambassadors  tcho  should  sue 
for  peace  ( qui  pacem  peterent). 

He  deserves  praise,  &c.  who  did  this 
(subj.). 

O  me  miserable,  icho  thought,  &c.  ( qui 
with  subj.) 

Q.uotusquisque  est  qui .  .  ?  (with  sub;.) 

TI7 icn  you  censure  them,  you  censure 
me  (quum  with  indie.). 

There  are  many  years  when  he  is  in 
my  debt  (quum  in  meo  aere  est). 

I  congratulate  you,  when  you  avail  so 
much  with  Caius  (quum,  generally 
quod,  tantum  vales  apud  Caium). 

I  am  not  abused  willingly  (libenter, 

It  is  necessary  that  a  mortal  body 
should  perish. 

[Mortale  corpus  interire  (or  intereat) 
necesse f  est.] 

It  cannot  be  lived  pleasantly  (504). 

Hither  is  added,  that  he  is  blind  (hue 
acced-it,  ebat,  &c.  uts).  513. 

He  accused  him  that  (quod)  he  had  be¬ 
trayed  the  king  (subj.). 

It  (or  'this,'  ‘ that')  is  a  great  thing, 
that  (quod)  he  spared  the  conquered 
(indie.). 

He  praised  (or  blamed)  him  that  (quod) 
he  had  done  this  (subj.).  520. 

Many  persons  admire  poems,  nor  un¬ 
derstand  them  (520). 

You  cannot  be  ruined  so  as  not  to  ruin 
others  (ut  non  with  subj.).  521. 

He  is  at  play,  xchereas  he  ought  to  be 
reading  (quum  debeat). 


f  This  necesse  is  an  old  adj.  used  in  the  neut.  gender  only. 

*  More  commonly  quod. 


210 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM 


English. 

Instead  of  growing  rich  (as  he 
might)  he  is  growing  poor. 

i  Far  from  thinking  this ,  I  hold,  r, 
&c. 

117.  And  (but,  &c.)  if  this  is  granted. 

Who,  they  say,  was  killed. 

Who,  as  B.  says,  was  killed. 

By  which,  when  we  read  them ,  we 
are  affected. 

*  Do  not  think. 

*  Take  care  to  do  it. 

*•  Be  nir «  to  be ;  or  mind  you  are. 


Latin. 

He  is  growing  poor,  whereas  he  migtu 
grow  rich  (guum  posset). 

It  is  so  far  oft,  that  1  should  think  this, 
that,  &c. 

(Tantum  abest  ut - ut).  533. 

If  ichich  is  granted. 

Whom  they  report  to  have  oeen  killed 
Whom  B.  reports  to  have  been  killed. 
Which  when  we  read,  we  are  affected. 

Beware  of  thinking,  cave  putes. 

Be  unwilling  to  think,  noli  putor». 

K  Cura  ut  facias. 

f  Fac  ut  sis ;  or,  fac  si». 


PERFECT  AND  SUPINE. 


211 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  CAUTIONS. 

1.  When  must  him ,  her ,  them  (he,  she,  they),  be  translated  by  sui?  and  his,  her , 

its,  theirs ,  by  suns?  (When  the  pronoun  and  the  nom.  of  the  verb  stand 
for  the  same  person.  C.  i.  12.) 

2.  When  is  the  perf  in  a  sentence  with  ‘  that '  to  be  translated  by  the  present 

infinitive  ?  (When  the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  perf.  is  not  to 
be  described  as  over  before  the  time  referred  to  oy  the  principal  verb 

C.ii.  13) 

3.  When  must  ‘  should '  be  translated  by  the  ■present  infinitive  ?  (When  it  does 

not  express  duty  or  a  future  event. a  C.  hi.  13.) 

4.  When  are  would,  should,  signs  of  the  future  ?  (After  past  tenses.  C. 

iv.  16.) 

5.  When  should  'thing'  be  expressed  ?  (When  the  mas.  and  the  neut.  of  the 

adjec.  are  of  the  same  form.  C.  v.  21.) 

6.  Where  is  cum  placed  with  the  ablatives  of  the  personal  pronouns'?  (After, 

and  as  one  word  with,  them.  C.  vi.  25.) 

7.  When  a  preposition  follows  a  verb,  how  may  you  help  your  judgment  in 

determining  whether  the  preposition  gives  a  transitive  sense  to  the  verb ,  and 
is  probably  to  be  translated  by  the  inseparable  preposition  of  a  compound 
verb  ?  (By  trying  whether  the  preposition  clings  to  the  verb  in  the  passive 
voice.  C.  vn.  32.) 

8.  Is  'for'  before  a  noun  and  the  infn.  to  be  translated'?  (No.)  What  is  the 

construction'?  (Accus.  with  infin.  C.  via.  38.) 

9.  What  are  'as'  and  'but'  often  equivalent  to?  (Relatives.  C.  ix.  45,  and 

43  (a).) 

10.  How  is  'such'  often  used  in  English?  (To  express  size.)  How  is  it  then 

to  be  translated?  (By  tantus.  C.  x.  45.) 

11.  When  'that'  stands  for  a  substantive  that  has  been  expressed  in  a  former 

clause,  is  it  to  be  translated  into  Latin?  (No.  C.  xi.  47,  note.) 

12.  What  tense  is  ‘  I  am  come '  ?  (Perf.  definite  of  the  active  voice.)— what,  '  1 

was  come '  ?  (Pluperf.  of  act.)  What  verb  forms  the  perf.  active  with  am  7 
(Intrans,  verbs  of  motion.  C.  xn.  57,  note.) 

13.  When  a  verb  seems  to  govern  two  accusatives,  by  what  preposition  is  one  of 

them  often  governed  ?  (By  '  to.'  C.  xm.  60.) 

14.  When  must  ‘  that — not'  be  translated  by  ut  non  instead  of  ne?  and  that  no¬ 

body,  that  nothing ,  &c.,  by  ut  nemo ,  ut  nihil,  respectively  ?  (When  that 
introduces  a  consequence,  not  a  purpose :  whenever,  therefore,  a  ‘  so '  or 
'such'  goes  before  it.  C.  xiv.  77.) 

15.  How  must  the  En  g-fut.  be  translated  after  verbs  of  fearing ?  (By  the  pres. 

subj.  C.  xv.  96.) 


a  To  judge  of  this,  try  whether  you  can  turn  the  verb  with  should  into  the 
participial  substantive.  “It  is  strange  that  you  should  say  so.”  What  is 
strange?  Your  saying  so. 


212 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  CAUTIONS. 


16.  When  are  ‘who’  and  ‘ which*  dependent  interrogatives  ?  (After  words  ol 

asking ,  knowing ,  doubting,  telling,  &c.  C.  xvi.  112.) 

17.  Does ‘may’ ever  stand  for  can.? for  couZcZ?  (Yes.  C.  xvn.  131.) 

18.  When  is  th e  perf.  injin.  to  be  translated  by  the  pres,  injin.?  (After  might , 

could ,  ought ,  &c.,  when  the  action  is  not  to  be  described  as  over  before  the 
time  referred  to.  C.  xvm.  131.) 

19.  When  are  ‘  of  you,’  ‘  of  us,’  &c.,  not  to  be  translated  after  numerals,  super¬ 

latives,  &c.7  (When  all  are  spoken  of.  C.  xix.  175.) 

20.  Is  an  English  substantive  ever  used  adjectively?  (Yes.)  Where  does  it  then 

stand?  (Before  a  substantive.)  How  must  it  be  translated?  (Gene¬ 
rally  by  an  adj.:  sometimes  by  ex,  de  with  a  subst.  C.  xx.  234.) 

21.  For  what  does  cwhat’  sometimes  stand?  (For  how,  or  how-great.)  When 

must'  what’  be  translated  by  ‘quam’?  (When  itstandsfor  ‘ how ’) — when 
by  ‘quantus’?  (When  it  stands  for  how-great.  C.  xxi.  242.) 

22.  When  are  ‘for’  and  ‘as’  to  be  untranslated?  (When  the  noun  that  follows 

can  be  placed  in  apposition  to  another  noun  in  the  sentence.  C.  xxii. 
255.) 

23.  When  must  ‘one,’  ‘two,’  &c.,  be  translated  by  distributive  numerals?  ( When 

they  stand  for  ‘one  a-piece ,’  &c.  C.  xxm.  267.) 

24.  What  is  the  substitute  for  a  future  subjunctive  in  the  passive  verb  ?  (futurum 

sit,  esset,  &c.,  ut  .  .  .  with  the  proper  tense  of  the  verb.)  What  must  we 
take  care  not  to  use  for  it  ?  (The  part,  in  dus,  with  sim,  essem,  &c.  C. 
xxiv.  287.) 

25.  What  is  ‘  that  ’  often  used  for  after  an  expression  of  time  ?  (For  on  which ; 

the  abl.  of  relat.  C.  xxv.  308.) 

26.  Is  that  which  is  inform  the  present  participle  act.  in  ing,  always  a  participle? 

(No.)  What  else  may  it  be  ?  (The  participial  substantive.)  When  is  it 
always  the  participial  substantive  ?  (When  it  governs,  or  is  governed,  in¬ 
stead  of  merely  agreeing.)  To  what  parts  of  the  Latin  verb  does  the 
participial  substantive  correspond?  (The  Infin.  and  Gerund.)  Canthe 
participial  substantive  ever  be  translated  into  Latin  by  a  participle?  and 
if  so,  by  what  participle? — (Yes,  by  the  participle  in  dus:  but  the  part, 
in  dus  must  not  govern  the  substantive,  but  agree  with  it,  both  being  put 
into  the  case  that  corresponds  to  the  preposition  governing  the  participial 
substantive.  C.  xxvi .  330.) 

27.  Into  what  construction  must  ‘have’  before  an  infinitive  be  turned  for  trans¬ 

lation  into  Latin  ?  (Into  the  form  ‘  is,  or  are,  to  be — .’) 

(I  have  to  do  three  more  pages  =  Three  more  pages  are  tebe  done  by  me. 
C.  xxvii.  336.) 

28.  What  does  ‘  is  to  be  done  ’  generally  mean  ?  (Necessity,  fitness,  or  intention 

Does  ‘is  to  be  done’  always  mean  necessity,  fitness,  or  intention?  b  (No 
C.  xxviii.  336.) 

29.  What  does  ‘  is  to  be,’  &c.,  mean,  when  it  does  not  signify  necessity ,  JUness,  oi 

intention?  ( Ans .  Possibility.) 


•  t>  This  is  what  is  to  be  done  by  all  who  wish  to  please  the  king.  ( Necessity .) 
This  is  to  be  done  to-morrow.  ( Intention .) 

This  is  to  be  done ,  if  you  set  about  it  in  the  right  way.  ( Possibility .) 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  CAUTIONS. 


213 


30.  When  must  a  present  partic.  active  be  translated  by  a  perfect  participle ,  oi 

its  substitute  quum  with  the  perf.  or  pluperf.  subjunctive  ?  (When  the 
action  expressed  by  it  must  be  over,  before  that  expressed  by  the  verb  be¬ 
gins.  C.  xxx.  353.) 

31.  By  what  participle  of  a  deponent  verb  is  the  pres,  participle  often  translated  1 

(By  the  perf.  partic.  C.  xxxx.  365.) 

32.  How  is  (but ’  (=  except,  unless)  to  be  translated  after  a  negative?  (By  nisi 

ox  procter.  C.  xxxi.  451.) 

33.  When  is  lat  a  town’  not  to  be  translated  by  the  gen.  or  ablat.  ?  (When 

the  action  was  not  done  in  but  near  the  town  or  place  :  e.  g.  { a 
battle  at  Mantinea.)  How  is  ‘ at'  to  be  then  translated?  (By  apud 
or  ad.) 

34.  WThat  does  one  often  stand  for?  ( Some  one,  aliquis;  or  a  certain  one, 

quidam.) 

35.  When  an  English  word  is  followed  by  a  preposition,  what  should  you  always 

remember?  (To  consider  whether  the  Latin  word  to  be  used  is  followed 
by  a  preposition  or  by  a  case :  and  then  by  what  preposition,  or  what 

CMC.) 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX 


In  what  respect  does  a  verb  agree  with  its  nominative  case?  an  adjective 
with  its  substantive  ?  What  verbs  take  a  substantive  or  adjective  after  them  in 
the  nominative  ? 

[Verbs  of  becoming ,  being ,  seeming , 

With  passive  verbs  of  making ,  calling ,  deeming.] 

In  what  case  does  the  thing  by  which  stand  7  In  what  case  does  the  agent,  or 
person  by  whom,  stand?  When  should  the  pronoun  that  is  the  nom.  to  the 
verb  be  expressed  ? 

5  1.  When  two  or  more  nom.  cases  sing,  come  together,  in  which  number  should 
the  verb  be  put  ?  in  what  person  ? 

With  et—et,  quum—tum,  in  which  number  is  the  verb  generally  put  ?  (a). 
Which  of  the  Latin  words  for  and  is  confined  to  the  office  of  connecting 
similar  notions?  (d). 

§2.  What  case  does  the  infin.  take  before  it?  What  Eng.  conjunct,  is  some¬ 
times  to  be  untranslated?  When  ‘ that ’  is  to  be  untranslated,  in  what 
case  do  you  put  the  nom.  and  in  what  mood  the  verb  ? 

Mention  some  verbs,  &c.  that  are  followed  by  acc.  with  infin. 

( 1 )  Ve  rb  s  sentiendi  et  declarandi : 

Of  feeling,  wishing,  knowing,  ^  with  which  acc.  with  infin.  stands  as 
Believing,  saying,  trowing,  \  the  object. 

(2)  Nearly  all  impersonal  forms1  (with  which  acc.  with  infin.  stands  as 
the  subject),  except 

Contingit,  evenit,  and  accidit,  >  which  are  followed  by  ut. 

With  restat,  reliquum  est  and  fit,b  ) 

Do  any  verbs  of  the  class  sentiendi  admit  of  any  other  construction? 
[Yes,  those  that  express  emotion  are  often  followed  by  quod:  those 
that  express  wishing,  especially  opto,  by  ut.] 

§  4.  When  an  adjective  belongs  to  more  than  one  substantive  or  pronoun,  with 
which  should  it  agree  in  gender  ?  and  in  which  number  should  it  stand, 
even  when  the  substantives,  &c.,  are  all  sing.  ?  When  the  substantives 
are  things  that  have  not  life,  in  what  gender  is  the  adj.  generally  put  ? 
What  substantives  are  seldom  to  be  translated  ?c 
§  5.  What  are  respectively  the  demonstratives  or  antecedent  pronouns  to  qui, 
qualis ,  quantus,  quot  ? 


a  That  is,  where  in  English  we  use  iiV  as  the  representative  of  the  true 
nominative. 

b  And  sometimes  sequitur. 

c  But  when  ‘man.’  is  coupled  with  an  epithet  of  praise ,  it  should  genem’.y 
be  translated  (by  vir) ;  especially  if  it  is  an  apposition. 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 


215 


Is  the  relative  ever  governed  in  case  by  a  word  that  is  not  in  its  own 
clause  ? 

In  what  respects  does  the  relative  agree  with  its  antecedent  ?  [In  gen¬ 
der ,  number ,  and  person.\  When  the  antecedent  is  expressed  in  the 
relative,  and  omitted  in  the  principal  clause,  where  is  the  relative 
clause  often  placed  ?  what  pronoun  often  represents  it  in  the  princi¬ 
pal  clause  ? 

What  is  the  relative  4  what  ’  equivalent  to  ?  [4  That  which.'1'] 

When  the  relat.  agrees  with  some  case  of  a  subst.  expressed  in  its  own, 
but  not  in  the  principal  clause,  what  must  be  done?  [Some  case  of 
that  subst.  must  be  supplied  in  the  principal  clause.] 

i  b  For  what  does  an  infin.  sometimes  stand  ?  When  an  adj.  or  rel.  is  to  agree 
with  an  infin.  mood  or  sentence,  in  what  gender  must  it  be  put?  When 
the  rel.  has  a  sentence  for  its  antecedent,  what  do  we  often  find  instead 
of  the  rel.  only  ?  [7cZ  quod,  or  qucc  res  :  id  or  res  being  in  apposition  to 
the  sentence.] 

§  7.  What  is  the  great  rule  for  the  sequence  of  tenses?  (40.)  Is  the  perf.  with 
have  considered  a  past  tense?  [No.]  Is  the  Jut.  perf.  asubj.  tense? 
[No.]  How  should  lbut,'  or  a  relative  with  4  not ,’  generally  be  translated 
after  nobody,  nothing,  &c.  ?d 

$  8.  In  such  a  sentence  as  ‘  Thebes,  which  is  a  town,'  &c.,  should  which  agree 
with  Thebes  or  with  town?  When  does  which,  in  such  a  sentence,  agree 
with  its  proper  antecedent? 

§  9.  When  the  antecedent  has  a  superlative  with  it,  in  which  clause  does  the 
superlative  generally  stand  ?  He  was  the  first  person  who  did  it. 

§  10.  How  is  ‘  that  ’  to  be  translated  when  it  is  followed  by  may  or  might  ?  what 
does  it  then  express?  [A  purpose.]  How  is  4 that ,’  expressing  a  purpose, 
to  be  translated,  when  it  is  followed  by  not  or  any  negative  word  ? 

§  11.  How  is  lthat  ’  to  be  translated  after  so,  such?  what  does  it  then  express  ? 
[A  consequence.]  How  is  1  that  5  to  be  translated  when  the  sentence  has  a 
comparative  in  it  ?  What  is  quo  equivalent  to,  and  what  is  its  force  with 
the  comparative?  [Quo  is  equivalent  to  uteo;  with  the  comparative 
‘  that  by  this  ?  ’  ‘  that  the.']  Does  quo  ever  stand  for  *  that ’  when  there  is 
no  comparative  in  the  sentence  ?  [Yes  ;e  it  is  then  equivalent  to  4  that  by 
this  means.’]  How  is  4  not '  to  be  translated  before  the  imperative  or  subj. 
used  imperatively?  How  is  (as'  before  the  infn.  and  after  so,  suchj  to 
be  translated. 


4  Quin  cannot  stand  for  cujus  non,  cui  non ;  but  either  these  forms  must  be 
used  or  the  demonstrative  expressed  ( cujus  ille  vitia  non  videat;  or,  quin  ille 
ejus  vitia  videat).  In  the  nom.  or  acc.  qui  non  may  be  used,  and  should  be 
when  the  non  belongs  especially  to  the  verb.  It  is  compounded  of  the  old  abl. 
qui,  and  ne,  not.  It  does  not  therefore  itself  contain  the  pronoun  ;  but  the  nom. 
or  acc.  of  the  demonstrative  is  understood. 

e  “  In  funeribus  Atheniensium  sublata  erat  celebritas  virorum  ac  mulierum, 
quo  lamentatio  minueretur.”  (Cic.) 

»  f  Quin  must  be  used,  if  it  is,  4  as  not  to  .  .  .  &c.,’  after  a  negative  sentence. 


'216 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 


§  12.  What  does  the  Latin  inf.  never  express?"  When  the  English  inf.  ex¬ 
presses  a.  purpose,  how  must  it  be  translated  ?h  After  what  verbs  is  the 
inf.  to  be  translated  by  ut i  with  the  subjunctive? 

§  13.  Give  the  forms  for  that  nobody  ;  that  nothing,  that  no;  that  never.  When 
must  that  nobody  ;  that  nothing,  &c.,  be  translated  by  ut  nemo;  ut  nihil, 
&  c.? 

§  14.  How  must  ‘  qs  not  to  .  .  .  &c.’  after  a  negative  be  translated  ?  After  what 
verbs  when  used  negatively,  must  quin  be  used  ?  Is  non  dubito  ever  fol¬ 
lowed  by  acc.  with  infin.  ?  [Nearly  always,  when  dubitare  means  to  hesi¬ 
tate  ;  when  it  means  to  doubt,  the  acc.  writh  infin.  never  follows  it  in  Cicero, 
but  does  in  Corn.  NeposJ] 

§  15.  By  what  conjunction  are  verbs  of  hindering  followed  ?  [By  quominus , 
which  is  equivalent  to  ut  eo  minus.]  Are  verbs  of  hindering  followed  by 
any  other  conjunctions  ?  [Yes ;  they  may  be  followed  by  ne,  when  the 
thing  is  so  entirely  prevented  as  not  to  have  been  begun ;  by  quin  after  a 
negative  sentence :  and  sometimes  by  acc.  with  infin.k]  How  must  that 
not  be  translated  after  verbs  of  fearing  ?  how  must  that  be  translated  after 
verbs  of  fearing? 

§  16.  Which  interrogative  particle  asks  simply  for  information  ?  i  [NS.]  Which 
expects  the  answer  ‘yes?’  [Nonne.]  Which  the  answer  ‘no?’  [Num.] 

*  $  17.  When  are  questions  dependent  ?  [When  they  follow  and  depend  on  such 
verbs  as  ask,  doubt,  know ,  examine,  try :  it  is  doubtful ,  uncertain, m  &c.] 

In  what  mood  does  the  verb  stand  in  a  dependent  question  ?  In  whal 


s  Except  in  poetry. 

h  The  various  ways  of  expressing  a  purpose  are  given  in  the  following  table 

1 


Eo  ut  ludos  spectem, 
go  5  ludorum  spectandorum 


causa, 


>  I  am  going  to  see  the 
games. 


ludos  spectandi 
Eo  ludos  spectaturus, 

Eo  ad  ludos  spectandos, 

Eo  ludos  spectatum  ( sup .) 
i  The  general  rule  for  the  use  of  ut,  is  that  it  may  be  used  : 

(1)  To  express  every  request;  command  (except  after  jubeo);  advice. 

effect;  decree. 

(2)  To  introduce  the  conditions  of  an  agreement  or  treaty. 

(3)  It  is  used  after  all  intensive  words,  such  as  such,  so  ( tantis ,  talis,  tot,  ita 


adeo,  sic). 

(4)  All  purposes  may  be  expressed  by  ut.  (Crombie.j 
*  Obs.  Moneo  and  persuadeo  will  not  be  followed  by  ut  (but  by  acc.  and  inf.). 
when  the  person  is  not  warned  or  persuaded  to  do  something,  but  merely  tha' 
something  is  so. 


1  Thus  his  preface  begins  with  “non  dubito./ore  plerosque,”  &c. 
k  “  Nostros  navibus  egredi  prohibebant.”  (Cses.) 

i  But  nS  appears  sometimes  to  be  used  as  equivalent  to  nonne.  ‘  Estne  hoc  illi 
dicto  atque  facto  Fimbriano  simillimum  ?  ’  (Cic.  pro  Sext.  Rose.  Am.  33.) 

m  Obs.  If  you  have  any  doubt  whether  who,  which,  what ,  is  a  rel.  or  an  inter - 
rog.,  ask  a  question  with  the  clause,  and  see  whether  the  sentence  before  you 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX.  21T 

mood  must  the  verb  be  put  in  sentences  that  stand  as  the  acc.  to  a  pre¬ 
ceding  verb  ? 

I  19.  How  must  ‘ whether ’  be  translated  in  double  questions'?  how  ‘or?’  If 
‘ whether ’  is  untranslated,  how  may  ‘or’  be  translated?  Does  an  ever 
stand  before  a  single  question  ?  [Yes :  it  then  implies,  with  something  of 
impatience,  that  the  answer  must  be  ‘no.’]  By  what  must  ‘or  ’  not  be 
translated  in  double  questions? 

§  20.  Go  through  1  may  go,  &c.  J  might  have  gone,  &c.  I  can  do  it ;  I  could  hare 
done  it ;  I  ought  to  do  it ;  I  ought  to  have  done  it.  Translate,  I  ought  to  do 
it,  omitting  ut.  I  may  be  deceived.  How  is  the  perf.  injin.  generally 
to  be  translated  after  might,  could,  ought  ? 

8  21.  How  is  the  case  of  a  substantive  in  apposition  determined?  When  urbs 
or  oppidum  stands  in  apposition  to  the  name  of  a  tcnm,  does  the  verb 
agree  with  urbs,  oppidum,  or  with  the  name  of  the  town? 

§  22.  He  wishes  to  be  the  first.  He  says  that  he  is  ready. 

§  23.  They  may  be  happy.  We  may  be  neutral. 

§  24.  When  may  a  substantive  and  preposition  generally  be  translated  by  tha 
gen.?  [4ns.  When  the  prepos.  joins  it  io  another  substantive.]  How 

MUCH  PLEASURE  ;  MUCH  GOOD  ;  SOME  TIME. 

5  25.  What  do  you  mean  by  a  partitive  adj.  ?  What  case  follows  partitive  adjec¬ 
tives?  With  what  does  the  partitive  adj.  generally  agree  in  gender? 
In  what  gender  does  a  superlative  (or  solus)  stand  when  it  governs  a  genit. 
and  also  refers  to  another  subst.  ?  In  what  case  does  a  substantive  of 
description  stand  when  it  has  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it  ?  By  wrhat  case 
is  opus  est  followed  ?  What  other  construction  is  there  with  opus  est? 
There  is  no  need.  What  need  is  there?  The  top  of  the  mountain. 
The  middle  of  the  way.  The  rest  of  the  work.  The  whole  of 
Greece. 

8  26.  What  case  do  adjectives  that  signify  desire,  & c.,  govern?  What  case  do 
participles  used  adjectively  and  verbals  in  ax  govern  ? 

8  28.  What  substantives  are  omitted  after  to  be  ?  It  is  Cicero’s  part.  It  is 
your  part.  What  case  do  verbs  of  accusing,  &c.,  take  of  the  charge? 
What  case  do  satago ,  &c.,  govern  ?  What  case  do  verbs  of  remembering 
and  forgetting  govern  ?  In  what  case  may  a  neut.  pron.  stand  with  accu- 
.  sare,  admonere,  &c.  ? 

8  29.  With  interest  and  refert  in  what  case  is  the  person  to  whom  it  is  of  import 
ance  put  ?  [In  the  genitive  when  the  person  is  expressed  by  a  substan 
tive :  in  the  abl.fem.  when  a  possessive  pronoun  is  used.]  How  is  the  degree 
of  importance  expressed?  how  is  the  thing  that  is  of  importance  express¬ 
ed  ?  what  case  of  the  person  feeling  do  pudet,  &c .,  take  ?  what  case  of  what 
causes  the  feeling  ? 

8  30.  What  adjectives  govern  the  dat.  ?  Mention  some  adjectives  that  are  fol¬ 
lowed  by  ad.  What  cases  may  follow  propior,  proximus?  When  should 
similis  take  the  gen.  ?  (w.) 

8  31.  In  jphatcase  do  you  put  the  person  to,  for,  or  against  wlwm  the  action  U 


readily  and  obviously  answers  it.  ‘  I  don’t  know  who  did  it.  ‘  Who  did  it? ' 
‘I  don’t  know  who  did  it.*  Therefore  who  is  here  an  interrogative. 

10 


218 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 


done,  or  the  feeling  entertained  7  Mention  the  classes  of  verbs  that  take 
the  dat.  [Yerba  comparandi ;  dandi  et  reddendi ;  promittendi  ac  solvendi; 
imperandi  et  nuntiandi;  fidendi;  minandi  et  irascendi;  obsequendi  et 
repugnandi,  regunt  dativum  :  quibus  addas, 

Invideo ,  nubo^faveoqne,  indulgeo,  parco, 

Gratulor ,  auxilior ,  studeo ,  medeorque ,  racoque.J 
Do  any  of  these  take  the  acc.  also  ?  By  what  prepositions  may  verbs  oi 
comparing  be  followed  7  [By  cum  or  ad. J  How  is  together  to  be  trans¬ 
lated  after  compare  ? 

[‘  Together  ’  may  translated  be, 

After  compare,  by  '  inter  sed] 

What  verbs  of  advantage  and  disadvantage  govern  the  acc.  ?  He  threat¬ 
ens  ME  WITH  DEATH. 

[He  threatens  me  with  death  should  be, 

In  Latin,  threatens  death  to  me.] 

Of  verbs  of  commanding,  which  govern  the  acc.  only  7  which  the  dat.  or 
acc.  ? 

§  32.  What  case  do  sum  and  its  compounds  govern  7  What  exception  is  there  7 
Mention  the  compound  verbs  that  generally  govern  the  dat. 

[Most  of  these  compounded  with 
Prae,  con,  sub, 

Ad,  in,  inter,  ob : 

Many  of  those  compounded  with 
Ab,  post,  ante,  de, 

Re,  pro,  super,  e.] 

§  33.  He  surrounds  the  city  with  a  wall.  He  presents  me  with  a 

GARLAND." 

§  34.  What  verbs  govern  two  datives  7  What  case  often  follows  sum  where  we 
should  put  the  nom.  7  How  is  have  often  translated  7  My  name  is 
Caius  (239).  I  have  a  cow.  I  have  six  cows. 

§  35.  Do  neuter  verbs  ever  take  the  acc.  ?  Explain,  sitire  honores. 

§  36.  What  verbs  take  two  accusatives  7  Do  all  the  verbs  that  have  any  of  these 
meanings  take  two  accusatives  7  What  transitive  verbs  take  two  accusa¬ 
tives,  one  in  a  sort  of  apposition  to  the  other? 

§  37.  What  does  the  abl.  express?  In  what  case  is  the  price  put?  What  ad¬ 
jectives  stand  in  the  abl.  to  express  the  price,  pretio  being  understood  7 
What  adjectives  always  express  price  in  the  gen.  ?  What  substantives 
stand  in  the  gen.  after  verbs  of  valuing  ?  What  should  be  used  instead  of 
multi  and  majoris  ? 

§  38.  What  case  do  verbs  of  abounding,  &c.  govern  7  What  case  may  egeo  and 
indigeo  govern  7  What  case  do  verbs  of  freeing  from,  &c .,  take  7  What 
is  their  more  general  construction  in  prose  7  What  case  do  fungor,  &c. 
govern?0  In  what  case  is  the  manner,  cause ,  &c.,  put  7 

§  39.  How  is  a  roc.  sometimes  used  in  poetry  7  What  case  sometimes  stands 
in  apposition  to  the  voc.  ? 


"  Mihi  coronam,  or  me  corona  donat. 

the  phrase  ‘  potiri  rerum  ’  (to  become  a  ruling  power)  the  gen.  only  is 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 


219 


f  40.  In  what  case  is  the  agent  expressed  after  the  pass,  verb,  when  a,  ao,  is  not 
used?  After  what  part  of  the  verb  is  this  the  regular  construction  7 
What  verbs  cannot  be  used  -personally  in  the  pass,  voice  7  Go  through 
I  am  believed .p  Mention  some  verbs  that  have  a  pass,  construction  (286). 
What  is  the  substitute  for  a  fut.  inf.  pass.,  when  the  verb  has  no  supine 
to  form  it  with  iri?  i  hope  he  will  recover  (use  fore  ut). 

§  41.  What  verbs  can  govern  an  acc.  in  the  pass.  ?  Can  a  pass,  verb  or  partici¬ 
ple  take  an  acc.  of  th apart  affected?  We  have  walked  enough  (trans, 
by  the  pass.).  Which  is  the  more  common  in  Lat.  1  Caius  videtur, 
dicitur,  &c.,  esse,’  or  ‘  videtur ,  dicitur,  &c.  Caium,  esseV 
§  42.  How  is  a  noun  of  time  put  in  answer  to  when  ?  in  answer  to  for  how  long  7 
How  do  you  express  the  time  in  or  within  which  ?  How  do  you  express 
time  in  answer  to  how  long  before  or  after  ?  How  are  ante,  post,  used  in 
this  construction  7  How  do  you  express  a  point  or  space  of  future  time 
for  which  any  arrangement  is  now  made  7  How  do  you  express  the  exact 
time  by  or  against  which  a  thing  is  to  be  done?  Three  years  ago. 
Three  years  old.  Above  twenty  years  old* *  (307,  f)  Three 
YEARS  AFTER  HE  HAD  RETURNED  (310  (a)  ). 

§  43.  In  what  case  is  the  town  at  which  a  thing  is  done,  to  be  put?  In  what 
case  is  the  name  of  a  town  to  be  put  in  answer  to  whither  ?  in  answer  to 
whence ?  To  what  proper  names  do  these  rules  apply?  In  what  case  do 
vrbs  and  oppidum  stand  in  apposition  to  the  name  of  a  town  in  the  gen. 
(315)  7  How  is  local  space  expressed  7 

§  44.  Decline  ( grieving’ *  throughout.  Of  writing  a  letter.  I  am  to  ee 
loved.  Go  through,  I  must  write.  Go  through  epistola  scribenda. 
WThen  must  the  part,  in  dus  not  be  used  in  agreement  with  its  substan¬ 
tive  (332)?  We  must  spare  our  enemies.  At  home.  From  home. 


p  Mihi  creditur, 
Tibi  creditur, 
Illi  creditur, 
Nobis  creditur, 
Vobis  creditur, 
Illis  creditur, 


I  am  believed, 
thou  art  believed, 
he  is  believed, 
we  are  believed, 
you  are  believed, 
they  are  believed. 


*  These  constructions  admit  of  many  variations  by  the  introduction  of  natiu 
and  quam — “  Above  thirty-three  years  old.” 

major  annos  tres  et  triginta  natus; 
major  quam  annos  tres  et  triginta  natus; 
major  quam  annorum  trium  et  triginta; 
major  quam  tribus  et  triginta  annis.  (Z.) 


Dolere, 
dolendi, 
dolendo, 
dolere, 
dolendo, 

The  acc.  is  dolendum  only  when  governed  by  a  preposition, 
mulantquod  dolere  intermiserint’  (have  intermitted  grieving). 


«  N. 
G. 
D. 
Acc. 
Abl. 


grieving, 
of  grieving, 
to  grieving, 
grieving, 
by  grieving. 


‘  Se  peccati  insi- 


220 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 


Home  (after  a  verb  of  motion).  Into  the  country.  Prom  the  coun¬ 
try  In  the  country.  On  the  ground. 

§  45.  What  kind  of  sentences  may  be  translated  by  participles  (344)  ?  In  what 
case  do  a  noun  (or  pronoun)  and  participle  stand  when  the  noun  or  pro* 
noun  is  not  governed  by  any  other  word  ?  What  is  this  called  ? 

§  46.  He  gave  them  the  country  to  dwell  in.  What  does  the  part,  in  rus 
often  express  ?  What  does  the  part,  in  dus  often  express?  Express  ‘  to 
have  a  thing  made ,’  in  the  sense  of  causing  it  to  be  made.  [Faciendum 
curare.] 

§  47.  What  participle  is  wanting  in  all  but  deponents  and  neuter-passives? 
Having  left  his  brother.  [Relicto  fratre,  or  quum  reliquisset  fra 
trem.] 

§  48.  My  own  fault.  Their  own  fault  (373,  a).  When — self, — selves  are  to 
be  translated  by  ipse  and  a  personal  pronoun,  in  what  case  may  ipse 
stand  ?  [In  the  nom.  or  in  the  case  of  sui ,  according  to  the  meaning.*] 
When  may  him,  his,  her,  its,  theirs  in  a  dependent  sentence,  be  translated 
by  sui  or  suus,  even  when  they  denote  the  nom.  not  of  their  own,  but  of 
the  principal  sentence  ?  By  what  pronoun  must  him,  her,  &c.,  be 
translated,  when  sui  or  suus  would  be  understood  to  mean  the  nom.  of 
its  own  verb  ?  Does  suus  ever  relate  to  the  accusative  ?  With  what  pron. 
is  this  very  common  ?  Which  gen.  pi.  (um  or  i)  is  used  after  partitives 
(372) ? 

§  49.  What  is  the  difference  between  ‘is  qui  pugnat,’  and  ‘  hie  or  ille  qui  pugnat’ 
(376,  g)  ?  Which  of  these  three  pronouns  is  to  be  used  when  he,  him,  &c., 
is  without  emphasis,  simply  describing  a  person  or  thing  before  mentioned 
or  about  to  be  described  by  a  rel.  clause?  By  what  case  only  of  ‘is’  can 
his,  her ,  their,  be  translated?  [J.us.  By  the  gen.]  Of  two  things  already 
mentioned,  what  pron.  means  the  latter ?  what  the  former?  Which  pron. 
means  that  of  yours?  Medea  illa.  Distinguish  between  hic,  iste,  ille, 
referring  to  different  objects. 

§  50.  When  is  ‘any’  to  be  translated  by  quisquam  or  ullus?  when  by  quis? 
when  by  quivis,  quilibet?  when  by  aliquis  quispiam?  Does  quisquam 
ever  follow  si  (notew)?  By  what  pronoun  may  ‘a’  sometimes  be 
translated  ? 

§  51.  What  prefx  do  interrogatives  often  take?  whatq^ir?  How  should  1  al¬ 
ways  '  with  two  superlatives  be  translated  ? 

§  52.  When  are  the  pronouns  that,  those,  not  to  be  translated  ?  When  they 
stand  in  the  second  member  of  a  comparative  sentence  for  a  sub¬ 
stantive  expressed  in  the  first.]  W'hen  quam  is  omitted,  in  what  case  is 
the  following  subst.  put?  What  case  goes  with  comparatives  and  super¬ 
latives  to  express  the  measure  of  excess  or  defect  ?  How  are  the  Eng.  the 
— the  (  —  by  how  much — by  so  much )  to  be  translated  ? 

§  53.  Is  the  present  ever  followed  by  the  imperf  subj.?  When  ?  When  is  the 


*  ‘  He  wounded  himself,’  se  ipse  vulneravit  (  —  ipse,  non  alius,  se  vulneravit) : 
se  ipsum  vulneravit  (  =se,  non  alium, vulneravit).  Hence  ipse  is  to  be  in  the 
nom.  or  in  the  oblique  case,  according  as  the  notion  to  which  it  is  opposed,  or 
with  which  it  is  contrasted,  is  in  the  nom.  or  in  an  oblique  case. 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 


221 


Eng.  pres,  generally  translated  by  the  Lat.  future  ?  By  what  tense  is  the 
perf  definite  often  translated  ?  [Hns.  by  the  f  uture  perfect.']  How  are 
assertions  softened  in  Latin  ?  What  subjunctives  are  very  frequently  used 
in  this  way?  What  conjunction  is  often  omitted  after  velim,  &c.  I  have 
LONG  DESIRED  (410,  d). 

h  54.  Is  the  perf  subj.  ever  used  as  an  imperat.  ?  What  other  tense  is  some¬ 
times  used  as  an  imperat.  ?  By  what  tense  are  questions  of  appeal,  or 
questions  for  assent,  to  be  translated  ?  If  he  has  any  thing,  he  gives 
it.  [Si  quid  habet,  dat.r]  If  I  have  any  thing,  I  will  give  it.  [Si 
quid  habeam,  dabo.]  If  he  should  have  any  thing  he  would  give  it. 
[Si  quid  haberet,  daret :  but  much  more  commonly,  si  quid  habeat,  det.] 
If  he  had  any  thing  he  would  give  it.  [Si  quid  haberet,  daret.]  f 
he  had  had  any  thing,  he  would  have  given  it.  [Si  quid  habuisset, 
dedisset.)  How  is  1  possibility  without  any  expression  of  uncertainty  ’ 
translated  ?  How  is  ‘  uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decision  ’  trans¬ 
lated?  How  is  ‘  uncertainty  without  any  such  accessory  notion  ’  trans¬ 
lated  ?  How  is  ‘  impossibility  or  belief  that  the  thing  is  not  so,’  translated  ? 
May  the  consequence  and  the  condition  refer,  the  one  to  past,  the  other 
to  present  time  ?  When  the  consequence  has  ‘would  have ,’  how  must 
you  translate  the  pluperf.  indie,  in  the  conditional  clause?  With  what 
tenses  may  si  take  the  indie.?  With  what  tenses  does  si  always  govern 
the  subjunctive  ? 

156.  In  conditional  sentences  are  the  verbs  of  both  clauses  ever  in  the  subj. 
pres.  ?  [Yes  ;  ‘Si  quid,  habeat,  det ,’  should  be  always  preferred  to  ‘Si  quid 
haberet  daret,’  unless  it  is  to  be  intimated  that  the  supposition  will  not  be 
realized.]  What  are  the  conditional  forms  of  the  subj.  ?  When  should 
scripturus  essem  be  used  for  ‘  should  have  written’  ?  What  tenses  of  the 
indie,  are  used  for  the  subj.  in  conditional  sentences  ?  Is  si  ever  omitted  ? 
where  should  the  verb  of  the  sentence  then  stand  ?  What  are  the  con¬ 
junctions  for  although?  [Etsi,  tametsi,  quamquam 8  with  indic.  ;  licet 
with  subj.  What  is  quamvis,  and  what  mood  does  it  govern  in  Cicero? 
[However  much,  however ;  with  subj.]  W'hat  is  etiamsi,  and  what  mood 
does  it  govern?  [Even  if;  even  though;  with  indie,  or  subj.]  Do  any 
other  conjunct!,  express  though ?  [Yes;  sometimes,  quum ,  ut,  with 
subj.] 

$  57.  In  a  dependent  conditional  sentence,  the  verb  of  the  consequent  clause 
will  be  in  the  infin. :  what  infinitives  will  take  the  place  (respectively  of 
dot.  ?  of  dabit  ?  daret  ?  dedisset  ?  daturus  esset  ? 

§  58.  Explain  the  meaning  of  oblique  narration  ?  In  oblique  narration,  in  what 
mood  will  the  principal  verbs  stand?  [In  tne  infin.]  In  what  mood  will 
the  verbs  of  the  subordinate  clauses  stand,  provided  they  express  the 
words  and  opinions,  not  of  tne  narrator ,  but  of  the  speaker?  [In  the 


r  Either  the  condition  or  the  consequence,  or  both,  may  refer  to  a  past,  or  future 

time. 

•  WThen  these  conjunctions  take  the  subj.  the  sentence  is  generally  in  the 
obliqua  oratio,  taken  in  its  widest  sense.  (See  §  58  )  This,  however,  does  ntf 
hold  good  of  the  later  writers.  (Billroth.) 


222 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 


subj.)  In  oblique  narration  what  is  oft»  n  omitted?  [The  verb  or  partic. 
on  which  the  infinitives  depend.]  In  what  mood  are  questions  for  answei 
asked?  [The  subj.]  In  what  mood  are  questions  of  appeal  asked?  [In 
the  infin.]  When  questions  are  -  thus  asked  in  the  infn .,  may  interroga - 
fives  be  used  with  the  infn.l  [Yes.]  In  what  mood  is  the  charge  ex 
pressed  with  quod  ? 

%  59.  When  may  the  pres,  and  perf  subjunct.  be  used  in  oblique  narration, 
even  when  dependent  on  a  past  tense?  In  what  mood  will  remarks 
stand  that  are  the  reporter's  not  the  speaker's  ?  In  what  mood  do  the 
verbs  of  subordinate  clauses  stand,  when  the  principal  verb  of  the  propo¬ 
sition  is  in  infn.  or  subj.  ?  With  what  limitation  is  this  rule  to  be  ap¬ 
plied  ?  When  may  the  pres,  and  perf.  subj.  be  used,  although  the  gen¬ 
eral  rule  would  require  the  imp.  or  pluperf.  May  the  imp.  or  pluperf.  be 
ever  used,  when  the  general  rule  would  require  the  pres,  or  perf?  How 
are  the  ace.  and  infn.  used  with  nl  in  direct  narration  (473)  ? 

S  60.  Mention  some  words,  phrases,  &c.,  with  which  qui  takes  the  subj. 
[. Ans .  After  sum,  in  ‘sunt  qui,’  ‘  erant  qui,’ &c.,  and  after  negative  and 
interrogative  sentences,  nemo ,  niliil,  &c.,  est :  quis  est  ?  an  quisquam  est  ? 
quotusquisque  est  ?  &c.  Also  after  adsunt  qui,  non  desunt  qui,  &c.,  and 
similar  phrases  with  reperio,  invenio  (to  find).] 

i  61.  WThat  mood  does  qui  govern,  when  it  introduces  the  ground  of  an  asser¬ 
tion  ?  What  mood  does  qui  take  after  quippe,  utpote?  always  or  gene¬ 
rally']  What  mood  does  qui  take  when  it  is  equivalent  to  ut  with  a 
personal  or  possessive  pronoun?  Mention  some  phrases  with  which 
qui  has  this  force.  In  what  other  cases  does  qui  govern  the  subj.  (484, 
485)  ? 

§  62.  When  does  quum  take  the  indie.  ?  What  mood  does  quum  generally 
govern,  when  the  verb  of  the  sentence  is  in  the  imperf.  or  pluperf.  ? 
[The  subj.'-]  How  is  the  subject  of  congratulation  expressed  (492)? 
Mention  some  conjunctions  that  always  govern  the  subjunctive.  (Vocab. 
68.)  When  are  the  pres,  and  perf.  subj.  used  with  utinam?  when  the 
imperf.  and  pluperf.  ?  How  is  ‘  not 5  generally  expressed  after  utinam , 
dummodo,  &c. 

§  63.  When  the  principal  verb  is  in  the  present  tense,  in  what  mood  is  the  verb 
after  antequam  or  priusquam  expressed?  When  the  principal  verb  is  in 
'  the fut.,  in  what  mood  or  moods  may  the  dependent  verb  be?  When 
the  principal  verb  is  in  a  past  tense,  in  what  mood  or  moods  may  the  de¬ 
pendent  verb  be?  When  should  the  subj.  always  be  used  after  antequam , 
priusquam  ? 

"  64.  When  do  dum,  donee ,  quoad  (  =  until)  take  the  indicative  ?  when  the  sub¬ 
junctive?  What  mood  do  they  and  o^.amdiu  always  take,  in  the  sense  ol 
as  long  as?  With  the  adverbs  meaning  as  soon  as,  how  should  the  Eng¬ 
lish  pluperf.  generally  be  translated  (514)? 

§  65.  When  is  that  expressed  by  quod?  What  class  of  verbs  are  followed  by 
quod?  What  mood  does  quod  take?  with  what  exception? 

$  66.  WThat  was  the frst  of  the  month  called  by  the  Romans?  on  what  day  did 


1  But  the  indie,  of  lepeatcd  actions. 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 


223 


the  Nones  fall  ?  on  what  day  the  Ides  ?  In  what  months  were  the  Nones 
on  the  seventh ?  How  were  the  days  between  the  Kalends  and  Nones 
reckoned  ?  days  between  the  Nones  and  the  Ides?  days  after  the  Ides ? 
Give  the  rules  for  each  case. 

§  67.  What  may  be  used  instead  of  a  conjunction  and  personal  or  demonstrative 
pronoun?  Mention  some  circumlocutions  for  the  imperative. 

§68.  Was  a  sestertium  a  coin  ?  How  many  sesterces  made  a  sestertium!  What 
is  the  meaning  of  sestertium  with  numeral  adverbs?  Is  sestertium  de¬ 
clinable  in  this  construction  ?  How  may  the  value  of  sestertium  decies , 
centies ,  &c.,  be  got  approximately  (547,  note  *)  ? 

I  69.  Give  the  division  of  the  as.  Explain  asses  xisuroe.  By  what  other  name 
v/aa  this  rate  of  interest  expressed  ? 


V 


. 


* 


'  . 


J 

\ 


PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION 


TO 
/  c 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION. 


PART  U. 


A 


PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION 

PART  II. 

CONTAINING  A  FULL  VIEW  OF 

THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS  IN  LATIN, 

AND 

LONGER  LATIN  EXERCISES. 


THOMAS  KERCHEVER  ARNOLD,  M.  A., 

SECTOR  OF  LYNDON, 

AND  LATE  FELLOW  OF  TRINITY  COLLEGE,  CAMBRIDGE. 


CAREFULLY  REVISED  AND  RE-ARRANGED 

BY  REV.  J.  A.  SPENCER,  A.M. 


NEW-YORK : 

D.  APPLETON  &  COMPANY, 

346  &  8  4  S  BROADWAY. 

M.DOCC.I.YI. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1846, 

By  D.  APPLETON  &  COMPANY, 

In  the  Cierk  s  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Southern  District  of  I*  *f- Yorl 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


The  object  of  the  following  Work  is  to  supply  boys  with  an  easy 
collection  of  short  passages,  as  an  Exercise-book  for  those  who 
have  gone  once,  at  least,  through  the  First  Part  of  tr\e  Author’s 
*  Practical  Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composition." 


Lyndon, 
April  6,  1844. 


T.  K.  A. 


[Consult  the  Preface  to  Part  I.,  at  the  beginning  of  the  vol 

ume.] 


J.  A.  S. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


PART  II. 


PAGE. 


!  On  the  Order  op  Words  in  Latin  . .  233 

§  1.  Position  of  Attributives .  236 

2.  Dependent  Genitive .  239 

3.  Participial  Clauses .  240 

4.  Proper  Names .  241 

5.  Antithetical  Words .  242 

6.  Secondary  Emphasis ;  position  of  words  occurring  in  two  t 

clauses . |  **  *  ^3 

7.  On  the  position  of  Sum .  245 

8.  Pronouns .  246 

9.  Pronouns  (continued)  .  247 

10.  The  Relative .  249 

11.  The  Relative  (continued) .  250 

12.  Interrogatives .  252 

13.  Prepositions .  252 

14.  Conjunctions .  254 

15.  Conjunctions ;  autem,  enim,  igitur  with  esse .  255 

16.  Non.  Haud .  257 

17.  Comparatives,  &c. .  258 

II.  Longer  Latin  Exercises .  263 

Cautions .  303 

Differences  of  Idiom .  308 

Memorial  Lines .  312 

Versus  Memoriales .  313 

Vocabulary .  315 

Extracts  from  the  “  Antibarbarus” .  329 

Index  I. — English .  332 

Index  II.— Latin  and  Critical  Remarks . 350 


EXPLANATION  OF  MARKS,  ETC. 


Words  in  Italics  are  to  be  looked  for  in  the  Vocabulary.» 

- to  which  the  mark  |]  is  prefixed,  are  to  be  looked  for  in  the 

Antibarbarus. 

Df.  and  C.  stand  respectively  for  the  Differences  and  Cautions  at  the  end  of 
the  book. 

Df.  (1)  and  C.  (1)  stand  respectively  for  the  Differences  and  Cautions  of 
Part  I. 

a,  b,  after  a  word,  mean  that  that  word  is  to  be  the  first  or  second  word  re¬ 
spectively  in  the  clause. 

S  y,  mean  that  the  word  is  to  be  the  last,  or  last  but  one  (respectively)  in  tho 
clause. 

r.  /.  mean  that  the  relative  clause  is  to  be  placed  first. 

a.  v.  that  the  sentence  is  to  be  translated  by  the  active  voice. 

i  means  that  the  word  is  to  be  inserted  in  the  relative  clause. 

h  means  that  the  word  is  to  stand  near  the  (head  =)  beginning  of  the  sen¬ 
tence. 

ra  means  that  the  word  is  to  be  placed  in  as  emphatical  a  position  as  possible, 
near  the  middle  of  a  sentence. 

p  means  that  the  sentence  is  to  be  turned  into  a  participial  clause. 

ah  —  ah  indicates  that  the  order  is  to  be  retained. 

a  b  X  h  a  indicates  that  the  order  is  to  be  reversed. 

• 8  mean  that  the  words  over  which  they  are  placed,  are  to  be  separated. 

An  accent  over  a  word  means  that  it  is  emphatic. 

Words  in  spaced  printing  (printing)  are  those  to  which  the  direction  in 
timated  by  a  mark  or  reference  applies. 

0  prefixed  to  a  word,  or  to  several  words,  in  spaced  printing,  means  that  it  oi 
they  are  to  be  omitted. 


*  The  pupil  will  there  find,  not  the  word  only,  but  the  phrase  of  which  t  forma  a 
part.  For  other  words  a  dictionary  must  be  used. 


PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION 


TO 

LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION. 


i. 


ON  THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS  IN  LATIN. 

1.  In  the  usual  arrangement  of  a  Latin  sentence,  the  subject, 
as  the  most  important  word,  stands  first ;  and  words  which  modify 
the  meaning  of  another,  precede  the  word  whose  meaning  they 
modify. 

1.  Ratio  praeest;  appetitus  obtemperat. — 2.  Consuetudo  est  altera  natura. — 
3.  Habent  opinionem,  Apollinem  morbos  depellere.  * 

2.  Hence  (a)  oblique  cases  mostly  precede  the  verb  (or  other 
word)  on  which  they  depend  ;  ( b )  adjectives  and  dependent  geni¬ 
tives  precede  the  substantives  to  which  they  belong  ;  and  (c)  ad¬ 
verbs  precede  their  verbs  or  adjectives. 

(a)  Corporis  gravitatem  et  dolorem  animo  judicamus. 

(b)  1.  Mamertina  civitas. — 2.  Syracusius  Philistus. — 3.  Reliqua  vitae  in¬ 

stituta. 

(c)  1.  Sui  negotii  bene  gerens. — 2.  Sapientia  prope  singularis. 

3.  With  respect  to  the  usual  order  of  oblique  cases  ; — 

The  nearer  object  precedes  the  more  remote :  e.  g.,  the  accus. 
after  the  transitive  verb  precedes  an  abl.  of  manner  or  instru¬ 
ment,  &c. 

Helvetii  legatos  ad  Caesarem  mittunt.  C aes.  [/See  also  exx.  under  2  (a).] 

Descriptions  of  a  place  precede  the  mention  of  things  existing, 
Dr  actions  done  in  it. 

Caesar  a  Lacu  Lemano  ad  montem  Juram  millia  passuum  decem  murum  fo»- 
eamque  pei ducit.  Cces. 


234 


ON  THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS. 


[§  1.  4-9. 


The  cause  precedes  the  effect. 

Veniebant  ad  Eumenem,  qui  propter  odium  fructum  oculis  ex  ejus  casu 
capere  vellent.  C.  Nep. 

Exercise  1. 

4.  [Does  mens  or  animus  denote  the  mind  with  all  its  passions,  emotions, 
&c.  1  (92,  note  c.)] 

We  do  not  feel  a  disease  of  the  mind  by  °  any  bodily  sensa¬ 
tion.1  Caius  is  going  to  send  a  copy 2  of  the  letter  to  his  father. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  the  plea  of  necessity  is  a  valid  excuse  for 
Dionysius.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  he  employed  an  advocate  at 
Carthage.  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  they  lived  in  affluence  at 
Rome.  We  have  been  impatient  for  your  arrival.  There  were 
some  who3  looked  forward  with  impatience  to  your  arrival.  The 
Gauls  attack  the  Romans,  before  they  have  disencumbered  them¬ 
selves  of  their  baggage.  The  Athenians  are  going  to  recall  Bal¬ 
bus  from  banishment.  It  would  have  been  better4  never  to  have 
returned  from  banishment.  It  is  one6  thing  to  sin,  another  to 
throw  the  blame  upon  another.  There  is  no  doubt  that  Philistus 
the  Syracusan  (b)  lived  many  years  at  Rome.  It  cannot  be  de¬ 
nied,  that  you  are  connected  with  Scipio  by  the  ties  of  blood. 

1  ‘By  the  body.’  2  See  Example.  3  Df.  1109  4  satius  fuit,  426,  (5). 

6  38. 

*  5.  0 Unusualness  of  position  calls  attention  to  a  word  so 
placed,  and  thus  renders  it  Emphatic. 

4  6.  Hence  in  a  language  which,  like  the  Latin,  admits  of  considerable  vari¬ 
ety  in  the  collocation  of  words,  what  ice  effect  by  printing  a  word  in 
Italics,  is  accomplished  by  placing  it  in  an  unusual  position. 

'  7.  This  unusualness  of  position  is  the  great  principle  on  which  the  emphasis 
or  prominence  of  a  word  depends. 

*  8.  The  beginning  and  the  end  of  a  clause  are  positions  favorable  to  empha¬ 

sis  because  “  by  the  former  our  attention  is  excited,  and  on  the  latter  it 
rests.”  But  of  course  the  beginning  of  the  clause  is  not  an  emphatic 
position  for  the  subject,  nor  the  end  for  the  predicate ;  but  vice  versa. 

*  9.  ( a )  The  subject  receives  emphasis  by  being  placed  at  or 
hear  the  end  of  the  clause  :  {!>)  the  predicate  by  being  placed  at 
or  near  the  beginning  of  the  clause. 

(a)  1.  Sensit  in  se  iri  Brutus. — 2.  Semper  oratorum  eloquentiae  moderatrix 

fuit  auditorum  prudentia.  C. 

(b)  Disces  tu  quidem  quamdiu  voles  ?  tamdiu  autem  velle  debebis,  quoad  te, 

quantum  proficias,  non  pcenitehit.  C. 


§  1.  10-15.]  ON  THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS.  235 

*  10.  An  emphatic  subject  often  stands  just  before  a  verb  which 
closes  the  sentence. 

Eorum,  qui  exacta  setafe  moriuntur,  fortuna  laudatur.  C. 

*11.  A  verb  stands’  at  the  head  of  its  clause  without  emphasis, 
«vhen  it  is  used  with  autem  to  explain  a  previous  assertion. 

In  English  we  should  insert  such  an  explanation  parenthetically. 

1.  Amicum  aegrotantem  visere  volebam :  habitat  autem  ille  in  parte  urbis 
remotissima. — 2.  [Cato]  objecit  ut  probrum  M.  Nobiliori,  quod  is  in  pro¬ 
vinciam  poetas  duxisset :  duxerat  autem  consul  ille  in  iEtoliam,  ut  sci¬ 
mus,  Ennium.  C. 

•  12.  The  verb  or  adjective  precedes  its  oblique  cases  when  its 
comparative  importance  to  the  whole  meaning  of  the  sentence  is 
greater  than  theirs. 

1.  Quaeritur  an  is,  qui  profuit  nobis,  si  postea  nocuit,  nos  debito  solverit.  C. 
2.  Quae  perspicuam  omnibus  veritatem  continet  propositio,  nihil  indiget 
approbationis.  C. — 3.  Iris  nunquam  non  adversa  soli  est.  Sen. — 4.  Sim¬ 
iles  parentibus  ac  majoribus  suis  filii  plerumque  creduntur.  C. 

»  13.  Oblique  cases  and  adverbs  receive  emphasis  by  being 
placed  at  or  near  the  beginning  or  end  of  the  clause. 

1.  Semper  oratorum  eloquentiae  moderatrix  fuit  auditorum  prudentia.  C. — 
2.  Arbores  serit  diligens  agricola,  quarum  adspiciet  baccam  ipse  nun¬ 
quam.  C.— 3.  Erudito  homini  esse  ego  iratus,  ne  si  cupiam  quidem,  non 
possum.  C. — 4.  Ne  vitationem  quidem  doloris  ipsam  per  se  quisquam 
in  rebus  expetendis  putavit.  C. 

«  14.  Of  words  standing  close  together,  the  reversing  their  usual  order  gives 
promidence  (I  think)  to  the  first  rather  than  to  the  second.  Thus  when 
a  b  becomes  b  a,  it  is  b  rather  than  a  that  receives  prominence. 

Mirabile  videtur,  quod  non  rideat  haruspex,  quum  haruspicem  viderit.  C. 

Exercise  2. 

15.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  Hortensius*  is  going  to  follow  the 
example  of  Cato.  Let  Hortensius  defend  himself  from  this  charge 
by  the  plea  of  °bad  health.  Brutus  felt  athat  he  was  invited  to  a 
share.  He  exclaims  :  “  What1  advantage  will  the  Carthaginians 
derive  from  so  great  a  wrong  ?  ”  Let  good  examples -v  for  imita¬ 
tion  be  proposed*  to  boys.a  There  is  no  doubt  that  the  plea  of 
necessity  is  a  valid  excuse  for  you.  I'  will  follow1  the  advice  of 
Cato.  The  examples  of  those  who  die2  for  their  country  are 
quoted-with-approbation.3  We  are  looking  impatiently  *for  the 
arrival  of  Cicero.  I  fear  that  he  will  not4  undergo  the  danger 


236 


POSITION  OF  ATTRIBUTIVES. 


[§  1.  16-lb. 

willingly.*  I  could  not  follow3  such  an  example,  even  if  I  wished 
it  (13,  3).  He  is  always3  bringing  me  into  danger.  I  fear  that4 
Hortensius*  will  not  ward  off  the  danger  from  me.  I  fear  that 
Hortensius  will  die  by  his  own  hands.  How  few  there  are  who5 
have  altogether8  satisfied  the  expectations 3  of  men  !b 

1  How  are  questions  of  appeal  asked  in  oblique  narration  ?  [460,  (c)  (2).  j 

2  Pro  patria  mortem  ox  morte  occumbere.  3  Laudare.  4Df.  153. 

6  Df.  .1109,  (14).  6 *  Ex  omni  parte. 


§  1 .  Position  of  Attributives. 

'*  16.  (a)  An  attributive  receives,  perhaps,  a  slight  emphasis  from 
being  placed  after  its  substantive ;  but  ( b )  it  receives  more  by 
separution  from  it,  especially  if  it  be  placed  near  the  beginning 
or  end  of  the  sentence.1 * 

(a)  1.  Sedebat  in  rostris  collega  tuus,  amictus  toga  purpurea ,  in  sella  aurea , 

coronatus.  C. — 2.  Jacet  inter  saltus  satis  clausus  in  medio  campus 
herbidus  aquosusque.  L. 

(b)  1.  In  miseriam  nascimur  sempiternam.  C. — 2.  iEdui  equites  ad  Csesarem 

omnes  revertuntur.  Cces. 

*  17.  If  the  attention  is  to  rest  on  a  substantive  having  an  attrn 
butive  with  it,  it  is  placed  after  the  attributive,  and  separated 
from  it,  so  as  to  be  thrown  as  near  the  end  of  the  sentence  as 
possible. 

1.  Cimon  barbarorum  uno  concursu  vim  maximam  prostravit.  C.  Nep. — 
2.  In  iis  perniciosus  est  error,  qui  existimant  libidinum  peccatorumque  om¬ 
nium  patere  in  amicitia  licentiam.  C. — 3.  Miles  quidam  parum  abfuit, 
quin  Varum  interficeret;  quod  ille  periculum ,  sublato  ad  ejus  conatum 
scuto,  vitavit.  Cces. 

*  18.  If  an  attributive  belongs  to  two  substantives,  it  either  pre¬ 
cedes  both,  or  follows  both,  or  follows  the  first. 


1  Gmjsar  makes  the  position  after  its  substantive  theusua/  position  of  an  attri¬ 

butive  ;  that  before  its  substantive  the  more  emphatic  one.  This  opinion  seems 

to  me  utterly  untenable:  e.  g.  in  the  example,  “sedebat  in  rostris  collega  tuus, 

amictus  toga  purpurea ,  in  sella  aurea,  coronatus,”  (Cic.  Phil.  ii.  34.)  who  can 

doubt  that  the  adjectives  purple  and  golden  are  here  more  important  notions  than 

the  substantives  toga  and  chair  ? — In  this  sentence,  however,  purpurea  and  au- 

red  gain  a  little  emphasis  from  their  being  followed  by  a  slight  pause. 


POSITION  OF  ATTRIBUTIVES. 


237 


§  1.  19-22.] 

( From,  her  divine  birth  and  origin.) 

(1)  A  divino  ortu  et  progenie.  ] 

(2)  Ab  ortu  et  progenie  divina.  >  Not,  ab  ortu  et  divina  progenie.8 

(3)  Ab  ortu  divino  et  progenie.  J 

19.  Zumpt  confines  the  position  after  the  first  to  the  ‘familiar  style;’  but  i. 
occurs  even  in  the  Orations  of  Cicero,  and  is,  1  think,  the  best  position, 
when  the  second  substantive  is  an  emphatic  addition :  e.  g.  Cic.  Phil.  ii. 
33.  “  Sed  arrogantiam  hominis  insolentiamque  cognoscite .” 

*  20.  Of  two  adjectives  or  other  words  joined  by  ‘  and’  (or  some 
other  co-ordinate  conjunction)  that  which  is  to  arrest  the  attention 
most  is  often  placed  towards  the  end  of  the  sentence,  and  sepa¬ 
rated  from  the  other  by  one  or  more  of  the  words  that  belong 
equally  to  both. 

4  Obs.  The  pronouns,  and  other  small  unaccented  words,  are 
very  frequently  used  for  the  separation  of  connected  words. 

1.  Insula  est  Melita,  satis  lato  ab  Sicilia  mari  periculosoque  disjuncta.  C. — 
2.  Omnibus  officiis  diligenter  a  me  sancteque  servatis,  &c. — 3.  Et  dolori 
fortiter  ac  fortunes  resistere. — 4.  Dominos  esse  omnium  rerum  et  mode¬ 
ratores  deos. 

*  21.  Obs.  This  separation  of  co-ordinate  notions  is  conveniently 
employed  in  dividing  a  long  sentence  into  portions,  and  thus  giving 
symmetry  and  strength  to  the  style  by  preventing  the  accumula¬ 
tion  of  unaccented  words.  For  instance,  Wolf  writes  :  lnunc 
tandem  jucundum  fructum  mihi  capere  licet  variarum  curarum  :  9 
jucundum  and  fructum  are  here  emphatic,  mihi  capere  licet  wholly 
unemphatic.  By  arranging  the  sentence  thus,  ‘nunc  tandem  licet 

|  jucundum  mihi  |  variarum  curarum  |  fructum  capere ,’  we  have 
a  nearly  regular  alternation  of  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  voice  ; 
n  what  Cicero  calls  intervalla  ecqualia .  ( Reisig .) 

Exercise  3. 

[An  accented  pronoun  is  emphatic,  and  to  be  expressed.] 

22.  Is  it  the  part  of  a  Christian  to  yield  basely  to  pain*  and 
fortune*  (20,3)?  Thick8  clouds3  are  covering  the  whole  sky.  ( Turn 
into  pass,  voice.)  It  is  a  great  thing  to  be  able  to  endure  cold 8  and 


8  This  sentence  (sic)  is  in  Cic.  Tusc.  i.  12  (26),  and  Wolf  improperly  refers 
divina  to  both  substantives:  a  supposition  which  Orelli  appears  to  counte¬ 

nance  by  not  condemning  it. 


238 


POSITION  OF  ATTRIBUTIVES. 


[§  1.  23-25 

hunger.*  They  believe  that  they  shall  derive  greatft  advantage J 
from  this  injury.  He'  gave  me  advice  boldly*  and  rashly.*  Fired 
with  anger*  and  ambition ,s  he/  heaped  every  kind  of  abuse  upon 
me.  It  cannot  be  doubted,  that  he  is  easily  accessible  to  flattery.1 
Which8  advice*  they'  received  with  acclamations.  He'  did  many* 
and  rash*  °  actions  by  the  advice  of  Caius.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  he  is  living  by  alms.  Caius  has  made  this  question  very 
dark.  He  has  followed  a  bold'  and  rash'  advice.  Deliver  me 
from  the  yoke 8  of  slavery.8  You  see  (pi.)  the  anger  and  ambi¬ 
tion  of  the  man  (19)  ! 

1  ‘  that  flatterers2  have  easy*  access3  to  his  ears.’ 


23.  When  a  substantive,  with  a  notion  joined  to  it  attributi vely, 
is  more  nearly  defined  by  some  other  words,  those  words  are  usu¬ 
ally  placed  between  the  substantive  and  its  attributive. 

Tua  erga  Lucceium  benignitas.  C.  Tanta  fuit  in  castris  capiendis  celeritas, 
&c.  Ceos.  Halesini  pro  multis  et  magnis  suis  majorumque  suorum  in 
rempublicam  meritis  atque  beneficiis,  &c.  C.  Pro  hac,  quam  conspicitis, 
ad  conservandam  rempublicam  diligentia,  &c.  C.  [  Obs.  the  insertion  of 
the  relative  clause.] 

(a)  A  deviation  from  this  rule  occurs,  C.  Nep.  Miltiad.  3,  3,  ‘  hortatus  est 
pontis  custodes  ne  a  fortuna  datam  occasionem  liberandi  Graeciae  dimit 
terent.’  Here  fortuna  is  emphatic. 

*  (/?)  A  notion  joined  attributively  to  a  substantive  may  be  expressed  either 

by  an  adjective,  or  a  participle,  or  a  genitive  case. 

•  24.  (a)  A  participle  generally  follows  its  substantive,  as  con¬ 
taining  a  predicate  assumed  attributively  ;  but  (b)  where  the 
predicate  would  precede  the  subject,  if  the  clause  were  resolved, 
there  the  participle  should  precede  the  substantive. 

(a)  Ratibus  junctis  trajectus.  L.  Consules — regibus  exactis  creati  sunt. 

(b)  Ingratus  est,  qui,  remotis  testibus,  agit  gratiam.  Sen.  Caesar  pulsus,  non 
instante  Pompejo,  negavit  eum  vincere  scire.  Suet. 

*  25.  In  other  words,  the  participle  should  precede,  when  atten¬ 
tion  is  to  be  called  to  it  rather  than  to  the  substantive  ;  and  also 
when  the  participle  and  substantive  together  form  one  complex 

*  notion. 

Temeritas  est  videlicetjfloren/is  cetatis.  C.  Itaque  bene  adhibita  ratio  cermt, 
quid  optimum  sit.  C. 


$2.  26-29.] 


DEPENDENT  GENITIVE. 


239 


Exercise  4. 

26.  It  was  decreed,  that  for  his  so-great  merit  towards1  the 
state,'  he  should  be  called2  king  by  the  senate.  Caius  behaved 
with  such  courtesy3  towards  all,'  that  no  man  was  so  humble 
as  not4  to  have  access  to  him.  I  will  strive  to  satisfy*  men’s  great 
expectations  o f  m e . •  I  fear  that  I  shall  not*  satisfy  your  great* 
expectations  of  me.'  If  (Ego,  si,  &c.)  such  an  opportunity  of 
success'7  were  offered  me,  I'  would  eagerly  seize  it  [I.  445,  a, 
(1).]  The  Gauls,  having  lost  their  baggage,  all'  fled.  The 
troops  of  Lentulus  p  restore  the  fortune  of  the  day,8  and  rout  the 
enemy.  Are  you7  the  man9  to  lose  such10  an  opportunity  of  suc¬ 
cess7  by  your-own  laziness?"  I  fear  that  I  shall  not12  be  able 
to  recompense13  you  for  your  so-great  benefits  towards14  me.' 
There  were  some,  who  looked  forward  to  your  arrival  with  impa¬ 
tience. 

1  in.  with  acc.  2  appellare.  3  Say;  ‘  was  of such  courtesy'  (abl.).  See 
ft.  humanitas.  Choose  the  word  that  is  nearly  =  affability.  4  Use  qui 

non.  See  Pt.  I.  p.  215,  note  d.  5  I.  75.  6  Df.  153.  7  rei  gerendae. 

8  See  battle.  9Df.  1109,  (9).  10  tam  praeclarus.  11  SeeD.tgTia* 

via.  12  Df.  153  13  gratiam '  referre*  14  in. 


§  2.  Dependent  Genitive. 

%27.  When  a  gen.  depends  on  two  substantives  it  generally  pre¬ 
cedes  both. 

Hujus  autem  orationis  difficilius  est  exitum  quam  principium  invenire.  C. 

*  28.  When  a  gen.  depends  on  a  substantive  that  has  another 
genitive  dependent  upon  it,  with  which  it  forms  one  complex 
notion,  it  is  generally  placed  before  it. 

*  The  gen.  that  forms,  as  it  were,  one  notion  with  the  substantive,  gen¬ 
erally  follows  '  it :  it  is  very  often  an  objective  genitive. 

1.  Fortissimi  viri  magnitudinem  animi  desideras.  C. — 2.  Themistocli s 
vitia  ineuntis  aetatis  magnis  sunt  emendata  virtutibus.  C.  Nep. — 3. 
Cupio  ab  hac  hominum  satietate  nostri  discedere.  C. — 4.  Hujus  vos 
animi  monumenta  retinebitis  corporis  in  Italia  nullum  vestigium  esse 
patiemini  7  C. 


1  Not  always :  e.  g.  hujus  rex  animi  magnitudinem  admirans.  C.  Nep.  Ii.  101 


240 


PARTICIPIAL  CLAUSES. 


[§  3.  30-32. 


Exercise  5. 

29.  It  is  more  difficult  to  avoid  the  snares  of  these  men,» 
than  to  endure1  °their  arms.  Nearly  all  men’s1  youthful3 
opinions  are  gradually  weakened.3  Who  would  not  praise  °this 
great  philosopher’s  contempt4  for5  external  things  ?  I  am  not  the 
man6  to  laugh  at  the  Christian’s  contempt4  for5  the  things  of  this 
life.7  I  have  very  often  admired  both8  the  courtesy  and  the 
benevolence  of  Cimon.  Extreme9  cheapness*-  followed10  that 
year’s1  dearness  of  provisions.  I  don’t  doubt  that  extreme 
dearness  will  follow11  this  year’s  cheapness  of  provisions.  My 
Tullia’s  weak  state12  kills13  me  with  °anxiety. 

1  sustinere.  2  Say ;  ‘  opinions  of  commencing  life.’  Should  it  be  iniens 
i etas ,  or  cetas  iniens  1  (See  25.  last  clause.)  3  Dod.  paulatim.  4  despicientia. 

5  Pt.  I.  156.  6Df.  1109  (9).  7  Say;  ‘of  human  things.’  8  quum— 

tum.  9  Summus.  10  consequi.  11  Pt.  I.  290  id).  12  imbecilli¬ 
tas  corporis.  13  exanimare. 


,  §  3.  Participial  Clauses . 

*  30.  When  a  participial  clause  is  equivalent  to  an  apposition  or 
relative  sentence,  it  stands  as  near  as  possible  to  the  word  it 
modifies. 

1.  Pisistratus  primus  Homeri  libros,  confusos  antea,  sic  disposuisse  dicitur, 
ut  nunc  habemus.  C. — 2.  Saepe  homines  rationem ,  bono  consilio  a  diis 
immortalibus  datam,  in  fraudem  malitiamque  convertunt.  C. 

*  31.  But  when  a  participial  clause  is  equivalent  to  a  sentence 
beginning  with  a  conjunction,  it  is  sometimes  inserted  in  the  prin¬ 
cipal  sentence,  sometimes  placed  before  it,  sometimes  after  it,  as 
its  relation  to  the  principal  sentence  requires. 

1.  Egyptii  et  Babylonii,  in  camporum  patentium  aequoribus  habitantes, 
( =  quum  hab.)  omnem  curam  in  siderum  cognitione  posuerunt.  C. — 

2.  Perditis  (=  licet  perd.)  rebus  omnibus,  tamen  ipsa  virtus  se  sustentare 
potest.  C. — 3.  Brutus  Consul  ita  prcelio  uno  accidit  Vestinorum  res, 
ut.  dilaberentur  in  oppida,  se  defensuri  (  —  ut  defend.).  L. 

Exercise  6. 

[p  means  that  the  sentence  is  to  be  turned  into  a  participial  clause.] 

32.  °My  reputation  being  lost,  nothing1  remains2  but  that  I 


PROFER  NAMES. 


24 1 


[§4.  33-35. 

should  die  by  my  own  hands.  I  gladly  receive  the  honours * 
offered  to  me  for3  having  saved  the  state.  They  alb  jly  to  the 
town  to  defend  themselvesP  °there.  Be  sure4  not  to 
neglect  your  health,  which  is  now  re-established. p  Can 
anyone  cure  a  body,  that  is  worn-out?  by  such*'  labours? 
Who  doubts,  that  such5  opinions ,  so  deeply6  implanted,  so  long 
entertained,7  are  very  hard  to  root  up  ?8  The  example  of  a  man 
p  who  makes  glory  his  first  object ,  is  not  to  be  followed. 

1  nihil s  aliud s — nisi.  2  See  i.  83.  3  ob.  Say ;  ‘  on  account  of  the 

republic  saved.’  4  cave.  See  Df.  (1),  118.  5  C  (1),  10.  6  tam  penitus. 

7  vetustus  :  the  word  for  old  which  refers  to  the  superiority  of  age.  Di>d.  anti¬ 
quus.  8  Df.  (1),  93. 


§  4.  Proper  Names . 

%  33.  A  proper  name  generally  precedes  its  apposition. 

1.  Ex  praepositio :  tis  syllaba :  slitera. — 2.  Cato ,  vir  clarissimus. — 3  Lemno* 
insula. 

*  34.  But  if  the  attention  is  to  rest  upon  the  apposition,  or  if  it 
has  a  nearer  relation  to  some  preceding  notion,  it  stands  first. 

1.  Ejus  doctor  Plato  triplicem  finxit  animum.  C.  (because  the  ejus  refers 
to  Xenocrates  in  the  former  sentence.) — 2.  Homo  mirificus,  Dionysius 
( that  iconderful  person ,  Dionysius). 

Exercise  7. 

35.  I  will  make  no  objection1  to  your  hissing  off  the  stage 
°that  very  bad  actor2  Balbus.  I  remember  that  Pamphilus,  my 
host,  said3  that  he  would  not  come.  You  (sing.)  have  heard  Q. 
Minucius  Rufus  say,  that  king  Antiochus  lodged4  at  his  house' 
°when  at  Syracuse.*  Verres  invited  Antiochus,  king  of  Syria, 
to  supper.  I  hear  that  the  excellent  Lucilius,5  a  friend  of  mine, 
is  suffering  from  a  disease  that  must  end  fatally.  I  am  vexed  that 
Rutilius,  a  man  p  who  has  deserved  well  of  me,  should  be  living 
on  such  confined  means.  I  fear  that  Satureius,  an  excellent  man, 
and  °one  who  has  deserved  extremely- well  of  the  state,  will 
be  brought  into  danger  of  his  life .  It  is  your  °  business  to  be. 

seech  the  conqueror  to  spare  the  life  of  Pamphilus,  your  host- 

11 


242 


ANTITHETICAL  WORDS. 


[§  5.  36-40. 

Your  connection6  Rutilius  swore  that  he  owed  his  life  to  me  :  hia 
father'  Numantius7  would  not  beg  Csesar  to  spare  mine. 

1  Df.  (1),  19.  2  histrio  ( =:  ‘  stage-player  ’)  implies  something  of  depreciatioi 

3  Df.  (1),  2.  4  deversari.  ( Luc .  vir.  opt.)  6  affinis. 

7  The  accent  over  father  shows  that  it  is  to  precede  the  proper  name. 


§  5.  Antithetical  Words. 


'  36.  From  7,  it  follows  that  antithetical  words  or  notions  will 
naturally  often  stand,  the  one  at  the  beginning,  the  other  at  the 
end  of  the  clause. 


1.  Necessitatis  inventa  antiquiora  sunt,  quam  voluptatis.  C. — 2.  Errare 
mehercule  malo  cum  Platone,  quam  cum  istis  vera  sentire.  C. 

*  37.  If  the  antithetical  notions  consist  of  more  than  one  word 
(each  answering  to  one  of  the  other  set),  the  order  of  the  first  set 
is  very  often  reversed  in  the  second. 

*  38.  If  the  antithetical  notions  are  in  different  sentences,  they 
stand, 

*  (a)  Either  both  at  the  beginning 

*  ( b )  Or  both  at  the  end 
(c)  Or  the  one  at  the  end  of  its  clause,  the  other  at  the  begin¬ 
ning  ;  the  order  of  the  first  being  generally  reversed  in  the  second, 
if  they  consist  of  several  words. 


of  their  respective  clauses  : 


(a)  Stulti  malorum  memoria  torquentur;  sapientes  bona  praeterita,  grata  re¬ 
cordatione  renovata,  delectant.  C.  (a  b  —  ab.) 

(a,  6)Multi  in  amicis  parandis  adhibent  curam  :  in  amicis  eligendis  negligentet 
sunt.  C.  (ab  —  ab.) 

(c)  1.  Ut  cupiditatibus  principum  et  vitiis  injici  solet  tota  civitas :  sic  emendari 
et  corrigi  continentia.  C. — 2.  Metuo  ne  scelerate  dicam  in  te,  quod  pro 
Milone  dicam  pie.  C.  (ab  X  b  a.) 

39.  When  a  substantive  is  repeated  in  a  sentence,  the  two 
cases  generally  stand  close  together. 

*  Obs.  Not  always  :  e.  g  nihil  semper  Jloret :  aetas  succedit  aetati.  C.  In 
sentences  of  the  kind  to  which  this  rule  applies,  the  pron.  ‘  another ! 
might  generally  be  substituted  for  the  second  substantive,  ‘one*  being 
added  to  the  first.  1  Man  kills  man 5  =  ‘  one  man  kills  another .’ 

1.  Vir  virum  legit  — 2.  Ex  domo  in  domum  migrare. — 3.  Diem  ex  die  ex¬ 
spectare. — 4.  Arma  armis  propulsare. 

40.  These  forms  will  be  indicated  thus: 


*  ab  —  a  b  will  indicate  that  the  order  is  to  be  retained ;  a  b  X  b  a  that  it  is  to  b« 
reversed. 


§6.  41,42.]  SECONDARY  EMPHASIS.  243 

*  Obs.  The  inverted  order  is  called  Chiasmus ,  and  i»  the  favourite  form  for  an¬ 

tithetical  sentences. 

*  Obs.  These  rules  are  not  invariably  observed  :  e.  g.  Rerum 
copia  verborum  copiam  gignit.  C.  Pausanias  magnam  belli 
gloriam  turpi  morte  maculavit.  Nep.  Iniq  uissimam  pacem 
justissimo  bello  antefero.  C. 

* 

Exercise  8. 

*  [ Obs.  When  ‘  o  n  e  ’  is  to  be  omitted  (°  o  n  e),  ‘another’  must  be  translated 

by  a  case  of  the  substantive  that  follows  one.  —  “Then  indicates  that 
the  question  is  to  be  asked  by  an.] 

41.  I  don’t  see,  bow  past  pleasures*  can  assuage1  present  evils 
(a  bxba).  I  confess  that  the  judgment  of  the  generality2  differs3 
from  my  judgment.  Lawsa  punish4  the  wicked,  defend  and  pro¬ 
tect5  the  good.  The  opinion 3  which*  you/  are  implanting  in  my 
mind,  Rutilius  is  rooting  up.6  The  opportunity s  which8  you  are 
seizing,  Caius  has  let  slip.6  The  more  difficult  it  is  to  acquire  a 
knowledge  of  heavenly  things,7  the  more  do  they  kindle  °in  us 
the  desire  of  knowing3  °  them.  It  is  one9  thing  to  be  unanimously 
acquitted,  another  to  escape  by  a  sentence 10  purchased  by  bribery 
(a  b  —  a  b).  Do  you  °then  believe,  that  the  mind  is  strengthened 
by  pleasure,  °  a  n  d  weakened  by  continence  ?*  (abxb  a).  Arms 
must  be  resisted  by  arms  (39,  4).  Is  it  “then  true  that  “one  poet 
always  envies  ©another?  I  by  Hercules  had  rather  be  condemn* 
eda  than  acquitted*  by  a  sentence 10  purchased  by  bribery  (36,  2). 

1  Sedare.  2  vulgus.  3  dissentire  (a  qua  re).  4  supplicio 8  officer e8. 

5  Ddd.  tueri:  or  I.  374.  6  Invert.  I.  30  (d).  i  ‘heavenly  things,  the 

more  difficult  knowledge  they  admit  of  (habent)’  &c.  8  cognoscere. 

9  I.  33.  10  See  Judgment. 


§  6.  Secondary  Emphasis  :  position  of  words  occurring  in  two 

clauses. 

*  42.  In  a  sentence  of  some  considerable  length  a  word  receives 
a  slight  emphasis  or  prominence  by  being  placed  just  before  or 
after  a  pause. 

I  For  instance,  just  alter  an  apposition  clause  that  belongs  to  the  subject.  In 
fact,  the  beginning  or  end  of  any  group  of  words  is  a  slightly  emphatic 
position. 


244 


SECONDARY  EMPHASIS. 


[§  6.  43-45. 

1.  Oratoris  nomen  apud  antiquos  in  Graecia  |  majori  quadam  vel  copia,  vel 
gloria  floruit.  C  —  2.  Ccelius  talis  tribunus  plebis  fuit,  ut  nemo  contra 
civium  perditorum  'popularem  turbulentamque  dementiam  |  a  senatu  et  a 
bonorum  causa  steterit  libentius.  C. 

*  43.  A  word  that  is  the  subject  or  object  of  two  sentences  should 
generally  precede  both. 

1.  Hostes ,  ubi  primum  nostros  equites  conspexerunt,  impetu  facto,  celeriter 
nostros  perturbaverunt.  Cces. — 2.  Quem ,  ut  barbari  incendium  effugisse 
viderunt,  telis  eminus  missis,  interfecerunt.  Nep. 

i  The  position  of  a  subject  at  the  head  of  a  sentence  before  the  conjunction 
of  an  accessory  sentence  is  so  common,  that  it  is  often  found  there,  even 
when  it  is  not  the  subject  of  the  principal  sentence  also. 

1.  Hic  etsi  crimine  Pario  est  accusatus,  tamen  alia  fuit  causa  damnationis. 
Nep. — 2.  Romani  postquam  Carthaginem  venerunt - tum  ex  Cartha¬ 

giniensibus  unus,  &c. 

%  44.  A  word  that  is  the  subject  of  one  sentence  and  the  object 
of  another,  should  generally  stand  before  both  (as  belonging  to 
the  principal  sentence)  and  be  represented  in  the  accessory  sen¬ 
tence  by  the  proper  case  of  is,  ea,  id. 

1.  Rex  Prusias,  quum  Hannibali  apud  eum  exsulanti  depugnari  placeret, 
negabat  se  audere.  ( When  Hannibal ,  who  was  residing  as  an  exile  witk 

King  Prusias,  wished,  &c. - he  said - &c.)  C.—2.  Boios ,  petentibus 

iEduis,  quod  egregia  virtute  erant  cogniti,  ut  in  finibus  suis  collocarent 
concessit.  Cces. 


Exercise  9. 

45.  If  the  Boiia  had  sued  for  peace,  they  would  have  obtained 
it.  If  Caius  does1  this,  he  will  endanger  his  reputation.  Dio¬ 
nysius1  having  seen  me  at  Rome,  left  nothing  undone2  to 
bring  me  into  odium.  Could™  my  favourite,  your  connection,3 
Rutilius,  upon  hearing  this4  (pi-)  almost  die  with  laughter'/ 
When  your  favourite1  Saufeius  was  staying  with5  my  friend 
Lucilius,1  °the  latter  used  to  get  an  appetite  by  walking 
(44).  When  Metellus1  was  at  Athens,  he  0  used  to  devour  litera¬ 
ture  with  °that  wonderful6  person'  Dionysius. 

1  ‘  Shall  have  done.  *  2  Df.  Pt.  I.  18.  3  apinis.  4  Abl.  Absol. 

8  apud  quem  deversari ,  to  stay  with  any  body  for  a  time  as  a  guest.  6  home 

mirificus. 


§7.  46-51.] 


ON  THE  POSITION  OF  SUM. 


243 


§  7.  On  the  position  of  Sum. 

v  46.  Sum,  as  the  mere  logical  copula,  stands  either  between  the 
subject  and  predicate,  or  after  them  both. 

Homo  est  mortalis :  or  homo  mortalis  est. 

*  47.  Sum,  when  it  precedes  both  subject  and  predicate,  is  more 
than  the  mere  popula,  and  expresses  existence  emphatically  [= 
‘  exists  ‘  there  is.’] 

Est  homo  mortalis  ( man  is  undoubtedly  mortal). 

In  est  necesse  the  ‘  cst  '  is  emphatic  ( =  1  is  absolutely  necessary :’)  or  imust  in¬ 
fallibly.' 

1.  Non  vident  id  se  cupere,  quod  fugitivo  alicui  aut  gladiatori  concedi  sit 
necesse.  C—  2.  Se  esse  tertium  illum  Cornelium,  ad  quem  regnum  hujus 
urbis  pervenire  esset  necesse.  C. 

%  48.  Sum,  when  unemphatic,  should  generally  be  placed  after 
an  emphatic  word. 

*  Hence  is  it  not  placed  after  enim,  autem,  &c.,  except  when  it  is  em¬ 
phatic. 

I.  Postquam  divitiae  honori  esse  coepere,  &c.  C. — 2.  Haec  conficta  arbitror  a 
poetis  esse.  C.—  3.  Ut  a  te  paulo  est  ante  dictum.  C. — 4.  Natura  est  ipsa 
fabricata.  C. — 5.  In  eoque  colendo  sita  vitae  est  honestas  omnis.  C. 

*  49.  On  this  principle  esse  is  often  placed  after  its  governing 
verb  ;  especially  after  such  verbs  as  affirm  or  deny  existence, 
such  as  credo,  nego,  ajo,  volo,  veto.1 

1.  Is  igitur  versum  in  oratione  vetat  esse.  C. — 2.  Defensum  neget  esse.  C. — 
3.  Quos  equidem  credo  esse,  &  c.  C. — 4.  Ut  socios  honore  auctiores  velit 
esse.  C. 

*  50.  Esse  in  compound  infinitives  very  frequently  precedes  a 
hyper  dissyllable  participle  ;  the  participle  often  standing  at  the 
end  of  its  clause. 

Abs  te  esse  liberatas :  per  te  esse  recreatas ;  latrocinia  esse  depulsa :  esse 
adeptos:  operam  esse  ponendam  (but,  prorogatus  esse  videatur) — all  in  a 
email  portion  of  one  letter  (Epp.  ad  Quint.  Fratr.  lib.  i.  1). 

*  51.  The  est  of  a  compound  tense  often  stands  after  its  parti¬ 
ciple,  at  the  end  of  a  clause. 

1.  Nihil  amplius  desiderarem  hoc  statu,  qui  mihi  jam  partus  est.  C. — 2 
Quae  tamen  (ut  in  malis)  acerbitati  anteponenda  est.  C. 


1  By  no  means  always :  omni  ratione  tueare,  ut  esse  quam  beatissimos  veli» 
Epp.  ad  Quint.  Fratr.  lib.  i.  I. 


246 


PRONOUNS. 


[§  8.  52-55, 


Exercise  10. 

52.  Dionysius,  who  says  that  virtue  is  not  productive  of  plea¬ 
sure ,  is  blamed1  by  many.  Caius  denies  that  gain  should  be 
pursued  as  a  first  object.  He  says  that  this  should  be  the  first 
object  with  those  who  are  placed  over  others,2  that  those  who  are 
under  their  command3  should  be  as  happy  °as  possible.4  I 
believe  that  the  boy  is  a  liar.6  He  says  that  pleasure  is  not  to 
be  our  first  object.  All  cry-out,  that  this  very  false6  man 
*is  not  to  be  believed  upon  his  oath.  He  promised  that  he  would 
place  no  obstacle  °in  the  way  of  accomplishing  so 
great  an  object.7  Are  you' °then  going  to  feel  affronted  at 
this  ?  They  teach  0  us,  that  that  opinion  should  be  given  up. 

1  Ddd.  reprehendere.  2  To  be  placed  over  others,  prceesse  aliis.  Indic. 

3  To  be  under  any  body’s  command,  in  cujus  imperio  esse.  4 1.  410.  p.  144. 
5  mendax ,  adj.  6  mendacissimus.  ?  res. 


§  8.  Pronouns. 


*  53.  When  a  substantive  has  both  an  adjective  and  adjective 
pronoun  with  it,  there  are  six  possible  positions,  without  sepa¬ 
ration. 


a 

1.  Tuae  suavissimae  litter® 

2.  Tuae  litterae  suavissimae 

3.  Litterae  tuae  suavissimae 


b 

4.  Suavissimae  tuae  litterae 

5.  Suavissimae  litterae  tuae 

6.  Litterae  suavissimae  tuae. 


*  (a)  If  both  the  predicates  are  emphatic,  the  forms  2.  5.  should  probably  be 
preferred. 

'  (/?)  There  may  be  two  adjective  pronouns  and  an  adjective :  e.g.tuum  hoc 
suburbanum  Gymnasium.  C.  De.  Orat.  i.  1,  21  {end). 

(a)  Examples  of  form  1  {which  is  the  English  order)  are :  in  hac  nostra  actione 
,(C.  De  Orat.  iii.  59) :  suis  lenissimis  postulatis  {Cces.  B.  C.  i.  5):  in 
meo  gravissimo  casu  {C.  ad  Earn.  iv.  6, 1) :  in  hac  praeclara  epistola  (C. 
de  Fin.  ii.  31). 

54.  If  the  substantive  has  a  demonstrative  pronoun  and  two 
adjectives  joined  by  et,  the  most  usual  place  of  the  pronoun 
is  after  the  first  adjective. 


Crassus  hic  et  concretus  aer.  C. 


Exercise  11. 

55.  Do  not  pester  °  t  h  a  t  excellent  man  with  your  threatening 


PRONOUNS. 


247 


§  9.  56-59.] 

letters.  He  never  answered  a  single  word1  to  my  very  kindly 
expressed2  letters .a  I  cannot  but3  return  some  answer  to 
your  very  acceptable  letters.  Those  wrong  opinions  °of  yours 
must  be  rooted-up  out  of  your  mind.  Is  it  °the  part  of  a 
Christian  to  spend  all  his  life  in  making  gain  ?  You  must  strive 
to  retain4  that  great  reputation  °of  yours.  You  must  take 
care5  lest  your  so-great  reputation  should  be  endangered.  No 
obstacle  shall  be  placed  by  me  (°  in  the  way  of  accom¬ 
plishing)  this  so  great  and  difficu.i,  an  object.1 
Is  it  then  the  part  of  a  Christian  to  increase  this  unpopu¬ 
larity i*  of  mine  ? 

Nullum  unquam  verbum.  2  humanissimus.  Df.  (1),  18. 

4  Pt.  I.  75.  5  cavere.  6  See  Odium. 

§  9.  Pronouns  continued. 

k  56.  Quisque  with  a  superlative  or  ordinal  numeral  follows  the 
adjective. 

Optimus  quisque :  altissima  quaeque  flumina :  quinto  quoque  verbo. 

*  Quisque  is  generally  placed  immediately  after  a  case  of  sui  or 
suus  referring  to  it. 

Placet  Stoicis  suo  quamque  rem  nomine  appellare.  C. 

*  57.  ( a )  Quidam  generally  follows  its  noun,  whether  substantive 
or  adjective  :  but 

*  58.  ( b )  Quidam  precedes  its  noun,  when  there  is  an  opposition 
between  the  quidam  and  some  others :  and  in  other  cases  where 
the  quidam  is  very  emphatic. 

(c)  For  instance,  where  the  quidam  means  ‘some  that  I  could  name:'  ‘  some 
we  know  of.' 

to)  1.  Interim  Agyllius  quidam  vincula  laxavit.  Nep.—2.  Sed  audio  majorem 
quendam  in  urbe  timorem  esse.  C. 

( b )  Clamor  iste  indicat  esse  quosdam  cives  imperitos,  sed  non  multos.  C. 

(c)  Otium  praestaturi  videntur,  si  quidam  homines  patientius  eorum  poten¬ 

tiam  ferre  potuerint.  C. 

*  59.  The  ille  of  celebrity  follows  its  substantive,  if  there  is  no 
adjective  with  it :  if  there  is,  it  generally  stands  between  the  two. 

Obs.  Not  always :  e.  g.  illam  acerbissimam  ministram  Praetorum  avari¬ 
tiae  calumniam.  C.  Ep.  ad  Q.  Fratr.  i.  1,  8.  Herculem  Xenophontium 
illum.  C.  Xenophon  Socraticus  ille.  C. 

1.  Habetur  vir  egregius  L.  Paullus  ille,  qui,  &c.  C. — 2.  Omnis  illa  vis  et 
quasi  flamma  oratoris,  &c.  C. — 3.  Antipater  ille  Sidonius.  C. — 4.  Mne¬ 
sarchus,  auditor  Panaetii  i  Ilius  tui.  C. 


248  pronouns.  [§9.  60-64. 

*  60.  Aliquis  in  connection  with  another  adjective  generally 
takes  the  second  place.1 

Bene  dicere  non  habet  definitam  aliquam  2  regionem. 

*  61.  (a)  When  its  substantive  has  no  other  adjective  or  pronoun 
with  it,  aliquis  generally  follows  the  substantive,  when  both  are 
unemphatic  ;  but  ( b )  precedes  it,  when  either  is  to  receive  promi¬ 
nence  or  emphasis. 

•  Obs.  Aliquis  is  emphatic  and  precedes  the  substantive,  when  it  means 
‘ some  at  all  events ,'  1  some  if  not  much:'  e.  g.  qui  sedulitatem  mali  poetas 
duxerit  aliquo  tamen  praemio  dignam,  &c.  C. 

(а)  1.  Aut  de  pingendo  pictor  aliquis  diserte  dixerit  aut  scripserit.  C. — 2  Si 
hujusce  rei  ratio  aliqua ,  &c.  C. 

(б)  1.  Ejus  facti,  si  non  bonam,  at  aliquam  rationem  afferre.  C.— 2.  Quid 
mihi — tamquam  alicui  Grceculo'  otioso  et  loquaci — quaestiunculam — poni¬ 
tis?  C.— 3.  Timide  tamquam  ad  aliquem  scopulum'  libidinis,  sic  tuam 
mentem  ad  philosophiam  appulisti.  C. 

*  62.  Two  pronouns,  or  an  adverb  with  the  pron.  from  which  it 
is  derived,  are  generally  brought  close  together. 

*  Obs.  Not  always :  even  when  the  pronouns  relate  to  the  same  person: 
e.  g.  “ cum  quibus  te  non  tuum  judicium  sed  temporum  vincla  conjunxe¬ 
runt C.  Fam.  x.  6. 

Equites,  sine  duce  relicti,  alii  alia  in  civitates  suas  dilapsi  sunt.  L. 

*  63.  (a)  When  ipse  with  a  case  of  sui  stands  for  himself  \  &c.,  it 
generally  follows  the  case  of  sui :  *but  ( b)  when  there  is  to  be 
particular  ejnphasis  on  the  subject ,  ipse  precedes,  and  is  used  in 
the  nominative,  even  though  the  opposition  intended  is  between 
oneself  and  somebody  else. 

(a)  1.  Deforme  est,  de  se  ipsum  praedicare,  falsa  praesertim.  C — 2.  Non  egeo 
medicina  ;  me  ipse  consolor.  C. — 3.  Lentulum  mihi  ipsi  antepono.  C. 

(b)  1.  Si  quis  ipse  sibi  inimicus  est,  &c. — 2.  Ipsi  se  curare  non  possunt. 
[Sometimes,  however,  the  ipse  follows  :  si  te  ipse  contineas.  C.] 

*64.  In  other  words:  whenever  what  is  asserted  of  the  agent 

with  respect  to  himself  is  a  strange  thing,  ipse  is  to  be  in  the  nom. 

and  precede  sui,  even  when  the  meaning  is  himself  opposed  to 

others  (of  whom  the  assertion  might  be  expected  to  be  made). 


1  For  ‘ any  other,'  alius  ullus  is  more  common  (I  think)  than  ullus 
alius:  but  this  depends,  of  course,  on  the  relative  emphasis  of  ‘  any '  or  ‘  other. 
To  express  it  strongly,  separate  the  adjectives,  as  :  non  ullam  rem  aliam 
extimescens  nisi ,  &c.  C. 

2  ln  unus  aliquis  this  order  should  be  observed,  unless  there  is  another  a4j 
(e.  g.  aliquis  unus  pluresve),  or  the  aliquis  is  emphatic 


$10.  65,  66. J 


THE  RELATIVE. 


24a 


Exercise  12. 

[‘The  '’famous/  ‘the  ° great,’  &c.,  to  be  translated  by  ille.] 

65.  I  far  prefer1  this  suburban  gymnasium  °of  yours  (53, /5) 
to  the  °  famous  Academy  and  Lycseum.  Every  body  loves 
himself.2  Every  one  is  dear  to  himself.  The  longest  letters  are 
0  always3  the  most  agreeable.  To  each  virtue  its  owna  pecu¬ 
liar  praise  is  due.4  Does  it  °then  become  an  orator  almost  to 
die  with  laughing  every  third  word  ?  They  cry-out,  that  each 
man  must  abide  by  his  own  judgment.  Would  you/  dare  to 
refuse  to  abide  by  the  judgment  of  the  °  g  r  e  a  t  Plato  ?  I  must 
explain,  what8  was  the  opinion  of  that  god  °  o  f  mine,  Plato. 
That  Epicurus  °of  yours  boasts  that  he  had  no  master.  Epicu¬ 
rus  says  that  he  attended6  °the  lectures  of  a  certain 
Pamphilus  at  Samos.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  some7  corpuscles 
are  smooth,  others  rough,  others  round  ( ab  X  ba).  Do 
you  0  t  h  e  n  believe,  that  this  immense  and  most  beautiful  world 
was  made8  of 9  certain  corpuscles,  by  no  natural  compul¬ 
sion,  10  but  by  a  certain  fortuitous  concourse  ?  Let  us  honour 
this  °man’sa  diligence  with  some  reward ,  if  not  a  great 
0  o  n  e  . 1 1  Do  you  °then  compare  me  to  some  Scythian  (61,  b)  ? 
Is  it  °  t  h  e  n  like  a  philosopher12  to  defend  pugnaciously  some 
doubtful  opinion  °or  other? 

1  Longe,  anteponere.  2  I.  363.  Begin  with  ipse.  3  I.  399,  b. 

4  peculiar,  proprius.  To  be  due,  deberi.  5  quisnam.  6  to  attend  a  person’s 
lectures,  audire  aliquem.  Turn  the  verb  into  the  passive,  ‘  was  heard  by  him.* 

7  quidam.  8  ejjicere.  9  ex.  10  ‘  no  nature  compelling.’  11  if 

with  no  (non)  great,  yet  (at)  with  some  reward.’  (See  Ex.  61,  b.)  12  Say : 

‘of  a  philosopher.’ 


§  10.  The  Relative. 

*  66.  ( a )  The  relative  (except  when  it  refers  to  is,  ea ,  id)  should 
stand  as  near  as  possible  to  its  antecedent :  ( b )  the  place  of  the 
antecedent  being  often  determined  with  this  view. 

(a)  Xerxem  per  literas  certiorem  fecit  id  agi,  ut  pons,  quern  ille  in  Hellesponto 
fecerat,  dissolveretur.  Nep. 

(a)  Bellum  grave  et  periculosum  vestris  vectigalibus  atque  sociis  a  duobus 
potentissimis  regibus  infertur,  Mithridate  et  Tigrane;  quorum  alter,  &c. 
C. 


11* 


250  THE  RELATIVE.  [§11.67-71, 

*  67.  This  applies  only  to  strictly  relative  clauses  :  not  to  qui  = 
the  demonstr.  is,  with  et,  nam,  igitur,  autem,  &c. 

-  68.  Appositions,  and  even  single  adjectives  (especially  super¬ 
latives),  that  in  English  precede  the  relative  clause,  are  in  Latin 
generally  placed  in  that  clause. 

Hence  ‘  the  very  celebrated  general  Epaminondas,  in  whose  house’  would 
be:  Epaminondas,  cujus  celeberrimi  imperatoris  in  domo,  &c.  ‘  The  im¬ 

mortal  glory  which  the  Greeks  acquired,’  gloria,  quam  immortalem  Greeci 
retulerunt.  So:  ‘  a  city  which,'1  quse  urbs,  &c. — 1  the  city  he  first  visited' 
quam  urbem  primam  adiit. — ' an  opinion  which'  quse  sententia,  &c.,  ( city 
and  opinion  being  in  apposition  to  something  preceding.) 

Exercise  13. 

69.  In  the  same  year  Cumse,  a  citys  which*  the  Greeks  were 
then  in  possession  of,1  is  taken  by  the  Campanians.  The  Amanus 
divides  Syria  from  Cilicia,  a  mountain  which  was  full  of  °our 
constant2  enemies.®  I  hope  that  you  will3  recover  from  the  very 
gevere  disease,  with  which  you  are  now  afflicted.  I  hope  that 
you  will3  keep  the  many*  and  very  beautiful8  promises,  which  you 
made  me.  The  very  great*  and  beautiful®  reward,  with  which  I 
have  been  presented,  wonderfully4  delights  me.  That  Athena¬ 
goras  of  Cyme,5  who  had  dared  to  export  corn  in  a  famine,1* 
was  scourged*  with  rods.6 

1  To  be  in  possession  of,  tenere.  2  Constant,  sempiternus :  to  end  the 

sentence.  3  fore  ut .  .  .  4  mirifice.  5  Cymaeus.  6  virgis  caedi. 


§  11.  The  Relative  continued. 

*  70.  (a)  When  the  subject  is  defined  by  ille  and  a  relative 
clause,  it  is  often  placed  in,  and  at  the  end  of,  the  relative  clause : 
so,  ( b )  when  a  relative  clause  stands  before  the  principal  clause 
(the  relative  being  in  the  nominative),  the  antecedent  often  ter¬ 
minates  the  relative  clause. 

(a)  Ille,  qui  in  Timaeo  mundum  aedificavit  Platonis  deus. 

(b)  Q,uae  perspicuam  omnibus  veritatem  continet  propositio,  nihil  indiget  ap¬ 

probationis.  C. 

*  71.  When  the  relative  clause  precedes  the  principal  one,  the 
rel.  may  give  up  its  usual  place  (as  the  first  word)  in  favour  of  a 
notion  that  is  to  be  made  prominent. 


$11  72-75. 


THE  KELATIVE. 


251 


Tributa  vix,  in  f  aenus  Pompeii  quod  satis  sit,  efficiunt.  C. 

•  72.  Of  two  cases  of  qui,  an  oblique  case  precedes  a  nomi< 
native. 

Senatus  ille,  quem  qui  ex  regibus  constare  dixit,  unus  veram  speciem  Romani 
senatus  cepit.  L. 

♦  73.  When  qui  refers  to  something  preceding,  no  conjunctions 
can  go  with  it  but  sect,  et  (before),  tamen ,  quidem ,  que  (after). 

I.  Perturbat  me,  C.  Caesar,  illud  interdum:  quod  tamen ,  quum  te  penitus 
recognovi,  timere  desino.  C. — 2.  Morositas  senum  habet  aliquid  excusa- 
tionis,  non  illius  quidem  justae,  sed  quae  probari  posse  videatur.  C. 

*  74.  Other  conjunctions,  such  as  autem ,  vero,  enim,  igitur, 
cannot  stand  with  qui,  unless  its  reference  is  to  something  that 
follows. 

1.  Quae  autem  secundum  naturam  essent,  ea  sumenda  et  quadam  aestima¬ 
tione  dignanda  docebat.  C. — 2.  Qui  igitur  adolescens,  nondum  tanta 
gloria  praeditus,  nihil  unquam  nisi  severissime  et  gravissime  fecerit,  is  eS 
existimatione,  eaque  aetate  saltavit  ?  C.— 3.  Quorum  vero  patres  aut  ma¬ 
jores  aliqua  gloria  praestiterunt,  ii  student  plerumque  eodem  in  genere 
laudis  excellere.  C. — 4.  Quae  ergo  ad  vitam  tuendam  pertinent,  partim 
sunt  in  animo,  &c.  C. 


Exercise  14. 

f r.f.  means  that  the  rei.  clause  is  to  stand  first  (see  Part  I.  30) :  a.  v.  that  the 
sentence  is  to  be  translated  by  the  active  voice.] 

75.  That  opinion i  °of  yours,  which  is  injurious1  to  us,  must 
be  rooted-up  out  of  your  mind.  That  Rupilius, J  who  for  so  many 
years  had  sat  at  the  helm  of  the  state,  had  jled  away  secretly, 
(r.  f.)  Let  those  therefore,  to  whom  we  all  owe  our  lives,  be 
buried  with  military  honours,  (r.f)  Will  therefore!  that  Lu¬ 
cilius,!  who  is  prepared  for  his  fate,  whatever  it  may  be,  fly 
away  secretly?  (r.f.)  You  are  therefore!  driving  from  the 
helm  of  the  state  those,  to  whom  both  you  and  I  owe  our  lives, 
(r.f.)  The  General  who  had  so  often  saved  the  state,  was  suf¬ 
fered  by  his  fellow-citizens  to  be  deprived  of  burial,  (a.  v.) 
We  have  scarcely  corn&  enough2  for  a  month.  Let  °those 
therefore'  who  have  kept  back  their  corn,  be  fined  a  sum-of- 
money.3  Peace  must  be  sued  for;  which  those  who  sue  for  it 
(fut.),  will  obtain. 

-Laedere.  2  Say :  ‘  which  may  be  enough  f  o  r  (‘in’)  a  m  o  n  t  h.*  •  Sea 
example  (71)  3  pecunia,  abl. 


252 


INTERROGATIVES.  PREPOSITIONS.  [§  12,13.76-79' 


§  12.  Interrogatives. 

*  76.  ( a )  Interrogatives,  except  ne,  take  the  first  place  in  an  indi¬ 
rect  question  that  follows  the  principal  sentence  :  but, 

*  77.  (Z>)  In  direct  questions,  or  indirect  questions  that  precede 
the  principal  sentence,  the  interrogative  sometimes  yields  the  first 
place  to  an  emphatic  notion. 

(a)  Quaeritur,  cur  doctissimi  homines  de  maximis  rebus  dissentiant.  C. 

(b)  1.  Dii  utrum,  sint,  necne  sint,  quaeritur.  C. — 2.  Quid?  Alexandrum 

Pkerceum  quo  animo  vixisse  arbitramur  ?  C. 

Exercise  15. 

78.  What  ?  is  not  nearly:  the  w  hoi  e-heave  n  a  filled1  with 
the  human  race  ?  But  whether  these  numbers1  are  poetical, 
or  of8  some  other  kind,  must  be  seen  next.3  When  S  o  crates1 
was  asked,4  whether  he  did  not  think  Archelaus,1  the  son  of 
Perdiccas,  happy  ;  I  don’t  know,  said  he,  for  I  have  never  con¬ 
versed  with  him.5  What  ?  did  not  the  0  f  a  m  o  u  s  Cato  of  Utica6 
die  by  his  own  hands  ?  What  ?  with  what  feelings  do  we  think 
that  Lucilius  of  Ariminum  saw  his  mistake  (b)  ?  I  wish  to 
remark7  °  h  e  r  e  ,  what8  a  calamity  over-confidence9  usually 10  is. 

1  Ramshorn  says  :  complere ,  to  fill  completely  ;  implere ,  to  fill  what  is  hollow 
empty ;  opplere,  to  fill  to  the  brim,  to  fill  to  overflowing,  to  cover  a  surface  by 
filling.  Nearly  so  Jentzen  :  plenum  quod  est  ad  satietatem  dicitur  completum, 
expletum:  repletum  est,  quod  exhaustum  erat,  ut  fossa :  applet  us  ad  su¬ 
perficiem,  r  cf  e  rtus,d  iff  er  tu  s,  c  onf  er  tus  ad  spatium  interius  pertinent. 

2  ex,  3  deinceps.  4  ‘  Socrates,  when  it  had  been  inquired  of  hirn  ’  ( suhj .) 
&c.,  qucerere  ex  aliquo.  5  colloqui  cum  aliquo.  6  Uticensis,  adj. — so 

Ariminensis  below.  ?  Libet  interponere.  8  C.  (1),  21.  Df.  (1),  50. 

6  nimia  fiducia.  10  ‘  is  wont  to  be.’ 


§13.  P  repos  i  tions . 

79.  Prepositions  (except  versus  and  tenus )  generally  stand  be¬ 
fore  their  nouns,  (a)  When  the  substantive  has  an  attributive 
with  it,  the  preposition  stands  between  the  attributive  and  its  sub¬ 
stantive,  when  either  of  them  is  emphatic.  (/;)  When  the  attrib¬ 
utive  is  a  rel.  pron.,  the  ^reposition  generally  stands  between  the 
pron.  and  its  substantiva 


PREPOSITIONS. 


2o3 


$  13.  80-84.] 

Ca)  1.  Magna  cu/n  cura  atque  diligentia  scripsit.  C. — 2.  Romani  Horatium 
accipiunt  eo  viajore  cum  gaudio,  quo  prope  metum  res  fuerat. 

(6)  In  some  expressions  the  preposition  nearly  always  takes  the  middle  place, 
e.  g.  qu&tn  re;  quamob  rem;  ea  de  causa. 

\  80.  Even  when  the  relative  has  no  substantive  with  it,  the  pre¬ 
position  often  follows  it. 

1.  Senatus,  quos  ad  soleret,  referendum  eensuit.  C. — 2.  Homo  disertus  non 
intelligit  eum,  quem  contra  dicit,  laudari  a  se,  &c.  C. — 3.  Socii  putandi 
sunt,  quos  inter  res  communicata  est.  C. — 4.  Res,  qua  de  agitur.  C. 

«  81.  Cum  is  always  appended  to  me,  te,  se,  nobis,  vobis,  qui 
(=  quo)  :  and  also  to  quo,  qua,  quibus ,  when  the  cum  is  entirely 
unemphatic. 

i.  Maxime  cavendum  est,  ut  eos,  quibuscum  sermonem  conferimus,  et 
vereri  et  diligere  videamur.  C.— 2.  Ira  procul  absit,  cum  (emphatic)  qua 
nihil  recte  fieri,  nihil  considerate  potest.  C.— 3.  Noli  adversum  eos  me 
velle  ducere,  cum  quibus  ( opp .  to  adversum  cos'»  ne  contra  te  arma 
ferrem,  Italiam  reliqui.  Ncp.  25,  4. 

*  82.  When  a  substantive  governed  by  a  preposition  has  other 
words  attached  to  it,  these  words  are  often  placed  between  the 
preposition  and  its  noun. 

1.  Erat  olim  mos  ut  faciles  essent  in  suum  cuique  tribuendo.  C. — 2.  Honore 
digni  cum  ignominia  dignis  non  sunt  comparandi.  C. 

4  A  preposition  is  sometimes  separated  from  its  noun  by  que,  ve, 
vero,  autem,  tamen,  quidem,  enim. 

1.  Sensim  hanc  consuetudinem  et  disciplinam  jam  antea  minuebamus ;  post 
vero  S ullae  victoriam  penitus  amisimus.  C. — 2.  So  :  post  autem  Alexan¬ 
dri  mortem.  Nep. — 3.  Post  enim.  Chrysippum.  C. 

«  83.  Even  in  prose,  per  in  adjurations  is  separated  from  its  case 
by  the  acc.  pronoun  of  the  person  addressed,  the  verb  adjure, 
beseech,  implore  being  omitted. 

Nolite,  judices,  per  vos  fortunas ,  per  liberos  vestros,  inimicis  meis,  iis  prae¬ 
sertim  quos  ego  pro  vestra  salute  suscepi,  dare  laetitiam.  C. 

Exercise  16. 

84.  On  these  matters  I  would  wish1  you  (pi.)  to  deliberate8 
with  Pomponius,  with  Camillus,  with  whomsoever2  it  shall  seem 
°good  to  you.  As  to3  him,  in  whose  °  hands4  all*  power* 
ts  °1  odged  ,  I  see  nothing  to  fear.®  Epicurus  showed  himself 
a  sufficiently  apt  °scholar  in  °recei  ving4  this  nerveless7 
and  effeminate8  opinion ;  after  him  Philonymus  the  Rhodian  || 


£54 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


14.  85-89 

asserted  that  to  be  without  pain  is  the  summum  bonum.  They  fix 
a  certain  limit,9  beyond  which,  °  t  h  e  y  say,  we  ought  not  to 
advance.  Neither  in  those  who  frame  constitutions,10  nor  in 
those  who  wage  wars,  is  the  desire  of  oratorical  power11  wont  to 
arise.  I  believe  that  a  limit  in  sepulchres  is  properly12  required : 
for  to  what  expenses  that  matter13  has  already  advanced,  you  see 
in  the  tomb  of  C.  Figulus.  Pomponius  is  going  to  set  out  for  Sicily  : 
a  matter*  concerning  which  I  have  ||  fished  out  a  g  r  e  a  t  deal14 
from  Hortensius. 

1  Velim  with  subj.  (ut  omitted).  2  The  simple  relative.  3  de. 

4  To  be  in  any  body’s  hands,  penes  aliquem  esse.  Df.  (1),  108.  6  ad 

aliquid  satis  docilem  se  'praebere.  7  enervatus.  8  muliebris.  9  mo¬ 
dum  adhibere.  10  constituere  rempublicam.  11  dicendi,  12  recte. 

L'°  res.  '”i~* — 14  multa. 


'  §  14.  Conjunctions. 

85.  A  conjunction  stands  at  the  head  of  the  clause  to  which  it 
belongs. 

*  86.  But  the  relative  or  demonstrative  pronoun,  and  any  em¬ 
phatic  notion,  may  precede  any  but  the  co-ordinate  conjunctions, 
tt.  ac,  atque  ;  vel,  aut ;  sed  ;  at,  verum ;  nam,  namque,  etenim  ; 
quamobrem,  quapropter  ;  ita,  itaque,  sic,  &c. 

1.  Id  ille  ut  audivit,  domum  reverti  noluit.  Nep. — 2.  Huic  si  paucos  puta 
tis  affines  esse,  vehementer  erratis. — 3.  Commentarios  quosdam  Aristotelis 
veni  ut  auferrem.  C. — (So  in  subordinate  sentences .)  4.  Atilius  Regulus 

- sententiam  ne  diceret,  recusavit.  C. — 5.  Gorgiae  Leontino  tantus 

honos  habitus  est  a  Graecis,  soli  ut  ex  omnibus  Delphis  non  inaurata 
statua,  sed  aurea  statueretur.  C. 

*  87.  When  two  conjunctions  come  together,  the  conjunction  of 
the  principal  precedes  that  of  the  subordinate  sentence. 

Itaque ,  si  aut  requietem  natura  non  quaereret,  aut  eam  posset  alia  quadam 
ratione  consequi,  facile  pateremur.  C. 

*  88.  Quam  (how)  with  an  adjective  is  often  separated  from  the 
adjective,  for  the  purpose  of  adding  emphasis  to  it. 

Ui  credam  ita  esse,  quam  est  id  exiguum  ?  C. 

.  Exercise  17. 

89.  When  he7  heard  this,*  he  suffered  nobody  to  rest.  I  am 
come  to  recompense  you  with  some  reward,  if  not  a  great  °  o  n  o 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


255 


§  15.  90-92.] 

(86,  S).  When  he  heard  this,a  he  uttered  the  name  of  Quine* 
tilius  in  a  very  'pathetic  manner.  I  will  call  upon  Caius,  whom,» 
though  I  think  he  will  keep  his  promises ,  I  will  nevertheless  bind 
by  an  oath.  Do  you  °then  think  those  evils  are  to  be  feared, 
which  are  over  in  a  moment  of  time  ?  Listen  to  what  that 
C  a  i  u  s  (o  f )  y  o  u  r  s a  has  done.  If  Demetrius  has  an  audience , 
it  will  be  all  over1  with  the  army.  Though  Caiusa  owes  his  life 
to  me,  yet  he  endeavours  to  bring  me  into  odium.  If  therefore 
(87,  b )  they  think  that  they  owe  their  lives  to  me,  I  should  be 
honoured  °by  them  with  some*  reward.*  If  therefore  (87,  b) 
they  have  derived  any  advantage  from  my  care,  let  them  confer 
some*  reward 8  upon  me. 

1  Actum  esse  de. 


§  15.  Conjunctions. — Autem ,  enim ,  igitur ,  with  esse. 

*  90.  Obs.  Igitur ,  tamen ,  ergo ,  deinde ,  praeterea,  itaque,  take  the  first  place, 

when  they  modify  the  whole  clause,  and  not  merely  any  particular  notion 
of  it.»  When  they  modify  a  particular  notion,  only  or  especially,  they 
follow  that  notion,  or  the  first  and  most  important  of  the  words  by  which 
it  is  expressed.*  In  Cicero,  however,  itaque  always  takes  the  first  place, 
igitur  never. 

*  91.  If  esse  or  the  subject  begins  the  sentence,  autem,  enim, 
igitur ,  take  the  second  place. 

1.  Est  enim  effectrix  multarum  et  magnarum  voluptatum.  C. — 2.  Sunt  au¬ 
tem  clariora - indicia  naturae.  C.— 3.  Id  autem  est  perfectum  offi¬ 

cium.  C. 

%  92.  If  the  sentence  begins  with  the  predicate  or  non,  num,  nemo, 
nihil  quis or  if  esse  is  emphatic;  esse  (generally)  takes  the 
second,  and  the  particle  the  third  place. 


1  Quis  enim  est,  &c.,  occurs  'Tusc.  iv.  2,  and  elsewhere.  The  thing  to  be  con¬ 
sidered  is  :  whether  the  question  or  assertion  relates  to  the  existance  of  the 
thing  or  to  its  nature.  “  Q,uo  minus  recte  dicatur  quid  enim  est ,  nihil  enim 
est ,  nulla  obstat  ratio. — Discrimen  proficiscitur  ex  natura  verbi  esse ,  quod,  quum 
non  plenam  significationem  praestet,  cum  nomine  conjungitur  in  unam  notion¬ 
em,  et  encliticorum  more  comprehenditur  uno  accentu:  sed  ubi  significat  tere 
esse ,  exstare ,  attrahit  interrogandi  particulam. — Q,ui  quaerit,  quid  est  enim?  aut 
exspectat  responsionem  nihil  esse,  vel  nihil  aliud  esse ;  aut  an  res  vere  sit,  dubitat . 
Q,ui  interrogat,  quid  enim  est  ?  de  certo  genere  rei  quaerit,  vel,  interrogationis 


256 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


[§  15.  93-95 

1.  Dicendum  est  enim  quod  sentio.  C. — 2.  Nihil  est  enim  aiiud,  quamobrem, 
&c.  C. — 3.  Quis  est  enim  qui,  &c.  ? — 4.  Nemo  est  igitur ,  qui. 

%.  93.  (a)  A  preposition  throws  these  particles  into  the  third 
place,  unless  it  is  emphatic  ;  ( b )  when  they  may  stand  between 
the  preposition  and  its  noun. 

(a)  Ex  hac  igitur  illud  efficitur.  C. 

(b)  1.  Post  vero  Sullae  victoriam  (hanc  consuetudinem)  penitus  amisimus. 
C. — 2.  Herillus  jam  pridem  est  rejectus:  post  enim  Chrysippum  non  est 
disputatum.  C. 

%  94.  Sometimes  est  follows  a  preposition  and  its  case,  and  thus 
the  particle  is  thrown  forward  to  the  fourth  place. 

Ab  ca  est - enim  interfectus.  C. 

*  95.  Quoque ,  quidem  (which  always  follow  the  word  they  belong 

to)  also  throw  autem ,  enim ,  igitur  to  the  third  place. 

Ei  quoque  enim  proconsuli  imperium  in  annum  prorogabatur.  L. 

*  96.  A  partial  exception  to  what  is  here  said  of  quidem ,  arises 
from  the  affection  of  the  pronominal  particle  quidem  for  a  pronoun. 
Thus  in  tibique  persuade  esse  te  quidem  mihi  carissimum ,  sed 
multo  fore  cariorem ,  si,  &c.,  the  quidem,  which  properly  belongs 
to  carissimum,  has  deserted  to  the  pronoun. 
v-  97.  So  with  other  verbs  the  particle  takes  the  third  place,  when 
the  verb  has  a  word  with  it,  from  which  it  cannot  well  be  sepa¬ 
rated. 

Non  video  autem ,  &c. - Num  vis  igitur  audire,  &c.  ? 

k  98.  The  post-positive  conjunctions  may  separate  a  pnenomen 
from  a  cognomen,  and  even  such  a  compound  word  as  jusjuran¬ 
dum,  plebiscitum. 

1.  L .  quidem  Philippus  gloriari  solebat.  C. — 2.  Rem  vero  publicam. — 3 
Jurisque  jurandi. — 4.  Rogationibus,  plebisve  scitis. 

Exercise  18.  _ 

99.  For  I  must  say  how  salutary1  religion  is  to  men.  For 
some  reason  must  be  given  of  this,  as  it  appears  to  you  at  least,2 
strange  counsel.  For  who  is  there,  whose  ears  that  report  has 


vi  intenta,  non  hoc  esse,  vel  prorsus  nihil  esse.  Nam  tota  vis  continetur  "no 
verbo  quid. — Hoc  ad  alias  quoque  formas  pertinet,  quae  verbum  est  encliticum 
uomini  conjunctum  habent.”  {Hand.  Purs.  ii.  400.) 


NON . 


HAUD. 


257 


§  16.  100-106.] 

not  reached  ?  1  approve  of  that  :3  for  there  is  nothing  from  which 

you  can  derive  greater  advantage.  Be  of  good3  courage  :4  for 
there  is  nobody  to  eject  you  from  possession.  Do  you  wish  there¬ 
fore  to  listen  to  what  that  Pomponiusa  has  done  ?  You  see  what 
prudence,  and  how  firm8  a  mind8  there  is  need  of ;  for  °  w  e  must 
take  the  helm  of  the  state.  For  who  is  there  who  denies,  that  you 
both  sit  at  the  helm,  as  the  saying  is,  and  above  all  others5 
watch  over6  the  state  ?  0  W  e  waver7  and  change  °our  opinion 

even  in  clearer  things :  for  in  these  there  is  some  obscurity.  I 
approve  of  that  :3  for  there  is  no  rapidity8  which  can  come-into- 
competition9  with  that10  of  the  mind. 

1  To  be  salutary,  saluti  esse  2  quidem.  3  laudo  id  quidem. 

*  animus.  5  unum  ex  omnibus  maxime.  6  prospicere  with  dat. 

7  labare.  8  celeritas.  9  contendere.  10  The  subst.  must  be  repeated. 


§  16.  Non.  Haud. 

»  100.  (a)  Non  (or  haud)  generally  stands  before  the  word  whose 
notion  it  denies :  thus  when  there  is  an  opposition,  it  is  always 
prefixed  to  one  of  the  antithetical  words  :  but, 

•  101.  ( b )  Non  (haud)  takes  the  first  place  in  negative  senten¬ 
ces  that  express  a  consequence,  (hence  so  frequently  with  ergo, 
igitur,)  and  (c)  in  hypothetical  conclusions,  when  nisi  is  the  con¬ 
ditional  particle. 

(a)  1.  Non  paranda  nobis  solum  sapientia  sed  f ruenda  etiam.  C. — 2.  Oti\ 
fructus  est  non  contentio  animi,  sed  relaxatio.  C. 

(b)  Non  igitur  de  improbo,  sed  de  callide  improbo  quaerimus.  C. 

(c)  Non  jam  Troicis  temporibus  tantum  laudis  in  dicendo  Ulyssi  tribuisset 
Homerus,  Timjam  tum  honos  esset  eloquentiae.  C. 

*  102.  Non  (haud)  may  also  take  the  first  place,  when  the  denial 
is  to  be  very  emphatic  ;  especially  in  negative  questions. 

1.  Non  ego  jam  Epaminondae,  non  Leonidae  mortem  hujus  morti  antepono. 
C. — 2.  Quid  bestiae  1  non  pro  suo  partu  ita  propugnant,  ut  vulnera  reci¬ 
piant  ?  C. 

%  103.  The  place  of  non  in  the  case  of  est,  &c.,  with  a  participle, 
or  of  an  auxiliary  verb  (with  infin.)  is  next  before  est  or  the 
auxiliary  verb  (when  there  is  no  antithesis). 


256 


COMPARATIVES,  ETC. 


[§  17.  104-100. 


i.  Hi  vos,  quoniam  libere  non  licet ,  tacite  rogant,  &c.  C. — 2.  Regulo  non 
fuit  Jupiter  metuendus,  ne,  &c.  C. — [When  there  is  antithesis ,  the  non 
precedes  the  antithetical  uord.\  3.  Non  modo — non  deterritus,  sed — 
concitatus  est. — 4.  Hanc  epistolam  cur  non  scindi  velim,  causa  nulla 
est.  C. 


104.  The  place  of  non  is  optional,  when  it  belongs  to  a  pre¬ 
dicate  ( esse  being  the  copula),  or  when  it  belongs  to  a  universal 
negative  proposition  with  quis  or  qui. 

1.  Jove  tonante  cum  populo  agi  non  est  fas.  C. — 2.  Nihil  est,  quod  Deus 
efficere  non  possit.  C. — 3.  Nihil  est  enim,  quod  non  alicubi  esse  cogatur. 

c. 

Exercise  19. 


105.  V  should  not  have  risked  all3  my  fortunes,*  unless  I  had 
made  you  take  an  oath  in  words  prescribed  by  me.  I'  should  not 
have  been  banished ,  unless  you  had  brought  me  into  odium.  You 
shall  not  therefore  receive  any  reward  of  your  improbity  from  me. 
I  do  not  therefore  consider  myself  to  be  0  t  o  o  richly  rewarded 
for  my  great1  labour.  What  therefore  °did  Caius°do?  did 
not2  he'  receive  from  you  the  reward  of  his  crimes?3  I  shall  not 
therefore  place  much  reliance  on  your  promises.  I  know  that 
you  favour  me  :  I  will  not  therefore  bind  you  by  an  oath.  Caius 
would  not  have  fallen  into  so  greats  a  calamity3  unless  he  had 
ceased  to  be  in  favor  with  you.  There  is  hardly  any  thing  which 
does  not  admit  of  the  excuse  of  ignorance. 

1  Say :  ‘for  my  so-great  labour.’  2  Ask  the  question  with  non ,  which  is 
often  used  for  nonne  in  vehement  interrogations.  3  See  Dod.  delictum. 


§  17.  Comparatives ,  Spc. 

106.  In  comparisons  with  quam ,  both  the  substantives  connected 
oy  quam  often  precede  the  comparative. 

1.  Adventus  hostium  fuit  agris,  quam  urbi,  terribilior.  L. — 2.  Maris  subita 
tempestas,  quam  ante  provisa,  terret  navigantes  vehementius.  C. — 3.  Ex 
multis  judicari  potest  virtutis  esse,  quam  cetatis ,  cursum  celeriorem.  C. — 
4.  Themistoclis  nomen,  quam  Solonis,  est  illustrius.  C. — 5.  Pompejus  fuit 
restituendi  mei,  quam  retinendi,  studiosior.  C. — 6.  Facere ,  quam  sanare, 
vulnera  facilius  est.  Q. 


§  17.  107-112.  COMPARATIVES,  ETC.  259 

*  107.  A  vocative  is  inserted  after  some  words  of  the  sentence. 


Q,uum  in  omnibus  causis  gravibus,  C.  Cccsar,  initio  dicendi  commoveri  si¬ 
leam  vehementius.  C. 

»  108.  Inquam  also  is  inserted  after  some  words  ;  as  ait  is,  when 
not  followed  bv  an  injin.  or  sic,  ita,  &c. 

1.  Te,  inquit ,  Appi,  tuumque  caput,  &c.  L. — 2.  Hoc  te  uno  quo  possum,  ait , 
modo,  fillia,  in  libertatem  vindico.  L. 

*  109.  If  inquam  has  a  nom.,  the  verb  generally  stands  first. 

*  110.  So  with  ut  ait ;  ut  narrat ;  &c.,  the  verb  precedes  its 
nominative. 

1.  Sed  dum  palato  quid  sit  optimum  judicat,  cceli,  palatum  ( ut  ait  Ennius ) 
non  suspexit.  C. — 2.  Pacideianus  aliquis  hoc  animo ,  ut  narrat  Lucilius, 
&c. 

*  111.  So  mihi  crede  ( usually  in  this  order),  credo,  opinor,  puto, 
existimo,  (all  four  with  or  without  ut,)  quaeso,  obsecro,  are  often 
thrown  parenthetically  into  the  middle  of  a  sentence. 

1.  Rubeo,  mihi  crede ,  sed  jam  scripseram.  C. — 2.  Tranquillatis  autem  rebus 
Romanis,  remigravit  Romam,  ut  opinor,  L.  Cotta  et  L.  Torquato  Coss. — 
3.  Nolite,  obsecro  ros,  pati,  mihi  acerbiorem  reditum  esse,  quam  fuerit, 
ille  ipse  discessus.  C. 

Obs.  Crede  mihi  is  by  no  means  uncommon  in  Cicero :  the  ‘  believe  ’  is 
then  emphatic.  Thus,  Jam  enim  dico  meum  ;  antea,  crede  mihi,  subdubi¬ 
tabam. — Cic.  ad  Alt.  xiv.  5,  2.  Crede  may  then  stand  at  the  head  of  its 
clause;  as,  Crede,  igitur  mihi,  Plance ,  omnes ,  &c. — Cic.  Fam.  x.  6. 


Exercise  20. 

112.  It  is  easier  to  tie  a  knot,  than  to  untie  °  i  t .  °  M  y  return 

was  more  bitter  to  me,  than  that  departure  itself. b  Lucilius  was 
honoured  with  a  more  splendid  funeral  than  Demetrius.  The 
Boii  fled  to  °  t  h  e  i  r  camp  in  more  complete  disorder  than  the 
iEdui.  It  is  easier  to  make  &  promise  than  to  perform  it.  Is  it 
not  sometimes1  a  harder  °  t  h  i  n  g  to  perform  a  promise  than  to 
make  it  ?  You  ought  to  blush  (111)  believe  me  ;  for  you  have 
wrested  these  things  from  my  hands.  Do  not,  I  beseech  you,  allow 
this  lucky  opportunity  to  slip  through  your  fingers .2  These 
things,  as  I  imagine,  would  not  be  in  our  power,2  if  you  had  not 
let  this  lucky  opportunity  slip  through  your  fingers  2  Terrour 


260 


COMPARATIVES,  ETC. 


[§17.  112. 


as  Ennius  says,  banishes3  all8  wisdom*  from  my  mind.  Separate1 
yourself  at  length,5  I  beseech  °you,  from  those,  with  whom  not 
your  °o  wn  judgment,  but  the  circumstances  of  the  times  have 
united5  you. 


1  Rarius  interdum  quam  normunquam  esse  memento.  '2  See  Hand. 

3  qnidmihiex  animo  expectorare.  For  ex  animo  others  read  exanimato 
Terror,  navor.  4  sejungere  3  aliquando.  8  conjungere. 


EXPLANATION  OF  MARKS,  &c. 


Words  in  [  ]  arc  to  be  omitted  in  translation.1 * 

J  Words  in  italics,  to  which  this  mark  is  prefixed,  are  to  stand  at  the  head  of 
their  clause.  If  the  word  that  follows  II  is  not  in  italics,  the  mark  applies 
to  that  word  only. 

*  This  mark  denotes,  that  the  word  to  which  it  is  prefixed  is  to  be  looked  for  in 
the  Extracts  from  the  ‘  Antibarbarus,5  appended  to  the  volume. 

I  This  mark  means,  that  the  clause  to  which  it  is  prefixed  is  to  precede  the 
whole  or  part  of  that  which  stands  before  it  in  English. 

t  This  mark  means,  that  the  active  voice  is  to  be  turned  into  the  passive,  or  vice- 
versa. 

Numerals  followed  by  a  curve  refer  to  the  Cautions  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

Numerals  without  a  curve  refer  to  the  Differences  of  Idiom  at  the  end  of  the 
volume. 

C.  and  Df.  refer,  respectively,  to  the  Cautions  and  Differences  of  Idiom  in  Prac¬ 
tical  Introduction,  Part  I. 

V.  M  refer  to  the  Versus  Memoriales  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

M.  L.  refer  to  the  Memorial  Lines  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

§pr  Numerical  references  in  the  notes  refer  to  the  First  Part  of  the  ‘Practical 
Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composition.5 

gjT  Words  in  the  notes  marked  by  single  inverted  commas,  are  the  literal  trans¬ 
lation  of  the  Latin  to  be  used. 


1  In  the  first  five  Exercises,  words  to  be  omitted  are  marked  by  °  prefixed  to 

words  in  spaced  printing. 


' 

r 


r 


* 


■ 


PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION 

TO 

LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION. 


ii. 

LONGER  LATIN  EXERCISES. 

(On  connecting  propositions  by  the  relative  pronoun,  where  in 
English  we  should  use  a  demonstrative.) 

%  1.  Propositions  are  in  Latin  often  connected  by  the  relative 
qui,  qua,  quod,  where  in  English  we  should  use  and,  for,  but, 
now,  &c.,  with  the  demonstrative. 

2.  (a)  Nam  et  praetor  pedestribus  exercitibus  praefuit,  et  praefectus  classis  res 
magnas  mari  gessit.  Quas  ob  causas  (  =  atque  ob  eas  causas,  ‘  and 
for  these  reasons’)  praecipuus  ei  honos  est  habitus. 

( b )  Namque  omnibus  unus  insulis  praefuit.  In  qua  (  =  nam  in  ea)  po¬ 
testate  Pheras  cepit,  coloniamque  Lacedaemoniorum.  ( Nep .  ix.  1.) 

♦  3.  The  relative  in  these  propositions  is  equivalent  to  the  unem- 
phatic  is,  ea,  id,  with  et,  autem,  igitur  ;  or  even  nam ,  tamen,  sed, 
vero.  %  If  the  demonstrative  pronoun  required  is  the  more  strongly 
demonstrative  hic,  ille,  or  even  if  there  would  be  any  emphasis 
on  ‘  is,’  the  relative  must  not  be  used  :  nor  if  the  conjunction 
would  be  emphatic,  e.  g.  itaque ,  ergo,  at,  verum,  nempe,  nimi¬ 
rum,  &c. 

*  4.  Whether  is  should  be  retained,  or  this  construction  with  the  relative  used, 

depends  on  various  considerations.  Thus  in  Cic.  Cluent.  7 :  Postremo 
unus ,  qui  erat  reliquus  Dinece  filius  Cn.  Magius  est  mortuus.  Is  fecit 
heredem  illum  adolescentem  Oppianicum.  Here  the  ‘is’  is  retained 
because  a  qui  had  so  lately  preceded. 

*  5.  The  connection  by  the  relative  is  very  often  used,  when 
there  is  a  dependent  or  subordinate  sentence,  which  is  then  placed 
immediately  after  the  relative  :  hence  this  qui  very  often  precedes 
a  quum,  postquam,  ut,  ubi. 


264 


EXERCISE  l. 


6.  Reddita  inclusarum  ex  spelunca  boum  vox  Herculem  convertit. 

quum  vadentem  ad  speluncam  Cacus  vi  prohibere  conatus  esset,  ictus 
clava  fidem  pastorum  nequidquam  invocans  morte  occubuit.  ( Liv .) 

♦  7.  When  an  English  relative  clause  is  followed  by  a  subordi¬ 
nate  clause  containing  a  demonstrative,  or  has  such  a  clause 
inserted  in  it,  the  relative  is,  in  Latin,  placed  in  this  subordinate 
clause  (which  then  stands  first),  and  either  ‘ is 5  is  used  in  the 
other  clause  or  (if  the  pronoun  is  in  the  same  case  in  both 
clauses)  the  pronoun  is  omitted. 

8.  An  example  or  two  will  make  this  clear. 

(a)  ‘  A  man  ( whom  I  should  have  spoken  to),  (if  I  had  seen  him).* 

In  Latin  this  would  be : 

‘  A  man  (whom  if  I  had  seen),  (I  should  have  spoken  to).’ 

(b)  ‘A  man  by  whose  treachery  I  should  have  been  ruined,  if  I  had  not  dis¬ 

covered  it  in  time.’ 

In  Latin  : 

‘A  man  (whose  treachery  if  I  had  not  discovered  in  time),  (I  should  have 
been  ruined  by  it).'' 

(c)  Thus  instead  of 

‘Non  vident  id  se  cupere,  quod  (si  adepti  sunt  id)  fugitivo  alicui  aut 
gladiatori  concedi  sit  necesse,’ 

A  Roman  would  have  written  : 

‘  Non  vident  id  se  cupere,  (quod  si  adepti  sunt)  fugitivo  alicui  aut  gladia¬ 
tori  concedi  sit  necesse.’  (Cic.) 

9.  Hence  never  write  qui,  quum  is,  &c.,  qui,  quum  ejus,  &c., 
qui,  quum  ei,  &c. ;  but  qui,  quum  —  ;  cujus  quum  —  ;  cui  quum, 
&c.  So  not  qui,  si  ejus,  &c.,  but  cujus  si,  &c. 

Exercise  1. 

[See  Pract.  Intr.  Part  I.  441.] 

Alexander  died  at  Babylon,  °  a  m  an  who,  if  his  life  had  been 
a  longer  °  one,  would  have  subdued  the  whole  world.11  Alexan¬ 
der  died  at  Babylon,  °a  m  an  who,  if  a  longer  life  had  fallen-to- 
his-lot,b  would  have  subdued  the  whole  world.  Alexander  died 
at  Babylon,  °a  man  who,  if  fate  had  kept6  him  alive  °for  a 
longer  °  time,  would  have  subdued  the  whole  world.  Alexander 
died  at  Babylon,  a  man  who,  unless  fate  had  taken  from  him  his 
life  prematurely, d  would  have  subdued  the  whole  world. — His 
death  was  the  ruin  ofe  all  his  fellow-citizens/  by  whom  he 
was  slain&  because  he  wished  to  save  them.  I  have  very  often 
read  that  there  is  no  evilh  in  death,  °  for  that  if  any  sense  remains 


ON  RHETORICAL  FIGURES. 


265 


after  it,1  it  ought  to  be  considered  immortality  rather  than  death. 
The  power]  of  conscience  is  great,  and  those  who  neglect  it,  be¬ 
tray11  themselves.  Philosophy  contains  the  doctrine1  both  of  duty 
and  of  morality  :m  those  °the  r  efore  who  profess  it  seem  to  me 
to  support  a  very  important  character."  King  Eucratides  reduced 
India  under  his  dominion,0  but  when  he  was  returning  thence, p 
was  slain  on  his  march  by  his  son. 

a  Would  should  not  be  translated  by  mundus  except  when  the  meaning  is 
universe.  When  the  earth  or  its  countries  are  meant,  orbis  terree  or  terrarum 
should  be  used;  the  latter  especially  when  there  is  reference  to  different  coun¬ 
tries.  b  Should  you  use  contingit,  or  accidit  ?  c  reservare.  d  immature. 
e  perdere.  f  civis.  s  Dbd.  interjicere.  h  Part  I.  161,  Obs .,  and 

end  of  162.  i  ‘  in  it.’  The  verb  in  the  next  clause  should  be  subj.,  it  being 
the  speech  or  sentiment  of  the  person  or  persons  from  whom  the  narrator  had 
heard  the  opinion.  Pt.  I.  460  ( b ).  J  vis.  k  indicare.  Express 

both  ipse  and  suus.  Pt.  I.  368.  1  disciplina.  m  Say,  ‘  of  living  well.’ 

*  personam  sustinere.  0  in  potestatem  redigere .  P  Use  rel.  adverb. — at 

recipere . 


(On  Rhetorical  Figures .) 

1.  Geminatio,  or  the  doubling  of  an  emphatic  word. 

(a)  Crux ,  crux  inquam  misero  et  aerumnoso  parabatur.  (C.) 

2.  Repetitio  (enavaq>ogd),  when  several  clauses  or  members  of 
a  sentence  begin  with  the  same  word. 

(a)  Nihilne  te  nocturnum  presidium  Palatii,  nihil  urbis  vigiliae,  nihil  timor 
populi,  nihil  consensus  bonorum  omnium,  nihil  hic  munitissimus  habendi 
senatus  locus,  nihil  horum  ora  vultusque  moverunt?  (C.) 

3.  Conversio  (avTioiQocpr,),  when  several  clauses  or  members  of 
a  sentence  end  with  the  same  word. 

(a)  Urbis  vigiliae  nihil  te  moverunt,  timor  populi  nihil,  consensus  bonorum 
omnium  nihil,  &c. 

4.  Complexio  is  when  several  clauses  or  members  of  a  sentence 
both  begin  with  the  same  word  and  end  with  the  same  word. 

(a)  Quis  legem  tulit  ?  Rullus.  Quis  majorem  partem  populi  suffragiis  pro¬ 
hibuit?  Rullus.  Quis  comitiis  praefuit?  Rullus.  Quis  decemviros 
quos  voluit  renuntiavit  ?  Rullus.  (C.) 

5.  Traductio,  when  a  word  occurring  in  a  clause,  occurs  again 
(intentionally  and  as  an  ornament)  in  on^  or  more  subsequent 

clauses. 


266 


ON  RHETORICAL  FIGURES. 


(a)  Eum  tu  hominem  appellas,  qui  si  fuisset  homo,  nunquam  tam  cxudelitei 
vitam  hominis  petisset. 

( b )  Q,ui  nihil  habet  in  vita  jucundius  vita,  is  cum  virtute  vitam  non  potest 
tollere.  (C.) 

6.  Polysyndeton  ( tioIwvvSetov ),  the  using  many  conjunctions, 
i.  e.  one  between  each  pair  of  words  or  notions. 

(a)  Et  inimico  proderas,  et  amicum  laedebas,  et  tibi  ipsi  non  consulebas.  (C.) 

7.  Anno  minatio  (nagovoyaala)  is  the  antithesis  of  words  of 
nearly  the  same  sound. 

a)  — ut  eum  non  facile  non  modo  extra  tectum,  sed  ne  extra  tectum  quidem 
quisquam  videret.  (C.) 

(b)  Hanc  reipublicte  pestem  non  paulisper  reprimi,  sed  in  perpetuum  com¬ 
primi  volo.  (C.) 

(c)  Expetenda  magis  est  decernendi  ratio,  quam  deceilandi  fortuna.  (C.) 

8.  c OyoioTiTojzov,  when  the  members  of  a  sentence  are  of  par¬ 
allel  construction,  having  the  same  cases,  or  the  same  persons  of 
the  same  tense.  When  they  end  with  the  corresponding  case  or 
tense,  it  makes  oyoiorekevTov. — Both  occur  in  tile  following  ex¬ 
ample  : 

(a)  Vicit  pudorem  libido,  timorem  audacia,  rationem  amentia.  (C.) 

9.  5I gokmXov,  when  the  clauses  are  very  nearly  of  equal  length. 

(a)  Alii  fortuna  felicitatem  dedit:  huic  industria  virtutem  Comparavit. 

10.  'AvtI&etov  (antithesis)  requires  this  equality  of  length  in  the 
antithetical  portions. 

( a ,  Est  igitur  haec,  judices,  non  scripta  sed  nata  lex ;  quam  non  didicimus, 
accepimus,  legimus,  verum  ex  natura  ipsa  arripuimus,  hausimus,  expres¬ 
simus  ;  ad  quam  non  docti,  sed  facti,  non  imbuti,  sed  instituti  sumus  ut 
&c.  (C.) 

11.  Commutatio  (avTiyeza^olri)  is  when  the  antithesis  consists  in 
the  conversion  of  a  proposition. 

(a)  Q,uia  stultus  es,  ea  re  taces;  non  tamen  quia  taces,  ea  re  stultus  es:  si 
poema  loquens  pictura  est,  pictura  tacitum  poema  debet  esse. 

12.  Regressio  (en avodog)  is  when  this  kind  of  conversion  is  a 
conversion  of  a  part  only  of  a  proposition. 

(a)  Ut  eloquentium  juris  peritissimus  Crassus,  juris  peritorum  eloquentissi- 
mus  Scaevola  haberetur.  (C.) 

13.  Gradatio  (xXiya*)  is  the  mounting  up  as  it  were  from  one 
word  to  another,  the  preceding  word  being  repeated. 

(a)  Imperium  Gnecise  fuit  penes  Athenienses;  Atheniensium  potiU 


EXERCISE  2. 


267 


Spartiatae ;  Spartiatas  superavere  Thebani ;  Thebanos  Macedbnes  vice¬ 
runt,  qui  imperium  Graeciae  brevi  tempore  adjunxerunt  Asian:  bello  sub¬ 
actam.  ( Ad  Herenn.) 

14.  ’A7io<n(xmr}<ng  is  the  purposely  breaking  off  the  discourse, 
and  suppressing  a  statement  one  was  about  to  make. 

(a)  De  nostro  enim  omnium — non  audeo  totum  dicere.  (C.) 

15.  Dissolutio  (aowdsrov),  the  omission  of  the  copulative  con- 
•  inction. 

(a)  Qui  indicabantur,  eos  vocari,  custodiri,  ad  senatum  adduci  jussit.  (C.) 

16.  Correctio  (bravog&ajaig)  is  the  correcting  an  expression  pre 
viously  used. 

(a)  Hic  tamen  vivit.  Vivit  1  immo  vero  etiam  in  Senatum  venit.  (C.) 

17.  Dubitatio  is  the  purposely  expressing  a  doubt ;  under  which 
intentional  forgetting  and  remembering  may  be  reckoned. 

(a)  Tu  istud  ausus  es  dicere,  homo  omnium  mortalium — nam  ouo  te  digno 
moribus  tuis  appellem  nomine  1  (C.)  (Here  is  also  aposiopesi*.) 

Exercise  2.  ( On  Rhetorical  Figures.) 

( Litteris  delector.) 

[Geminatio.]  Literature,  literature  alone,  I  say,  delights'1  me, 
[Repetitio.]  Literature  nourished  me  when  a  boy ;  literature 
preserved  me  when  a  young  manb  from  the  infamy  of  lust :  litera¬ 
ture  assisted  me  when  I  was  a  man,  in  the  administration0  of  the 
republic  :  literature  will  comfort  the  weakness  of  my  old  age.d 
[Conversio.]  Literature  delights  us  with  the  most  dignifiede 
pleasure ;  it  delights  us  with  the  discovery  ofwhat  is  new;f 
it  delights  us  with  the  most  certain  hope  of  immortality.  [Com¬ 
plexio.]  Do  you  think  him'  a  bad  citizen,  who  is  delighted  with 
literature?  who  is  delighted  with  the  discovery  of  truth  ?  who  is 
delighted  with  the  diffusion  of  learning  ?  [Traductio.]  What 
do  you  mean  ?  Are  you'  delighted  with  literature,  who  hate 
°what  is  the  foundation  (pi.)  of  °all  literature?  [Polysyn¬ 
deton.]  Literature  both  instructs,  and  delights,  and  adorns,  and 
consoles.  [‘OpoioTiTwrov.  bpoioreisviov.^  Do  you  think  it  possible, 
that  one  who  is  devoted  to  the  pursuit  of  literature,  should  be 
bound  by  the  chains  of  lust  ?  [’AvTi&eTov.]  Do  you,  who  say 
that  you  are  delighted  with  literature,  allow  yourself  to  be  en 


268 


EXERCISE  3. 


tangled  by  pleasure  ?  [iAvTi[teT<xl8oXr].']  I  do  not  cultivate 
literature  because  I  am  delighted  with  it,  but  am  delighted  with 
it  because  I  cultivate  it.  [Gradatio.]  The  pursuit  of  literature 
has  acquired  for  me  learning:  learning  °has  acquired  for 
me  glory :  glory  °has  drawn  upon  me  envy  and  malevolent 
depreciation.  [Aposiopesis.]  What?  do  you:  do  you  charge 
me'  with  this,  °  a  m  a  n  who  have  never  in  my  life  pursued^  any 

thing  but  virtue  and  learning  ? — What  you  have  pursued - ; 

but  I  am  silent,  lest  I  should  seem  to  have  brought  against 
you  a  railing-accusation.*1  [ ’AavvdeTov. ]  What  shall  I  say 
about  the  use  of  literature  ?  it  instructs,  adorns,  delights,  °  and 
comforts  °  a  man.  [Correctio.]  Literature  delights  me  :  why 
do  I  say  delights  ?  nay,*  it  comforts  me,  and  affords  me  my  only 
refuge  from!  these  annoyances  of  my  laborious  life  !  [Dubitatio.] 
Literature  instructs,  or  delights,  or  comforts  me  ;  for  which  of 
these  words  I  should  use  rather  than  the  others,  I  do  not  know. 

a  oblectare.  Comp.  Dcid.  oblectatio.  b  Do’d.  puer.  6  359.  d  Dod. 
vetus  (2).  e  honestissimus.  f  ‘  of  new  things.5  Should  ‘  things 5  be  ex¬ 
pressed?  C.  5.  s  expetere.  483,  (2).  h  convicium  facere.  *  immo 

vero.  i  ‘  amongst.5 

Exercise  3. 

Pausanias  tells  0  us  in  his  bookonAtticaa,  that  the  Athenians, 
having  been  praised5  by  Pindar  in  one  of  his  Odes6,  set 
so  high  a  valued  upon  the  testimony  of  thate  great  and  sublime 
poet,  that  they  not  onlyf  sent  him  many  presents  in  ret  urns  for 
it,  but  also  raised5  a  statue*  to  his  honour11  at  Athens.  No 
wonder1,  that  in  those  times  there  were  many  great  poets,  when'-' 
those  who  were  endowed  with  the  poetic  faculty"  both  re. 
ceived  0  the  most  magnificent  presents,  and  were  rewarded^  with 
the  most  splendid  honours. 

a  Attica ,  orum.  b  ‘because  (I.  516)  they  had  been  praised.5  Since  this 

clause  is  here  quoted  from  Pausanias,  in  what  mood  should  the  verb  stand  ? 
Why?  (I.  460,  a.)  c  ‘in  a  certain  ode  5  (carmen).  When  ‘a certain 5  mean* 
a  particular  one  that  we  do  not,  however,  think  it  necessary  to  name,  it  should 
be  translated  by  quidam.  When  certus  is  so  used,  it  implies  that  one  has  good 
reasons  for  not  being  more  explicit :  Quoties  ego  eum  et  quanto  cum  dolore  vidi 
insolentiam  certorum  hominum — extimescentem  (Cic.  Mare.  6.)  A  practical 
rule  may  be,  not  to  use  certus ,  unless  the  meaning  is,  ‘a  certain  one , — you  know 
vretty  well  which  (or  xclxom )  I  mean .5  d  ‘  To  set  a  high  value  on,5  magni  fa 


EXERCISES  4,  5. 


269 


eere.  Adapt  this  phrase  to  mean,  ‘  so  high  a  value .’  c  Which  pronoun 

should  be  used  for  the  ‘  that’  of  celebrity?  (1.  381,  b .)  f  Not  only — but  also: 

here  simply,  et — et  (both — and).  s  ob.  h  To  place  or  erect  (a  statue), 

simulacrum  or  statuam  ponere ,  locare ,  statuere ,  or  (Nep.)  constituere.  i  What 

words  express  whole-length  sculptured  images  ?  With  what  distinction  ?  (Dod. 
i  nago.)  k  ‘  to  him.’  l  This  imperfect  sentence  must  be  completed ; 
‘it  is  not  therefore  wonderful:’  for  ‘that’  use  ‘if,’  si.  m  ‘When.’  Does 
the  ‘  when  ’  do  more  than  simply  dale  the  time  ?  (See  I.  489.)  n  ed  facultate. 
0  received — and  were  rewarded.  Of  two  connected  verbs  having  the  same  nom¬ 
inative  case,  it  is  better,  as  a  general  rule,  that  they  should  both  be  in  the  same 
voice.  Alter  this  accordingly,  by  turning  received  into  the  passive  voice :  this 
must  be  done  by  choosing  such  a  phrase  as  1  to  be  loaded ,  presented ,  &c.,  with 
gifts.’  honoribus  mactari.  ( Cic .)  On  the  derivation  of  this  word  see 
Part  I.  p.  103.  (278,  a)  and  note 

Exercise  4. 

To  destroy0  the  credit3  of  Socrates’s  speech,  and  cause  the 
judges  to  listen  to  it  with  suspicion,15  his  ||  accusers®  had 
warned  them  beforehandd  to  be  on  their  guard,'  °tellingf  them 
that  he  was  very  powerful*  in  speaking,  and  possessed  suchh 
ability  i  and  dexterity,  that  he  could  make  the  worse  cause  °  appeal 
the  better. 

3  To  destroy  the  credit  of  any  thing;  prevent  it  from  being  believed  ;  alicui , 
or  alicui  rei,  fidem  derogare  or  abrogare.  b  ‘  render  it  suspected  to  the 

judges.’  c  Obs.  When  an  English  sentence  begins  with  a  secondary  clause, 
ar  d  a  word  which  occurs  in  the  principal  clause  occurs  also  in  this,  it  is  better  to 
begin  with  such  a  portion  of  the  principal  clause  as  will  contain  this  word,  and 
then  use  a  pronoun  for  it  in  the  secondary  clause.  Thus,  instead  of  ‘  Socra¬ 
tes’s  speech’ — ‘  his  accusers’  let  it  be  :  ‘  the  accusers  of  Socrates’  and — ‘  his 
speech ;’  placing  ‘  the  accusers  of  Socrates’  first.  d  To  warn  beforehand,  pree- 
monere.  (I.  75.)  e  To  be  on  one’s  guard,  sibi  cavere.  f  (I.  460,  c,  1.) 

Express  a  for.’  *  To  be  very  powerful,  plurimum  posse.  b  Such,  is, 

ea,id:  repeat  it  before  ‘  dexterity,’  calliditas.  i  vis. 

Exercise  5. 

[(p)  prefixed  means  that  the  verb  is  to  be  turned  into  a  participle :  (r)  after  a 
word,  that  the  rel.  pronoun  is  to  be  used.] 

Peribcea,  or  Phylonome,3  as  others  call  her,  being  rejected 
with  disdain,15  accused®  Tennes  tod  his  father,  in  exactly'  the 
same  manner  as  Phaedra  °  accused  Hippolytus.  The  credulous 
father  (p)  shut  up  his  son  inf  a  chest,  0  and  cast  him  into  the  sea. 
Neptune  ||  c  a  m  e  t  o  t  h  e  assistance*  of  his  innocent  grand¬ 
son;  and  the  chest  floated11  to  the  island  of1  Leucophrys.  When 


270 


EXERCISES  0,  7. 


the  inhabitants  of  the  island  opened1'  it  (r),  and  learned  what  hac 
happened, i  they  not  only  offered  Tennes  the  throne, m  but  even 
named  the  island  Tenedos  a  ft  e  r  him."  Nay,  they  even0  wor 
shipped  him  as  a  god  °after  his  (p)  death. 

a  Since  it  is  left  doubtful  which  was  her  right  name,  what  word  should  be 
used  for  ‘or?’  (Pt.  I.  p.  161,  note  a.)  b  ‘  being  rejected  and  refused.’  Take 
the  word  for  ‘  refuse ,’  that  means  to  refuse  a  pleasure ,  whether  a  sinful  one  or 
not.  Dod.  negare  (end).  c  Which  is  the  best  word  for  to  accuse  falsely  1 
(I.  201.)  d  apud.  e  plane.  C.  9.  f  includere ,  implying  to  put  into , 

and  there  shut  up,  often  takes  the  acc.  with  in :  but  also  the  abi.  Antonius  ar¬ 
matos  in  c  ell  d  Concordiae  inclusit. — paene  orationem  in  epistolam  inclusi : 
includere  aliquem  in  c  usto  dias.  (Cic.)  S  ferre  opem.  h  deferri  (ad), 

i  I.  140.  i  I.  489.  k  Dod.  aperire.  i  res.  TO  To  offer  any  body 
the  throne,  deferre  regnum  alicui.  n  ‘  from  (de)  his  own  name.’  0  Nay 

even :  tjuin  et. 


Exercise  6. 

Whena  Ulysses,  according  to  fabulous  history  ,b  might  have  lived* 
<v;_thd  Calypsoe  in  all  [possible]  luxury,  he  yet  preferred*-  even 
io  immortality  thats  rough  and  rocky  country  [of  his] :  (p)  which 
he  would  [surely]  not  have  donef  if  he  had  approved-of»  that 
opinion1'  of  Teucer’s,  [that]  £  every  man’s1  country  ism  wherever 
he  is n  well  off.’0 

a  Not,  quum  Ulysses,  but  Ulysses,  quum,  &c.  I.  489.  b  ‘as  it  is  in  the 
fables.’  c  I.  128,  130.  d  apud.  e  ‘  Feminines  in  o  (as  echo, 

Calypso,  Dido,  Sappho)  have  generally  the  Greek  gen.  in  us  (echus,  Didus,  Sap¬ 
phus),  the  Latin  gen.  onis  being  less  common.  The  dat.  and  acc.  end  in  o,  oi 
in  oni ,  oncm  respectively.’  (Zumpt.)  Ramshorn  adds,  that  Caesar  preferred  the 
regular  Latin  declension,  onis,  oni,  oncm,  one.  f  I.  227.  °  1.  381  (b). 

h  non  ita  facturus.  i  I.  441.  k  Dod.  sententia.  l  quisque. 

*  1.  460  (a).  n  I.  460  (b).  0  ‘  I  am  well  off,’  bene  est  mihi. 

Exercise  7. 

Xenophon  has  given  us  a  verya  sound b  opinion0  of  Gobryas’s, 
and  [one]  which  every  day’sd  experience®  confirms/  namely/ 
‘  that  it  is  more  difficult  to  f  ndh  men  who  [bear]  prosperity  [well], 
than  [men]  who  bear  adversity  well.’  For  in  prosperity  a  great 
many»  men  grow  insolent/  and  are  puffed  up  [with  pride]  :  but 
in  adversity  all  are  recalled  to  temperance  and  moderation. 

a  AdmSdum  (ad-modum,  ‘to  a  degree’)  is  ‘r ery’  with  adjectives,  participles, 
and  adverbs.  b  gravis  (weighty).  c  Dod  sententia.  d  Adj.  quo 


EXERCISES  8,  9. 


271 


tidianus;  but  see  the  next  note.  e  Experientia  in  the  best  prose  writers  is 
trial :  ‘  knowledge  gained  by  experience  ’  is  usus,  or  usus  rerum ;  res ;  tempus , 
&c.  [in  Tac.  also  experientia .]  Hence  experientia  docet ,  and  the  like,  should  not 
be  used,  but  tempus  or  rerum  usus  docet.  With  rerum  usus  the  adj.  quotidianus 
should  be  left  out.  [Virgil  has  ‘  apibus  quanta  experientia  parcis .’  Geor. 
i.  4.]  f  ‘  declares  to  be  true.’  s  videlicet  as  the  second  word, 

h  Diff.  93.  Dod.  invenire.  i  Ddd.  plerique.  k  Insolescere  was  used  by 
Sallust  (after  the  old  Cato),  and  was  followed  by  Tacitus  and  Justin :  it  is  better, 
however,  to  use  insolentem fieri;  se  insolenter  efferre  or  gerere,  &c.  (Krebs.) 

Exercise  8. 

(On  the  Theogony  of  Hesiod.) 

Of  alla  the  remains'5  of  Greek  literature  that  are  now  extant,* 
none  in  my  opiniond  is  more  remarkable  than  the  Theogonye  of 
Hesiod.  For  although  ||  thisf  poem  cannot^  be  compared  to  the 
works  of  Homer  and  other  famous  poets  in  size,  or  in  the  magnifi¬ 
cence  of  its  subject, h  and  of  its  particular  portions,'  or  in  the  va¬ 
riety  and  beauty  of  its  diction,  yet  it  has  another  recommendation, 
and  thatk  [one]  peculiar  [to  itself],  [so]  that  on  this  ground»  it 
appears  even  to  deserve  the  prefer encem  over  those  poems." 

b  ‘  All — which  ’  is  expressed  strongly  by  using  quotquot  instead  of  the  simple 
relative.  (For  1 off  seel.  165,  h.)  b  monumenta.  c  superesse:  ‘now,’ 
hodie.  d  Dod.  sententia.  e  Theogonia.  f  Relative  pron.  s  Omit 
‘  not :’  using  neque — neque  with  the  ablatives.  h  argumentum.  i  res,  pi. 

k  I.  385.  i  causa.  m  ‘  to  be  to-be-preferred.’  part,  in  dus.  n  Greek 
neuter  plurals  in  a  make  dat.  and  abl.  in  is,  not  ibus,  poemata,  poematum,  poe¬ 
matis  (not  poematibus). 


Exercise  9. 

That*  ancient  philosopher,  whom  Hesiod  followed,  said  that  first 
of  all  Chaos  existed  :  byb  which  he  meant,  not,  as  very  many0 
subsequentd  [authors],  a  rude  and  undigested  mass®  of  matter,  but 
[according]  to  the  proper  meaningf  of  the  word,  ‘  space  5  in  which 
no  matter  is  contained. s  For  he  says  that  ‘  matter  ’  was  not 
created  till  afterwards .2  To  Chaos  he  added  a  connective*1  power, 
because  without  such  a  power»  matter  would  have  lain  inactive, 
and  nothing J  would  have  been  created. 

“  I.  381,  b.  b  In  this  idiom  the  acc.  is  used  in  E,atin.  Thus:  ‘whom  do 
you  understand  (or  mean)  by  a  w:ise  man  1  ’  quern  tu  intclligis  (or  intelligi  vis) 
sapientem  ?  c  Ddd.  plerique.  d  Simply  postea.  e  (See  the  first 

lines  of  Ovid’s  Metamorphoses.)  (  significatio.  %  ‘  which  is  empty 


272 


EXERCISES  10,  11. 


( vacuus )  of  all  matter.’  h  copulatrix ,  icis.  »  Where  we  repeat  the 

substantive  in  this  way,  the  Romans  (being  richer  in  demonstrative  pronouns 
than  we  are,  and  able  to  give  them  more  prominence)  generally  used  a  pronoun 
only.  So  also  when  we  use  another  substantive  with  'such'  or  a  demonstrative 
pronoun,  in  reference  to  a  preceding  substantive.  Thus  if  ‘  this  prince  ’  were 
used  in  reference  to  1  Alexander'  which  had  been  mentioned  in  a  preceding 
sentence,  it  would  be  better  to  leave  the  word  ‘ prince '  untranslated,  and  say 
'far  he.'  !‘nor  any  thing.’  What  word  for  any  (thing)  1  Pt.  I.  §50. 
p.  137. 


Exercise  10. 

1.  With®  the  ancient  philosophers  it  is  an  intricate13  and  per¬ 
plexed®  inquiry,  whether  the  soul  remainsd  (p)  when  it  is  freed 
from  the  chains  of  the  body,  or  whether  the  death  of  our  bodies  is 
also  the  death  of  our  souls. e  Epicurus  thinks  that  our  souls  perish, 
deeming  it  wrongf  that,  having  so  many  points  of  agreement  with 
swine  f  he  should  differ  from  them  in  this  single  respect .h 

2.  The  Stoics  allowi  to  them  a  long  life,  as  [they  do  also]  to 
crows,  but  not  an  eternal!  one.  But  Pythagoras  is  indeed  a 
pleasant  [personage],  for  he  teaches,  that  they  remain  indeed 
[alive],  but  migrate  from  [their  own]  bodies  into  others,  so  that 
he;  may  perchancek  be  a  cock  to-day,  who  in  the  time  of  the 
Trojan  war  was*  Agamemnon. 

1.  a  Apud.  b  perturbatus.  c  implicatus.  &  permanere.  e ‘whether 
[that]  which  [is  the  death]  of  [our]  bodies  is  also  (I.  387)  the  death  of  [our]  souls.’ 
f  nefas.  s  ‘  since  ( quum ,  I.  489)  so  many  things  agree  to  him  (I.  370)  with 
swine.’  h  ‘  by  this  one  thing.’ 

2.  i  tribuere.  )  Ddd.  continuus.  k  Forte  is  ‘  accidentally,'  except  after 

si,  nisi,  num,  ne,  ecquid ,  where  it  is  the  regular  word  for  ‘  perchance.'  Here  use 
fortasse.  i  ‘had  been.’ 


Exercise  11. 

1.  1  am  well  again  !a  I  know  for  a  certainty,13  that  I  coulo 
not  find®  a  beginningd  for  my  letter  [that  would  be]  more  agreeable 
to  you  ||  than  this,  or  one  that  you  would  more  desire  to  receive .* 
[My  disease]  was  a  tertian  fever,  like  that  which f  you  cured  for 
me$  three  years  ago2>  at  Ferrara  :h  except  that»  this  was  [of]  a 
milder:  [character.] 

2.  Accordingly  it  left  mek  on  the  eighth  day  after  my  seizure .' 
I  was  cured  not  only  by  medicine,"1  but  also  by  bleeding,"  by0  the 
advice  of  my  [friend]  Angelus  Justinianus,  who  not  only  pre- 


EXERCISE  12.  273 

scribed p  for  me  himself,  but  also  made  upq  a  great  part  of  the 
medicines  with  his  own  hand. 

1.  *■  Convalescere.  By  what  tense  should  ‘  lam  well  ’  be  translated  ?  b'cer- 
tai  nly.’  Both  certe  scio  and  certo  scio  occur.  The  difference  is  thus  given  by 
Hand:  certe  scio  means,  ‘  it  is  certain  that  I  know ;’  certo  scio,  ‘/  have  a 
certain  knowledge  of  the  thing  stated .’  Which  should  be  used  here?  c  Dod. 
invenire.  <i  principium.  e  more  wished  (optatius)  by  you.’  (qualis. 
g  ‘  drove  away  from  me’ febrim  abigere,  discutere.  h  Ferraria.  i  nisi 

quod.  J  ‘Mild,’  mitis  et  remissus. 


2.  k  ‘  A  fever  leaves  anybody,’  decedit.  ( C ) :  ab  aliquo  discedit.  Krebs  warns 
against  reliquit  or  deseruit  quem.  Doletus  quotes  a  febre  relinqui  from  Cic.  ad 
Att.,  but  I  cannot  find  the  passage.  l  ‘After  it  had  seized  me,’  corrigere.  (Pt. 
I.  p.  114,  310,  note  ®.)  m  medicamenta,  pi.  n  missio  sanguinis.  0  de. 
P  ‘To  prescribe’  (of  a  physician),  remedia,  medicamenta,  &c.,  pr  cescribere,  prce- 
cipere  (Cels.)  ;  praescribere,  or  morbo  proponere  (Nep.).  q  Muretus  uses  conficere 
ac  concinnare  (of  which  the  latter  is  not  found  in  Cicero) ;  better  parare  (Cic.). 
Columella  has  componere ,  Curtius  in  poculo  diluere,  which  of  course  expresses 
only  a  particular  kind  of  preparation.» 

Exercise  12. 

1.  When  it  was  the  general  opinion ,a  that  a  brave  man  should15 
die  by  his  own  hands0  rather  than  endured  anye  great  and  bitter 
evil,  Aristotle  wisely  perceived  that  the  opinionf  was  false  ;  [and] 
asserted, s  that  they  who  acted  thus,  far  from  being  considered 
brave ,  should  be  looked-uponh  as  cowards,»  and  men  of  a  mean  and 
abject  spirit. 

2.  For  such  men  prove!  that  they  are  not  able  to  endure  what 
they  fly  from,  and  arc  too  weak  to  support  the  calamity ,k  on  account 
of  which  they  give  up  their  lives.  Now*  this  argues  effeminacy,"1 
rather  than  any  greatness  of  soul. 

1.  a  ‘it  was  commonly  (vulgo)  believed.*  b  I.  191.  c  ‘To  die  by  one’s 
own  hands,’  necem  or  mortem  sibi  consciscere,  mortem  or  vim  sibi  inferre;  manus 
sibi  afferre,  &c.+  d  Dod.  ferre:  choose  the  verb  that  means  ‘to  endure 
heroically.’  e  I.  392.  f  ‘  that  that  opinion  of  men.’  °  pronuntiare . 
h  ‘were  not  only  not  [to-be-considered]  brave,  but  [were]  to-be-considered 
cowards,’  &c.  Non  modo  is  sometimes  used  for  non  mode  non,  but  only 


*  Scribon.  Larg.  has  temperare. 

t  fjp  se  interjicere,  se  occidere,  are  generally  rejected ;  but  they  do  occur,  though 
less  commonly,  (1)  s  e  ipsum  interficere  (Sulpicius  in  Cic.  Epp.  Fain.  4,  12, 
2) :  Crassum  suapte  manu  interfectum,  Cic.  Or.  3,  3,  10  ;  and  Liv.  31,  18,  7,  se 
qui  ipsi  interficiunt.  (2)  Quintii.  (5,  10,  69)  quotes  from  a  lost  oration 
of  Cicero’s,  cum  ipse  sese  conaretur  occidere.  (Krebs.) 

12* 


274 


EXERCISES  13,  14. 


when  the  Showing  clause  is  negative,  or  equivalent  to  a  negative,  and  botk 
'  lauses  have  a  common  verb  expressed  in  the  second.  Thus 
Not  only  not - but  not  even ;  or,  but  scarcely. 

non  mode - <,  sed  nc-quidem, 

C  sedvix. 

Should  the ‘uo^’  be  inserted  or  omitted  here  ?  i  ignavus.  (Dod.  p.  234,  4.) 

2.  3  docere.  This  passage  in  the  original  is  given  as  a  statement  by  the  writer, 
and  therefore  in  the  indicative.  It  will  be  a  useful  exercise  to  translate  it  both 
ways:  i.  e.  first  as  the  writer’s  opinion,  and  then  as  Aristotle’s  view  stated  by 
the  writer ,  and  therefore  in  orat.  obliq.  (See  I.  460.)  k  ‘  and  not  (neque) 
equal  to  hearing  that  calamity,’  &c.  Should  equal  be  translated  by  cequua , 
cequalis ,  or  par  ?  (Dod.  (Eqwus.)  i  autem.  m  ‘  an  effeminate  weakness 
[mollities)  of  soul.’ 


Exercise  13. 

It  is  an  acknowledged  fact,  that  ||  Cicero  in  his  Orations  bor¬ 
rowed  much  from  the  Greek  orators  :  and  that,  besides  being a  an 
eagerb  and  diligent  imitator  of  the  artifices,®  which  he  perceived*1 
them  to  have  employed6  forf  moving^  and  governing  the  minds 
of  their  hearers,  he  not  seldom  transferred  whole  enthymemesh 
of  theirs  to  his  own  orations. 

a  ‘  and  not  (neque)  only  was — but  also  introduced.’  b  acer.  c  sing, 

d  i.  e.  not  of  any  particular  artifice  or  artifices,  but  indefinitely ,  such  as 
he  observed  in  them.  What  mood  should  be  used  ?  I.  475,  476.  e  uti. 
f  in.  ?  versari.  h  enthymema ,  atis. 

Exercise  14. 

1.  Oh  [this]  sad  and  bittera  news  about  the  King  of  Navarre!1 
We  had  indeed  heard  it  ( r )  here  from  others;  but®  nevertheless 
were  supported  by  some  hope,  till  your  letters  arrived. d  I  (p)  re¬ 
ceived  both  of  them  yesterday  evening, e  and  communicated  [their 
contents]  to  all  our  [friends] :  nor  was  there  one  amongst  them ,f 
who  did  not  declare  it  as  his  firm  beliefs  that,  when  you'  wrote  in 
such  language ,h  the  recovery*  of  this  excellent  and  religious  prince 
must  be  3  quite  given  up  as  hopeless ,k 

2.  I  fear  that  in  a  few  days  we  shall  feel  to  our  sorrow'  what  a 
blow  [both]  France  and  the  cause  of  religion™  have  received  by 
the  death  of  this  (r)  [prince].  Behold,  what  fruits  f  are  born"  by 
civil  wars!  Miserable  France  wanted  but  this  one0  [ affliction ],  to 
see"  those  old  Theban  calamities  renewed  in  her  own  blood ! 

1.  a  ‘sad*  and  bitter8  to  us.’  (See  p.  237,  20.) 


b  Navarra. 


6  ‘  which 


EXERCISES  15,  16. 


275 


although,  &c. — yet.’  d  ‘To  arrive’  (of  a  letter),  afferri ,  it  being  always 

brought  to  the  receiver. — ‘  Till.’  What  mood  ?  I.  507,  508.  c  heri  vesperi 
(yesterday  in  the  evening).  f  ‘any  (single  one)  of  them.’  I.  389,  390,  391. 

s  ‘  To  declare  one’s  conviction’  (or  firm  belief),  statuere  often  with  sic  or  ita. 

Ego  autem  sine  ulla  dubitatione  sic  statuo  et  judico,  neminem - habuisse , 

etc.  (Cic.  de  Or.  2,  28. 122;  nisi  hoc  ita  statuisses, — te— facturum.)  u  ita. 

i  salus.  J  ‘  that  it  could  not  be  but  that  (Diff.  20.)  the  recovery,  <fcc.’ 
k  ‘  To  give  a  thing  up  as  lost  or  hopeless,’  deplorare  quid. — the  e  f  f  e  c  t  ( weeping ) 
for  the  c  a  u  s  e  (a  persuasion  that  the  thing  is  hopeless  &c.).  But  this  use,  though 
found  in  Ovid,  Livy,  &c.,  does  not  occur  in  Cicero  or  Caesar.  Perhaps  it  is  bet¬ 
ter  therefore  to  use  desperare,  desperatur  quid  or  (seld.  in  Cic.)  de  aliqud  re. 

2.  i  ‘  with  our  great  evil.’  m  ‘  how  great  a  blow  France,  how  great  [a 
blow]  religion,  &c.,  has  received.’  n  Active  voic e.— fructus  parere.  0  ‘  Thia 
one  thing  remained  to — France,’  &c. 

Exercise  15. 

It  is  said  by  the  ancienta  poets,  that  there  are  in  the  ocean  cer¬ 
tain1’  islands,  to  which  the  souls  of  those  who  have  led  a  holy  and 
religious  life c  are  borne  after  their  death  :  that  there  they  dwell 
togetherd  most  delightfully  and  pleasantly,  in  ae  most  beautifulf 
meadow,  which  is  enamelled^  with  perpetual  flowers  :  that  the  sun 
is  ever  brighth  in  that  happy  region ,'  the  trees  green,  the  flowers 
and  herbs  in  bloom  :  that  [there  all  nature  j]  smiles,  and  the  gentlest 
zephyrs  perpetually  breathe,  by  whose  fanningk  the  leaves  of  the 
trees  (p)  are  softly  stirred,'  and  delight"1  the  ear  with  the  softest 
[possible]  murmur. 

*  Dbd.  antiquus.  The  distinction  at  the  bottom  of  the  page  (in  Dod.)  should 
be  translated  thus  :  ‘  Antiqui  scriptores  means  the  classics,  inasmuch  as  the  age 
in  which  they  flourished  has  long  been  past;  veteres,  inasmuch  as  they  have 
lived  and  influenced  mankind  for  2000  years.’  i>  ‘  Certain  :’  (Ex.  3,  c.) 
c  sancte  religioseque  vivere.  Remember  that  this  whole  passage  is  a  statement 
gathered  from  the  poets  :  it  is  their  doctrine,  not  the  writer’s.  I.  460. 

J  inter  se.  e  I.  393.  f  What  is  the  proper  word  for  beautiful,  as  ap¬ 
plied  to  objects  that  please  the  sight ?  [I.  212,  note  v.]  s  distinguere, 

properly  to  relieve  a  surface  by  ornaments  placed  upon  different  parts  of  it. 
h  nitet  diffuso  lumine  caelum.  (Lucr.)  i  ‘  there.’  3  ‘ all  [things].' 

k fabella,  pi .  1  ventilare.  Ut  cum  purpureas  ventilat  aura  comas. 

(Ovid.)  Obs.  The  words  and  general  character  of  this  passage  do  not  always 
belong  to  sober  prose;  but  as  it  is  a  representation  of  poetical  descriptions,  this 
is  perhaps  permissible  here.  m  blandiri.  What  case  ? 


Exercise  16. 

1.  Ancient  authors  are  not  agreed1  upon  .he  reasons,  why  this 


276 


EXERCISE  17. 


or  that  animal  was  sacrificed  to  this  or  that  god.  For  some  assert' 
that  the  favourite  animal  of  each  god  was  slaine  before  his  altars ; 
and  thus  the  horse  was  the  victim  offered  to  Mars.  And  [on  the 
other  hand]  it  was  not  lawful  to  offer  a  wild  boar  to  Venus, d  ^be¬ 
cause  that  animal9)  had  killed  Adonis. 

2.  Others  [however]  helde  that  a  god  was  best  pleased  with  the 
blood  of  the  animal,  :j:  which  he9)  hated :  that  thus  a  cockf  was 
sacrificed  to  Night,  because  that  bird  seemss  to  be  calling  forth 
the  day  by  its  song,  [and]  driving  away  the  night :  [and]  a  goat  to 
Pallas,  because  [that  animal]  inflicts  great  injury  uponh  the  olive- 
tree. 

1.  a  ‘  We  are  not  agreed ,’  non  satis  convenit  inter  nos  (de  aliqua  re).  See  Ex. 
15,  note  a.)  b  ‘  To  assert  ’is  not  asserere.  c  ‘  that  the  [animal]  which 
was  most  acceptable  {gratus )  to  each  was  wont  to  be  slain,’  &c.  Relat.  clause 

to  precede.  I.  31.  a  ‘and  because  a  wild-boar  had,  &c. - it  was  not- 

lawful  (nefas),  that  sacrifice  should  be  made  ( rem  divinam  fieri )  to  Venus  with 
a  wild-boar.’ 

2.  e  ‘  thought,’  putare.  f  gallus  gallinaceus.  s  The  verbs  seems — 

inflicts  express  the  reasons  alleged  by  the  holders  of  the  opinion.  Will  this  cir¬ 
cumstance  have  any  effect  on  the  mood  ?  If  so,  why  1  h  insigniter  laedere 
(Cic.  has  ins  igniter  diligere.) 


Exercise  17. 

If  nothing2  is  sacred  and  religious,  but  what  is  without  orna¬ 
ment,  let  gold  be  removed'  from  our  temples ;  let  jewels,  images,® 
andb  pictures  be  removed,  and,  in  a  word,  votive-offerings  of  every 
kind.  But  if  it  is  an  impiety  even  to  entertain  such  a  thought  as 
this,0  let  us  confess  what  common-sensed  itself  in  a  (393)  manner 
teaches  [us],  that  wealth  is  notc  better  employed  in  anything f  than 
in  the  worship  of  God,  nor  eloquences  betterh  than  in  refining! 
and  beautifying  philosophy. 

a  Dod.  imago.  Choose  the  word  that  means  ‘  any  plastic  work  :  in  opposi¬ 
tion  to  tabulae ,  picturae  (pictures).  b  Use  the  fig.  asyndeton.  ‘  in  a  word,’ 
denique;  ‘  votive-offerings,’  donaria.  ( Liv .)  c  ‘  this  is  impious  (nefarius) 

even  to  be  thought.’  Cogitare ,  which  “  denotes  the  usual  activity  of  the  mind, 
which  cannot  exist  without  thinking  or  employing  itself  about  something,”  is 
here  the  best  word  for  a  thought  entering  the  head.  d  ratio.  e  neque 

—  neque.  f  ‘  any  where.’  Usquam  follows  the  same  rule  as  ullus,  i.  e. 

stands  in  negative  and  virtually  negative  sentences  :  alicubi  and  uspiam  answer 
respectively  to  aliquis  and  quispiam  ;  ubivis  to  quivis,  quilibet.  dicendi 

c opia.  h  praeclarius.  i  excolere. 


EXERCISES  18,  19. 
Exercise  18. 


277 


1.  I  should  never  have  thought  it  possible a  that  I  could  derive 
pleasure,15  I  will  not  saye  from  your'  grief,  but  from  anyd  [man’s]. 
And  yet  if  the  truth*  must  be  spoken,  I  am  obligedf  to  confess, 
that  it  was  most  gratifying^  to  me  to  learnh  from  your  letter,  that 
you  were  exceedingly*  grieved,  as  soon  as)  the  news  of  my 
illnessk  reached*  you.ra 

2.  For  that  grief  could  not  arise  from  any  other  source ,n  than 
from  your  great0  affection  for  me  ;  and  from  [the  time]  that  I  first 
saw  you,  and  heard  from3)  very  many  others  how  distinguished 
you  were  for  learning  and  virtue,  p  I  have  had  no  fonder  zvish i 
than  to  be  loved1)  byr  you. 

1.  a  ‘  that  it  would  be 5  (that  I  could  derive,  &c.)  b  ‘  To  derive  or  receive 

pleasure,  pain,  &c.,  from  any  thing,’  capere  voluptatem,  dolorem,  &c.,  ex  aliqua 
re.  c  nonmodo.  <*  I.  389-391.  e  ‘the  t r u t h ’  must  be  trans¬ 
lated  by  vera  (‘ true  things ’),  whenever  the  meaning  is,  ‘ ichat  is  true?  '■true 
things .’  If  a  single  thing  is  meant,  the  sing,  verum  may  be  used.  Veritas  is 
*  truth,’  as  an  abstract  notion.  t  necesse  est.  I.  504  (1) :  take  the  second 

form.  £  gratissimus.  h  ‘  that  (quod)  I  learnt.’  intelligere,  the  notion 

being,  of  ‘  being  made  aware.'  i  vehementer.  )  1.512.  k  valetudo 
(‘  state  of  health  ’)  or  infirma  valetudo.  Cic.  has  two  or  three  times  invalitudo, 
but  the  reading  is  mostly  doubtful.  i  afferri :  allatum  esse.  m  ‘  to 

where  you  are,’  istuc.  I.  387. 

2.  n  ‘  from  elsewhere,’  aliunde.  0  eximius.  p  ‘  a  man  of  what  erudi¬ 

tion  and  virtue  you'  were.’  <*  ‘  nothing  has  been  more  desirable  ( optabilius ) 
to  me.’  r  I.  348. 


Exercise  19. 

1.  Socrates,  in  the4)  dialogue  which  is  entitled4  ‘the  first  Alci 
biades,’  employed  ||  a  wittyb  and  refined*  artifice  to  check6)  the 
presumptiond  of  Alcibiades.  For  wherease  the  young  man  per- 
suaded  himself,  with  the  characteristic  self-confidence  of  his  age,1 
that  he  was  already  abundantly  furnished  with  all  the  knowledge 
that  a  statesman  required, £  Socrates  (p)  accosted  him  courteously, 
and  by  proceeding  from  one  question  to  another, h  made  it  plain 
from  his  own  answer s,'  that  he  had  as  yet  obtained)  no  knowledge1' 
of  justice  and  injustice.* 

2.  And  when  Alcibiades  took  it  impatiently,  and  was  indignant 
as  considering"1  himself  to  be  reproached  with  ignorance,4  Socrate9 
defended  himself  [from  the  charge],  and  asserted8)  that  he'  was 


278 


EXERCISE  20. 


not  saying  any  thing  whatever11  of  that  sort  against  him,  [but]  that 
it  was  Alcibiades  himself,  who  was  making  the  confession0  about 
himself. 

1.  a  inscribi.  b  urbanus,  which  denotes  refined  and  polished  wit. 

c  elegans.  Cicero  speaks  of  an  elegans  jocandi  genus:  ‘to  check,’  repri¬ 
mere.  d  Dod.  superbia.  e  quum.  I.  489.  f  ‘  which  is  wont  to  be 
the  character  ( ingenium )  of  that  age.’  What  is  the  word  for  age  =  '‘time  of 
life  ?  ’  s  ‘  with  all  those  things  which  had  reference  {pertinere )  to  govern¬ 
ing  tho  state.’  ‘  To  govern ,’  administrare,  of  a  statesman  managing  it  under  a 
so' ereign  power.  h  ‘  by  questioning  step-by-step  ’  ( paulatim ).  Quintilian 
nas  paulatim  et  {ut  dicitur)  p  edetentim  interrogare.  i  ‘  brought 

him  to  that  point,  that  it  was  plainly  established  by  his  own  answers.’  ‘  To 
bring  any  body  to  that  point,’  aliquem  eo  perducere,  ut,  &c.  ‘  To  be  plainly  es¬ 

tablished,’  aperte  effici  {ex).  i  Dod.  invenire.  k  Dod.  cognitio. 
l  justum,  injustum :  not  the  abstract  justitia,  but  that  which  is  actually  just 
or  unjust  in  practice. 

2.  m  ‘  because — he  thought.’  (On  the  mood  after  quod,  see  I.  518.) 

*  ‘not — any  thing  whatever,’  nihil  prorsus.  °  Fateri.  Translate  ‘de¬ 

fended,’  ‘  asserted, ’  by  the  historical  present.  I.  414. 


Exercise  20. 

1.  How  highly  the  Athenians  valued1  ||  the  poems  of  Homer, 
and  how  useful  they  judged  them  to  be  for  inflaming13  [men’s] 
minds  with  a  love  of  honour7)  and  worth, b  may  be  perceived'  from 
their  having  passed7  a  law,  thatd  every'  fifth  year,  atf  the  Pana- 
thenaic  festival,  the  poems  of  Homer,  and  of  none  hut  Homer f 
should  be  publicly  recited. 

2.  For  their  opinion  rvasf  that  laws  do  indeed  enjoin1 2  what  is 
to  be  done  and  [what]  avoided,  but  that  from  their  [necessary] 
brevity,  they  do  not  teach  [this  knowledge] ;  but  that  the  poets, 
who,  imitating  human  life,  give  a  copious  narrative  J  of  brave  and 
noble  actions,  and  almost*1  place  them  before  [men’s]  eyes,  are 
letter  calculated *  to  persuade  [us  to  imitation]. 

1.  a  To  value  highly,  magni  facere.  How  must  this  be  modified  to  express 

‘ how  highly?’  b  dignitas  (=  worth,  virtue)  as  in  Cic.  voluptatem  conces¬ 
suram  dignitati,  &c.  c  existimare.  d  I.  75.  e  I.  p.  139,  note 

d.  f  Express  the  preposition  'in.'  The  Panathenaic  festival,  Panathe- 
naica  (sc.  solemnia).  Varr.  s  ‘of  him  alone  out  of  the  whole  number  of 

poets.’ 

2.  h  ‘  thus  they  thought.’  »  Dod.  jubere.  J  copiose  exponere.  k  pro 
pemodum.  i  aptior  (ad  aliquid  faciendum). 


EXERCISES  21,  22. 
Exercise  21. 


279 


1.  The  Lacedaemonians  paid  a  similar  honour11  to  Tyrtaeus. 
For  though  in  generalb  they  were  indisposed0  to  poetic  studies,  and 
notd  fonde  of  listening  to  the  strains  of  poets,  they  nevertheless  had 
passed  a  law ,f  that  whenever»  an  army  [of  theirs]  was  drawn  up 
for  a  general  engagement, h  the  soldiers  should  be  summoned  to  the 
royal  tent,  and  there  *  inspired  with  a  contempt*  of  death  in  their 
country's  cause , )  J  by  listening  to  the  poems  of  Tyrtaeus. 

2.  To  iEschylus,  too,  nearly  the  same  honour  was  paid*  by  the 
Athenian  people  ;  for  it  was  enacted  by  a  public  decree  that  even 
after  his  (p)  death  Jus  plays  should  he  *  acted,  a  privilege  which 
was  granted  to  no  other  tragic  poet.v 

1.  a  ‘To  pay  an  honour  to  any  body,’  honorem  alicui  habere ,  tribuere;  honore 

aliquem  afficere :  not  honorem  alicui  exhibere.  b  ceteroqui  (  —  1  in  other 

respects,’  ‘with  this  exception’).  c  alienus,  I.  p.  77,  note  y.  d  neque. 
e  Diff.  111.  Idiom  given  for  ‘ don't  like  to,’  &c.  f  ‘had  appointed  by 

law,’  lege  constituere.  »  ‘  as  often  as,’  quoties.  h  cum  hostibus 

dimicaturus  in  procinctu  constitisset.  i  Participle.  Should  you 

use  spernere ,  contemnere,  ox  despicere?  (V.  M.  5.)  J  ‘for  (pro)  their 

country.’ 

2.  k  (the  plays)  ‘of  [him]  alone  out  of  all  the  tragic  poets— should  be 
*  acted.’ 

Exercise  22. 

{Breams.) 

‘We  sleep  through  whole  nights,4  and  there  is  hardly  any'4 
[night]  in  whichb  we  do  not  dream :  and  do  we  [yet]  wonder,  that 
what  we  have  dreamed  sometimes®  comes  true  Vd  These  are  the 
words  ||  of  a  philosopher  (p)  who  is  discussing®  the  unrealityf  of 
dreams,  and  asserting65  that  [even]  if  some7  dreams  f  are  confirmed» 
by  the  event,  it  does  not  follow h  from  this,  that  dreams  are  not  to  be 
looked  upon*  as  [mere  dreams].  For  out  of  j  suchk  a  number  and 
variety  [of  them],  it  would  be  more  wonderful  if  nothing  ever* 
came  trued  of  what  we  f  see  when  we  are  asleep. m 

B  I.  302.  b  I.  477.  c  I.  402.  <i  ‘to  come  true,’  evadere,  oi 

evenire,  both  Cic.  e  exagitare ,  to  discuss  a  thing  repeatedly ;  to  work  a 

point.  f  vanitas.  »  comprobare.  h  to  follow  from  any  thing,  ex  aliqud 
re  effici  followed  by  ut :  here  by  ut  ne :  Pt.  1.  p.  38,  note).  i  haberi .  J  in; 

with  &hl.  k  C.  10.  i  I.  402.  m  per  quietem. 


280 


EXERCISES  23,  24. 

Exercise  23. 

( Semiramis .) 

1.  Semiramis  is  said  to  have  gained  a  throne11  fromb  a  very  lew* 
rank  [of  life]  by  an  exceedingly  ||  ingeniousd  and  clever  plan.  She 
had  by  degrees6  obtained  such  influence  over  ||  king  Ninus, f  that 
nothing  was  so  great  that  Semiramis  would  not  dare  to  ask* 
it  (r)  of  the  king,  or  that  the  king  would  venture  to  refuse  her,  ( p ) 
if  she  did  ask  it. 

2.  And  so,  having  onceh  thrown  out*  (358)  in  conversation, 
that  there  was10>  something  which  she  desired  very  much,  and 
the  king  having  told  i  her  to  namek  it  openly  and  fearlessly, 
^  whatever!  it  might  be,  ‘  I  should  wish  you,’  she  said,  ‘  to  f  grant"1 
me  this  [favour,]  that  I  might  (128)  sit  on16)  your  throne  and  ad¬ 
minister  justice*  for  but10  a  single0  day:  and  that,  for  the  whole 
of  that  day,  all  should  obey  me  [just]  as  they  do  you. ’p 

1.  a  ‘  To  gain  a  throne,’  ad  regnum  'pervenire.  r  ex.  J  humilis 

et  abjectus.  d  Dod.  astutus.  e  Dod.  paulatim.  f‘had 

so  bound  {astringere)  king  Ninus  to  herself.’  s  petere.  (See  I.  252, 

Remark.) 

2.  h  aliquando.  i  injicere.  )  jubere,  I.  76.  k  profiteri. 

I  quicquid  tandem.  ™  tribuere.  n  jus  dicere.  °  unus.  P  ‘  as 

( qmmadmodum)  they  do  to  you,  so  {ita)  they  should  obey  me.’ 

Exercise  24. 

( Semiramis  continued.) 

The  king  laughed,  and  granted  [her]  what  she  f  requested. 
Immediately  it  is  proclaimed,  that  on  an  (393)  appointed4  day,  all 
men  should  obey  the  commands b  of  Semiramis  :  that  such  was  the 
king's  pleasure  :c  that  she  for  that  day  f  ivas  placed  overA  them  all 
with  sovereign  authority e  and  power.  When  (512)  the13)  day  ar¬ 
rived,  the  queen  sat  onl6)  the  throne  in  royal  pomp.f  Vast  crowds 
assemble e  [before  her.]  She  at  first,  by  way  of  experiment ,h  issues 
some  commands  of  no  great  importance J 

a  Certus.  e  dicto  audientem  esse,  with  dat.  of  person.  *  ‘that  so 

it  pleased  the  king.’  d  prceesse.  e  imperium.  f  cultus,  im¬ 

plying  more  than  apparel  only ;  all  the  attendant  circumstances  of  a  king’s 
sitting  in  state.  °  ‘  A  very  great  concourse  ( concursus )  takes  place.’ 

»  experiendi  causa.  «  ‘  commands  some  things  (acc.)  of  no 12)  great 

moment. 


281 


exercises  25,  26,  27. 

Exercise  25. 

( Semiramis  continued.) 

When*  she  saw  that  all  men  obeyed  her  in  earnest,1  whatever 
she  commanded ,c  she  orders  the  royal  body-guardA  to  arrest'  (75) 
the  king  himself :  they  arrest  him.  To  bind  him  [in  chains]  : 
he  is  bound.  To  put  him  to  death  :f  he  is  put  to  death.  In  this 
manner^  her  reign  of  a  day  is  made  perpetual .h  This  is  [the 
queen]  who  surrounded  Babylon  with  walls  of  brick/  and  whose 
famous  J  hanging11  gardens  were  the  objects  of  such  admiration  J 

a  ‘  When  ’  =  ‘  as  soon  as  ’  (512).  What  tense  and  mood  ?  (514.)  b  serio . 
c  ‘in  all  things.’  With  respect  to  the  place  of  ‘aZZ,’  see  p.  242,  39,  which  should 
laydown  the  rule  as  general,  not  as  confined  to  substantives  only.  d  satellites 
ac  stipatores  regii  corporis.  (Cic.  Rull.  2.  13,  32,  has;  stipatores  corporis 
constituit  eosdem  ministros  et  satellites  potestatis.)  e  comprehendere, 

f  interjicere.  S  ita.  h  ‘  from3-»  [that]  of-a-day  ( diurnus )  becomes  a 

lasting  [one].’  Lasting,  diuturnus  :  there  is  a  sort  of  play  on  the  similarity  of 
sound  in  diurnus  and  diuturnus.  This  is  called  Paronomasia ,  see  above,  p. 
264.  So  non  magis  amore  quam  more ,  (C.  Nep.) ;  in  ore  atque  amore , 
(Cic.),  &c.’  •  of  brick,  latericius.  J  I.  381.  k  pensilis. 

i  1  had  such  admiration.’  C.  10. 

Exercise  26. 

Cicero,  an  extremely®  good  judgeb  of  eloquence,  *  thought  so 
highly  ||  of  Plato,  that  he  said  Jupiter  himself,  if  he  wished  to 
speak* Greek,  would  use  noc  language  butIl)  thatH)  of  Plato. 
And  then22  Aristotle  !  did  he  notd  both  lay  down'  the  rules'-  of 
eloquence  better  than  any  other  man,z  and  possess  such  eloquence h 
himself,  that  the  same  Cicero  called  him  a  river  flowing  with 
gold  ? 

a  in  primis.  b  existimator.  c  non  alius.  d  Nonne  is, 

of  course,  the  regular  interrogative  particle  here:  but  ‘non  is  often  used 
without  ne  in  vehement  questions — especially  questions  of  appeal.’ 
e  tradere.  (  praeceptum.  s  unus  omnium  optime.  b  ‘  of  such  (C. 

10.)  eloquence.’ 


Exercise  27. 

1.  Philosophy  heals  these  and  similar  diseases,  and  produces* 
in  her  [followers]  such0  a  firmness  of  mind,  asc  neitherd  the 
allurements  of  pleasure  (pi.),  nor  the  fires*  of  pain  (pi.),  nor  the 


282 


EXERCISES  28,  29. 


splendour  of  riches,  nor  obscure  and  despisedf  poverty,  nor  the 
thirst  of  honour  (pL),  nor  the  fear  of  disgrace,  nor  the  desire  of 
life,  nor  the  fear  of  death,  can  shakes  and  overthrow.*1 

2.  For  as  the  poets  say  that  the  top  of  Olympus  is  always  calm, 
because*  it  is  too  high  for  j  the  power  of  the  winds  and  tempests  to 
reach  it  :k  so  the  mind  of  philosophers  is  too  lofty*  and  elevated* 
to  feel  those  whirlwinds'11  of  desires  ( p )  that  rage  and  battle0 
together0  on  the  ground  for  17)  things  [of  the]  most  worthless 
[nature]. 

1.  a  efficere.  *>  is ,  ea,  id.  (See  I.  483  (2)).  c  C.  9.  <*  Translate 

neither — nor — nor ,  by  I.  478  (4).  0  fax  (torch).  f  Dod.  spernere. 

£  convellere ,  ‘  pull  violently  from  its  place.’  h  labefactare. 

2.  i  propter  ea  quod :  which  is  stronger  than  quia  or  quod  only,  and  gives  more 

prominence  to  the  reason  assigned.  j  DifF.  94.  k  ‘  to  arrive  thither,* 

eo  pervenire.  l  Dod.  altus  (i).  m  fatus  (us).  n  digladiari. 

0  inter  se. 

Exercise  28. 

1  should  scarcely  have  dared  to  ask  you  to  writea  to  me  in  Latin, 
fearing  that  this  would  seem  to  you  an  exceedingly b  difficult 
[task].  Consequently,®  the  Latind  letters  which  I  have  lately 
received  from  you  were  the  more  acceptable, — [they  were]  not 
indeed**  entirely*-  faultless/  but  yet  much  more  correctly  and 
elegantly  written h  than  I  should  have  believed  [possible].  I  en- 
courage*  you  therefore  to  hope  with  confidence ,3  and14  not  to  doubt 
but11*  that,  under  my  guidance/  you  will  one  day *  attain"1  to 
some"  [considerable]  facility  in  this  accomplishment ,  as  well  as  in 
others.0 

a  75.  b  oppido.  c  Quo  (the  relative  adverb,  instead  of  the  de¬ 
monstrative  eo ),  with  the  comparative  adj.  <*  ‘written  by  you  in  Latin,’ 

Latine.  See  I.  53,  note*.  e  I.  383.  f  omni  ex  parte.  £  emen¬ 
datus.  *»  nitidiores  et  cultiores.  i  jubeo ,  ‘  I  bid  you.’  J  bene. 

k  I.  364.  \  aliquando.  m  Dod.  invenire.  n  aliquis.  ° ‘of  this 

Kind  also.’ 


Exercise  29. 

(On  a  Recovery  from  Illness .) 

Certainly,  when  all'  my  medical-attendants'*1  asserted-repeat- 
edlyb  with  one*  consent,  that  there  was  hardly  any  hope  left  of 


EXERCISES  30,  31. 


28 


my  recovery ,d  I  had  so  prepared  myself  and  composed  my  mind, 
as®  to  be  neither  grieved  nor  frightened  by  the  fear  of,  as  it  was 
supposed,  approachingf  death :  and  asked  nothing14  else*  ofh  the 

*  Almighty,  but11)  that  He  would  deal  with  me  *  mercifully,  would 
pardon  the  errours*  of  my  past  life,  and,  in  that  separation  of  body 
and  soul,  would  not14  suffer  me  to  be  tormented  either  in  a  greater 
degree  or  for  a  longer  time )  than  my  strength  could  bear. 

a  medici.  b  dictitare.  c  summus.  d  ‘  of  my  escaping,* 

evadendi.  e  I.  66.  f  imminens.  s  alius.  h  I.  252,  Obs. 

«  errata.  )  .*  moTe  violently,  or  longer.1  Comparatives  of  vihementer 

and  diu. 

Exercise  30. 

( Same  subject  continued.) 

But  I  hope  that  I  have  been  allowed  by  God  to  remain  in  this 
world*  that  the  stains  contracted1*  in  former  years  may  be  blotted 
out  by  my  tears ;  and  that  at  last  ( p )  I  may  slight®  and  reject  the 
temptations'1  of  vice  (pi-),  and  pursue  noio  at  least  in  my  old  age0 
that  course  of  life  which  I  ought  to  have  pursued1-  from  the  begin¬ 
ning.  And  I  beseech  you,  *  again  and  again,  noble  Sir,s  that,  as 
you  stimulateh  me  to  the  (p)  performance  of  this  resolution*  by 
your  example,  so  you  would  be  kind  enough)  to  assist  me  [to  do 
so],  not  onlyk  by  your  admonitions  and  advice,  but  also  by  offering 

*  prayers  to  God  in  my  behalf  J 

a  ‘  I  (1  have  been  left  by  God  in  this  life.’  b  ‘  To  contract  a  stain,’  macu¬ 
lam  concipere:  ‘  to  blot  it  out  or  efface  it,’  maculam  delere  or  «luere. 
c  omittere.  «1  Ulecebrce.  e  saltern  jam  senex.  f  C.  g  vir 

clarissime.  h  incitare.  «  animi  mei  propositum.  J  dignari. 

k  ‘not  only — but  also,’  et — et:  or  in  the  usual  way,  non  solum — sed  etiam. 
i  ‘for  me.’ 


Exercise  31. 

[Obs.  When  a  demonstrative  is  to  be  translated  by  a  relative,  the  conjunction 
at  the  head  of  the  sentence  must  be  omitted.] 

Deucalion,  in  Ovid,a  ingeniously  interprets  the  response1*  given 
him  by  Themis,  (p)  when  lie  &sked  by  what  means®  he  could 
restore  the  human  race,  (p)  which  had  been  destroyed  by  the 
flood.  For,  being  ordered  ‘  to  throw  behind  his  back  the  bones 


284 


exercises  32,  33,  34. 


of  his  great  mother,5  ||  he  (r)  made  outd  [that]  ||  by  the  name 
mother  the  earth  [was  meant],  and  that  stories  were  callede  the 
bones  ||  in  her  (r)  body. 

a  ‘  The  Ovidian  Deucalion.’  Ovidianus.  b  sors.  c  ars.  d  %ntd 
ligere.  e  Subj.,  as  being  a  thought  of  Deucalion's. 

Exercise  32. 

[All  men]  submit  to  punishment  with  a  better  grace,*  whenb  they 
think  that  they  deserve  to  be  punished.0  Wherefore  Aristotle,  in 
his  second  book  on  the  Art  of  Rhetoric ,d  sets-downe  this  argument 
with  others{  among  those  which  tend  to  soothe  the  mind  ;  that  we 
should  point  out  to  those  who  think  that  an  injury  has  been  done 
them,  that  they'  began/  and  that  whath  they  complain  of15)  has 
befallen  them  deservedly. 

a  11  bear  II  with  a  more  even  mind  that  they  should  be  punished.’  b  Express 

' all  men — when  '  by  quicunque  (whosoever).  c  I.  486  (b).  d  ‘On  the 

rhetorical  art,’  rhetoricus.  e  ponere.  (  quoque.  s  ‘  were  the  firs 

( priores )  in  ^inflicting  injury.’  h  =  ‘those  things  which.* 

Exercise  33. 

Soon  [afterwards]  he  fell  ill  of*  a  *  severe  disease ,  and  sufferea 
so  much  from  itb  for  two0  months,  that  his  friends  and  medical, 
attendants  feared  ford  his  life,  and14  (p)  though  he  "[shook  ofF  the 
disorder,®  it  was10)  butll)  very  slowly  indeed1  that  he  recovered  the 
*  bodily  strength  (  p)  he  had  lost,  and  his  former^  health. 

a  in  morbum  incidere  or  cadere.  b  ‘  was  so  shaken  or  oppressed  by  it ;’ 

morbo  urgeri ,  tentari,  affligi  (Cic.),  conflictari  (Corn.  Nep.).  c  bini ,  the  two 

months  being  considered  as  one  space.  Bini  1  extra  distributionem  sig¬ 
nificat  duo ,  non  separati m,  sed  simul  sumpta .’  ( Facdolati .)  d  I. 

231.  e  To  shake  off  a  disorder,  morbum  ox  vim  morbi  depellere.  f  ad¬ 
modum  tarde  ac  lente.  s  pristinus. 


Exercise  34. 

I  send  you  back  your  review,1  in  which  I  have  scarcely  found 
[any  thing]  to  cavil  at,b  much  less0  to  censure.  Your  judgment 
is  correct'  and  sure :  your  style  elegant  and  in  good  Latin.A 
That®  you  have  made  such  progressf  in  this  (r)  I  rejoice  the 
more,  because"  it  was,0)  principally*1  by  my  advicei  that  you  were 


EXERCISES  35,  36. 


285 


persuaded  to  add  this  accomplishment)  of  writing  well,  to  your 
other  graces*  of  genius  and  learning. 

a  censura.  b  Diff.  108  (1).  ‘To  cavil  at,’  calumniari.  c  ‘much 

less,’  nedum,*  I.  443.  *i  ‘and  quite  {plane)  Latin.’  e  I.  517,  note  x. 

f  ‘To  make  such  progress,’  tantum  projicere.  s  I.  516.  h  potissimum, 
I.  364.  i  Use  the  subst.  auctor.  (See  I.  364.)  j  ‘  thought  that  this 

credit  ( laus ) — should  be  added,’ — conjungere ,  as  it  was  to  be,  not  appended  to 
♦hem,  but  united  with  them.  k  ornamenta. 


Exercise  35. 

As  ifa  my  house  were  turned  into  an  infirmary/  theie  are  ill 
in  it  both  my  youngest  daughter,  and  my  two  maid-servants.  I 
am  therefore  obliged  to  askc  you  to  deferd  your  coming/  which 
for17)  many  reasons  I  was  so  anxiouslyf  expecting,  to  a  time 
more  convenient  to  us.  Farewell,  excellent  man.  Leyden, 
March  19/ 

a  I.  494.  b  Sen.  uses  valetudinarium.  The  term  in  Justinian’s  Code  of 
Laws  is  nosocomium ,  from  voaoKoixeiov.  0  I.  252.  d  I.  75.  6  adventu* 

f  tantopere.  s  I.  526,  528.  These  rules  may  be  given  thus : — 

Adde  diem  semper  Nonis  atque  Idibus  unum  : 

Accipiatque  dies  mensis  lux  ultima  binos. 

Exercise  36. 

The  morea  lazyb  1  grow c  in  writing  letters,  the  more  vehe¬ 
mently  do  I  desire  to  converse  with  you,  especially  sinced  [we] 
havee  innumerable  subjectsf  of  conversation/  You  will  there¬ 
fore  highly  gratify h  both  me  and  all  mine,  if  you  will  revisit  us, 
and  [that  after  so]  long  a  time,!  during  the  Easter  holidays.]  The 
cold  is  sharp,  I  allow ;  but  you  shall  have k  a  bright'  fire'  in  your 
bed-room. 

a  I.  407.  b  Dod.  ignavia.  c  ‘age  makes  me.’  dI.  489. 

•  esse.  t  argumentum.  s  Gerund.  h  ‘  will  have  done  [a  thing] 

most  gratitying,’  gratissimus.  i  intervallum.  J  feriae  Paschales. 

k  ‘  there  shall  be  prepared  for  you  ’  l  focus. 


*  ‘  Nedum  is  rare  in  Cicero,  who  generally  uses  non  modo  instead  of  it  afte; 
ne — quideml 


286 


exercises  37,  38,  39. 
Exercise  37. 


Your  letters  are  few  and  far  between  ;a  but  they  make  up  fon 
their  rarity  by  their  wonderful'  tenderness.0  Many  parts  of  them? 
have  delighted  me,  but  nothing  more  than  the4)  affection,  which 
you  not  only  manifest6  to  me  in  my  life-time, {  but  also  solemnly8 
promise  to  manifest11  to  my  [family],  when  I  am  gone  J 

*  ‘  are  certainly  rare,’  rarus  quidem.  b  compensare.  c  suavitas, 

i  ‘  many  [things]  in  them.’  e  amorem  pr  cestar  e  (to  manifest  by  sub¬ 
stantial  kindness).  f  ‘  to  me  alive.’  s  sancte.  h  DifF.  2 

'  ‘  shall  have  ceased  to  be .’ 


Exercise  38. 

As  to1  my  property15  [which  is]  small0  indeed/  but  in  a  tolera 
bly  good  condition ,e  let  us  converse  [about  it]  when  you  come  in 
the  spring. f  I  am  so  strongs  both  in  body  and  mind,  that  unless 
I  f  am  carried  off  by  apoplexy/  I  seem  as  if  I  mighU  arrive  at 
the  same  age  that  my  mother  reached  :3  nor  do  I  feel  that  I  am 
*  growing  an  old  man  \\from  any  tiling k  but111  my  laziness  in  let¬ 
ter-writing.  i 

a  De.  b  res  (pi.).  c  modicus.  d  I.  383.  e  ‘but  sufficiently 
uninvolved,’  satis  explicatus.  (So  Cic.  provincia  quam  maxime  apta  e xp  lica- 
taque.)  f  sub  tempus  vernum.  £  ‘  To  be  strong,’  vigere.  h  apo¬ 
plexia  or  apoplexia.  i  ‘  to  be  able.’  3  attingere.  k  ‘  [from]  anv 

other  circumstance,’  res.  i  ‘  in  writing  letters.’ 

Exercise  39. 

Of  our  [men]1  not  more  than  twenty  were  [either  killed  or] 
missing15  [after]  all  the  engagements.  But  in  the  castle  there  was 
not  a  single0  soldier  who  was  not  wounded  :  and  of  one  cohort  four 
centurions  lostd  their  eyes.  And  desiring*  to  *  produce  evidence 
of  their  exertions1'  and  the  danger  they  had  been  in,£  they  counted 
over  before11  Marius  about  thirty  thousand  arrows*  [which  had 
been]  shot )  into  the  castle,  and  brought  to  him  the  shield k  of  the 
centurion  Scoeva,  in  which  there  were  found k  a  hundred  and  twenty 
holes.) 

a  In  such  enumerations  the  possessive  adjective  is  often  used,  of  course  in 
agreement,  instead  of  partitive  gen.,  or  ex,  &c.  Caesar,  especially,  is  fond  of 
this  construction:  thus  nostri  circiter  septuaginta  ceciderunt.  (Bell.  Civ. 
1  46.  b  To  be  [killed  or]  missing  (i.  e.  lost  in  any  way),  desiderari. 


EXERCISES  40,  41 


287 


c  *  Single  ‘  after  general  negatives,  such  as  nemo ,  nullus,  neque  quisqiuim  or 
ullus,  is  best  translated  by  omnino  =  ‘at  all,  in  all,’  which  extends  the  meaning 
strictly  to  all.  Here  nemo — omnino.  d  I.  56,  n.  e  ‘when  ( quum ) 

they  desired.’  (subj.)  f  labor  (sing.).  s  ‘ their  danger.’  h  ‘To 

count  over  (again)  before  any  body,’  renumerare  cui.  i  For  miMtary  mat¬ 

ters  Caesar  and  Livy  are  the  best  authors  to  copy,  but  especially  Caesar.  With 
respect  to  compound  numerals  of  this  kind,  he  so  nearly  always  places  the 
thousands  first,  then  the  gen.,  and  then  the  number  of  thousands,  that  this  is  a 
very  good  order  to  follow.  Thus,  millia  passuum  decem,;  millia  hominum  circi¬ 
ter  viginti,  Ac.  I  ‘  To  shoot  ’  (of  weapons  hurled,  as  those  of  the  ancients 

were),  conjicere.  k  ‘  the  shield  being  brought  {referre),  [there]  were 

found  in  it,’  Ac.  l  foramen. 

Exercise  40. 

He  sends  thither  M.  Valerius  with  five  cohorts  of  the  eighth 
legion.  The  people  of  Veii*  as  soon  as  they  saw  our  standards, 
opened13  their  gates;  and  all,0  both  inhabitants'1  and  soldiers,  came 
forthe  to  meetf  Valerius  with  their  congratulations  :s  Sulpicius  and 
Manlius  threw  themselves  down  from3)  the  wall.  Manlius,  being 
brought11  before1  Valerius,  begs  to  be  senti  to  Marius.  Valerius, 
with  the  cohorts  and  Manlius,  returns  on  the  same  day  thatk  he 
had  set  out  [upon  his  march  thither].  Marius  incorporated1  the 

legions  with  his  own  army,  and  dismissed  Manlius  unpunished."1 

\  / 

a  Veienses  i>  V.  M.  7.  0  universi.  d  oppidani  (inhabitant? 

of  the  town).  e  exire.  f  ‘  To  meet  ’  is  generally  translated  by  obviam 
with  a  dat.,  ire  {exire,  Ac.)  obviam  alicui.  s  ‘  congratulating.’  h  deduci. 
i  ad.  J  I.  75.  k  C.  25.  1  conjungere  aliquem  cum  aliqua  re. 

a  incolumis. 

Exercise  41. 

I  have  heard  our  friend  Pomponius  say*  that  he  had  two 
soldiers  in  Spain,  rich  brothers  from3)  the  Faliscan  territory  ;  their 
father  f  having  left  them  a  small  country -house ,b  and  a  field0  of 
certainly11  not  more  than  one  acre,  th.eyh  formed  an  apiary e  round 
the  whole  house,  and  had  a  garden  [there],  and  filled  upf  the  rest 
with  thyme,  cytisus,  and  balm/  Theseh  [brothers,  he  said]  used 
never  to  make)  less,  on  an  average ,l  than  ten  thousand  sest^tia 
by  j  their  honey. 

B  I  have  heard  you  say,  is,  audivi  te  (ipsum)  dicere  ;  audivi,  quum  diceres, 
audivi  te  dicentem.  b  ‘  to  whom  when  a  small  country-house  had  been  left 
by  their  father.’  c  agellus.  d  sane.  e  alvearium,  i.  e.  a  system  of 


288 


EXERCISES  42,  43. 


bee-hives.  f  obsepire.  s  apiastrum.  h  Continue  this  in  oblique 

narration.  i  ut  percoque  ducerent.  i  ‘  to  make  so  much  by  any  thing,’ 

recipere  (with  acc.  of  the  thing)  ex. 

Exercise  42. 

If  there  is  noa  food  [for  them]  naturally-growingb  [there],  the 
owner  ought  to  sow  what  bees  like  lest  :c  such  asd  roses,  wild- 
thyme,®  balm/  poppies,  beans,  lentils,  peas,  basil/  the  [sweet- 
scented]  rush/  lucerne, «  and  especially  cytisus,  which  is  extremely 
good  j  for  them  [when]  in  health.  For  it  begins  to  flower  atk  the 
vernal  equinox,  and  continues  [in  flower]  to  the  autumnal  equinox. 
But  though1"  this  is  best  for17)  [their]  health,  thyme  is  best  with 
reference  to  then  making  of  honey.0  For  17)  this  reason  the  Sicilian 
honey  bears  the  *  palm,  becauseP  the  thyme  is  there  good  and 
abundant. 

a  ‘not.’  (See  p.  257,  103.)  b  naturalis.  c  ‘most  follow.’  d  ‘ these  are .’ 
Obs.  All  the  names  are  to  be  in  the  singular.  c  serpyllum.  f  apiastrum, 
s  ocimum.  h  cyperum.  i  medica  (sc.  herba).  J  utilissimus. 

fc  ‘from,’  ab.  l  ‘  to  the  other  equinox  of  autumn.’  What  is  the  word  for 
'other'  of  two  things?  m  ‘as  this  is  best — so  thyme,’  &c.,ut—sic.  n  ad. 

0  mellificium:  p  quod.  frequens . 

Exercise  43. 

(On  the  Medical  Art.) 

As  agriculture  [provides]  nourishment  for  healthy  bodies,  so 
medicine  promises  *  health  to  [them  when]  diseased.'  There  is10) 
indeed  nowhere,  [where]  this  [art]  does  not  exist :  sinceb  even  the 
most  uncivilized®  nations  are  acquainted  with  herbs  and  other  sim- 
pled  [remedies]  fore  the  curef  of  wounds  and  diseases.  Among18) 
the  Greeks,  ||  however,  it  was  cultivated  considerably"  more  than 
amongst11  other  nations :  and)  [yet]  even  amongst  these,  not  from 
the  first  beginning  [of  their  national  existence],  but  [only]  a  few 
centuries  before  us,  since)  Aesculapius  was  celebrated  as  the  first 
inventor  [of  it]  ;  who,  because  he  studied  somewhatk  more  pro¬ 
foundly  this  science,  [which  was]  still  rude  and  in  its  infancy ,i 
was  worshipped  after  his  death  as  a  god.m 

a  V.  M.  II.  b  siquidem .  c  imperitissimus.  d  promptus  (i.  e. 

ready  at  hand).  e'  ad.  (  auxilium,  i.  e.  help  against  them,  whethei 


EXERCISES  44,  45. 


289 


<choU  or  partial  cure.  ft  aliquanto ,  1. 402.  h  in,  with  abl.  i  ae. 

\  utpote  quum,  with  subj.  k  paulo.  l  vulgaris.  m  ‘  was  received 

into  the  number  of  the  gods.’  recipi. 

Exercise  44. 

( Same  subject  continued.) 

Aftera  [him]  |j  his  two  sons  Podalirius  and  Machaon,  following 
Agamemnon  in  the  war  against  Troyf  afforded  no12)  inconsid¬ 
erable*  service  to  their  comrades. d  But  yet  Homer  has  described6 
||  them  (r)  not  as  having  rendered  them  anyf  aid  against?  pesti¬ 
lence, h  norl9>  the  various  kinds  of  diseases,  but  only  as  being 
accustomed  to  cure*  wounds  with  the  knife  )  and  medicinal  appli¬ 
cations.1'  From  which  it  [plainly]  appears,' 80)  that  these  [were] 
the  only  branches1  of  medicine  which™  they  f  attempted ;  and 
that  [consequently]  these  are  the  oldest.  And  we  |  may  learn 
[from]  the  same  author,"  that  diseases  were  referred  to  the  anger 
of  the  gods,  and  that  it  wasl0)  from  them  [that]  assistance  used  to 
be  implored. 

a  Deinde.  b  1  Trojan.’  c  mediocris.  d  commilitones.  e  proponere , 
with  inf.  f  The  regular  words  after  negatives  are  quisquam  and  ullus :  but 
aliquis  is  sometimes  found.  According  to  Matthias  this  is  :  ‘  when  the  thing 
either  really  exists ,  or  might  he  supposed  to  have  existed .’  (Ad.  Cic.  Cat.  1,  6, 15.) 
Use  aliquis  here  :  and  see  I.  160.  sin,  with  abl.  h  Dod.  lues.  i  V. 
M.  19.  J  ferrum.  k  medicamentum.  1  pars.  m  DifF.  8 

a  ‘Author’  is  never  auctor  (but  scriptor,  &c.)  except  when,  as  here,  he  is  our 
authority  for  a  statement. 


Exercise  45. 

( Same  subject  continued.) 

And  it  is  *  probable,  that  though  there  were  no  remedies x  against 
bad  health,  yet  that  men  for  the  most  part  enjoyed  good  health ,b  on 
account  of  their  good  habits*  [of  life],  which  neither  slothd  nor 
luxury  had  corrupted.  For0  it  isl0)  these  two  [vices],  which  first* 
in  Greece,  and  then21>  amongst18)  ourselves,  have  injured?  [men’s] 
constitutions.  And  consequently,11  this  complicated1  [art  of] 
medicine,  ichich  was  unnecessary  in  former  days,  and  is  so  now 
amongst  other  nations ,)  enables*1  but  a  very  few 1  of  us  to  reach  the 
beginning  (pi.)  of  old  age. 


290 


EXERCISES  46,  47. 


«■  inter  nulla  auxilia ,  followed  by  gen.  *>  ‘  yet  that  it  generally  .plerumque,; 
fed-to-men’s-lot  (contingere)  good.’  c  mores.  d  Dbd.  ignavia. 

e  siquidem.  f  prius ,  there  being  only  two  cases  mentioned.  s  affligere  : 

‘  constitutions,’  corpora.  h  V.  M.  20.  >  multiplex.  1  ‘  neithei 

necessary  in  former  days— nor  amongst18)  other  nations.’  In  former  days: 
olim.  V.  M.  9.  k  ‘  Enables  to  reach,’  perducit  ad ,  &c.  i  vix  aliqui. 

Exercise  46. 

Sylla  with  an  inferior  force*  was  besieging  troops  which  had  yel 
suffered  no  loss  or  disaster ,b  they  being0  [also]  supplied  with  an 
abundance  of  every  thing  :  for  every  dayd  a  great  number  of  ships 
arrived  from  all  parts'  to  bring  them  provisions  :  nor  could  the 
wind  blow  from  any  quarter  that  was  not  favourable  to  some  of 
themf  He,s  on  the  other  hand,11  having  consumed  all  the  corn 
round  about, 1  was  in  great  distress  ;i  but  yet  his  men22)  bore  their 
privations k  with  extraordinary  patience.  For  they  called  to  mindp 
that,  after17  suffering  the  same  [hardships])  in  Bithynia  the  year 
before,  they,  by  their  exertions  and  patient  endurance,1"  put  an 
end"  to  a  very  formidable0  war:  they  rememberedp  that,  after17 
suffering  great  distress'1  before  Nicomedia,  and  much  greater 
still1*  before  Mantinium,  they  gained  a  victory3  over  mighty 
nations. 

a  militum  numerus.  t>  copies  integrae  atque  incolumes.  According  to  Dbd. 
incolumis  and  integer  both  mean  ‘  unhurt  and  untouched :’  integer ,  opp.  to  ‘  being 
attacked ,’  incolumis,  to  ‘  being  wounded.’  Dbd.  salvus.  c  quumilli.  d  69, 1.  t. 
e  undique.  f  ‘  nor  could  any  wind  blow,  but  (quin)  they  had  a  favourable 
course  from  some  quarter  (pars).’  ‘  Could  ’  should  be  the  imperfect ,  as  it  is  an 
expression  of  a  repeated  possibility.  S  ipse.  h  autem.  i  far  and  wide. 
}  angustiae  (a  ‘strait’),  pi.  it  ‘these  things.’  (See  I.  24,)  l  See  I.  24. 
ra  patientia.  n  confixere.  0  maximus.  p  I.  p.  72,  note  q.  'i  inopia 

(distress  for  provisions).  *  V.  M.  21.  8  ‘To  gain  a  victory,’  victorem 

or  victores  decedere ,  with  gen.  of  course. 

Exercise  47. 

1.  In  the  mean  time,a  L.  Sanga,  whom  Sylla  at  his  departure 
{p)  had  left  in  command  of  the  camp,b  being  informed  [of  what 
was  going  on],  came  to  the  assistance6  of  the  cohort  with  two 
legions.  On  his  (r)  arrival,  the  Africans  were  easily  repulsed ; 
they  did  ||  notd  [so  much  as]  stand e  the  sightf  and  [first]  shock  of 
our  [troops],  but  [as  soon  as]  ( p )  their  first  ranks  were  broken,* 
the  rest  turned  their  backs  and  fled  from  the  field. h  But  Sango 


EXERCISE  48. 


291 


recalled  our  men,  that  they  might  not  pursue  them  to  any  great 
distance  J 

2.  Now)  many  men  think,  that  if  he  had  chosen24)  to  pursue 
them  more  warmly ,k  the  war  might  have  been  terminated  on  that 
day  :  it  does  not  however  *  appear!  that  his  decision  was  [justly] 
censurable  :m  for  the  duties"  of  a  lieutenant  are  one,0  those  of  a 
general  another  :°  the  formerP  ought  to  act  in  every  thing  ac¬ 
cording  to  his  instructions  ;q  the  lattei’P  to  decide  without  restraint 
according  to  what  seems  best  with  reference  to  the  whole  state  of 
affairs. 

1.  a  I.  p.  141,  note  g.  b  ‘had  placed  over  the  camp,’  praeficere. 
t  I.  242  (1).  d neque  vero.  e ferre.  f  Ddd.  videre.  s  ‘To 

break  the  first  ranks,’  primos  dejicere.  h  loco  cedere.  i  longius. 

2  )  At.  k  acrius.  i  I.  297.  m  reprehendendus.  The  ad¬ 

jectives  in  - able ,  -ible,  may  be  translated  by  the  part,  in  dus,  when  they  mean 
what  ought  to  be  done  :  not  when  they  mean  what  can  be  done.  n  partes. 

0  I.  38.  p  alter — alter.  q  ad  praescriptum  libere  ad  summam  rerum 

consulere. 


Exercise  48. 

Hea  disposes  his  men  [along]  the13)  works  he  had  begunb  to 
raise,  not  at  certain  intervals ,c  as  was  done  ond  the  preceding* 
days,  but  in  a  continued  line  of  guards  and  posts, f  so  that  [the  par¬ 
ties]  touched^  *  each  other,  and  [all  together]  filed  up  the  whole 
line  of  works. h  He  orders1  the  military  tribunes  and  officers  of 
the  cavalry  to  patrol  [about  the  works],  and  begs)  them  not  only 
to  be  on  their  guard  againstk  sallies,  but  also  to  keep  an  eye  upon 
individuals  secretly  leaving  the  gates J  Norm  was  there  of  the 
whole  [army]  a  single  individual?  of  so  indifferent0  and  sluggish? 
a  mind,  as  to  take  a  wink  of  sleep q  that  night. 

a  ‘  He  ’  (of  the  general),  ipse.  b  instituere.  c  ‘  certain  space 

being  intermitted.’  d  ‘  as  was  the  custom  of,’  &c.  e  superior. 

f  perpetuis  vigiliis  stationibusque.  S  ‘  disposes,  being  the  historical  pres¬ 
ent.  What  tenses  would  both  be  correct  here?  I.  414.  b  munitionem  ex¬ 

plere  :  explere ,  to  leave  no  gaps ;  complere ,  to  fdl  as  full  as  a  thing  will  hold, 
i  1  to  order  to  patrol,’  circummittere.  )  hortari ,  I.  75.  k  ‘  To  be  on 

one' s  guard  against  any  thing,’  cavere  ab  aliqua  re.  1  ‘  to  observe  the  secret 

exits  ( exitus )  of  individuals,’  singuli  homines.  m  neque  vero :  the  vero 

adding  emphasis  to  the  assertion.  n  ‘any  (one).’  What  word  fer  ‘any?’ 

1.  389 — 391.  0  remissus.  p  languidus.  q  ‘as  to  rest,’  can* 

C uiescere.  (See  J.  66,  note  s.  Translate  according  to  1. 483  (a).) 


292 


EXERCISES  49,  50. 


Exercise  49. 


(Death  of  Pol;/ carp.) 


1.  When*  they  *j*  arrived11  j|  there, 25)  he  being0  from3)  his  age 
weak  in  his  legs,  and  [consequently]  allowed  to  ride  upon  an  ass,i 
a  great  concourse  (pi-)  took  place  both  of  Jews  and  Pagans  : 
some'  of  whom,  remembering  his  old  reputation,  had  compassion{ 
on  his  age  :  but  most  [of  them]  were  *  exasperated  [against  him] 
from3)  their  hatred  against”  the  Christians,  and  especially  because h 
Poly  carpus  had  prevented  the  offering  of  sacrifice *  to  the  gods  of 
their  country. 

2.  Hence  when,  [upon]  being  ordered  to  curse  Christ,  he  saidj 
that  he  would  never  do  that  to  his  King  and  Saviour,  he  was  im¬ 
mediately  handed-overk  to  the  executioners  tol)  be  burnt*  alive. 
When  they  f  were  leading  him  to  death,  a  certain  presbyter,  with 
whom  he  had  been  intimate,"1  met"  him  :°  [and]  said  weeping,  ‘  O 
Polycarp,  what  undeserved  treatment  art  thou  receiving  !’p  he  [re¬ 
plied]  ‘But  not  unexpected1-  [treatment],  for  many  Christian 
bishops  will  hereafter5  meet  with  this  fate  /’*• 


1.  a  ubi :  what  tense?  I.  512,  514.  b  pervenire.  I.  296.  c  quum , 

with  subj.  d  ‘riding  upon  an  ass/  asino  vehi.  e  Instead  of  making 

these  principal  sentences,  connect  them  with  the  preceding  by  quum  with  subj. 
Some — but  most;  alii — plurimi  vero.  f  miserari.  ?I,  156.  h  maxi- 


meque  quod. 

2.  i  Diff.  2. 
a  obviam  esse, 
suffering !’ 
exitum  habere. 


i  sacra  Jieri  prohibuerat. 

k  tradere.  l  comburi.  m  familiariter  uti. 

0  is  quum.  p  ‘  what  undeserved  [things]  thou  art 

q  huic  ille.  r  inopinatus.  8  deinde.  <•  hunc 


Exercise  50. 

It  is  [kind  in  you  and]  like  a  brother11  to  exhort13  me,  but  [you 
exhort  me  who  am]  now7,  by  Hercules, b  running  [apace,  that  way 
myself,  so]  that  I  lavish0  all  my  [assiduous]  attentions'1  upon1® 
him®  alone.  Nay,f  I  shall  perhaps^  with  my  ardent  zeal  accom¬ 
plish11  what  often  happens  to  travellers,  :j:when  they  make  haste;* 
[I  mean]  that  as  [they],  if  they  have  happened20  to  rise  later  than 
they  intended/  [yet]  by  quickening  their  speed*  they  arrive  even 
earlier*  at  their  journey'’ s  end,m  than  if  they  had  lain  awake  all  the 
morning  ;u  so  I,  since  I  have  so  long  overslept  myself0  in  the  oh 


EXERCISES  51,  52. 


293 


servanceP  of  this  man,  [though],  by  Hercules,  you  have  many  a 
time  tried  to  awake  me,*  will  make  up  forr  my  laziness  by 
running. 

a  frateme  (adv.).  b  mehercule.  The  now '  is  to  be  made  emphatic  by 

quidem.  0  conferre .  <J  studia  (pi.).  e  him  —  him  whom  you 

mention,  &c.  What  pron.  should  be  used  for  I.  377  (c).  f  Ego 

vero:  the  vero  adding  emphasis  to  the  statement.  5  V.  M.  15. 

n  efficere.  i  V.  M.  22.  1  velle.  k  properare.  l  citius. 

m  ‘  whither  they  wish,’  velle.  n  de  multa  nocte  vigilare.  0  in 

dormire.  p  colere  I.  359.  i  { you  by  Hercules  often  rousing  me.’ 
r  corrigere. 


Exercise  51. 

Cato  in  Sicily  was  refitting  his  old  ships  of  war,a  and  command¬ 
ing  the  states  to  provide  new  ones  for  him.h  These  [objects]  he 
pursued  with  great  zeal.  In  Lucania  and  Bruttium,0  he,  by 
means  of  his  lieutenants,  raised  troopsd  of  Roman  citizens :  and 
required6  from  the  states  of  Sicily  a  certain  amountf  of  infantry 
and  cavalry.  When  these  [preparations]  were  almost  completed, 
being  informed  of  Curio’s  arrival,  he  complained  in  an  address  to 
his  troops.s  that  he  was  abandoned  and  betrayed  by  Pompey,  who, 
though  utterly  unprepared h  in  every  respect ,•  had  begun  3  an  unne¬ 
cessary  war ;  and  [when]  questioned  in  the  senate  by  him  and 
other  [senators],  had  asserted6)  that  he  hadk  every  thing  ready  and 
in  good  order i  for!7)  a  war. 

a  naves  longce.  b  ‘  was  commanding  new  [ones]  to  the  states.’  So 

imperare  frumentum  civitatibus,  &c.  c  In  Lucanis  Bruttiisque.  The  name 

of  the  people  ( Lucani )  is  often  thus  used,  where  we  use  the  name  of  the  terri¬ 
tory.  <1  delectus  habere.  e  exigere.  f  numerus .  s  in  concione. 

Use  the  pr ccs.  historicum.  b  imparatissimus  followed  by  prep.  ab.  »  ‘  all 
things.’  3  suscipere.  k  Diff.  47.  1  apta  et  parata. 

Exercise  52 

Having  given  [him]  these  instructions, a  he  arrives  at  Canusium 
with  six  legions,  three  of  them  being  composed  of  veteran  soldiers, b 
the  rest  such  as  he  had  formed0  out  of  the  new  levies,  and  filled 
upd  on16  his  march  :  for  he  had  sent  Domitius’se  cohorts  straight*1 
from  Corfinium  to  Sicily.  He  found  that  the  consuls  were  gone® 
to  Dyrrachium  with  a  great  part  of  the  army,  and  that  Lucceius 
was  remaining  at  Brundusium  with  twenty  cohorts ;  nor  could  it 


294 


EXERCISES  53,  54. 


be  found  out  [for]  Certainty,  whether  he  had  remained  there  foi 
the  purpose  of  holding11  Brundusium,  that'  he  might  the  more 
easily  remain  master  of  the  whole  Hadriatic,  or  had  [merely] 
stopped  there  for16  want  of  ships. 

a  mandata.  b  ( three  [of  them]  veteran  [legions].’  veteranus 

5  dilectus  (sing.).  d  complere.  e  Domitianus  (adj.).  f  protinus 

£  proficisci.  h  obtinere.  i  What  word  for  ‘  that?' 

Exercise  53. 

When  the  exciteda  body  of  young  men'0  were  rashly  taking  arms, 
and  endeavouring  to  make  a  hostile  attack  upon ®  the  unoffendingd 
Thessalians,  it  was  I  who  compelled  the  senate  to  repress  by 
its  authority  the  violence  of  [these]  striplings :  it  was10)  I  who 
strictly  charged e  the  quaestors  not  to  supply  moneyf  for  the  pay¬ 
ments  [of  the  troops]  :  it  was10)  I  who,  ( p )  when  the  arsenal11  was 
broken  open,  withstood  [the  multitude],  and  prevented7  [any]  arms 
from  being  carried  out.  And  thus  you  know  that  it  was10)  by  my 
exertions ,  and  mine  atoned  that  an  unnecessary  war  was  not  brought 
about. 

a  concitare.  b  juventus.  c  manu  lacessere.  d  quietus.  e  interminar 
(Ter.  followed  by  ne).  f  sumptus.  ?  stipendium.  h  armamentarium. 

i  ‘  by  my  exertions  [of  me]  alone.’  Exertions,  opera,  cc,  sing.  (Comp.  Cic.  so  Hut 
trim  meum  peccatum;  in  unius  me  a,  salute.) 

Exercise  54. 

See  how  uncertain  and  variable''  the  condition*  of  life  is ;  hov 
unsettled11  and  inconstant  [a  thing]  fortune  ;  what®  unfaithfulness1' 
there  is  in  friends ;  what®  simulations'1  suited  to  times  and  circum¬ 
stances  ,e  what®  desertiond  [even]  of  our  nearest  [friends]  in  [our] 
dangers,  what®  cowardice. d  There  will,  there  will,  I  say,{  be  a4' 
time,  and  the  day  will  come?  sooner  or  later, h  when  you  will  miss* 
the  affection  of  a  most  friendly,  the  fidelity  of  a  most  worthy  i 
person,  and  the  high  spirit1®  of  the  bravest  man  that  ever  lived.' 

a  ratio.  How  to  make  uncertain  and  variable  emphatic,  see  p.  236,  16  (b). 
b  vagus.  c  Caut.  21.  d  Plural.  e  aptus  ad  tempus.  t  profecto 
(assuredly,  verily).  =  lucescere  (will  dawn,  i.  e.  begin  to  shine), 

h  aliquando.  *  desiderare.  In  this  construction  the  subj.  present  is  to  be 

used :  not  the  fut.  indicative.  1  gravissimus.  k  animi  magnitudo. 

On  the  position  of  the  two  genitives  see  Introd.  27.  *  'The  bravest  man 

that  ever  lived,’  umis  post  homines  natos  fortissimus  vir. 


exercises  55.  50,  57. 
Exercise  55. 


295 


Are  you  trying  to  find a  a  new  method  of  governing  the  state  ? 
Why,b  you  cannot  discover6  a  better  [one]  than  [that  which]  you 
have  received  from  your  forefathers.  Are  you  trying  to  find  out 
at  a  vast  outlay, 1  how  you  njay  not  pay9  taxes  ?  Why,b  you  can¬ 
not  by  taking  counsel  (pi-)  increase  the  resources*-  of  the  treasury, 
which  you  desire  [to  increase].  Are  you  trying  to  find  out  how 
you  may  spare  men  [who  are]  polluted  by  crime  ?26>  Why,b  you 
cannot,  by  pardoning  the  guilty, °  secure*1  the  safety  of  the  inno¬ 
cent. 

a  quaerere.  b  at.  4  V.  M.  2.  d  ‘  by  making  very  great 

outlays.’  sumptus.  e  conferre.  ( opes.  £  nocentes.  h  custodire 
(guard). 


Exercise  56. 

Even  the  bravest  men  have  not,  except  in  extreme  necessity, 
fiung  their  lives  away a  for  the  sake  of  avoiding  somea  disgrace  :  as 
[for  instance]  P.  Crassus  Mucianus,  [when]  conducting13  the  war 
against  Aristonicus  in  Asia,  being  taken  [prisoner]  between  Elsea 
and  Smyrna  by  [some]  Thracians,  of  whom  that  princec  had  a 
large  force  in  his  fortified  towns, d  that  he  might  not  fall  into  his 
hands,*  escaped  [this]  disgrace  by  a  voluntary  death  J  For  he  is 
reported  to  have  thrust"  his  riding-stick h  into  the  eye  of  one  of  the 
barbarians  :  who  [then],  enraged*  by  the  violence  of  the  pain, 
stabbed  Crassus  with  his  dagger  in  the  side,]  and  [thus],  whilstk 
he  avenged  himself,  delivered  a  Roman  general  from  the  dis¬ 
graceful  violation i  of  his  dignity."3 

a  ‘  sought  death  voluntarily,’  mortem  ullro  oppetere.  Some,  I.  392.  b  gerere 
( bellum  cum).  c  Only  a  pronoun.  d  ‘  had  a  great  number  in  garrison.’ 
e  in  ditionem  ejus  pervenire.  l  arcessita  ratio  mortis.  £  dirigere. 

b  a  riding  stick,  virga ,  qua  aliquis  ad  regendum  equum  utitur.  The  tense  of 
the  verb,  of  course,  to  be  altered  according  to  circumstances.  « accendi. 

J  ‘  stabbed  (< confodere )  Crassus’s  side  with  his  dagger.’  k  I.  509.  *  turpitudo. 

m  majestas:  which  Cic  attributes  to  consuls,  judges,  &c. 

Exercise  57. 

It  was  ever  my  persuasion ,a  that*3  all  friendships  should  be  maim 
tained0  with  a  religious  exactness, d  but  especially*  those  which* 


296 


EXERCISES  58,  59. 


are  renewed®  after27)  a  quarrel  :h  because*  in  friendships  [hith 
erto]  uninterrupted)  a  failurek  of  duty  is  easily  excused*  by  a 
pleam  of  inadvertency,  or,  to' >  put  a  worse  construction n  upon  it,  of 
negligence  :  [whereas]  if,  after  a  reconciliation,0  any  [new]  offence 
be  given,  r  it  does  not  pass  for  negligent ,  but  wilful  :q  and  is  not 
*  imputed21  to  inadvertency,  but  to  perfidy. 

a  II  ‘  I  have  always  thought.’  b  Connect  these  two  clauses  by  quum — turn 
Jboth — and).  c  tueri.  d  ‘  with  the  greatest  scrupulousness  ( religio )  and 

fidelity.’  e  ‘  In  quum— turn,  the  turn  is  often  strengthened  by  vero,  certe  etiam , 
praecipue,  maxime .’  f  I.  476.  ®  reconciliari  in  gratiam.  h  inimicitia;,  pi. 
i  propterea  quod.  1  integer.  k  praetermittere.  l  defendere. 

m  excusatio.  n  gravius  interpretari.  0  reditus  in  gratiam. 

P  ‘any  thing  is  committed.’  I.  389 — 91.  q  ‘  is  not  thought  neglected,  but 

violated.’ 


Exercise  58. 

Having  called  together  his  men  for  the  purpose  of  addressing 
them,*  ‘Know,’  he  says,  ‘that  in  a  very  few  days  from  this  time ,b 
the  king  will  be  here'  with  ten  legions,  thirty  thousand  horse,  a 
hundred  thousand  light-armedd  [troops],  ande  three  hundred 
elephants.  Therefore  let  certain  persons  cease  to  inquire  or 
*  imagine  [any  thing]  beyond  [this],  and  let  them  believe  me, 
who  have  certain  knowledge  ;f  or,  assuredly,®  I  will  order  them 
(p)  to  be  put  on  boardh  the  oldest  vessels  [in  the  service],  and  to 
be  carried  to  whatever  country  the  wind  may  happen  to  take 
them.’ 

a  ‘  to  an  assembly.’  ad  concionem  vocare ,  advocare,  or  convocare. — in  concionem 
advocare.  (M.  L.  4.)  b  The  pron.  hic.  in  agreement  with  ‘  days.’  In  I.  311, 
paucis  his  diebus  is  given  for  ‘  a  few  days  ago.’>  It  may  also  mean  ‘  within  a  few 
days  ;’  the  hie  marks  nearness  to  the  speaker  (i.  e.  to  the  time  of  his  speaking), 
on  either  side.  c  adesse.  d  levis  armatur  ce.  e  Diff.  88.  f  See 

above,  Ex.  3,  c.  compertum  habere.  Compare  perspectum  habere,  absolutum  habere. 
I.  364.  s  aut  quidem :  the  quidem  adding  emphasis  to  the  aut.  h  V.  M.  23 
i  1  by  any  wind  whatever  into  any  lands  whatever.’  quicunque. 

Exercise  59. 

On16)  his  approach  being  announced,  L.  Plancus,  who  ^com¬ 
manded  the  legions,  being  compelled  by  the  critical  state  of  affairs ,* 
takes  [a  position  on]  a  rising  ground,  and  draws  up  his  army  in 
two  divisions'6  facing  different  ways,'  that  he  may  not  (414)  be 


EXERCISE  60. 


297 


surrounded  by  the  cavalry.  Thus,  though  his  forces  were  infe¬ 
rior ,d  he  kept  his  ground'  against  furious  charges  [both]  of  the 
legions  and  of  the  cavalry.  When  (p)  the  cavalry  were  already 
engaged,  both  parties  f  behold  at  a  distancef  the  standards  of  two 
legions,  which  V.  Attius  had  sent  from  the  upper  bridge  to  the 
support"  of  our  troops,  anticipating  what  really  occurred, h  that*  the 
generals  of  the  opposite  party  would  use  the  opportunity  unex¬ 
pectedly  offered  them,  to  fall  upon  our  men.  By  the  approach 
of  these  (r)  legions  the  battle  was  broken  off,]  and  each  general 
marched  back  his  legions  to  his  camp. 

a  necessaria  res.  b  pars.  c  diversus ,  in  agreement  with  acies. 

d  ‘  having  engaged  ( congredi )  with  an  unequal  number.’  e  sustinere  (to 

support :  to  bear  without  yielding).  Use  the  historical  present.  f  V.  M.  24. 
s  subsidium.  Use  the  construction  I.  242.  h  ‘  suspecting  [that]  that  would 
be,  which  happened,’  accidere  or  contingere.  Why  1  M.  L.  1.  i  5  Ut  is 

sometimes  used  (with  subj.)  as  explanatory  of  a  demonstrative  pronoun, - 

where  quod  might  rather  have  been  expected,  or  the  acc.  and  inf.  J  Pres, 
nistor. — dirimere. 

Exercise  60. 

Whilst  he  was  preparing  and  carrying  outa  these  [plans],  he 
sends  his  lieutenant,  C.  Fabius,  before  him  into  Spain,  with  three 
legions,  which  he  had  put  into  winter-quarters  at  Narbo  and  its 
neighbourhood  ;b  and  directs  that  the  passes'  of  the  Pyrenees 
should  be  quickly  seized,  which  L.  Valerius  fwas  then  occu¬ 
pying  with  his  troops  the  other  legions,  which  were  in  more 
remote  winter -quarters, e  he  orders  to  follow.  Fabius,  according 
to  his  instructions ,{  having  made  great  despatch,  clears  the  pass,z 
and  proceeded  by  forced  marches  against  Valerius’s  army. 

ft  administrare.  b  circum  ea  loca.  c  saltus.  So  saltus  Ther¬ 
mopylarum.  (Liv.)  d  praesidia.  e  ‘  which  were-in- winter-quarters 

(/uema  re)  further- off.’  f  ‘as  had  been  commanded.’  %  praesidium  ex 

saltu  dejicere :  dejicere  in  this  sense  is  a  technical  term  of  military  science. 


ON  THE  TENSES  IN  A  LETTER. 

1.  It  is  a  peculiarity  in  Roman  letter- writing,  that  the  writer 
puts  himself  (as  it  were)  in  the  time  when  the  letter  will  be  re¬ 
ceived,  and  thus  speaks  of  what  he  is  doing,  as  what  he  was  doing  : 

13* 


298 


EXERCISE  61. 


and  so  uses  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  instead  of  the  present  and 

2.  Thus:  ‘I  have  nothing  to  write,’  nihil  ha  l  eh  am  quod 
scriberem  :  ‘I  have  heard  no  news,’  nihil  novi  audier  am. 
And  this  extends  to  the  adverbs  :  instead  of  ‘  yesterday ,’  we  find 
‘  the  day  before .’ 

3.  To  see  that  these  are  the  tenses  the  receiver  would  use,  sup¬ 
pose  him  relating  the  substance  of  such  a  letter :  tum  quum  Cicero 
hanc  epistolam  scripsit,  nihil  habebat  quod  scriberet,  neque 
enim  novi  quidquam  audierat,  et  ad  omnes  meas  epistolas  r  e- 
scripserat  pridie,  Spe, 

4.  But  general  truths  and  statements  that  are  not  made  rela¬ 
tively  to  the  time  of  writing  stand  in  the  usual  tenses  (e.  g.  ego  te 
maximi  et  feci  semper  et  facio) :  nor  does  the  use  of  the 
imperf.  and  pluperf.  always  occur  where  it  might  stand. 


Exercise  61. 

Although  I  have  nothing  to  write, a  and  moreover  *[  am  possessed 
by  a27  strange  unwillingness1  to  write6)  [at  all],  yet  I  am  unwil¬ 
ling  that  this  good-for-nothing0  [lad  of]  mine  should  go  to  your 
neighbourhood01  without  [any]  letters  of  mineto  you.  I  love  you 
more  every  day,c  because  I  am  *  persuaded  that  you'  •|Tovef  your 
studies*  in  the  same  way.  But  I  would  wish  you  to  write  to  me 
an  accurate  statement h  with  what  *  author  you  are  now  engaged, 
whether  Cicero  or  Terence,  or  as*  1  would  rather  [have  it],  with 
both  ?  You  ought  also  to  take  painsj  to  employ,  in  what  you 
writek  to  me,  the  phrases1  which  you  have  observed  in  their 
works  :  that  this™  itself  may  be  a  proof"  to  me  of  the  *  accuracy 
ivith  which  you  read  them.0  Farewell.  Tibur,  Aug.  28. 

a  Use  the  favorite  form  nihil  cst  quod  (477).  b  odium.  0  verbero  ( onis ). 
d  What  adv.  expresses  ‘  to  where  you  are/  ‘  to  your  neighbourhood?’  I.  387. 
e  Distinguish  between  quotidie ,  indies.  Which  is  used  in  both  senses?  I.  69,  t 
f  To  be  expressed  by  the  passive  voice,  to  avoid  the  ambiguity  which  the  two 
accusatives  would  occasion,  ‘amuse  yourself/  oblectare.  See  Dbd.  oblectatio. 

?  litterarum  studia.  h  ‘  ^accurately.’  i  ‘  which.’  i  dare  ojperam 

(followed  by  ut).  k  shall  write — shall  have  observed  ( notare ) :  the  conduct 
being  recommended  as  what  should  be  followed  in  future.  i  loquendi 

genera.  m  Express  res.  n  Jidem  facere  cujus  rei.  0  1  of  your  ♦accu¬ 
racy  in  reading  them.* 


EXERCISES  62,  63. 
Exercise  62. 


299 


If  I  had  as  often1  encountered1*  toils  and  dangers  against'  you 
and  my  country,  and  our  household-gods,  as  I  have  from  the  be¬ 
ginning*  of  my  manhood  j-  scattered  by  my  arms  your  most  wicked 
enemies,  and  •|'wond  safety  for  you,  you  could  not  have  decided9 
any  thing  more  against  me  in  my  absence,  O  Conscript  Fathers, 
than  you  have  hitherto  been  doing.  You  firstf  hurried  me  off, 
though  not  yet  of  the  legal  agef  to  a  most  cruel  war,  and  then* 
destroyed  me,  with  my  most  deserving  army,  by  hunger,  the  most 
wretched  of  all  deaths.37  Was  this  the  hope  with  which  the  Ro¬ 
man  people  sent  out  her  children  to  war  ?  are  these  the  rewards 
for  our  wrounds,  and  for13  our  so  often  shedding  our  blood  for  our 
country  ?  Being  tired  of  writing  and  sending  messengers,  I  have 
exhausted  all  my  private  resources  and  expectations,  whilst11  you 
all  the  time  have  in  three  years  sent  the  pay  of  scarcely  one  year.» 

ft  ‘  so  many  ’  [toils,  &c.].  A  sentence  is  occasionally  arranged  in  this  not 
strictly  accurate  way,  where  tot  refers  to  quoties.  (Thus  Cic.  pro  Balbo,  20 ;  si 
tot  consulibus  meruisset,  quoties  ipse  consul  fuisset.)  ‘  under  my  command,’ 
ductu  meo.  b  suscipere.  c  I.  179.  queerere  (which  is  often  used 

of  a  successful  search  :  nearly  c=  invenire).  e  To  ( do,’  when  used  in  this 

way  as  the  representative  of  a  preceding  verb  (here  to  be  doing  —  to  be  deciding), 
is  mos\\y  facere,  but  sometimes  agere :  e.  g.  Sail.  Cat.  52, 19.  f  First— then 
may  often  be  translated  by  turning  the  verb  with  (frst  ’  into  a  past  participle 
thus  ‘me,  being  hastened  away — you  destroyed,’  &c.  ‘To  hurry  a  man  off 
projicere  (if  he  be  sent  away  recklessly,  to  be  never  cared  for  afterwards). 
e  1  against  [my]  age,’  contra  aetatem.  t»  quum — interim,  words  often  used 

Indignantly  of  conduct  that  is  a  strong  contrast  to  what  it  should  have  been. 
i  ‘  scarcely  one-year’s  pay  has  been  given  by  you.’  One-year’s,  annuus.  Pay, 
stipendium;  but  sumptus  when  considered  as  given  to  the  commander-in-chief 
to  defray  with  it  all  the  expenses  of  the  war. 


Exercise  63. 

( The  same  subject  continued.) 

By  the  immortal  gods,  is  it1"  that  you  think  I  serve-"1  for  a  trea¬ 
sury  ?  or  that  I  can  have  an  army  without  provisions  and  pay  ? 
I  confess  that  I  set  out  for  this  war  with  more  zeal  than  prudence  ; 
seeing  thatb  (p)  though  I  had  received  from  you  only  the  name 
of  general,*  I  raised  an  army  in  forty  days,  and  drove  backd  the 
enemy,  ( p )  who  were  already  hanging  over  Italy,9  from  the  Alps 


300 


EXERCISE  64. 


into  Spain.  Overf  these  [mountains]  I  opened*  a  different*  road 
from  [that  which]  Hannibal  [opened],  and  [one]  more  convenient 
for  us.  I  recovered  Gaul,  the  Pyrenees,  Laletania,  the  Indigetes ; 
and  with  newly-raised*  troops,  and  much  inferior  [in  number], 
stoodj  the  first  attack  of  the  victorious0  Sertorius  :  and  [then]  spent 
the  winter  in  camp,  amongst  the  most  savage  enemies  ;  not  in  the 
towns,  or  with  any  such  indulgence  to  my  troops  as  a  regard  to  my 
own  popularity  with  them  would  have  suggested. k 

B  praestare  vicem  ( alicujus  rei ).  b  quippe  qui :  here  with  indic.  I.  482. 

c  ‘  of  a  command,’  imperium.  d  summovere.  e  in  cervicibus  jam 

Italice  agere.  Nearly  so:  nunc  in  cervicibus  sumus,  ‘  are  immediately 
upon  them bellum  ingens  in  cervicibus  erat,  ‘impended:’  both  Liv. 
f  per.  s  V.  M.  7.  h  ‘  different  from,’  alius  atque.  i  novus. 

j  sustinere.  k  ex  ambitione  mea.  The  kind  of  ambitio  meant,  is  the  courting 
popularity  with  an  army  by  allowing  it  such  indulgences  as  comfortable  winter 
quarters,  &c. 


Exercise  64. 

( The  same  subject  continued .) 

Why  should  I  go  on  to  enumerate81  the  battles  [I  have  fought], 
my  winter  expeditions,  or  the  towns  ( p )  that  I  have  retaken  or 
destroyed  ?  since  facts  are  stronger1*  than  words.  The  takinge  of 
the  enemy’s  camp  at  the  Sucro, c  the  battle  at  the  Durius, d  the  (p) 
utter  destruction6  of  C.  Herennius,  the  general  of  our  enemies, 
with  Valentia,  and  his  whole  army,  are  apparent  enough  to  you : 
and  for  these  (r)  [benefits]  you  give  us  in  return,*  ye  grateful 
Fathers,  want  and  famine.  And  thus  the  condition  of  my  army 
and  that  of  my  enemies  is  the  same :  for  pay  is  given  to  neither h 
[of  them] :  and  each,  [if]  ||  victorious,  may  come  into  Italy. 
[Wherefore]  I  advise  and  beseech  you  to*  attend  to  this  (r),  and 
not  compel  me,  by  my  necessities,  to  consult  my  own  interests 
apart  from  those  of  the  state.) 

*  ‘Why  should  I  after  this  (dein,  for  deinde )  enumerate?’  b  ‘the  thing 

(sing.)  has  more  weight.’  plus  valere.  c  The  Xucar.  d  The  Douro. 

•  Use  participles.  I.  359.  (  clarus.  s  reddere.  h  ‘is  given  to 

neither.’  *  I.  75.  1  privatim. 


301 


EXERCISES  65,  66. 

Exercise  65. 

( The  same  subject  continued.) 

Either  I  (pi.)  or  Sertorius  have  laid  waste  the  whole  of  hither 
Spain,  and  cut  off  all  its  inhabitants  ;a  except  the  maritime  cities, 
which  [are  however  only]  an  additional15  burden  and  expense  to 
us.  Last  year  [indeed]  Gaul  maintained*  the  army  of  Metellus 
with  money  and  corn,  but  now,  in  consequence  of  a  bad  harvest ,d 
that  [country]  hardly  supports  itself '.e  [For  myself]  I  have  ex¬ 
hausted f  not  only  my  private  fortune,  but  also  my  credit.  You 
[alone]  remain :  and,  unless  you  (r)  succour  us,  the  army,  and 
with  it  the  whole  Spanish  war,  will  remove?  itself  from  this 
country h  into  Italy,  ^  against  my  will,  indeed,  but  according  to  my 
predictions  A 

a  ‘  have  wasted  hither  Spain  to  extermination,5  ad  internecionem  vastare. 
b  Express  by  the  adv.  ultro  (properly  meaning,  ‘further  on5).  See  I.  237. 
c  alere.  d  malis  fructibus.  e  ‘  itself  hardly  gets  on.5  agitare, 

t  consumere.  ?  transgredi.  h  ‘  hence.5  i  ‘  I  being  unwilling 

and  [yet]  foretelling.5 


Exercise  66. 

Herennius,  since  his  reara  was  pressed  by  the  cavalry,  and  he 
saw  the  enemy  before  him,  ( p )  when  he  had  reached15  a  certain 
hill,  halted  there.  From  this  he  despatched*  four  cohorts  of  tar 
geteersd  to  the  highest  of  all  the  hills  in  sight  ;e  and  orders  them  tc 
make  all  possible  haste  to  take  possession  of  this ,f  with  the  intention 
of  following *  them  with  all  his  troops,  and,  changing  his  route, 
reach  Octogesa  by  the  hills.  As  the  targeteers  were  making  for 
this  hill  in  an  oblique  line,  the  cavalry  of  Marius  (p)  saw  [themj 
*md  charged  the  cohorts ;  wiiOh  did  not  stand  for  a  single  moment 
against  the  impetuosity  of  the  cavalry,  but  (p)  were  surrounded 
by  them,  and  all  cut  to  pieces  in  the  sight  of  both  armies. 

a  novissimum  agmen.  b  nancisci.  c  mittere.  Use  the  histori¬ 
cal  present.  d  cetrati.  e  ‘  to  a  hill  which  was  the  highest  of  all 

in  sight.5  Dbd.  videre  (4).  f  magno  cursu  concitatos  occupare. 

c  ‘with  that  intention,  that  he -  would  follow.5  h  ‘nor did  the 

targeteers  stand,5  &c. 


302 


EXERCISES  67,  68 
Exercise  67. 


I  have  received  your  three345  letters :  but  in  the  last  there  were 
some  [parts]  so  carelessly  written,  that  it  was  plain4  you  were 
thinking  of  something  else  when  you  wrote  it.  I  will  show  you 
these  [faults],  when  I  come  to  your  part  of  the  world  ;b  and  shall 
pull  your  ear,c  that  you  may  be  for  the  future  more  attentive 
when  you  write, A  and  avoid  at  least  such  blunders,®  as  even  little 
boysf  would  avoid,  who  are  learning  their  accidence.®  Do  not, 
however,  be  distressed  by  this  admonition  of  mine :  for  I  do  not 
wish  to  f  take  away  anyh  [thing]  by  it  from  your  cheerfulness, 
but  |  to  add  [somewhat]  to  your  attention.  Adieu.  Tibur,  23 
Sept. 

a  1  it  is  plain,5  facile  constat  :  ‘  to  be  thinking  of  something  else,5  aliud  agere . 
b  ‘  to  where  you  are  :5  to  be  expressed  by  an  adv.  derived  from  iste ,  the  demon¬ 
strative  of  the  second  person.  I.  387.  c  auriculam  pervellere. 

d  ‘in  writing.5  e  error  ox  soloecismus  (a  solecism).  f  puerulus, 

a  ‘  to  be  learning  one’s  accidence,5  primis  literis  imbui.  b  I.  389 — 391. 

Exercise  68. 

Your  letter  gave  me  much  pleasure,*  as  every  thing  [does]  that 
proceeds15  from  you,  although  you  had  committed  many0  [faults] 
in  it.  But  as  lisping  children1*  are  listened  to  with  delight6  by 
fathers,  and  even  their  very  mistakes  are  a  pleasure  to  them,  so 
this  your  infancy  of  letter -writing{  is  delightful  to  me.  I  send  you 
it®  back  corrected  by  my  own  hand.  For  so,  you  know,  we 
agreed. h  Do  you,  dear,  dear *  Alexander,  pursue  with  spirit!  the 
path,  to  which  your  natural  disposition  leads  you,  and  which  1 
have  always  exhorted  and  urged  you  to  follow.*  I  have,  by  my 
report*  [of  you],  raised  great  expectations  in  the  minds  of  your 
parents  :m  and  you  must  now  take  all  possible  pains"  that  neither 
I  nor  they  fmay  be  disappointed0  in  them  (r).  Adieu.  Tibur, 
July  7,  1570. 

a  ‘  [was]  II  sweet  to  me.5  b  proficisci  ( ab  aliquo).  c  By  multa  peccare, 

d  filioli.  e  libenter.  f  in  literis.  s  ‘it  itself.5  h  ‘  We  agree  [to 
do  any  thing],5  convenit  inter  nos.  i  dulcissime  ac  suavissime.  )  magno 

animo.  k  ‘and  I  have  always  been  your exhorter and  impeller.5  1  testi¬ 
monium.  ,n  magnam  spem  ( alicujus )  apud  ( aliquem )  concitare.  n  omni 

urd  ac  studio  providere.  0  spes  fallit  aliquem. 


CAUTIONS. 


1.  (a)  Take  care  not  to  translate  the  English  inf.,  when  it  expresses  a  purpose, 
by  the  Latin  infinitive. — To  make  out  whether  the  infin.  expresses  a 
purpose,  try  whether  you  can  substitute  for  it  ‘  in  order  that ,’  or  ‘  that.' 

(6)  The  infin.  after  'have,'  ‘is,’  is  to  be  translated  by  the  part,  in  dus.  with 
the  proper  tense  of  esse. 

(En°- )  $  *  ^wx>e  something  to  do. 

°  (  There  is  something  for  me  to  do. 

(Lat.)  Something  is  to  be  done  by  me. 

(c)  ‘  There  is  something  for  me  to  do ,'  may  also  mean,  ‘  there  is  somethings 
which  I  may  do'  est  aliquid,  quod  a  g  am. 

1  2.  In  translating  ‘ ago'  by  abhinc,  remember,  (1)  that  it  must  precede  the 
numeral ;  (2)  that  the  numeral  must  be  a  cardinal ,  not  an  ordinal,  nu¬ 
meral  ;  and  (3)  that  the  accusative  is  more  common  than  the  abl. 

(а)  Hence  abhinc  annos  quatuordecim  is  right ;  tertio  abhinc  anno,  quarto 
decimo  abhinc  die,  doubly  wrong ;  tribus  abhinc  annis,  or  tres  abhinc 
annos ,  wrong. 

«  3.  Take  care  not  to  translate  from'  by  ‘a’  or  ‘ ab'  in  the  following  con¬ 
structions  : — 

(1)  To  derive  or  receive  pleasure,  pain,  profit,  &c.,from,  capere  voluptatem , 
dolorem,  fructum,  desiderium  ex  (not  ab)  aliqua,  re. 

(2)  To  hear  from  any  body,  audire  ex  aliquo. 

(3)  ‘  From  [being]  such — becomes  so  and  so.’ — ex. 

(4)  From  such  a  district,  town,  Ac.  (it  being  a  man’s  birth-place  or  resi¬ 
dence) — ex. 

(5)  To  recover  from  a  disease,  convalescere  ex  morbo. 

(б)  To  return/rowi  a  journey,  redire,  reverti  ex  itinere. 

(7)  From,  =  ‘  on  account  of,’  propter.  1  From  their  hatred  against  an> 
body.’ 

(8)  To  fling  or  throw  oneself  from  awrall,  se  de  muro  dejicere  {Cues.) :  see* 
muro  praecipitare  ( Cic .). 

(9)  From ,  =  out  of  ex. 

«  4.  When  a  substantive  is  followed  by  a  relative  clause  which  defines  it,  be 
careful  not  to  omit  the  demonstrative  is,  ea,  id,  or  ille  (rf there  is  empha¬ 
sis),  with  the  substantive,  if  a  particular  thing  is  meant.  To  determine 
this,  try  whether  you  cannot  substitute  ‘ that '  for  ‘a’  or  'the.' 

(a)  Thus  :  ‘  the  oration  which  he  delivered,’  Ac.  (  =  that  particular  oration 
which  he  delivered),  e  a  oratio,  quam  habuit,  Ac. 

(6)  So,  when  a  substantive  is  defined  by  a  relative  adverb,  the 'a  or  'the' 
is  to  be  translated  by  a  pron.  Thus  : 


304 


CAUTIONS. 


(Eng.)  There  will  be  a  day,  when ,  &c. 

( Lat .)  There  will  be  that  day,  when ,  &c.  ( quum ). 

(Eng.)  The  day  will  come,  when ,  &c. 

(Lat.)  That  day  will  come,  when,  Sic.  (quum).  [Comp.  Caution  1». 

*  5  Be  very  careful  not  to  translate  the  English  infinitive  after  a  substantive  oi 

adjective,  by  the  Lat.  infinitive,  unless  you  have  authority  for  it.  Al¬ 
ways  consider  what  the  relation  is,  in  which  the  infinitive  stands.  Can 
it  be  translated  by  a  gerund  in  di?  by  ad  with  the  gerundive  (a  partici¬ 
ple  in  dus)  1  by  a  relative  clause ,  &c.  'I 

Thus :  A  desire  to  pray,  =r  a  desire  ofi  praying. 

A  knife  to  cut  my  bread  with,  —  (1)  a  knife  for  cutting  my 
bread  ;  (2)  a  knife,  with  which  I  may  cut  my  bread. 

»  Obs.  The  for  cutting  my  bread ’  will  not  in  Latin  depend  on  knife , 
but  on  the  verb :  e.  g.  1  borrowed  a  knife  for  cutting  my  bread  with,  = 
for  the  purpos  e  of  cutting  my  bread,  I  borrowed  a  knife.' 

*  6.  Take  care  not  to  translate  ‘  assert  ’  =  ‘  affirm,'  by  asserere,  but  by  affirmare, 

confirmare,  dicere,  docere,  pronuntiare,  &c. ;  or,  if  followed  by  a  not  oi 
other  negative,  negare. 

>  ?.  Take  care  not  to  translate  c  honour '  by  honor  or  honos,  when  it  means  not 
‘  an  honour '  (i.  e.  external  mark  of  respect),  but  ‘  the  inward  principle 
of  honour '  (honestas);  or  ‘ integrity ,'  '  trustworthiness'  (fides). 

»  8.  From  nemo,  let  me  never  see  i  but  nullius  and  nullo :  or  (after  nega- 
N eminis  or  nemine  ;  (  tives)  cuj usquam,  quoquam. 

9.  When  a  clause  that  follows  another  in  English,  is  to  precede  it  in  Latin,  it  is 

often  necessary  to  place  in  it  a  word  from  the  preceding  sentence. 
Thus  :  ‘  Alexander  was  blamed  |  because  he  indulged  in  drinking.’ 

‘  Because  Alexander  indulged  in  drinking,  he  was  blamed.’ 
(a)  This  is  especially  the  case,  when  a.  pronoun  in  the  second  clause  refers 
to  a  substantive  in  the  first. 

10.  From  our  having  hardly  any  power  of  altering  the  order  of  words  in  a  sen¬ 

tence,  it  is  very  difficult  to  give  emphasis  to  an  oblique  case  without 
placing  it  in  a  separate  sentence  with  the  verb  to  be.  Thus:  ‘  I  desire 
something ’  very  much,  (the  1  something '  being  emphatic)  would 
become  :  ‘  there  is  something,  that  I  desire  very  much.’  Hence 
i  §[jr  In  a  sentence  beginning  with  ‘ it  is ’  or  'it  icas'  before  tthat,'  the 
‘ it  is'  or  ‘ it  was '  is  omitted,  and  the  sentence  with  'that '  made  a  prin¬ 
cipal  sentence. 

(Eng.)  It  is  the  manufacturers,  that  I  complain  of. 

(Lat.)  1  complain  of  the  manufacturers.* 

«  (a)  So  in  a  sentence  beginning  with  ‘  it  is  but'  or  'it  was  but,'  and  followed 
by  ‘  that,’  &c. 

(Eng.)  It  was  but  very  slowly  that  he  recovered. 

(Lat.)  He  did  not  recover  but  (  =  except,  nisi)  very  slowly. 

11-  *  The  boy  has  but  a  stupid  head, 

Who  always  for  a  ‘  but '  puts  sed 


*  Instead  of  'that,'  which  is  here  a  relative,  who  or  which  may  occur.  *  ft  it 
tne  farmers  of  whom  I  complain.’ 


CAUTIONS. 


305 


Or  at :  for  other  meanings  ‘  but  ’  has  got : 

‘  Only?  '  except?  ' at  least?  or  'who '  with  'not.' 

(1)  ‘  Stay  but  one  day  *  =  stay  only  one  day  ( solum  or  modo). 

(2)  ‘Do  but  stay  ’  =  at  least  (or  at  all  events)  stay  (saltem). 

(3)  ‘  Nobody  but  Caesar’  =  nobody  except  Caesar  (nisi  or  praeter). 

(4)  ‘There  is  nobody  but  thinks ’  =  there  is  nobody  who  does  not  thini 
(quin  or  qui  non). 

(5)  ‘  Not  to  doubt  but  or  but  that  '  .  .  .  —  non  dubitare  quin,  &c. 

*  12-  ‘  No  '  before  another  adjective,  as  in  ‘  a  man  of  no  great  learning?  must  be 

translated  by  non,  not  nullus. 

13.  ‘  The?  when  it  relates  to  something  that  preceded,  is  often  to  be  translated 
by  a  demonstrative  pronoun.  For  instance,  if  it  had  been  mentioned 
that  a  day  had  been  fixed,  if  it  were  afterwards  stated  that  ‘  the  day 5  ar¬ 
rived,  it  must  be  ‘ that  day '  in  Latin. 

Hence,  when  ‘  the  '  means  a  particular  thing  before-mentioned, 
it  must  be  translated  by  a  demonstrative  pronoun.  Or,  in  other  words, 
when  for  'the'  we  might  substitute  'that?  it  must  be  translated  by  the 
demonstrative  pronoun.  [Compare  Caution  4.]* 

'  14.  •  That?  in  a  clause  following  a  comparative  with  quam,  or  alius,  malle,  &c., 
is  not  translated. 

(Eng.)  I  had  rather  support  my  country’s  cause  than  that  of  a  private 
man. 

'  (Lat.)  Patrice  causam  malo,  quam  privati  sustinere. 

•  15.  Take  care  not  to  translate  ‘  of  ’  by  a  gen.,  in  the  following  constructions : — 

(a)  To  deserve  well  of  any  body,  bene  mereri  de  aliquo. 

(b)  To  complain  of  any  thing,  queri  de  aliqua  re. 

(c)  To  be  made  of  any  thing,  factum  esse  ex  aliqua  re. 

(d)  A  book  of  mine,  liber  meus. 

(e)  How  many  of  us,  three  hundred  of  us,  &c.  See  Pr.  Intr.  Pt.  I.  174, 
175. 


16. 


‘ upon ' 


by  super,  in  the  following  con 


Take  care  not  to  translate  'on'  or 
structions  : — 

(1)  To  lavish,  &c.  —  upon  any  body,  conferre  —  in  aliquem. 

(2)  To  do  any  thing  on  his  march,  in  itinere. 

(3)  To  sit  on  a  throne,  in  solio  sedere. 


(4)  On  this  being  known, 
Upon -  , 


this  being  known,’  abl.  abs. 


(5)  To  write  on  a  subject,  scribere  de  (sometimes  super)  aliqua  re. 

(6)  On  descrying  the  troops,  ‘  the  troops  being  descried,’  abl.  abs. 


♦  17.  Take  care  not  to  translate  ‘ for '  by  pro,  in  the  following  constructions : — 
(1)  For  many  reasons,  multis  de  causis. 

For  which  reason,  qua  de  causa.  Cic. 

For  a  weighty  reason,  gravi  de  causa.  Cic. 

The  reasons  for  which,  .  .  .  causae,  propter  quas,  &c. 


♦  I  have  inadvertently  referred  sometimes  to  this  Caution  instead  of  to  Cau¬ 
tion  4. 


806 


CAUTIONS. 


For  that  reason,  ob  eam  causam.  Cic. 

For  this  reason,  propter  hoc. 

(2)  Good  or  useful  for  any  purpose,  utilis  ad  aliquid. 

Fit/or,  aptus  or  idoneus  ad  aliquid  :  also  dative. 

*  (3)  For ,  =  a  cause ,  abl. 

*  (4)  For  =  concerning ,  e.  g.  to  battle  for  any  thing,  de  aliqua  re. 

(5)  My  reaso  nfor  not  doing  this,  causa  non  fa  ciendce  hujus  rei. 

18.  Amongst ,  before  the  name  of  a  nation,  amongst  whom  a  habit  prevailed,  is 

usually  apud  (not  inter ) :  sometimes  ‘  in  ’  with  abl. 

19.  When  two  substantives  are  governed  by  the  same  preposition,  the  preposition 

is  repeated,  unless  the  two  substantives  are  to  form,  as  it  were,  one  com¬ 
plex  notion.  Hence  they  are  repeated  whenever  the  two  substantives 
are  opposed  to  each  other.  Hence  in 

(а)  et — et ;  nec—nec;  .  .  .  always  repeat  the  preposition. 

(б)  out — aut;  vel — vel  ) 

after  nisi,  >  generally :  it  is  better,  therefore, 

after  quam  following  a  comparative,  '  to  repeat  it.* * 

Thus  :  et  in  bello  et  in  pace :  nec  in  bello  nec  in  pace :  in  nulla  alia  re 
nisi  in  virtute :  in  nulla  alia  re  quam  in  virtute. 

20.  Take  care  not  to  use  apparere  when  ‘  appears ’  —  ‘  seems  ’  (videtur) :  nor  to 

use  videri  (but  apparere )  when  appears  =  ‘  is  manifest ;’  or  ‘  makes  its 
appearance .’ 

21.  %  A  boy  who  is  thoughtful  is  never  perplext. 

By  ‘  then’s ’  meaning  ‘at  that  time ,’  and  £ therefore’  and  ‘ next .’ 

*  (a)  Then,  =■  ‘ at  that  time,’  turn  tunc;  =  ‘ next,’  deinde;  =  ‘ there¬ 

fore,’  igitur,  &c. 

22.  ‘  Men  ’  is  often  used  for  ‘  soldiers,’  milites.  1  His  men  ’  should  be  ‘  sui ,’  if 

there  is  any  reference  to  their  commander :  if  not,  milites,  1  the  soldiers’ 

23.  ‘ Before’  a  town  should  bead,  not  ante.  See  I.  457. 

24.  Choose  often  means,  to  ‘  wish,’  to  ‘  be  pleased ,’  &c.,  velle,  not  eligere,  &c. : 

e.  g.  ‘if  you  had  chosen  to  do  this’  (si  voluisses). 

25.  In  modern  English  there  is  often  used  for  thither,  and  must  be  translated  by 

the  adverbs  meaning  1  to  that  place’  (huc,  illuc ,  &c.) 

26.  ‘  Crime’  is  not  crimen  (which  is  1  a  charge,’  ‘  an  accusation’)  but  scelus,  faci¬ 

nus,  &c. 

27.  Take  care  not  to  translate  after  by  post,  in  the  following  constructions  : 

(1)  To  be  reconciled  after  a  quarrel,  reconciliarim  gratiam  ex  inimicitiis,  &c 

(2)  Immediately  after  the  battle,  confestim  a  pr  oelio. 

28.  Take  care  not  to  translate  in  by  ‘  in,’  in  the  following  construction  : 

(1)  It  is  written  in  Greek  authors,  scriptum  cst  apud  Crrcccos. 

29.  11  In  1 this  is  life,’  let  ‘this’  with  ‘life’  agree: 

Hoc  id,  or  illud,  barbarous  would  be. 

30.  ‘  Ought ’  is  a  word  that  requires  care  :  for  it  is  often  translated  by  an  lm- 


*  Sometimes  a  common  preposition  preceding  the  conjunction  is  not  repeated 

*vith  et — et ;  aut— aut;  e.  g.  cum  et  nocturno  et  diurno  metu. 


CAUTIONS.  307 

perfect  or  fut.  indicative,  where  our  idiom  would  lead  us  to  use  the 
present. 

(a)  When  a  present  duty ,  &c.,  exists,  but  is  not  acted  upon,  the  imperfect  is 
often  used,  especially  when  it  is  a  general  duty.  ( Madvig .  308.) 

*  HjT  Hence,  when  lyou  ought  '  —  ‘  you  ought  (but  do  not),’  use  debe¬ 
bam  or  oportebat. 

&  (b)  When  ought  refers  to  what  will  be  right  or  proper,  when  or  after  some¬ 
thing  has  taken  place,  use  oportebit ,  debebo. 

(1)  The  ‘  after  '  is  often  implied  by  an  abl.  absol.,  the  participle  being  of  the 
passive  voice. 

'  31.  Remember  the  care  with  which  the  Romans  mark  both  the  completion  of 
every  precedent  action,  and  the  futurity  of  every  future  action. 

*  (a)  Remember  that  the  fut.  perf.  of  direct  becomes  the  pluperf.  subj.  in 
oblique  narration. 

*  32.  When  one  verb  has  ‘  indeed '  and  the  next  ‘  but ,’  take  care  not  to  omit  the 

pronoun  in  Latin,  if  the  nom.  to  the  verb  is  a  pronoun. 

(a)  This  pronoun  should  be  followed  by  the  quidem :  if  it  is  ego ,  write  equi¬ 
dem  for  ego  quidem.* 

(Eng.)  He  did  not  indeed  laugh,  but  he  smiled. 

( Lat .)  Non  risit  ille  quidem ,  sed  subrisit. 

'  33.  When  for  'so  that'  (introducing  a  consequence)  you  could  put  lin  such  a 
manner ,  that'  take  care  not  to  use  ut  only,  but  ita — ut ,  placing  the  ita 
in  the  preceding  sentence. 

*  34.  Take  care  to  use  a  distributive  numeral  instead  of  a  cardinal  one,  with  a 

plural  noun  used  in  a  singular  sense,  as  Uteros,  castra ,  &c. 

%  But  observe,  uni  and  terni  are  used,  not  singuli  or  trini. 


*  For  equidem ,  though  probably  not  compounded  of  ego  quidem ,  is  yet  used 
where  quidem  with  the  personal  pronoun  would  be  used  for  the  second  or  third 
person. 


TABLE 


OF 


DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM: 


English. 

1  All— who  or  which,  «fee.  ) 

All  men — who.  £ 

2.  This  was  not  done  till  afterwards. 

Nothing  is  beautiful,  but  what. 
Those  things  only  are  beautiful, 
which. 

3.  What  do  you  mean  by  a  wooden 

wall  ? 

4.  I  am  reproached  with  ignorance. 

Participial  Substantive. 

*  5.  [Nom.]  Grieving. 

Your  sparing  the  conquered  is  a 
great  thing. 

6.  [Acc.]  Grieving. 

"•  7.  From,  with  part,  subst. : — 

(1)  To  prevent  any  thing  from  being 
done. 

(2)  Either/?-om  thinking,  that,  «fee. 

(3)  He  did  it  from  remembering. 

(4)  Far  from  doing  this,  &c. 

(5)  Not  from  despising — but  be¬ 
cause,  «fee. 

•  8.  By  : — 

[The  most  usual  way  is  the  gerund 
in  do;  or  partic.  in  dus  (in 
agreement).] 


Latin. 

Often: — all  —  as-many-as  (omnes  — 
quotquot) :  which  is  stronger;  —  all 
icithout  exception. 

This  was  done  afterwards  at  length 
{postea  demum). 

Those  things  at  length  {ea  demum) 
which. 

Quem  tu  intelligis  murum  ligneum  7 

Ignorance  is  objected  {objicitur  or  ex 
probratur ,  which  is  stronger)  to  mi 

Dolere. 

It  is  a  great  thing,  that  you  have  spare, 
the  conquered. 

[Magnum  est,  quod  victis  pepercisti.'] 

Dolere. 

[ Se  peccati  insimulant ,  quod  del er> 
intermiserin  t .  ] 

Prohibere — aliquid  fieri *  {rare). 

■ - n  e  fiat. 

- quominus  fiat. 

Sive  eo  quod  —  existimar  ent,&  c 

Ex  eo  quod  meminisset,  «fee. 

Tantum  abest ,  ut  hoc  faciat , 
ut,  «fee. 

Non  quod  aspernaretur — sed  quod,  «fee. 


*  Principally  with  the  inf.  pass. :  ignes  fieri  in  castris  prohibet  (Caes.)  * 
prohibuit  migrari  Veios  (Liv.). 


309 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


English. 

By  doing  this. 

9.  In  : — 

To  be  wrong  in  thinking ,  &c. 

♦  .0.  Without: — 

(1)  He  did  any  thing  without  being 
asked. 

(2)  He  went  away  without  reading 
the  letter. 

(3)  Many  praise  poets  without  under¬ 
standing  them. 

(4)  He  never  praised  him  without 
adding ,  tic. 

Nor  ever  saw  him  without  calling 
im  a  fratricide. 

(6)  I  enjoy  any  thing  indeed ,  but  not 
without  perceiving ,  tic. 

(7)  I  enjoy  any  thing  without  per¬ 
ceiving ,  &c. 

11.  To: — Generally  ad ,  with  part,  in 

dus.  See  Obs.  on  For. 

12.  Through  : — By  part,  in  dus ,  abl. 

of  gerund ;  or  by  ex  eo  quod 
with  subj.  See  Df.  7,  From 
(2). 

♦  *12.  Of: — The  gerund  in  di,  or  the 

part,  in  dus,  in  the  gen.,  is  the 
most  usual  form  ;  but  these  forms 
do  not  always  serve. 

(1)  ‘  Let  nobody  repent  o  f  h  a  v  i  n  g 
preferred  following,’  &c. 

‘ I  do  not  despair  of  there 
e  i  n  g  some  one,’  &c. 

(3)  ‘I  think  he  should  repent  of 
having  given  up  his  opinion.’ 

(4)  ‘They accused  Socrates  of  cor¬ 
rupting,’  &c. 

.(5)  ‘ Instead  of.'  See  32. 

♦  13.  For  : — 

(1)  ‘  Pardon  me  f  o  r  writing.’ 

‘  To  revile,  abuse  a  man  for 
avingdone  any  thing.’ 

(3)  ‘  Many  reasons  occurred  to  me 
for  thinking,’  <ic. 

(4)  ‘  I  thank  you  for  compelling 
me  to  do  this.’ 

(5)  ‘You  are  greatly  to  blame  for 
having  done  this.’ 

\  14.  And  not. 

And  nobody,  nothing,  no  where, 
never,  no 


And  hardly  any.a 


% 

Latin. 

(Often)  ‘  this  being  done ,’  (abl.  abs.). 

In  hoc  errare,  quod  putem,  &c 

Non  rogatus. 

He  went  away,  the  letter  not  being  read 
{epistola  non  lecta). 

Many  praise  poets,  nor  understand 
them  {neque  int  elligunt). 

He  never  praised  him  so  that  he  did 
not  add  {u  t  non  adjiceret). 

Nor  ever  saw  him  but  she  called  him  a 
fratricide  {quin — c ompellaret). 

I  so  enjoy  any  thing,  that  I  perceive 
[aliqua  re  ita  potior,  ut  animadver¬ 
tam,  &c.] 

I  so  enjoy  any  thing,  that  1  Jo  not  per¬ 
ceive  [aliqua  re  ita  potior,  ut  non 
animadvertam,  &c.] 


Ne  quem  pceniteat  sequi  malui  a  s  e, 

d^c. 

Non  despero  fore  aliquem ,  rf-c. 

Ego  illi,  quod  de  sud sententia  deces¬ 
sisset,  poenitendum  censeo. 

Socratem  accusarunt ,  quod  corrum¬ 
peret,  <f-c. 

Ignosce  mihi ,  quod  scribam. 

Maledicere  homini,  cur  fecerit ,  (f*c. 

Multa  mihi  veniebant  in  mentem, 
quamobr  em - putarem,  rf*c. 

Gratias  ago,  quod  me  {hoc  facere) 
coegisti. 

Magna  tua  est  culpa ,  qui  hoc  feceris. 

Nor. 

Nor  any  thing,  nor  any  body,  nor  any 
where,  nor  ever,  nor  any  {nec  quid- 
quam,  quisquam,  usquam,  unquam , 
ullus  (or  auisquam). 

Nor  scarcely  any  {neque  ullus  fere). 


*  The  exceptions  are,  (1)  When  the  negative  is  to  be  emphatic,  et  semper  me 
coluit  et  a  studiis  nostris  non  abhorret:  (2)  When  et  non  or  ac  non  — not 
rather  or  much  more  —  ac  non  potius  (the  potius  being  often  expressed),  si  rea 
verba  postularet,  ac  non  pro  se  ipso  loqueretur. 


310 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


English. 

15.  Hardly  any. 

«  Hardly  any  body. 

16.  Your  ) 

His  >  accomplishments. 

Their  ) 

17.  After  with  the  participial  subst. 

is  mostly  translated  by  the  perf. 
participle. 


18.  It  is  kind  in  you  to  ask  me,  &c. 


19.  I  shall  accomplish  ichat,  &c. 


20.  If  they  happen  to  do,  &c. 

21.  It  is  ascribed,  &c.  (of  a  general 

truth). 

22.  And  then  Aristotle  !  (i.  e.  is  not  he 

a  case  in  point  ?  &c.  in  appeals 
introduced  in  an  argument.) 

23.  A.  is  right  in  saying. 

24.  From  which. 

25.  It  seems  likely  [enough]  that  he 

will  call,  &c. 

26.  For — not ,  &c. 


27.  A  strange  fury. 


28.  Must  (of  a  necessary  inference). 
See  to  what  a  condition  the  state 

must  come. 

He  must  have  made  great  progress. 
What  progress  he  must  have  made  ! 

29.  To  be  on  the  point  of  being  killed. 

*  To  be  on  the  point  to  run. 

30.  lta,  sic  are  often  used  where  they 

seem  superfluous,  e.  g. 

*  (1)  With  verbs  of  hearing ,  learning , 

affirming ,  doubting ,  cf-c. — They  are 
then  generally  followed  by  the  in- 
fin.  (if  the  verb  would  otherwise 
be  so  constructed),  or  with  ut  and 
the  subj. 


(2)  Also  in  adverbial  sentences  of 
equality :  He  thinks  as  he  speaks. 
To  do  any  thing  as  if,  &c. 

It  is  as  is  said. 

31.  In  the  case  of  the  Nervii. 

32.  Participial  substantive  with  ‘in¬ 

stead  of.’ 


Latin. 

Prope  nullus. 

Nemo  fere. 

Sometimes  :  ‘  the  accomplishments* 

which  are  in  you,  him ,  them,'  &c. 

(  (Eng.)  After  having  suffered  (or  suf¬ 
fering)  this,  I  went,  &c. 

(Lat.)  Having  suffered  this,  I  went, 

[  &c. 

(Eng.)  After  consuming  the  corn,  he 
went,  &c. 

h  (Lat.)  The  corn  being  consumed,  he 

(  went,  &c. 

You  act  kindly  indeed,  (in)  that  you 
ask  me. 

( facis  amice  tu  quidem,  quod  me  rogas, 
&c.) 

(Often)  I  shall  accomplish  that  ( hoc  or 
illud),  quod,  &c. :  i.  e.  the  dem.  pron. 
is  often  inserted. 

If  perchance  they  do,  &c.  (si forte). 

It  is  wont  (solet)  to  be  ascribed. 
(Often:  not  always.) 

What  Aristotle? 

Quid  Aristoteles  ? 

A.  rightly  says  (rede). 

Often  ‘  whence  unde. 

He  seems  about-to-call  (videtur  voca¬ 
turus). 

Neque  enim :  but  non  enim  is  not  un¬ 
common  even  in  Cic. ;  and  is  to  be 
preferred,  when  there  is  any  anti¬ 
thesis  :  i.  e.  when  followed  by  a  ‘  but.' 

A  certain  strange  fury  (quidam  after  the 
adj. — this  addition  of  quidam  to  an 
adj.  is  very  common). 

Cic.  often  translates  this  by  putare. 

Vide  quern  in  locum  rempublicam  ven¬ 
turam  putetis. 

Putandus  est  multum  profecisse. 

Quos  progressus  eum  putamus  fecisse  ! 

In  eo  esse  ut  interficeretur;  or  with 
part,  in  rus  with  jam. 

Jam  cursurum  esse. 

Examples. — 1.  Sic  a  majoribus  suis  ac¬ 
ceperant,  tanta  esse  beneficia,  &c. 
C. — 2.  Quum  sibi  ita  persuasisset 
ipse,  meas  —  literas,  &c.(withinfn.) 
C. — 3.  Se  ita  a  patribus  didicisse,  ut 
magis  virtute  quam  dolo  contend¬ 
erent.  Cces. — 4.  Ita  Helvetios - 

institutos  esse,  ut - consuerint,  &c. 

Cces. — 5.  Ita  enim  definit,  ut  pertur¬ 
batio  sit. 

Ita  sentit  ut  loquitur. 

Ita  facere  aliquid — tanquam. 

Est  ita  ut  dicitur. 

In  Nerviis. 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


311 


English. 

u  (1)  Instead  of  reading,  &c. 


*  (2)  Why  do  you  laugh  instead  of 
crying  ? ' 

*  33.  Participial  subst.  with  1  far  from .’ 
(1)  Far  from  doing  this,  he  does  that, 
&c. 

*  (2)  To  be  far  from  doing  any  thing. 
»  (3)  To  be  not  far  from  doing,  &c. 


34.  (1)  A,  B,  C,  and  such,  &c.  > 

- similar,  &c.  $ 

(2)  A,  B,  C,  and  the  rest.  ) 

- - others.  ) 

35.  Despairing. 


*  36.  Not  very  ancient. 

37.  The  most  wretched  of  all  s  t  a  t  e  s. 

*  38.  The  very  celebrated  Cicero. 


Latin. 

Quumpossit,  or  qimm  debeat  le¬ 
gere,  &c.,  according  as  the  thing  not 
done  was  a  duly  omitted,  or  merely 
a  thing  that  might  have  been  done. 

Cur  rides  ac  non  potius  lacrima¬ 
ris? 

(1)  Fantum  abest  ut — ut  (with  subj.) — 
or,  if  the  verb  has  a  ‘not’  with  it, 
tantum  abest  ut — ut  ne — quidem,  &c. 

(2)  Longe  abesse  ut,  &c.  (e.  g.  ille  lon¬ 
gissime  aberit,  ut  credat,  &c.) 

(3)  Paulum,  haud  or  non  multum ,  or 
haud  procul  abesse ,  ut,  &c. 

Obs.  The  abesse  is  to  be  used  im- 
personally. 

A,  B,  C,  such. 

- similar. 

A,  B,  C,  the  rest. 

A,  B,  C,  others. 

Since  he  despairs.  }  Consider  which 

Since  he  despaired.  >  form  should  be 

( Qiium  with  subj.)  )  used. 

Not  so  ancient,  non  ita  antiquus:  but 
non  valde,  non  admodum,  are  not  bar¬ 
barous,  as  some  teach. 

The  most  wretched  state  of  all. 
Cicero,  a  very  celebrated  man. 
Cicero,  vir  clarissimus. 


MEMORIAL  LINES. 


1.  Contingit  use  of  things  we  like, 
But  accidit  when  evils  strike. 


2.  From  nemo  let  me  never  see 
Neminis  or  nemine. 


Use  nullius ,  nulla. 


3.  For  crime  let  crimen  never  come, 

But  scelus,  facinus,  fagitium. 

4.  When  the  word  ‘  men '  means  { soldiers ,'  these 
Should  rendered  be  b y  milites. 

5.  The  boy  has  but  a  stupid  head, 

Who  always  for  a  ‘but'  puts  sed 

Or  at :  for  other  meanings  ‘  but  '  has  got ; 

1  Only,'  'except,'  1  at  least,'  and  ‘  who ’  with  ‘not. 

(See  Caution  it., 

6.  A  boy  who  is  thoughtful  is  never  perplext 

By  then's  meaning  ‘  at  that  time '  and  ‘  therefore '  and  ‘  next .* * 

(See  Caution  2L) 

7.  In  ‘  this  is  life '  let  1  this '  with  ‘  life '  agree ; 

Hoc,  id  or  illud  barbarous  would  be. 


8.  In  ‘so  many  apiece 5  leave  apiece  quite  alone  ; 
But  of  numerals  use  a  distributive  one. 


9.  After  these  impersonals  ut 
Or  ne  will  be  correctly  put : 

Contingit,  evenit,  or  accidit, 

With  restat,  reliquum  est  and  fit. °- 

10.  Let  ‘that'  translated  be  by  quo, 

When  with  comparatives  it  does  go. 

11.  Vereor  ne,  I  fear  he  will ; 

Vereor  ut,  I  fear  he  won't : 

Turn  fut.  by  subjunctive  present 
After  fear:  forget  it  don’t. 

12.  By  ut  translate  infinitive 

With  ask,  command,  advise,  and  strive .b 
But  never  be  this  rule  forgot : 

Put  ne  for  ut  when  there’s  a  not. 


a  So  after  sequitur  sometimes. 

*  »  b  Under  ask  are  included  beg,  pray,  beseech ,  &c. ;  under  command,  charge 
direct,  &c. ;  under  advise,  exhort,  admonish,  persuade ,  impel ,  induce,  &c. 


f 


VERSUS  MEMORIALES, 


1.  Sumimus  usuri,  capimusque  ut  possideamus ;  a 
Prendunturque  manu  volumus  quoscunque  tenere. 

2.  Q,ui  quaerit  reperit,  non  quaesita  inveni  uNTUR.b 

3.  Navis,  equus,  currusque  vehunt;  portabit  asellus 
Pondera,  PORTABUNTque  humeri :  leviora  feruntur. 
Loeva  gerit  clipeum,  vestesque  geruntur  et  arma. 

4.  Tu  succende  rogum  ;  taedas  accende  facesque. 

5.  Vilia  despicimus  :  contemne  pericula,  miles ; 

Sperne  voluptates,  foedasque  libidinis  escas. c 

6.  Pars  ore:  est  litus  :  retinentur  flumina  ripis. 

7.  Clausa  aut  tecta  aperi  :  patefit  quod  restat  aper  tum  A 

8.  Rarius  interdum  quam  nonnunquam  esse  memento. 

9.  Olim  praeteritum  spectatqu e  futurum. 6 

10.  Bis  terq.ue  augebit,  minuet  bis  terve  notatum. 

11.  Mens  egra  est,  eorpusque  egrum  :  de  corpore  solo 
TEgrotum  dicas  :  fiunt  animalia  tantum. 

Morbida,  non  homines :  haec  tu  discrimina  serves. 

12.  De  spatio  nusquam  dicas,  de  tempore  nunquam. 

13.  Plebs  sciscit,  jubet  at  populus,  censeique  senatus. 

14.  Nemo  ablativum  nec  habet,  nec  habet  genitivum  | 

15.  Particulas  si,  ecquid- ,  nisi,  ne  num  forte  sequatur.f 


a  But  capere  arma  occurs  as  well  as  sumere  arma. 

b  This  is  true  of  reperire,  but  invenire  is  the  general  term  for  1 finding ,  even 
after  search  or  examination. 

*  c  Despicere  relates  to  what  we  might  value  or  respect:  contemnere  to  what 
we  might  fear  or  think  important :  spernere  to  what  we  might  accept,  or  to  ob 
jects  that  we  might  pursue. 

0  d  Hence  aperire  os  ( never  patefacere)  :  oculos  aperire  or  pat  ef a  cere: 
portas  (fores,  ostium)  aperire  or  patefacere ;  viam  aperire,  (for  one  occasion), 
patefacere  (to  tb"nw  it  open).  Aperire  is  also  1  to  make  a  Hung  visible .'  Patefa¬ 
cere  often  implies  the  permanent  removal  of  obstacles. 

»  e  Hence  olim —formerly,  informer  days  once  upon  a  time,  and  hereafter. 

*  %  f  That  is,  perhaps  or  perchance  must  never  he  forte  (but  fortasse  with  indie.) 

except  after  the  particles  si,  &c.  The  real  meaning  of  forte  is  ‘  by  accident,'  ‘  by 
chance ,'  and  it  does  not  lose  this  meaning  after  si,  &c. :  this  is  also  the  original 
meaning  of  perchance,  perhaps. 


14 


314 


VERSUS  MEMORIALES. 


16.  Dat  - fido ,  -  fici  or,  facio  sed  dat  tibi  -fio.S 

17.  Quicquid  habet  pennas  ‘volucris  ’  complectitur:  ales 
Magna  avis  est:  oscen  praedicit  voce  futura. 

18.  Ne  potius  quam  non  post  dum,  modo ,  dummodo  dicas. 

19.  Et  morbum  et  morbi  spectat  medicamina  sano  : 

^Egrotum  medeor  spectat  medicumque  peritum. 

20.  ‘  Atque  igitur  '  pravum  est  ‘ igiturquc :' — ‘ideoque’  Latinum  eat.* 

21.  ‘ Major  adhuc'  Romae  dicebat  serior  aetas  : 

Cum  Cicerone  ‘ etiam'  sed  tu,  et  cum  Caesare  dicas.» 

22.  Festinare  potes  nimium:  properare  virorum  est 
Optatam  quicunque  volunt  contingere  metam. 

23.  Rectius  in  navem  quam  nave  imponere  dicas: 

Dicere  sed  navi,  scribas  si  carmina,  fas  est. i 

24.  Q,uod  cernis  procul  esse  potest :  quae  longius  absunt 
Humanum  effugient  rerum  discrimina  visum. k 

25.  ‘  Non — pariter '  vites  :  ‘  non — aeque '  dicere  fas  est. 

26.  Nec  {neque)  ‘  vero '  habeat  post  se :  non  accipit  autem. 

27.  Particulas  ut,  ne  recte  neu,  neve  sequuntur.i 

28.  Eximo  quae  mala  sunt ;  ad  imo  bona;  demere  possum 
Quidlibet: — haec  teneas  justo  discrimine  verba. 


=  That  is,  the  compounds  of  facio  that  retain  the  a,  have  fio  in  the  pi.aiwive. 
Conficio  has  conjicior,  according  to  the  rule  here  given :  but  also  sometimes 
tonfieri. 

#  h  That  is,  never  use  igitur  when  ‘ consequently '  or  ‘  therefore'  follows  1  and? 
but  ideo : — et  ideo,  atque  ideo ,  or  ideoque. 

»  That  is,  etiam  is  the  classical  word  for  ‘  still '  or  ‘  yet,'  with  comparatives . 
not  adhuc. 

i  Milites  in  navem  imponere,  Caes.  Liv. :  nave ,  Suet. — carinae ,  Ov. 

*  k  Procul ,  far  off  but  within  sight;  longe,  so  far  off  as  to  be  out  of  sighX 
l  But  nec.  ncaue  are  sometimes  found :  e.  g.  Liv.  24,  3. 


VO  JABULARY 


aby  =  anybody 
athg  =  anything 
ci  =  alicui 
qA  =  aliquA 
cs  =  alicujus 
qd  =  aliquid 
qo  =  aliquo 


qm  =  aliquem 
qrm  =  aliquorum 
qs  =  aliquos 

*  means  that  the  phrase  is  not  found 
in  the  classics,  though  probably 
correct. 


A. 

Ah  use,  v.  (qA  re  perverse  uti  or  abuti ; 
or  immodice,  intemperanter,  inso¬ 
lenter  abuti,  when  the  a.  lies  in  ex¬ 
cess  :  e.  g.  to  a.  =  trespass  on  a 
man’s  indulgence  or  patience,  in¬ 
dulgentia,  patientia  cs  immodice 
abuti).  To  a.  a  person  =  rail  at 
(conviciis  qm  consectari  or  inces¬ 
sere).  To  load  or  cover  a  man 
with  a.,  to  heap  every  kind  of  a.  on 
a  man  (omnibus  maledictis  qm 
vexare ;  omnia  maledicta  in  qm 
conferre).  To  fling  a.  at  a  man 
(maledicta  in  qm  conjicere).  To 
overwhelm  aby  with  a.  (qm  contu¬ 
meliis  operire  atque  opprimere). 

Abuse  (usus  or  abusus  perversus). 
An  a.  =  a  bad  custom  (mos  pra¬ 
vus).  To  remove  abuses  (mores 
pravos  abolere). 

Access.  To  have  a.  to  athg  (habere 
aditum  ad  qd) :  to  aby  (ci  ad  qm 
aditus  patet).  He  is  easy  of  a. 
(aditus  ad  eum  est  facilis).  He  is 
easy  of  a.  to  private  individuals 
(faciles  aditus  sunt  ad  eum  privato¬ 
rum)»  He  is  difficult  of  a.  (aditus 
ad  eum  sunt  difficiliores).  An  a. 
of  fever  (accessio  febris).  I  grant 
a.  to  me  to  everybody  (omnibus 
conveniendi  mei  potestatem  facio). 

Accessible  (facilis  accessu :  of  places). 
He  is  a.  to  flatterers,  or  flattery 


(qm  or  facilem  aditum  ad  aurea 
ejus  adulatores  habent.) 

Acclamations.  To  receive  athg  with 
a.’s  (plausu  et  clamore  prosequi 
qd). 

Account  (ratio).  To  look  through  an 
a.  (rationem  cognoscere,  inspicere). 
To  go  through  a  man’s  accounts ; 
to  examine  them  carefully  (cs  ra¬ 
tiones  excutere,  dispungere).  The 
debtor  and  creditor  a.’s  balance 
(par  est  ratio  e.  g.  acceptorum  et 
datorum,  accepti  et  expensi).  To 
state  and  balance  a.’s  (rationes  con¬ 
ficere  et  consolidare).  To  compare 
a.’s  (rationes  conferre).  To  bring 
a  sum  of  money  to  a.  (pecuniam  in 
rationem  inducere).  To  demand 
an  a.  from  aby  (rationem  ab  qo  re¬ 
petere).  To  render  an  a.  (rationem 
reddere  with  gen.  of  thing).  To 
call  upon  a  man  to  give  an  a.  of 
his  life  (ab  qo  vitae  rationem  re¬ 
poscere). 

Acquit.  To  be  unanimously  acquit¬ 
ted  (omnibus  sententiis  absolvi). 

Advantage  ;  Benefit  To  gain,  de¬ 
rive  a.  or  b.  from  athg  (utilitatem  or 
fructum  ex  qA  re  capere  or  perci¬ 
pere).  It  is  to  my  a.  (est  e  re  meA, 
or  est  in  rem  mearn). 

Advice.  To  give  a.  (ci  consilium 
dare).  To  ask  a.  of  aby  (petere 
consilium  ab  qo).  To  follow  aby’s 
a.  (sequi  cs  consilium:  cs  consilio 


310 


VOCABULARY. 


uti  t).  To  do  athg  by  aby’s  a.  (qd 
facere  de  or  ex  cs  consilio). 

•  -  Advocate  (advocatus,  one  who  assist¬ 

ed  with  his  advice;  patronus,  one 
who  pleaded  the  cause).  To  em¬ 
ploy  or  engage  an  a.  (adoptare  sibi 
patronum  or  defensorem,  if  the  per¬ 
son  is  accused :  deferre  causam  ad 
patronum). 

Affluence.  To  live  in  a.  (in  omnium 
rerum  abundantia,  vivere.  Circum¬ 
fluere  omnibus  copiis  atque  in  om¬ 
nium  rerum  abundantia,  vivere.  C. 
Am.  15). 

Affront.  To  put  an  a.  on  aby  (con¬ 
tumeliam  ci  imponere).  To  look 
upon  athg  as  an  a.  (qd  in  or  ad 
contumeliam  accipere). 

Alms.  To  beg  for  a.  from  aby  (sti¬ 
pem  emendicare  ab  qo).  To  live  by 
a.  (aliena,  misericordia,  vivere).  To 
give  a.  (stipem  spargere,  largiri). 

Ambition.  To  be  ambitious ;  to  be 
led  by  a.  (gloria,  duci,  ambitione 
teneri).  From  a.  or  ambitious  mo¬ 
tives  (gloria,  ductus).  To  be  fired 
with  a.  (ambitione  accensum  esse). 

Answer.  To  receive  an  a.  (respon¬ 
sum  ferre,  auferre).  I  received  for 
a.  (responsum  est).  To  a.  (if  by 
letter,  rescribere).  To  return  no 
a.  (nullum  responsum  dare).  To  a. 
not  a  word  (nullum  verbum  re¬ 
spondere). 

Appetite.  To  have  a  good  a.  (liben¬ 
ter  cibum  sumere,  of  an  invalid: 
libenter  coenare).  To  have  no  a. 
(*  cibum  fastidire).  To  give  a  man 
an  a. ;  produce  an  a.  (appetentiam 
cibi  facere,  praestare,  invitare).  To 
get  an  a.  by  walking  (opsonare  am¬ 
bulando  famem). 

Arrival.  To  be  impatient  for — or  look 
forward  with  impatience  to  aby’s  a. 
(cs  adventum  non  mediocriter  cap¬ 
tare). 

Audience.  To  grant  aby  an  a. 
(admittere  qm).  To  have  an  a. 
(admitti :  aditum  ad  qm  habere). 
Before  a  numerous  a.  (frequentibus 
auditoribus  ;  magna  audientium  ce¬ 
lebritate). 


B. 

Baggage  (sarcinae,  baggage  of  indi . 
vidual  soldiers;  impedimenta,  of 
the  army  generally).  To  take  the 
b.  (impedimenta  capere :  impedi¬ 
mentis  potiri).  To  strip  the  enemy 
of  all  their  b.  (omnibus  impedimen¬ 
tis  hostes  exuere).  To  lose  one’s 
b.  (impedimenta  amittere :  impedi¬ 
mentis  exui).  To  fight  whilst  en¬ 
cumbered  with  one’s  b.  (sub  onere 
confligere).  To  attack  the  enemy 
whilst  they  are  encumbered  with 
their  baggage,  before  they  have 
disencumbered  themselves  of  their 
b.  (hostes  sub  sarcinis  adoriri).  To 
hide  their  b.  in  the  wood  (impedi 
menta  in  silvas  abdere).  To  plun 
der  the  b.  (impedimenta  diripere.) 

Banish,  Banishment.  To  banish  ;  te 
drive  into  banishment  (exsilio  affi¬ 
cere,  in*  exsilium  ejicere,  pellere, 
expellere,  agere,  ex  urbe  or  civitate 
pellere,  expellere,  ejicere,  ex  urbe 
exturbare,  de  civitate  ejicere.  In 
Roman  law  ci  aqu&  et  igni  inter¬ 
dicere,  to  compel  a  man  to  go  into 
b.  by  forbidding  aby  to  give  him 
fire  or  water :  he  kept  the  rank 
of  a  Roman  citizen,  but  lost  all 
its  privileges  and  honors;  rele¬ 
gare,  to  send  him  to  a  fixed  place, 
but  without  loss  of  rank  or  goods ; 
deportare,  to  banish  him  for  life  to 
some  desert  spot,  with  loss  of  rank 
and  property  :  this  kind  of  b.  be¬ 
longed  to  the  times  of  the  Ccesars). 
To  banish  aby  for  ten  years  (rele¬ 
gare  in  decem  annos).  To  b.  aby 
to  an  island  for  life  (deportare  in 
insulam).  To  b.  from  the  society 
of  men  (relegare  ab  hominibus) 
To  recall  from  b.  (revocare  de  or 
ab  exsilio,  reducere  de  exsilio,  iu 
patriam  revocare  or  restituere). — 
To  return  from  b.  (exsilio  redire). 

Battle.  A  b.  by  land  (proelium  ter¬ 
restre)  ;  by  sea  (proelium  navale  ; 
pugna  navalis).  A  long  and  severe 
b.  was  fought  (pugnatum  est  diu 
atque  acriter).  To  draw  an  army 
out  in  b.  array,  to  offer  b.  (exer¬ 
citum  in  aciem  educere).  To  be 


t  Also  cs  consilio  obtemperare. 


VOCABULARY. 


317 


gin  the  b. ;  to  join  b.  (proelium  com¬ 
mitteret).  To  fight  a  b.  (proelium 
or  pugnam  facere  or  edere).  To 
renew  the  b.  (i.  e.  after  an  inter¬ 
val  :  pugnam  repetere).  To  re¬ 
store  the  b. ;  to  restore  the  fortune 
of  the  day  (pugnam  novam  inte¬ 
grare,  proelium  redintegrare  or  reno¬ 
vare  :  generally  of  fresh  troops 
arriving).  To  renew  the  b.  the 
next  day  (postero  die  pugnam  ite¬ 
rare).  To  win  the  b.  (proelio  or 
pugnS.  superiorem  discedere  ;  victo¬ 
rem  proelio  excedere).  To  win  a  b. 
(secundo  Marte  pugnare  :  rem  pros¬ 
pere  gerere).  To  lose  the  b.  (pug- 
nit  inferiorem  discedere :  proelio 
vinci  or  superari).  To  lose  a  b. 
(adverso  Marte  pugnare  :  rem  male 
gerere).  To  offer  aby  b.  (ci  pug¬ 
nandi  potestatem  facere).  To  fight 
a  pitched  b.  (dimicare).  / 

Benefit.  See  Advantage. 

Blame.  I  am  to  b.  (mea  «culpa  est). 
Nobody  is  to  b.  but  myself  (culpa 
mea  propria  est).  To  lay  or  throw 
the  b.  on  aby  (culpam  or  causam 
in  qm  conferre,  transferre  :  the  lat¬ 
ter  of  removing  it  from  one's  self, 
vertere).  One  throws  the  b.  on  an¬ 
other  (causam  alter  in  alterum  con¬ 
fert).  To  be  to  b.  (in  noxiL  esse  or 
teneri ;  in  culpa  esse). 

Blood.  To  stanch  b.  (sanguinem 
sistere,  supprimere,  cohibere).  To 
thirst  for  b.  (sanguinem  sitire).  To 
cost  aby  much  b.  (multo  sanguine 
ci  stare).  To  shed  one’s  b.  for  one’s 
country  (sanguinem  pro  patria  pro¬ 
fundere  ;  sanguinem  suum  patrias 
largiri).  To  be  connected  with  aby 
by  the  ties  of  b. :  to  be  related  to 
aby  (sanguine  cum  qo  conjunctum 
esse:  sanguine  attingere  qm).  To 
do  athg  in  cold  b.  (consulto  et  cogi¬ 
tatum  facere  qd).  To  shed  b.  (cae¬ 
dem  or  sanguinem  facere:  commit 
murder ).  My  own  flesh  and  b. 

(i.  e.  children :  viscera  mea  or 
nostra).  To  take  some  b.  from  aby, 
to  bleed  aby  (ci  sanguinem  mit¬ 
te  rs). 


t  Or  manum  conserere. 


Body.  The  body  is  worn  out,  e  g 
with  labors,  diseases  (conficitur). 

Bury,  Buried,  Burial.  See  Funeral. 

C. 

Calamity,  Affliction,  Misfortune , 
Misery.  C.  visits  aby  (affligit  qrn 
calamitas).  To  contrive  aby’s  mis¬ 
ery  or  c.  (calamitatem  ci  machi¬ 
nari).  To  fall  into  a.  (in  calamita¬ 
tem  incidere).  Misfortune  happens 
(accidit  calamitas).  To  be  in  afflic¬ 
tion  or  misery  (in  malis  esse  or  ja¬ 
cere  ;  malis  urgeri :  in  miseria,  esse 
or  versari).  To  be  the  cause  of  a 
man’s  misery  or  misfortune  (cala¬ 
mitatem  ci  afferre,  inferre,  impor¬ 
tare).  To  alleviate  aby’s  a.  (cs 
calamitatem  levare).  To  ward  off 
a.  from  aby  (qm  prohibere  calami¬ 
tate,  or  a  calamitate  defendere). 
To  pine  away  in  a.  or  misery  (in 
calamitate  tabescere).  To  be  born 
to  misery  (miseriis  ferendis  natum 
esse).  To  suffer  a  misfortune,  un¬ 
dergo  a.  (calamitatem  capere,  ac¬ 
cipere,  subire).  To  bear  a  misfor¬ 
tune  (calamitatem  ferre,  tolerare). 
To  be  cast  down  by  misfortune 
(calamitati  or  ad  calamitatem  ani¬ 
mum  submitteret). 

Circumstances.  According  to  c.’s 
(pro  re.  pro  re  natit — ex  or  pro 
tempore).  Trifling  c.  (parvae  res, 
parva  momenta :  the  latter  of  points 
on  which  athg  turns).  C.’s  of  the 
time  (tempora  (pi.) :  temporum  ra¬ 
tio  :  temporum  vincula.  C.  Fam, 
x.  6). 

Cloud.  The  heavens  are  covered  with 
c.’s  (coelum  nubibus  obducitur). 

Cold.  To  be  able  to  endure  c.  (algo¬ 
ris,  frigoris  patientem  esse).  To  be 
benumbed  with  c.  (gelu  torpere). 

Copy,  see  Example. 

Corn;  Provisions.  Corn  is  rising  or 
getting  up  (annona  carior  fit ;  in¬ 
gravescit,  incenditur) :  is  falling 
(laxat  or  levaturt).  To  keep  back 


t  Brut,  in  Cic.  Ep.  11,  3,  3.  Liv  23,  25. 
j  Hence,  to  lower  the  frice  of  c.,  anno¬ 
nam  levare  or  laxare ;  to  raise  it,  keep 
or  force  it  up,  incendere— also  excande¬ 
facere,  flagellare. 


VOCABULARY. 


318 

their  c.  (annonam  or  frumentum 
comprimere).  To  be  straitened  for 
provisions:  to  be  in  want  of  c.  (re 
frumentarii  laborare).  Provisions 
are  scarce  (annonk  laboratur).  To 
get  in  a  better  supply  of  c.,  to 
remedy  their  deficient  supply  of  c. 
(rei  frumentari®  mederi :  rem  fru¬ 
mentariam  expedire).  To  order 
the  states  to  bring  in  so  much  c. 
(frumentum  imperare  civitatibus). 
Dearness,  cheapness  of  p.  (annon® 
caritas,  vilitas). 

D. 

Prnger,  Endanger ,  Peril.  To  un¬ 
dergo  d.  (periculum  obire,  adire, 
Bubire,  suscipere).  To  expose  one’s 
self  to  d.  (in  periculum  se  offerre,  se 
inferre,  in  discrimen  se  conferre, 
inferre,  or  objiceret).  To  peril  one’s 
life  for  aby  (inferre  se  in  periculum 
capitis  atque  vit®  discrimen  pro  cs 
salute).  To  bring  aby  into  d. :  to 
endanger  (qm  in  periculum  or  dis¬ 
crimen  adducere,  deducere,  vocare) : 
into  great  or  extreme  d.  (multum 
periculi  ci  inferre:  magnum,  sum¬ 
mum,  maximum  in  periculum  qm 
adducere).  To  bring  the  state  into 
extreme  d.  (rempublicam  in  pr®- 
ceps  dare).  To  seek  or  endeavor 
to  bring  aby  into  d.  (periculum  ci 
intendere  or  moliri).  To  be  in  d. 
(in  periculo  esse  or  versari,  in  dubio 
esse  —of  life).  To  be  in  extreme 
A.  of  things  (in  maximum  pericu¬ 
lum  et  extremum  p®ne  discrimen 
adductum  esse — of  things  :  in  pr®- 
cipiti  esse  ;  in  extremo  situm  esse). 
To  share  d.’s  (pericula  communi¬ 
care).  D.’s  threaten  aby :  or  aby 
is  threatened  with  d.  (instant  ci 
pericula :  from  ahy,  ab  qo).  At 
my  own  risk  (meo  periculo).  To 
ward  oft’d.  from  aby  (periculum  ab 
qo  prohibere  ;  propulsare).  There 
is  d.  that  (periculum  est  ne).  At 
his  own  risk  and  expense  (sumptu 
periculoque  suo).  To  fall  into  d. 
(hi  periculum  venire,  incidere). 


Athg  is  endangered  (qd  in  discn* 
men  venit). 

Darkness;  Dark:  Obscurity,  Oh - 
scure.  To  make  athg  dark  (ci  rei 
tenebras  obducere  ;  or  obscuritatem 
et  tenebras  offundere).  To  be  or 
remain  in  darkness ;  to  bo  vested 
in  obscurity  (in  tenebris  latere  ;  ob¬ 
scuritate  involutum  latere).  To  be 
buried  in  impenetrable  darkness 
(crassis  occultatum  et.  circumfusum 
tenebris  latere).  Born  of  an  ob¬ 
scure  family ;  of  obscure  origin 
(obscuro  loco  natus,  obscuris  ortus 
majoribus).  To  explain  what  is 
obscure  (res  obscuras  explanare : 
res  involutas  explicare). 

Death,  Die.  To  die  a  violent  d. 
(violenta  morte  perire).  To  die  by 
his  own  hands :  commit  suicide 
(sua  se  manu  interficere :  mortem 
sibi  consciscere,  or  inferre).  To 
meet  d.  with  resignation  (®quo 
animo  mortem  oppetere :  fidenti 
animo  ad  mortem  gradi).  To  seek 
or  court  d.  (mortem  expetere).  To 
meet  an  honorable  d.  (honeste 
occumbere).  To  punish  with  d. 
(morte  multare  ;  supplicio  afficere). 
The  punishment  is  d.  (ci  rei  sup¬ 
plicium  constitutum  est).  To  con¬ 
demn  to  d.  (capitis  or  capite  dam¬ 
nare,  condemnare).  To  die  of 
athg  (ex  q&.  re  mori).  To  starve 
himself  to  d.  (per  inediam  a  vita 
discedere).  To  die  of  laughter,  or 
burst  with  1.  (risu  p®ne  emori,  Ter. 
risu  p®ne  corruere.  C.)  To  read 
one’s  self  to  d.  (in  studiis  mori). 

Desire  :  Longing :  Regret.  To  les¬ 
sen  the  regret  that  athg  causes 
(lenire  desiderium  quod  qs  ex  qk  re 
capit).  To  renew  regret,  or  long¬ 
ing  (desiderium  refricare).  To  pine 
away  with  a  longing  d.  (desiderio 
confici  or  tabescere).  To  excite  or 
kindle  the  d.  (cupiditatem  incen¬ 
dere). 

Disease,  III,  Bad  Health,  Relapse, 
Poorly,  Disorder,  Sickness,  Sick 
To  fall  ill  (morbo  affici,  tentari, 
corripi).  To  catch  a  d.,  to  fall  ill 
of  a  disorder  (morbum  nancisci ;  iu 
morbum  cadere,  incidere).  To  fall 
into  bad  health  (in  adversam  vale- 


t  Not  se  periculo  exponere. 


VOCABJLARY. 


319 


tudinem  incidere).  To  be  danger-  i 
ously  ill  (in  periculosum  morbum 
implicari).  To  be  severely  ill 
(gravi  or  graviore  morbo  implicari). 
To  have  bad  health  (infirmtt  atquo 
Eegrft  valetudine  esse).  To  be  poor¬ 
ly  (leviter  a;grotare,  minus  belle 
valere).  To  have  a  disease  in  his 
feet,  reins,  &c.  (ex  pedibus,  reni¬ 
bus  laborare  ;  pedibus  aegrum  esse). 
To  have  or  suffer  from  a  disease 
that  must  end  fatally  (aegrotare 
mortifere ;  mortifero  morbo  affec¬ 
tum  esse,  urgeri ;  novissimi  vale¬ 
tudine  conflictari).  To  be  sick  or 
diseased  in  mind  (ab  animo  aegrum 
esse).  To  recover  from  a  sickness  ; 
(ex  morbo  convalescere).  To  die 
of  disease  (morbo  mori,  a  morbo 
perire  ;  in  morbum  implicitum  mori 
or  discedere).  To  recover  one’s 
strength  after  a  disease  (ex  morbo 
recreari ;  vires  recolligere).  To 
have  a  relapse  (in  morbum  recidere : 
do  integro  in  morbum  incidere). 
To  be  afflicted  with  a  d.  (morbo 
affici;  affligi,  afflictari,  tentari). 
To  treat  a  disease  ;  or  use  a  treat¬ 
ment,  employ  a  method  of  cure  to 
ad.  (morbo  curationem  adhibere: 
to  a  person,  curationem  adhibere 
ad  qm).  To  apply,  use,  or  employ 
remedies  agst  d.’s  (morbis  remedia 
adhibere  :  fig.  morbis  animi). 

E. 

Endanger,  see  Danger. 

Error,  Mistake.  To  cause  a  rn. 
(errorem  gignere,  creare).  To  be 
in  e. :  labor  under  a  m.  (in  errore 
esse  or  versau).  To  6ee  one’s  m. 
(erratum  suum  agnoscere).  To  lead 
aby  into  e.  (qm  in  errorem  inducere 
or  conjicere).  To  remove  aby’s  m. 
(errorem  ci  eripere,  extorquere). 
From  a  mistaken  notion  (errore 
captus). 

Example,  Instance,  Warning,  Copy. 
To  produce  an  e.  (exemplum  sup¬ 
ponere,  proponere).  To  have  an  e. 
for  imitation  in  one’s  own  family 
(domesticum  habere  exemplum  ad 
imitandum).  To  propose  aby  an  e. 
for  imitation  (proponere  ci  exem¬ 


plum  ad  imitandum).  To  set  a 
badt  e.  to  others  (mali  esse  exem¬ 
pli).  To  follow  aby’s  e.  (sequi  cs 
exemplum  or  auctoritatem).  To 
take  w.  by  aby ;  to  take  e.  by  aby 
(capere  sibi  exemplum  de  qo  ;  ex 
quo  sumere  sibi  exemplum).  To 
set  up  in  any  person  a  pernicious  e. 
(prodere  in  qo  perniciosum  exem¬ 
plum).  To  form  or  fashion  one’s 
self  after  aby’s  e.  (se  formare  in 
mores  cs).  To  set  an  e.  of  severity 
(exemplum  severitatis  edere).  For 
example,  as  an  instance  (exempli 
causa).  To  send  a  copy  of  my 
letter  to  aby  (literarum  exemplum 
ci  or  ad  qm  mittere).  To  set  an  e. 
(exemplum  prcebere,  prodere). 

Excuse,  Plea.  To  admit  of  an  e. 
(excusationem  habere  or  qd  excu¬ 
sationis).  To  admit  of  some  e.  (ha¬ 
bere  qd  excusationis).  My  igno¬ 
rance  may  be  pleaded  in  e. :  I  may 
be  excused  on  the  ground  of  igno¬ 
rance  (estmihi  excusatio  inscientiae). 
To  plead  bad  health  in  e.  (excusare 
morbum  or  valetudinem).  To  de¬ 
fend  one’s  self  from  any  charge  by 
pleading  or  urging  athg ;  or,  on 
the  plea  of  athg  (qd  cs  rei  excusa¬ 
tione  defendere).  To  accept  an  e. 
(excusationem  or  satisfactionem  ac¬ 
cipere).  To  reject  or  not  accept 
an  e.  (excusationem  non  accipere 
or  probare).  To  e.  one’s  self  to 
aby’s  satisfaction  (satisfacere  ci) 
The  plea  of  necessity  is  a  valid  or 
complete  excuse  for  aby  (necessita¬ 
tis  excusatio  qm  facile  defendit). 

Expectation  ;  Expect.  To  lead  men 
to  e.  athg  (facere  exspectationem 
cs  rei).  To  cause  or  raise  in  aby 
an  eager  e.  of  athg,  to  make  aby 
eagerly  expect  athg  (magnam  ex¬ 
spectationem  cs  rei  ci  movere, t 
commovere,  dare,  afferre :  qm  in  ex¬ 
spectationem  adducere).  To  raise 
an  e.  (exspectationem  concitare). 
A  person  satisfies  or  ccmes  up  to 
men’s  e.’s  (opinioni  hor.iinum  re- 


t  Pessimi  for  very  bad. 
i  Also  de :  quantum  tu  mihi  mo\es  ex¬ 
spectationem  de  sermciie  Bibuli. 


320 


VOCABULARY. 


spondet ;  omnium  existimationi  sa¬ 
tisfacit  :  surpasses  them ,  superat : 
disappoints  them,  fallit).  To  sur¬ 
pass  e.  (exspectationem  vincere). 

F. 

Fate.  All  will  suffer  the  same  f. 
(omnes  eundem  fortunae  exitum 
laturi  sunt).  To  submit  calmly  to 
my  f.,  whatever  it  may  be  (quem- 
cumque  casum  fortuna  invexerit, 
quiete  ferre).  To  be  prepared  for 
my  f.,  whatever  it  may  be  (ad 
omnem  eventum  paratum  esse). 
If  you  are  fated  to — (si  tibi  fatum 
est,  with  injin.)  The  blows  or 
storms  of  f.  (fulmina  fortunae). 
Miserable,  unhappy  f.  (fortuna  ma¬ 
la,  afflicta,  misera).  Happy,  pros¬ 
perous  f.  (fortuna  prospera,  secun¬ 
da,  florens). 

Favorite.  My  f.  Dicaearchus  (deli¬ 
ciae  meae,  Dicaearchus).  That  f. 
Panaetius  of  yours  (Panaetius  ille 
tuus). 

Favor.  To  be  in  aby’s  f.  (in  gratis 
cs  or  cum  qot  esse,  gratiosum  esse 
ci  or  apud  qm).  To  be  in  high  f. 
with  aby  (cs  gratia,  florere).  To 
obtain  aby’s  f.  (se  in  gratiam  ponere 
apud  qm  ;  gratiam  cs  sibi  colligere 
or  conciliare).  To  court  aby’s  f. 
(gratiam  cs  aucupari).  To  forfeit 
aby’s  f.  by  abusing  it  (gratiam  cs 
effundere).  To  restore  aby  to  an¬ 
other’s  f.,  to  reconcile  aby  to  an¬ 
other  (qm  cum  qo  in  gratiam  redu¬ 
cere,  reconciliare,  restituere).  To 
receive  or  take  again  into  f.  (in 
gratiam  recipere).  To  lose  aby’s  f. 
(gratiam  cs  amittere,  gratift  cs  ex¬ 
cidere).  To  recover  aby’s  f.  (cs 
gratiam  recuperare).  To  give  a 
verdict  in  aby’s  f.  (secundum  qm 
judicare  or  litem  dare).  To  bring 
a  man  into  great  f.  with  aby  (qm 
apud  qm  magnft  in  gratia  ponere). 
To  ask  as  a  f.  (beneficii  gi.itiseque 
loco  petere,  ut,  &.c.) :  to  gi  tnt  as  a 
f.  (beneficii  gratiasque  caus  i  conce¬ 
dere). 

Fingers.  See  Hand. 


t  With  everybody  (apud  omnes). 


Flight,  Jly,  flee,  Escape,  Rout.  To 
betake  one’s  self  to  f.  (in  fugam  se 
conferre,  dare,  or  conjicere).  To 
put  to  f.  (in  fugam  dare,  vertere, 
convertere,  conjicere).  To  rout 
(profligare).  To  cut  off  aby’s  f. 
(fugam  ci  claudere  or  intercludere) 
To  seek  for  safety  by  f.  (fugft  salu¬ 
tem  petere).  To  save  on«’s  self  or 
escape  by  f.  (ex  fugk  evadere,  fugi 
se  eripere).  There  is  no  other 
escape  fm  this  thing  (alia  fuga 
hujus  rei  non  est).  To  fly  in  com¬ 
plete  disorder  to  their  camp  (fugi 
effusi  castra  petere).  To  fly  any¬ 
where  (fugi  locum  petere :  confu¬ 
gere  or  fugam  capessere  qo).  To 
fly  away  secretly,  to  abscond  (fugi 
se  subtrahere  :  clam  se  subducere). 

Funeral,  Burial,  Bury.  To  honor 
aby  with  a  splendid  f.  (amplo,  ap¬ 
paratissimo,  &c.  funere  efferre). 
To  bury  aby  with  military  honors 
(militari  honesto  funere  humare). 
To  bury  aby  alive  (qm  vivum  de¬ 
fodere).  To  be  buried  alive  (vivum 
terri  obrui).  To  be  deprived  of 
burial  (sepulchro  carere).  To  be 
buried  in  oblivion  (oblivione  obrui, 
obrutum  esse) :  in  the  waves  (undis 
obrui  or  hauriri). 

G. 

Gain,  Profits.  To  make  g.  of  aby 
(quaestum  facere  in  qo)  :  of  athg 
(lucrum  facere  ex  q&  re).  To  ob¬ 
tain  immense  profits  (magnos  quaes¬ 
tus  praedasque  facere).  To  turn 
athg  to  profit  (quaestui  habere  qd). 
To  count  athg  g.  (in  lucro  qd  po¬ 
nere  :  putare  esse  do  lucro,  depu¬ 
tare  esse  in  lucro). 

Glory,  Renown.  To  gain  g.,  renown, 
credit,  &c.  (laudem  sibi  parere  or 
colligere,  gloriam  quaerere,  conse¬ 
qui,  adipisci).  To  have  an  eye  to 
g.  in  every  thing,  or  make  glory 
his  first  object  (omnia  ad  gloriam 
revocare).  To  cover  a  man  with 
immortal  glory  (immortali  gloria, 
qm  afficere,  sempiternae  gloriae  qm 
commendare). 

Graft.  To  g.  a  treo  (arborem  inse¬ 
rere.  surculum  arbori  inserere).  To 


VOCABULARY. 


321 


g.  a  good  pear  on  a  wild  stock 
(pirum  bonam  in  pirum  silvaticam 
inserere). 

Grafting,  insitio. 

H. 

Hand,  Traditional,  Fingers,  Art. 
To  have  a  work,  =  book,  in  h. 
(opus  in  manibus  habere).  To 
take  in  one’s  h.’s  (in  manus  sumere 
qd).  To  hold  athg  in  one’s  h. 
(manu  tenere  qd).  To  have  aby 
at  h.  i.  e.  to  help  one  (habere  sibi 
qm  ad  manum).  The  question 
which  is  now  under  discussion 
(quaestio  quae  nunc  in  manibus  est). 
To  be  placed  in  our  own  h.’s,  to  be 
in  our  power  (esse  in  nostri,  manu). 
To  give  in :  to  drop  my  hands,  i.  e. 
in  confession  of  defeat  (dare  ma¬ 
nus).  Traditional  (per  manus  tra- 
ditust).  To  wrest  athg  out  of  aby’s 

h. ’s  (extorquere  qd  ci  de  manibus). 
To  let  the  lucky  opportunity  slip 
through  one’s  fingers  (fortunam  ex 
manibus  dimittere).  Athg  slips 
through  one’s  fingers  (fugit,  elabi- 
tur,  or  excidit  qd  e  manibus:  also 
elabitur  do  manibus).  Not  to  stir 
or  move  a  finger  for  athg  (cs  rei 
causk  manum  non  vertere).  A  city 
strongly  fortified  by  art  (urbs  manu 
munitissima).  To  lay  h.’s  on  aby 
(manum,  manus  afferre,  inferre,  in¬ 
jicere  ci).  Not  to  lay  h.’s  on  aby,  to 
keep  your  h.’s  off  aby  (manus  ab¬ 
stinere  a  qo).  The  matter  is  en¬ 
tirely  in  your  h.’st  (hujus  rei  potes¬ 
tas  omnis  in  vobis  sita  est).  To  die 
by  one’s  own  h.’s  (see  Death). 

Health  (valetudo:  if  by  itself,  it  is 
mostly  equivalent  to  good  h.,  which 
is  bona,  prospera,  firma  valetudo). 
To  take  care,  or  some  care,  of 
one’s  h.  (valetudini  parcere  ;  vale¬ 
tudinem  curare :  valetudini  tribu¬ 
ere  qd).  To  take  great  care  of 
your  h.  (valetudini  tuae  servire). 
For  your  h.’s  sake  (corporis  tuendi 
caush).  To  neglect,  or  take  no 


t  E.  g.  religiones  ( religious  observances) 
per  manus  traditae. 

t  So,  to  be  placed,  in  your  hands,  in  vestrft 
manu  situm  esse. 

14* 


care  of,  one’s  h.  (valetudinem  neg- 
ligere  :  valetudini  parum  parcere). 
To  drink  aby’s  good  h.  (salutem  ci 
propinare,  Plant.  *amicum  nomi- 
natim  vocare  in  bibendo).  Bad  h, 
(adversa,  aegra,  infirma  valetudo). 
Your  weak  h.  o:  weak  state  of  h. 
(ista  imbecillitas  valetudinis  tuae). 
[Obs.  after  curatio,  excusatio,  ex¬ 
cusare,  &,c.  valetudo  =  bad  health , 
just  as  in,  “  to  excuse  himself  on 
the  ground  of  his  health,”  “  his 
health  will  not  suffer  him,  &.c.” 
it  is  implied  that  bad  health  is 
meant.]  To  enjoy  good  h.  (bonfL 
valetudine  uti :  excellent,  optima.). 
To  be  in  an  indifferent  state  of  h, 
(valetudine  minus  commoda  uti).' 
To  injure  one’s  h.  by  the  neglect 
of  one’s  usual  exercise  (valetudinem 
intermissis  exercitationibus  amit¬ 
tere).  I  am  recovering  my  h 
(melior  fio  valetudine).  H.  is  re¬ 
established  (confirmatur).  To  be 
in  good  h.  (recte  valere) :  in  better 
health  (melius  valere).  To  enjoy 
good  h.  (prosperitate  valetudinis  uti). 

Helm,  Steer.  To  take  the  h.  (ad 
gubernaculum  accedere).  To  sit 
at  the  h.  (sedere  in  pnppi  clavum- 
que  tenere.  C.  fig.  of  a  statesman). 
To  sit  at  the  h.  of  the  state  (ad  gu¬ 
bernacula  reipublicae  sedere).  To 
steer  the  vessel,  the  state  (gu¬ 
bernacula  reipublicae  tenere).  To 
seize  the  h.  of  the  state  (guberna¬ 
cula  reipublicae  prendere).  To 
drive  or  cast  aby  from  the  h.  of  the 
state  (qm  a  gubernaculis  reipubli¬ 
cae  repellere  or  dejicere).  To  with¬ 
draw  from  or  quit  the  helm  (a  gu¬ 
bernaculis  recedere). 

Honor.  To  be  held  in  h.  (esse  in 
honore :  of  persons  and  things) 
To  hold  in  h.  (in  honore  habere) 
To  bestow  h.’s  on  aby  for  athg 
(honores  ci  habere  pro  qh  re :  ho¬ 
nores  dare  or  deferre  propter  qm 
rem).  To  load  aby  with  h.’s  (qm 
honore  augere,  ornare,  decorare). 
To  lavish  h.’s  upon  aby  (effundere, 
si  ita  vis,t  honores  in  qm).  To  be- 


t  These  words  show  that  this  was  an 
uncommon  expression. 


322 


VOCABULARY, 


stow  divine  h.’s  on  aby  (deorum 
honores  ci  tribuere).  To  raise  a 
man  to,  or  place  him  in,  posts  of  h. 
(bonorem  ci  dare,  mandare,  cre¬ 
dere,  committere).  To  arrive  at 
h.’s  (ad  honores  venire,  pervenire). 
To  climb  to  h.’s  (ad  honores  as¬ 
cendere).  To  pay  or  show  h.  to 
aby  (honorem  ci  habere,  Nep.,  to 
a  superior). 

I. 

In.  Not  difficult  in  itself  (per  se  non 
difficilis).  To  be  in  our  favor  (a 
nobis  facere  ;  of  things).  In  front 
(a  fronte).  In  the  eyes  of  men 
(apud  homines).  In  breadth  (in 
latitudinem :  so  in  longitudinem, 
&c.)  To  be  in  the  prosecutor’s 
house  (penes  accusatorem  esse:  of 
ivitnesses  in  his  power).  To  say 
athg  in  joke  (qd  per  jocum  dicere). 
To  do  athg  in  anger  (qd  per  iram 
facere). 

Injury;  Wrong.  To  commit  an  i. 
against  aby  (injuriam  ci  facere, 
inferre,  imponere,  &c. ;  injuria,  qm 
afficere).  To  suffer  an  i.  (injuriam 
accipere).  To  bear  i.  or  w.  (inju¬ 
riam  pati,  ferre).  To  abstain  from 
committing  any  i.  (abstinere  inju¬ 
ria.).  To  pardon  an  i.  at  aby’s  re¬ 
quest  (injuriam  cs  precibus  con¬ 
donare).  To  forget  i.’s  or  w.’s 
(injurias  oblivione  conterere). 

Invite.  To  invite  one’s  self  to  dine 
with  aby  (coenam  ci  condicere). 
To  invite  aby  to  dinner  (qm  ad 
coenam  invitare,  vocare). 

J. 

Judge,  Judgment,  Sentence,  Opinion. 
To  acquiesce  in  a  s.  (judicium  ac¬ 
cipere,  ferre).  To  refuse  to  ac¬ 
quiesce  in  a  s.  (judicium  recusare). 
A  s.  procured  by  bribery  (emtum  ju¬ 
dicium).  To  form  a  j.  or  pronounce 
s.  about  athg  (facere  judicium  de  q& 
re  or  cs  rei.  The  thing  by  which, 
ex  re).  To  change  my  o.  (animi 
judicium  mutare).  To  ask  aby’s  o. 
(cs  judicium  exquirere).  To  stand  or 
abide  by  aby’s  j.  (cs  judicio  stare).  | 


Let  others  judge  (aliorum  sit  ju¬ 
dicium).  I  have  always  been  of  o 
(meum  semper  judicium  fuit).  To 
agree  to  abide  by  aby’s  j.  in  any 
matter  (cs  judicio  qd  permittere). 
To  submit  one’s  self  to  aby’s  j 
(subjicere  se  cs  judicio).  In  my 
opinion  (meo  judicio).  One  who 
has  an  opinion  of  his  own  (homo  eui 
judicii). 

K. 

Knot.  To  tie  a  k.  (nodum  facere, 
nectere).  To  tie  a  fast  k.  (nodum 
astringere).  To  untie  a  k.  (nodum 
solvere  or  expedire). 

Knowledge.  It  is  easy  or  difficult  to 
acquire  a  k.  of  these  things  (hrec 
facilem  or  difficilem  habent  cognh 
tionem). 

L, 

Law.  To  bring  in  a  bill ;  to  propose 
a  1.  (legem  rogare).  The  people 
passes  the  1.  (accipit  legem)  : 
throws  the  bill  out ;  refuses  to  pass 
the  1.  (antiquat  legem).  To  be 
passed  or  carried  through  (perferri). 
To  draw  up  l.’s  (leges  condere, 
scribere,  conscribero).  To  pass  a 
1.  (ferre  legem,  ut  or  ne ;  lege  san¬ 
cire,  ut  or  ne  ;  of  the  people)  To 
give  l.’s  to  a  state — of  a  ruler  (leges 
dare  or  constituere  ci  civitati). 
To  impose  l.’s  on  a  state — of  a  ty¬ 
rant  (leges  ci  populo  or  civitati 
imponere).  To  overthrow  l.’s  (leges 
evertere  or  pervertere).  To  break 
a  1.  (legem  negligere,  violare).  To 
evade  a  I.  (legi  fraudem  facere). 
To  swear  obedience  to  a  1.  (in 
legem  jurare).  To  advise  the  peo¬ 
ple  to  pass  a  1.  (legem  suadere) : 
not  to  pass  one  (legem  dissuadere). 
To  oppose  the  passing  of  a  1.  by  his 
veto  (legi  intercederet).  To  abro¬ 
gate  a  1.  (legem  abrogare).  To 
abrogate  it  partially  (derogare  legi 
or  qd  de  lege).  To  abrogate  a  1. 
virtually  by  a  subsequent  enact¬ 
ment  (legi  obrogare).  To  trample 


t  t.  e.  of  a  Tribune  of  the  pec  pie. 


VOCABULARY. 


323 


a  I.  underfoot  (legem  conculcare).  | 
To  see  that  a  1.  is  put  in  force  or 
strictly  executed  (efficere  ut  lex 
valeat  or  valeret).  To  relax  a  1. 
(laxamentum  dare  legi).  To  pro¬ 
cure  the  passing  of  a  1.  (legem 
ferre) :  on  one’s  self  (legem  mihi 
ipse  dico:  with  gen.  of  law).  To 
observe  a  law  (legem  servare,  ob¬ 
servare,  conservare), 
i  'iter.  (1)  Syllable;  of  the  alpha¬ 
bet.  Not  to  write  a  1.  (imllam 
lieram  scribere).  To  know  a  single 
I.  of  Greek  (unam  literam  Gi  aecam 
scire).  Not  to  be  able  to  utter  a 
s.  (literam  non  posse  dicere). 

(2)  Epistle  ;  correspondence  To 
write  a  1.  (epistolam  scribere ,  exa¬ 
rare).  To  write  or  send  a  1.  lo  aby 
(dare  literas  ad  qm,  literas  mittere 
ci  or  ad  qm).  To  answert  a  1. 
(rescribere  literis  or  ad  literas  or 
epistolam).  To  fold  up  a  1.  (episto¬ 
lam  complicare) :  to  seal  (signare 
or  obsignare) :  to  open  (epistolam 
aperire  or  solvere).  To  break  open 
the  seal  (literas  resignare).  To 
converse  with  aby  by  1.  (cum  qo 
per  literas  colloqui  or  agere).  To 
finish  a  1.  (literas  conficere).  To 
pester  aby  with  l.’s  (literis  ci  ob¬ 
strepere).  To  draw  aby  into  a  c. 
(cs  literas  elicere).  To  long,  for 
a  1.  (literas  expetere,  requirere,  de¬ 
siderare).  By  1.  (per  literas).  To 
tear  up  a  1.  (epistolam  concerpere. 
C.) 

(3)  Literature ;  Learning;  Study; 
Books.  To  bury  one’s  self  in  one’s 
s.’s  or  b.’s  (literis  se  involvere,  ab¬ 
dere.  in  literas  se  abdere).  To  give 
up  or  devote  one’s  self  to  1.  or  s. 
(literis  se  dare).  Devoted  to  I. 
(literis  deditus).  To  return  to  his 
s.’s  ;  betake  one’s  self  to  one’s  s.’s 
or  b.’s  again  (in  literas  se  referre). 
To  devour  b.’s  (literas  vorare).  To 
spend  one’s  life  in  s.  (agere  eetatem 
in  literis).  To  have  paid  even  the 
slightest  attention  to  1.  (literas  vel 


primis  labris  degustasse.  Q.) - 

Adj.,  profound,  rare,  abstruse,  ac¬ 
curate  (liter®  interiores  [quaedam] 
et  recondit®) : — ordinary,  super¬ 
ficial  (vulgares,  communes). 

Life,  Live.  As  sure  as  I  live  I  will, 
&c.  (ita  vivam,  ut,  &c.,  ne  vivam, 
ne,  salvus  sim,  ut).  To  live  as  one 
pleases  (ad  libidinem,  ex  libidine, 
ad  arbitrium  suum,  arbitrio  suo — 
vivere).  Not  to  be  able  to  live 
without  athg  (qk  re  carere  non 
posse).  If  a  longer  1.  had  been 
granted  him  (si  vita  longior  suppe¬ 
tiisset).  To  live  on  very  confined 
means,  on  a  very  narrow  income 
(in  tenui  pecunia,  vivere).  To  live 
in  penury  (in  egestate  vitam  de¬ 
gere).  To  aim  at  aby’s  1.  (cs  capiti 
insidiari).  To  spare  aby’st  1.  (ci 
vitam  concedere,  or  mortem  re¬ 
mittere).  To  owe  one’s  1.  to  aby 
(ci  salutem  debere ;  also  ab  aliquo 
habere  vitam  ;  cs  beneficio  vivere). 
To  beseech  aby  to  spare  a  person’s  1. 
(cs  vitam  deprecari  a  qo).  To 
atone  for,  or  expiate  athg  with 
one’s  1.  (capite  luere  qd).  My  1.  is 
at  stake  ;  I  am  in,  or  brought  into, 
danger  of  my  1.  (in  vit®  periculum 
adductus  sum  :  caput  agitur).  The 
language  of  common  1.  (genus  ser¬ 
monis  usitatum).  To  use  the  lan¬ 
guage  of  daily  or  common  1.  (ver¬ 
bis  quotidianis  uti).  To  spend  one’s 
1.  (omnem  suam  vitam  consumere, 
or  ffitatem  agere  in  qft  re).  The 
rest  of  one’s  1.  (qd  reliquum  est 
vit®).  L.  and  spirit,  i.  e.  in  speak¬ 
ing  (calor  et  vehementia).  To 
depart  this  1.  (abire  e  vitii :  hinc 
demigrare).  Adverbs  used  with 
vivere  are;  molliter,  delicate  (deli¬ 
cate  ac  molliter)  ;  parce,  continen¬ 
ter,  severe,  sobrie. 

Listen.  Listen  to  what  he  has  done 
(videte,  quid  fecerit).  I  cannot 
listen  to  this  (aures  me®  a  com¬ 
memoratione  hujus  rei  abhorrent: 
qd  ferre  non  possum). 


t  To  return  some  answer  (rescribere 

<td). 


t  i.  e.  a  condemned  person’s :  cs  vit®  par* 
cere,  is  a  general  expression. 


324 


VOCABULARY. 


M. 

Memory ;  Recollection.  As  xar  as 
my  m.  or  r.  goes  (ut  mea  est  me¬ 
moria).  To  recall  or  bring  athg  to 
aby’s  r.  (ci  qd  in  memoriam  redi¬ 
gere,  reducere,  qm  in  memoriam  cs 
rei  reducere).  Athg  has  slipped 
my  m.  (memoria,  qd  excessit,  de¬ 
lapsum  est).  To  retain  a  lively  r. 
of  aby  (cs  memoriam  vivam  tene¬ 
re).  To  renew,  to  exercise  the 
m.  (memoriam  renovare  or  redinte¬ 
grare  ;  exercere).  To  refresh  the 
m.,  or  rub  up  the  r.  (memoriam  re¬ 
fricare).  In  my  r.  (meti  memoria). 
In  the  r.  of  man  (post  hominum 
memoriam:  after  negatives ).  To 
have  a  good  m.  (memoria  vigere). 

Mind.  Emotions  of  the  m.  (mentis 
perturbationes).  To  apply  one’s 
self  to  athg  with  one’s  whole  m. 
(tota  mente  in  qd  incumbere). 
Athg  comes  into  my  m.,  or  oc¬ 
curs  to  me  (qdt  in  mentem  mihi 
venit).  Recall  to  mind  what,  &c. 
(redite  in  memoriam,  qui,  &c.) 
Athg  brings  the  recollection  of  aby 
to  m.  (qd  cs  memoriam  affert).  To 
dazzle  aby’s  m.  (ci  animi  aciem 
praestringere).  To  be  of  another  m. 
(in  alia  voluntate  esse).  Not  to 
mind  [=  be  anxious]  about  aby 
(de  qo  nihil  laborare:  ne  quid,  of 
course,  when  necessary).  To  blunt 
or  dull  the  powers  of  the  m.  (aciem 
ingenii,  aivmi,  mentis  praestringere. 
C.) 

Mistake.  See  Error. 

Must.  He  m.  have  done  so  and  so, — 
when  the  m.  is  an  inference  (pu¬ 
tandus  est  fecisse). 

N. 

Name ;  To  enlist ;  Anonymous.  To 
give  a  n.  to  athg,  or  impose  a  n.  on 
athg  (nomen  ci  rei  ponere  or  impo¬ 
nere).  To  receive  a  n.  fm  athg 


t  The  thing  may  be  subst.,  infin.,  or 
sentence  with  ut.  The  thing  may  also 
be  in  the  gen. :  in  mentem  mihi  venit  cs 

rei 


(ex  qa  re  nomen  reporiret).  Foi 
that  I  think  is  his  name  (nam,  ut 
opinor,  hoc  nomen  est).  To  cal! 
athg  by  its  own  n.,  a  n.  of  its  own 
(qd  proprio  nomine  signare).  To  e 
(nomen  or  nomina  dare,  profiteri, 
edere).  To  answer  to  one’s  n.  (ad 
nomen  respondere).  To  call  them 
over  by  n.  (nominatim  citare).  His 
n.  stands  high  amongst  advocates 
(cs  nomen  in  patronis  magnum  est) 
A  certain  foreigner  Camelus  by  n. 
(quidam  hospes,  nomine  Camelo  or 
Cameli) :  whose  n.  was  Camelus 
(cui  erat  nomen  Camelo  or  Came¬ 
lus:  seld.  Cameli).  An  a.  letter 
(litene  sine  nomine  script®).  An 
a.  paper  (libellus  sine  auctore  pro¬ 
positus).  A.  poems  (carmina  in¬ 
certis  auctoribus  vulgata).  In  aby’s 
n.  (cs  verbis,  or  cs  nominet).  To 
be  free  in  n.  (verbo  esse  liberum). 

Good-Name ;  Reputation ;  Good- 
Opinion  ;  Credit.  A  g.-n.  is  bet¬ 
ter  than  money  (bona  existimatio 
pr®stat  pecuniis).  My  g.-n.  is  at 
stake  (mea  existimatio  agitur).  No¬ 
thing  could  have  happened  that 
would  be  more  injurious,  or  preju¬ 
dicial,  to  my  g.-n.  (nihil  mihi  ad 
existimationem  turpius  potuit  acci¬ 
dere).  To  endanger  or  risk  one’s 
g.-n.  or  r.  (venire  in  discrimen  ex¬ 
istimationis).  To  court  the  g.-o.  of 
men,  i.  e.  by  some  bad  means  (ex¬ 
istimationi  se  hominum  venditare). 
A  man  of  no  r. ;  of  such  r.  (hom& 
sine'  existimatione  ;  eh.  existima¬ 
tione).  To  leave  my  r.  or  g.-n.  in 
aby’s  hands  (committere  ci  existi¬ 
mationem  meam).  To  get  some  c 
(qm  accipere  existimationem).  T« 
get  the  c.  of  athg  without  deserving 
it  (falso  in  earn  venire  existimatio¬ 
nem).  To  recover  one’s  r.  (existi¬ 
mationem  amissam  reconciliare) 
To  suffer  in  one’s  r. ;  one’s  r.  sutlers 
(de  existimatione  suk  qd  perdere  or 
deperdere,  detrimentum  existima- 


t  Or  ab  qi\  re  nomen  trahere. 

•  t  Cs  verbis ,  if  a  message  is  put  in  aby’s 
mouth:  cs  nomine ,  when  an  inferior  acts 
in  the  name,  and  by  the  authority  of  a 
superior. 


VOCABULARY. 


325 


tionis  facere). - Other  phrases 

are :  cs  existimationi  consulere, 
servire :  cs  existimationem  violare, 
offendere,  oppugnare :  defendere, 
tueri:  existimationem consef” vare, re¬ 
tinere. - Existimatio  integra  ( un - 

blemished),  praeclara,  sanctissima, 
existimatio  in  discrimen  venit  {is 
endangered). 

Necessarily.  This  does  not  n.  prove 
that  (hoc  nihil  necessitatis  adfert, 
cur,  &c.  with  subj.) 

O. 

Oath.  To  observe  my  o.  (jusjurandum 
servare,  conservare).  To  break  an 
o.  (jusjurandum  negligere,  violare, 
relinquere).  To  bind  aby  by  o. 
(jurejurando  qm  astringere,  ob¬ 
stringere,  obligare).  The  sanctity 
of  an  o.  (jurisjurandi  religio).  Not 
to  believe  aby  on  his  o.  (jurisjurandi 
fidem  ci  abrogare).  To  draw  up 
an  oath  (jusjurandum  concipere). 
To  give  aby  one’s  o.  (jusjurandum 
ci  dare).  To  make  aby  repeat  an 
o.  after  me  ;  or  to  make  a  man 
take  an  o.  in  words  prescribed  by 
me  (in  mea  verba  qm  jusjurandum 
adigere). 

Object.  O.’s  of  sense,  or  of  our  senses 
(quae  sub  sensus  cadunt ;  or  quae 
sensibus  subjecta  sunt).  To  make 
it  one’s  first  o.  to  do  something  (id 
agere,  ut,  &c.)  This  ought  to  be 
their  first  o.,  that  (hue  omnia  iis  re¬ 
ferenda  sunt,  ut — ).  To  make 

athg  one’s  first  o.,  or  pursue  athg 
as  one’s  first  o.  (omnia  ad  qd  revo¬ 
care,  referre,  or  omnia  qa  re  rnetiri ; 
hue  omnia  referre,  ut).  Their  o. 
in  doing  this  was  very  different 
from  what,  &c.  (hoc  longe  alio 
spectabat  atque,  &c.) 

Obstacle.  Athg  is  an  o.  in  the  way 
of  accomplishing  athg  (est  qd  im¬ 
pedimento  ad  rem).  To  place  an 
o.  in  the  way  of  performing  or  ac¬ 
complishing  athg  (ci  rei  moram  at¬ 
que  impedimentum  inferre).  To 
conquer  o.’s  (impedimenta  superare). 
To  place  an  o.  or  impediment  in 
aby’s  way  (moram  ci  afferre  or  in¬ 
terponere). 

Odium ;  Unpopularity.  To  bring,  or 


endeavor  to  bring,  aby  into  o.  (in¬ 
vidiam  ci  conflare  or  facere).  Tc 
incur  the  o.  (invidiam  subire)  To 
increase  aby’s  unpopularity  (cs  in¬ 
vidiam  augere,  inflammare). 

Opinion.  See  Judgment.  In  my  o 
(ut  opinio  nostra  est,  ut  mea  lert 
opinio).  Opinions  are  implanted 
(inseruntur) :  are  rooted  up  (evel- 
lunturt) :  are  imbibed  (imbibuntur) 
prevail  amongst  men  (animos  homi¬ 
num  pervadunt) :  are  shaken  or 
weakened  (labefactantur,  minuun¬ 
tur)  :  are  given  up  (remittuntur  or 
deponuntur):  are  confirmed  (con¬ 
firmantur)  :  are  maintained  or  sup 
ported  (defenduntur) :  wear  away 
gradually  or  in  time  (diuturnitate 
extabescunt).  His  present  political 

o. ’s  (ea  quae  de  republic^,  nunc 
sentit  or  sentiat).  To  be  driven  fm 
an  o.  (de  opinione  dejici,  depelli). 

Opportunity.  [Occasio,  facultas,  &c. 
See  Dod.  occasio.]  As  soon  as  he 
saw  an  o.  (simul  ac  primum  ei  oc¬ 
casio  visa  estl).  An  o.  is  offered 
(obfertur) :  is  given  (datur) :  is  had 
(habetur,  tenetur) :  is  let  go  or  slip 
(omittitur) :  is  wanting  (deest) :  is 
seized  (arripitur).  To  get  an  o 
(occasionem  nancisci).  If  I  have, 
or  shall  have,  an  o.  (si  fuerit  occa¬ 
sio.  si  occasio  tulerit).  To  give  aby 
an  o.  (facere  ci  potestatem).  To 
make  the  most  of  au  o.  (occasionem 
urgere). 

Owe.  To  consider  one’s  self  to  owe 
one’s  life  to  fortune,  children,  &c 
to  aby  (ab  qo  se  habere  vitam,  for¬ 
tunas,  liberos,  arbitrary). 

P. 

Part  (i.  e.  in  a  play).  To  act  this  p 
of  compassion  (has  partes  miseri¬ 
cordiae  agere).  To  undertake  the 

p.  of  athg  (cs  rei  partes  suscipere). 
To  play  the  first  p.  or  fiddle  (primas 
agere).  To  surrender  or  offer  the 
first  p.  in  athg  to  aby  (ci||  cs  rei 
primas  deferre) 


t  Qd  ci  ex  animo  evellere, 
i  Simulae  potestas  prirnum  data  est  C 
t)  In  Pison.  ii.  $  25.  See  Life. 

II  Or  ad  qm. 


326 


VOCABULARY. 


Part;  Share.  To  call  or  invite  aby 
to  a  share  (in  partem  vocare). 

Pathetic.  To  utter  in  a  very  p. 
manner  (magna  cum  misericordia, 
pronuntiare). 

Peace.  To  sue  for  p.  (pacem  petere, 
precibus  exposcere,  orare).  To  ob¬ 
tain  p.  (pacem  impetrare).  To 
make  p.  (pacem  facere,  conficere, 
constituere,  componere — with  aby , 
cum  qo).  To  offer  aby  terms  of  p. 
(ci  ultro  pacis  conditiones  ferre). 
To  break  the  p.  (pacem  frangere). 
To  live  in  p.  with  aby  (concorditer 
vivere  cum  qo).  Without  conclu¬ 
ding  a  p.  (pace  infecta.).  To  treat 
for  p.  (agere  de  pace).  Negotia¬ 
tions  for  p.  are  on  foot  (de  pace 
agitur). 

Plea.  See  Excuse. 

Pleasure.  To  be  productive  of  p. 
(voluptatis  efficientem  esse).  To 
produce  or  cause  p.  (voluptatem 
conciliare,  parere).  To  derive  p. 
fm  athg  (voluptatem  ex  re  capere, 
percipere).  To  be  moderato  in  the 
pursuit  of  p.  (voluptatis  fruendae 
modum  tenere).  With  p.  (lubens, 
lubenter).  With  great  p.  (luben- 
tissime).  P.  tickles  the  senses 
(voluptas  sensus  titillat).  To  give 
one’s  self  up  to  p.  (voluptatibus  se 
dedere,  or  totum  se  tradere).  To 
have  a  pleasurable  recollection  of 
athg  (cs  rei  recordatione  frui).  To 
increase  p.  (voluptatem  augere, 
amplificare).  To  be  soothed — cor¬ 
rupted  (voluptate  deleniri — cor¬ 
rumpi).  Inclined  to  p.  (ad  volup¬ 
tatem  propensus). 

Possessio n.  To  put  aby  in  p.  of  an¬ 
other’s  property  (immittere  qrn  in 
ct  bona;  or  mittere  qm  in  posses- 
s,onem  bonorum  cs).  To  eject  a 
person  fm — (de  possessione  dimo¬ 
vere  et  dejicere :  possessione  de¬ 
pellere,  deturbare).  To  remain  in 
p.  of  athg  (in  cs  rei  possessione 
manere  or  permanere)  To  mako  i 
athg  one’s  own  by  long  and  unin-  ! 
terrupted  p.  (usucapere  qd).  To 
give  up  p.  (possessione  cedere,  de-  j 
cedere).  To  be  in  p.  of  (esse  in 
possessione  cs  rei.) 

Power.  To  have  aby  or  athg  in  one’s 


p.  (qm  or  qd  in  potestate  suk  ha* 
bere).  To  have  p.  of  life  and  death 
(vitae  necisque  potestatem  habere. 
C.)  Athg  is  in  my  p.  (situm  est 
qd  in  potestate  mek  ;  est  qd  facul¬ 
tatis  meae).  To  fall  into  aby’s  p. 
(in  cs  potestatem  cadere).  To  re¬ 
duce  under  one’s  p.  (redigere  in 
suam  ditionem  ac  potestatem).  To 
submit  to  the  p.  of  aby  (se  sub  cs 
potestatem  subjicere). 

Promise.  To  make  a  p.  (promissum 
facere).  To  abide  by  a  p.  (pro¬ 
misso  stare) :  to  fulfil  or  perform 
(promissum  efficere,  solvere) :  to 
make  good  (promisso  satisfacere) : 
to  keep  (promissum  servare)  :  not 
to  depend  much  or  place  reliance 
on  p.’s  (promissis  non  valde  pen¬ 
dere).  To  claim  fm  aby  the  fulfil¬ 
ment  of  a  p.  (promissum  a  qo  exi¬ 
gere). 

Provisions.  See  Corn. 

Q. 

Question.  The  q.  is  put ;  is  put  to 
the  vote  ;  is  determined  (discessio 
fit — of  questions  in  the  senate , 
when  the  ayes  and  noes  arranged 
themselves  on  different  sides). 

R. 

Reason.  I  can  give  a  r.  for  my  be 
lief  (cur  credam  afferre  possum) 

I  have  good  r.’s  for  being  silent,  or 
for  my  silence  (constat  nobis  silen¬ 
tii  nostri  ratio).  To  give  the  r.  of 
or  for  athg  (rationem  cs  rei  afferre, 
dicere).  To  explain  the  r. ;  a  plan 
(explicare,  exponere  rationem). 
With  reason  (optimo  jure;  jure 
meritoque  ;  jure  ac  merito).  And 
not  without  r.  (nec  injuriH). 

Religion  (pietas  erga  Deum,  of  per¬ 
sonal  religion;  res  divinas,  of  re¬ 
ligion  considered  objectively).  To 
apostatize  from  the  r.  of  one’s 
country  (sacra  patria  deserere). 
To  embrace  or  be  converted  to  the 
Christian  r.  (sacra  Christiana  sus¬ 
cipere,  especially  of  a  body). 

Report.  A  r.  reaches  aby  (fama  ad 
qm  perfertur) :  aby’s  ears  (ad  cs 
aures  pervenit).  To  spread  a  r.  of 
athg  (famam  cs  rei  dissipare).  A 


VOCABULARY. 


32Y 


r.  begins  to  be  whispered  about  or 
circulated  from  any  place  (fama 
ab  qo  loco  manat).  A  r.  is  becom¬ 
ing  current ;  there  is  a  r.  in  men’s 
mouth  (fama  surgit  or  nascitur). 
R.  says  (fama  nuntiat).  To  hear 
athg  by  common  r.  (communi  fama 
atque  sermone  audire  qd  de  qa  re). 

Reputation.  See  Name. 

Rest.  Not  to  let  aby  r.  (qm  quies¬ 
cere  or  requiescere  non  pati).  To 
r.  after  long  labors  (ex  diuturno 
labore  quiescere).  Not  to  have  or 
take  a  moment’s  r.  (nullam  partem 
quietis  capere).  To  be  composing 
or  preparing  one’s  self  for  r.  (quieti 
se  dare  or  tradere). 

Reward.  To  give  a  r.  to  aby  (prae¬ 
mium  ci  dare,  tribuere).  To  honor 
aby  with  a  r. ;  to  confer  a  r.  on  aby 
(praemio  qm  donare,  decorare,  affi¬ 
cere  :  praemium  ci  deferret).  To 
be  rewarded,  to  receive  a  r.  (praemio 
donari).  To  recompense  with  a  r. 
(remunerari  qm  praemio).  To  be 
rewarded  or  receive  a  r.  for  ath^ 
(praemium  or  fructum  cs  rei  capere, 
percipere,  ferre) :  for  athg  by  aby 
(fructus  cs  rei  ferre  ex  qo).  I  con¬ 
sider  myself  richly  rewarded  (mag¬ 
num  rei  fructum  percepisse  videor). 
To  earn  a  r.  (praemium  consequi). 

Risfc.  To  r.  athg,  or  expose  athg  to 
a  r.  (qd  in  aleam  dare :  ire  in  aleam 
cs  rei).  To  r.  one’s  life  (commit¬ 
tere  se  periculo  mortis).  To  take 
the  r.  of  athg  on  one’s  self  (rem 
periculi  sui  facere). 

Rout  (pellere,  profligare).  See  Flight. 

S. 

$ay.  Nothing  is  said  about  aby  (de 
qo  silentium  est).  After  much  had 
been  said  on  both  sides  (multis  ver¬ 
bis  ultro  citroque  habitis).  To  s. 
athg  merely  to  please  aby  (qd  auri¬ 
bus  cs  dare  :  cs  auribus  servire.  C .) 
As  the  saying  is  (ut  aiunt). 

School.  To  open  a  s.  (ludum  aperire). 
To  put  a  boy  to  s.  with  aby  (qm  ci 
in  disciplinam  tradere)  To  send  a 


♦  t  Prcemium  ci  deferre ,  of  a  state  reward¬ 
ing  merit  by  a  public  act,  by  public  hon¬ 
ors,  &e. 


boy  to  a  public  s.  f  (scholarum  fre¬ 
quentiae  et  velut  publicis  praecep¬ 
toribus  tradere). 

Sentence.  See  Judgment. 

Share.  See  Part. 

Side.  To  be  on  a  person’s  s.  (ab  qo 
stare :  cum  qo  sentire  :  to  he  of  the 
same  way  of  thinking  on  political 
questions).  Athg!  is  on  aby’s  s 
(qd  cum  aliquo  facit). 

Stage.  To  hiss  off  the  s.  (exsibilare  ; 
or  exsibilare  et  explodere).  To  ap¬ 
pear  on  the  s.  (in  scenam  prodire). 

Study.  To  intermit  one’s  learned 
s.’s  (intermittere  studia  doctrinae) 
To  pursue  these  s.’s  (haec  studia 
colere).  To  have  made  the  arts 
one’s  s.  (artibus  suum  studium  de¬ 
disse).  To  return  to  these  s.’s  (haec 
studia  repetere,  renovare,  recolere) 
See  Letter  (3). 

T. 

Time.§  Before  the  t.  (ante  tempus). 
To  leave  one’s  self  no  t.  for,  &c. 
(nullum  sibi  spatium  relinquere  ad, 
&c.)  To  try  to  gain  t.  (spatium  or 
moram  interponere).  All  the  t.  I 
can  spare  fm  athg  (quod  mihi  de  re 
qk  temporis  datur).  To  have  t.  to 
do  athg  (cs  rei  faciendae  tempus 
habere).  Nor  was  there  t.  to,  &lc. 
(nec  fuit  spatium  ad,  &c.)  It  is  t. 
to,  &c.  (tempus  est  with  ger.  in  di, 
infin.  or  ut).  He  thought  there 
was  no  more  t.  to  lose  (nihil  ultra 
differendum  ratus  est).  He  says 
there  is  no  t.  to  lose  (differendum 
esse  negat).  To  find  t.  (tempus 
lucrari,  nancisci).  To  spend  t. 
(tempus  in  qa  re  ponere  or  consu¬ 
mere  ;  ad  qm  rem  conferre).  To 
watch  one’s  t.  for  athg  (tempus  ci 
rei  observare).  To  choose  my  or  a 
convenient  t.  (tempus  cs  rei  scite 
et  commode  capere).  To  get  a 
convenient  or  proper  t.  (tempus 
idoneum  nancisci).  To  let  the  t. 
for  action  slip  (tempus  rei  gerendae 


t  To  send  a  boy  to  a  school,  opp.  to 
keeping  him  at  home,  studia  extra  lime * 
proferre.  Plin. 
t  Truth,  veritas. 

k  t)  Immediately  or  some  time  aftei  wards, 

confestim  aut  ex  intervallo 


328 


VOCABULARY. 


dimittere).  To  sleep  the  t.  away 
(tempori  indormire,  Phil.  3,  14). 
To  happen  at  a  most  inconvenient 

t.  (in  alienissimum  tempus  cadere). 
To  be  over  in  a  moment  of  t.  (fieri 
ad  punctum  temporis,  C.  Tuse.  1, 
34,  82). 

U. 

Under.  To  be  u.  aby’s  command 
(esse  sub  cs  imperio).  To  reduce 

u.  aby’s  power  (sub  cs  potestatem 
redigere). 

Understanding.  Our  u.  comprehends 
(intelligentia  nostra  capit  qd).  A 
man  of  u  (in  qo  inest  or  est  intelli¬ 
gentia).  To  adapt  athg  to  the  u. 
of  ordinary  men  (ad  popularem  in- 
telligentiam  qd  accommodare.) 

Unhealthiness.  To  escape  from  the 
bad  effects  of  the  unhealthy  season 
(abesse  ab  injuria,  temporis). 

Unpopularity.  See  Odium. 

V. 

Vex.  To  be  vexed  at  athg  (moles¬ 
tiam  capere  or  trahere :  molestia, 
affici ;  all  with  ex  q&  re).  To  be 
vexed  that  (aegre,  graviter,  moleste 
fero  ;  with  acc.  and  inf.) 

Victory.  To  gain  a  v.  over  aby  (vic¬ 
toriam  ferre  or  referre  ex  qo :  vic¬ 
toriam  reportare  ab  or  de  qo). 

View.  To  dissent  fm  this  v.  (ab  hac 
ratione  dissentire).  To  do  athg 
with  the  v.  of  (facere  qd  eo  consi¬ 
lio,  ut,  &c.) 

W. 

Way.  To  make  w.  for  aby  (dece¬ 
dere  ci  de  via.  dare  ci  viam). 
These  things  may  be  taught  in  two 
w.’s :  or  there  are  two  w.’s  of 
teaching  these  things  (haec  dupli¬ 
cem  habent  docendi  viam).  To 

search  out  for  new  w.’s  (inusitatas 
vias  indagare).  To  desert  old  ways 
(vias  tritas  relinquere). 

Word.  N ot  to  get  a  w.  fm  aby  (ver¬ 
bum  ex  qo  nullum  elicere).  Not  to 
be  able  to  utter  a  w.  (verbum  om¬ 
nino  nullum  facere  posse).  To 

define  one’s  w.’s  (verba  definire  et 
describere).  I  wish  to  say  a  couple 


of  w.’s  to  you  (tribus  verbis  te  volo) 
By  w.  of  mouth  (verbo,  opp.  scrip¬ 
tura).  To  have  w.’s  with  aby  (al¬ 
tercari  cum  qo).  To  have  never 
had  any  w.’s  with  aby  (nullo  verbo 
concertasse  cum  qo).  To  waste 
w.’s  (verba  frustra  consumere).  To 
listen  to  aby’s  w.’s  (loquenti  aures 
prsebere).  The  w.  plough  (verbum 
aratri :  not  verbum  aratrumt).  Nor 
has  this  w.  any  other  meaning  (ne¬ 
que  ulla  alia  huic  verbo  subjecta 
notio  est,  nisi).  To  use  a  w.  (ver¬ 
bo  uti :  but  verbum  ponere  in  qo  if 
to  use  against  a  person).  To 
weigh  the  force  of  w.’s  (diligenter 
examinare  verborum  pondera).  The 
most  appropriate  w.’s  (verba  maxi¬ 
me  cujusque  rei  propria).  To  give 
up  an  opinion  for  a  w.  (verbo  de 
sententia,  desistere.  C.)  This  word 
is  usually  applied  to  athg  (hoc  no¬ 
men  de  q&  re  poni  solet).  To  in¬ 
clude  two  notions  in  this  w. :  or  to 
include  two  things  in  the  notion  of 
this  w.  (huic  verbo  duas  res  subji¬ 
cere.  Fin.  2,  4,  3).  To  attach  a 
meaning  to  a  w.  (vocabulo,  verbo, 
&.C.,  notionem  or  sententiam  subji¬ 
cere).  To  which  the  w.  virtue  is 
usually  applied  (in  quo  nomen  poni 
solet  virtutis). 

Y. 

Yoke.  To  place  a  y.  on  aby  (jugum 
ci  imponere,  prop,  and  fig.)  To 
unyoke  (jugurn  ci  solvere  or  de- 
mere).  To  deliver  aby  fm  a  y. 
(jugum  a  cervicibus  cs  depellere) 
To  free  one’s  self  fm,  or  shake  off, 
a  y.  (jugum  excutere,  jugo  se  ex¬ 
uere.  jugum  exuere,  propr.  and 
fig. :  exuere,  to  do  it  gradually ; 
to  slip  it  off).  To  bring  aby  under 
the  y.  of  slavery  (ci  jugum  servi¬ 
tutis  injungere).  To  submit  to  the 
y.  (jugum  accipere). 


t  If  the  word  in  apposition  is  an  adj., 
the  following  passage  of  Cicero  is  a  good 
example:  “To  the  word  happy,"  SfC.—> 
huic  verbo ,  quum  beatum  dicimus,  «J-c.  Tuse 
5,  29. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  “  ANTIBARB  ARCS.”* 


Accuracy,  diligentia,  cura,  [accuratio 
once  Cic.  Brut.  67,  238.] 

Act  a  play,  docere  fabulam  ( of  those 
who  get  it  up,  and  of  the  author) : 
agere  (of  the  play  eh'  acting  his 
part.) 

Again  and  again,  etiam  atque  etiam 
(■z=.very  earnestly  with  verbs 
of  entreating) .—several  times, 
often:  iterum  et  or  ac  tertio:  ite¬ 
rum  et  saepius  ;+  iterum  ac  tertium. 
C. 

Against  the  stream,  amne  or  flumine 
adverso  [not  fluvio  adv.]. 

Agree.  (1)  I  —  make  an  agreement; 
agreement  with  any  body,  mihi  cum 
quo  convenit.  \Ve  agreed,  internos 
convenit.  Even  the  consuls  were  not 
thoroughly  agreed ,  ne  inter  consules 
quidem  ipsos  satis  conveniehat.  L. 
[not  convenio  cum  quo.]  (2)  =  cor¬ 
respond  with ,  answer  to,  consentire 
cum  quare.  (3)  Of  a  thing  it  is 
used  personally :  pax  convenerat : 
quae  convenerant :  si  posset  inter  eos 
quid  convenire  C. 

Almighty,  summus,  maximus  [not  om¬ 
nipotens,  except  as  a  theological  term] 
or  by  Deus  only  for  1  the  Almighty.' 
The  Romans  used  Optimus  Maxi¬ 
mus  with  the  name  of  Jupiter. — 
Jupiter  O.  M. 

Appear  —  ‘  make  his  appearance 
amongst  us'  (of  one  who  is  dead, 
exsistere. 

- =  ‘  seem,'  videri  (not  apparere). 

-  —  ‘  to  be  manifest ,'  apparere 

"ideri). 

(in  a  dream \  ostendere  se  cui 


in  somnio  ;  videri  cui  in  somnis ;  per 
somnum,  quiete,  per  quietem  ;  which 
likeness  appears  in  their  bodies ,  quae 
similitudo  in  corporibus  apparet.  C. 

Appear  in  any  body's  eyes,  judicio  cujus 
esse ;  ab  quo  existimari ;  videri  cui  • 
esse  apud  quern. 

- .  Day  appears,  dies  venit 

(comes) :  illucescit  (begins  to  shine). 

Assert,  dicere,  affirmare  [not  asserere]. 

Author,  scriptor. 

Authority .  An  authority  (used  of  a 
person),  auctor.  A  weighty  authority , 
locuples  auctor. 

Bodily  (pleasures),  corporis  (volup¬ 
tates).  Corporeus  is  ‘  consisting  of  a 
body.' 

Break.  To  break  down  a  bridge,  pon¬ 
tem  rescindere,  dissolvere,  interrum¬ 
pere  [not  pontem  rumpere  or  frangere]. 

Classical  author,  scriptor  optimus, 
praestantissimus ;  or  scriptor  primae 
classis.  Cic.  [Gellius  introduced 
scriptor  classicus,  as  opposed  to 
scriptor  proletarius.] 

Command  (an  army),  praeesse. 

Compassion.  From  compassion,  mise¬ 
ricordia  captus,  ductus,  or  permotus. 

Demagogues,  concionatores  :  popu¬ 
lares,  or  populares  homines.  [If 
demagogi  be  used  quos  Graeffi  dicunt, 
or  ut  Graeco  veroo  utar  should  be 
added.] 

Each  other,  inter  se ;  of  what  is  done 
mutually  or  reciprocally: 
not  invicem. 


*  frica*)  Extracts  are  taken  from  a  larger  work  of  Mr.  Arnold’s,  principally 
on  the  Latin  Particles,  which  is  in  course  of  preparation  for  the  American 

public. 

t  To  ask  again  and  again,  etiam  atque  etiam ;  or  iterum  et  saepius  rogare 
Bui  etiam  atque  etiam  is  never  really  numerical. 


330 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  “  ANTIBARBARUS.” 


Exasperate  :  exacuere  ( Nep .) ;  in¬ 
fensum  reddere  :  iram  cujus  incen¬ 
dere.  [Exasperare,  exacerbare.  Liv.] 

Experience ,  usus  rerum,  usus  [not  ex¬ 
perientia].  From  experience ,  re,  usu, 
exitu  doctus,  expertus  ’.  from  my  own 
experience,  expertus  in  me,  expertus. 

\Fish  out  aihgjrum  aoy ,  ab  qo  qd  expis¬ 
cari,  C. 

Flesh  :  in  ‘  to  lose  flesh,'1  ‘  gain  flesh?  4~c. 
corpus  amittere  [not  carnem]. 

Fleshly  ( of  pleasures ,  $-c.),  by  gen., 
corporis. 

Greek.  To  speak  Greek  or  good  Greek, 
Graece  loqui. 

Grow  (an  old  man,  <$  c. =‘  become'),  fieri. 

Health,  valetudo.— Good  health,  sanitas: 
bona  or  prospera  valetudo  (not  vale¬ 
tudo  only). — salus  (the  continued  state 
or  preservation  of  good  health.) 

Imagine  (1)  —  to  form  a  representation 
in  the  mind ,  animo  cogitare,  conci¬ 
pere,  complecti  : — animo  fingere,  ef¬ 
fingere  ;  cogitatione  fingere  or  depin¬ 
gere  : — proponere  sibi  ante  oculos 
animumque  :  (2)  =  conjecture ,  con¬ 
jecturam  capere,  facere :  conjicere 

*  [f^  imaginari  belongs  to  the  silver 
age],  (3)  —  to  entertain  an  unfounded 
notion ,  opinari,  in  opinione  esse  :  in¬ 
duisse  sibi  falsam  cujus  rei  per¬ 
suasionem.  Q.  quid  somniare 
(  =  dream  it).  (4)  I  imagine  (insert¬ 
ed  in  a  sentence ),  opinor  :  ut  opinor. 

Impure.  An  impure  style ,  inquinatus 
sermo,  inquinata  oratio. 

Impute  a  thing  to  anybody ,  tribuere, 
attribuere,  adscribere,  adsignare, 
acceptum  referre  (quid  cui).  [Im¬ 
putare,  Quint.  Plin.  jun.). 

Inspire  anybody  with  hope,  fear,  rf*c., 
spem,  admirationem,  formidinem, 
cui  injicere. 

- anybody  with  a  desire,  quern 

cupiditate  cujus  rei  faciendae  inci¬ 
tare,  or  incitare  ad  aliquid  faciendum. 

Inspired ,  afflatus  numine  divino ;  in¬ 
stinctu  divino  perculsus  ;  instinctus 
divino  spiritu. 

Invite  (to  supper,  &c.),  invitare  (by 
word  of  mouth)  :  vocare  (by  a  slave). 

Key  of  a  country,  janua,  [‘quurn  earn 
urbem  sibi  Mithridates  Asi &  januam 
fore  putasset,  qua  effracta  et  revulsa 
tota  pateret  provincia.’  C .] 

hatin.  To  speak  Latin  or  good  Latin , 
Latine  dicere,  loqui. 


Mercifully  [not  misericorditer,  but]  cum 
misericordia  or  miseratione,  miseri¬ 
cordia  captus,  &c.  To  deal  merci¬ 
fully  with  anybody,  misericordem 
esse  in  aliquem  ;  misericordia  uti  in 
aliquem ;  misericordem  se  praebere 
in  aliquem. 

Offer  violence,  vim  afferre  alicui. 

One  or  two,  unus  et  alter,  unusitemque 
alter.  Unus  alterve  (  =  o  n  e  or  ai 
most  two). 

Open  a  way  or  road  (e.  g.  by  the  sword), 
viam  aperire,  patefacere.  L. 
Opportunity,  occasio,  locus  or  facultas ; 
tempus  (alicujus  rei  faciendae).  An 
opportunity  of  doing  any  thing  is  of¬ 
fered,  locus  faciendae  alicujus  rei 
datur. 

t Palm:  to  bear  the  palm,  palmam 
ferre. 

Pay  honours  to  anybody,  cui  honores 
habere,  tribuere :  honore  aliquem 
afficere  ( not  honorem  cui  exhibere). 
Prayers.  To  offer  prayers,  precation¬ 
em  or  preces  facere,  preces  Deo  adhi¬ 
bere  (C.).  preces  mittere  (Liv.). 
Obs.  preces  fundere  is  poet. 

Preserve  (states,  fyc.),  conservare. 
Probable ,  verisimilis  [not  probabilis, 
tvhich  means, ‘  respectable,’  ‘  tolerably 
good’].  It  seems  probable  that  Milo 
killed  Clodius,  Milo  Clodium  inter¬ 
fecisse  videtur  (but  verisimilis  is 
quite  correct). 

Produce  a  passage,  to,  locum  (versum, 
&c.)  afferre. 

- witnesses,  producere  or  pro¬ 
ferre  testes  :  to  produce  evidence ,  tes¬ 
timonium  proferre. 

- a  reason,  to,  causas  afferre. 

Pure  (of  style),  purus  et  emendatus. 
Purity  of  style,  integritas,  castitas  or 
sinceritas  orationis. 

Quote  an  author,  to,  producere,  proferre 
scriptorem  (producere,  proferre  tes¬ 
tes  being  used ,  but  not  locum). 

- a  passage,  locum  afferre,  proferre 

[not  producere]. 

Reason,  causa,  when  =  1  ground?  1  mo¬ 
tive?  To  bring  another  reason,  al¬ 
teram  afferre  rationem  or  causam. 

Severe  (of  a  disease),  gravis. 

Shed  tears,  lachrymas  effundere  ot 
profundere. 

Shed  blood  zn  kill,  occidere. 

Slay  oneself  (lay  violent  hands  on  out 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE 


ANTIBARBARUS. 


331 


u 


self,  die  by  one's  own  hands,  commit 
suicide),  se  interimere,  mortem  sibi 
consciscere ;  mortem  or  vim  sibi  in¬ 
ferre  ;  se  multare  morte.* 

Speak.  The  thing  speaks  for  itself  si 
res  verba  desideraret,  ac  non  pro  s  e 
ipso  loqueretur.  C. 

Style,  oratio,  dictio,  genus  scribendi  or 
dicendi. 

• - .  To  express  oneself  in,  or  to  pos¬ 

sess  a  good  style  (of  a  Latin  author) 


is,  oratione  emendata  et  Latina  uti; 
emendate  et  Latine  dicere. 

Suicide  (to  commit),  mortem  sibi  con-«  • 
sciscere ;  mortem  or  vim  sibi  inferre ; 
se  interimere,  &c.  ;t  mortem  ultro 
oppetere  (when  the  death  is  not  com¬ 
mitted  by  one's  own  hands  ;  i.  e.  is 
virtv  ai  not  actual,  suicide ). 

Think  highly  of,  fyc.,  de  aliquo  magni¬ 
fice  sentire. 


*  *  Also ;  manus  sibi  afferre :  manu  sibi  vitam  exhaurire.  (C.i 


INDE  X 


r 

Jl 


ENGLISH. 


rQ,  stands  for  Questions.  —  The  numerals  refer  to  the  First  Part  of 

Latin  Prose  Composition.] 


A. 

A,  sometimes  translated  by  aliquis, 
quispiam,  or  quidam ,  393. 
abandoned,  perditus. 
able  (to  be),  posse,  quire  ( queo ),  125,  e. 
Abdera  (of),  Abderites ,  G.  se. 
abilities,  ingenium  (sing.). 
abound,  abundare  (abl.). 
about  (=  concerning),  de  (abl.). 
about  (  =  nearly),  fere,  adv. ;  circiter, 
prep. 

above  (such  an  age),  306,  and  Q,. 
absence  (in  his),  absens. 
absent  (to  be),  abesse,  227. 
abstain  from,  temperare  ab,  220. 
abundance  of,  abunde,  adv.  (gen.). 
acceptable,  gratus,  212. 
accident  (by),  casu. 
accompany,  comitari. 
accomplish,  conficere,  fee,  feet. 
account :  on  —  of,  ergo  (gen.) :  207. 
accuse,  accusare;  (if  not  in  a  court  of 
justice)  incusare  (gen.  of  charge), 
accused-person,  reus. 
accustomed  (to  be),  solere,  solitus. 
acquainted,  to  become,  noscere ,  385. 
acquit,  absolvere,  solv,  solut  (gen.  of 
charge). 

acquit  of  a  capital  charge,  capitis  absol¬ 
vere. 

adapted,  accommodatus,  212. 
addition  :  in  —  to  this,  huc  accedit,  acce¬ 
debat,  &c.,  513. 
adherents  (his  own),  sui. 
adjure,  obtestari  (acc.). 
admire,  admirari. 

adopt  a  resolution,  consilium  inire  or 
capere. 

advantage,  emolumentum. 


advantageous  :  to  be,  prodesse  (dat.). 
advantageous:  to  be  very — ,  magnet 
utilitati  esse,  24*2  (3). 
adversity,  re's  adv er see. 
advice,  consilium. 

advise,  suadere  (dat.)  See  222;  mo¬ 
nere  (with  acc.  of  person) :  both 
with  ut,  ne,  by  75. 
affair,  res. 

afraid  :  to  be  — ,  timere,  vereri,  S.  99,  e. 
afterwards,  postea :  with  nouns  of 
time:  post,  used  adverbially, 
after  (before  a  sentence),  postquam.  See 
514. 

after,  prep,  post  (with  acc.). 
after  the  battle,  (confestim)  a  proelio. 
again  and  again,  etiam  atque  etiam. 
again  from  the  beginning,  ab  integro. 
against,  adversus  (acc.)  ;  in  (with  acc. ; 
of  feelings,  actions,  &c.,  against  a 
person). 

against  his  will,  invitus  (adj.). 
against  the  will  of  Caius,  Caio  invito 
364. 

age  (  =  time  of  life),  octas,  atis. 


agitate,  perturbare. 

agitated  (having  his  mind),  incensus 
animum,  298. 

ago,  abhinc  (to  precede  the  subst.  or 
numeral),  305. 
agreeable,  gratus,  212. 
agreed  :  it  is  — ,  constat  (acc.  with  infin.), 
agricultural  operations,  res  rustic ce. 
all,  omnis,  cunctus  ;  (  =  whole),  unirer 
sus,  totus. 

all  together,  cuncti  universi,  443. 
all  over  again,  ab  integro 
all  taken  one  by  one,  singuli. 


INDEX  .. - ENGLISH. 


allowed :  it  is  — ,  constat  ( acc .  with 
infin.). 

allowed  :  I  am — ,  licet  mihi. 

allow  it  to  happen,  committere  ut. 

almost,  prope,  pome. 

almost:  I  —  think,  haud  scio  an,  161. 

(See  note  on  Diff.  25.) 
alone,  solus ;  or  (if  one  person)  unus. 
Alps,  Alpes,  G.  ium. 
already,  jam. 

also,  sometimes  translated  by  the  pro¬ 
noun  idem,  387. 
altar,  ara. 

although,  451,  and  Q,.  on  §  56. 
although  indeed,  quamquam  (indic.). 
always,  after  superlat.  by  quisque.  See 
399. 

a  man  (  =  any :  indef.),  quis. 
amanuensis,  a  manu  servus. 
among,  inter. 

amongst  (a  people),  apud  with  acc. 
amuse,  delectare. 

and,  p.  18,  d  ;  *  to  me  and  you,’  in  Lat. 

‘  to  me  with  you,’  p.  78. 
and  that  too,  not — ,  nec  is,  385. 
anger,  ira. 

angry  :  to  be  — ,  irasci  (dat.):  succsnsere 
(dat.)  222. 

animal,  animal,  alis. 
another,  alter,  era,  &c.  G.  alterius :  an¬ 
swering  to  ‘ it  is  one  thing,'  aliud, 
38. 

another  man’s,  alienus. 
answer,  respondere  (dat.). 
antiquity,  antiquitas. 
any  *  (after  expers),  omnis. 
any.  See  389. 

any  where  (=  any  whither),  usquam, 
402. 

any  man  may,  cujusvis  est.  (See 
389—92.) 

appeal  to,  appellare  (acc.). 
appear,  (=  seem),  videri  (visus). 
appear  (show  myself),  apparere. 
apply  vigorously  to,  incumbere  in  (with 
acc.  ) ;  cubu,  cubit. 
approved  (valour,  <Stc.,)  spectatus. 
arms,  to  take,  arma  capere. 
army,  ex  er  citus,  us. 
arrived  at:  men  have—,  ventum  est, 
296. 

arrow,  sagitta. 

as,  after  tam,  talis,  tantus,  tot,  is,  quam, 
quantus,  qualis,  quot,  respectively, 
as,  alter  idem,  qui,  43  (or  ac,  atque). 
as  far  as  I  know,  quod  sciam,  56. 
as  far  as  I  can,  quoa  dejus  facere  pos¬ 
sum,  512. 


3 33 

as  far  as  possible,  >  quoad  ejus  fieri 
as  far  as  can  be  done,  )  potest,  512. 
as  it  were,  quasi. 

as  soon  as,  simul  ac ;  ut  primum ;  quum 
primum;  ubi;  ut,  512;  514. 
as  many  as  200,  ad  ducentos. 
as  not  to,  after  ‘  such  ’  or  ‘  so  ’  in  a  nega¬ 
tive  sentence,  quin  (85) :  if  ‘  such  ’ 
or  1  so  ’  were  in  a  positive  sentence, 
ut  would  be  used  by  66. 
ashamed  :  am  —  of,  pudet,  207. 
ask,  rogare. 

ask  pardon  for  a  fault,  delicti  veniam 
petere. 

assault  (a  town),  oppugnare. 
assault :  to  accuse  of  an  — ,  reum  facere 
de  vi. 

assist,  auxiliari,  adjuvare ,  opitulari; 
sublevare,  succurrere ,  subvenire , 
(See  p.  81,  k.) 

at  anybody’s  feet.  See  75,  1. 
at  once,  —  and  ;  idem  —  idem,  396. 
at,  of  place  near  which  a  battle  is 
fought,  &c.,  apud  (or  ad),  457. 
at  two  miles’  distance,  a  millibus  pas¬ 
suum  duobus ,  348. 

at  two  miles  off,  a  millibus  passuum 
duobus. 

Athens,  Athenae. 

Athenian,  Atheniensis. 
attached  to,  amans;  diligens  (with 
gen.),  183. 

attack,  adgredi,  gressus ;  adoriri,  ortui 
(acc.). 

attend  to,  attendere,  229. 
averse  to,  alienus,  212. 
avoid,  vitare. 
authority,  auctoritas. 
aware,  to  be,  intetligere. 


E. 

Baggage,  impedimenta,  pi.  (properly 
hindrances). 

banish,  pellere  ex  civitate  ( pepul,  puls). 

banished  from,  extorris  (abl.),  276. 

banquet,  convivium. 

barbarian,  barbarus. 

base,  turpis. 

battle,  bellum. 

battle  of  Cannae,  pugna  Cannensis. 
be  it  far  from  us.  See  note  t,  p.  40. 
bear,  ferre  (tul,  lat,  33). 
beasts,  ferae. 

beaten  (to  be),  vapulare  (ah). 
become,  fieri,  factus  sum. 
become  acquainted  with,  noscere ,  385. 


•  The  pronouns  and  adverbs  for  ‘  any '  may  be  exhibited  in  a  convenien  and 


334 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


becoming  (to  be)  decere  ( acc .). 
befa!,  accidere  (dat.). 
before,  adv.  antea. 
before,  prep,  ante  (acc.). 
before  (standing  before  a  sentence), 
antequam ,  498,  &c. 
before  one’s  eyes,  ob  oculos. 
behold,  adspicere ,  io,  spex,  sped. 
beg,  petere,  petiv,  petit,  ab. 
begin,  coepisse  (began,  before  pass.  inf. 

coeptus  est). 
beginning,  initium. 
believe,  credere,  (dat.)  credid,  credit. 
believe,  I  can  scarcely  — ,  vix  credide¬ 
rim,  428,  and  note. 
believed,  I  am,  mihi  creditur,  285. 
belongs.  See  191. 
benefit,  benejicium. 
benefit,  v.  benefacere  (dat.). 
bereave,  orbare  (abl.). 
beseech,  obsecrare. 

u„an„tfo_  C  adspergere  (aliquid alicui, 
besprinkle,  ^  ° 

best,  optimus. 

best  to  be  done,  )  ,.  ,  \ 

best  to  do,  \  ophmumfactu  (sup.). 

betrayer,  proditor. 
better,  melior. 

better :  it  is  —  (=  more  satisfactory, 
preferable),  satius  est,  116.  Ex.  34, 
p.  '84. 


better :  it  would  have  been  — ,  satius  ot 

utilius  fuit,  426  (5). 
between,  inter. 

beware  of,  cavere,  cav,  caut,  233. 
bird,  avis:  (great  bird)  ales.  Volucris 
—  any  winged  creature, 
black,  niger. 
blame,  culpare. 

bleed  afresh  (of  a  wound),  recrudescere , 
crudu. 

blessing:  a  —  on  your  valour!  macte 
virtute  esto !  280,  a. 
blind,  coccus. 

blood,  sanguis,  inis,  m.  (when  shed , 
cruor). 

blot  out,  delere,  delev,  delet. 
boast,  gloriari,  (abl.)  also  de,  in,  273. 
boast,  to  make  the  same,  idem  gloriari, 
body,  corp-us,  oris. 
border  on,  adjacere,  229. 
born,  natus :  born  to,  natus  ad. 
born,  to  be,  nasci  (natus). 
both  —  and:  et  —  et. 
bounds.  See  Exceed. 
boy,  puer,  G.  pueri. 
branch-of-learning,  doctrina. 
breach  of  duty:  it  is  a — ,  contra  offi¬ 
cium  est. 

breadth,  a  finger’s.  See  Depart. 
break  one’s  word,  )  fidem  fallere ; 
break  a  promise,  $  feftll. 
bribery,  ambitus,  us. 


concise  form,  as  in  the  following  table : — 


1 

Inclusion  of  some. 

Exclusion 
of  all.* 

Inclusion  of 
all  alike. 

Less  em- 
phatical  after 
si,ne,num,& c. 

Pronouns. 

quisquam 

ullus 

quivis 

quilibet 

aliquis 

quispiam 

quis 

any  (body) 

Adverbs. 
(a)  Place. 

r  ( to ) 
usquam  < 

^  (af) 

quovis  (to) 

ubivis  1  /  A 
ubilibet  i  W 

aliquo  (to) 

alicubi  >  .  . 
uspiam  ( 

quo  (to) 

any  place 
or 

any  where. 

(b)  Time. 

I _ 

unquam 

aliquando 

quando 

any  time 
or 

ever. 

*  ippAll  are  generally  excluded  when  ‘any’  follows  negatives;  or  ‘ without, 
scarcely 'than:'  and  in  questions  that  expect  the  answer  'no,'  ('nobody,' 
'nothing,')  &c. 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


335 


bridge,  pons ,  ntis,  m. 
bring  an  action  or  charge  against,  reuin 
facere;  fee,  fact:  (with  gen.  or  dc,) 
'187. 

burden,  onus,  oneris. 
burnt :  to  be — ,  clef  agrare. 
burst- out  afresh,  recrudescere,  crudu. 
business,  negotium. 
but  if,  sin;  sin  autem,  451. 
but  if  not,  sin  minus,  451. 
but  a  little  more,  and  he  would  have 
perished,  minimum  abfuit  {jumpers.) 
quin  periret,  91.  * 

but,  after  universal  negatives,  (=who 
-  not),  quin,  [or,  qui  —  non,]  44. 
but,  after  universal  negatives  (=  ex¬ 
cept),  nisi,  or  prep,  preeter. 
but,  after  cannot.  See  Cannot. 
butcher,  trucidare. 
buy.  emere,  em,  empt. 
by  letter,  per  literas. 
by  =  near,  prope. 


C. 

Caesar,  Ccesar,  aris. 
call,  vocare,  appellare,  nominare ,  dicere, 
See  51. 

call  =  summon,  vocare. 

call  upon,  convenire,  ven,vent  {acc.). 

call  to  mind,  reminisci. 

camp,  castra,  pi. 

campaign,  end  of,  303. 

can,  posse,  quire  ( queo ),  125,  e. 

Cannae,  of,  Cannensis,  adj. 
cannot:  1  cannot  but — ,  facere  non 
possum  quin,  &c. 

cannot :  it  cannot  be  but  VnnX,  fieri  non 
,  potest  quin. 

capable  of  containing,  capax  (gen.). 

capital,  cap-ut,  itis. 

care  a  straw  for,  fiocci  facere. 

care  that  for,  hujus  facere. 

care,  cura. 

care :  for  any  thing  I  care,  470. 
careless  of,  negligens  (gen.). 
carry,  portare. 

Carthage,  Carthag-o,  inis. 
cast  forth,  projicere  jec,  ject. 
cause  to  be  done,  faciendum  curare, 
351,  356. 

cease,  desinere  desi,  desit :  ceased,  be¬ 
fore  inf.  pass,  desitus  cst. 
cease  speaking  tacere,  299. 
censure,  reprehensio,  onis. 
chameleon,  chamcdeon. 
chance,  casus,  Us. 
character,  mores  pi.  G.  um. 
charge  (falsely,)  insimulare  (gen.  of 
charge). 


charge  :  bring ,  or  pi  efer  a  =  to 
make  him  an  accused  person ,  reum 
facere  de  — ,  187. 

charge  (  =  enjoin),  mandare  (dat.). 
chargeable  (with  a  fault),  affinis,  212 
chaste,  castus. 
children,  liberi,  pi. 
cheese,  caseus. 

choose  (=  elect),  eligere ,  leg,  lect. 
Christian,  christianus. 
circumstance.  A  circumstance  which 
(referring  to  a  preceding  sentence), 
quee  res.  36,  37  (6). 
citizen,  civis. 
city,  urbs,  urbis. 
civil-gown,  toga. 
claim,  postulare.  , 
clear  (  =  excuse),  purgare. 
clothe  oneself,  induere,  283. 
coast,  ora,  40. 
coldjjfrrg-ws,  Sr  is. 
come,  venire,  ten,  vent. 
come  to  the  assistance  of,  alicui  aux- 
illio  venire,  242. 

come  to  a  determination,  consilium 
inire. 

command,  imperare  (dat.). 
comrftand  an  army,  prceesse  (dat.). 
commission,  mandare  (dat.). 
commit  many  sins,  multa  peccare. 
common,  communis. 
common  :  of  a  —  kind,  vulgaris. 
compassion,  misericordia. 
compel,  cogere,  colg ,  coact. 
completed  :  1  have  —  the  work,  opus 
absolutum  habeo,  364. 
concerns  (it),  interest,  207. 
condemn,  damnare,  condemnare :  to 
death,  capitis. 

condemn  a  man  to  pay  his  vow,  voti 
damnare. 

conduct,  honorable,  honestas. 
confer  (benefits)  on,  conferre  (benefeia) 
in  ;  acc  ;  tul,  lat. 

confer  an  obligation  on,  gratiam  inire 
ab  aliquo  (Cic.)  apud  aliquem  ( Liv .) 
339. 

congratulate,  congratulari,  492. 
connection  with,  conjunctio.  See  157. 
conquer,  vincere,  vie,  viet. 
consequence  :  it  is  of — ,  interest. 
consequence:  it  is  of  no — ,  nihil  in¬ 
terest,  or  refert,  207. 
consider  =  think,  existimare,  arbitrari, 
consider  =  attend  to,  attendere,  229. 
considerable  quantity,  aliquantum. 
considerably,  aliquanto,  406. 
constancy,  constantia. 
constantly,  perpetuo. 
constellation,  astrum;  sid-us ,  eri». 
consul,  consul ,  utis. 


336 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


consult,  consulere ,  sulu,  suit.,  acc. 
consult,  for,  )  consulere 

consult  a  man’s  interests,  s  alicui,  233. 
contemporary,  aequalis. 
contented,  contentus  ( abl .). 
contention,  contentio. 
continue,  pergere ,  perrex ,  perrect. 
contract  to  build,  conducere  faciendum ; 
dux,  duct. 

contrary  to  each  other,  inter  se  con¬ 
trarii,  os,  a. 

convenient,  commodus. 
conversant,  to  be,  callere  (acc.). 
converse,  loqui,  locutus. 
corrupt,  corrumpere,  rup,  rupt. 
cost,  stare,  constare,  266.  abl. :  (dat.  of 
person). 

count,  numerare. 

country,  patria;  as  opposed  to  town, 
rus,  ruris. 

country,  in  the,  ruri. 
country,  into  the,  rus. 
country,  from  the,  rure. 
courage,  virtus,  utis. 
courageously,  fortiter. 
courtesy,  humanitas. 
cross  over,  transjicere  or  trajicere,  jec , 
ject,  (acc.). 
crown,  corona. 
cruelly,  crudeliter. 
cruelty,  crudelitas. 
cry  out,  clamare. 

cultivate,  colere,  colu,  cult:  if  it  be  a 
study,  e.  g.  eloquence — studere 
(dot.). 

cure,  mederi  (dat.). 
custom,  consuetud-o,  inis. 
cut  off,  intercludere,  clus ,  233. 


D. 

Daily,  quotidie,  indies  or  in  dies  singu¬ 
los.  (See  69,  t). 
danger,  periculum. 
dare,  audere,  ausus  sum. 
day,  by,  inter diu,  311. 
deaf,  surdus. 
dearer,  pluris,  G.  266. 
death,  mors. 

death,  to  (after  condemn),  capitis. 
debt,  ccs  alienum ,  273. 
debt,  heavy,  magnum  ces  alienum. 
deceive,  decipere ,  io,  cep,  cept. 
decree,  decernere,  crev,  cret. 
deem,  putare. 

defend  what  is  actually  attacked,  de¬ 
fendere  (fend,  fens)  :  —  what  may 
be  attacked,  tueri. 

Degree,  to  what  a — !  quo,  (with  gen.) 

612. 


deliberation  (after  opus  est).  consulto 
271. 

delight,  delectare. 
delightful,  jucundus. 
delightful  to  the  sense  of  sight,  amoenus. 
demand,  postulare ;  poscere,  poposc ;  to 
demand  importunately,  efflagitare. 
(See  257). 
deny,  negare. 

depart  a  finger’s  breadth,  transversum 
digitum  discedere. 

depend  on,  niti,  nisus  or  nixus :  (in  with 

abl. ). 

deprive  of,  spoliare,  orbare  ;  (abl.). 
desert,  deserere,  seru ,  sert. 
deserve,  mereri  (merit) ;  well  of,  bene  de 
deserving  of,  dignus  (abl.). 
deserving  to  be,  &c.,  dignus  esse  qui , 
with  subj. 
design,  consilium. 

desire,  velle ;  cupere,  cupiv,  cupit :  =  ex¬ 
press  a  wish,  optare  (See  420,  x). 
desirous,  cupidus  (gen.). 
despair  of,  desperare. 
destroy  utterly,  delere,  delev,  delet. 
destroy  (=  burn),  concremare,  141,  c. 
destroy  :  go  about  to  destroy,  perditum 
ire ,  362,*  a. 

deter,  deterrere.  [See  From .] 
determine,  constituere. 
detrimental,  to  be,  detrimento  esse,  242. 
devote  oneself  to,  incumbere  in,  with 

acc.  ( cubu ,  cubit). 

devote  oneself  to,  studere  (dat.). 
die,  mori,  ior,  mortuus ;  mortem  or  su¬ 
premum  diem  obire,  249. 
difficult,  difficilis. 

difficulty:  there  is  —  in  doing,  &c.  =  it 
is  done,  difficile. 

difficulty:  he  lias — in  doing,  tic.  =  he 
does  it,  difficile. 
difference,  distantia. 
difference,  it  makes  a  very  great,  per¬ 
multum  interest ,  122. 
difference,  what  is  there  7  quid  interest  ? 
difference,  there  is  no,  )  nihil  interest, 
difference,  it  makes  no,  $  or  refert,  207. 
diligence,  diligentia. 
dinner,  ccena. 

direct  =  instruct,  praecipere,  cep ,  cept. 
discharge,  fungi,  functus,  (abl.)  per¬ 
fungi. 

discipline,  disciplina. 
discontented,  am — with,  pcenitet  me, 
207. 

discourse,  sermo,  onis. 
discover,  invenire,  repirere.  See  177,  o. 
disease,  moi'bus. 
disgraceful,  turjris. 

disgusted:  am  —  at,  taedet  (perf.  per* 
tccsum  est)  me,  207. 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


S3  7 


dishonorably,  turpiter. 
displease,  displicere ,  (dat.). 
dissatisfied:  am  —  with,  pcenitet  me, 
207. 

distance :  to  be  at  a  distance  of,  &c. 

abesse,  distare ,  319. 
distance :  at  two  miles’  distance,  348. 
distant:  to  be  —  from,  abesse;  distare 
(a),  319. 
ditch,,  fossa. 

divest,  exuere,  ex u,  exut,  233. 
do  nothing  but  — ,  nihil  aliud  quam 
( faciunt  omitted),  420. 
do  well,  praeclare  facere. 
dog,  canis. 
doubt :  dubitare. 

doubt:  I  don’t  at  all — ,  nullus  dubito 
(i quin ).  See  note  492. 
doubt :  there  is  no  — ,  non  est  dubium 
(quin),  89. 
dream,  somniare. 
dream,  s.  somnium. 
draw,  (  =  call)  away,  avocare. 
draw  up  an  army,  aciem  instruere; 
strux,  struct. 

draw  up  an  army  in  three  lines,  tripli¬ 
cem  aciem  instruere. 
dress,  vestitus. 
drink,  bibere,  bib,  bibit. 
drink,  s.  potus,  Us,  ) 
drinking,  potio,  $ 
drive,  pellere,  pepul,  puls  :  —  drive 
away,  abigere,  eg,  act. 
dutiful  affection,  pietas. 
duty,  officium. 

E. 


Each  (of  two),  uterque ,  utraque,  utrum- 
que,  G.  utriusquc. 
each  one,  unusquisque. 
each  other  (after  1  to  love,’  &c.),  inter 
se,  470. 

each  of  them,  singly,  singuli ,  pi. 
eagerly  desirous,  studiosus,  (gen.) ; 

avidus,  (gen.). 
easy,  facilis.  Easily,  facile. 
eat,  edere  (?d,  cs) ;  vesci  (See  273). 
eclipse,  defectio. 
eclipsed,  to  be,  deficere,  fee,  fed. 
efface,  delere,  delev,  delet. 
either  —  or  :  aut  —  aut ;  vel  —  r el ;  sive 
—  sire,  456. 
elect,  eligere ,  leg,  led. 
election,  comitia,  n.  pi. 
eloquence,  eloquentia,  facundia  (natu¬ 
ral  eloquence), 
emulate,  aemulari,  229. 
encamp,  considere,  sed,  sess. 

15 


encounter  death,  mortem  oppetere. 
encounter  a  danger,  periculum  obire. 
end  of,  extremus,  agreeing  with  its 
subst.,  179. 

endued  with,  praeditus  (abl). 
endure,  sustinere,  tinu,  tent. 
enemy  (private),  inimicus. 
enemy  (public),  hostis. 
engage  =  fight  with,  confligere ,  flix , 
.fi  tct. 

engage  =  undertake,  recipere,  cep,  cept. 
engaged  in  :  to  be  — ,  operam  dare , 
337 :  (in  a  battle,  affair,  &c.)  in- 
ter  esse,  224. 
enjoy,  frui,  (abl.). 
enough,  satis,  affdtim.  (See  512.) 
enquire  of,  quaerere  ex ;  queesiv,  queesit. 
enter  into  partnership,  coire  societatem. 
entrust,  credere,  credid,  credit  (dat.  of 
person). 

envy,  invidere,  vid,  vis  (dat.). 
Ephesian,  Ephesius. 
equal,  par,  dat.  Equal  to  (in  magni¬ 
tude,  real  or  figurative),  instar 
(gen.),  207. 
error,  error. 

escape  from,  s.fuga ,  157. 
escape  :  it  escapes  me,  me  fugit,  fallit, 
praeterit ,  259. 

eternal,  aeternus  (=  everlasting) ;  sem¬ 
piternus,  123,  c. 
even,  etiam. 

even  mind,  aequus  animus. 
even  —  not,  ne  —  quidem. 
evening,  in  the,  vesperi 
every,  omnis. 
every  body,  quisque,  396. 
every  tenth  man,  decimus  quisque. 
every  body  who  or  that,  quisquis,  quu 
cunque,  396. 
every  thing,  omnia,  pi. 
ever,  unquam,  aliquando ,  quando,  402. 
evil,  malum,  neut.  adj. 
exactly,  with  a  numeral;  ipse,  in  agree¬ 
ment,  308. 

exceed  the  bounds  of  moderation,  mo¬ 
dum  excedere,  cess. 
exceedingly,  vehementer. 
excel,  antecellere,  praestare,  229. 
exhort,  hortari ,  adhortari. 
expedient,  utilis  (dat.). 
expedient :  it  is  — ,  expedit. 
expediency,  utilitas. 
experience  (familiarity  with  a  thing). 
usus,  Us. 

exposed  to,  obnoxius,  212. 
extortion,  pecuniae  repetundae  ;  or  only 
repetundae. 

extremely  flourishing,  longe  opulenti #• 
simus, 
eye,  oculus. 


338 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


F. 

Face,  to  know  a  man  by,  de  facie  nosse. 
fail  (a  friend),  deesse  ( dat .),  fail  (one), 
deficere,  229. 
faith,  fides,  5. 
faithful,  fidelis. 

fall  on  (=  seize  on),  incessere ,  229. 
false,  falsus. 

falsehoods,  utter  many,  multa  mentiri , 
38. 

family,  familia. 

far  from  (thinking)  this,  tantum  abest 
ut  —  {ut). 

far :  not  to  be  —  from,  haud  multum 
or  •procul  abesse  {quin),  91. 
far  be  it  from  me  not,  83.  See  note  t, 
p.  40. 

far,  multo  (with  compar,  and  superl.), 
410. 

farewell,  are,  salve,  vale,  281. 

fate,  fatum. 

fault,  culpa. 

favour,  a,  beneficium. 

favour,  favere  {dat. ) ,  fav,  faut. 

fawn  upon,  adulari  (dat.  or  acc .). 

fear,  of  body,  timor ;  of  mind,  metus ,  us. 

fear,  timere,  metuere ,  vereri.  See  99. 

feeble,  imbecillus. 

feed  on,  vesci.  See  273. 

feel  thankful,  gratiam  habere. 

fever,  febris,  abl.  i. 

few,  pauci,  cc,  a. 

few  :  a  few  days  ago,  paucis  his  diebus. 
few :  a  few  days  before,  paucis  illis 
diebus. 
fidelity, fides. 
field,  in  the,  militiae. 
fight,  pugnare;  fight  on  horseback,  ex 
equo. 

find,  invenire,  reperire ,  177. 
find :  hard  to  find,  difficilis  inventu , 
364. 

finger’s  breadth.  See  Depart, 
finish,  conficere. 

fire,  ignis,  { =  conflagration)  incen¬ 
dium. 

first,  primum:  at  first,  primo.  See  83. 

fit,  aptus,  212. 

fitted,  accommodatus,  219. 

fix  by  edict,  edicZre  { ut ). 

flank,  on  the,  a  latere. 

flatter,  adulari  {dat.  or  acc.). 

flaw,  vitium. 

flight,  fuga. 

flogged,  to  be,  virgis  caedi ;  caesus. 

folly,  stultitia. 

fond,  cupidus  {gen.). 

food,  cibus,  i. 

foot,  pes,  pedis. 

for,  when  untranslated,  255. 


for  how  much  ?  quanti  ? 
for  as  much — as,  tanti — quanti ,  266. 
for  less,  minoris,  266. 
for  just  as  much — as,  >  tantidem  — 
for  no  more,  than  (  quanti ,  226. 

for  {  =  in  behalf  of),  pro. 
for  (  =  owing  to,  of  obstacles),  prce,{abl.) 
for  instance,  verbi  causa. 
for  some  time,  dudum,  jamdudum,  420, 
for  (after  to  fear),  sign  of  dat. 
for  any  thing  I  care,  per  me  licet. 
for  us  (after  make),  a  nobis. 
foreign  to,  alienus,  212. 
foretell,  praedicere. 
forget,  oblivisci,  oblitus,  199. 
former,  the,  ille,  378. 
forsooth  :  as  if — ,  quasi  vero ,  494. 
fortune.  See  Good. 
fortune  :  let  —  see  to  it,  id  Fortuna 
vidgrit. 

found,  condere,  condid,  condit. 
founder  (of  a  family),  princeps  familiae. 
free  from,  liberare  {abl.). 
freedman,  libertinus  :  (but  with  refer¬ 
ence  to  his  master,  libertus.) 
friendly,  amicus. 
friends,  his  own,  sui. 
from  a  boy,  puero. 
from  the  heart,  exanimo. 
from  a  wall,  ex  muro. 
from  your  neighbourhood,  istinc. 
from  a  different  direction,  aliunde. 
from,  after  conceal,  omitted,  251. 
from,  after  prevents ,  deters,  &c.,  quomi¬ 
nus,  94. 

from,  after  recover,  ex. 
front,  in,  a  fronte. 
frugality ,  frugalitas. 
fruits  (of  the  earth),  fruges :  (of  a  tree), 
fructus. 
full,  plenus,  182. 
fury,  furor. 


G. 

Gain  an  advantage,  emolumentum  ca¬ 
pere  {cep,  capt), — ex. 
gain  possession  of,  potiri  {abl.  gen.). 
Gaul,  Gallus. 

get  possession  of,  potiri,  potitus  {abl.). 
gift,  doman,  munus,  eris.  (See  242.) 
give  information,  docere,  253 :  give 
much  information,  midla  docere 
{de),  252. 

give  battle  to,  proelium  committere 
cum;  mis,  miss. 
given  over,  despen  atus. 
given  it  is,  datur. 
glad,  to  be,  laetari,  521. 
glory,  gloria. 


INDEX  1. - ENGLISH. 


339 


glorious,  gloriosus, 
go  wrong,  errare. 

go  away,  abire,  decedere ,  cess.  See  308. 
go  about  to  destroy,  ‘perditum  ire, 
362*,  a. 

go  on,  pergere,  perrex,  perrect. 
go  on  in  your  valour!  macte  virtute 
esto !  280. 
god,  Deus,  56. 
gold,  aurum. 
golden,  aureus. 

good,  bonus;  (=  beneficial,  expedient) 
utilis. 

good  :  to  do — ,  prodesse  (dat.). 
good  fortune  :  it  was  my  —  ( contigit 
mihi, — ut,  374). 

good  time,  in, 

govern,  imperare ,  dat.;  (=  regulate, 
direct)  moderari  {acc.  or  dat.  See 
220). 

grateful,  gratus. 
gratitude,  gratia. 

greatest  (when  degree  is  meant  rather 
than  size),  summus. 
greedy,  avidus  {gen.). 

Greece,  Graecia. 

Greek,  Graecus. 
grief,  dolor. 

grieve,  dolere,  maerere.  See  521. 
ground,  humus  ;  on  the  ground,  humi. 
grudge,  invidere  {dat.),  vut,  vis. 
guard  against,  £  cavere  {acc.  233),  cav, 
guard,  be  on  my,  $  caut. 
guidance,  under  your,  te  duce;  under 
the  guidance  of  Herdonius,  Her¬ 
donii  ductu. 


H. 


Habit  of  silence,  taciturnitas. 
had  rather,  malle ,  150  (conjug.  142,  1). 
hail,  ave,  salve,  281. 
hand,  manus,  Us,  4.  f. 
hanging,  suspendium. 
happen  (of  evils),  accidere :  of fortunate 
events ,  contingere  {tig) :  =  turn  out, 
evenire.  (See  374). 

happen  :  how  does  it  happen  that ...  7 
qui  Jit  ut,  &c. 

happy,  beatus,  felix.  (See  443.) 
hard :  are  hard  to  avoid,  difficile  vi¬ 
tantur. 

hard  to  find,  difficilis  inventu  {sup.). 
hardly  (  =  scarcely),  vix. 
hardly  any  body,  nemo  fere. 
harvest,  messis,  f. 

hate,  odisse  (with  tenses  derived  from 
perf.). 


hateful,  to  be,  odio  esse.  242. 
have,  habere. 

have  a  thing  done,  faciendum  curare, 
356. 

have  an  interview  with,  convenire, 
{acc). 

have,  in  such  sentences  as,  lwith 
whom  we  have  to  do.’  (See  336.) 
head,  caput ,  capitis ,  n. 
heal,  mederi  {dat.). 

healed,  to  be  (of  a  wound),  consanes- 
cere. 

health,  to  be  in  good,  valere. 
hear,  audire. 

hearing :  without  hearing  him  (  =  him 
unheard),  inauditum  {acc.  masc.) 
heart  (as  the  seat  of  th e  affections),  ani¬ 
mus,  92. 

heart,  cor,  cordis ,  n. 
heavy,  gravis. 

height:  to  such  a  — ,  eo,  adv.  {gen.). 
help  (a  person  in  perplexity),  subvenire 
{dat.) ;  juvare  {acc.),  auxiliari 
{dat.),  succurrere  {dat.  See  222,  k.). 
her  {acc.  sing.),  se,  if  relating  to  nom. 

of  sentence  ;  if  not,  earn. 
her,  adj.  suus,  a,  um .,  if  relating  to  nom. 

of  sentence ;  if  not,  ejus. 
hesitate,  dubitare. 
hidden,  occultus. 

him,  se,  if  relating  to  nom.  of  sentence 
if  not,  eum. 

himself,  369 ;  373,  c.  (Q,.  on  §  48.) 
hinder,  impedire.  See  Q,.  on  §  15. 
hindrance,  impedimentum. 
his  own  friends,  adherents,  &c.  sui. 
hit  (  =  strike),  ferire,  icere,  caedere ,  ce- 
cid,  cces.  See  299,  i. 
hold,  tenere. 

hold  a  levy  of  troops,  delectum  habere 
hold  one’s  tongue,  silere ,  tacere ,  Set 
299,  g. 

hold  cheap,  parvi  pendere,  266. 
home,  to,  domum :  at,  domi :  from,  domo 
honey,  mei,  mellis. 

honour  (  =  the  honorable),  honestas, 

(  =  probity)  fdes,  ei. 
honour,  to  be  an,  >  lwnor{  242. 
honorable,  to  be,  $  ’ 

honorable  conduct,  honestas.  Honor¬ 
able,  honestus  Honorably,  honeste. 
hope,  sperare.  (See  15.) 
horseback,  on,  ex  equo  :  (of  more  than 
one  person)  ex  equis. 
house,  at  my,  domi  mecc. 
how  (with  adj.),  quam. 
how  disgraceful  it  is,  quanto  opprobris 
est. 

how  many,  quot. 

how  much,  quantum. 

how  does  it  nappen?  qui  Jit,  ut .  .  .7 


340 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


how  few  there  are,  who  —  7  quolu-t- 
quisque  est,  qui  .  .  ?  ( with  subj.) 
477. 

human-feeling, 
humanity, 
hunger,  fames, 
hurry,  to  be  in  a, festinare. 
hurt,  nocere ,  dat.  ;  Icedere  ( acc .  tecs.) 
hurtful,  to  be,  nocere. 
husband,  vir,  291. 


humanitas. 


is. 


1. 

I  for  my  part,  equidem. 
if  —  not,  nisi,  451. 
if  however,  sin  autem,  451. 
ignorant,  to  be,  ignorare  (acc.). 
ignorant :  not  to  be  ignorant  that,  &c., 
non  ignorare ,  quin. 

ignorant :  who  is  ignorant  that,  &c.  1 
quis  ignorat,  quin  .  .  .? 
ignorant  of,  rudis  teen.). 
immediately  after  the  battle,  confestim 
a  proelio,  348. 
immense,  ingens. 
immortal,  immortalis. 
impiety,  impietas. 

impiety  :  if  it  may  be  said  without  — , 
si  fas  est  dictu,  364.  * 

impiety  :  it  cannot  be  said  without — , 
nefas  est  dictu ,  364. 

importance,  it  is  of,  interest  (gen.),  203. 
importance,  it  is  of  great,  magni  (or 
multum)  interest,  206,  a. 
important,  gravior. 
i  m  p  or  t  une,  “fiagitar  e . 
impose  on,  imponere,  posu,  posit,  233. 
impute  as  a  fault,  vitio  or  culpoc  dare 
or  vertere,  242. 

in  the  presence  of  the  people,  apud 
populum. 

in  (an  author),  apud  (Xenophontem, 
&c.). 

in  front,  a  fronte. 

in  flank,  a  latere. 

in  the  rear,  a  tergo. 

in  triumph  (to  lead),  per  triumphum. 

inattentive  to,  negligens  (gen.),  183. 

increase,  augere,  aux,  auct,  (trans.) 

crescere,  crev  (neut.). 
incredible,  incredibilis. 
inconsistent  with,  alienus,  212. 
inconvenient,  incommodus. 
induce,  adducere  ut,  &c. 
indulge,  indulgere,  duls,  dull  (dat.). 
industry,  diligentia. 
inflict  punishment  on,  aliquem  pcend 
afficere,  276. 

Influence :  to  have  great  —  with,  mul¬ 
tum  valere  apud  aliquem. 


inform,  certiorem  facere,  187. 
information.  See  Give. 
inhabit,  incolere,  colu,  cult. 
injure,  violare ,  (  =  do  harm  to)  lesder» 

(acc.). 

injurious,  it  is,  nocet  (dat.). 

injury,  injuria. 

innocent,  innocens. 

insignificant:  how  — !  quam  nullus } 

insolence  to  such  a  height  of,  eo  (adv.) 

insolentice,  512. 
instance,  for,  verbi  causa. 
interest  (  =  true  interest),  utilitas. 
interest :  it  is  the —  of,  interest  (gen.), 
203. 

interests  (to  consult  the).  See  233. 
interests  (to  provide  for).  See  233. 
interview.  See  Have. 
intimate  :  to  be  —  with ,  familiariter  uti , 
abi. 

inventor,  inventor,  fern,  inventrix. 
invest  (  =  blockade),  obsidere ,  sed ,  scss . 
invoke,  appellare. 
iron-hearted,  ./e/veus. 
is  (  =  is  distant),  distat. 
island,  insula. 

it  cannot  be  but  that,  fieri  non  potest 
quin. 

it  is  not  every  man  who  can,  &c.,  non 
cujusvis  est ,  &c.  190. 

Italy,  Italia. 


J. 


Javelin,  jaculum. 
jest,  jocus. 
jewel,  gemma. 

join  battle  with,  committere  praelium 
(cum). 

journey,  on  the,  inter  viam. 
joyful,  laetus. 
just  (equitable),  cequus. 
justice,  justitia. 


K. 


Keep,  servare. 

keep  one’s  word,  fidem  praestare. 
keep  up  a  certain  state,  splendide  m 
gerere. 

kill,  interficere,  occidere,  necare,  308 

king,  rex ,  regis. 

know,  scire,  novisse,  callere ,  335. 


L. 


Labour,  labor. 

lame  of  one  leg,  claudus  altero  pede . 
lamp,  lucerna. 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


341 


large,  magnus. 

lasting,  sempiternus. 

latter,  the,  hie. 

laugh,  ridere,  ris,  rls. 

law,  lex,  legis. 

lay  on,  imponere. 

lay  down,  )  .. 

lay  aside,  '  \vonere,  P0Slt- 

lay  a  person  under  an  obligation,  gra¬ 
tiam  ab  aliquo  mire. 
lay  down  a  magistracy,  magistratum 
abdicare;  (or  se  with  abl .,  308.) 
lead  a  life,  agere  vitam  ;  eg,  act. 
league,  foedus,  eris. 
learning,  branch  of,  doctrina. 
lean  on,  niti,  nisus,  nixus  (abl.  273). 
learn,  discere ,  didic. 
learn  by  heart,  ediscere. 
leave,  relinquere,  liq,  lid :  (by  will),  re¬ 
linquere. 

leave  (  =  go  out  of),  excedere  ( with  abl) 
cess,  83. 

leave  nothing  undone,  nihil  praetermit¬ 
tere  quin. 

leave  off,  desinere,  desi,  desit. 
leg.  See  Lame. 

leisure:  I  have — ,  vacat  mihi,  154. 
Lemnos,  Lemnos,  G.  i. 
let  me  know,  fac  sciam  ( with  ut 
omitted). 

let  out  to  be  built  by  contract,  locare 
faciendum. 

letter,  literae ,  pi. :  epistola. 
levy  troops,  delectum  habere. 
liable  to,  obnoxius,  212. 
liar,  mendax  ( adj .). 
lie,  mentiri. 
lie  near,  adjacere,  229. 
life,  vita;  (  =  life-time)  actas.  In  the 
life-time  of  Augustus,  Augusto 
vivo,  364 

lift  up,  tollere ,  sustul,  sublat. 
light,  levis. 

light  (  =  kindle),  accendere  :  succendere 
rogum,  &c.  (See  299,  h.) 
lightning,  fulmen ,  inis. 
like,  similis,  dat.:  ( =  equal  to  in  size) 
instar ,  (gen). 
like  (verb).  See  491,  d. 
lines  :  to  draw  up  an  army  in  three — , 
triplicem  aciem  instruere. 
literature,  literae. 

little,  or  a  little  (  = few  things)  pauca , 

23. 

little  :  but  or  too  — ,  parum. 
little,  a  ( =  some,  but  not  much),  pau¬ 
lum  ;  paululum,  402. 
long,  diu :  pridem,  jamdiu,  jampridem. 
See  420. 

long  for,  avere,  of  an  impatient,  gestire 
of  a.  joyous  longing. 


look  to  that  yourself,  id  ipse  vidSris. 
loquacious,  loquax. 

lose,  perdere,  perdid,  perdit :  lose  (pas¬ 
sively),  amittere.  (See  56.) 
lose  an  opportunity,  occasionem  amit¬ 
tere. 

lose  flesh,  corpus  amittere. 
love,  amare,  diligere.  (See  185,  a.) 
lover  of,  amans,  diligens  (gen.,  183.), 
lover,  such  a  lover  of,  adeo  amans  or 
diligens  (gen.,  183). 
lowest,  infimus,  imus. 
lust,  libido ,  inis. 
luxurious,  luxuriosus. 
lyre,  to  play  on  the.  See  Teach. 


M. 

Mad,  to  he,  furere. 
madness,  amentia,  512. 
magistracy,  to  hold,  magistratum  ge¬ 
rere. 

make,  facere  (fee,  fact ) ;  efficio :  am 
made,^o.  Obs.  ‘  makes  all  things 
(acc.)  flourish;’  in  Lat.  ‘makes 
that  (ut)  all  things  (nom.)  should 
flourish,’  254. 

make  the  same  promise,  idem  polliceri, 
pollicitus. 

make  treaty,  &c.,  foedus  icere,  299. 
make  this  request  of  you,  illud  te  rogo 
(ut  ne). 

make  ( =  appoint  to  an  office),  creare. 
make  mention  of,  meminisse,  recor¬ 
dari,  201. 

make  sport  of,  )  7/  /  ,  (ff , 

make  merry  with,  $  lUuaere>lus  (' aat ■) 
make  the  same  boast,  idem  gloriari. 
make  it  my  first  object,  id  agere  (ut). 
make  for  us,  a  nobis  facere. 
make  a  decree  in  a  man’s  favour,  se¬ 
cundum  aliquem  decernere;  decrev, 
decret. 

making  haste  (after  onus  est),  prope¬ 
rate,  (abl.  part.  171). 
maker,  effector :  fern,  effectrix. 
man,  homo ,  vir.  (See  38,  y.) 
man  :  I  am  not  the  —  to ;  non  is  sum, 
qui  (subj). 

manners  (  =  morals,  character,)  mores , 
urn,  pi. 
many,  multi. 

march  against  the  enemy,  obviam  ire 
hostibus. 

marry  (of  a  female),  nubere  (dat.  222). 
Marseilles,  Massilia. 
master,  magi.ier,  dominus,  herus.  (See 
180.) 

matter,  res. 
mean,  sibi  velle. 


342 


INDEX  I. 


■ENGLISH. 


mean  time  ;  in  the  — ,  interim ,  interea. 
(See  402.) 

means,  by  no,  minime. 
meat,  cibus, 
medicine,  medicina. 
meditate,  meditari  ( acc .). 
meet,  to  go  to,  obviam  ire  ( dat .). 
melt,  liquescere ,  lieu. 
merchant,  mercator. 
middle  of,  medius  (in  agreement  with 
*  its  subst.  179). 
mile  ( =  1000  paces),  mille  passus :  pi. 

Millia  passuum. 

Miletus,  of,  Milesius. 

milk,  lac ,  lactis. 

mind,  mens ,  mentis ;  animus. 

mindful,  memor  {gen.). 

miserable,  miser ,  era ,  &c. 

mistaken,  to  b e,  falli. 

mistaken,  I  am,  me  fallit. 

mock,  illudere  {dat.  229). 

moderate,  moderari  {acc.  or  dat.  220). 

money,  pecunia. 

month,  mensis ,  m. 

moon,  luna. 

moral,  sanctus. 

morals,  mores,  um. 

more,  plus  (with  gen.).  For  more, 

pluris. 

mortal,  mortalis. 
most  men,  plerique. 
motion,  motus ,  Us. 
mound,  agger. 

move,  movere ,  mov ,  mot.  Move,  neut. 
moveri. 

much,  multa,  n.  pi.  (but  if  opposed  to 
many  things,  or  followed  by  gen. 
multum.) 

much  less,  nedum,  443. 
multitude,  multitudo ,  inis. 

N. 

Naked,  nudus. 

name,  nominare  (also  =  to  appoint), 
nature,  natura ;  rerum  natura. 
near,  prope  {acc.). 

near,  to  be  very,  minimum  abesse  (im- 
pers.)  quin,  92. 

nearer,  propior  ;  {adv.)  propius,  211. 
nearer  am,  propius  absum  {quam),  319. 
nearest,  proximus. 
nearly,  prope,  paene. 
need,  egere,  indigere  {abi.  or  gen.). 
need,  have  — of,  opus  est,  176,  e. 
need,  you  have  no  — ,  nihil  opus  est. 
negligent,  negligens  (gen.),  183. 


neighbourhood,  in  your,  istic,  } 
neighbourhood,  from  your,  istinc.  >  387 
neighbourhood,  to  your,  istuc.  i 

neither -nor,  S  ~ 

’  (  nec  —  nec. 

neutral,  medius. 

never,  nunquam. 

nevertheless,  tamen. 

news  of  the  town,  res  urbanae. 

next:  the  next  thing  is,  sequitur  ut  85. 

night,  by,  noctu  or  nocte. 

no,  nullus ;  after  ne,  quis. 

no  one,  nemo. 

mo  pictor. 

nusquam. 

temporis. 
nobody,  nemo ,  inis* 
none  of  you,  nemo  vestrum. 
none  of  those  things,  nihil  eorum. 
nor,  neque,  nec :  but  after  ut  or  ne  it 
is  neve  or  neu. 

not,  non.  After  rel.,  see  p.  215,  d. 
not  yet,  nondum. 
not  one’s  own,  alienus. 
not  even,  ne  —  quidem. 
not  only  —  but  also,  non  solum—  sed, 
or  verum  etiam. 

not  so  far  off,  to  be,  propius  abesse. 
not  to  say,  ne  dicam. 
not  that  —  but,  non  quod  —  sed;  non 
quo  —  sed  ;  non  eo  or  ideo  quod  — 
sed,  492. 
not  at  all,  nihil. 

not  as  if  not,  non  quin,  with  subj. 
not  to  be  far  from,  haud  multum  (or 
haud  procul)  abesse  {quin). 
nothing,  nihil. 

nothing  but,  nihil  aliud  nisi,  185. 
nourish,  alere,  alu,  alit  or  alt. 
now  (  =  already),  jam. 
number,  numerare. 


O. 

Obey,  parere,  obedire  {dat.  See  222) 
object,  not  to,  non  recusare  quin ,  92. 
obligation,  lay  a  man  under  a  great, 
confer  an  —  on,  magnam  ab  aliquo 
{Cic.),  apud  aliquem  {Liv.),  gra¬ 
tiam  mire,  339. 
obliging,  commodus. 
obstruct,  intercludere,  clus. 
obtain,  potiri  {abl.  gen  ). 
occasion :  you  have  no  —  to  hurry, 
nihil  est  quod  festines ,  477. 


no  painter,  ne 
no  where,  > 
no  whither,  $ 
no  time,  nihil 


*  Neminis  and  nemine  are  not  found,  but  nullius,  nullo : — except  now  and  then 
nemine  with  pass,  participle  — Nemo  ablativum  nec  habet,  nec  habet  genitivum. 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


343 


Tjweasion :  have  —  for,  opus  est,  170. 
ocean,  oceanus. 

occupy  myself  in,  operam  dare ,  337. 
odious,  to  be,  odio  esse.  242. 
ol  after  ‘strip,’  &c.  ( abl .) 
of,  after  ‘become,’  ‘deserve  well,’  &c. 
‘am  persuaded ,’  and  when  of — 
concerning ,  de. 
of,  after  ‘enquire,’  ex. 
of  others,  alienus,  a,  urn.. 
of  such  a  kind,  ejusmodi. 
offend,  offendere, fend,  fens  ( acc .). 
offend  against,  violare. 
offence :  if  I  may  say  so  without  — , 
pace  tud  dixerim. 
old,  vetus,  veteris  ( n .  pi.  vetera). 
old  man,  senex,  G.  sen,zs,  G.  pi.  um. 
old  age,  senectus ,  atis. 
one  (of  two),  alter,  G.  ius. 
one  thing  —  another,  aliud  —  aliud,  38. 
one  (  =  a  certain),  quidam. 
one  ( =  some  one,  no  matter  who), 
aliquis. 
one’s,  suus. 

only,  adj.  solus,  G.  ius. 
only :  the  —  one  who,  unus  qui  (with 
subj.). 

only  son,  unicus  filius. 

opinion,  to  be  of,  censere. 

opportunity,  occasio. 

oppose,  repugnare  (dat.),  obstare  (dat.). 

or,  aut,  vel ,  ve,  456  (in  questions  an). 

or  not,  necne.  See  122. 

orator,  orator. 

order,  jubere,  juss  (acc.  with  inf). 
ought,  oportet.  See  126. 
out  of,  e,  ex. 
out  of  doors,  foras. 
out :  to  dine  out,  caenare  foris ,  339. 
over :  it  is  all  over  with,  actum  est  de. 
over  against,  adversus. 
overpower  (with  emotion),  frangere, 
fregffract. 

overthrow,  evertere,  vert ,  vers. 
owe,  debere. 

owing :  it  is  owing  to,  per  aliquem  stat, 
quominus,  &c.  99. 

own  (emphatic),  ipsius  or  ipsorum ,  after 
meus,  tuus,  &o. 


P. 

Pace,  passus,  Us. 

pained,  to  be,  dolere  (acc.  or  abl.  with 
de.). 

pardon,  venia. 

pardon,  ignoscere,  nov  (dat.) ;  (of  a  su¬ 
perior)  vsniam  dare. 
parent,  parens;  genitor,  fern  genitrix. 
part,  para ,  partis. 


partner,  consors,  185. 

party,  to  be  on  our,  a  nobis  senlirc. 

past,  the,  praeterita. 

peck,  modius. 

peculiar,  proprius,  212. 

perceive,  sentire. 

perchance  (in  questions),  quid  in  ee 
quid,  numquid,  400. 
perform, fungi,  perfungi, functus  (abl.). 
perhaps,  fortasse. 
permitted,  it  is,  licet. 
permitted,  I  am,  licet  mihi. 
perpetual,  sempiternus. 
perseverance,  perseverantia. 
persist,  perseverare. 
persuade  (=  advise),  suadere  (dat.) ;  = 
advise  effectually,  persuadere,  suas 
(dat.). 

persuaded,  I  am,  persuasum  est  mihi 
de,  &c.,  ox  persuasum  habeo,  291. 
perverse,  perversus. 
perversely,  perverse. 
philosopher,  philosophus. 
philosophy,  philosophia. 
piety,  pietas. 

pity  (J),  miseret  me,  or  misereor,  gen. 

(See  201,  r.) 
pity,  misericordia. 

plainly:  see  —  through,  perspectum 
habeo,  364. 
planet,  planeta  or  es. 
plan,  consilium. 
plant,  serere,  sev ,  sat. 
play,  ludere,  lus. 
play  on  the  lyre.  See  Peach. 
pleaf  a  cause,  agere  causam. 
plebant,  jucundus. 
please,  placere  (dat.). 
pleasure,  voluptas. 
poet,  poeta. 

point :  to  be  on  the  —  of,  in  eo  esse  ut, 
479. 

poison,  venenum. 

Pompey,  Pompejus. 
possession,  to  be  in,  tenere. 
possession,  to  gain,  potior  (abl.  or  gen.). 
possible  as  (after  superi.),  quam,  vel, 
410. 

possibly.  As  great  as  can  possibly  be, 
quantus  maximus  potest  esse,  412. 
post  nimself,  consider e,  sed,  sess. 
poor,  pauper. 

power,  potentia  of  actual,  potestas  of 
legal ,  conceded,  &c.,  power, 
power:  to  put  himself  in  their — ,  po 
teSlatem  sui  facere. 

power:  to  be  in  our — ,  in  nostra  po> 
testate  esse. 
powerful,  potens. 

practice  (justice,  &c.),  colere ,  colu,  suH 
praise,  laus,  laudis. 


344 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


praise,  to,  laudare. 
pray  (=  beg  earnestly),  orare. 
predict,  prccdicere. 
prefer,  anteponere,  posu,  posit. 
prefer  a  charge,  reum  facere  de,  187. 
prefer  a  capital  charge  against,  rei 
capitalis  reum  facere,  187. 
prefer  a  charge  of  immorality  against, 
de  moribus  reum  facere,  187. 
prejudicial,  to  be,  obesse  (dat.). 
prepare,  parare. 
present  with,  donare,  207. 
present,  give  us  a,  dono  ox  muneri  dare, 
242,  (3.) 

present,  to  be,  adesse  (dat.). 
preservation :  tend  to  the  — ,  335,  c. 
pretend,  simulare. 
pretty  often,  nonnunquam. 
prevent,  obstare,  obstit  (dat.). 

priest,  ?  sacerdos,  otis. 
priestess,  $  ’ 

proceed  against  a  person,  consulere  in 
aliquem. 

produce  (=  fruits),  fruges ,  pi. 
productive  of,  efficiens  (gen.),  183. 
profitable,  to  be,  prodesse  (dat.). 
promise,  polliceri,  licitus;  promittere. 
See  17,  1.  See  15. 

prompt  execution  (after  opus  est),  ma¬ 
ture  facto,  177. 
prone,  proclivis  (ad.). 
property,  all  my,  omnia  mea. 
property,  all  their,  omnia  sua. 
prosecute,  postulare ,  201. 
protection,  take  under  one’s,  tueri,  374. 
proud,  superbus. 

prove  an  honour,  honori  esse;  (prove 
done  by  sum  with  the  dat.,  242.) 
prove  myself  mindful;  praestare  me 
memorem. 


re¬ 


prove  my  gratitude, 
prove  myself  grateful, 
provide  for  the  interests  of,  providere 
vid,  vis;  prospicere,  spex,  sped 


gratiam 
ferre. 


(both  with  dat.). 
provided  that,  dum, 


modo,  or  dum- 


miklo 

494. 


(after  which  ‘ not ’  is  ne), 


pull  down,  diruere,  ru,  rut. 

punishment,  pcena. 

purpose,  for  the,  causa. 

purpose,  to  no,  nequicquam,  frustra. 

put ;  put  ‘down,  ponere ,  posu,  posit. 

put  oflj  exuere,  txu,  exut. 

put  in  mind  of,  admonere,  194. 

pyre,  rogus. 


Q. 

Quite  (to  be  without),  plane  (carere). 


R. 

Ratify  a  treaty,  icere  fucchiA 
rather,  I  had,  mdlo. 
rational  faculty,  mens. 
rear,  in  the,  a  ter  go. 
reason,  you,  &c.,  have  no,  nihil  esl 
quod  (subj.). 

receive,  ac-,  ex-,  re-  cipere,  cep,  cept. 
(See  308.) 

receive  favourably,  boni  consulere  (in 
Quintii.,  Seneca,  <f*c.) ;  in  bonam 
partem  accipere,  185. 
reckon,  numerare. 

reckon  one  thing  after  another,  postha¬ 
bere. 

reckon  as  a  fault,  vitio  vertere,  242. 
recollect,  reminisci. 
reconciled,  to  be,  in  gratiam  redire 
(cum). 

recover,  convalescere ,  valu. 
recruit  myself,  me  r  efficere. 
refrain:  I  cannot  —  from,  temperare 
mihi  non  possum,  quin,  &c. 
regard  the  interests  of,  prospicere,  spex , 
sped  (dat.). 
reign,  regnare. 

reign:  in  your — ,  terege:  te  regnante 
or  imperante,  364. 
reject,  repudiare. 
rejoice,  gaudere,  gavisus  sum. 
relate,  narrare. 

relieve  from,  liberare  (abl.) ;  (of  a  par¬ 
tial  relief)  levare  (abl.). 
religion,  religio. 
relying  on,  fretus  (abl.). 
remainder  =  rest  of,  179. 
remains,  it,  reliquum  est,  restat  (ut). 
remedy,  remedium. 
remember,  meminisse  (Imperat,  me¬ 
mento)  ;  recordari,  reminisci.  (Se« 
201,  q.) 

remind,  admonere  (gen.). 

render,  reddere,  did,  dit. 

renew,  renovare. 

repair,  reficere,  fee,  feet. 

repay  a  kindness,  gratiam  referre. 

repent :  I  —  me,  me  pcenitet  (gen.). 

report,  fama. 

require,  egere ,  indigere  (gen.  abl.). 
required,  are,  opus  sunt ,  172. 
resignation,  ccquus  animus. 
resignation,  the  most  or  grea  est, aequis¬ 
simus  animus. 

resist,  resistere,  rest’d  •  repugnare 
(dat.). 

resolve,  constituere ,  stitu,  stitut. 

rest,  requies. 

rest  on,  niti,  273. 

rest  of,  adj.  reliquus.  (See  179.) 

rest,  all  the,  cetera  omnia. 


INDEX  I. 


•ENGLISH. 


345 


restore  liberty  to  his  country,  patriam 
in  libertatem  vindicare. 
restrain,  temperare  (dat.),  220. 
restrained,  to  be,  inhiberi. 
retain  a  grateful  sense,  gratiam  habere. 
return,  redire ,  reverti,  revenire.  (See 
339,  p.) 

return  thanks,  gratias  agere;  eg,  act. 

revile,  maledicere  (dat.). 

re  viler,  vituperator. 

revolt  from,  dejicere  ab  ;  fee,  feet. 

rich,  dives. 

riches,  divitiae. 

right,  rectus :  (of  situation,)  dexter. 
rise,  oriri ,  ior,  ortus.  (See  443.) 
rival,  aemulari  (dat.  or  acc.). 
river,  flumen,  amnis ,  fiuvius ,  472,  o. 
rob,  spoliare  (abl.). 
rod,  virgae,  pi. 

rope  (=  hanging),  suspendium. 

Rome,  Roma. 

Roman,  Romanus. 
rule,  regula. 

ruling  power,  to  be,  rerum  potiri. 


S. 


Safety,  salus,  utis. 

sail  along  |  praetervehi,  vectus  (acc.). 

sake  :  for  the  —  of,  causa. 
sake,  for  its  own,  propter  sese. 
salute,  salutare. 
same,  idem. 

satisfaction,  to  your,  &c.,  ex  (tud)  sen¬ 
tentia. 


satisfactorily,  ex  sententia. 
satisfy,  satisfacere  (dat.). 
say,  dicere :  (=  asserts)  ait. 
say  that  —  not,  negare. 
say :  not  to  say,  ne  dicam. 
say:  they  (=  people)  say, ferunt. 


ut  aiunt. 


say :  as  they  say, 
saying :  as  the  —  is, 
says  he,  mquit. 
sauce,  condimentum. 
scarcely,  vix. 

sea,  mare.  By  sea  and  land,  terra 
marique. 
season,  tempestas. 
seasoning,  condimentum. 
second,  alter. 
sedition,  seditio. 

see,  videre ;  (=  distinguish  ;  have  the 
sense  of  sight)  cemere. 
see  that  you  don’t,  vide  ne. 
see  (plainly)  through  (any  thing),  ali¬ 
quid  perspectum  habere ,  364. 
see ;  do  you  see  to  that,  id  tv,  videris. 
seem,  videri,  visus. 

15* 


seize  on,  incessere  (of  fear,  &c.),  229. 
self,  selves.  (See  368.)  I  myself, 
ipse,  33. 

sell,  vendere  (vendid,  vendit). 
sell,  neut.  venire  (veneo),  267. 
senate,  senatus. 
send,  mittere ,  mis,  miss. 
send  forward,  praemittere. 
send  (news  by  letter),  perscribere. 
send  to  the  assistance  of,  auxilio  mit¬ 
tere  (two  datives). 
sentence,  sententia. 
serpent,  serpens. 

serve  a  campaign,  stipendium  merere , 
or  mereri,  308. 
serves,  est  (with  dat.  2S7). 
service,  to  be  of,  prodesse  (dat.). 
serviceable,  idoneus. 
sesterce,  sestertius. 

set  on  fire,  incendere,  succendere.  See 
299. 

set  out,  profcisci,fectus. 
set  out  to  the  assistance  of,  auxilio 
proficisci  (two  datives). 
set  at  liberty,  )  . 

set  free  from!  \  hbcrarc  (aW->- 
several,  plures. 
several  times,  420. 
severe,  gravis:  gravior,  409,  g. 
severity,  gravitas. 
shadow,  umbra. 
shed,  profundere,  fud,f us. 
should,  =  ought,  debere,  oportet,  126 
or  (after  Exerc.  49,  Pt.  I.)  part 
in  dus,  326,  327. 
show  (myself  brave),  praebere. 

Sicily,  Sicilia. 

sick,  aeger,  gra,  grum:  (of  body  or 
mind)  aegrotus. 

side,  to  be  on  our,  a  nobis  stare. 
siege,  obsidio. 

silence,  silentium:  (habit  of)  tacilur- 
nitas. 

silent,  tacitus :  (habitually)  taciturnus. 
silent,  to  be,  silere,  tacere.  See  299. 
silver,  argentum. 
sin,  peccare. 

since,  quum,  quoniam,  492. 
sister,  soror. 
size,  magnitudo. 
skilled  in,  peritus  (gen.). 
slaughter,  trucidare. 
slave,  servus. 

slave,  to  be  the,  servire  (dat.). 
slay,  occidere,  cid,  cis. 
sleep,  somnus. 
smack  of,  redolere  (acc.),  ) 
smell  of,  olere,  $ 

snatch  away,  eripere,  ripu,  rept  (dat  of 
pers.). 

snares,  insidiae. 


346 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


snow,  nix,  nivis. 
so  near  home,  tam  prope  a  domo. 
so.  The  thing  is  so,  res  itase  habet. 
Socrates,  Socrates,  Gen.  is. 
sold,  to  be,  venire  (veneo),  267. 
some,  aliquis,  quispiam,  392.  See 
note  x.  and  390,  v. 
some  one  or  other,  nescio  quis,  394. 
some  body  of  consequence,  aliquis,  396. 
some  other  place,  to,  alio.  394. 
some  other  place,  from,  aliunde. 
some  other  direction,  in,  alio. 
some  other  direction,  from,  aliunde. 
some  considerable,  aliquantum. 
some  —  others,  alii  —  alii. 
sometimes  nonnunquam,  aliquando, 
interdum.  See  402.* 
somewhat.  Omit,  and  put  adj.  in 
compar.  408 :  or  translate  by  paulo 
with  compar. 

sorry  :  I  am  —  for,  piget  me  (gen.). 

soul,  animus. 

sow,  serere,  sev,  sat. 

Spain,  Hispania. 
spare,  parcere,  peperc  (dat.). 
speak,  loqui,  locutus. 
speak  the  truth,  verum  dicere. 
spear,  hasta. 
speech,  oratio,  249. 
spend  his  life,  vitam  agere. 
spend  his  time  (in),  tempus  impendSre , 
337. 

spoken  ill  of,  to  be,  male  audire. 
sport :  to  make  —  of,  illudere,  lus 
(dat.). 

stand  in  need  of,  egere  (gen.  abl.). 

stand  by,  adesse  (dat.). 

star,  stella,  See  51. 

stay  (in  a  place),  commorari. 

starvation,  fames. 

state,  respublica. 

stick,  bacillum. 

stir  out  of  the  city,  urbe  excedere,  249. 

stone,  lapis,  adj.  lapideus. 

storm,  oppugnare  (acc.). 

storm,  to  take  by,  per  vim  expugnare. 

strange,  mirus. 

strength,  vires,  ium. 

strip  ofF,  exuere. 

strive,  niti,  eniti,  nisus,  nixus,  ut. 
struck  (by  stones ,  lightning,  &c.),  ictus. 
study,  studere  (datj). 
subject  to,  obnoxius  (dat.). 
succeed  (  =  follow),  excipere  (acc.). 
successfully,  ex  sententia. 

•  uccour,  succurere  (dat.). 


such,  talis. 

such  is  your  temperance,  quae  tua  es* 
temperantia,  56. 
such  a  manner,  in,  ita  (ut). 
suffer,  sinere,  siv ;  pati ,  passus.  See 
532. 

suggestion,  at  your,  te  auctore. 
suitable,  idoneus,  212. 
sun,  sol. 

superior,  to  be,  )  antecellere ,  praestare, 
surpass,  $  229. 

superstition,  superstitio. 
supper,  ccena. 

support  (  =  nourish),  alere,  alu ,  alit,  or 
alt. 

surround,  circumdhre  (urbem  muro,  or 
murum  urbi). 
survive,  super  esse. 
survivor,  superstes ,  itis. 
suspense,  to  be  in  anxious,  pendere 
animi,  animo  (or  if  necessary, 
animis. 

suspicion,  suspicio. 
swallow,  hirundo,  dinis 
swear,  jurare. 

Syracuse,  Syracusae. 

T. 

Take,t  capere  (cep,  capt)  :  sumere 
(sums,  sumpt).  See  492. 
take  by  storm,  expugnare. 
take  in  good  part,  boni  consulere,  185. 
take  away,  adimere,  eximere.  See  385, 
o  (em,  empt) :  eripere  (dat.  of  pers.). 
take  measures  against,  consulere  in 
(acc.). 

take  cruel  measures  against,  crudeliter 
in  (aliquem)  consulere. 
take  a  camp,  exuere  hostes  castris,  233. 
take  care,  cavere,  cav,  caut. 
take  care  that,  vide  (ne). 
take  under  one’s  protection,  tueri,  374. 
take  hold  of,  prehendere. 
teach,  docere,  two  acc.  257. 
teach  to  play  on  the  lyre,  fidibus  doceri 
(i.  e.  teach  with  or  on  the  strings). 
teacher,  magister ;  fern,  magistra. 
temple,  templum. 
tenacious,  tenax  (gen.). 
tend,  to,  335,  c. 
terrify,  terrere. 
territory,  ager. 
thank,  gratias  agere. 
that  (after  doubt,  deny,  &c.  with  neg.), 
quin. 


*  Rarius  interdum  quam  nonnunquam  esse  memento, 
t  Take  arms,  arma  capere,  or  sumere.  (Cicero.) 


iNDEX  I. 


that  (after  .fear),  ne ;  that — not,  ut  (or 
ne  non). 

that,  as  nom.  to  ‘is,’  &c.,  agrees  with 
nom.  after  it,  386,  m. 
that  famous,  i lie,  381. 
that  (after  ‘  it  remains'  1  it  follows'),  ut. 
that  too,  et  is  ;  idemque,  )  ope 
that  too  not,  nec  is,  y 
that  only,  is  demum ,  385. 

Thebes,  Thebas. ,  arum. 
then  ( =  at  that  time),  turn. 
then  (  =  after),  deinde ,  inde. 
then  (  =  therefore),  igitur,  itaque. 
there,  ibi. 

there  is  no  doubt,  non  est  dubium  quin. 
there  are  some  who  (think),  sunt  qui 
{putent). 

there  are  not  wanting,  non  desunt  qui 
$ubj.). 

there  are  found  some  who,  reperiuntur 
qui  { subj .). 

think,  censere,  putare,  existimare,  ar¬ 
bitrari,  See  257. 

think  nothing  of,  nihili  facere ,  266. 
thigh,  femur,  oris,  n. 
thing.  A  thing  which  (referring  to  a 
preceding  sentence),  id  quod  : 
sometimes,  quae  res ,  36. 
thirst  for,  sitire,  acc.,  240. 
this  being  the  case,  quae  quum  ita  sint. 
thousand,  mille ,  adj. ;  pi.  millia,  subst. 
threaten,  minari.  See  end  of  222. 
three  hundred,  trecenti. 
three  days,  space  of,  triduum. 
three  years,  space  of,  triennium. 
through,  expressing  the  cause ,  sign  of 
abl. 

throw  before,  projic'Sre,  jec ,  ject  (see 

throw  off|  exuere. 
till,  colere,  colu,  cult. 
till,  donee,  dum,  quoad,  507,  &c. 
time,  at  that,  id  temporis. 
time :  at  the  time  oi  the  Latin  Games, 
Ludis  Latinis. 

time,  for  a  long,  dudum,  diu,  jamdu- 
dum,  &c.  See  420. 

times,  tw"?  or  three  ( =  several  times),* 
bis  terque. 

times,  two  or  three  ( =  not  more  than),* 
bis  terve. 

times .  many  times  as  great,  multis 
partibus  major. 
timid,  timidus. 

tired  :  am  —  of,  taedet  me  { gen .). 
to  death  (after  condemn),  capitis. 
to  no  purpose,  nequicquam,  frustra. 
See  33. 


—ENGLISH.  347 

to  each  other  (after  contrary,  compare\ 
inter  se. 
toga,  toga. 

together  (after  to  compare),  inter  se. 
to-morrow,  eras. 
tongues :  to  hold  their  — ,  299. 
too  much,  nimius  {nimius  somnus,  or 
nimium  somni). 
too  dear,  nimio. 

top  of,  summus ,  {adj.  See  179). 
torch,  taeda. 

tortured  :  to  be  —  in  mind,  discruciari 
animi. 

towards,  adversus,  erga,  470  :  in,  281. 
treachery,  proditio. 
treason,  proditio. 
treaty,  foedus,  eris. 
tribune,  tribunus. 
triumph,  triumphus. 
triumph  in,  per  triumphum  {ducere). 
triumph  :  gain  a  —  for  a  victory  over 
the  Gauls,  de  Gallis  triumphare. 
troublesome,  molestus. 

Troy,  Troja. 

true :  it  is  — but,  ille  quidem — sed,  383. 
truly,  vere. 
trustworthy,  fdelis. 
truth,  veritas. 

turn  back,  revertere,  reverti,  339. 
turn  out,  evadere,  vas. 
turn  it  into  a  fault,  vitio  vertere,  242, 
(2). 

Tuscan,  1  uscus. 

two  days,  space  of,  biduum. 


U. 

Unacquainted  with,  rudis  {gen.). 
unbecoming,  it  is,  dedecet  {acc.). 
unburied,  inhumatus. 
under  favour,  bond  tud  venid. 
under  such  an  age,  306. 
understand,  intelligere,  lex,  led. 
undertake,  suscipere :  ( =  engage  to  do) 
recipere. 

undertake  to  corrupt,  corrumpendum 
suscipere. 

unexpectedly,  de  improviso. 
unfriendly,  inimicus. 
unless,  nisi,  451. 
unless  indeed,  nisi  vero,  ox  forte. 
unless  I  am  mistaken,  nisime fallit. 
unlike,  dissimilis  {dat.). 
unmindful,  immemor  {gen.). 
unskilled  in,  imperitus  {gen.). 
unteach,  dedocere ;  {two  accus.) 
unwilling,  to  be,  nolle. 


*  Bis  tkrque  augebit ,  minuet  bis  terve  notatum. 


348 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


unwilling,  >  .  u 
unwillingly,  ) 
unworthy,  indignus  ( abl .). 
use,  uti  ( usus ),  abl. 
use,  make  a  bad —  of,  male  uti  (abl.). 
use,  make  a  perverse  —  of,  perverse  uli 
(abl.). 

useful,  utilis ,  212. 
useless,  inutilis ,  212. 
utter  many  falsehoods,  multa  mentiri 
(de),  38. 


y. 

Vain,  in,  necquicquam;  frustra  (See 
33). 

value,  (Bstimare ,  264. 
valuable,  pretiosus. 
very  (with  superl.),  vel,  410. 
very  many,  permulti. 
very  much,  permulta. 
very  little,  perpauca. 
very,  to  be  translated  by  magnus  or 
summus,  when  the  adj.  after  ‘  very  ’ 
is  translated  by  a  subst.  ‘  Is  very 
honorable ,’  ‘  magno  honori  est,’  242. 
vice,  vitium. 
violence,  vis. 
virtue,  virtus ,  virtutis. 
virtuous,  honestus. 
virtuously,  honeste. 

visit  (on  business),  adire;  (as  a  friend) 
visere;  (on  business,  or  not)  con- 
venire.  See  249. 

voyage,  to  have  a  prosperous,  ex  sen¬ 
tentia  navigare. 


W. 

Wage,  gerere,  gess,  gest. 
wait,  manere. 

wait  for,  expectare ,  opperiri,  praestolari, 
See  299. 

wait  upon,  convenire  (acc.). 

walk,  ambulare. 

wall,  murus ;  (of  a  walled  city)  mcenia, 
pi. ;  (of  a  house)  paries,  etis :  (of  a 
garden,  Ac.)  maceria. 

wanting  to  be,  deesse  (dat.). 
war,  in,  bello. 

warn,  monere  (ut,  ne).  See  p.  222,  note, 
washed,  to  be  (of  an  island),  circum¬ 
fundi,  fusus. 

watch  over,  cavere,  cav,  caut  (dal.). 
water,  aqua. 

Wave,  fluctus,  Us. 
way,  in  such  a,  ita  (ut). 
weary,  am,  taedet  me  (gen.). 


weight,  onus,  eris. 
well,  bene :  (  =  rightly),  recte. 
whatever,  quicquid ,  neut.  to,  subst.  | 
quicunque  (adj.). 
wheat,  triticum. 

when,  quum,  quando,  105.  (  =  as  soon 
as)  ubi,  ut,  512. 
whence,  unde. 
where,  ubi. 

where  you  are,  istic ;  from  where  you 
are,  istinc  ;  to  where,  Ac.  istuc. 
where  in  the  world,  ubi  or  ubinam 
gentium. 

whether — or  (of  two  statements  left 
doubtful),  sive — sive  :  seu — seu. 
whether  (in  double  dependent  ques¬ 
tions),  see  118,  119;  num  (in  single 
dependent  questions), 
which  (of  two),  uter. 
whip  with  rods,  virgis  caedere ;  cecid, 
cues. 

white,  albus. 
whither,  quo. 
why,  cur,  quare,  105. 
whole,  totus,  universus.  (See  179.) 
will,  against  my,  invitus.  Against  tho 
will  of  Caius,  invito  Caio. 
willing  to  be,  velle. 

wind,  ventus. 

wine,  vinum. 

winter  (as  adj.),  hibernus. 
wisdom,  sapientia. 
wise,  sapiens. 
wish,  velle,  142. 
wish  well  to,  cupcre  alicui. 
with,  cum. 

with,  after,  ‘  to  do,’  de. 
with,  after  ‘  to  make  a  beginning,’  a,  ab. 
( in  the  house  of,  1  ,,  v 

in  the  mind  of/ 

with=  in  the  estimation  S  &  multurr 

.  in  the  presence  of, ,  valere.) 
without,  sine;  ox  adj.  expers  (gen.). 
without,  to  be,  carere  (abl.). 
without  being  heard,  inauditus,  a,  um. 
without :  before  partic.  subst.,  non,  or 
some  other  negative,  with  parti¬ 


ciple,  363, 
520. 


c.  neque,  ut  non,  quin , 


without,  after  nunquam  and  before 
particip.  subst.  quin  with  subj.. 
88,  c. 

wolf,  lupus. 

wonder  at,  admirari. 

wonderful,  mimis. 

wont,  to  be,  solere,  solitus  sum. 

wool,  lana. 

word,  verbum. 

word  for  word,  ad  verbum. 

worship,  to,  colere ,  colu,  cult. 


INDEX  I. - ENGLISH. 


349 


world,  mundus:  orbis  terree  or  terra¬ 
rum. 

world,  in  the  (after  superl.),  vel,  410. 

worthy,  dignus  ( abl .). 

would  have  been  (better),  >  fuit ,  not 

would  be  (tedious,  &c.),  $  fuisset . 

wound,  vulnus,  eris. 

wound,  ferire,  icere,  299 

wretched,  miser ,  a,  urn. 


write  (news),  perscribere. 

Y. 

Yesterday,  heri. 
young,  juvenis. 

youth  (=  time  of),  juventus,  utis;  ju> 
venta. 

youth  (=  body  of),  juventus.  See  339. 


1IN  D  E  X  II. 

LATIN,  AND  CRITICAL  REMARKS. 


Words  followed  by  (s)  are  distinguished  from  their  synonymea. 


A,  ab,  abs,  348. 

ab  hinc  :  not  with  ordinals.  Place  of  \ 
abhinc,  305. 

a  nobis  stare ;  facere ;  sentire,  348. 
a  manu  servus,  348. 
abdicare  magistratum,  or  se  magis¬ 
tratu,  308. 

abesse  (s),  227,  r.  (propius), 
ac,  atque  (s),  4,  d. 
accedit  (huc  —  quod  or  ut),  513. 
accendere  (s),  299,  h. 
accidere  (s),  374,  d. 
accipere  (s),  299,  h. 

accusative  of  the  personal  pronoun 
seldom  omitted  before  the  infin,  ex¬ 
cept  after  fateri,  dicere,  opinari.  &c. 
p.  55,  s. 

acies  (s),  348,  t. 
actum  est  de,  59. 
adesse  (s),  227,  q. 
adimere  (s),  385. 
adire  (s),  294,  k. 
adjuvare  (s),  222,  k. 
adspergere  aliquid  alicui,  or  aliquem 
aliqua  re,  233. 
sedes  (s),  356,  y. 
aequalis,  212,  x. 
sequi  boni  facere,  185*. 
aeternus  (s),  p.  49,  c. 
ait  esse  paratus,  149,  c. 
ales  (s),  480,  u. 
aliquando  (s),  )  402 

aliquantum  (s),  $ 
aliud  —  aliud,  38. 
aliud  alio  (fertur),  *00,  d.  . 
amare  (s),  p.  68,  a. 
ambulatum  est,  296. 
amittere  (s),  56,  n. 
amnis  (s),  472,  o. 
amoenus  (s),  212,  v. 


an,  in  single  questions ,  120,  f. 

an  non  (s),  122,  b. 

an  quisquam  1  p.  139,  c. 

anima,  -us  (s),  92,  c. 

apparere  (s),  150,  w. 

appellare  (s),  51,  i 

aptus  (s),  212. 

astrum  (s),  51. 

audis  seu  Jane ,  272,  p. 

aut  (s),  456. 

auxiliari  (s),  222,  k. 

ave  (s),  281,  s. 

avere  (s),  420. 

avis  (s),  480,  u. 


B. 

Beatus  (s),  443. 

bibere  (s),  257,  k. 

bis  terque,  >4?n  . 

bis  terve,  $ 

bona  tua  venia,  428. 

boni  consulere,  185. 

but  cfter  nemo,  nullus,  &c.  44. 


C. 

cadere  ts),  299,  i. 

callere  (s),  385. 

capere  (s),  492. 

caput  feritur  alicui,  294  (b). 

carere  (s),  273,  h. 

caritas  (s),  281,  r. 

cave  putes,  539. 

cavere  alicui;  aliquem;  sibi;  ab  ali 
quo,  233. 

censere  (s),  257,  x. 
certiorem  facere,  187. 


t  Bis  TEBQ.UE  augebit ,  minuet  bis  terve  notatum. 


INDEX  II. - LATIN. 


351 


charge  in  the  acc.  if  expressed  by  a 
neut.  pron.,  194. 
circumdare  urbem  muro,  )  «qo 
circumdare  murum  urbi,  ) 
civitas  in  appos.  to  the  plural  name  of 
a  people:  Carmonenses,  quce  est 
civitas ,  138,  k. 
claudus  altero  pede,  276. 
caepi  (s),  150,  x. 
coeptus  est,  150,  x. 
comes  (s),  185,  z. 
comissatio  (s),  428,  b. 
committere  ut,  479. 

COMPARATIVE  of  an  ADVERB,  p.  37,  V. 

compilare,  257,  g. 
componere  (s),  222,  r. 
concessum  est  (s),  124,  d. 
conditional  forms  of  the  infin .,  p. 
160,  x. 

conferre  (s),  222,  r. 

consequence  in  perf.  subj.  for  im~ 
pcrf ,  418.t 
consors  (s),  185,  z. 
consulere  alicui :  in  aliquem,  233. 
contendere  (s),  222,  r. 
contingere  (s),  374,  d. 
convenire  (s),  249,  f. 
convivium  (s),  428,  b. 
creber  (s),  410,  n. 
crederes,  426. 
credor  ( when  right),  474,  r. 
eruor,  229,  f. 

cujus  es  temperantiae,  56. 
culpa  (s),  242,  g. 
cuncti  (s),  443. 
cupere  (s),  420. 
cur  (s),  105,  f. 

curare  aliquid  faciendum,  351. 


D. 


desitus  est,  150,  y. 

desperatus,  229. 

deterior  (s),  410. 

dicere  (sj,  177,  q. 

diligere  (s),  p.  68,  a. 

diu  (s),  420. 

dolere  (s),  521,  a. 

dominus  (s),  180. 

dono  dare,  242,  (3). 

donum  (s),  242,  h. 

dubito.  See  Questions,  §  14 

dudum  (s),  420. 

dulcis,  211,  v. 

dum,  494, 

dummodo  (ne),  494. 


E. 


E  re  mea  est,  542. 

ecquis,  \  400.  «• 

edere  ( 's ),  257. 

egere  (s),  273,  h. 

ego  credor,  when  correct ,  474,  r. 

eo  insolentiae,  512. 

epulae  (s),  428,  b. 

ergo,  with  g  en.,  207. 

esse  honori  alicui,  242. 

est  infinitum,  426. 

et  is  (idem,  &c.),  385. 

evenire,  374,  d. 

ever,  how  translated,  p.  141,  k. 
ex  pedibus  laborare,  542. 
excedere  urbe,  urbem,  244,  q. 
excipere  (s),  299,  a. 
eximere  (s),  385. 
expilare  (s),  257,  g. 
exspectare  (s),  227,  z. 

ESU  «.**«• 


damnare  voti,  votis,  201,  s. 
damnare  capitis,  201. 
damnor  a  nolente  esse  bono,  not  Latin, 
152,  y. 

dapes  (s),  428,  b. 
de  facie  nosse,  i 
de  improviso,  >521. 
de  industria,  ) 
debere  (s),  126,  f. 
deesse  (s),  227,  r. 
defendere,  374. 
delictum  (s),  428,  c. 
demonstrative  pron.  sometimes  ex¬ 
pressed  after  quin,  p.  30,  note  e. 
See  88,  (a) . 


P. 

fac  ut,  539. 

facere  de,  291 ;  facere  non  possum 
quin,  89. 

facturos  pollicentur,  149,  c. 
fallere  (s),  38,  z. 
fallit  me,  209. 
familiariter  uti,  456. 
fanum  (s),  356,  y. 
fari  (s),  177,  q. 
fas  est,  124,  d. 
faustus  (s),  443. 
felix  (s),  443. 


t  Potius  dixerim,  ubi  de  re  prseterita  agatur,  perfectum  subjunctivi  magi» 
eventum  facti  spectare ;  imperfectum  mentem  et  consilium  agentis.  Glinther. 


352 


INDEX  II. - LATIN. 


festinare  (s),  177,  m 
fieri  potest  ut,  129. 
flagitare  (s),  257. 
fluvius  (s),  472,  v. 
forsitan,  494. 

fortior  quam  prudentior,  452,  w. 
frequens  (s),  410,  n. 

Eg?  j  W.  33,  u. 

frustra  (s),  33,  v. 
fugit  me,  209. 
fuit  utilius,  &c.,  426. 
fundamental  rule  for  the  sequence  of 
tenses,  40. 

FUTURE  SUBJUNCT.,  41. 


G. 


gaudere  (s),  521,  a. 
gestire  (s),  420. 
oratus  (s),  212,  v. 


H. 

haeres  ex  drodante,  &c.,  556. 
baud  (s),  p.  70,  h. 
haud  scio  an,  116. 

baud  scio  an  nemo,  stronger  than  haud 
scio  an  quisquam.  Is  the  latter 
form  correct ?  See  note  on  Diff. 
of  Idiom ,  25. 
herus  (s),  180. 

hie,  377,  &c.,  relating  to  the  more  remote 
word,  378,  h :  to  id  de  quo  potissi¬ 
mum  agimus,  378,  h  (3). 
homo  (s),  38,  y. 
hostis  (s),  221,  z. 


I. 


incendere  (s),  299,  h. 
incipere  (s),  150,  x. 
incolumis  (s),  542. 
incumbere  rei  or  in  rem,  p.  88. 
incusare  (s),  p.  72,  m. 
indigere  (s),  257. 
induere,  233. 
inimicus  (s),  212,  z. 
infinitive,  with  participle  or  subst.  in 
the  nom.  by  attraction ,  54. 
inquit,  177,  q. 

inspergere  aliquid  alicui  or  aliquem  ali- 
iqua  re,  p.  86,  d. 
instar :  when  to  be  used,  207. 
inter  se  contraria,  25. 
interdum  (s),  402. 

interea  (s),  402 ;  in  neg.  sentences,  see 
note  g. 

interesse  (s),  227,  q. 
interest  Ciceronis  esse  eloquentis , 
wrong,  152,  z. 
interficere  (s),  308, 
interim  (s),  402. 
invenire  (s),  177,  o. 
ipse  (  =  exactly),  308. 
ipse,  ivithpers.  pron .,  when  in  the  nom., 
when  in  oblique  case,  368. 
ipse,  hardly  ever  in  the  nom.  (in  Cic.) 

after  appended  met,  p.  131,  c. 
irasci  (s),  222. 
is  sum  qui,  483. 

is  (ea,  id),  the  usual  pron.  for  the  third 
person  where  there  is  no  emphasis, 
no  distinction  to  be  marked,  37,  u. 
iste,  that  of  yours,  377  (c). 
iste,  in  letters,  refers  to  the  place 
where  one’s  correspondent  resides, 
382. 

istinc,  387. 

ito  justum,  si  est,  &c.,  451. 


icere  (s),  299,  i. 

id,  not  to  be  used  as  nom.  to  { to  be' 
when  a  subst.  fellows,  but  to  agree 
with  that  subst.,  p.  135,  m. 
id  aetatis  163,  /?. 

ir>  quod  far  quod  only,  adds  emphasis, 
p.  27,  note  *. 
idem  ( =  also ),  387. 
idem  est  qui  (or  ac,  atque),  45,  b. 
idoneus  (s),  212*  ;  qui,  486. 
ignoscere  (s),  428,  c. 
file,  49,  377,  &c. :  with  quidem  in  par¬ 
tial  concessions,  followed  by  a ‘but,' 
383. 

imperare  (s),  78,  w. 
impertire  aliquid  alicui;  or  aliquem 
aliqua  re,  p.  86,  c. 
in  ante  diem,  530. 
in  dies,  69,  t. 


J. 

jampridem  cupio,  413. 
jubere  (acc.  with,  inf.;  ut  when  used 
absolutely),  p.  80,  h. 
jucunde  vivi  non  potest,  504. 
jucundus  (s),  211,  v. 
juvare  (s),  222,  k. 


L. 


laetari,  521. 

latet  me,  or  mihi  (bad),  259,  a. 
libenter  ( =  like  to),  492. 


libertinus 

libertus 


561. 


licet  (s),  124,  d. 

licet  esse  beatum,  or  beato,  153,  b,  c. 


INDEX  II. 


•LATIN. 


353 


licet  (although),  451. 
locare  aliquid  faciendum, 
locare  (s),  480,  v. 
loqui  (s),  177,  q. 
ludis  Latinis,  311. 
lugere  (s),  521,  a. 


M. 


maceria  (s),  233. 

macte  esto,  &c.,  280,  q. 

major  annis  viginti,  &c.,  Q,.  on  §  42. 

male  audire,  492. 

mandare  (s),  78,  w. 

me  (miserum)  qui,  486,  i. 

mederi  (s),  222, 1. 

medicina  ?  057  , 

medicamentum  $  1# 

memini  (s),  62,  q.  61,  1. 

memini  legere,  426. 

mens  (s),  92,  c. 

metuere  (ne,  ut),  95 ;  s.  99,  e. 

minari  mortem  alicui,  222. 

miserari  ) 

misereri  >  (s),  201,  r. 

miseret  me  ) 

modo,  494. 

moenia  (s),  233. 

moerere  (s),  521, 

monere  t,  ut ;  ne ;  acc.  with  inf.,  189,  k. 
monere  (s),  222,  i. 
munus  (s),  242,  h. 
murus  (s),  233. 


neque,  with  verb  =  without ,  520. 

nequicquarn  (s),  33,  v. 

nescio  quis,  394. 

nescio  an,  116. 

nihil  me  terret,  443. 

nihil  habeo  quod,  477. 

nihi  aliud  nisi,  185. 

nihil  aliud  quam  rident,  450. 

nisi,  451. 

nisi  forte,  or  vero,  451. 
noli  putare,  539. 
nolle  =  would  not,  541. 
nomen  est  mihi  Caio,  239. 
non  (s),  p.  70,  h. 

non  possum  quin  (for  facere  non  pos¬ 
sum  quin;  or,  non  possum  non 
with  infin.)  should  not  be  imitated. 
[Cicero  quotes  non  possum 
quin  exclamem,  from  Plautus.] 
non  quod,  or  quo  —  sed,  492. 
non  desunt  qui  putent,  477. 
non  solum  —  verum  (or  sed)  etiam,  257. 
non  est  quod,  477. 
nonne,  102. 
nonnunquam  (s),  402. 
noscere  (s),  365. 

nostrum,  vestrum,  after  partitives, 
and  with  omnium,  372. 
nullus  dubito,  492. 
num,  102 

nuptam  esse,  222,  m. 


O. 


N. 

nam  appended  to  interrogates,  p.  140, 
398. 


when  a  purpose  is 
expressed  without 
emphasis  on  the 
negative,  80. 


ne  quis  (not,  ut 
nemo), 

ne  quid  (not,  ut 
nihil), 

ne  unquam  (not, 
ut  nunquam), . 

ne  =  that  after  verbs  of  fear,  95. 
ne  —  quidem,  185. 
ne  dicam,  443. 
necare  (s),  308. 
necesse  est,  504. 
necne  (s),  122,  b. 
nedum  (ut),  145. 

nemo  pictor,  443 :  neminis,  nemine ; 
see  note  p.  129. 


or,  in  oberro,  &c.  =  amb,  lucbt,  248,  r. 

obedire  (s),  222. 

obire  mortem,  &c.  (s),  249,  u. 

obtingere  )  (  .  374  . 

obvenire  $  ^  6  Q* 

obviam  ire,  512. 

occidere  (s),  308. 

operae  pretium  est,  532. 

opitulari  (s),  222,  k. 

oportet  (s),  126,  f. 

oportet  me  facere,  )  .«g 

oportet  (ego)  faciam,  $ 

opperiri  (s),  229,  z. 

oppetere  mortem  (s),  249,  u. 

oppidum  (s),  63,  z. 

opprobrium  (s),  242,  i. 

optare  (s),  420,  opto  ut,  p.  214. 

opus  est  (s),  126,  f.  170,  i. 

opus  est  properato,  177. 

opus  absolutum  habeo,  364. 


t  Moneo,  =  to  warn  a  person  to  do  something,  sometimes  takes  infin.  instead 
of  ut  with  subj. — Cic.  hardly  ever  uses  the  infin.  if  any  particular  subject  is 
named : — ratio  ipsa  monet,  amicitias  comparare. 


354 


INDEX  I. - LATIN. 


orare  (s),  257.* 

ORIGIN  OF  THE  PERFECT  WITH  (  HAVE  ’ 
IN  MODERN  LANGUAGES,  p.  130,  a. 

551- 


P. 


pace  tua  dixerim,  428. 
par  (s),  212,  x. 
parere  (s),  222. 
parum  (s),  402. 
paries  (s),  233. 

PARTICIPIAL  SUBSTANTIVE,  Caution 

26.  See  also  p.  151,  e. 

PARTICIPLES  IN  RUS  AND  DUS,  §  46,  p. 
126. 

participles  of  deponent  verbs,  365. 

pasci  (s),  257,  k. 

pati  (s),  532.* 

paululum  >  ,  V  402 

paulum  \  vsb  quz- 

pejor  (s),  410. 

perf.  subj.  (for  imperf.)  in  a  conse¬ 
quence  with  ut,  418  :  in  obi.  narr. 
p.  161,  z. 

personal  pron.  expressed,  when  there 
is  a  distinction  between  two  actions 
of  the  same  person ,  p.  17,  note. 
persuadere  (s),  222,  i. 
persuasum  est  mihi,  291. 
persuasissimum  habeo  (bad),  291,  z. 
petere  (s),  257.* 
pietas  (s),  281,  r. 

plerique:  plerorumque  plerarumque, 
not  found,  291. 
polliceri  (s),  17,  1. 
polliceri,  with  infin.  fut.  15,  a. 
ponere  (s),  480,  v. 
poscere  (s),  257.* 
possum  (s),  125,  e. 

post  —  annos  quam  excesserat ;  or  ex¬ 
cessit,  310,  s.  514. 
posthabere  aliquid  alicui,  227. 
postquam,  512. 
postulare  (s),  257.* 
potare,  257,  k. 
potentials  4ki 
potestas  $ '  ^  ’ 

potestatem  sui  facere,  451. 

pnesfare  |  se  fortem'  229- 
praemium  (s),  242. 
praesens,  >  227 

praesentem  esse,  \ 
praestolari  (s),  227,  z. 
praeterit  (non  mei,  259. 
prehendere  (s),  492. 
present  after  si  in  connection  with  fut., 
p.  14<  t. 


PRESENT  and  IMPERF.  passive  of  Eng* 

lish  verb,  135,  e. 

present  or  perf.  subj.  in  connection 
with  infin.  where  the  general  ruli 
would  require  imperf  or  pluperf, 

pridem  (s),  420. 
prim-um,  o  (s),  83,  a. 
probrum  (s),  242,  i. 
f  pro  re  nata, 

<  pro  virili, 

(  pro  eo  ac  mereor, 
pro  tua  temperantia, 
proelium  (s),  348,  t. 
profugus  (s),  276,  n. 
projicere  se  alicui  ad  pedes;  or  ad 
alicujus  pedes,  p.  89,  note  1. 
promitto  (s),  17,  J 
properare  (s),  177,  m. 
propior,  211. 

propius  (dat.  or  acc.),  512. 

propius  abesse,  319. 

prosper  (s),  443. 

prospicere,  >  9qo 

providere,  )  66‘ 

proxime,  512. 

proximus,  211. 

pugna  (s),  348,  t. 

purgandi  sui  causa,  334. 

putares  (you  would  have  thought ),  426. 


►  542. 
56. 


a. 


quae  res,  36. 

quae  quum  ita  sint,  492. 
quae  tua  est  temperantia,  56. 
quam  pro  (after  compar.),  409,  f. 
quam  nullus,  492. 

quam  ut  sit,  &c.  (after  compar.),  486. 

quam  brevissime,  &c.,  410. 

quam  omitted  after  amplius,  &c.,  552,  k. 

ST  I451-  Se“- 

quanta  maxima  potest  esse,  &c.,  410 

quare,  105,  f. 

quasi,  494. 

queo  (s),  125,  e. 

quid  aetatis,  164,  0. 

quid  facerem  ?  427,  c. 

quilibet  (s),  390,  u. 

quin,  44,  3.  See  note  e,  p.  30,  and 
note  d,  p.  215. 

quin  after  verbs  of  doubting,  &c.t  in 
negative  sentences,  85,  86. 
quippe  (qui),  482,  a. 
quis  est  qui  1  477. 
quis  sum  qui  7  483. 
quisquam,  389,  390,  ()). 
si  quisquam,  391,  w. 
quisquam :  an  est  —  qui  ?  477. 


INDEX  I. - LATIN. 


355 


quisque :  doctissimus  quisque,  399. 

quivis  (s),  390,  u. 

quo,  63,  without  compar.,  p.  215,  e. 

quo  amentiae.  512. 

quoad  ejus,  Ac.,  512. 

quod  sciam.  56. 

quominus,  94. 

quoniam,  492. 

quot  estis,  Ac.,  174. 

quotidie,  69,  t. 

quotusquisque  est  qui  (subj.),  477. 
quum  interrogaretur,  not  interrogatus 
esset.  415.  s. 


1W. 


re  =  forth,  249,  v.  (=  ipt  ?) 
recipere  (s),  308,  a. 
recordari,  p  72 :  (s),  201,  q. 
redire  (s),  330,  p. 

relative  pronoun,  when  it  does  not 
agree  with  its  proper  antecedent,  48. 
remedium  (s),  257,  1. 
reminisci  (s),  201,  q. 
reperire  (s),  177,  o. 
reperiuntur,  Ac.,  qui,  477. 
res  ita  se  habet,  451. 
reum  facere,  187. 


reus,  its  meaning,  188,  f. 


revenire 
reverti 
rivus  (s),  472,  v. 
rogare  (s),  257.* 


£  (s),  339, 


391,  w. 


si  quis, 
si  quisquam,  _ 
sive,  seu,  456,  a. 
sidus  (s),  51. 
silere  (s),  299,  g. 
similis  tui,  tibi,  212,  w.  (212,  x.) 
simulae,  Ac.,  512. 
simulare,  15  (a) ;  (s),  17,  m. 
sin  minus,  j 
sin  autem,  ! 
sin  secus,  j  * 
sin  aliter,  J 

sine  aliquo  or  aliqua,,  when  right ,  390,  * 
sine  omni  cura,  wrong,  391,  w. 
sinere  (s),  532.* 

l  (s).  185>  z- 

spoliare  (s),  273. 
stella  (s),  57. 
stipendium  mereri,  308. 
suadere  (s),  222,  i. 
suavis  (s),  212,  v. 
sublevare  )  ,  .  999  . 
subvenire  )  '  '*  ’  ' 

succendere  (s),  299,  h. 
succurrere  (s),  222,  k. 
sumere  (s),  492. 
succensere  (s),  222. 
summus  mons,  179. 
sunt  qui  putent,  45  and  477. 
superlative  and  other  adjj.  placed  in 
the  relat.  instead  of  in  the  principal 
clause ,  53. 


S. 


salutare  (s),  249,  f. 

salve  (s),  281,  s. 

salvus  (s),  542. 

sanare  (s),  222,  1. 

sanguis  (s),  299,  f. 

sapientior  Caio,  ?  405 

sapientior  quam  Caius,  )  ’  ' 

satis,  512. 

satius,  ex.  34. 

scelus  (s),  243,  g. 

scire  (s),  385. 

se  often  inserted  by  Cic.  after  velle,  p. 


55,  r. 

secundum  aliquem  decernere,  504. 

securus  (s),  542. 

sempiternus  (s),  123,  c. 

sensit  delapsus,  149,  u. 

sententia  (ex),  17. 

si  =  whether,  p.  158,  t. 

si  hoc  dicas,  p.  153,  h. 

si  (mood),  451,  t. 

si  aliquis  )  /  v  391  w .  402  h. 

si  quisquam  ) v  h  *  1 


T. 


tacere  (s),  299,  g. 

tanquam,  494. 

tantum  abest  ut  —  ut,  534. 

templum  (s),  356,  y. 

timere  (s),  99,  e. 

triplicem  aciem  instruere,  456. 

trucidare  (s),  308. 

-to,  -tote  ( imperative  forms  in),  480,  x 
tueri,  374. 
tutus  (s),  542. 


U. 

ubi  terrarum,  ) 

ubinam  gentium,  )  0  * 

universi  (s).  443. 

unquam,  402. 

ut  =  as  soon  as;  when,  512. 

ut  =  that  not,  95. 

ut  omitted,  417,  6. 

ut  ne,  when  used  for  ne,  77,  note. 

ut  quisque  —  ita,  407. 

at  ajunt,  319. 


356 


INDEX  I. - LATIN. 


uterlibet  (s),  390,  u. 
utervis  (s),  390,  u. 
utinam,  494. 
vtpote  qui,  482. 


V. 

vacat  mihi,  154  :  337. 
valere  apud  aliquem,  463. 
vapulare  ab  291. 

velim  (ut)  judices,  417,  b 
velle  =  would,  541. 


velle  sibi,  242. 
veniam  dare,  428,  c. 
verbi  causl,  443. 
vereri  (s),  99,  e. 
videri,  150,  w. 
vir  (s),  38,  y. 
vis,  decl.  p  69,  note  g. 
visere  (s),  249,  s. 
vitium  (s),  242,  g. 
vitio  vertere,  &c.,  242. 
vix  crediderim,  42».* 
vocare  (s),  51,  i. 
volucres  (s),  480,  u. 
vult  <  se  esse  principem,  f 

(  esse  princep*.  (  v 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  PUBLISHERS. 


ARNOLD’S  FIRST  LATIN  BOOK ; 

BEUODELLED  AND  REWRITTEN,  AND  ADAPTED  TO  THE  OLLENDORFF  METHOD  OF 

INSTRUCTION. 

By  ALBERT  IIARKNESS,  A.  M. 

12mo.  302  pages.  Price  75  Cents. 

This  book  is  designed  to  take  the  place  of  the  American  edition  of 
Arnold’s  First  and  Second  Latin  Book,  issued  five  years  since.  Under 
the  labors  of  the  present  author,  the  work  of  Arnold  has  undergone 
radical  changes,  and  been  adapted  to  the  Ollendorff  improved  method 
of  instruction,  and  is  superior  to  the  former  work  in  its  plan  and  all  of 
the  details  of  instruction. 

From  N.  W.  Benedict,  Prin.  Grammar  School ,  Rochester  University. 

“  Having  thoroughly  examined  Harkness1  Arnold’s  First  Latin  Book,  and  watched 
the  results  of  its  introduction  into  several  seminaries  of  learning  in  this  section  of  the 
State,  I  can  safely  say  that  I  consider  it  superior  to  any  of  the  primary  Latin  works  with 
which  I  am  acquainted.  Its  plan  and  execution  are  such  as  to  render  correct  instruction 
in  the  LatiD  language,  in  its  initiatory  steps,  practicable  to  a  greater  number  of  teachers 
than  have  hitherto  been  accustomed  to  instruct  in  that  department,  and  such  as  to  lay 
open  the  practical  benefits  of  such  instruction  to  very  many  who  have  not  heretofore 
been  thought  to  be  in  circumstances  to  derive  any  benefit  from  attention  to  classical 
studies.” 

From  W.  E.  Tolman,  Instructor  in  Providence  High  School. 

“  I  have  used  *  Arnold’s  First  Latin  Book,  remodelled  and  rewritten,1  by  Mr.  Hark¬ 
ness,  in  my  classes  during  the  past  year,  and  I  find  it  to  be  a  work  not  so  much  ‘re¬ 
modelled  and  rewritten1  as  one  entirely  new,  both  in  its  plan  and  in  its  adaptation  to 
the  wants  of  the  beginner  in  Latin.” 

From  J.  R.  Boise,  Professor  of  Ancient  Languages,  in  Michigan  University. 

“  I  have  examined  your  First  Book  in  Latin,  and  am  exceedingly  pleased  both  with 
the  plan  and  execution.  I  shall  not  fail  to  use  my  influence  towards  introducing  it  into 
the  classical  schools  of  this  State.11 

From  George  Capron,  Principal  of  Worcester  High  School. 

“  I  have  examined  the  work  with  care,  and  am  happy  to  say  that  I  find  it  superior 
to  any  similar  work  with  which  I  am  acquainted.  I  shall  recommend  it  to  my  next 
class.” 

From  Mr.  A.  P.  S.  Stewart,  Principal  of  Holton  High  School. 

“The  clearness  with  which  principles  are  stated  and  illustrated,  and  especially  the 
syntax  in  which  the  nature  and  the  relations  of  the  different  elements  of  a  sentence  are 
more  fully  developed  than  in  works  of  similar  kind,  have  struck  me  as  being  among  its 
chief  excellencies.  It  is  better  suited  to  the  wants  of  beginners  than  any  other  work 
with  which  I  am  acquainted.” 

From  Prof.  Gammell,  of  Brown  University. 

“  The  book  seems  to  me,  as  I  anticipated  it  would  be,  a  valuable  additior  to  the 
works  now  in  use  among  teachers  of  Latin  in  the  schools  of  the  United  States,  and  fc* 
many  of  them  it  will  undoubtedly  form  an  advantageous  substitute.” 

28 


D.  APPLETON  $  CO.,  PhBLISHERS. 


SECOND  LATIN  BOOK ; 

Comprising  a  Historical  Latin  Reader,  with  Notes  and  R  ales  for  Tinus* 
lating,  and  an  Exercise  Book,  developing  a  complete  Analytical 
Syntax,  in  a  Series  of  Lessons  and  Exercises,  involving  the  Con¬ 
struction,  Analysis,  and  Reconstruction  of  Latin  Sentences. 

By  ALBERT  HARKNESS,  A.  M. 

12mo.  361  pages.  Price  90  Cents. 

This  work  is  designed  as  a  sequel  to  the  author’s  “  First  Latin  Book/ 
which  has  acquired  a  wide  reputation.  It  comprises  a  complete  ana 
lytical  syntax,  exhibiting  the  essential  structure  of  the  Latin  language 
from  its  simplest  to  its  most  expanded  and  modified  form. 

From  J.  F.  Richardson,  Professor  of  the  Latin  Language  and  Literature,  Roches¬ 
ter  University. 

“  I  have  examined  it  with  considerable  care,  and  I  am  glad  to  see  this  addition  to  the 
valuable  series  of  classical  works  now  issued  by  the  Appletons. 

“  A  faithful  study  of  the  work  upon  the  plan  indicated  by  the  author,  will  greatly 
facilitate  the  student’s  acquisition  of  the  general  principles  of  the  language,  and  prepare 
him  for  the  intelligent  reading  of  the  Latin  classics.” 

From  Prof.  Haven  of  the  University  of  Michigan 
“  I  am  fully  convinced  that  a  faithful  use  of  the  First  and  Second  Latin  Books  will 
place  the  pupil  securely  on  the  right  track,  and  facilitate,  more  than  any  other  element¬ 
ary  treatises  with  which  I  am  acquainted,  his  thorough  understanding  of  the  language. 

“  I  heartily  wish  that  all  students  preparing  for  this  college  would  6tudy  both  books 
thoroughly.” 

From  Prof.  Anderson,  of  Lewisburg  University ,  Pa. 

“  A  faithful  use  of  the  work  would  diminish  the  drudgery  of  the  student’s  earliest 
studies,  and  facilitate  his  progress  in  his  subsequent  course.  I  wish  the  work  a  wide 
circulation.” 

From  Prof.  Lincoln,  of  Brown  University. 

“  It  seems  to  me,  to  carry  on  most  successfully  the  method  pursued  in  the  First 
Book.  Though  brief,  it  is  very  comprehensive,  and  combines  judicious  and  skilfully 
formed  exercises  with  systematic  instruction.” 

From  Rev.  J.  A.  Spencer,  D.  D.,  late  Prof.  Latin  and  Omental  Languages  in 

Burlington  College ,  N.  J. 

“  The  present  volume  appears  to  me  to  carry  out  excellently  the  system  on  which 
tho  late  lamented  Arnold  based  his  educational  works ;  and  in  the  selections  for  Read¬ 
ing,  the  Notes  and  Rules  for  Translating,  the  Exercises  in  Translating  into  Latin,  the 
Analyses,  &c.,  I  think  it  admirably  adapted  to  advance  the  diligent  student,  not  only 
rapidly,  but  soundly,  in  an  acquaintance  with  the  Latin  language.” 

From  J.  J.  Owen,  D.  D.  Prof,  of  the  Latin  and  Greek.  Languages  and  Literature 

in  the  Free  Academy ,  New  York. 

“This  Second  Latin  Book  gives  abundant  evidence  of  the  Author's  learning  and 
tact  to  arrange,  simplify,  and  make  accessible  to  the  youthful  mind  tho  great  and  fun¬ 
damental  principles  of  the  Latin  language.  The  book  is  worthy  of  a  dace  in  every 
alassical  school,  and  I  trust  will  have  an  extensive  sale.” 

2# 


D.  APPLETON  $  CO .,  PUBLISHERS. 


DR.  ARNOLD’S  CLASSICAL  SERIES. 

FIRST  AND  SECOND  LATIN  BOOK  AND  PRACTICAL 
GRAMA R .  Revised  and  carefully  corrected  by  J.  A.  Spencer,  D.D 
1  vol.  12mo.  Price  75  Cents. 

PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  PROSE  COMPO 
SITION.  Revised  and  carefully  corrected  by  J.  A.  Spencer,  D.  D, 
1  vol.  12mo.  Price  $1  00. 

CORNELIUS  NEPOS ,  with  Practical  Questions  and  Answers,  and 
an  Imitative  Exercise  on  eaoh  Chapter.  Carefully  Revised,  with 
Notes  byE.  A.  Johnson,  Prof,  of  Latin  in  Univ.  of  New  York.  New 
Edition,  enlarged,  with  a  Lexicon,  Historical  and  Geographical  Index, 
<fec.  1  vol.  12mo.  Price  $1  00. 

FIRST  GREEK  BOOK ,  on  the  Plan  of  the  First  Latin  Book.  Re¬ 
vised  by  J.  A.  Spencer,  D.  D.  1  vol.  12mo.  Price  75  cents. 
PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION  TO  GREEK  PROSE  COMPO¬ 
SITION.  Revised  by  J.  A.  Spencer,  D.  D.  1  vol.  12mo.  Price 
75  Cents. 

SECOND  PART  TO  THE  ABOVE.  By  J.  A  Spencer,  D.D. 
12mo.  Price  75  Cents. 

GREEK  READING  BOOK.  New  Edition,  Revised  and  Corrected. 
Containing  the  substance  of  the  Practical  Introduction  to  Greek 
Construing  and  a  Treatise  on  the  Greek  Particles ;  and  copious 
selections  from  Greek  authors,  with  Critical  and  Explanatory  Eng¬ 
lish  Notes  and  a  Lexicon.  Revised  by  J.  A.  Spencer,  D.  D.  1  vol. 
618  pages.  12mo.  Price  $1  25. 

In  the  preparation  of  the  above  series,  by  thorough  classical  scho¬ 
lars  and  practical  teachers,  the  utmost  care  has  been  devoted  to  a  com¬ 
plete  revision  of  Dr.  Arnold’s  works ;  they  have  been  rearranged  and 
improved  in  many  important  respects,  and  made  feo  conform,  in  an 
eminent  degree,  to  the  Ollendorff  plan  of  acquiring  languages. 

From  N.  W.  Benedict,  A.  M.,  Prin.  Grammar  School,  Rochester  University. 

“  I  am  specially  pleased  with  the  kind  of  help  afforded  in  his  Cornelius  Nepos,  which 
is  such  as  to  give  the  student  a  critical  and  accurate  understanding  o t  the  text,  and  ni 
the  same  time  to  stimulate  his  mind  to  greater  exertion  to  apprehend  the  beauties  of  the 
language.  The  plan  is  designed  and  well  adapted  to  make  the  knowledge  obtained  the 
■property  of  the  scholar.” 

From  R.  B.  Tscuudi,  Prof,  of  Ancient  Languages ,  Norfolk,  Va. 

“  After  having  in  constant  use  since  their  first  appearance,  Arnold’s  Series  of  both 
Latin  and  Greek  books,  my  experience  enables  me  confidently  to  pronounce  upon  theii 
unrivalled  merits.  I  state  without  fear  of  contradiction,  that,  even  with  greater  labor 
nd  pains  on  the  part  of  the  teacher,  equal  progress  cannot  be  made  without,  as  can  be 
with  them.  And  thev  cncceed  admirably  in  awakening  an  interest  in  the  pupil,  and  in 
making  a  lasting  impreesii  n  upon  his  memory.  It  is  an  application  of  Baoon’s  principle 
far  forming  an  aecurst/  tran.” 


80 


D.  APPLETON  f  CO.,  PUBLISHERS. 


CICERO  DE  OFFICIIS. 

CHIEFLY  SELECTED  AND  TRANSLATED  FROM  ZUMPT  AND 
.  BONN  ELL,  ENGLISH  NOTES 

BY  THOMAS  A.  THACHEE,  op  Yale  College. 

1  Yol.  12mo.  194  pages.  Price  90  Cents. 

In  this  edition,  a  few  historical  notes  have  been  introduced  in  cases 
where  the  Dictionaries  m  common  use  have  not  been  found  to  contain 
the  desired  information ;  the  design  of  which  being  to  aid  the  learner 
in  understanding  the  contents  of  the  treatises,  the  thoughts  and  con¬ 
nections  of  thought  of  the  author,  and  to  explain  the  grammatical  dif¬ 
ficulties,  and  inculcate  a  knowledge  of  grammatical  principles.  The 
Editor  has  aimed  throughout  to  guide  rather  than  to  carry  the  learner 
through  difficulties ;  requiring  of  him  more  study,  in  consequence  of 
his  help,  than  he  would  have  devoted  to  the  book  without  it. 

“The  text  is  beautifully  and  correctly  printed.  The  notes  are  neat,  well  arranged, 
and  appropriate.” — Presbyterian. 

“A  very  elegant  edition  of  this  well-known  work.” — The  Wisconsin. 


SELECT  ORATIONS  OF  M.  TULLIUS  CICERO. 

WITH  NOTES,  FOR  THE  USE  OF  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES. 

BY  E.  A.  JOHNSON, 

Professor  of  Latin  in  the  University  of  New  York. 

1  Yol.  12mo.  Price  $1. 

This  edition  of  Cicero’s  Select  Orations  possesses  some  special  advan 
tages  for  the  student  which  are  both  new  and  important.  It  is  the 
only  edition  which  contains  the  improved  text  that  has  been  prepared 
by  a  recent  careful  collation  and  correct  deciphering  of  the  best  manu¬ 
scripts  of  Cicero’s  writings.  It  is  the  work  of  the  celebrated  Orelli, 
together  with  that  of  Madvig  and  Klotz,  and  has  been  done  since  the 
appearance  of  Orelli’s  complete  edition.  The  Notes,  by  Prof.  Johnson, 
of  the  New  York  University,  have  been  chiefly  selected,  with  great  care, 
from  the  best  German  authors,  as  well  as  the  English  edition  of  Arnold. 

From  Thomas  Cease,  Tutor  in  Latin  in  Harvard  University. 

“An  edition  of  Cicero  like  Johnson’s  has  long  been  wanted;  and  the  excellence  o 1 
the  text,  the  illustrations  of  words,  particles,  and  pronouns,  and  the  explanation  of  vari¬ 
ous  points  of  construction  and  interpretation,  bear  witness  to  the  Editor's  familiarity 
with  some  of  the  most  important  results  of  modern  scholarship,  and  entitle  his  work  t« 
Arge  share  of  public  favor.” 


81 


f  t 


boston  college 


3  9031  033  746 


BOSTON  COLLEGE  LIBRARY 
UNIVERSITY  HEIGHTS 
CHESTNUT  HILL,  MASS. 

Books  may  be  kept  for  two  weeks  and  may  be 
renewed  for  the  same  period,  unless  reserved. 

Two  cents  a  day  is  charged  for  each  book  kept 
overtime. 

If  you  cannot  find  what  you  want,  ask  the 
Librarian  who  will  be  glad  to  help  you. 

The  borrower  is  responsible  for  books  drawn 
on  his  card  and  for  all  fines  accruing  on  the  same. 


